JP2022125462A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase merchantability of a game machine having plural states.SOLUTION: Specific frequency command transmission processing is used to transmit a first specific frequency designation command regarding a remaining frequency until an execution frequency of variable display becomes a specific frequency corresponding to a time-shortening condition when power is turned on. First to third sets of the first specific frequency designation command are in a two-bite configuration each, and the command is transmitted as a performance control command of a total of six bytes since there are a total of three sets. Special pattern normal processing and special pattern buffer shift processing includes processing for transmitting a second specific frequency designation command regarding the remaining frequency up to a specific frequency in accordance with execution of a variable display. A second specific frequency designation command is in a two-byte configuration, and specific frequency command data are set to 7F[H] when a counted value of a specific frequency counter is equal to or more than 7F[H].SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 294-8

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, a game machine has been proposed in which, when the number of executions of a special game reaches a predetermined number in a normal game state, the game machine is controlled to a variable probability state to increase the probability of a big hit (for example, Patent Document 1. ).

JP-A-2005-95449

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in controlling the gaming machine having multiple states.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above actual situation, and an object of the present invention is to enhance marketability of a game machine having a plurality of states.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game;
and a production control means capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
a state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the normal state;
variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display to be stop-displayable during the stop time after the variable display time has elapsed;
updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display;
counting means capable of setting counting information corresponding to the termination of the advantageous state;
The effect control means controls so as to be able to execute a variable display effect in the effect mode corresponding to the count information,
The count information is initialized to an initial set value,
The state control means is
being controllable to the special state based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times;
controllable to the special state based on termination of the advantageous state;
The variable display control means is
When the count information is different from the initial set value, a numerical determination is made as to whether or not the numerical information is the specific value, and when it is determined that the numerical information is not the specific value, the stop time is Set normal stop time,
setting a specific stop time as a stop time when the count information is different from the initial setting value and determined to be the specific value by the numerical value determination;
setting the normal stop time as a stop time without performing the numerical determination when the count information is an initial set value;
The effect control means includes notification effect control means for controlling to be able to execute a notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled during the specific stop time.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine having a plurality of states.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a frame lamp. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the special figure LED board, the fourth symbol unit, and the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the various board|substrates etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating hit classification. It is a figure for demonstrating each random number. It is a figure for demonstrating a big-hit determination table and a big-hit kind determination table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a production|presentation control command. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side; It is a diagram for explaining a post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. It is a diagram for explaining a post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating a previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery of the production|presentation pattern in a sub side. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows start winning a prize judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit opening post-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a series of production|presentation. It is a figure for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part; It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a role object action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a losing epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol or even-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation), and a fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbol derivation|leading-out after button operation), and a fanfare part. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver; It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. It is a figure for demonstrating the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a rendering mode in the start part; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a character action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach A). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanning part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a hit epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a relief winning part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design or even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (odd-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanfare part. It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a re-lottery part (even-numbered design derivation|leading-out after button operation). It is a figure for demonstrating the production|presentation aspect in a fanfare part. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13); FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining volume levels; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining volume levels; FIG. FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r24) to (r27); It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portion. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r32) to (r35); It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (r54) to (s4). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motion in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines; FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23); It is a detailed explanatory view of (A24) to (A46) portions. (b4) to (b6) are detailed explanatory diagrams and comparison diagrams during the jackpot round. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transmittance of subtitles for dialogue and the output of sound; FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (o3) to (o5). FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles; FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11); It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of pattern output. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern fixing period. FIG. 4 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout; FIG. 10 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a game effect lamp at the time of losing and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of losing; (r48) It is detailed explanatory drawing of a part. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for the start part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the start part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used for a fanning part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a failed epilogue part of SP first half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a role product action part in the latter half of SP development; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach A in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a swing part of reach B in the second half of SP; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a swing part of reach B in the second half of SP; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of the SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a swing part of SP final reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in an epilogue part for a SP final reach; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a losing epilogue part of SP final reach; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a relief part; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-lottery part (before operation promotion); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in a re-lottery part (patterns maintained after operation promotion); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for fanfare; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps and a grandchild table for board left lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the red blinking brightness data table of the accessory action; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in brightness data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for left-board lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the tilt luminance data table without operation prompting; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table; FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the shutter brightness data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the missing luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect brightness data table; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-lottery effect luminance data table; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table; It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the comparison of the ramp control in the time of a hit, and the time of a loss. It is a figure for demonstrating the swaying aspect of a design. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of re-lottery production|presentation. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. It is a figure which illustrates a production|presentation control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing various determination tables; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type, and (B) is a diagram showing a losing type with time saving. (A) is explanatory drawing of each time saving state, (B) is explanatory drawing when the start conditions of a 2nd time saving state are satisfied during the operation|movement of a 1st time saving state. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for production|presentation control. It is a figure which shows game control main processing. It is a figure which shows special design process processing. It is a figure which shows start winning a prize determination processing. It is a figure which shows random-value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows special design normal processing. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected by the variable display of a 1st special design. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected by the variable display of a 2nd special design. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected by the variable display of a 2nd special design. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected by the variable display of a 2nd special design. It is a diagram showing the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A. It is a diagram showing the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B. It is a diagram showing the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C. It is a figure which shows special design stop processing. It is a figure which shows special design stop processing. It is a figure which shows the design fixed period in a normal state. It is a figure which shows the design fixed period in time saving state A. FIG. It is a figure which shows the design fixed period in time saving state B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the design fixed period in time saving state C. FIG. It is a figure which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a figure which shows small hit end processing. It is a figure which shows jackpot end processing. It is a figure which shows production|presentation control process processing. It is a figure which shows a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the production|presentation regarding a time saving state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of rush production, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the remaining time reduction display, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the time reduction end countdown, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the result production. . It is a timing chart showing the update timing of the time saving end countdown until the end of the time saving state and the display of the remaining number of times. It is a figure which shows the notice production execution determination ratio during the variable display during the variable display of the 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the notice production execution determination ratio during the variable display during the variable display of the 2nd special figure. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation pattern of the notice production|presentation during a variable display. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the notice production|presentation during a variable display. It is a figure which shows the average variable display time in each time saving state. It is a figure which shows the notice production during the variable display which can be performed in each time saving state. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected in a modification. (A) is a diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot type determination table in the modification, and (B) to (D) are diagrams showing variation patterns that can be selected in the modification. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image displayed on an image display device; It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with short working hours. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with short working hours. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with short working hours. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with short working hours. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with short working hours. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with short working hours. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with short working hours. It is a timing chart in the case of making it possible to execute the time saving acquisition chance production in the first special figure and the second special figure. It is a figure which shows the propriety of execution of the notice production|presentation during variable display when the variable display result is loss with time saving. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not a pending display notice effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on the image display device when a pending display forewarning effect can be executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on the image display device when a pending display forewarning effect can be executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on the image display device when a pending display forewarning effect can be executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on the image display device when a pending display forewarning effect can be executed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on the image display device when a pending display forewarning effect can be executed; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of image data to be drawn; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of image data to be drawn; It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the notice production during a variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the notice production during a variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the notice production during a variable display. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the execution timing of the notice effect during variable display and executable hitting effect patterns; It is explanatory drawing in the case of performing promotion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of promotion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image displayed on an image display apparatus, when performing promotion production|presentation. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the arrangement of frame lamps provided on the opening/closing door frame. (A) is a diagram showing various lamps provided on the game board, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the various lamps and a brightness data table. (A) is BGM and various LED emission colors, (B) is rainbow effect, movable body effect, (C) is rainbow effect, (D) is rainbow display mode, (E) is to explain the stop symbol action display. is a diagram. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining right-handed promotion effects A, V, and F. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation form from a big-hit variation to rush production|presentation A via a big-hit. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of winning fluctuation|variation and a ceiling reach|attainment fluctuation|variation in loss B with time saving. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of rush production|presentation B. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation mode when time saving loss B is elected in time saving state A1. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an example of a stop symbol action display. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to an LED driver; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table; (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in a fanfare production part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare production part. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a fanfare production part. (A) is a parent table in the luminance data table used for the rush effect A part, and (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table. (A) to (I) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used for the rush effect A part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in a rush effect B (scene 1) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a rush effect B (scene 2) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a rush effect B (scene 3) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the rush effect B (scene 3) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in a rush effect B (scene 4) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in a rush effect B (scene 5) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the rush effect B (scene 5) part. (A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining a comparison of ramp control between the fanfare effect, the rush effect A, and the rush effect B. FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining similar colors. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a right-handed promotion effect A part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the right-handed promotion effect A part. FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table, (B) a child table, and (C) a grandchild table in a luminance data table used in a right-handed promotion effect V part; FIG. 8A is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table, (B) a child table, and (C) a grandchild table in a brightness data table used in a right-handed promotion effect F part; (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the display mode of the image display device and the lighting mode of the lamp in right-handed promotion effects A, V, and F. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing grandchild tables LLA1, ELA1, and ERA1 used in a right-handed promotion effect A part; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display modes of the grandchild tables ATA1, ATV1, and ATF1 and the image display device and the lighting modes of the lamps used in the right-handed promotion performances A, V, and F; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which show the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart etc. which show special design process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a determination of a special figure display result. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which show production|presentation control process processing. It is a figure which shows the address map of the memory area in the microcomputer for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation control command. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of RWM initial setting processing; 6 is a flowchart showing an example of command set processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command transmission table; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command extension data address table; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of data set processing; 10 is a flowchart showing an example of specific number of times command transmission processing; It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st specific frequency|count specification command. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special design determination processing. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of special design buffer shift processing. It is a figure which shows the design designated value determination example. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the frequency|count of opening a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern determination. It is a figure which shows the example of a variation pattern determination. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design variation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop time setting processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example at the time of a design stop. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of counter subtraction processing; It is a figure which shows the example of data setting at the time of arrival. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving subtraction processing. It is a figure which shows clear object at the time of the time saving end. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation setting after the completion|finish of a hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production|presentation setting table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a figure which shows the data setting example before a small hit start, and setting clear object after a loss stop. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a jackpot start setting process. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a small-hit completion|finish process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a state setting at the time of a jackpot completion. It is a figure which shows the setting content corresponding to a jackpot end time state setting classification. It is a figure which shows the example of data setting at the time of a jackpot completion. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production side counter update processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of number-of-times suggestion control processing; It is a figure which shows the frequency|count display control example. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation execution.

<Pachinko machine configuration, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 shows the arrangement layout of main members in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of the game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. there is A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

Incidentally, as the special symbols variably displayed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, two types of special symbols are provided. For example, one special symbol is also called "first special symbol" or "first special symbol", and the other special symbol is also called "second special symbol" or "second special symbol". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game".

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decoration symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically scrolling display or updated display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Also, on the game board 2 at the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan, who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1, is drawn. Jam-chan is a character that appears in content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (electric chew) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, thereby opening the second starting prize opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize opening is open). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6). hereinafter referred to as a general prize winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A consists of a game board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A large winning entrance door is provided in the space between them, and this large winning entrance door slides horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close the normal big winning mouth with game balls. open a path to Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game balls enter the normal large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides toward the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the normal large winning opening. .

A game ball entering the normal big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through a region provided inside the normal big winning hole. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), the game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When the game balls enter the normal big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example. Also, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round ends and the normal big winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B includes a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6). (referred to as a winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a. By horizontally sliding and opening the space between , the path for the game ball to the V big winning opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in an off state, the large winning opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. (Pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door is slid to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V large winning opening. .

A game ball that has entered the V big winning opening is detected by the V winning switch 24 (see FIG. 6) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 24, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state. That is, in the present embodiment, V winning occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V big winning opening during the round of the jackpot game state, and the game state is controlled to the probability variable state. . In addition, the normal big prize mouth and the V big prize mouth are also collectively referred to as the big prize mouth. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

In the pachinko game machine 1, variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects are provided at left and right upper positions of the frame 3 for a game machine.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is composed of a character string "POWERFULII". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or may be a name representing content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the title of an animation, the name of a singer, etc.). Also, the characters attached to the movable body 32 may indicate the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, "Mume" indicating the main character, Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name (Powerful II) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is indicated on the movable body 32 .

In the present embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position covering (overlapping) the front surface of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the movable body 32 covers the front surface of the image display device 5 by causing the characters "POWERFULII" to fall diagonally (falling so that "P" is downward and "II" is upward) ( overlap) position. In addition, the movable body 32 is also called an accessory.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is a stick controller 31A as an operating rod that can be gripped by the player and tilted (operated in the front, back, left, and right directions, and pulled toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) for detecting a tilting operation on the operation rod is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A also incorporates a vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also called a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special figure LED board 20 at the lower left of the game board 2.例文帳に追加The special figure LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the LED. In the special symbol LED board 20, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game are determined by a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs. Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), which will be described later, in the special figure LED board 20, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display unit 21, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 represents the type of the second special figure. In the present embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept including lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of various lamps such as frame lamps to be described later.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a fourth symbol unit 50 at the lower left of the image display device 5 . The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the variation of the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED. In the fourth symbol unit 50, depending on the combination of lighting modes such as lighting/blinking/extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs, the type of special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the special symbol in the second special symbol game Represents the type of (second special figure). For example, as shown in FIG. 4B to be described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, a combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 53, The type of the first special figure is represented, and the combination of lighting modes such as lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 represents the type of the second special figure.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also called game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 . Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided near the accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, the board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and the special variable winning ball device 7B. The attacker lamp 9E, the V-attacker lamp 9F provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the V big winning opening are open to allow V winning to occur. A V lamp 9G that informs that a A button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3 are provided. The V lamp may notify that a big hit has occurred.

The role lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as role lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the member with the character "POWERFUL II" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, the character lamp 9A1 is behind the parts "P" and "O", and the character lamp 9A2 is The character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "W" and "E" parts, the character lamps 9A3 are arranged behind the "R" and "F" parts, and the character lamp 9A4 are arranged behind the "U" and "L" parts. there is As a result, the character lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are lit (lighted) on the back side of the member to which the letters "POWERFUL II" are attached, so that "POWERFUL II" is lighted (lighted).

The board left lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5. On the left side of the game board 2, a main character (for example, "Muyume" indicating the main character, Mumu) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn, and the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 indicate the main character. are arranged on the back side of the portion of the game board 2 on which is drawn. As a result, the board left lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (light up) behind the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn, so that the part of the game board 2 on which the hero is drawn lights up (lights up). ing.

The attacker lamp 9E is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, the attacker lamp 9E lights up (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, so that the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B lights up (lights up). Also, the V-attacker lamp 9F is arranged on the back side of the game board 2 in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, the V-attacker lamp 9F lights (lights up) on the back side of the game board 2, thereby lighting (lighting up) the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is arranged on the back side of the part of the game board 2 marked with "V". As a result, the V lamp 9G lights up (lights up) behind the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V", so that the part of the game board 2 drawn with "V" lights up (lights up). It's becoming The electric tube lamp 9H is arranged in the vicinity of the variable winning ball device 6B, and by lighting (lighting), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7B is lit (lighted).

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (lighted), the stick controller 31A is lit (lighted). The push button lamp 9K is provided in the push button 31B, and lights up (lights up) the push button 31B.

The frame left lamp 9L is composed of a plurality of lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights up (lights up), the lamp for the gaming machine The left side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame right lamp 9R is composed of a plurality of lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3, and when each lamp lights (lights), the lamp for the game machine The right side of the frame 3 is lit (lighted). The frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as frame lamps. In addition, role lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric tube lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, push button lamp 9K, frame left lamp 9L, and frame right lamp 9R are also collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at predetermined positions on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main substrate 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. As shown in FIG. The display monitor 29 may be constructed using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls that enter the large winning opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls won in the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, extending counterclockwise from above to below the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame left lamp 9L causes the vicinity of the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (12 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of eleven lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, extending clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. As shown in FIG. The frame right lamp 9R causes the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light by lighting or blinking a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example).

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special figure LED board 20 and the fourth symbol unit 50. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the special figure LED board 20 includes a special figure 1 variable display portion 21 showing the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display portion showing the variable display of the second special figure. 22, a special figure 1 storage display unit 23 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display unit 24 indicating the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special figure game , a normal pattern storage display unit 25 showing the number of normal pattern pending storage, a normal pattern display unit 26 showing variable display of normal patterns, a right hitting display unit 30 prompting the player to hit right, and presence or absence of a probability variable state , a time saving display portion 29 indicating whether or not there is a time saving state, and a round display portion 27 indicating the number of rounds of a big hit. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, the result, the current game state, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking by lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 21 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 22 indicates whether or not the second special figure is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop figure of the second special figure determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 20 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 30 . In this embodiment, when the player is urged to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display unit 30 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not urged to hit to the right, That is, when prompting the player to hit left, lighting means such as an LED in the right hitting display section 30 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting designation command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 30, and after the design is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. , a right-handed display extinguishing designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 30 is extinguished. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-handed display section 30 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 and turns off the right hitting display section 30 .

Here, hitting to the right means that the game ball is shot toward the second flow path out of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. is to operate the hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left area of the game area, and ahead of it is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This path does not have the second start winning opening formed in 6B. The second flow path is, for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area, and beyond that is a second start winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V grand prize opening) exist. When the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows through the first flow-down path toward the first start winning opening. When the player shoots the game ball toward the second flow-down path, the game ball passes through the second flow-down path and enters the second start winning opening or the big winning opening (normal big winning opening, V big winning opening). flow into.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of the jackpot, and the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state and variable probability state), the player hits to the right, and is provided on the right side of the game area. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the big winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display section 30 prompts the player to hit right. The player hits to the right while the display urging him to hit to the right is being displayed, causing the game balls to enter the second start winning opening and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls to be paid out. The right of the second special game can be obtained, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out by entering the game balls into the normal big winning opening. Furthermore, as will be described later in detail, the V big winning opening is opened during the round of the probability variable jackpot. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and be controlled to the variable probability state. Therefore, by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is being displayed, the player can benefit overall. In addition, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to shoot the game ball toward the first flow-down path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special figure 1 storage display unit 51 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a second special figure corresponding to the second special figure game. 2 Special figure 2 storage display unit 52 indicating the number of pending memories, Special figure 1 variable display unit 53 indicating the situation or display result of the variable display of the first special figure, The situation or display result of the variable display of the second special figure A special figure 2 variable display unit 54 showing and a right hitting display unit 55 prompting the player to hit right. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence/absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of reservations, and the instruction to hit to the right by lighting/flashing/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 indicates whether or not the second special symbol is being variably displayed in the second special figure game, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display is indicated by an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/extinguishing by the lighting means.

Below, the variation display (variable display) of the first special symbol to represent the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 1 variable display portion 53 Also called In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 22 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 54 is also referred to as the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol. called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when prompting the player to hit to the right, lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (lights up) to indicate that the player should hit to the right. is not urged to the player, that is, when the player is urged to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 55 is extinguished. After the design is determined, the effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 55 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103, and the design is changed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination, the right-handed display unit 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103 . Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 may light the right-handed display section 55 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right hitting display section 55 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103 .

FIG. 4(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a before-variation pattern command and a later-variation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the effect control commands, the fourth symbol unit 50 and the game effect lamp , lighting/blinking/extinguishing. Before the fluctuation pattern command and after the fluctuation pattern command, from the CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100 to be described later, is a command output to the production control CPU120 of the production control board 12, before the fluctuation pattern command and after the fluctuation pattern It is output to CPU120 for production|presentation control from CPU103 by one set by a command. Hereinafter, the pre-variation pattern command and the post-variation pattern command are collectively referred to as a variation pattern command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LED (special figure 1 variable display 53 and special figure 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50 when a variation pattern command is received from the CPU 103 . For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, based on the received variation pattern command, the lighting mode of the special figure 1 variable display 53 is changed to the first special symbol. Switching from extinguishing indicating stop to blinking indicating variation of the first special symbol. In addition, when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, based on the received variation pattern command, the lighting mode of the special figure 2 variable display 54 is changed to the second special symbol. Switching from the light-off indicating the stop to the blinking indicating the variation of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command from the CPU 103, the lighting mode before receiving the variation pattern command is changed without changing the lighting mode of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp. maintain.

Also, the effect control CPU 120 changes the lighting mode of the LEDs (the special figure 1 variable display 53 and the special figure 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50 when the design confirmation command is received from the CPU 103. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a symbol confirmation command designating to end the variation of the symbol in the first special figure game, the special figure 1 variable display 53 is lit based on the received symbol confirmation command. The aspect is switched from blinking indicating the variation of the first special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the first special symbol. In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a symbol confirmation command designating the end of the variation of the symbol in the second special figure game, the special figure 2 variable display 54 is lit based on the received symbol confirmation command. The aspect is switched from blinking indicating the variation of the second special symbol to extinguishing indicating the stop of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the design confirmation command is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 does not change the lighting condition of the LED (frame lamp, etc.) in the game effect lamp, and changes the lighting condition before receiving the design confirmation command. maintain.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the fourth symbol unit 50, the mode of the lamp (LED) changes in response to receiving the variation pattern command or the symbol confirmation command. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the state of the lamp before and after receiving the command regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the symbol determination command is received. Incidentally, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the mode of the game effect lamp 9 according to the reception of the variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time saving state after the big hit, the pachinko game machine 1 changes from the lighting mode of the normal state to the time saving state in response to receiving the variation pattern command for starting the time saving state. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to the lighting mode of .

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as variable display of decoration patterns and ready-to-win effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, decoration patterns (designs showing numbers etc.) as decoration identification information of a plurality of types different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) is displayed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first reserved memory display area 5D in which the number of reserved memories can be displayed by the number of circular reserved indications, and the number of second reserved memories is displayed by the number of reserved circular indications. A displayable second pending memory display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J is displayed to indicate that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Numbers indicating the number of first reserved memories and the number of second reserved memories are displayed below the fourth symbol 5J. As for the numbers indicating the number of reservations, the left side indicates the first reserved number of memories, and the right side indicates the second number of reserved memories. A small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the bottom of the display showing the number of reservations. The small patterns are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R. Patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction. The small pattern 5M is also a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is smaller in size than the decorative pattern at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5. are placed. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5A, the shape of the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or substantially rectangular, and the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. It is Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edge) is invisible or difficult to see due to the game board 2. It has become.

<Board configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various substrates and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (for example, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 , an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 has, for example, an input port for receiving various signals (detection signals to be described later) and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20 and the like, solenoid drive signals). and

The switch circuit 110 receives a detection signal ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 .

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, or the solenoid 83.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 30 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the type of jackpot), variation patterns used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9. Luminance data (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) for the operation is supplied to the LED driver. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

Each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies a current to the LED are mounted, although the details will be described later. The LED driver turns on/flashes/extinguishes the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current for each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the luminance data from the performance control CPU 120 . In this manner, the effect control CPU 120 controls lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, luminance data signal). and an output port for

A board other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12 and the sound control board 13, is also called a sub board. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (flashed) under the control of the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

<Overview of Game Progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the configuration described above, the game progresses as follows. A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the special figure 1 variable display section 21 of the special figure LED board 20 is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, the combination of the lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the kind of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is also referred to as a "specific display result". In addition, the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20 corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the big hit pattern. When a combination of lighting modes is obtained, it becomes "losing". In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display portion 21 and the special figure 2 variable display portion 22 of the special figure LED board 20, it corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) different from the big hit pattern This lighting mode is also referred to as a "failure display result".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. In addition, you may be made to be controlled by a small hit game state as an advantageous state. Here, a small win is a win in which the number of openings of the big winning opening is smaller than that of a big win. In addition, when the small hit game state ends, the game state does not change. That is, before and after the small winning game state, there is no transition from the variable probability state to the normal state or from the normal state to the variable probability state. In addition, as with the big hit types, the "small hit" may also be provided with a small hit type.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is either the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earliest timing. This predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, the kind of big win is set in the "big win". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning mouth and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game is improved compared to the normal state. Therefore, control (high open control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time-saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the termination conditions, such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big win game state, is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as the number of times cut (number of times cut short time, number of times cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a probability variable state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, as in the case where the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability-high base state, a high-probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and a normal state is also called a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, It may be performed by turning off the light, by moving the movable body 32, or by using any rendering device including some or all of these.

As effects executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which is higher in reliability of big win than normal reach. In addition, super reach includes the first half of super reach that ends in the first half of super reach, the second half of super reach that develops from the first half of super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of super reach. In the present embodiment, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. Also, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach than the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Also, the reliability of the big win is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. In the following, "super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is referred to as "first half of SP (first half of SP reach)", "second half of super reach" is referred to as "second half of SP (second half of SP reach)", " Final Reach” is also referred to as “SP Final (SP Final Reach)”.

When the display result of the special game is the combination of the lighting modes corresponding to the "big hit" (specific display result described above), on the screen of the image display device 5, the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern is determined in advance. Determined decoration patterns that will be a big hit combination are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decoration patterns is "big hit"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7") are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. .

In the case of the ``variable probability big win'' controlled to the variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit". As the promotion effect, for example, after temporarily stopping the non-probability variation pattern (normal pattern) as a result of the big hit display, a re-lottery effect may be executed for inciting whether or not to promote to the probability variation pattern. In addition, a round promotion performance may be executed in which the non-probability variable big win is promoted to the probability variable big win during the big win game state.

When the display result of the special figure game is a combination of the lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display of the decorative pattern is not the ready-to-win mode, but the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result of the display, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination (also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect that foretells the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

<Various tables related to big hits>
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG.

[Hit type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the hit types. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type (type) of hit in the big win, the probability of big win after the end of the big win game state, the base after the end of the big win game state, and the number of times of opening in the big win ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, as types of jackpots, normal jackpots 1 and 2 and variable probability jackpots 1 to 9 are provided. In addition, below, the mark of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1Rth, and the second round is also referred to as the 2Rth.

The normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 1, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is performed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

The normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low-probability state and a high-base state after three rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the normal jackpot 2, such a low-probability-high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after three rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The variable probability big win 6 is a big win controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after five rounds of the big win game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after seven rounds of jackpot game states are completed. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability variable jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after 10 rounds of the jackpot game state are completed. In the probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability/high base state continues until the variable display (special figure variation) is executed over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Each random number]
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in FIG. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random 1 is a hit determination random counter that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random 1 is, for example, updated by adding 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 65536, and then updated again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type (type).

Random 3 and random 4 are random counters (for later variation pattern determination) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a later variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the later variation among the variation patterns. The post-fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the second half of the fluctuations in the special design. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-variation pattern corresponding to the time of failure. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to a hit.

Random 5 is a random counter (previous variation pattern determination) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special symbol fluctuation. Random 5 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented from 1 again. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal design hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal design. Random 6 is, for example, incremented by 1 from 1 to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented from 1 again.

In this embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) whether or not the game is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, which one of the plurality of types of jackpots is selected is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern may be determined based on the random 2 value.

Also, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the post-variation pattern determination random number (random 3, 4), and the post-variation pattern determination random number (random 5) is used to determine the post-variation pattern. be done. Thus, in this embodiment, a variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a big-hit determination table and a big-hit type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101. FIG.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which jackpot determination values to be compared with random 1 are set. The big hit determination table includes a normal (non-variable probability) big win determination table used in a normal state (game state not variable probability state, that is, non-variable probability state) and a variable probability big win determination table used in the variable probability state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. A big hit judgment value is set for the number of judgment values described in . The jackpot judgment value set in the probability variable jackpot judgment table is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table. A larger number of jackpot determination values than the jackpot determination table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1). If it coincides with the big hit determination value, it is determined to make a big win (normal big win or probability variable big win) with respect to the special symbol. In addition, FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (percentage) of winning or the probability (percentage) of losing.

FIGS. 9B and 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9(b) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot. FIG. 9(c) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9(b), the numerical values to be compared with the random value 2 for jackpot type determination correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4, respectively. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2, variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 value is assigned.

In the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 9 (c), the determination value is set by the number of determination values corresponding to each of the probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which is the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 2. It is For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned 100 random 2 values. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned, variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 out of 100 random 2 values random 2 values are assigned, and the probability variable jackpot 9 is assigned 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines a type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 2 matches as the jackpot type, and also determines the value of random 2 as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Production control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the control board on the main side, transmits various production control commands to the production control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, the 1st byte indicates MODE (class of command), and the 2nd byte indicates EXT (type of command). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in this specification.

The command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

The command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern that designates a variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. command (XX corresponds to the post-variation pattern number). The post-variation on the sub-side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decoration design that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command corresponding to each of the post-variation patterns specified by the number.

A front variation pattern command and a rear variation pattern command are transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 as one set of two commands. The effect control CPU 120 cannot specify the variation pattern only by receiving only one of the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command, and receives both the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command. By doing so, the variation pattern can be specified.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. When the command 8101 (H) or the command 8102 (H) is received, the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 8C01(H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that it is determined to be a failure. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 1 is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that the normal jackpot 2 is determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (variable probability big hit 1 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 1 is determined. The command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (variable probability big hit 2 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 2 is determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (variable probability big hit 3 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 3 is determined. The command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (variable probability big hit 4 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 4 is determined. The command 8C08 (H) is a display result 8 designation command (variable probability big hit 5 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 5 is determined. Command 8C09 (H) is a display result 9 designation command (variable probability big hit 6 designation command) indicating that variable probability big hit 6 is determined. The command 8C10 (H) is a display result 10 designation command (variable probability big hit 7 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 7 is determined. The command 8C11 (H) is a display result 11 designation command (variable probability big hit 8 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 8 is determined. The command 8C12 (H) is a display result 12 designation command (variable probability big hit 9 designation command) indicating that the variable probability big hit 9 is determined. Loss designation commands, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation commands, and probability variable jackpot 1-9 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8C system commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special figure. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special figure. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or collectively these commands are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates display of the initial screen at power-on) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies recovery from power failure (specifies display of a power failure recovery screen) that is transmitted when power supply to the game machine is resumed. A command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating a normal state background. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability changing state designation command that designates the background of the probability changing state. Each of the normal state designation command, the time saving state designation command, and the variable probability state designation command, or these are collectively referred to as the 95 series command or the background designation command.

The command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for designating transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The effect control CPU 120 determines that there is no pending at present by receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the video for the demonstration 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a lamp mode for demonstration 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state (higher brightness, more blinking mode, rainbow lighting, etc.). As a result, the attractiveness of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the player. In the demonstration display of waiting for customers, the background in the normal state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, in the demonstration display of waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWERFUL II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or moving image) of part of the effect may be displayed.

The command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the normal jackpot 1. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command for designating the start of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A004 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 4 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A005 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 5 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 3. The command A006 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 6 designation command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A007 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 7 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A008 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 8 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A009 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 9 specification command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 7 . Command A010 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 10 designation command that designates the start of probability variable jackpot 8 . The command A011 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 11 specification command that designates the start of the probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot start 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designation command during the opening of the big winning opening is also referred to as an A1 system command. A2XX(H) is a post-opening designation command for the large winning opening that indicates closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after the opening of the big winning opening is also called an A2 series command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the normal jackpot 1. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the normal jackpot 2 . Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1 . Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2 . Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4 . Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5 . Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6 . Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7 . The command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of the probability variable jackpot 8 . Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9 . Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands, or collectively these commands are also called A3 series commands.

Command AD00 (H) is a variable probability determination device passing designation command that designates that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device passage specification command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24 .

Command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command that designates that there has been a first start prize. Command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command that designates that there has been a second start prize.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved storage number designating command that designates that the first reserved storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved storage number designation command is also called a C1-type command. The command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that designates that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserve storage number designation command is also called a C2-type command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are the contents of the judgment results at the time of winning such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, variation pattern type judgment at the time of start winning to the first start winning mouth or second start winning mouth It is a production control command shown. Among them, the command C4XX(H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit will be made and the judgment result of the kind of big win among the results of determination at the time of winning.

C7XX(H) is a large winning opening designation command indicating passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display extinguishing command indicating extinguishing of the right-handed display. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In the present embodiment, especially the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD system command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big win will occur, the type of the big win, and the range of judgment values of the variation pattern type judging random number at the time of starting winning. Then, a value designating a big hit and a value designating the type of big win are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control is performed to transmit them to the effect control CPU 120 . In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type to the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can recognize the type of the big win, and can recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

<Variation pattern>
Contents of the variation pattern and determination of the variation pattern will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17. FIG.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100, which is the main side, sets a plurality of types of variation patterns. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number, and is composed of a combination of a pre-variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the pre-variation, and a post-variation pattern, which corresponds to the post-variation. It is designed to contain The previous variation pattern corresponds to the previous variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. 10, and the later variation pattern corresponds to the later variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described with reference to FIG. corresponds to

[Previous fluctuation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of pre-variation patterns to which the pre-variation numbers are respectively assigned, the pre-variation number 1 is a pre-variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that designates normal variation (for example, variation of decorative patterns over 13 seconds) is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001 (H)) that designates a shortened variation (for example, a variation of decorative patterns over 7 seconds). The previous variation number 3 is a previous variation pattern command (8002 (H)) that designates a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of the decoration pattern over 3 seconds).

Pre-variation number 4 is a pre-variation pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies normal reach (normal or first half of SP) (reach that ends with normal reach or end with first half of SP reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 5 is a pre-variation pattern command (8004 (H)) that designates normal reach (SP latter half development) (reach that develops into SP latter half reach after becoming a reach mode). Pre-variation number 6 is a pre-variation pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) (reach that develops into final reach after being in a reach mode).

Pre-fluctuation number 7 is a pre-fluctuation pattern command (8006(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (normal or first half of SP) after one pseudo-fluctuation. Pseudo-variation means that the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted from the start of the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. It is a variable display (variable display). An effect that repeats such a pseudo-variation is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo-continuation, the variable display based on one reserved memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo-variable displays. Note that the variable display resumed after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as “re-variable display”. Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (SP latter half development) after one pseudo-variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008 (H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo-variation.

Pre-fluctuation number 10 is a pre-fluctuation pattern command (8009(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (normal or first half of SP) after two pseudo-fluctuations. Pre-variation number 11 is a pre-variation pattern command (800A(H)) that designates execution of normal reach (development of SP latter half) after performing pseudo-variation twice. The previous variation number 12 is a previous variation pattern command (800B(H)) that designates normal reach (final reach development) after performing pseudo variation twice.

Each of the previous variation patterns has a specified variation time, and an animation (moving image) is displayed on the image display device 5 over each variation time. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (referred to as a frame) constituting a moving image. For example, in the case of the patterns of previous variation numbers 7 to 9, the variation time is set to 41500 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1246 frames. In the case of the patterns of the previous variation numbers 10 to 12, the variation time is set to 62000 mse, and the number of frames is approximately 1861 frames.

[Post-fluctuation pattern on the main side]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Of the plurality of types of post-variation patterns to which post-variation numbers are assigned, post-variation number 1 is a post-variation pattern command (8400 (H)) that designates a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that designates a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) specifying a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo-repeating sequence. Pseudo-continuum is an effect that pretends to execute a pseudo-continuum but does not execute the pseudo-continuum after all.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404 (H)) that designates normal reach (losing) (variation of decorative pattern that becomes a loss mode without developing into SP reach although it becomes a reach mode). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that designates the first half of SP (losing) (variation of decorative pattern that develops into SP reach but loses in the first half of SP reach). The post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that designates the second half of the SP (loss) (the variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that designates the final reach (loss) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

The post-variation number 9 is a post-variation pattern command (8408(H)) that designates normal reach (hit) (variation of decoration pattern that becomes a reach state and becomes a hit state). The post-variation number 10 is a post-variation pattern command (8409 (H)) that designates the SP first half (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the first half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 11 is a post-variation pattern command (840A(H)) that designates the second half of the SP (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops in the latter half of the SP reach and becomes a hit mode in the latter half of the SP reach). The post-variation number 12 is a post-variation pattern command (840B(H)) that designates the final reach (hit) (variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach and becomes a winning mode in the final reach).

[Determination of post-fluctuation pattern]
The post-variation pattern is determined using different random counters depending on whether a big win or a loss is determined in the big win determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing. As shown in FIG. 13, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using random 3 described in FIG. Furthermore, when it is determined to be a loss in the big hit determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination values according to the number of pending memories after digestion, and the determined post-variation number is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13 (a), when the number of retained memories after digestion is 0, one of the post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, A different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is about 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 1, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 1, 4, 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 2, one of the post-variation numbers 2, 4, 5 to 8 is determined, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is 3, any post-variation pattern is determined from post-variation numbers 3, 4, 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each of the post-variation patterns. ing. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, a post-variation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion, and a post-variation number is determined using a different number of judgment values according to the number of retained memories after digestion. Therefore, the type of variation pattern changes according to the number of remaining reserved memories, thereby making it possible to add variety to the game and improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the post-variation pattern determination table at the time of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 14, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using the random 4 described in FIG. Furthermore, when a big win is determined in the big win determination, the post-variation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers according to the type of the big win.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when the normal jackpot 1, 2 or the probability variable jackpot 1, 2, 5 to 8 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 posterior variation patterns are determined, and a different decision value number is provided for each of the posterior variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When one of the probability variable jackpots 3 and 9 is determined, one of the post-variation patterns is determined from among the post-variation numbers 9 to 12, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. . The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot 4 is determined, one of the post-variation numbers 9 to 12 is determined, and different judgment values are provided for each of the post-variation patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into the SP reach or the final reach (the selection rate of the post-variation numbers 10 to 12) is about 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-variation pattern is determined using different judgment value numbers according to the type of the big win, the kind of the variation pattern changes according to the kind of the big win, thereby adding variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP reach or the final reach is about 1/102 at the time of losing, whereas the big hit Since the time is about 1/1.1, which is higher than that, the player can expect a big win in the event of SP reach or final reach.

[Determination of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-variation pattern is determined using a different number of random 5 judgment values depending on the type of the pre-determined post-variation pattern. Furthermore, the determined pre-variation number differs depending on the type of post-variation pattern that has been previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 1 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), when either of the post-fluctuation patterns of post-fluctuation numbers 5 and 9 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of pre-fluctuation numbers 4 and 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), when any of the post-variation patterns of post-variation numbers 6 and 10 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 4, 7 and 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 7 is determined, the pre-fluctuation pattern of any of pre-fluctuation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 8 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the post-variation pattern of post-variation number 12 is determined, the pre-variation pattern of pre-variation number 6, 9 or 12 is determined.

[Total fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15, one of the variation patterns of main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 is obtained.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery for an effect pattern on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, among a plurality of types of reach effects, the effect of the SP first half reach A losing pattern described later, or , SP first half reach B loss pattern production is determined. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, the effect of the hit pattern of the SP first half reach A described later, or the SP One of the performances of the hit pattern of the first half reach B is determined.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, the effect of the losing pattern of reach A in the second half of SP, which will be described later, or the SP It is determined to one of the effects of the losing pattern of the second half reach B. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to one of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, the effect of the winning pattern of the SP second half reach A, which will be described later, or the SP Any of the performances of the hit pattern of the second half reach B is determined.

<Action>
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

[Major Operations of Main Board 11]
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and settings for making the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, the ON state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

When the restoration condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the restoration process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the design.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then the setting change process (step S7). The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of the game ball by operating the batted ball operation handle 30, detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped. It is sufficient to perform control so that a display corresponding to is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, the CPU 103 stores (updates) the setting values displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the game hall attendant or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 The setting change process of step S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. . If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is OFF when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, and if the clear switch 92 is ON, the initialization process of step S6 is performed. While it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt. (Step S10). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main-side error process to diagnose an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and makes it possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result if necessary (step S22). After that, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process so that, for example, the big win information (information indicating the number of occurrences of big wins, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the starting Data such as information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the odds have changed) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game". The execution of the general pattern game is performed by driving the general pattern display unit 26, and the number of general pattern reservations is displayed by lighting the general pattern storage display unit 25. FIG.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Special pattern process processing)
FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing. The special symbol process process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S117) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (such as the type of reach production), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 stop the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "losing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot gaming state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to, for example, which type of jackpot is selected. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is detected. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big win, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning a big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is a special variable winning ball device 7 during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the probability of big hit is higher than when the set value is any one of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing the start prize determination process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process in S101 of the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (step S51). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is ON (Y in step S51), the number of first special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S52). CPU103, for example by reading the first reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient to specify the number of first special figure reservation storage. When the number of the first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S52 (N in step S52), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1". (Step S53).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S54). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is ON (Y in step S54), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S55). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation storage. When the number of second special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S55 (N in step S55), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2". (Step S56).

After executing either of the processes of step S53 and step S56, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, while when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step S58). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 selects the random number random number 1 for judging a big hit or the The numerical data representing the random number random number 2 and the random number random number numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step S59). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers random 1 to random 4 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while the start buffer value is "2". At some point, numerical data indicating random number random 1 to random 4 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number random number 1 for judging the big hit and the random number random number 2 for judging the kind of big hit determine whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern or decorative pattern is "big hit", and whether the fluctuation display result is "big hit". It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number random numbers 3 and 4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special design and the decoration design. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results of the special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step S59, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", the performance control board 12 stores the storage address of the first start winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. to send the first start winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting mouth buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. 2 Make settings for sending the start winning designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be.

Following the processing of step S60, CPU 103 saves the random value in the save area corresponding to the reserved storage (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start prize determination process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 is a first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or a second reserved storage buffer (of the second special symbol It is determined whether or not there is reserved storage data in a storage buffer for storing reserved storage information (step S1001). If there is no reserved storage data in either the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). When the predetermined period does not pass from the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process ends. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, after transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt, based on the fact that the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is set, the customer It is controlled so as not to send the wait demo designation command. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag is reset when the variable display of the next special symbol is started.

When there is reserved storage data in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer (the Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for a second special symbol (step S1005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006 ).

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special The variable display of the pattern is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is even one data of the second reserved storage in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed in the second 1 It is executed with priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the reserved storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the saving area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read and stored in the reserve storage buffer of RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in a pending storage buffer in RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103, based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction, performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 ( step S1009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for judging a big hit) from the reserve storage buffer, and executes a judging module for a big hit (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for judging a big hit, which is extracted in the starting winning judging process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and judges the big win. The big-hit determination module is a program that compares a predetermined big-hit determination value (see FIG. 8) with a big-hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big-hit if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit.

In the process of judging a big hit, when the game state is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the game state is a non-variable probability state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of jackpot determination values is set in advance to a large number of probability-variable jackpot determination tables (tables in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9 (a) are set), and when the number of jackpot determination values is variable A normal jackpot determination table (a table in which numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9A are set) is provided, which is set to be smaller than the jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the variable probability state, and when the gaming state is the variable probability state, performs the processing for judging the big hit using the variable probability big hit determination table, and the game state is normal. When it is in the state or the time-saving state, the judgment of the big hit is processed using the normal big-hit judgment table. That is, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit when the value of the big-hit determination random number (random 1) matches one of the big-hit determination values shown in FIG. 9(a). If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. Determining whether or not to make a big win means determining whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but it also means determining whether or not the stop symbols in the special symbols are to be the big winning symbols. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is the variable probability state is performed by whether or not the variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the variable probability state, and is reset when ending the variable probability state. Specifically, the variable probability flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the condition that the next big hit is determined. It is reset at the timing of ending the variable display of the special symbols and stop-displaying the stop symbols when either of the earlier conditions is established.

If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the big hit determination values in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step S1012). It should be noted that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of jackpot types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 9(c) Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads the random number for judging the type of jackpot that is extracted in the starting winning judgment process and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and stores it in the reserve memory buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot pattern corresponding to the value of the random number (random 2) for judging the jackpot type are determined (step S1013).

Moreover, CPU103 sets the big-hit classification data which show the determined big-hit classification to the big-hit classification buffer in RAM102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol stop symbol (step S1015). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, "-", which is a losing symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot pattern determined in step S1014 is set as the special pattern stop pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result specifying command (step S1016), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a post-variation pattern based on randoms 3 and 4 according to the number of pending memories and the presence or absence of a big hit (step S1101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determining fluctuation patterns. Further, in the case of a big hit, the CPU 103 selects a post-variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. decide.

Next, CPU 103 determines a previous variation pattern based on random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the previous fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the post-variation pattern determined in S1102, and the pre-variation pattern determination table based on the selected pre-variation pattern determination table and the value of random 5 determine the pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and back variation pattern) to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol. The value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) is updated (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to terminate the variable display of the special symbols, and displays the stop symbol on the special figure 1 variable display section 21 or the special figure 2 variable display section 22. Control for derived display is performed (step S1301). In addition, when data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 is ended, and "second" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 variable display section 22 is terminated. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 . Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). Then, when the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the variable probability flag and the time saving flag (step S1304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in the ROM 101, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), the time between rounds Data indicating an open state such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal big winning openings in all of the 1st to 3rd rounds is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102 . In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 3rd and 5th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加In addition, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the opening mode of opening the normal big prize winning opening in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning opening in the 9th round is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102.例文帳に追加. Data on the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Also, a value corresponding to the fanfare time, which is the time for displaying the big win (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the big win on the image display device 5), is set to the big winning hole control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the big win opening pre-processing, the big winning hole control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the big winning hole is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process is terminated.

When it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set in step S1303 (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process proceeds to step S1316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter has reached 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). As a result, the game state is shifted from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the variable display resulting in the losing display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time-saving state. In step S1311, when the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is set (step S1313). When the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 in response to the game state shifting from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), to step S1316. move on. If the variable probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process proceeds to step S1315 without performing the process of step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process is terminated.

(Jackpot opening preprocessing)
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 26, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (step S1402).

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a special winning opening open designating command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, according to the opening pattern, the solenoid 82 is driven to open the normal big winning opening (step S1404). As a result, the normal big winning opening is opened in the first round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step S1306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning hole control timer to the maximum time (large winning hole opening time) during which the big winning hole can be opened. The corresponding big winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set (step S1405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated (step S1406) to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the big winning opening control timer by -1 (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step S1502), it is determined whether or not the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (step S1503). Whether or not the normal big winning slot or the V big winning slot is open may be determined by the value of the opening number counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the normal big winning opening or the V big winning opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the normal big prize opening or the V big prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is turned on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 24 is turned on (N in step S1504), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 24 is ON (Y in step S1504), the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (added and updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the variable probability state is controlled when the V winning occurs. If the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the variable probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is turned on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not turned on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step S1507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step S1508), the probability variation determination device passage specification command is transmitted (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510 do.

Then, CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process is terminated.

When the value of the winning number counter reaches a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V big winning opening. is closed (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening post-processing (step S116) (step S1513), and ends the process.

(Jackpot opening post-processing)
FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the process after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 28, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening number counter is 0 (step S1601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1602), and the jackpot end time (that the jackpot game has ended) is set to the big win opening control timer. For example, the time to notify in the image display device 5) is set (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end processing (step S117) (step S1604), End the process.

In step S1601, if the value of the number-of-opening counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a designated command after opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the round starts in the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the round (also referred to as the V opening round) in which the V big winning opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 and open the normal big winning opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 and open the V big winning opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening open specification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the process during big hit opening (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot ending process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end control timer set with the jackpot end time (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the big hit flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a variable probability determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S1707). Next, the variable probability state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1708), the variable probability determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1710), and 100 is set to the time saving number counter (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S1705), and 100 is set to the time saving counter. (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize which game state is in the variable probability, short time, or normal game state by the variable probability state designation command or the like transmitted from the CPU 103 .

[Main operations of production control board 12]
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.

(Production control main processing)
In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30 is executed. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control main process. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (Y at step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 for the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

(Production control process processing)
FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process processing. Effect control process processing is processing executed in step S76 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13 to output a sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative patterns is read out from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of fixed decorative patterns is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . When receiving a performance control command designating the start of the big win game state, if the command designates the start of the big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot gaming state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "5" which is the value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the result of the variable display is determined to be lost (step S7101). If the effect control CPU 120 is determined to be lost, it checks whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received as the variation pattern command (step S7103).

When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the effect control CPU 120 uses the losing pattern determination data table to determine the display result of the losing pattern that does not become the reach as the final stop of the effect pattern (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

When it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in the process of step S7103 (when it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop design of the effect design constituting the combination of reach design is determined (step S7104), and step S7106. proceed to

In addition, when it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (when it is determined to be a big hit), the effect control CPU 101 forms a combination of big win symbols according to the type of the big win. A stop design of the production design is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for setting various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect suggesting a big hit (inciting whether or not it is a big hit) in the effect setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not to develop to the final reach based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and if it develops to the final reach, a big hit based on the variation pattern. Determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect based on the determined result of whether or not it is a big hit, and determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) in the case of execution. do. When executing the cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the production control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of production control patterns. In step S7107, according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the various production control (production operation) patterns specified by the production control pattern of the production determined in the process of step S7106, the pattern fluctuation control pattern One of the plurality of kinds of symbol variation control patterns stored in the table, one of the performance control patterns corresponding to the designated various performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the usage pattern.

In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 121, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of the variation of the performance symbols to the stop display of the fixed performance symbols that are the final stop symbols. Data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as variable display operation, production display operation in ready-to-win production, production display operation by simulated series production, and production display operation in advance notice production are stored in multiple types as pattern variation control patterns. It is

In addition, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, effect control process timer set value, effect control process timer judgment value, effect display control data, voice control data, brightness data, and end code, corresponding to the variable display of the effect pattern Including control data for controlling various production operations, the contents of various production control, switching timing of production control, etc. are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the production control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After the processing of step S7109 is executed, the production device (the image display device 5 as production parts, various lamps as production parts, and The control of the speakers 8L and 8R) as parts for presentation is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is output to display an image (including effect symbols) corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . In addition, it outputs a control signal (lamp control data) to an LED driver in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitters such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172). (Step S7112), the variable display start setting process ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first shoots a game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left side area of the game area by hitting to the left. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win occurs.

The types of jackpots in the first special game include normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4, as described above. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion performance is executed to urge the player to hit to the right. As a right-handed promotion effect, a character (for example, "Right-handed") and a graphic (for example, an arrow pointing rightward, which is the direction of the second flow path) are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying the image, the hitting to the right display section 30 of the special figure LED board 20 and the hitting to the right display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 are urged to hit to the right by lighting means such as LEDs. As a result, the player will hit to the right from then on.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times in the case of a 3R normal jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, when V winning occurs during the big hit round, the game state is controlled to the probability variable state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) controlled to the time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 30, and the right-handed display section 55.例文帳に追加Therefore, after the first big win (also called first win) occurs, the player is always urged to hit to the right by the right-handed promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the end of the big-hit round.

In the time-saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the special figure) than the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period to fluctuate the general figure) is executed to shorten the normal state, and furthermore, control is executed to improve the probability of becoming a "normal game hit" in the normal state than in the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, by increasing the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening, the frequency of game balls entering the second starting winning opening is increased and the second starting is performed. Electronic chew support control may be performed to facilitate entry into the winning slot (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time-saving state after the big hit round, the second special game is started by entering the launched game ball into the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 22 becomes a display mode showing a big win pattern, a big win (also referred to as a winning streak) occurs.

As the types of jackpots in the second special game, there are 5 to 9 probability variable jackpots, as described above. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. Note that the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 30, and the right-handed display section 55 continues from the time of the first hit.

During the round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). The single opening of the big winning opening is determined by the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending effect after the jackpot game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state and a probability variable state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) as in the first hit. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the big winning rounds in the consecutive wins, the right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed by the image display device 5, the right-handed display section 30, and the right-handed display section 55. - 特許庁For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player can hit the consecutive chances in the variable probability state or the time saving state after the end of the big winning round, Even in the state, it is always urged to hit to the right by the right hitting promotion effect.

After the first big hit round ends, the probability variable state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring Then, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low-probability-low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed display section 30, and right-handed display section 55 is finished. As a result, the player shoots the game ball toward the first flow-down path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting left again.

<Flow of production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, the notification effect is executed from when the variable display is started to when the variable display is stopped. The notification effect is an effect for informing the player whether or not the variation of the special symbols and decorative symbols stops in a manner indicating a big hit, that is, whether or not the game is controlled to a big win game state. The notification effect is made up of a plurality of parts. Includes fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, it becomes a fanfare part to be executed before shifting to the jackpot game state. Note that the inciting part is also called an introductory part. Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are collectively referred to as an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part in which an effect corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also the part that indicates the period from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach after the pseudo run or normal reach is executed. It should be noted that the start part also includes fluctuations that are non-reachable.

[Promotion part (introduction part)]
The fanning part (introductory part) includes from the start of SP reach (also referred to as super reach) (start timing of SP reach title display) to the timing of heading for a big hit or a loss. In addition, the fanning part is a part for fanning whether the performance to be executed results in a big hit or a loss. The fanning part corresponds to either the part corresponding to SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B executed after the start part, SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP final reach that develops from SP first half reach. part is included. In addition, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B may be collectively referred to as SP first half, SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach may be collectively referred to as SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part announcing a big win display result and a losing epilogue part announcing a losing display result after each fanning part. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed by developing a story to inform that the changing pattern is displayed as a big winning result and controlled to a big winning game state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, an effect is executed by developing a story to inform that the changing symbols will result in a losing display and the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

Also, in the epilogue part, the notification that it will be a big hit display result is, like the final reach described later, after the introduction part, when notifying by the movement of the role when performing the success or failure notification, and the SP reach other than the final reach As in the above, there are times when the notification is given by story development on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using any accessories. Of the epilogue parts, the hit epilogue part notified by the movement of the accessory is also referred to as the hit/fail notification part. Specifically, in SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, when a big hit occurs, the liquid crystal is used by the hit epilogue part as described above. It is notified that the game is controlled to a big win game state as the end of the story performance, and if no big win occurs, a loss epilogue part informs that the story performance using the liquid crystal is not controlled to the big win game state. The first story development in the story production may suggest whether it is a hit or not. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part that is executed after the introductory part, first of all, there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled by the action of the role product by the success/failure notification part (the role product operation part). After that, when a big win occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above informs that the game will be controlled to the big win game state as the end of the story production using the liquid crystal, and when no big win occurs, the losing epilogue part informs the liquid crystal. As the end of the story presentation using , it is notified that the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state. Thus, the winning epilogue part in the final reach includes the winning or losing reporting part and the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part that follows.

Also, corresponding to the SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A and the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B and the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP latter half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A and the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A are executed. Corresponding to the SP latter half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B and the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, the SP final reach winning epilogue part and the SP final reach losing epilogue part are executed.

[Accessory movement part]
The character action part is a part corresponding to the period during the development of the latter half of the SP during which an effect indicating that the game progresses from the first half of the SP to the latter half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32 . The role object action part is executed after the premonition part of SP first half reach A or the premonition part of SP reach first half B. After the accessory action part, any one of the SP latter half reach A boosting part, the SP latter half reach B boosting part, and the SP final reach boosting part is executed.

[Benefit Part]
The relief winning part is a part in which a relief winning performance is executed to make it look like a loss and then suggest a big win. The rescue winning part is a part that can develop from either the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, or the losing epilogue part of SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the winning epilogue part in which the big win display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery effect is the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP reaching first half B, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B. Executed after the hit epilogue part and the relief hit part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be a case where the re-lottery effect part is not performed. For example, after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the hit epilogue part, and the probability variation pattern (that it will be a probability variation) as a result of the hit display The re-lottery part may not be executed when the odd number symbol shown) is derived.

[Relationship before and after determination]
Next, an example of a case where a series of presentations is divided at timings before and after determination of success or failure will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success or failure, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. Here, the win/fail decision is an effect that indicates the branching result of the big win display result or the losing display result in the final stage of the fanning part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), a series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after determination of success or failure at timings before and after determination of success or failure from the start of variation to the end of variation. The part before the judgment of suitability includes the start part and the fanning part. In addition, the part after the success/failure determination includes an epilogue part (hit/lost), a relief winning part, and a re-lottery part.

In this way, a series of effects from the start of variation to the stop of variation are composed of a plurality of parts. Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation can be divided into before and after the start of SP reach (after the start of fluctuation). In such a case, before the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the previous fluctuation described above, and after the start of SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post fluctuation described above.

Next, the variation pattern of the main variation number 20, which is the variation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the variation patterns, will be described with reference to FIG. 34(B). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of fluctuation to the start of SP reach (after the start of fluctuation). Then, from the start of the SP reach (the start of the post-variation) to the determination of whether or not the result is right or wrong becomes the fanning part (the first half of the SP reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory is not moved at the timing of the win/fail decision. Then, from the determination of success or failure to the start of the re-lottery effect is the epilogue part (per reach A in the first half of SP). Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fanning part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is 15 seconds, and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds. The time is set so that

Next, the variation pattern of the main variation number 26, which is the variation pattern for the SP final reach big hit, among the variation patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 34(C). In the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (after the start of variation). Then, from the start of the SP reach (the start of the later fluctuation) to the development of the second half of the SP is the fanning part (first half of the SP reach A). And from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is right or wrong will be the fanning part (SP final reach). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory is not moved at the timing of the winning/failing determination. Then, from the determination of success or failure to the start of the re-lottery effect is the epilogue part (per SP final reach). Then, the re-lottery part is from the start of the re-lottery effect to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the fanning part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the fanning part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set so that the second part is 20 seconds and the re-lottery part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34(B) and 34(C), the fluctuation time of the SP final reach having a higher degree of expectation than the SP first half reach A is longer. In addition, the total time of the fanning part and the time of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has a higher degree of expectation than in the SP first half reach A. As a result, the higher the expected variation, the longer the period of stimulating the player, and the longer the lingering time when the player wins, so that the feeling of blessing can be enhanced.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence relationship between the contents of the effects executed in a series of effects and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using a scenario for each part. The scenario described here has the role of a script that summarizes the contents of each scene in a series of productions. The scenario of each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the effect mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. Details such as the effect executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings for explaining the effect mode described later. In the following, the relationship between diagrams for explaining the scenario of each part and diagrams for explaining the effects mode described later will be explained.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIGS. The scenario of the missing epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering modes in FIGS.

FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP first-half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode of FIGS. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the character action part (during the second half of the SP development). The scenario of the role product action part (during the latter half of the SP development) corresponding to number 8 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIGS.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the fanning part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) and a losing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The scenario of the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production modes in FIGS.

FIGS. 45 and 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach). The scenario of the fanning part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. 115 to 132 described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining scenarios of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIGS. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering modes in FIGS. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a winning part for relief. The scenario of the relief winning part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode of FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

FIG. 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (derivation of odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-lottery part corresponding to number 19 in FIG. 33 (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation) corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 141 to 156 described later. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (odd-numbered symbols derived after button operation) and a fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part (odd symbol derivation after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode in FIG. 160, which will be described later. FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a re-lottery part (even-numbered symbols are derived after button operation) and a fanfare part. The scenario of the re-lottery part corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation) corresponds to the production mode of FIGS. 161 to 163 described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the rendering mode in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 turns on/blinks/lights off one or more lamps (LEDs) among a plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. It outputs luminance data for making the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting / blinking / light extinction performed with respect to lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for production|presentation control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 subject to lamp control. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/lights off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a brightness data table storing brightness data for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 . The brightness data table is the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the brightness for SP reach used in each part during SP reach (flashing part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, character action part, etc.) It includes a data table and a luminance data table for background.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability/low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The jackpot background brightness data table used during the round of the state, the ending background brightness data table used in the ending state in which the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the high probability high base state (probability variable state) and a variable background brightness data table used in the state).

Each of the background luminance data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on whether the That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority when using each of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority is higher when used in the order of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table.

For example, the production control CPU 120, when developing into SP reach while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in the normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the SP reach is displayed in the normal background. The SP reach luminance data table is used preferentially over the SP reach luminance data table, and luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach luminance data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background, when SP reach occurs, a mode corresponding to SP reach occurs based on the brightness data table for SP reach. , the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. While the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for normal background is not output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, luminance data based on the background luminance data table is output to the LED driver, and when a big hit results in a fanfare state, luminance data based on the fanfare background luminance data table is output to the LED driver. output.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background luminance data table corresponding to the game state under control while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control with a timer. However, if it develops into SP reach or the like, the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the SP reach is preferentially used over the luminance data table for background and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the SP ready-to-win luminance data table. Since the luminance data contained in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the end of the SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Also, for example, if an error occurs while outputting luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach during SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error to SP reach. The error luminance data table is used preferentially over the error luminance data table, and the luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the error luminance data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control in a mode corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, a game effect is generated in a mode corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. While the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. When returning to the game state of , the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU120, while measuring the time of the lamp control corresponding to the SP reach under control by the timer, using the brightness data table for the SP reach corresponding to the SP reach to the LED driver brightness Data is output, but when an error occurs, the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error is preferentially used over the luminance data table for SP reach to output luminance data to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the brightness data table for SP reach. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the brightness data table for SP reach even while performing lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data table for error, but Since the luminance data contained in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It's becoming After the error is released, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the luminance data table for SP reach to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

<Lighting Mode of Game Effect Lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting luminance data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting mode of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining how the game effect lamp 9 lights.

In the present embodiment, terms relating to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 such as the frame lamp, the character lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H are defined as "turn off", " "Almost off", "on", and "flashing" are used. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights out" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of zero. The term "almost extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "turned off". Also, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53(X1), when the data of RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) defined as the luminance data of the role lamp 9A is "0000", the role lamp 9A is "turned off". . Also, when the luminance data (RRRR data) of the character object lamp 9A is "1111", the character object lamp 9A lights up in red with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the character object lamp 9A in which the RRRR data is "1111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as luminance data of the left panel lamp 9B is "00000", the left panel lamp 9B is turned off. "do. Further, when the luminance data (WWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111", the board left lamp 9B is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the board left lamp 9B in which the WWWWW data is "11111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53(X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Also, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the attacker lamp 9E in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53(X1), when WWW (White, White, White) data defined as luminance data of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V-attacker lamp 9F is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (WWW data) of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V-attacker lamp 9F is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the V-attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "000", the electric tuning lamp 9H is "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "111", the electric tuning lamp 9H is lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, such a state of the electric tuning lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of lamps arranged in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and lighting when the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. It also includes haze lighting that dimly lights while changing the luminance. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lighted". Since the brightness is high, the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lighted". Since it is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the role lamp 9A is "AAAA", the role lamp 9A "lights". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the luminance data (WWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "AAAAAA", the board left lamp 9B is "lighted". The left lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacker lamp 9E is "lighted". lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V-attacker lamp 9F is "AAA", the V-attacker lamp 9F is "lighted". When the luminance data (RGB data) of the electric tuning lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric tuning lamp 9H "lights". Especially in this case, since the luminance is high, the electric tuning lamp 9H lights brightly.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode other than the above-described "turning off" or "turning on" of the game effect lamp 9, in which the lighting luminance of each lamp is a first luminance and a second luminance higher than the first luminance. including alternately switching between For example, "blinking" includes repeating turning on and off or almost off. This includes switching between the case where the luminance data is "0" and "1" with the lapse of time. As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is haze lighting. , and blinking are different in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing.

<Production Mode of Pachinko Machine 1>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 164, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. In this embodiment, an effect mode when any one of the main variation numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23 and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the plurality of routes shown in FIG. The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (4), or the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the inciting part (5) of the first half of the SP reach B, and the losing epilogue part (7) of the first half of the SP reach B. .

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the role action part (8), the inflection part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inflection part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inflection part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B loss epilogue part (14), or the start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), role movement part (8), SP second half Reach A's fanning part (9), SP second half Reach B's losing epilogue part (14) The production transitions in order, or the start part (1), SP first half reach B's fanning part (5), role movement part ( 8), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B swaying part (12) and SP second half reach B losing epilogue part (14).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 15 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the action part (8), the inflection part of the SP final reach (15), the SP final Whether the production transitions in the order of reach loss epilogue part (17), start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), role movement part (8), SP final reach fanning part (15) , The effect transitions in the order of SP final reach losing epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 20 is selected, the production transitions in the order of the start part (1), the inflection part (2) of the SP first half reach A, and the hit epilogue part (3) of the SP first half reach A, or the start The effect transitions in the order of part (1), SP first half reach B swaying part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the character action part (8), the inflection part of the SP second half reach A (9), SP The effect transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) in the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inflection part (2) in the first half of SP reach A, the role movement part (8), the inflection part in second half reach B (12), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), or start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character movement part (8), SP second half Reach A's fanning part (9), SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (10), or the start part (1), SP first half reach B's fanning part (5), role movement part ( 8), the effect transitions in the order of SP second half reach B swaying part (12) and SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern of the main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the inflection part of the SP first half reach A (2), the action part (8), the inflection part of the SP final reach (15), the SP final Reach hitting epilogue part (16) production transitions in order, start part (1), SP first half reach B fanning part (5), character action part (8), SP final reach fanning part (15) , SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

The figure also shows the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. In addition, although description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief winning part is omitted in the example of all variation patterns, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief winning part will also be described. In the case of winning, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of losing, the recovery winning part that looks like losing and becomes a winning may use the variation time to perform the performance of the relief winning part.

[Direction mode in the start part]
Rendering modes in the start part will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 55(a1), when the variable display (variable display) starts based on one reserved memory, the decorative design is variable in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5. Along with the display, the fourth pattern 5J is variably displayed, and the small pattern 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during variable display. In the present embodiment, an image of a flying girl called Yume-chan is displayed as a character that appears in variations during the normal game state. Yume-chan is a main character who appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 .

At the start of the fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background. Note that during the variable display, sound effects are appropriately output from the speakers 8L and 8R, but only part of the drawings are shown for the sound effects. Further, the lighting of yellow corresponding to the normal background by the game effect lamp 9 is referred to as "yellow background lighting". The effect control CPU 120 lights the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. The "lighting" referred to here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, haze lighting, etc., as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies to the following description.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo continuous symbol stops at the middle symbol. The stop of the "NEXT" symbol indicates the start of the second pseudo-variation. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. It should be noted that the term "blinking" here includes the repetition of lighting and extinguishing of the lamp as described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, and the same applies to the following description. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the characters "x2" are displayed to indicate that the second variable display is performed by the pseudo continuous effect. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), re-fluctuation is performed as the second pseudo-fluctuation. At the upper left of the screen, a small letter "x2" is displayed to indicate that it is the second variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the ready-to-win mode, the "NEXT" symbol as a pseudo consecutive symbol stops on the middle symbol. The stop of the "NEXT" symbol indicates the start of the third pseudo-variation. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the characters "x3" are displayed to indicate that the third variable display is performed by the pseudo continuous effect. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), pseudo re-variation is performed as the third variable display. At the upper left of the screen, a small character "x3" is displayed to indicate that it is the third variable display. At the time of re-fluctuation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), "2" stops in the left decorative design display area 5L, and "2" also stops in the right decorative design display area 5R. It becomes a mode. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background is started to darken while the medium pattern is changed in the state of reach tenpai, and the screen becomes dark. When the background darkening starts, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decoration pattern and the character image of Yume-chan. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decoration pattern layer and the Yume-chan character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58(a10), the shutter is displayed to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, the image behind the shutter becomes invisible. In addition, the brightness of the screen is gradually reduced in accordance with the gradual closing of the shutter. In the state where the shutter is closed in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while decreasing the brightness step by step.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at (a10). When the shutter is closed in (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is further lowered from the time of (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 58(a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time of (a11). When the shutter is closed in (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is further lowered from the time of (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen luminance gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that the relationship is, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Also, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter is closed in (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as in (a12). After that, the closed state of the shutter is maintained from FIG. 59(a14) to (a15). In the state where the shutter is kept closed in (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a13).

After that, the screen brightness is gradually improved in accordance with the situation in which the shutter is gradually opened from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. In the state where the shutter is opened in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 60(a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen luminance is improved from that at (a16). When the shutter is opened in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 60(a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved from the time of (a17). In the state where the shutter is opened in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the same luminance as at the time of (a17).

The screen luminance gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) so as to satisfy the relationship of (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%, for example. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the luminance from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61(a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. The screen brightness is 100% when the shutter is open in (a19). Also, in the state where the shutter of (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. In addition, it may be "substantially turned off" instead of "turned off". Further, when it is determined to shift to SP first half reach B when the shutter is opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. When the SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), it shifts to the production of FIG. 62 (b1), and when the SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), FIG. It shifts to the production of e1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A)]
62 to 67, description will be given of the effect mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach A). The fanning part (Reach A in the first half of SP) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume-chan, an ally character, chases Bakuchu, an enemy character. In the fanning part (SP first half Reach A), the story develops that if Mumu-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, and if Mumu-chan cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the fanning part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed. The content of the effect of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on is indicated by the title display. While the title display of (b1) is being displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased, and an image showing how the enemy character "Bakuchu" lands is displayed. When the title display of (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image is displayed in which the enemy character Bakuchu lands in the center of the screen and takes a pose. In the state of (b3) where an enemy character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, the friend character, and Bakuchu, the enemy character, face each other in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 lights in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed. Also, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle display "I found it" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "I found it" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63(b6), the subtitle display "found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64(b7), Yume-chan, who is a friendly character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b7), the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed on the Yume Yume up screen. Also, in the Yume-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (b8), an image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the line "Too" from Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Mumu-chan is displayed. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu Escape (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu's utterance of the line "hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image in which Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen chases Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait~" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait~" is displayed on the Muyume Chasing screen. In addition, Mumu-chan's footsteps "za-za-za" are output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as a physical sound) in accordance with the image of Mumu-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green in response to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(b12), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As shown in (b11), Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the state of chasing dreams (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, along with a part of Mumu's hand, and Bakuchu escapes from Mumu. As shown in (b13), the subtitle display "I'm caught!" corresponding to the line "I'm caught!" In addition, Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu escape (b13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66(b14), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b14), an explosive jump sound "pyon" is output as a pseudo sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeic sound) in accordance with the image of the explosive jump. In addition, in the Baku-Chu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the Baku-Chu jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), Bakuchu, which is an enemy character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b15), the game effect lamp 9 lights in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character on the Bakuchuup screen.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(b16), Yume-chan, who is a friendly character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the screen of Yume Yume Up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line "Torya~!" is output on the screen of Yume Yume Jump. Also, in the state of Yume Yume Jump (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(b18), a screen is displayed in which Yume-chan is displayed in an enlarged form for the winner/failure decision scene. In addition, in the scene (b18) before the winning/failing determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the winning/failure determination scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (b18), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in the SP first half reach A, the process proceeds to the presentation of (c1). From the state of (b18), when it is determined that the SP first half reach A will be lost, the process moves to the effect of (d1). From the state of (b18), when it is decided to develop into SP reach in the latter half, it shifts to the production of (h1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
68 and 69, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state as the story of Mumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 68(c1), in the hit epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of SP, an image of Yume-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) catching Bakuchu, the sound that Mumu catches Bakuchu is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Mumu chan catching Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (c1) catching Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white brighter than the white of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) corresponding to catching Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Mumu-chan, who has caught Bakuchu, and is making a vei sign is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display "easy victory!" corresponding to Mumu's line "easy victory!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors to indicate that a big win has been achieved. Hereinafter, smooth lighting of rainbow colors is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Also, in the state of (c2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image in which Mumu-chan, who has caught Bakuchu, is giving a v-sign is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 is rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a design effect is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of drawing out the symbols of (c4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of (c5) where the symbols are displayed. After that, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in the normal size, being further reduced from the state of (c5). In the state of (c6) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
70 to 71, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state due to the development of the story in which Mumu-chan could not catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 70(d1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of SP, an image is displayed in which Yume-chan did not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the sound "Suka" that Mumu could not catch is output as an onomatopoeic sound in accordance with the video in which Mumu could not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (d1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) corresponding to the fact that Bakuchu was not caught. Lights up white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70(d2), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, gets down on his knees in regret, and Bakuchu is delighted. As shown in (d2), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (td1) indicating the lighting mode in (d1). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in (d3). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (d3). After that, as shown in FIG. 71(d4), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1), which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B)]
72 to 77, description will be given of the effect mode in the fanning part (SP first half reach B). The fanning part (Reach B in the first half of the SP) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume-chan, an ally character, and Boingo, an enemy character, play hockey. In the agitation part (SP first half Reach B), the story unfolds that if Mumu-chan wins against Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if Mumu-chan loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72(e1), in the fanning part in which the SP first half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach B of "Biribiri Hockey Showdown" is displayed. The contents of the effect of the first half of the SP to be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. While the title display of (e1) is being displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72(e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. In the state of (e2) where the screen cracks and the title display disappears, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image is displayed in which the competing characters appear on the screen, in which Yume-chan, who is an ally character, and Boingo, which is an enemy character, appear on the screen. In the state of (e3) where the opponent character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(e4), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan, who is an ally character at the front left of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right of the screen, face each other. In the confrontation state of (e4), the game effect lamp 9 lights in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan on the left side where Yume-chan is displayed. Also, the game effect lamp 9 lights in cream color corresponding to the character of Boingo on the right side where Boingo is displayed. Also, at the timing when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), the subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Mumu's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73(e6), the subtitle display "Call me" corresponding to Boingo's line "Call me" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo's speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74(e7), an image of Yume-chan, who is an ally character, hitting a puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen that is Mumu's turn, Yume's line "ya~" is output. Also, in the state of Yume Yume turn (e7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume Yume's speech. After that, as shown in (e8), the puck hit by Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed. In addition, in the pack display state of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the physical sound "whoosh" of the action of the pack. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of a state in which Boingo blocks Mumu-chan's puck is displayed. Also, in the state of (e9) Boingo prevention, the game effect lamp 9 lights in cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75(e10), an image of the flipped puck flying in the air is displayed. In the state of dancing in the puck of (e10), a physical sound of rotating the puck is output. In addition, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream corresponding to the Boingo character. After that, as shown in (e11), an image in which the enemy character Boingo hits the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), Boingo's line "Let's go" is output on the screen which is Boingo's turn. In addition, in the state of Boingo's turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo's speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck hit by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. In addition, in the pack display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the physical sound "whoosh" of the action of the pack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 76(e13), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged by directly receiving the puck, and electricity runs through her bones. As shown in (e13), Yume-chan's line "Uwa~" is output in the Yume-damaged state. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e13). In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan received damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77(e16), an image similar to that shown in (e14) is displayed in which Yume-chan is damaged and electricity runs through her bones. In addition, in the Yume damage state of (e16), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that Yume received damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene changes to the scene before the winner/failure decision, in which a state in which Yume-chan is damaged is displayed. In the scene (e17) before the winning/failing determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before the winning/failure determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (e17), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in SP first half reach B, the process shifts to the effect of (f1). From the state of (e17), when it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be lost, the process shifts to the effect of (g1). From the state of (e17), when it is decided to develop into SP reach in the latter half, it shifts to the production of (h1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
78 to 80, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state as the story of Yume-chan's victory over Boingo unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 78(f1), in the winning epilogue part of SP first half Reach B, an image of Yume-chan hitting back the puck is displayed. In addition, in the Yume attack state of (f1), in which Yume-chan attacks by hitting back the puck, the subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Go~!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yume Yume attack of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in brighter white than the white of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume's attack. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78(f2), an image in which Boingo is blown away after being attacked by Mumu-chan is displayed. As shown in (f2), in the state of being attacked by Boingo, the subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (f2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of Yumu Victory, in which Mumu-chan makes a fist pose and Boingo is lying down, is displayed. As shown in (f3), in the state of Mumu Victory, the subtitle display "Easy Victory!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Easy Victory!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of Yume Yume Shori is displayed as a still image in the style of a graphic novel. In the state of the still image of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(f5), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the big hit display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (f5), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of drawing out the symbols of (f5). After that, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of drawing out the symbols of (f6). After that, as shown in FIG. 80(f7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in the normal size, being further reduced from the state of (f6). In the state of (f7) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
81 and 82, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The lost epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which it is reported that the game will not be controlled to the big win game state as the story of Mumu-chan being defeated by Boingo develops.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the missing epilogue part of SP first half Reach B, an image of Yume-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume Yume flying, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image is displayed in which Yume-chan is blown away farther than in the state of (g1). As shown in (g2), in the state where Yume Yume is tossed, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in regret, and Boingo is laughing. As shown in (g3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white that is darker than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) indicating the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 82 (g4). The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (g4). After that, as shown in FIG. 82(g5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (g5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1).

[Direction mode in character movement part (at the time of development in the second half)]
Description will be made of the mode of presentation in the character action part (at the time of development in the second half) with reference to FIG. 83 .

As shown in FIG. 83(h1), when developing from SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B to SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, or SP strongest reach, any of SP reach in the second half is used. The movable body 32 operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed with respect to the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. Due to the effect image, the character of Yume-chan and the reduced “2” decoration pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the accessory falls further from the state of (h1). In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls. After that, in the state of (h3), the role is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the role is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From the state of (h3), an effect is executed in which the accessory rises. If it has been decided that the game will develop into reach A in the second half of the SP after the character rises, the process shifts to the production of (i1). If it has been determined that the game will progress to reach B in the second half of the SP after the character rises, the process shifts to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP final reach will occur after the character rises, the process shifts to the presentation of (r1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach A)]
84 to 96, description will be given of the effect mode in the fanning part (Reach A in the second half of SP). The fanning part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which the story unfolds in which friendly characters Yume-chan and Jam-chan chase Bakuchu, an enemy character. In the fanning part (Reach A in the second half of the SP), the story unfolds that if Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Baku-chu, it will be a big hit, and if Yume-chan and Jam-chan cannot catch Baku-chu, it will be a loss. be.

As shown in FIG. 84(i1), in the agitation part in which the SP second half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!" is displayed. The content of the SP latter half ready-to-play effect to be executed from now on is indicated by the title display. In the state where the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image is displayed in which friendly characters Mumu-chan and Jam-chan (leftmost characters) and enemy characters Bakuchu face each other in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters on the left side of which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed. Also, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the reach A in the latter half of the SP is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle display "I won't let you escape!" corresponding to the line "I won't let you escape!" In the confrontation state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85(i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. In the jam display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 86(i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go~" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Let's go~" is displayed. In the dream display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86(i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Come on!" corresponding to the line "Come on!" In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the state of chasing jam (i9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "tata-tat" are output as physical sounds. In addition, in the state of (i10) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. In addition, as shown in (i12), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the jam chasing screen. As indicated by (i12), jam-chan's footsteps as physical sounds "za-za-za" are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the state of chasing jam (i12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As indicated by (i13), jam-chan's footsteps as physical sounds "za-za-za" are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the jam chasing state (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks white three times corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the jump sound of Baku-chu as an onomatopoeia is output in accordance with the image of Baku-chu's jump. Also, in the state of Baku-chu jump (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image in which Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the state of (i16) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the subtitle display "Can't catch you" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Can't catch you" is displayed. In addition, along with the image of Jam-chan not catching Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound "Suka" that Jam-chan was unable to catch is output. Also, in the state of (i16) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speech. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Next is me!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Next is me!" is displayed. . In the dream display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the state of chasing Bakuchu (i18), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the action of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Mumu-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds. Also, in the state of (i19) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait!" In addition, as indicated by (i21), Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" are output as physical sounds in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (i21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. As indicated by (i22), the footsteps of Yume-chan as physical sounds "za-za-za-za" are output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. In addition, in the dream-chasing state of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yume Yume Jump, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the jump sound of Bakuchu as an onomatopoeia is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu's jump. Also, in the state of Baku-chu jump (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Baku-chu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image in which Mumu-chan could not catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the state of (i25) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the subtitle display "Can't catch you" corresponding to Mumu's line "Can't catch you" is displayed. In addition, along with the image of Yume-chan not catching Bakuchu, the sound "Suka" that Yume-chan couldn't catch is output as an onomatopoeia. Also, in the state (i25) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speech. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two friends, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two teammates are displayed, the subtitle display "Next is two people!" corresponding to the lines of the two teammates "Next is two people!" is displayed. In the state (i26) in which two teammates are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in green corresponding to Yume-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume-up state of (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yume Yume and Jam Up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two players are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is continuously displayed. At (i30), an image in which two people are closer to Bakuchu than at (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the footsteps of Yume-chan and Jam-chan as physical sounds, "za-za-za-za", are output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, Bakuchu's footsteps "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as physical sounds in accordance with Bakuchu's video. Also, in the chasing state of two characters (i30), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i31), on the jam-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "wow" is output on the jam jump screen. Also, in the jam jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (i33), in the screen of Yume-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Mumu-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume-chan's line "Wow~" is output on the screen of Yume Yume Jump. Also, in the state of Yume Yume Jump (i34), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume Yume is jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to the words "Wait!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of two players jumping (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to two players jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 1. FIG. In the two-person jump state of (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white corresponding to the fact that two players are jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 2. FIG. In the state of two players jumping (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to two players jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as still image 3 . In the state of two players jumping (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white corresponding to two players jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), an image in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping is displayed as a still image 4, which is the scene before the winner/failure determination. In the scene (i39) before the win/fail determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before the win/fail determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (i39), when it is determined that the game will be a big hit in the second half of the SP reach A, the process proceeds to the effect of (j1). From the state of (i39), if it is determined that the game will be lost in reach A in the latter half of the SP or that it will be a relief win, the process shifts to the production of (k1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
97 and 98, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The winning epilogue part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is reported that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state by developing a story in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 97(j1), in the hit epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the state of (j1) catching Bakuchu, the sound of Yume and Jam chan catching Bakuchu is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume and Jam chan catching Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (j1) catching Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white brighter than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) corresponding to catching Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97(j2), Mumu-chan who has caught Baku-chu gives a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan riding on Baku-chu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakuchu, the subtitle display "It was a shame!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It was a shame!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Mumu-chan, who has caught Baku-chu, gives a buoy sign, and an image in which Jam-chan is riding on Baku-chu is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of (j4) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (j4). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of (j5) where the symbols are displayed. After that, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (j6) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
99 to 100, description will be given of the effect mode in the lost epilogue part (SP latter half reach A). The missing epilogue part (Reach A in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the game will not be controlled to the jackpot game state due to the development of the story in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 99(k1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume-chan and Jam-chan did not catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu is not caught, an onomatopoeic sound "suka" that cannot be caught is output in accordance with the image in which Mumu-chan and Jam-chan could not catch Bakuchu. Also, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) corresponding to the fact that Bakuchu was not caught. Lights up white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99(k2), Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Uh-shih!" corresponding to Baku-chu's line "Uh-shih!" is displayed on the Baku-chu-up screen. In the state of (k2) "Bakuchu-up", the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image is displayed in which Mumu-chan and Jam-chan, who could not catch Bakuchu, kneel down in regret. As shown in (k3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). After that, as shown in FIG. 100(k4), the screen is darkened. The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (k4). After that, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in which the normal screen of (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (k5), when it is determined that the win will be a relief win, the process shifts to the effect of (v1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP second half reach B)]
101 to 109, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (Reach B in the second half of SP). The fanning part (Reach B in the latter half of SP) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friend characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against enemy characters crab robots. In the fanning part (Reach B in the latter half of the SP), the story unfolds that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab robot win against Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the fanning part in which the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B of "Gekishin Robo Battle" is displayed. The contents of the effect in the latter half of the SP to be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. Below the title display, the expected degree of big hit in this reach is indicated by the number of stars. It should be noted that the display indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit may be displayed in another SP reach. In the state where the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image is displayed in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (characters on the left end) face each other and the enemy character crab robot faces each other. As shown in (n2), the subtitle display "I will not lose!" corresponding to the line "I will not lose!" In the confrontation state (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in white corresponding to the fact that the two players are speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP latter half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101(n3), an image of a crab attack in which a crab that is an enemy character shoots a beam is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102(n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two players are running away, the subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the line "Kyaa!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of (n4) two players running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two players running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102(n5), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping into a depression in a rocky area to escape from the beam of the crab is displayed. In the two-player jump state of (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image of the beam passing over the rocky place is displayed. In the state where the beam of (n6) passes, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103(n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are relieved in the shadow of a rocky place. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "hahaha" corresponding to Jam's line "hahaha" is displayed on the screen where the two people are relieved. In the confrontation state (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in pink corresponding to Nana's character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103(n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle display "This is your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "This is your turn!" is displayed on the jam-up screen. Also, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab with a technique called Delta Break is displayed. In addition, in the jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's utterance of the line "delta break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image is displayed in which the crab is damaged by Jam-chan's attack. In addition, in the crab attack state (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to the crab saying the line "gununu~". After that, as shown in (n11), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan face each other and the crab faces each other. In the confrontation state (n11), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan escaping from the crab beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two players are running away, the subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the line "Kyaa!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of two players running away (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two players running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image in which the beam approaches Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being damaged by crab beams is displayed. In addition, in the state of (n15) where two players are damaged, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times corresponding to the fact that two players are damaged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan who have been damaged stand up. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two players stand up, the subtitle display "From now on!" corresponding to the line "From now on!" of the two teammates is displayed. In the state of (n16) where two players stand up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in pink corresponding to Nana's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. In addition, in the Nana-up state of (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to the Nana-chan character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen in which Nana prays is displayed. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a production to confuse the enemy. Also, in the state of Nana's prayer (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink corresponding to Nana's praying action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image in which the crab is confused by Nana's prayer is displayed. In addition, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the crab's confused action. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of an angry crab that has recovered from its confusion is displayed. In the angry crab state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of the crab swinging its arms to attack is displayed. In addition, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image is displayed in which Nana-chan is damaged by a crab attack. In addition, in the state of Nana being damaged (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times corresponding to Nana being damaged. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam holding the remote controller and operating it is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" of the jam is displayed on the jam remote control operation screen. In addition, in the jam remote control operation state of (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam-chan trying to press a remote control button is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), an effect is executed in which a hand appears from the sky. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand reaching out from the sky to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), in the crab-catching state, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), it becomes a scene before the winner decision in which an enlarged image of the crab and the hand is displayed. In the scene (n27) before winning/failing determination, the game effect lamp 9 keeps lighting in white so as to correspond to the scene before winning/failure determination. By muting the sound in the scene before the success/failure decision, it is easy to understand that the scene is the branch scene of the success/failure decision. From the state of (n27), when it is determined that the jackpot will be achieved in the latter half of the SP reach B, the process shifts to the presentation of (o1). From the state of (n27), if it is determined that the game will be lost in reach B in the latter half of the SP or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the presentation of (p1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
110 to 112, description will be given of the effect mode in the hit epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The winning epilogue part (Reach B in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning state as the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan winning over the crab robot unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 110(o1), in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of SP, an image of a hand reaching from the sky catching a crab is displayed. In addition, as shown in (o1), the subtitle display "I got killed" corresponding to the crab's line "I got killed" is displayed on the screen where the crab is caught. Also, in the state of (o1) catching crabs, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in brighter white than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to catching crabs. After that, as shown in (o2), an image is displayed in which the caught crab is installed as a signboard of the shop. In addition, (o2) in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard, the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth) indicating that a big win has been achieved. Also, in the state of (o2), the winning BGM is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(o3), a screen appears in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab. Also, as shown in (o3), the subtitle display "nice signboard" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "nice signboard" is displayed on the screen of the shop where the crab is the signboard. In addition, in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard of (o3), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111(o4), the screen where Jam-chan and Nana-chan are displayed in front of a shop whose signboard is a crab continues. Also, as shown in (o4), the subtitle display "Work hard" corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the shop with the crab as the signboard. In addition, in the state of the shop where the crab is the signboard of (o4), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), an image of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed as a graphic novel-like still image. In the state of the still image of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(o6), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines in the pattern display. In the state of (o6) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (o6). In the state of (o7) where the symbols are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (o8) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
113 to 114, description will be given of the effect mode in the missing epilogue part (SP latter half reach B). The lost epilogue part (Reach B in the second half of SP) is a part in which it is announced that the jackpot game state will not be controlled as the story develops in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are defeated by a crab robot.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the missing epilogue part of Reach B in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which a hand reaching from the sky could not catch a crab. In addition, in the state (p1) where the crab is not caught, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to the fact that the crab was not caught. Light. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab walking sideways and running away is displayed. In the state of crab escape of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a darker white than the white of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who were escaped by a crab, looking down with regret, is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), the subtitle display "Sonna~" corresponding to the line "Sonna~" of the two teammates is displayed on the regrettable screen. Further, as shown in (p3), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in a darker white than the white in (tp1) indicating the lighting mode in (p1).

After that, the screen is darkened as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). In the state of the screen darkening of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished. After that, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (p5), when it is determined that the game will be a relief win, the process proceeds to the effect of (v1).

[Production mode in the fanning part (SP final reach)]
115 to 132, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the fanning part (SP final reach). The fanning part (SP final reach) is the part where the story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. is. In the agitation part (SP final reach), a story is developed that if 6 people can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, and if 6 people can not catch Bakuchu, it will be a loss. In addition, the fanning part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit among all the reach.

As shown in FIG. 115(r1), in the agitation part in which the SP final reach is executed, a title corresponding to the SP final reach is displayed, "Catch Bakuchu with 6 people!". The contents of the effect of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on are indicated by the title display. In the state where the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Mumu-chan face each other in the center of the screen, Bakuchu, an enemy character. An image is displayed. On the screen where the characters are facing each other, the lines of the six allies "This is the end" are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in white corresponding to the speeches of the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Also, at the timing when the image related to the title display of (r2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115(r3), Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in FIG. 116(r4), when the AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to the line "Leave it to me!" of the AD is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange corresponding to the AD issuing a line. After that, as shown in (r5), when the maid A is displayed, the caption display "look at me" corresponding to the line "look at me" of the maid A is displayed. In the maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue corresponding to the maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r6), when the maid B is displayed, the subtitle display "Because I'll do my best" corresponding to the line "Because I'll do my best" of the maid B is displayed. In the state of maid B display of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue corresponding to maid B speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117(r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you~" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'll catch you~" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "You can afford it" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "You can afford it" is displayed. In the state of Jam-chan display of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's speaking. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone's going~!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Everybody's going~!" is displayed. In the state of (r9) where Yume-chan is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green corresponding to the fact that Yume-chan is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Anyone can call me" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Anyone can call me" is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu's speech. After that, as shown in (r11), when the image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the caption "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue corresponding to the maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r12), when an image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" Is displayed. In the state of chasing AD & Maid A in (r12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in orange corresponding to the speech of the AD character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in blue corresponding to the fact that the character of the maid A is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when the image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, the subtitle display "Catch me!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Caught!" In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r13) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r14) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when the image of Nana-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. . In the state of chasing Nana (r16), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink corresponding to Nana's speaking. After that, as shown in (r17), when the image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the state of chasing Maid B & Nana in (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right blinks in pink corresponding to the fact that Nana-chan's character is speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when the image of Bakuchu running away is displayed, the subtitle display "Woo!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Wow!" is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. Also, in the state of (r18) Bakuchu escape, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Bakuchu escape. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r19), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when the image of Mumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Mumu-chan's line "Wait!" be done. In the dream-chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to the lines from Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing after Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle display "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the state of Chasing Dreams & Jam (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left blinks in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character uttering lines. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in green corresponding to the speech of Yume-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the town background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Dangerous!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Dangerous!" is displayed. In addition, as a physical sound, the footsteps of Bakuchu "ta-ta-ta-ta" are output. In addition, in the state of (r23) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange when the AD performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Ah!" is output as the dialogue sound of the AD, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Too!" is output as the speech sound of maid A, but the caption is not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the maid B character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B. As shown in FIG. After that, as shown in (r29), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue when the maid B performs the action of jumping. At this time, as maid B's voice, the same voice as maid A's voice, "Too!", is output, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink when Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r33), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple when Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Jam-chan's dialogue sound "Torya!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), when the character of Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green when Yume-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Yume-chan's dialogue sound "Oyaa!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image in which the faces of the six characters are close-up is displayed on the divided screen. As shown in (r36), when the image of the six teammates up is displayed, the subtitle display "This is the last!" corresponding to the line "This is the last!" of the six teammates is displayed. In addition, in the state of (r36) 6 allies are up, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the fact that the 6 allies are speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the image of 6 teammates up is continuously displayed. Also, in the state of (r37) with 6 teammates up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed along with the background of the city. Also, in the Bakuchu display state of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (r39), Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabe!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabe!!!" is displayed. be. Also, in the Baku-chu-up state of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red corresponding to Baku-chu's speech.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with concentration lines superimposed on the image of Baku-up. In addition, in the state of (r40) "Explosion Chew Up + Button Display", the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid period of button operation, as shown in (r41), three main characters of the pachinko game machine 1, Nana-chan, Yume-chan, and Jam-chan, cut in on the screen. is displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed as an interrupting image in the currently displayed image. Also, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is green. Also, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green according to the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is over, an image of six people jumping toward Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of cut-in (r42), the BGM is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six teammates. After that, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen on which Bakuchu is displayed is displayed. After that, as shown in (r45), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the 6 teammates that are larger than those in (r43) are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when an explosion that is enlarged more than that at (r44) is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than at (r45), the subtitle display "I'm cornered!" !” is displayed. In addition, in the state of (r47) in which six teammates are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white in response to the fact that six teammates are speaking. After that, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of six people are alternately displayed. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to operation prompting is output for prompting the player to perform an operation in response to the trigger display gathering in the center. Also, in the state of (r49) to the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is gathered in the center of the screen rather than (r49). As indicated by (r50), in response to the trigger display coming together in the center, a sound corresponding to the prompting of operation is output for prompting the player to perform the operation. Also, in the state of (r50) to the center of the trigger display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. FIG. At this time, the words "Close!" are superimposed on the Bakuchu image, and a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed. In the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to operation promotion is output for prompting the player to perform the operation. Also, in the state where the closing display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. FIG. At this time, the words "Close!" are superimposed on the Bakuchu image, and a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r51). In the state where the closing display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (r53), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. FIG. At this time, the words "Close!" are superimposed on the Bakuchu image, and a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r52). In the state where the closing display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as a still image 4, which is the scene before the win/fail decision. At this time, the words "Close!" are superimposed on the Bakuchu image, and a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed. The time gauge has decreased since (r53). In a state in which the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as a pre-determination scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From the state of (r54), when it is determined that the game will be a big hit in the SP final reach, the process proceeds to the effect of (s1). From the state of (r54), if it is determined that the game will be lost in the SP final reach, or if it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the production of (u1).

[Production mode in the hit epilogue part (SP final reach)]
133 to 136, description will be given of the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big winning game state by developing a story in which six players catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen in accordance with the start of the character object falling. be done. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing to the second half of the SP reach. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the accessory falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state of (s3), the character is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the character is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. From the state of (s3), an effect is executed in which the accessory rises. After that, as shown in FIG. 134(s4), in the state after the rising of the character object, a scene in which Mumu-chan caught Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "Uh, I got caught" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Uh, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu in (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Also, in the state of (s4), BGM for winning is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(s5), an image of the six people being happy to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s5), the subtitle display "Everyone did it!" corresponding to Mumu's line "Everyone did it!" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of the six people happily catching Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s6), the subtitle display "You did it, everyone!" is continuously displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 135(s7), an image of the six people being happy with Bakuchu being caught is displayed in a graphic style still image. In the state of the still image of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 becomes rainbow lighting (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), a design effect is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the pattern of "222" is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized with concentrated lines. The game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in the state of drawing out the symbols in (s8). Thereafter, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (s8). The game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in the state of drawing out the symbols in (s9). After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in the lost epilogue part (SP final reach)]
137 to 138, description will be given of the effect mode in the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The lost epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which it is reported that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state by developing a story in which six players have failed to catch Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 137(u1), an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed in the missing epilogue part of the SP final reach. In addition, in the state of (u1) Bakuchu Escape, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) corresponding to the failure to catch the Bakuchu. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed in which the Bakuchu runs far away and the six people who could not catch the Bakuchu are disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), the subtitle display "I was sorry~" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I was sorry~" is displayed on the screen of regret. As shown in (u2), in a disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights in white that is darker than the white in (tu1) indicating the lighting mode in (u1).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(u3), the screen is darkened. The game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the screen darkening state of (u3). After that, as shown in FIG. 138(u4), the symbol "232", which is the losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state (u4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) indicating the lighting mode of (a1). From the state of (u4), when it is determined that the win will be a relief hit, the process proceeds to the effect of (v1).

[Production Mode in Relief Winning Part]
139 to 140, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the relief winning part. The redemption winning part is a part in which a story is developed by a redemption effect that becomes a big hit after the development of the losing story. In the relief per part, a premium character corresponding to relief (resurrection) named Mr. Drum, who did not appear in other Reach, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the relief winning part, a relief effect is executed in which a character called Mr. Drum is displayed on the screen. By displaying Mr. Drum, the player can recognize that the resurrection hit is disguised as a loss. In the relief effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen is whited out. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (v3), the design of "222" is enlarged in the design display, and the design is emphasized with concentrated lines. In the state of drawing out the symbols (v3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (v3). The game effect lamp 9 flashes in white in the state of drawing out the symbols (v4). After that, as shown in (v5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size from the state of (v4) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (v5) two symbols (normal size), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production mode in re-lottery part (odd number pattern or even number pattern derivation after button operation)]
141 to 156, description will be given of the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number symbol or even number symbol derivation after button operation). In FIGS. 141 to 156, the flow of a series of effects from the detailed effect of putting out symbols in the fan effect to the button operation in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big hit display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the symbol "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (A1). In the 2-symbol enlargement state of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the (A3) 2-symbol reduction state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142(A4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of (A5) two symbols normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background is switched and the re-lottery effect is started. In the state of (A6), it is a swinging period in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of (A6) two-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished.

Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period during which the pattern is swaying is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is the normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after it becomes the normal size, the pattern fluctuation of the re-lottery part continues. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is lit at a timing related to the completion of the pattern output (including, for example, the timing immediately before the size becomes normal, the timing after the size becomes normal, and the timing at which the pattern swing starts). It changes from white blinking to rainbow colored smooth lighting. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth pattern display from pattern display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to shaking period, and blessing by pattern matching by screen and lamp light emission. After that, during the pattern shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the state of (A7) two-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the period of pattern fluctuation, a screen in which the pattern is displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is extinguished in the state of two-symbol swing. After that, as shown in (A9), the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8) during the start period of movement due to the re-lottery effect. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, the number used as the decoration pattern changes at high speed from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. When the switching display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative patterns are sequentially replaced with other patterns, so that the decorative patterns are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are lightly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the change state of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. After that, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during the high speed fluctuation. In the state of three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. 145 (A13) to 148 (A23), such as 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, 7 patterns, 1 pattern, etc., so that the patterns are changed while changing at high speed, and the display is thin. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24) in which the two symbols are clearly displayed again after one cycle of the high-speed fluctuation starting from the two symbols, the button image and the time gauge are faintly displayed under the two symbols. After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed when the two symbols are displayed lightly during the high speed fluctuation. After that, 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, 7 patterns, 1 pattern, 2 patterns, 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, 6 patterns, etc. from Fig. 149 (A26) to Fig. 156 (A46) , the pattern is changed while fluctuating at high speed, and the light display and the clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it is determined that the odd-numbered symbol will be derived, the process proceeds to the presentation of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even numbered pattern will be derived, the process proceeds to the presentation of (C1).

[Production mode in re-lottery part (odd number symbol derivation after button operation)]
157 to 160, description will be given of the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd symbol derivation after button operation). In FIGS. 157 to 160, the flow of a series of effects until the odd-numbered symbols are derived after the button operation is operated in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157(B1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "333" indicating the result of the big hit display is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the state of 3-pattern enlargement, the background is brightened, the pattern of "333" is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the (B1) 3-symbol enlargement state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B2), the symbol combination "333" is displayed in an enlarged manner compared to the state of (B1). In the 3-symbol enlargement state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B3), the symbol combination "333" is reduced and displayed. In the 3-symbol reduction state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the 3-symbol reduction state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the (B5) 3-symbol normal size state, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "333" shakes up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of (B6) 3-symbol shaking, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The pattern shaking period also continues in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background shaking state of (B7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative symbol "333" is determined and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (B8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B9), the symbol fixing period continues. In the symbol fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow-colored blinking lighting mode. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), after the mode of the game effect lamp 9, the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed. At this time, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in the fanfare mode.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation)]
161 to 164, description will be given of the mode of presentation in the re-lottery part (derivation of even-numbered symbols after button operation). In FIGS. 161 to 164, the flow of a series of effects until the even-numbered symbols are derived after the button operation is operated in the re-lottery effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), the effect of putting out a symbol is executed in which the decoration symbol combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the background becomes brighter, the "222" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by the concentrated lines. In the 2-symbol enlargement state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in the state of (C1). In the 2-symbol enlargement state of (C2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C3), the symbol combination "222" is reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162(C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the 2-symbol reduction state of (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in the normal size. In the state of the two-symbol normal size (C5), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a shaking period occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is raised from the normal position. In the state of the two-symbol swing of (C6), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The pattern shaking period also continues in the normal background of (C7). In the normal background shaking state of (C7), a screen is displayed in which the pattern is lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative symbol "222" is determined and stopped. Also, during the symbol fixing period of (C8), the small symbols are also fixed and stopped at "222". During the symbol fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C9), the symbol fixing period continues. In the symbol fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the smooth lighting of the rainbow color. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), after the mode of the game effect lamp 9, the screen is switched to a screen in which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed. At this time, the lighting of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in the fanfare mode.

<Description of Characteristic Portions in Effect Mode of Pachinko Machine 1>
Next, a detailed description will be given of the characteristic portions and modifications of the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above.

(Start 5)
The aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the fanning part starts. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect that is executed in the back invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect is executed with the character. may

(Start 6)
Further, the shutter described above is in a form in which it closes from the upper and lower ends of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Also, the shutters may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a fusuma (sliding door). Alternatively, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Also, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, just before the shutter closes completely as shown in FIG. 58(a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen luminance is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of incongruity can be eliminated. . When the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60(a16), it is possible to eliminate the discomfort.

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the SP first half reach is not started and the screen brightness is gradually increased, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect proceeds. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to execution of the effect before the shutter is opened because the effect of the SP first half reach is the effect that the player wants to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 57(a9) described above, the brightness of the screen decreases first before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter closes completely at the timing when the shutter closes completely. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered in conjunction with the shutter closing timing, the speed of the screen darkening may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the speed of screen darkening can be made appropriate, and a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

(Start 12)
In addition, until the shutter is opened, the player does not know which SP first half reach is to be started. According to this, it is possible to have expectations about which production will be executed.

(Start 13)
It should be noted that the effect by the shutter described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, it may be the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-run. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in active pending, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may be changed (for example, from blue to green). In addition, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation by the shutter.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter is closed and automatically opened, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed and the shutter is opened by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of kinds of effects by the shutter are provided, the attraction of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Provocation 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned agitation part for inciting the right or wrong has a production that is updated by the development in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternately fight (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Provocation 2)
Also, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like described above, in the teasing part, the lines of the teammate character are generated first, and the subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in the teasing part.

(Instigation 3)
Note that the caption display of the teammate character displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the caption display in another scene of the teasing part. According to this, the ally character can be recognized firmly.

(Instigation 4)
Also, as shown in FIG. 67(b17) and the like described above, there is a scene in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the caption display of the teammate character that is displayed first, and to show the screen display more preferably than adding the caption display to all the lines.

(Instigation 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned inflection part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first inflection part executed in the first half timing, and SP second half reach A as the second inflection part executed in the second half timing , SP latter half reach B, and SP final reach. In addition, there is a scene in which the ally character plays an active role in both the first and second teasing parts. Also, in any of the teasing parts, the line of the friendly character was generated first, and the caption corresponding to the line was displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts.

(Instigation 6)
In addition, in the agitation part mentioned above, in the agitation part corresponding to reach B in the first half of the SP, Yume-chan's character is active, and in the agitation part corresponding to the second half of SP reach B, the characters of Jam-chan and Nana-chan are active. There were occasions when it worked. In Reach B in the first half of the SP, a line by Yume-chan, who is an ally character who plays an active role first, is generated, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. In Reach B in the second half of the SP, dialogues by Jam-chan and Nana-chan, the friendly characters who are active first, were generated, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the friendly character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts. In addition, the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Also, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half of the excitement part.

(Provocation 11)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and (b6), there is a scene in which each character speaks a line under a situation in which an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue is displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs getting angry.

(Inciting cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127(r39) to 128(r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the caption display is displayed before the prompt display of the button image is displayed. According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen while paying attention to the subtitle display, the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. can be done.

(Inciting cut-in 3)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 128(r41) to 130(r47), there is no dialog for a predetermined period after the cut-in display ends. Then, after a predetermined period of time without words has passed, the words are spoken, and subtitles are displayed for the said words. According to this, the player can concentrate on the effect during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be performed.

(Yes or No 1)
In addition, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene of the success/failure decision was between the fanning part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning/failing determination, the player is informed whether or not the player has won a big hit after operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was moved after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the attraction of the presentation is improved by making it a suitable scene for deciding whether to use the operating means.

(Yes or No 2)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles are displayed by the teammate character, and then, on the screen corresponding to the operation means, The effect that was being executed becomes invisible. Then, the effect executed after that becomes recognizable again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, and to display the performance that has been firmly executed at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be favorably shown. .

(Yes or No 3)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling operation of the operating means are displayed, are also being staged. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the image (the image of (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to make the player pay attention to the development of the effect.

(Yes or No 4)
132 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54), when the trigger image as the promotion display was displayed, the tail slightly moved at each image change in the Bakuchu image. In this way, the effect may proceed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include a scene change or a character action instead of just moving the tail. According to this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the development of the presentation during the promotion display.

(Yes or No 5)
Further, the effect progressing while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the effect executed before the prompting display is displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the prompting display for operating the operation means, and to balance the prompting display and the progress of the effect. It should be noted that the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed may be slower than the effect that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect during display of the promotion display and during display of the introductory image.

(Yes or No 6)
Also, it is preferable to echo the dialogue before the introduction image is displayed as shown in FIG. 130 (r47). According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(Yes or No 7)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 130(r47) to 131(r49) described above, the introductory image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introductory image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introductory image and the caption display from overlapping.

(Yes or No 14)
95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image displaying the two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39), 1 A single image is displayed while stationary for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is statically displayed for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused for use, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data and favorably promote the success/failure decision scene. It should be noted that during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as many images (for example, 10) as shown in FIGS. may be used.

(Yes or No 16)
131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is an introductory image display period in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed in the center of the screen. Afterwards, there is a period of time during which prompts for activating the trigger are displayed. During the display period of the prompt display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning/failing determination, if the game is a big hit, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if the game is lost, the video of the losing epilogue part is played. These periods are periods during which dynamic display is performed in which images appear to be moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

(Yes or No 18)
In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scene shown in FIGS. 133(s1) to 136(s10) and FIGS. In the winning epilogue part, an image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character action. Also, in the unsuccessful epilogue part, the screen turns black after the production corresponding to the unsuccessful epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since it becomes the flow which switches a plurality of images after the scene of winning/failure determination, it can be set as the flow of suitable production|presentation.

(Epilogue 1)
The winning epilogue part described above is a part that does not transition when the game is lost, and is a part that has a scene in which the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene in which the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the production is smaller than in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be favorably shown.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the teasing part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are added to the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage (scene of catching crabs) in the winning epilogue part. According to this, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles that were not displayed in the inciting part are displayed, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in FIGS. 134(s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the introductory part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. It should be noted that, when the caption display is displayed, the larger the number of characters, the longer it may be displayed than the smaller the number. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the introductory part, the period during which the subtitles are displayed is longer in the winning epilogue part. should be designed as

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in FIGS. 134(s6) to 135(s8), the final caption display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the design effect is executed. . According to this, it is possible to prevent the caption display from being covered with the decoration pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message in the effect of the pattern display. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of designing is completed and the player can recognize the decoration pattern, the decoration pattern and the image such as the character displayed as the background become a still image. there is According to this, it is possible to prevent the decoration pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decoration pattern is a moving image.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the symbol presentation effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of drawing out the pattern.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135(s7) described above, the still picture displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special graphic style. According to this, by adding a special effect to the still picture, it is possible to make a suitable epilogue part by emphasizing that the picture is still and suggesting that the scene has changed.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the caption display before the pattern display shown in FIG. 134(s6) described above should not have the fade effect of gradually erasing the display. Here, a fade effect may be added to the caption display that is displayed at other timings to gradually erase the display. According to this, except for the final subtitle display, it is possible to effectively switch by adding a fade effect, and by instantaneously erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display overlaps the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and the misunderstanding that it is a message in the performance of designing. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decoration pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are in the process of being changed while enhancing the production effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols, and to make a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decoration pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. Here, the movement of the decorative design and the small design may be synchronized at the timing when the design of the decorative design is completed. Concretely, during the pattern shaking period in which the decoration pattern is completed and the pattern swings up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same motion as the decoration pattern. According to this, by synchronizing the movement of the decoration pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the effect in the winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in FIGS. 157(B1) to 158(B5) described above, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed during the effect of drawing out patterns in the re-lottery part. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being changed and displayed while increasing the performance effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decoration pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are aligned once when the design is produced. Then, in conjunction with the shift to the re-lottery part, both the decoration design and the small design may change again. According to this, the decoration pattern and the small pattern can be displayed in a suitable manner in synchronization.

(Re-lottery production 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the design presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative patterns are displayed in a trembling manner, and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when the background is switched from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with the concentrated lines is continuously added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smooth rainbow lighting to extinguished. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery production, the pattern fluctuation and effect mode continue, and the background and the lamp are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decoration pattern the re-lottery effect started.

(Re-lottery production 6)
As shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the reduced size decorative pattern is used to advance the pattern, and the button is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, an effect of displaying a symbol in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed is executed. In other words, from the moment the pattern is put out, the decoration pattern that is finally notified is displayed in an enlarged manner. According to this, since the symbol is finally announced from the start of enlargement, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Re-lottery production 16)
141(A1) to 142(A5) and the pattern output in FIGS. 161(C1) to 162(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same.

(Re-lottery production 17)
In the above-described pattern display effect, a series of effects are executed in which the pattern is displayed in an enlarged size and then displayed in the normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

(Re-lottery production 18)
In the above-described symbol presentation performance, common symbol presentation data may be used in the symbol presentation presentation data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol presentation presentation data in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of pattern presentation effects may be executed by combining common pattern presentation data and a plurality of decorative designs. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data volume while favorably displaying the design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the symbol appearance effect data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol appearance effect data in the re-lottery effect.

<Detailed description of production modes>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 to 191, a detailed description will be given of characteristic portions and modifications to which particular mention should be made with respect to the above-described presentation modes.

[Regarding inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the portions (b11) to (b13) of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165(b11), the relationship between Yume-chan and Baku-chu on the screen is such that, in the horizontal direction, Yume-chan is on the left and Baku-chu is on the right. In accordance with this character arrangement, the frame left lamp lights up in green corresponding to Mumu-chan, and the frame right lamp lights up in red corresponding to Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (b11), Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is output as the dialogue sound, Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za" are output as physical sounds, and Baku-chu's footsteps as physical sounds are output. Tata-ta-tat” is output.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Bakuchu is in front and Mumu-chan is in back in the front-rear direction. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Bakuchu is near and Mumu is far away. On the other hand, the volume relationship is as follows: Yume-chan's line sound of "Wait~"> Baku-chu's footsteps, "Tata-ta-tata">Mume-chan's footsteps, "Za-za-za-za". In this way, the volume data is set so that Mumu-chan's dialogue sounds are louder than the footstep sounds of Bakuchu who is closer.

In FIG. 165(b12), the relationship between Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. In (b12), no dialogue sound is output, and Yume-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" as physical sounds and Baku-chu's footsteps as physical sounds "tata-tata-tata" are output. The relationship of the volume is "Bakuchu's footsteps 'ta-ta-ta-ta' > Yume-chan's footsteps 'za-za-za'." In this way, when dialogue sounds are not output, the volume data is set so that the footsteps of the closer Bakuchu are louder than the footsteps of Yume-chan, who is farther away, so as to match the context on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the horizontal direction, Mumu-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right. In addition, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" "Ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Mumu-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Mumu-chan is in front and Bakuchu is in the back. The positional relationship seen by the player is that Mumu-chan is nearby and Bakuchu is far away. On the other hand, the relationship of the volume is as follows: the sound of the blasting lines of "Tararumonka!" > Yume-chan's footsteps, ``Za-za-za'' > the blasting footsteps, ``Tata-tata-ta''. In this way, the volume data is set so that the farther Bakuchu's dialogue sounds are louder than the closer Yume-chan's footsteps.

(Provocation 12)
In the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the timing when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap each other, the dialogue sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting the physical sound as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output loudly, so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

(Provocation 13)
Here, a work process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, images for each effect corresponding to the variable time such as SP reach are created. In accordance with this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance in the image, sound is output that ignores reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player. Sound data is set as follows. As a result, a series of presentations can be shown favorably.

(Provocation 15)
In addition, when the dialog sound of a character whose sense of distance is far from the player overlaps with the physical sound of which the player has a close sense of distance, the sound data is set so that the dialog sound sounds louder than the physical sound. It is As a result, a sound is output that discards reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, so that the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player.

[Regarding inciting 14 and 16]
In FIGS. 166 and 167, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Description of volume level)
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in FIG. 166(A), among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1, the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and SP reach BGM will be described. The level of the volume to be output has a relationship of dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. Also, when these three sounds overlap, the method of outputting the sounds differs between the dialogue sounds with subtitles and the dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of speech sounds with subtitles, when speech sounds (with subtitles), physical sounds, and BGM of SP reach are output at the timing at which they overlap, the volume of BGM of SP reach is reduced. It is controlled to reduce the level and output. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. It is controlled to output without changing any sound volume level while maintaining the relationship of physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM.

(Provocation 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be smaller in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation while presenting reality.

(Provocation 16)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 166B and 166C, when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound and when there is no subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound, there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound. In the case, it is adjusted so that it sounds louder because the volume of the SP reach BGM is lowered. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more relevant to SP reach content than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

(Description of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. A method of effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that of FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship of the output sound volume level is the same: dialog sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Provocation 16)
As shown in FIGS. 167(B) and 167(C), the case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has subtitles and the case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound does not have subtitles are different. Only one side is adjusted to increase the volume. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[About Inciting 7 and 8]
In FIGS. 168 to 170, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r24) to (r27) parts)
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to AD. After that, as indicated by (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange when the AD performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Ah!" is output as the dialogue sound of the AD, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times in the scene where the AD is removed from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of the maid A is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue when the maid A performs the action of jumping. At this time, "Too!" is output as the speech sound of maid A, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when the maid A is released from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the maid B character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in Hawaiian blue when the maid B performs the action of jumping. At this time, as maid B's dialogue sound, the same dialogue as that of maid A is output, but the caption is not displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when the maid B is released from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink when Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white when Nana-chan is released from the screen.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r32) to (r35) parts)
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan. After that, as indicated by (r32), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple when Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Jam-chan's dialogue sound "Torya!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in the scene where Jam-chan is released from the screen.

After that, as shown in (r34), when the character of Yume-chan is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green when Yume-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, Yume-chan's dialogue sound "Oyaa!" is output, but the subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times in the scene where Mumu-chan is released from the screen.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the output speech is a one-word speech in which the player is enthusiastic. In these specific scenes, scene switching is faster than other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, the subtitles are less directly related to the storyline than other subtitled scenes. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to dialogue are not displayed.

(Instigation 7)
As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character utters lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes of r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the presentation. As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be suitably shown to the player.

(Provocation 8)
Also, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, and r34), colors other than the colors corresponding to the corresponding characters in the preceding scene are displayed. , the control for turning on the game effect lamp 9 is performed. Specifically, before the scene (r24), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r26), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the character of Maid A. scenario. Also, before the scene (r28), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in blue (r27) or white (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r30), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in pink corresponding to Nana's character. becomes a scenario that lights up. Also, before the scene (r32), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. scenario. Also, before the scene of (r34), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple of (r33) or white of (r33'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. becomes. In this way, before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, after which the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the color corresponding to the character. control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of lamps that the displayed character changes and that the player can easily understand which character is the character that has changed, and it is possible to make a suitable fanning part.

[About start 1 to 4]
Characteristic portions of FIGS. 171 and 172 are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of role product actions in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the winner/failure decision is made, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting state. After that, when developing into the SP latter half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed with respect to the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. Due to the effect image, the character of Yume-chan and the reduced “2” decoration pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red as the accessory falls.

After that, in the state of (h2), the role is further extended so that the character "P" of the characters of the role is positioned so that it overlaps the place where the reduced "2" decoration pattern was displayed. Fall. In the state of (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Also, a role object corresponding sound corresponding to the falling of the role object is output as a sound effect. After that, in the state of (h3), the position of the accessory is maintained at the falling position in the state of (h2). In the state of (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the state of (h4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. When the (h3) state changes to the (h4) retracting state, the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the character action part to the brightness data table of the reach A (flashing part) in the second half of the SP changes. . After that, in the state of (h5), the role further rises. In the state of (h5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the role further rises. In the state of (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), when the character further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the character becomes faint. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to reach A in the second half of SP begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. In addition, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP, is output as a sound effect. Note that sound effects related to the title in the second half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state of (h8), the character is further increased from the state of (h7). In the state of (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h7), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state of (h9), the role further rises. In the state of (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h8), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (h10), the role further rises. In the state of (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (h9), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state of (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of reach A in the second half of the SP is clearly displayed. In the state of (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to reach A in the latter half of the SP while the character object is rising. In addition, while the role product is rising, the brightness data table of the role product action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 to be described later) is changed to the brightness data table of SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 to be described later). ) is switched to the luminance data table. Also, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the brightness data table of the sound effect and the game effect lamp 9 is switched to one corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the rousing part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. Also, before the action of the role object, the "2" pattern is reduced and displayed at the left and right lower corners of the screen. When the role object moves, the role object falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the role object is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern "2" was displayed. do. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the action of dropping the character is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol displayed in reduced size. Then, after the role object rises from the falling position and the “2” pattern does not overlap with the role object, the effect image gradually fades, and the background and “2” pattern corresponding to the second half of the SP reach A displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being not aesthetically pleasing due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Also, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of the movement of the character, it is possible to suitably switch the effects according to the movement of the character.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the character moves and displays an effect image before reaching the lowest point of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to make a suitable changeover of the presentation including the character.

(Start 4)
It should be noted that an image related to the character object may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the production in the second half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) in FIG. 172, when the characters are raised, the characters "POWERFUL II" and the images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed. may be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance with the use of the character by providing the interlocking property when the performance is switched.

[About epilogues 7, 8, 10 to 14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 and 174, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of role product actions in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (r54) to (s4). In the scene (r54) before the success/failure determination, a sound corresponding to the prompting of the operation is output, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. Further, below the operation image, a time gauge is displayed as an operation prompting display for prompting the operation. When the player performs an action of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period of time, or when the predetermined period of time elapses, the movable body 32 as the accessory moves. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the character falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting at an angle. Here, the time during which the character object falls in the success/fail notification scene is longer than the time during which the character object falls in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed for the character object on the screen when the character object starts falling. This effect image has a more flashy production mode than the effect image when developing to the second half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the success/fail notification scene such as (s1) is rainbow colored. Note that the effect image in the scene that develops in the second half of the SP is blue or red. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern cannot be visually recognized. In addition, in the state of (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of (s2), the character is dropped so that the character "P" of the characters of the character is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decoration pattern "2" was displayed. do. In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, in the state of (s3), the position of the role object is maintained at the falling position in the state of (s2). In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the accessory starts to rise (the accessory moves from the advanced position to the retracted position). In the state of (s3-2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Luminance output from the brightness data table for the performance of the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue of the winning epilogue part when the state (s3) changes to the retracting state (s3-2) Data table changes. After that, in the state of (s3-3), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role product motions in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the character further rises. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), when the character further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the character becomes faint. By thinning the effect image (increasing the transmittance), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be slightly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Also, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the hit epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. After that, in the state of (s3-6), the role is further increased from the state of (s3-5). In the state of (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-5), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the role further rises. In the state of (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-7), so the background display is easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s4), a scene in which Mumu-chan caught Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound at the time when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line "Uu, I got caught". In the state of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 smoothly lights up in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the motion of the character object is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. While the character is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the character object returns to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the rising timing related to the timing of the start of the returning motion. According to this, since the display is switched to the display corresponding to the epilogue at the timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the character product motion ends before the character product returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image from being displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts rising. Also, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the drop position.

(Epilogue 10)
BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue when the character returns to the initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue when the character returns to its initial position. According to this, the epilogue part can be preferably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM and sound effects.

(Epilogue 13)
In the situation where the character returns to the initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the epilogue display after the character returns to the initial position outputs the dialogue sound and subtitles. should be displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle from being displayed at a timing when the subtitle is difficult to see, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

(Epilogue 14)
At the timing when the character returns to the initial position, it is sufficient to output the dialogue sound and display the subtitles in the epilogue display. According to this, the lines can be recognized firmly, and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, when the character moves from the scene before the success/fail decision in the fanning part, the mode of presentation is switched to the winning epilogue part. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character object is rising. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the role product to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the role product is rising. In addition, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part is output while the character is ascending. In addition, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the character changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), the dialogue sound is not output. . After that, in the state (s4) in which movement of the character to the initial position is completed and display of the effect image is finished, dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part in the middle of the ascending of the character, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the operation of returning to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[About Epilogues 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of captions and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of dialogues of the characters being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the dialogues for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of captions is 5 for the number of lines of 8. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the number of captions is one for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part in the first half of the SP Reach A, there are no lines, so there are no subtitles.

Also, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of captions is three for the number of lines of five. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the number of captions is three for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach B, there is no dialogue and no subtitles. In the case of SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is 14 for the number of lines of 16. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part in the latter half of the SP reach A, the number of captions is one for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines.

Also, in the case of SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is seven for nine lines. Also, in the case of the hit epilogue part in the SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is three for the number of lines. In the case of the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines. Also, in the case of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is 19 for the number of lines of 27. Also, in the case of the epilogue part for the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is two for the number of dialogues. In the case of the missing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the number of subtitles is one for the number of lines.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of displaying captions to characters' dialogues in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying captions to characters during SP reach, which is the inciting part. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of blessing by clearly showing what the character is saying in the hit epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part, and each type has a different presentation development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to convey the effect by switching images first, so that the effect is not disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. . Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 1, 4, 5, 7-18]
In FIGS. 176 and 177, characteristic parts of the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the re-lottery part)
FIG. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23) in the re-lottery part. FIG. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of (A24) to (A46) in the re-lottery part.

When the big hit display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then the symbols are reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period during which the pattern is shaking is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is the normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after it becomes the normal size, the pattern fluctuation of the re-lottery part will continue. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is lit at a timing related to the completion of the pattern output (including, for example, the timing immediately before the size becomes normal, the timing after the size becomes normal, and the timing at which the pattern swing starts). It switches from white blinking to rainbow colored smooth lighting. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth pattern display from pattern display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to shaking period, and blessing by pattern matching by screen and lamp light emission.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), it becomes a swinging period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the central "2" pattern is once reduced. After that, all of the ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' used as decorative patterns are displayed from (A11) to (A23). A fast variation is performed at . After that, again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" used as decorative patterns are displayed from (A10') to (A23'). Fast variation is performed in a manner that

After that, as shown in (A24), after two cycles of all decorations, the initially displayed "2" pattern and the button image are faintly displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decoration pattern fluctuates at high speed to "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and the passage of time The time gauge displayed under the button image decreases accordingly. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the operation valid period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the operation valid period and the valid period of the button operation ends, odd numbers as shown in FIGS. Symbols or even-numbered symbols are derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a big win.

(Re-lottery production 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, or swayed, and then the "2" symbol is used for the re-lottery. The performance begins. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

(Re-lottery production 4)
At the start of the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the variation starts from the state where the decoration pattern that was displayed from the hit epilogue part is reduced. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of presentations well without executing the process of changing to a different decoration pattern.

(Re-lottery production 5)
In the pattern feed effect, the reduced pattern starts to change, and the size of the pattern during the change is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smoothen the appearance of the variation at the time of the pattern feed effect, and to show the flow of the series of effects well.

(Re-lottery production 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, or swayed, and then the "2" symbol is used for the re-lottery. The performance begins. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown.

(Re-lottery production 8)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order, and again, ``2''. , '3', '4', '5', '6', '7', '1', and all the decoration patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decoration patterns are sent in order, it is possible to clearly show the flow of the series of presentations.

(Re-lottery production 9)
In the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the patterns are displayed with the degree of transparency of the pattern when temporarily stopped, and the degree of transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, "2" pattern with 0% transparency, "2" pattern with 50% transparency, "3" pattern with 0% transparency, "3" pattern with 50% transparency, transparent Patterns are switched such as a "4" pattern with a degree of 0% and a "4" pattern with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the patterns can be clearly displayed in a mode with low transparency during the pattern feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of pattern is being sent.

(Re-lottery production 10)
In the pattern sending effect in the re-lottery effect, all the decorative patterns such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" are sent in order, but each pattern is The times displayed are the same. According to this, all patterns can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of performances can be shown well.

(Re-lottery production 11)
During the pattern feed effect, a promotion display formed from the button image and the time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative pattern during the pattern feeding effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may be partially overlapped with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

(Re-lottery production 12)
As shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the prompting display is started at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation of displaying all the decoration symbols during the symbol feed effect. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feeding pattern is repeated twice in this manner, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feeding effect.

(Re-lottery production 13)
The symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than the 2 symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the action prompting display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display was displayed was the timing at which 2 symbols were displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols to be sent is the same regardless of which symbol the re-lottery effect is started. According to this, since control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery production 14)
In the lottery effect, there is a pattern that displays an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern that displays an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) and then displays an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns). was established. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery production 15)
In the lottery effect, a pattern to display an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns), a pattern to display an even numbered pattern (for example 2 patterns) and then an odd numbered pattern (for example 3 patterns), Common data is used in any of the patterns in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed and then odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed. In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design is such that the data relating to the decorative design is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[About Inciting 21-27]
In FIGS. 178 to 181, characteristic parts of the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the teasing part, a fade effect is added to the subtitles for the lines. The fade effect is an effect composed of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178(A), part of the production with a fade effect in SP first half reach A, which is a fanning part, will be described.

In the state of (b4), a screen is displayed in which Mumu-chan and Bakuchu face each other. After that, as shown in (b4'), the caption "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line is displayed with a transmittance of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the caption "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's lines is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is added when subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed. In the state (b4'), the dialogue sound "I found it" is not output, and the dialogue sound is output when the caption transparency is 0% as in the state (b5). .

After that, as shown in (b5'), a layer under the subtitle with a transparency of 0% for "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's dialogue is added to the layer below the subtitle with a transparency of "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's dialogue. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. After that, as shown in (b5''), the caption "I found it" and the caption "I found it" are both displayed with a transmittance of 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the caption "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's lines is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the caption of "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's lines gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). In states (b5′) and (b5″), the dialogue sound “found” is not output. is being output.

As shown in FIG. 178(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. For example, in FIG. 178(B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progress of the song sung by Nana-chan. Immediately after that, the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed according to the progress of the song, saying, "Grab it with this small hand." When such subtitles (lyrics) during the jackpot round are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand.

(Provocation 21)
In the fanning part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the characters' lines. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

(Provocation 22)
As shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of one character is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue of another character. There is something. In this case, the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 70% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first caption fades out, and the second caption fades in, resulting in display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fading effect.

(Modified example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same timing, the fade effect may be applied to either one of the two subtitles instead of applying the fade effect to both of the two subtitles. . Specifically, a pattern in which no fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display, and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. A pattern without . Either of the patterns may be applied by replacing the above-described pattern of adding a fade effect to the first caption display and adding a fade effect to the second caption display. Also, when adding a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed under the first subtitle display.

In addition, the subtitles for the lines of the first character and the second character have been described for the case where the subtitles are displayed at the same timing. However, when the same character continuously utters lines, the subtitle display for the second line may overlap after the subtitle display for the first line. In such a case, a fade effect may be added to the caption display.

(Provocation 24)
As shown in FIG. 178(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is representative music of the contents installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the operation of applying the fade effect during the big win round, and the series of performances can be shown well.

(Regarding the relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the caption transmittance and the sound output with respect to dialogue. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Mumu-chan's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. The horizontal axis of the graph in FIG. 179 indicates the number of frames. The caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. During this period, the sound of "I found it" is not output.

After that, during the period in which the dialogue sound of "I found it" is output, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, during a period T1, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the dialogue sound of "I found it", the caption "I found it" is continuously displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. . Thereafter, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining one frame period of T1. As a result, the caption "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

In addition, during the period of T1, the dialog sound of "found" is not output either, but the subtitle of "found" is faded in from one frame after the start of the period of T1. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transmittance of 70% after one frame from the transmittance of 100%. Further, one frame later, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the caption "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, during the period in which the dialogue sound of "found" is output, the subtitle of "found" is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. Then, during a period T2, which is a three-frame silence period after the output of the dialogue sound of "found" is completed, the subtitle of "found" continues to be displayed with a transmittance of 0% for two frames. After that, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transmittance of 0% to 100% for the remaining one frame period of T2. As a result, the caption "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first subtitle of "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's character and the second subtitle of "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's character have the same fade-in and fade-out fades. effect is applied. Also, the fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas the fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Provocation 23)
As shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, and is output during the period in which the fade effect is applied. not. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialog sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the presentation by sight and hearing.

(Comparison of subtitles between the provocation part and the epilogue part)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the parts (b4) to (b6) in the fanning part. Also, FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (o3) to (o5) portions. FIGS. 180(A) and 180(B) are common in that subtitles are continuously displayed for lines spoken by two characters. However, between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B), the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different.

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in parts (b4) to (b7), in (b4), Mumu-chan and Bakuchu face each other. After that, in (b5), the first subtitle corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I found it" is displayed. After that, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed. After that, in (b6'), Mumu-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. After that, subtitles corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I'll catch you!" are displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 180(B), in the portion (o3) to (o5), a shop whose signboard is the crab killed by Jam and Nana in (o3) is displayed. A first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of the shop with a signboard of a crab without subtitles is displayed. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. After that, the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is approximately 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180(A) and (B), in the introductory part and the epilogue part, subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed multiple times in one scene (period from 0 to t1 or period from 0 to t2). Sometimes. When subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitle display by erasing the once displayed subtitle display. However, when there is no margin in the time scale, such as the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the caption display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, by adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to make the switching of the caption easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, an image is first created, and then sounds such as lines are added. Subtitles corresponding to each line are then added. If the time period from 0 to t1, in which the time scale is not large enough, to temporarily erase the caption display, it would be troublesome to recreate the video by lengthening the period. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles without recreating the video. In addition, even if there is a margin in the time scale, such as in the epilogue part when the shop with the crab signboard is displayed, by uniformly adding a fade effect, the overall work load is reduced, and when switching subtitles It is possible to prevent discomfort from occurring.

(Provocation 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is added to the caption display even in a predetermined scene in portions (o3) to (o5) where the first caption and the second caption do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out effects may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is troublesome to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display is covered or not. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to prevent an increase in work load.

(Provocation 25)
Here, although not shown, the subtitle display timing may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from caption display to caption display is longer than in the introductory part. This is because the provocation part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part progresses less quickly than the provocation part. As a result, the introductory part is displayed more frequently than the epilogue part at the timing when the subtitle display overlaps. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort when switching the caption.

[About Inciting 27]
In FIG. 181, characteristic parts in the fanning part are numbered and explained.

(Provocation 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of caption display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed continuously. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without adding any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding subtitle display for long lines and subtitle display for fast-progressing lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur if subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incompatibility can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the caption display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is conceivable to superimpose "Found" on the subtitle display of "Found" and then display "Found". In such a case, the caption display becomes difficult to see without the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two stages above and below. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area for the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the subtitle display area. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the caption display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). Referring to FIG. 182, description will be given of the correspondence relationship between the effects using decorative patterns and small patterns on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamps 9. FIG. As shown in (B4), in the re-lottery pattern rendering effect, the enlarged "3" pattern is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Then, as shown in (B5), the "3" pattern is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" pattern is displayed with a slight up-and-down motion. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color.

Then, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" pattern continues to be displayed slightly shaking up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. After that, as shown in (B8), the decoration design and the small design are fixed and stopped based on the reception of the design confirmation command. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow color. As shown in (B9), the pattern fixing period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained to flash in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, based on the reception of the fanfare command, after about 10 msec, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, after about 33 msec, the screen is switched to display "FEVER". Specifically, as shown in (D1), the screen maintains the state of (B9) during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received. On the other hand, the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to support fanfare earlier than the mode of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Then, as shown in (D2), the screen is switched to a screen in which characters of "FEVER" indicating a fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is maintained in a lighting mode corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining a modification of designing. In a modified example, the pattern output may be executed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), the decorative patterns (reduced patterns) reduced in the scene of catching Bakuchu are arranged in the state of "222" at the upper left of the screen. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Then, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced pattern slightly shakes up and down. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth).

Then, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decoration pattern on the upper left of the screen is once erased. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lighting (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decoration of "222" which has been erased from the center of the screen is enlarged in design and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y4) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y5) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decoration pattern of "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y6) and displayed. The mode of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is white flashing.

In the pattern output of the modified example, the decorative symbols move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach state at the start of the SP reach, and the symbols are aligned during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, the reduced pattern once deleted after the reduced pattern shaking period as shown in (Y2) is enlarged from the position in the center of the screen, and the second design effect is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the video of the winning epilogue is finished, the reduced pattern is erased and the design effect is executed in which the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the pattern. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the pattern display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is displayed, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the winning epilogue part is completed, the pattern is displayed. At the time of playing, by enlarging and displaying the decoration patterns continuously using the screen end side and the screen center, the big winning patterns can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to show the scene switching appropriately. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position) are displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue image is being displayed, the reduced decoration pattern allows the player to recognize that the big winning display result is displayed.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the screen display area (upper left corner of the screen). position). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is deleted, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner position is deleted, and the image at the center of the screen is deleted. The decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decoration pattern, and misunderstanding that some kind of message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the epilogue part can be suitably reproduced. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In the modified example, the decoration pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach state when the SP reach starts. According to this, by positioning from the start of the SP reach, it is possible not to interfere with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modifications of the re-lottery. In the modified example, for example, the case where the re-lottery is executed in the order of (F1) to (F12) from the pattern output will be described. Specifically, after the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), the pattern is reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). After that, as shown in (F5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (F7), there is a shaking period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, from (F8) to (F9), the "3" pattern is reduced and displayed.

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed under the "3" pattern. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the lapse of time. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation.

FIG. 185 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12). In FIG. 185, the re-lottery effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (F12), "3", "4", "5", "6", which are used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13), A high-speed variation is performed in such a manner that "7", "1" and "2" are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol displayed before the high speed variation is displayed.

After that, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then the pattern is reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). After that, as shown in (G19), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, the background is switched to the background for pattern shaking. Here, as the pattern shaking, the pattern swings by rotating the pattern on the screen to the back side and the front side. Specifically, after the pattern swings to the back side from (G20) to (G21), the pattern swings to the front side from (G22) to (G23) to change to the initial position. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (G24) to (G25), the pattern swings to the back side from (G26) to (G27) to change to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows the case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12). In FIG. 186, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be described. When the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state of (F12), the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases with the passage of time. . After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is faintly displayed and the button image is erased. After that, all of "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and "2" used as decorative patterns are displayed from (H8) to (H20). A fast variation is performed at . After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol displayed before the high speed fluctuation is displayed.

After that, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). After that, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as indicated by (H27), the background is switched to the background indicated by (G20) to (G27). The movement of designing in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of designing in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the reduction time of the time gauge when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed in the period during which the effect of shaking the three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

After (G27) or (H27), an effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen is once whited out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state of (J2), (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), (J8), ( J9) and rotate. The rotation movement is so fast that the pattern seems to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), after the "3" pattern is displayed in a reduced size, the pattern swings to the back side from (J11) to (J12), and then the pattern moves to the front side from (J13) to (J14). It changes to the initial position by swinging. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. The movement of the symbol shaking from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol shaking from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the pattern stops neatly at the normal position.

[About loss 1 to 7]
Characteristic parts in the missing epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Regarding the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the symbol fixing period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of determination of success/failure corresponding to (r54) in FIG. (X2) to (X5) will be used to explain the details of the symbol determination period in the case of shifting from this state to the winning epilogue part. Also, the details of the pattern fixing period when the state of (X1) shifts to the missing epilogue part will be explained with reference to (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) in which the Bakuchu is caught is displayed as shown in (X2). After that, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, it becomes a pattern confirmation period such as (B8) in which the pattern is fixed and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), there is a fanfare period like (B11). After that, as shown in (X5), it becomes a jackpot round period.

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the unsuccessful epilogue part, as shown in (X6), an image of the state of disappointment (u2) that Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. After that, as indicated by (X7), the background is blacked out, and the symbol combination indicating the result of the display of "232" being lost is displayed. After that, as indicated by (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's eye is displayed. After that, after being controlled to the normal screen, it becomes a symbol confirmation period such as (X9) during which symbol confirmation is stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the end of the pattern fixing period, the next variable display is started.

(detailed description of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. Details of the blackout will be described in the order of FIGS. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the state of disappointment (u2) that Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the background of the blackout is displayed with gradually decreasing transmittance, and the background of the middle pattern showing "3", which is one of the decorative symbols displayed in the center, gradually decreases transmittance. displayed. By decreasing the transmittance, the blackout background becomes gradually darker and the medium pattern becomes gradually clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 70% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 100%. After that, as indicated by (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 60% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 90%. After that, as indicated by (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 50% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 80%. After that, as indicated by (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 40% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 60%. After that, as indicated by (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 30% and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 40%. After that, as indicated by (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 20%, and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 20%. After that, as indicated by (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 10% and the medium pattern with a transmittance of 0%. After that, as indicated by (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and the medium pattern is displayed with a transmittance of 0%.

After that, the period from (X19) to (X20) becomes a pattern swinging period in which the middle pattern "3" swings up and down. After the pattern shaking period, an eye-catching image is displayed as indicated by (X21). After that, as indicated by (X22), it becomes a symbol fixing period. As shown in FIG. 189, the blackout of the background starts earlier than the fade-in of the medium pattern, and the blackout of the background has more stages of switching of the transmittance than the fade-in of the medium pattern. .

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, in the case of losing after determination of winning or losing, a losing pattern is displayed in the blackout background in the losing epilogue part. After that, after the switching image of the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen switches to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen at the time of failure by the eye-catching screen.

(Loss 2)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background at the time of losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, since the image and the medium pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of failure can be favorably displayed due to the relationship between the two.

(Loss 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the missing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background at the time of failure from 100% to 0% transmittance is to fade the middle pattern from 100% to 0% transmittance. It has more steps than it takes to get in. Specifically, the blackout of the background has 8 stages from (X11) to (X18), whereas the fade-in of the middle pattern has 6 stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of stages of change in transmittance is different, so the display at the time of failure is based on the relationship between the two. can be displayed appropriately.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of losing starts earlier than the change in which the medium pattern fades in. According to this, the image at the time of loss and the medium pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in. It is possible to make the display of the hour look good.

(Loss 5)
The displayed image of the lost image before blackout is switched, but the displayed image of the blackout image does not change. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that the switching of the image includes switching of the picture on the screen, switching of the angle of the video, and switching of the displayed scene itself. In addition, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that it is the same still image, that even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is slightly moving.

(Loss 6)
As a result of the middle pattern fading in as the background at the time of failure blacks out, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transmittance of 0% and the transmittance of 0%. is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes a symbol fluctuation period as shown in (X19) to (X20). In the period of design fluctuation, the period of shifting the middle design from the central position to the upper position, the central position, the lower position, and the central position is defined as one period, and the fluctuation of the design may be repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the medium pattern is faded in from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Also, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a period during which the medium pattern is clearly displayed, so that it is possible to suitably show that it is a failure.

(Loss 7)
As shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, the title "POWERFUL II" and images of main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed as information about the pachinko machine 1. be done. According to this, the information of the pachinko game machine 1 can be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[About loss 8, 10 to 17]
Characteristic parts in the missing epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when losing)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp at the time of losing and a diagram for explaining a modified example at the time of losing. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 . FIG. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp at the time of losing, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples at the time of losing. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the production at the time of loss in the SP final reach, but for the production at the time of loss in other reach such as SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In the present embodiment, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the effect (X30) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the effect (X31) in which the background image is blacked out. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of the child table WD17 in the missing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 to be described later.

After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention. An image is displayed.

A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, through the switching period to the normal screen of (X34) and the pattern confirmation period of (X35), the next variation of (X36) that is executed when the variation pattern command with hold is received is applied to the background A luminance data table for is used. The background brightness data table shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the missing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 to be described later.

It should be noted that the luminance data table for the background is maintained even when the customer waiting command is received when there is no reservation after the pattern fixing period of (X35). Incidentally, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the effect screen may be a demonstration display, and a brightness data table for demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is blinking from (X30) to (X34). And, by receiving the symbol determination command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is turned off in the state of (X35). After that, by receiving the variation pattern command when there is a hold, the special figure variable display of the fourth design unit 50 blinks in the state of (X36). In addition, when there is no hold after the symbol determination period of (X35), even if the customer waiting command is received, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 remains extinguished.

Further, as a modified example for failure, the brightness data table in each state may be different from that of the present embodiment. Specifically, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, during (X42) the eye-catching screen switching period, (X43) the eye-catching screen, (X44) the normal screen switching period, and (X45) the pattern confirmation period, the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is created. may be used. Then, the luminance data table for the background may be used in the next variation of (X36).

Here, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before eye-catching display (at the time of failure). Also, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of fluctuation.

(Loss 8)
Characteristic portions of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched even by reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking by receiving the next variation variation pattern command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

(Loss 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background with the end of the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table for the background is continuously used even if there is no reserved memory and the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received. According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the performance by the lamps can be presented without any sense of incongruity, and the series of presentations can be favorably presented. can be done.

(Loss 11)
The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers the effect of stopping the symbol confirmation. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 12)
The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from extinguishing to blinking upon reception of the variation pattern command of the next variation which triggers the start of the next variation. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Loss 13)
A modified example at the time of losing will be described. The brightness data table at the time of failure is used from the rendering of (X40) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the rendering of (X41) in which the background image is blacked out. After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the pattern fixing period of (X45). After that, when a variation pattern command with hold is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the luminance data table is maintained during the pattern fixing period, and at the timing of switching to the next change, the background brightness data table. Further, in the pattern fixing period, the last luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), that is, turning off is used. According to this, after switching to the luminance data table of the background, the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received. can be easily recognized, and as a result, the failure can be favorably shown.

(Loss 14)
The final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data for keeping the light off. In addition, the data for keeping the light off is not used in the luminance data table for the background. According to this, since the brightness data for maintaining the lights off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the failure that the lights are off when the background is displayed. It can be made easy to recognize that it is.

(Loss 15)
If there is no pending memory after design determination, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, by receiving the customer waiting designation command, the table is switched to the brightness data table for the background, so that it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the table is lost.

(Loss 16)
The first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of failure). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher luminance than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

(Loss 17)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching is easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Regarding 8-12]
Characteristic parts in the parts related to the determination of success or failure are numbered and explained.

(Detailed description of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) is a scene in which the final hype is performed before the winner is decided. FIG. 191A is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191(A), in the (r48) part, after the explosive chu is displayed as in (r48-1), six allies are displayed as in (r48-2). After that, after the display of Bakuchu like (r48-1) is displayed again, the six allies like (r48-2) are displayed. After that, switching between still images (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191(B). The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time elapses.

(Acceptability 8)
The scene before the propriety decision of (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

(Acceptability 9)
As shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friend character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that a scene in which the friend character has an advantage or a scene in which the enemy character has an advantage is developed. It becomes possible to incite the development of the game, and the interest is improved. In addition, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friend character and the enemy character.

(Yes or No 10)
The effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP last reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect even at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach.

(Yes or No 11)
At least one of the friend character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images during the slow motion period in (r48). For example, in the case of an ally character, four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, . good. According to this, by changing only part of the data while using the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully represent the state of movement while reducing the amount of data change work.

(Yes or No 12)
In the slow motion period in (r48), when the character's hair and clothes are shown to move gradually from a plurality of images, the hair and clothes move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to be visible. Here, if the number of images is increased in accordance with the motion of the slow motion in order to make the motion look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, even if the number of images used is reduced, the movement does not become awkward, and while reducing the data capacity, it is possible to express the movement more faithfully. can.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 260. FIG.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using luminance data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 to light/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11 . The sub-fluctuation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 msec) of the displayed image. The display control unit 124 controls the ROM 121 and RAM 122 when the sub-variation time reaches the timing for starting the display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the inflection part). The display control of the image display device 5 is performed based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the . The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to an effect display (effect scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the effect control CPU 120. do. The effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124 .

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272 , when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extension command for designating the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the hit epilogue of the SP first half reach A based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124 .

In the parent table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , and information specifying a child table (a specified address of the child table) to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp. In the parent table, only lamps to be controlled are specified, and lamps not to be controlled are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, the frame lamp, the character lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attack lamp 9E, the V attack lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H are the objects of lamp control. 600000 msec is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the character object lamp 9A, and the child table LD1 is designated for the board left lamp 9B. , the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuner lamp 9H.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp is 600000 msec (10 minutes). It is specified, and the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the effect control CPU 120 counts 600000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60000 times. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600000 msec (10 minutes) is clocked. In the parent table for epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as a child table.

In the child table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and a grandchild table to be referred to at each time when lamp control is performed are specified. information (designated address of grandchild table). For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) are designated for each time ta1 to ta19.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the child table WD3 for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 300 msec is specified as the time during which the frame lamp is subjected to lamp control. , The effect control CPU 120 measures 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the time reaches 3000 msec, the grandchild table specified by the child table WD3 is used to perform lamp control. ing. In the child table WD3 for epilogue per SP first half reach A, W4 is designated as a grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and luminance data used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, a grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, stores luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec.

The luminance data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the object of lamp control. For example, the frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements "R", "G", and "B", and the luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. . Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 levels of current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when luminance data “A” is output to the “R” element, a current corresponding to the “A” luminance data flows through the “R” element, and “1” flows through the “G” element. When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows through the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "F" is output. A current corresponding to the luminance data of 'G' flows through the element 'G'.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by applying a current corresponding to luminance data to each element of RGB. Also, the frame lamp can be illuminated in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on luminance data. As an example, in a production in which Yume-chan appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light red. . In an effect in which Maid A appears, data "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in blue. In an effect in which Maid B appears, data "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in Hawaiian blue. In an effect in which AD appears, data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in yellow. In an effect in which Jam-chan appears, data "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in purple. In an effect in which Nana-chan appears, data "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in pink. In an effect in which Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in red. In an effect in which Boingo appears, data "FEA" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in a cream color.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, for each lamp, "000" and "AAA" are alternately set as luminance data (RGB data) at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the time reaches 300 msec, brightness data is generated at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4. Output to the LED driver. Then, based on the received luminance data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow through the specified LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can lamp-control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data from the first specified location of the grandchild table, and when the output of the luminance data is completed up to the last specified location of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is displayed. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, output of luminance data is started again from the first specified location of the corresponding grandchild table. On the other hand, when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table designating the grandchild table becomes 0 while the luminance data is being output based on the grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in FIG. 273, in the child table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, 3000 msec is specified as the time during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec is data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec is data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec is data 3, and the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec. data 4, data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 5, data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 6, and data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 7.

The effect control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and until the count reaches 3000 msec, data 1 to data 7 are displayed at intervals of 30 msec based on the grandchild table W4. is output to the LED driver, but if the clock has not reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 to data 7, the luminance data are again output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1. When the clock reaches 3000 msec, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting luminance data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has passed.

Note that child data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) like the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later. That is, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the effect control command from the CPU 103. Even when the CPU 120 does not receive the performance control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so that different lamp controls are prevented from being performed one after another from the point where trouble occurs. can do.

Also, as in the child table shown in FIG. 193, which will be described later, grandchild data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and 10 minute data in such a child table corresponds to the child table. It plays the role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first specified position in the child table due to the timer remaining in the parent table when the value of the timer to be set becomes 0.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 235, which will be described later, luminance data is specified over 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and 10 minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer to be set becomes 0, it plays the role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first specified position of the grandchild table due to the timer of the child table still remaining.

In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to be 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with the determined single light emission, thereby preventing the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can be done. Furthermore, if the luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can.

As described above, the luminance data table consists of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. Of these, only characteristic tables are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the start part, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp for each game effect lamp 9 Information designating child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) referred to during control are stored.

FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the frame lamp, the time of the start part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified. In this embodiment, only the grandchild tables that are particularly characteristic are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "omitted" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, grandchild table W21 is specified at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7. The grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to the frame lamp grandchild table W21 in the background brightness data table shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern).

Grandchild table W4 is specified at time ta3 and time ta6. The grandchild table W4 corresponds to the grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table shown in FIG. 230 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp twice in white by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec×5) based on the grandchild table W4.

The grandchild table W11 is specified between times ta10 and ta12. The grandchild table W11 corresponds to the grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is set so that the luminance data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to reduce the brightness step by step in correspondence with the effect of closing the shutter as shown in FIGS. 58(a10) to (a12). The frame lamp lights up in red while

The grandchild table W12 is specified at times ta13 to ta18. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. Effect control CPU120, by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, predetermined from the shutter closed state as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is lighted in red while maintaining the luminance in a reduced state corresponding to the effect of gradually opening after the time is maintained.

Thus, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamps change color and brightness, such as yellow background lighting, red blinking, white blinking, and red lighting. While the brightness data is switched so that the lighting/blinking changes while changing the brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is kept in a reduced brightness state and lit in red. maintains the luminance data. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the ensuing part to the player.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(a13), the luminance data is set so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining the reduced luminance from the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It was maintained, but not limited to this. For example, even if the luminance data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining the reduced luminance after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. good. Alternatively, from the timing related to the shutter closing operation (for example, the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing just before the shutter starts to close, etc.), the frame lamp is kept at a reduced luminance and the luminance is changed to red. Data may be maintained.

At time ta19, which is the last part of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect that the shutter is maintained in a completely open state as shown in FIG. 61(a19). As described with reference to FIG. 53, "lights out" means a state in which the luminance data is "0". You can become Also in the following description, the part of "lights out" may be "substantially lighted out". At time ta19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The lamp remains off.

In this way, since the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully opened, the player can be easily informed of the timing when the shutter is fully opened by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach Frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 195 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the swing part of SP first half reach A. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 195, in the child table WD2 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, during 1560 msec at time tb10, grandchild table W3 is specified. The grandchild table W3 corresponds to the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table shown in FIG. 229 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at intervals of 180 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. . The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

The grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tb14 and for 210 msec at time tb17. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , the first 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights on white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lights on white), the next The first 30 msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30 msecs is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msecs is "000" (lights out). That is, the frame lamp alternately turns off and on over one period of 210 msec (30 msec×7), thereby blinking the frame lamp in white (white flash) a plurality of times. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec×7), the frame lamp flashes white three times, and the effect control CPU 120 performs 150 msec. When the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec×5), the frame lamp flashes white twice.

The grandchild table W4 is specified at both time tb14 and time tb17. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tb17, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A, Yume-chan explodes before the success/failure decision (big hit, loss, development of SP reach second half) as shown in FIG. The frame lamp lights up in white in response to the production that incites whether or not to catch the. At time tb18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the tilt 2 luminance data table without operation prompting shown in FIG. 249 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the timer value corresponding to the child table WD2 is Until it becomes 0, the frame lamp keeps lighting in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the winning/failing branch in the fanning part of the SP first half reach A, and the player is notified whether the winning/failing Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time tb4, the effect control CPU 120 responds to an effect in which Yume, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63(b4). , The left frame lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume-chan, and the right frame lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 63(b5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the effect control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Flash the frame left lamp in green. Further, at time tb8 and time tb9, the effect control CPU 120 displays a frame with a color corresponding to the character when there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. 63(b8) and (b9). Flash the lamp.

As shown in FIGS. 64(b8) and 64(b9), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the effect in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP first half reach A]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 196(a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD3 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD3 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

As described above, the white lighting at the win/fail branch (tb18) has the RGB data "FDC", whereas the white flashing at tc1 after the win is determined has the RGB data "FFF". At the time of winning, the frame lamp flickers in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can easily inform the player of the winning.

Grandchild table W1 is specified at time tc2 and time tc3. The grandchild table W1 corresponds to the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching an explosion as shown in FIGS. light up in rainbow colors corresponding to

As shown in FIG. 196(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196(b2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the time for the pattern output part in the hit epilogue part of SP reach first half A for the frame lamp is It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD0 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. Further, the common symbol drawing child table WD0 is commonly used in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final reach of the SP.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tc4 and time tc5 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time tc6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothed in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69(c6). Light. At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on the grandchild table W1, frame lamps are displayed corresponding to the effect of catching Bakuchu. is smoothly lit in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on the grandchild table W1, the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 197(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common losing epilogue used in the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the losing epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach A , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD4 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. In addition, child table WD4 for common loss epilogue is commonly used in SP reach first half A, B, SP reach second half A, B, and SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the losing 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp is lit in white.

As described above, the RGB data for the white lighting at the success/failure branch (tb18) is "FDC", whereas the white lighting at td1 after the failure notification has the RGB data for "888" or "444". . As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the success/failure branch (tb18). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec at time td2. The grandchild table W14 corresponds to the grandchild table W14 for frame lamps in the losing 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect in which Yume-chan is disappointed as shown in FIG. lights up in dark white.

As mentioned above, the rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tc2, tc3) switches the RGB data at intervals of 30 msec, whereas the dark white lighting at the time of losing (td2) is 250 msec, which is longer than the time of winning. switch at intervals. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the three-loss luminance data table shown in FIG. 253 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec and "111" is specified for the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , “111” is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 70(d3) and the screen turns dark. .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect of displaying the normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. That is, the grandchild table W21 that is used with the normal screen displayed at the time of failure has a lighting mode corresponding to the normal background, and is the grandchild table W21 specified by time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part. Common.

At time td4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. Lamp control is performed while switching RGB data until a customer waiting command is received. If the fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command is not received even after performing lamp control based on the final RGB data, the lamp is restarted. Lamp control is performed based on the first RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, the period from when the frame lamp is turned off at time td3 to when the frame lamp is turned on in a yellow background lighting pattern corresponding to the effect of displaying the normal screen at time td4. , an eye-catching screen is displayed and a frame lamp based on the luminance data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is lit. As described above, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of failure, after the luminance data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, the grandchild table which is also used in the start part as the luminance data table corresponding to the normal screen is used. Table W21 is used. As a result, after the eye-catching screen is displayed, there is no need to separately prepare a brightness data table that is used until the design is determined. , the performance by the frame lamp can be shown to the player without a sense of incongruity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of SP first half reach B. FIG. As shown in FIG. 198, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 199 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the swing part of the SP first half reach B. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 199, in the child table WD5 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. The grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a period of 150 msec, which is shorter than one cycle. The frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time te12, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times. Flashes.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD5, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time te17, which is the last part of the fanning part of the first half of the SP reach B, it is to fan whether or not Yume-chan will lose in the winning/failing branch (jackpot, losing, development of the second half of the SP reach) as shown in FIG. 77 (e17). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to the production. At time te18, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamp is kept lit in white with the sound muted in the success/failure branching in the fanning part of the first half of the SP reach B, and the success/failure decision is made to the player. Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time te4, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect such that Yume, who is located on the left side of the screen, faces Boingo, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 73(e4). The frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in cream color corresponding to Boingo. At time te5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 73(e5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time te6, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the frame right lamp in a cream color corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to the effect that Boingo located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 73(e6). blink.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in a cream color corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to the effect that Boingo hits the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Furthermore, at time te7, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green corresponding to Yume-chan when there is a line by Yume-chan but no caption as shown in FIG. 74(e7). Let

As shown in FIG. 74(e7), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the luminance data (subscription data) is set so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP first half reach B]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 200(a1), in the winning epilogue parent table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD6 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD6 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the winning/failing branch shown in FIG. Corresponding to the production, the frame lamp blinks in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times tf2 to tf4. The production control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the production shown in FIGS. Then, the frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 200(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 200(b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time for the symbol output portion in the hit epilogue part of SP reach first half B is set for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tf5 and time tf6 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in (f5) and (f6) of FIG. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At the time tf7, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly rainbow-colored in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 80(f7). Light. At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

Thus, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for the times tf2 to tf4, and based on the grandchild table W1, Boingo is attacked and Yume wins. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time tf7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 201(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the time of the losing epilogue part in the SP reach first half B is subdivided for the frame lamp , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between time tg1 and time tg2 for 200 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. , the frame lamp is lit in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, the frame lamp can be illuminated in a darker white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (te17), so that the player can suitably indicate that the failure has occurred. can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec at time tg3. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the production shown in FIGS. The lamp is illuminated with a white color darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tf2 to tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 82 (g4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect of displaying a normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. Further, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Luminance data table used in character action part at the time of SP latter half development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a character action part in the latter half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD8 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, the grandchild table referred to in the character action part is specified for the frame lamp. Further, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling portion) of the character object motion shown in FIGS. be done.

For example, the grandchild table W2 is designated for 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. The grandchild table W2 corresponds to the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking luminance data table shown in FIG. 228 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W2, so that after the winning/failing branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the accessories shown in FIGS. Corresponding to such an effect, the frame lamp blinks in red.

Note that during the 7000 msec period from th1 to th3 when the role object falls, lamp control is also performed for the role object lamp 9A. For example, during the period of 7000 msec from th1 to th3 when the character object falls, the effect control CPU 120 selects the child table corresponding to the character object falling motion on the character object lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. Based on this, the role lamp 9A is flashed in red.

As a result, it is possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the presentation of the falling role by the lighting mode of the frame lamp and the role lamp 9A.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the backing part of reach A in the second half of SP. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the fanning part of the reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the swing part of reach A in the second half of SP. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 204 and 205, in the child table WD9 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified. there is

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 171(h4) to 172(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to lighting in yellow corresponding to the background of reach A in the latter half of the SP, thereby making it easy for the player to understand that the reach A has developed in the latter half of the SP. I can tell you.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp shows that the player has reached the second half reach A of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time ti1, 1330 msec of time ti20, and 1560 msec of time ti11. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). At time th7 to th10 and time ti1, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1130 msec, and at time ti20, The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1330 msec, and at time ti11, the effect control is performed for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. By the CPU 120 performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is possible to use the common grandchild table W3 for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between times ti15 and ti24 and for 210 msec between times ti14, ti23 and ti35. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time ti15, time ti24, time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the grandchild table W4 is specified. performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time ti14, time ti23, and time ti35, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the grandchild for one cycle of 210 msec. By performing lamp control based on the table W4, the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W7 is specified for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38. The grandchild table W7 corresponds to the grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the tilt 1 luminance data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

At time ti39, which is the last part of the provocation part of reach A in the second half of SP, it is provoked whether or not Yume-chan and Jam-chan will catch Bakuchu in the success/fail branch (big hit, loss) as shown in FIG. 95 (i39). The frame lamp lights up in white to correspond to such an effect. At time ti39, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the timer value corresponding to the child table WD2 is Until it becomes 0, the frame lamp keeps lighting in white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes.

In this way, the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP is a reach without operation prompt, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp is maintained in white lighting with the sound muted, so that the player can easily understand the winner/failure branch (decision timing). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, “FDC” is specified for the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from the time ti36 to ti38, and further, the grandchild table W8 used at the subsequent time ti39 is "FDC" is also designated for the last RGB data. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 maintains the state of outputting the luminance data of "FDC" to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and thereafter continues to output the luminance data of "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8 to the LED driver. Since the information is output to the driver, it is possible to favorably produce the timing for determining whether the decision is made by a simpler lamp control without excessively increasing the amount of data.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the SP second half reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time ti2, the effect control CPU 120 creates an effect such that Yume-chan and Jam-chan located on the left side of the screen face off against Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. 84(i2). Correspondingly, the frame left lamp is lit in white corresponding to Mumu-chan and Jam-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Blink the left lamp. At time ti4, the production control CPU 120 displays the left frame lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan in response to an production in which Jam-chan located on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. At time ti5, the effect control CPU 120 displays the right frame lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to the effect that Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 85(i5). flash.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the SP latter half Reach A fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the effect that Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. Flash the frame left lamp in green. Furthermore, at time ti32 and time ti34, the effect control CPU 120 determines the color corresponding to the character when there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. to make the frame lamp flash.

In this way, even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption as shown in FIGS. 94(i32) and 95(i34), the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character The luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified as follows. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of the SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 206(a1), in the winning epilogue parent table used for the winning epilogue part of SP latter half reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD10 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD10 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, during times tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting at the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Grandchild table W1 is specified at times tj2 and tj3. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to the effect of catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. Lights up smoothly in the rainbow colors that correspond to the

As shown in FIG. 206(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 206(b2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the pattern output part in the hit epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is timed for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that the frame lamp is set to display a pattern in correspondence with the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. 98(j4) and (j5). Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At time tj6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothed in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). Light. At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for times tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamps are displayed in correspondence with the effect of catching Bakuchu. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is designated for time tj6, and the frame lamp is turned on to correspond to the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach A. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 207(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP latter half Reach A, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for common unsuccessful epilogues used for the unsuccessful epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the unsuccessful epilogue part in the SP reach first half B , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tk1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp is lit in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (ti39). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified for 5800 msec between time tk2 and time tk3. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect in which Yume-chan is disappointed as shown in FIGS. 99(k2) and (k3). The lamp is lit in a darker white than tk1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 100 (k4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. Further, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B fanning part]
FIG. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the swing part of reach B in the second half of SP. As shown in FIG. 208, in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the swing part of SP latter half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game and information designating child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) referred to during lamp control for the effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 209 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the swing part of the SP latter half reach B. FIG. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 209, in the child table WD12 of the frame lamp, the time of the swing part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 171(h4) to 172(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to lighting in yellow corresponding to the background of reach B in the latter half of the SP, making it easy for the player to understand that the reach B has developed in the latter half of the SP. I can tell you.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp indicates that the player has progressed to reach B in the latter half of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). Time th7 to th10, time tn1, and time tn5, by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 effect control CPU120 between 1130msec more than one cycle, the frame lamp is lit yellow over 1130msec, time At tn14, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp is lit yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tn6, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD12, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing different grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec between time tn3, time tn12 and time tn25 and for 210 msec between time tn4, tn13, time tn15, time tn19 and time tn22. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time tn3, time tn12, time tn25, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, and time tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tn3, time tn12, and time tn25, The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, so that the frame lamp blinks white twice, time tn4, time tn13, time tn15, time tn19, And at time tn22, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

Thus, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the swaying part of reach B in the second half of SP, corresponding to the effect of swaying whether or not to catch the crab at the success/fail branch (big hit, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), The frame lamp lights up in white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is maintained in white lighting with the sound muted in the success/failure branch in the swing part of the reach B in the second half of the SP, and the player is notified whether the success/failure is determined. Branching (decision timing) can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character speaks.

For example, at time tn2, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to an effect such that Jam-chan and Nana located on the left side of the screen face off against a crab located on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. 101 (n2). Then, the frame left lamp blinks in white corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and the frame right lamp lights in red corresponding to the crab. Furthermore, since Jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP latter half reach B fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tn18, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink corresponding to Nana-chan in response to Nana-chan praying effect as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Further, at time tn10, the effect control CPU 120 displays the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is a character (crab) dialogue but no caption as shown in FIG. 104 (n10). to make the frame lamp flash.

As shown in FIG. 104 (n10), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the luminance data (subscript n10) is set so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. RGB data in the table) is specified. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the second half of the SP]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the hit epilogue part of SP latter half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 210(a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 210(a2), in the winning epilogue child table WD13 used for the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided for the frame ramp. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD13 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to blink the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF". Accordingly, at the time of winning, the frame lamp blinks in the same color (white) as the winning/failing branch and more brightly than the winning/failed branch. can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times to2 to to5. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and makes the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. Corresponding to the pleasing performance, the frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 210(b1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the hit epilogue part of reach B in the second half of SP, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating a child table (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

As shown in FIG. 210(b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol output used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the symbol output part in the winning epilogue part of the SP reaching second half B is set for the frame lamp. It subdivides and specifies a grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone.

For example, during 5000 msec between time to6 and time to7, grandchild table W4 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby making the frame lamp correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. 111(o6) and 112(o7). Blink in bright white corresponding to the output.

At time to8, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothed in rainbow colors to correspond to the effect that the final winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). Light. At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the hit epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5. The frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow colors to correspond to the pleasing effect, and the grandchild table W1 is also specified for the time to8, and the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the production that seems to be. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing the winning and the grandchild table for displaying the symbols used when displaying the winning symbols are shared, so that different Without preparing a grandchild table, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, and to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Brightness data table used in SP second half reach B loss epilogue part]
FIG. 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the missing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 211(a1), in the parent table for the common losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of SP latter half reach B, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information designating child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the common losing epilogue child table WD4 used for the losing epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, the time of the losing epilogue part in the SP reach latter half B is subdivided for the frame lamp , a grandchild table referenced in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of time tp1. The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W13, so as to correspond to the effect of failing to catch a crab as shown in FIG. to light the frame lamp in white.

The white lighting at the success/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit more darkly in white while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the success/fail branch (tn27). can be notified to

A grandchild table W14 is specified between time tp2 and time tp3 for 5800 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the effect that Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed as shown in FIGS. 113(p2) and (p3). The frame lamp is lit in white that is darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (to2-to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. The white lighting is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 114 (p4) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect that the normal screen as shown in FIG. 114 (p5) is displayed. to turn it on. Further, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach fanning part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the backing part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the final reach part of the SP, the maximum time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect and information designating the child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) referred to during lamp control for the lamp 9 are stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the final reach part of the SP. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the frame lamp subdivides the time of the SP final reach part, and designates a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. .

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 are used for lamp control of the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory action shown in FIGS. 171(h4) to 172(h10). Specifically, at time th4 to th6, the frame lamp flashes in yellow corresponding to the effect that the character rises, and then at time th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamp is SP reach. The yellow corresponding to the background of the background also appears to be hazy. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking in yellow to glowing in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP final reach, so that the player can easily understand that the SP final reach has developed. can be done.

Note that during the time th4 to th10 when the role product rises, lamp control is also performed for the role product lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the character rises, the effect control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character on the character lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the role product lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the role product lamp 9A.

As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the player to play the game on the screen indicating that the SP final reach has occurred. can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the SP reach background.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp is switched over one period of 720 msec (180 msec×4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 during 1130msec exceeding one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights yellow over 1130msec, and time tr19 and time At tr22, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1330 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow over 1560 msec.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD15, the common grandchild table W3 is used for lamp control without preparing different grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

Further, the child table WD9 used in the end part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the end part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the end part of the SP are different from each other. In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing another grandchild table for each of a plurality of timings, the amount of data used for ramp control is reduced in a plurality of ready-to-win performances, It is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table is similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tr36 and for 210 msec at time tr40 and tr47. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4. At time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, the grandchild table W4 is designated, but at time tr36, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

Furthermore, the child table WD2 used in the early part of the SP first half Reach A, the child table WD5 used in the first half SP Reach B part, the child table WD9 used in the SP second half Reach A part, and the SP second half Reach B part In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the inflection part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using it, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. When the information for executing the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is designated at time tr41, and when the information for executing the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, Grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data tables shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various values are first applied to only the R data at intervals of 30 msec. Then, at intervals of 20 msec, data indicating various luminance values are specified only for the R data, and finally, at intervals of 30 msec and 40 msec, various luminance values are specified only for the R data. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 so as to correspond to the cut-in effect (red cut-in effect) shown in FIG. 128 (r41), and lights the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for frame lamps in the common green cut-in brightness data tables shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, which will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are first applied to only the G data at intervals of 30 msec. Then, at intervals of 20 msec, data indicating various luminance values are designated only for the G data, and finally, at intervals of 30 msec and 40 msec, various luminance values are designated only for the G data. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 to light the frame lamp in green in correspondence with the cut-in effect (green cut-in effect) shown in FIG. 128 (r41).

As shown in FIGS. 128(r40) and (r41), when the push button 31B is displayed and the cut-in effect is executed, the character does not utter a line and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, frame lamps that are subject to lamp control in situations other than the cut-in effect in the SP final reach continue to be subject to lamp control even in the cut-in effect.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (the button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap each other when the cut-in effect is executed, and the overlapping of the two makes it difficult to recognize one of the displays. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding of display contents. Furthermore, the luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect and the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the frame of the same place as the lamp control in the end part of the SP final reach By being designed to use the lamp, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of the extra lamp from being mixed and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

In the present embodiment, the object of lamp control is common in that the button display and cut-in effect and the effect in the SP final reach are all using frame lamps. Not exclusively. For example, only one or more game effect lamps 9, such as a frame lamp, a character lamp 9A, and a board left lamp 9B, are used in button display and cut-in effect, and other SP final reach effects. The ramp control targets may be common in terms of point, or the ramp control targets may be common in that all the game effect lamps 9 are used.

A grandchild table W9 is specified at 860 msec at time tr49 and time tr50. The grandchild table W9 corresponds to the grandchild table W9 for frame lamps in the trigger display luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W9 to correspond to effects such that the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) and (r50). to light the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W10 is designated at the time tr51 to tr54, which is the end of the fanning part of the SP final reach. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation-promoting luminance data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in Fig. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , by performing ramp control based on the grandchild table W10, corresponding to an effect prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. , the frame lamp flashes in red, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes from time tr51 to tr54, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0. Until then, the frame lamp keeps blinking in red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), the sound (BGM) corresponding to the operation promotion and the reach was output in the success/failure branching of the SP final reach part. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, red flashing, etc., and it is possible to enhance the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the winning/failing branch (decision timing).

Here, the child table WD2 used in the boost part of SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the boost part of SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the SP second half reach A boost part, and the SP second half reach B In the case where there is no operation promotion that urges the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) like the child table WD12 used in the fanning part, the frame lamp lights up at the last pass/fail branch of the fanning part. It remains lit in white, and then transitions to the winning epilogue part or the losing epilogue part. On the other hand, as in the child table WD15 used in the swaying part of the SP final reach, when an operation is promoted to urge the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), as shown in FIG. 130 (r47). After flashing in white in an effect to agitate whether or not the ally character will catch Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. After the frame lamp lights up in red corresponding to such an effect, the switch is made to the grandchild table W9, and based on the grandchild table W9, the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp lights up in red to correspond to the effect displayed in the center.

In this way, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate in the success/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the effect seems to have stopped. can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be conveyed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, in which an operation is promoted to prompt the player to perform an operation in the success/fail branch, based on the grandchild table W10, the brightness data (RGB data) is set to "500" and "D00" at intervals of 30 msec. As a result, it is possible to suitably produce the timing of deciding whether to decide whether the decision is true or not by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is designated so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character when the character utters a line.

For example, at time tr2, the effect control CPU 120 responds to an effect such as shown in FIG. Then, the left frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to the six ally characters, and the right frame lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six teammate characters positioned on the left side of the screen are speaking lines, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in white. In addition, at time tr3, the effect control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to Bakuchu in response to the effect that Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen emits lines as shown in FIG. 115(r3). Flash the right lamp.

As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach fanning part, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. there is

For example, at time tr11, the effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to the maid A, corresponding to the effect that the maid A chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Furthermore, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. (r33) and when there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption as shown in FIG. 126 (r35), the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35). Even if there is no such character, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Brightness data table used in epilogue part per SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the brightness data table used for the epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215(a1), in the parent table for the character action used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD 16a, YD 16a, LD 16a, AD 16a) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215(a2), in the child table WD16a for character object actions used in the SP final reach winning epilogue part, the time of the character action part in the SP final reach winning epilogue part is subdivided for frame lamps. A grandchild table that is referenced in each time zone is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD16a is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is designated for 10000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning determination luminance data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is specified repeatedly. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the win/fail branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessories shown in FIGS. Corresponding to such a production, the frame lamp blinks in seven colors.

As shown in FIG. 215(b1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which the ramp control is performed for each game effect ramp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , and information specifying child tables (WD 16b, YD 16b, LD 16b, AD 16b) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215(b2), in the winning epilogue child table WD16b used for the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame ramp. Along with this, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD16b is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at times ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8). The frame lamp is blinked in white corresponding to the rise of the role object, corresponding to the effect that the display appears.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times ts4 to ts7. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby making the frame lamp correspond to the effect of catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. 134(s4) to 135(s7). Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to winning confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 215(c1), in the parent table for common symbol output used in the epilogue part for winning the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 215(c2), in the child table WD0 for common pattern output used in the SP final reach winning epilogue part, the time of the pattern output portion in the SP final reach winning epilogue part is subdivided for frame lamps. In addition, a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified between time ts8 and time ts9 for 5000 msec. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning pattern as shown in FIGS. Blink the corresponding bright white color.

At the time ts10, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow color in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated for times ts4 to ts7, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamps are displayed in correspondence with the effect of catching Bakuchu. The frame lamp is illuminated smoothly in rainbow colors, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified at time ts10, and the frame lamp is displayed in correspondence with the effect that the winning pattern is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table used at the time of notifying the winning and the grandchild table used at the time of displaying the winning pattern are shared, so that there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. , While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors, it is possible to liven up each performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the effect that the character is falling, the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. Frame lamps are lamp controlled. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and congratulate the player. After that, in the production that the ally character catches the bomb, the smooth rainbow color lighting without achromatic color is executed to congratulate the player for the big win in a calm manner. be able to. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of the parent table and child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used for the SP final reach losing epilogue part.

As shown in FIG. 216(a1), in the parent table for the losing epilogue used for the losing epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). , and information designating child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 216(a2), in the child table WD17 for the unsuccessful epilogue used for the unsuccessful epilogue part of the SP final reach, the frame ramp subdivides the time of the unsuccessful epilogue part in the SP final reach, and each time A grandchild table referenced in the band is specified. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD17 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified during 200 msec of the time tu1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, so that after the success/failure branch shown in FIG. to light the frame lamp in white.

Red blinking in the success/failure branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data are "888" and "444". As a result, at the time of losing, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is darker than the red flashing at the winning/failing branch (tr54), so that the player can be suitably notified of the losing.

The grandchild table W14 is specified for 3900 msec of the time tr2. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp is set to tu1 in response to the effect that the six teammate characters are disappointed as shown in FIG. 137(u2). Lights up in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than the hit. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can inform the player of winning in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are the same as the SP final reach child table WD17. In addition, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing based on the grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is common among different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. Thus, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to the effect that a failure is reported as shown in FIG. 137 (u3) and the screen turns dark. .

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, so as to correspond to the effect of displaying a normal screen as shown in FIG. to turn it on. Further, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in relief part]
FIG. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the relief part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD18 is included in the SP reach luminance data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the relief per part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at time tv1 of 1980 msec, grandchild table W16 is specified. The grandchild table W16 corresponds to the grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the single luminance data table per remedy shown in FIG. 254, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec, and each lamp is specified in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W16 so as to correspond to the relief effect shown in FIG. 139 (v1), and lights the frame lamp in red.

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W21 lastly specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the child table WD18 used at the time of relief is displayed first. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights up even brighter. As a result, since the frame lamp lights more brightly than the state after the notification of the loss at the time of the relief hit, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to understand the notification of the loss and the subsequent notification of the relief hit. I can show you.

In the present embodiment, once the frame lamp lights up in yellow corresponding to the normal background after the loss notification, and furthermore, at the time of the relief hit, the frame lamp lights up brighter in red corresponding to the relief effect. there were. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the grandchild table W15 is designated, and "111" is designated as the last luminance data (RGB data). may be As a result, the frame lamp is turned off in the white system at the end of the losing time. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the first luminance data (RGB data) in the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used at the time of repair. As a result, the frame lamp lights up brightly in the white system at the beginning of the relief hit after the loss notification. In this way, at the time of a relief hit, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (white) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification. It is possible to show the information and the subsequent relief winning information in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

At time tv2 of 700 msec, grandchild table W17 is specified. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2 luminance data table per remedy shown in FIG. 255 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white-based data such as "AAA" and "DDD" are displayed for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the white-out effect shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

A grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tv3 and time tv4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white in correspondence with the pattern output effects shown in FIGS. 140(v3) and (v4).

The grandchild table W1 is designated at time tv5, which is the last part of the repair per part. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the pattern output effect shown in FIG. . At time tv5, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. The frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). Information designating child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) referred to during lamp control is stored.

(Luminance data table used before prompting)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before prompting the operation). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, a child table used before the pattern starts to move and a child table used after the pattern starts to move are prepared. In each child table of these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

FIG. 219(a) shows a child table that is used before the pattern starts to move. For example, between times tA6 and tA8, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so that as shown in FIGS. Before the moves, the frame lamp is turned off.

In this way, after the frame lamp is once turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance in which the pattern starts to move, so the pattern starts to move in the re-lottery performance depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. This can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 219(b) shows a child table that is used after the pattern starts to move. Grandchild table W19 is specified at times tA9 and tA10. The grandchild table W19 corresponds to the grandchild table W19 for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 257 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 60 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to correspond to the effect that the symbol "2" is reduced as shown in FIGS. Flash the frame lamp in red.

The grandchild table W20 is specified at times tA11 to tA46. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table shown in FIG. 258 to be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which is shorter than in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. It is The effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to the effect that the symbols change at high speed as shown in FIGS. Makes the frame lamp flash rapidly in red.

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp in the luminance data table used in the re-lottery part (symbol promotion after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD20 shown in FIG. 220 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified during 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white in correspondence with the performance of the pattern output such that the pattern of is enlarged and displayed.

The grandchild table W18 is specified at times tB5 to tB9. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that the symbol "3" as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is blinked in rainbow colors in correspondence with the effect that the pattern of "3" is determined after the pattern is shaken and displayed.

Note that the flashing of the rainbow color by lamp control during the time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow color lighting by the lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, during times tB5 to tB9, the light flashes more violently than the rainbow-colored smooth lighting. During time tB5 to tB9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp keeps blinking in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, as a ramp control when the pattern is finally decided after the re-lottery, the rainbow The frame lamp lights up in color, but when the pattern of “2” is promoted by a re-lottery and replaced with the pattern of “3”, the flashing of the rainbow color at times tB5 to tB9 is once in the epilogue part of the winning “2”. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting when the symbol is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the pattern starts to move due to the re-lottery effect with the light off and the pattern is displayed in a swinging manner, the smooth rainbow color is displayed based on the luminance data (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. has a different lighting mode, and the frame lamp blinks in red. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 159(B7) to (B9), the frame lamp is designed to blink in rainbow color when the effect is started such that the symbol "3" is shaken and then the symbol is confirmed. Therefore, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

159(B7), the blinking of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" is shaken is shown in FIGS. 159(B8) and (B9). is also taken over. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

(Luminance data table used when the pattern is not promoted after the operation is promoted)
FIG. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The frame lamp child table WD21 shown in FIG. 221 is a continuation of the frame lamp child table WD19 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 221, in the frame lamp child table WD21, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W4 is specified during 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white in correspondence with the performance of the pattern output such that the pattern of is enlarged and displayed.

The grandchild table W1 is specified at times tC5 to tC9. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby producing effects such that the symbol "2" as shown in FIGS. , the frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow colors. During the time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp keeps lighting in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as ramp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. Table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and after turning off, the pattern starts to move due to a re-lottery effect, and the pattern is displayed in a swaying manner. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the luminance data corresponding to the re-lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild tables W19 and W20). As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

Also, when the symbol "2" is promoted by the re-lottery and replaced by the symbol "3", the lighting of the rainbow color during the time tB5 to tB9 is "2" without being promoted from the symbol "2" by the re-lottery. The lighting mode is more intense than the rainbow-colored smooth lighting at times tC5 to tC9 in the case where the pattern is maintained. Thus, when the winning pattern is promoted by the re-lottery, the player can effectively celebrate the promotion of the winning pattern by the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning pattern is promoted by the re-lottery. If not, the grandchild table W1 used in the epilogue part and common to the grandchild table W1 can be used to reduce the data volume.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 163(C7) to 163(C9), after the pattern output of the "2" pattern is completed, the "2" pattern becomes the normal size and the pattern is confirmed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start lighting the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

163(C7), the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" is shaken is shown in FIGS. 163(C8) and 163(C9). is also taken over. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Luminance data table used in fanfare part]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the luminance data table used for the fanfare repertoire. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 222, in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time zone is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. 160 (D1) or 164 (E1), by performing lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 once turns on the frame lamp before the fanfare display is performed. turn off the light.

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamps in a fanfare manner. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. Light up in the lighting mode. At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes. Based on this, the frame lamp maintains lighting in a fanfare manner.

[Smooth rainbow luminance data table]
FIG. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 223, in the parent table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, the maximum time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be used.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table of the smooth rainbow luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referenced in a predetermined time period are specified.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various luminance values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at intervals of 30 msec. Data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the accessory lamp and the grandchild table for the board left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the role-product lamp, "FFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "RRRR" data to be output to the role-product lamp 9A. there is The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1 to light the role lamp 9A in red. In the grandchild table L1 for the board left lamp, "FFFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data to be output to the board left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L1 to light the board left lamp 9B in white.

FIG. 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and output to the electric tuning lamp 9H. Various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as the "RGB" data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A1 to smoothly light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in rainbow colors corresponding to winning determination.

[Accessory movement red flashing brightness data table]
FIG. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and in the next 30 msec. "333" is specified. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow Haze Luminance Data Table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the yellow haze luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at intervals of 180 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow and hazy manner.

[Blinking white (flash white) luminance data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lights out), the next 30 msecs is "AAA" (lights up in white), and the last 30 msecs is "000" (lights out). That is, the frame lamp alternately turns off and on over one period of 210 msec (30 msec×7), thereby blinking the frame lamp in white (white flash) a plurality of times. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 231, in the parent table of the common red cut-in luminance data table, the time for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the child lamp control time for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec. Information specifying the table (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) is stored.

FIG. 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 232, in the child table of the common red cut-in brightness data table, the grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e) and Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) referenced in a predetermined time period for each game effect lamp 9 , L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) are specified.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are displayed only for the R data at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating luminance is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified only for the R data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W5e, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various brightnesses for only the R data is designated alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec intervals. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the role-product lamps, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as data of "RRRR" to be output to the role-product lamp 9A. there is In the grandchild table Y5d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the role lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the character lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the panel left lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are specified as data of "WWWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. there is In the grandchild table L5d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are specified as data of "WWWW" to be output to the board left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "WWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e) to light or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the attacker lamp grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and as the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data are specified that indicate different intensities at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. and 40 msec alternately specify data indicating various luminances. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances are designated only for the R data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
FIG. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 240, in the parent table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, the time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec, and the time for lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is 3970 msec. Information specifying the table (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) is stored.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the child table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, the grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) referenced in a predetermined time period for each game effect lamp 9 are , L6 (L6a to L6e) and A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various data are displayed only for the G data at intervals of 30 msec. Data indicating luminance is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified only for the G data at intervals of 20 msec. In the grandchild table W6e, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data representing various brightnesses are specified for only the G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec intervals. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamp in green.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the role-product lamps, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as data of "RRRR" to be output to the role-product lamp 9A. there is In the grandchild table Y6d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are specified as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "RRRR" to be output to the character lamp 9A. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to light or blink the character lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the board left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left panel lamp, data representing various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated as data of "WWWWW" to be output to the left panel lamp 9B. there is In the grandchild table L6d, data representing various luminances at intervals of 20 msec are designated as data of "WWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data indicating various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec are designated as the data of "WWWW" to be output to the panel left lamp 9B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for attacker lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the attacker lamp grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and as the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 30 msec are designated. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data are specified that indicate different intensities at intervals. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attack lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attack lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tuning lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. and 40 msec alternately specify data indicating various luminances. In particular, as the "RGB" data to be output to the attack lamp 9E and the "RGB" data to be output to the electric tuning lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are designated only for the G data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A6 (A6a to A6e) to light each of the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric tuning lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in. or blink.

[Incline brightness data table without operation prompt]
FIG. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the tilt luminance data table without operation prompt. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W8.

[Incline luminance data table with operation prompt]
FIG. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the trigger display luminance data table and the operation promotion luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling, the frame lamp blinks in red.

[Shutter luminance data table]
FIG. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the shutter luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W11, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, the luminance data is set to decrease stepwise from "A00" to "600" at intervals of 30 msec. specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light the frame lamp in red while decreasing the luminance stepwise.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W12.

[Bad brightness data table]
252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of the grandchild table for the frame lamp in the missing luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to light the frame lamp in a white color darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec and "111" is specified for the next 550 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , “111” is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The effect control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per remedy]
254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the per-relief luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec, and each lamp is specified in the next 30 msec. "B00" is specified for the lamp. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white-based data such as "AAA" and "DDD" are displayed for each lamp at intervals of 30 msec. is specified. The effect control CPU 120 lights the frame lamp in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit Confirmed Brightness Data Table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the winning determination luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is specified repeatedly. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in seven colors by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18.

[Re-lottery effect luminance data table]
257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery effect luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 60 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red. Thus, the grandchild table W20 is designed to blink the frame lamp in red while switching the luminance data faster than the grandchild table W19.

[Background luminance data table]
259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background luminance data table; FIG. As shown in FIG. 259, in the child table of the background luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 ( L21a, L21b) and A21 (A21a, A21b)) are specified.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<Referring to luminance data>
Although the brightness data table has been described above, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be described below while arranging it for each effect content.

268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining reference to the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, during the times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for character object actions in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 18 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the success/failure branching shown in FIG. The frame lamp flashes in seven colors in response to the effect of falling.

During times ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, thereby raising the character as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is flashed in white corresponding to the rise of the role object, corresponding to the effect that the display that seems to have caught appears.

During the times ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to effects such as catching Bakuchu as shown in FIGS. A frame lamp is lighted smoothly in rainbow colors corresponding to winning determination.

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for designing in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 so as to correspond to the effect of producing a winning symbol as shown in FIGS. Flash the lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the design.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for designing in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 so as to correspond to the effect in which the winning symbols are displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5). lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, during the time tA6 to tA8 of the re-lottery part, the child table before the start of movement of the symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for extinguishing is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the designated grandchild table, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is turned off once before the pattern starts to move by the production.

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control based on the grandchild table W19 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, thereby responding to effects in which the symbol "2" is reduced as shown in FIGS. 143(A9) and 144(A10). so that the frame lamp flashes in red.

During the time tA11 to tA46 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of the symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and the ramp control based on the grandchild table W20 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W20, thereby responding to effects such as those shown in FIGS. to make the frame lamp flash rapidly in red.

As shown in FIG. 271, during the time tC1 to tC4 of the re-lottery part, the child table for designing in the re-lottery part is used, and the ramp control based on the grandchild table 4 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, and as shown in FIGS. The frame lamp is blinked in white in correspondence with the effect of displaying the pattern such that the pattern of "2" is displayed in an enlarged manner.

During the time tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for designing in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and after the symbol "2" as shown in FIGS. In response to such a production, the frame lamp is lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and the grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. Turn off the frame lamp.

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for lighting the frame lamps in a fanfare manner is specified. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. It is lit in a fanfare lighting mode.

Thus, at each timing of each production part, a predetermined child table is set, and the production control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each production part, Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a designated grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part when the symbol is not promoted is illustrated, but other routes, for example, the symbol from the winning epilogue is shown. 192 to 260, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each performance part, as shown in FIGS. 192 to 260. there is

<Description of Characteristic Portions in Ramp Control of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the features and modifications of the ramp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open. I can tell you. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach The frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamps are lit in yellow, blinking red, blinking white, and lighting red. While the brightness data is switched so that it lights up/blinks while changing the color and brightness, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state. Luminance data is maintained to light. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the ensuing part to the player.

(Inciting 7, Inciting 9)
64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), As shown in FIGS. 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but there is no caption, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. / Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the effect in the slamming part. can.

(Provocation 10)
When a character appears, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen and Baku-chuu on the right side of the screen face each other. Light the left lamp and light the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 63(b5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

(Provocation 17)
The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow can be changed. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is possible to use the common grandchild table W3 for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Provocation 18)
The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By differentiating the times for referring to the grandchild table W4 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Provocation 19)
In any of the child table WD9 used in the backing part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the backing part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the backing part of the SP final reach, a plurality of mutually different In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing another grandchild table for each timing, SP reach can be achieved while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in a plurality of reach performances. It is possible to change the time to turn on the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of . In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table may be similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

(Provocation 20)
Child table WD2 used in the first half of SP Reach A boost part, Child table WD5 used in SP first half Reach B boost part, Child table WD9 used in SP second half Reach A boost part, SP second half Reach B boost part In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the inflection part of the SP final reach, the common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The luminance data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect and the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is the frame lamp in the same place as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to use. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in, and to prevent the appearance from being spoiled, and to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(Yes or No 13)
In the SP ready-to-win performance in which no operation prompting to prompt the player's operation is performed in the success/fail branch, the effect is given to the player as if the performance had stopped by keeping the sound muted and the frame lamps lit in white. This allows the player to easily understand the success/fail branch (decision timing). On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

(Yes or No 15)
In the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of SP, there is no operation prompt, and after the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

(Right or wrong 17)
In the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. is switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, red flashing, etc., and it is possible to liven up the effect of promoting the operation for the player at the winning/failing branch (decision timing).

(Yes or No 20)
In the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, similarly to the SP final reach child table WD17, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is common among different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. Thus, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

(Yes or No 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 lastly specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of failure, the grandchild first specified in the child table WD18 used for each relief By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the table W16, the frame lamp lights in the same color (yellow) and brighter. As a result, at the time of the relief hit, the frame lamp lights in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can be used to notify the loss and It is possible to show the subsequent relief winning notification in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the character object rises, the effect control CPU 120 gradually raises the character object lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the movement of the character object on the character object lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the role lamp 9A is lowered stepwise so as to turn off the lamp immediately. As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp indicates that the player has developed into the second half reach A of the SP. It is possible to draw the player's attention.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying a winning pattern, rainbow color While reducing the data capacity used for lamp control for lighting with , each performance can be livened up by a performance with a sense of unity. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, a grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13 and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as ramp control when the symbols are finally determined after the re-lottery. is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control while maintaining a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

(Re-lottery production 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, before executing the re-lottery effect, the frame lamp is once turned off. Since the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance after it is turned off, the player can be easily informed of the start of the re-lottery performance by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is swaying, the re-lottery effect is performed. (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp flashes in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

(Re-lottery production 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for ramp control when the symbols are finally determined after the re-lottery. be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control while maintaining a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

(Re-lottery production 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery. However, when the symbol "2" is promoted to the symbol "3" by a re-lottery, the lighting of the rainbow color from time tB7 to tB9 is temporarily suspended in the symbol "2" during the winning epilogue part. The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Detailed description of lamp control>
Next, with regard to the above-described lamp control, features that should be particularly mentioned will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263. FIG.

[Comparison of lamp control between winning and losing]
261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining the comparison of the lamps at the time of winning and at the time of losing.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, ramp control at the time of failure will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 at the end of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, thereby lighting the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect of the success/failure branch (decision timing). Also, at the end of the fanning part in the SP final reach, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is designated as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10. By doing so, the frame lamp is flashed in red in correspondence with the performance of the success/failure branch (decision timing).

After that, in the losing epilogue part via the inflection part in each of SP first half reach A, B, SP second half reach A, B, and SP final reach, first, ramp control is performed based on grandchild table W13. . In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the winning/failing branch, illuminates the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect that the teammate character is defeated in the ready-to-win effect.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W13, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at intervals of 250 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp is lit in a darker white color than the white light based on the grandchild table W13, corresponding to the effect that the ally characters are disappointed. Let

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W14, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15. In the grandchild table W15, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, "111" is specified in the next 550 msec, and the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) specifies “111”. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to the effect that the screen is darkened when a failure is reported.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as described with reference to FIG. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in . In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern corresponding to the normal background is designated as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W26 to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the normal background (background yellow lighting pattern), similarly to the start part before reach.

Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the swing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP latter half reach A and B.

As shown in FIG. 262, the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 at the end of the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, thereby lighting the frame lamp in white in correspondence with the effect of the success/failure branch (decision timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, first, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to make the frame lamp blink in white in correspondence with the effect that the teammate character wins.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. In the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at intervals of 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. In the grandchild table W21, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "AAA" is specified for each lamp in turn at intervals of 20 msec, and finally for each lamp at 600000 msec (10 minutes). "000" is specified. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the performance of giving a winning pattern, and lights the frame lamp in bright white corresponding to the appearance of the pattern.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on a grandchild table W1 to smoothly light a frame lamp in rainbow colors in correspondence with performance such that a winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the ramp control at the time of winning will be described in the case of transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the backing part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 at the end of the fanning part in the SP final reach. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to make the frame lamp blink in red in correspondence with the effect of the win/fail branch (decision timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, first, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and " 333” is specified, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to make the frame lamp blink in seven colors in correspondence with the effect that the accessory falls.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby smoothly lighting the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the determination of winning.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21 to correspond to the performance of giving a winning pattern, and lights the frame lamp in bright white corresponding to the appearance of the pattern.

After the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, the lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. A performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on a grandchild table W1 to smoothly light a frame lamp in rainbow colors in correspondence with performance such that a winning pattern is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263, characteristic portions will be described below.

(Yes or No 19)
As shown in FIG. 261, in the case of moving to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP latter half reach A, B, the final luminance data (RGB data) in the fanning part is In contrast to "FDC", the first luminance data (RGB data) in the missing epilogue part are "888" and "444". As a result, when losing in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, it is possible to light the frame lamp in white more darkly while maintaining the same color using white lighting in the success/fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has been lost. Also, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanning part contains "D00", whereas the first brightness in the missing epilogue part Data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is lost, the frame lamp can be illuminated in white, which is darker than the red flashing in the success/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably notified of the loss.

(Accessory action 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly illuminated in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data thereof are switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of losing, the frame lamp lights up in white and dimly based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than at the time of winning. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the win has been achieved. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Accessory action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the rainbow chromatic color and achromatic color (" 333” RGB data) are alternately lit. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and congratulate the player. After that, in the effect that the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without achromatic colors, indicating that a big win has been achieved. It is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

(Regarding the shaking pattern of the design)
Here, with reference to FIG. 264, a detailed description will be given of how the pattern swings. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining how the pattern swings. During the pattern fluctuation period in the fanning part and the re-lottery part described above, the decorative patterns move like the first to third modes shown in FIG. It moves like 3 modes. Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decoration pattern is positioned at the center position of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative design is positioned above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decoration design is located on the lower side than the first mode.

In addition, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decoration pattern is positioned at the center position of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is positioned to face left more than in the first mode by rotating rightward about the center of the decorative pattern as the vertical axis. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is positioned more rightward than in the first mode by rotating left about the center of the decorative pattern as the vertical axis.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect with 7 symbols. Also, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 265(A), after the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (D1) and (D2), the pattern is reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). After that, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect starts. After that, as shown in (D7), there is a swinging period in which the pattern swings up and down. After that, the "7" pattern is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed under the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed with the symbol "7" displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases with the lapse of time. The time gauge is a display showing the effective period of button operation. When the player operates the push button 31B from the state of (D12), as shown in (D13) to (D20), "7" fluctuates at high speed, and the light display and sharp display are repeated. After (D20), similar high-speed fluctuations are repeated.

As shown in FIG. 265(B), as shown in the timing chart of each re-lottery effect, the pattern feeding period when the re-lottery effect in which the symbols fluctuate at high speed by button operation is executed is the same in any re-lottery effect. be. Here, the re-lottery effect includes a first re-lottery effect that changes from even-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, a second re-lottery effect that does not change from even-numbered patterns to even-numbered patterns, and a third re-lottery effect that does not change from 7 patterns to 7 patterns. There is a production. For example, in the first re-lottery effect, when the symbol feed effect is started immediately after the button can be operated, there is a period (t1) during which the decorative pattern sways after the symbol feed period ends, and then the pattern is determined. do.

In addition, in the second re-lottery effect, when the button is operated after t2 from the timing when the button can be operated and the pattern feed effect is started, there is a swing period (t1-t2) of the decorative pattern after the pattern feed period ends, The design is then finalized. In addition, in the third re-lottery performance, when the button is operated after t1 from the timing when the button can be operated and the pattern feed performance is started, there is no fluctuation period of the decorative pattern after the pattern feed period ends, and the pattern is fixed as it is. . In this way, no matter what timing the button is operated, the pattern feeding period is constant, and the period from the pattern shaking period to the finalization of the pattern absorbs the time until the button operation. . Such a relationship is the same when the button operation is executed in any re-lottery effect of the first re-lottery effect to the third re-lottery effect.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 26-28]
Characteristic parts in the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. As shown in (K1) to (K3) in FIG. 266, even if the button is operated at any timing of the success/failure determination scene, the decoration pattern moves in the same manner after the whiteout. Specifically, as shown in (K1), when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed, the character movement and hit epilogue part are executed, and the epilogue part as shown in (K4) is executed. Designing is done. After that, after 5 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K5), the three patterns face the front.

In addition, as shown in (K2), when the button is operated one second after the promotion display is displayed in the win/fail decision scene, the character movement and winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern is drawn in the epilogue part. After that, after 4 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K6), the three patterns are turned leftward from the front. In addition, as shown in (K3), when the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the win/fail decision scene, the character movement and winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern is drawn in the epilogue part. After that, after 3 seconds in the pattern shaking period, as shown in (K7), the three patterns are turned to the right side from the front.

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol is in the front position after the symbol shaking period, at the second operation timing, after the symbol shaking period, the symbol is at the leftward position, and at the third operation timing, After the swinging period of the pattern, the pattern may be positioned to face the right side. However, even if the direction of the pattern changes during the swinging period of the pattern depending on the operation timing, after that, as shown in (K8) to (K17) as a common effect, the pattern is rotated and reduced after the whiteout. A lottery production is executed. Then, after (K17), the symbol feed effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 266, the odd-numbered symbols are used for the explanation, but the even-numbered symbols are also given the same effect.

(Re-lottery production 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, the re-lottery effect is executed thereafter. In the time until a predetermined timing is reached, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

(Re-lottery production 27)
From the whiteout screen until the re-lottery effect is executed, any reach may be common. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the effect data.

(Re-lottery production 28)
The movement of the symbol after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbol before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that sways on the spot on the front side and the back side on the axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a motion of rotating clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while enlarging. According to this, by displaying the whiteout between the extended movements of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the movement of the pattern from being uncomfortable, and the series of performances can be shown favorably. be able to.

(Re-lottery production 29)
Among the plurality of SP reach, there are those that are not notified of operation promotion such as button operation in the branch at the time of determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state. With such SP reach, there is no scale deviation associated with the operation. However, even in such an SP ready-to-win game, a re-lottery effect similar to that for an SP ready-to-win game in which scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, even if there is only one re-lottery effect, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused by the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

(Re-lottery production 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) via the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). is designed to be In other words, when the swing of the pattern is one of a series of actions in which the pattern rotates clockwise, a white-out is executed by a re-lottery effect, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotated clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from giving a sense of incongruity by a series of movements of the symbols rotating to the right from the period of the fluctuation of the symbols to the re-lottery effect.

[Regarding re-lottery effects 21-25]
Characteristic parts in the re-lottery part are numbered and explained.

(Modified example of re-lottery effect)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. (L1) is a diagram in which the operation is performed at an early timing after the display of the action prompt is displayed during the symbol feeding period. (L2) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a timing later than (L1) after the action prompting display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram when the operation is performed at a later timing than (L2) after the action prompting display is displayed. Then, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery effect, the symbols are drawn in the same way regardless of the timing of the button operation. After that, the white-out is sandwiched between the decorative patterns, and after the same movement is stopped. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the action prompting display is displayed, after the pattern output as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed, the pattern is displayed. is the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to sway, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the three symbols turn to the right rather than the front as shown in (L7).

Further, as shown in (L2), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L1) after the action prompting display is displayed, the patterns shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols begin to sway, and after the lapse of a shorter symbol sway period than in (L1), the three symbols are in a state in which the 3 symbols are directed more to the right than the front as shown in (L8). Become. Further, as shown in (L3), when the button is operated at a timing later than (L2) after the action prompting display is displayed, the patterns shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes the normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the swinging of the pattern is started, and after the lapse of a shorter pattern swinging period than in (L2), the three patterns as shown in (L9) face the front.

In this way, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces rightward after the symbol shaking period, and at the second operation timing, the symbol faces leftward after the symbol shaking period, and at the third operation timing. In this case, the pattern may be positioned facing the front after the swinging period of the pattern. However, even if the direction of the pattern changes during the swinging period of the pattern depending on the operation timing, as shown in (J1) to (J10), the pattern is rotated and reduced after the whiteout as a common effect. is executed. After that, as shown in (J11) to (J17), the symbols stop after a period of fluctuation of the symbols. In addition, in FIG. 267, the description is made using the odd-numbered symbols, but the same effects are executed even in the even-numbered symbols.

(Re-lottery production 21)
In the modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces the left side, and at the third operation timing, the symbol faces the right side. , The design may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) after that, and a pattern swinging effect is executed after pattern rotation and pattern reduction. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

(Re-lottery production 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, after notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, a display with a swinging decorative pattern is displayed (example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3) ). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid period of operation, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the fluctuation time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be neatly stopped, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

(Re-lottery production 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, as a common effect, after the white-out is executed, a different effect from the previous patterns is executed in which the swinging decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged. According to this, regardless of the position of the pattern in the shaking of the pattern of the scale absorption, by executing a different mode of production after the whiteout is interposed, the flow of the production until the pattern is stopped. It can be made not to give a sense of incongruity.

(Re-lottery production 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the swinging period of the pattern, after the pattern swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), the pattern swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14) to return to the initial position. Change. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the pattern is fixed, it is designed so that the pattern is always positioned at the initial position in which the pattern faces the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Re-lottery production 25)
It is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow color at the white-out timing of (J1) in FIG. 267 . The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the location where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start opportunity instead of the timing (J1).

<Main configuration and effects>
Technical effects obtained by various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are individually listed below.

(F2019-116)
A game machine (for example, a game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body (for example, a character, a movable body 32);
a display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, a notification effect to notify whether or not a big hit will be achieved) for informing whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect includes an introduction part (for example, a fanning part) until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a success/failure notification part (for example, a winning epilogue part) in which the success or failure is notified. a winning/failure notification part that notifies a big hit by moving the role object), and an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state after the winning/failure notification. consists of
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the first character whose dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)),
The display means preferentially displays the introductory display of the prompting display prompting a specific action to the effect display in the introductory part at the timing of transition from the introductory part to the win/fail notification part, thereby making the effect display difficult to see. state, and then perform a promotion display in a state where the effect display is visible (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 131 (r49) to 132 (r54)),
In the success/failure notification part of the notification effect, which is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body moves from a first position (for example, a retracted position) to a second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (e.g., advance position) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 133);
The display means is
displaying an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, ending the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position; Display corresponding to the epilogue part (for example, examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed for the final dialogue sound emitted by the character. Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the characters is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds emitted by the characters in the introductory part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, in each SP reach as a fanning part, the first character to say a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, it is possible for the player to accurately recognize the teammate character at the start of the SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the fanning part to the success/failure notification part, the introduction image of the trigger display prompting the trigger operation is preferentially displayed with respect to the display of the fanning part, so that the fanning part's effect display becomes invisible after that. The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the fanning part can be visually recognized (for example, FIG. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introductory image gives an impact, and the introductory image becomes the image of the trigger button, so that the effect of the fanning part can be confirmed, so that the player can be excited. In addition, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled in the production flow of the background display of the hit epilogue part until the evacuation of the character is completed. In addition, since the pattern is displayed in an enlarged manner after the display of the final dialogue caption in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message for the pattern. In addition, the above-mentioned agitation part for inciting the right or wrong has a production that is updated by the development in which the friendly characters and the enemy characters alternately fight (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part. Also, since the epilogue part, which develops slowly, is properly subtitled, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying and to emphasize the feeling of blessing. In addition, it is possible to convey the content of the fast moving part by changing the video first, and to prevent the development of the video from being disturbed by the auxiliary caption display. As a result, a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the rate of displaying subtitles for characters during the SP reach, which is the inciting part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
Using the first pattern displayed in the epilogue part, the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect is executed,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the re-lottery performance is started, the symbol feed performance is executed using the temporarily stopped-displayed symbols. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. Lottery production can be executed,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the second pattern is repeatedly displayed after the second pattern is displayed in the first half part, and the second pattern is repeatedly displayed in the second half part. It is possible to execute a third re-lottery effect to be displayed again,
The first re-lottery effect, the second re-lottery effect and the third re-lottery effect are configured to have the same effect scale,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed and then an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) is displayed. was provided. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
displaying the first pattern with the same or substantially the same animation when the first pattern is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part of the second re-lottery effect;
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, the designing in the parts of FIGS. 141(A1) to 142(A5) and the designing in the parts of FIGS. 161(C1) to 162(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the probability variation pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
By changing the display mode of the first pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part to the time when the pattern is fixed, the first pattern is displayed. Perform a shaking display that displays the first pattern as if it is shaking,
By changing the display mode of the second symbol to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the display of the second symbol in the second half part to the symbol confirmation period, the second symbol is displayed. A shaking display is performed to display the second pattern as if the two patterns were shaking,
The first mode is a mode in which the player can more easily see the pattern than either the second mode or the third mode,
The production executing means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute an action prompting display that prompts the player to act,
When an action is performed at a first timing while the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, when a predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the second mode;
When an action is performed at a second timing different from the first timing while the action promotion display is being executed in the first re-lottery effect, after the effect corresponding to the first re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the third mode when the predetermined timing is reached;
When the action prompting display is executed in the first re-lottery effect, whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the second pattern is started from the predetermined timing. Display to make it difficult to see is performed, and then the second pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second pattern is maintained while the second pattern is displayed. 2 symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, if the action is performed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first pattern so that the first pattern is in the second mode when the first pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, if the action is performed at the second timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the effect corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the first pattern so that the first pattern is in the third mode when the first pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery effect, the shaking display of the first pattern is started from the predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first pattern is maintained while the first pattern is displayed. 1 pattern is stopped and displayed in the first mode,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the luminance data using the luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. configured to

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character speaks lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the luminance data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.例文帳に追加As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be preferably executed, and the fanning part can be preferably shown to the player. 64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29 ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the effect in the slamming part. can.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position. End the display, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, so that the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene.

Specifically, the effect may be switched from the effect at the start of the ready-to-win game to the effect in the first half of the SP ready-to-win game by the movement of the accessory. Also, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion may be displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object to the screen corresponding to the first half reach of the SP while the character object is rising. Further, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the role product action part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the role product is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the accessory is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP halfway through the rise of the character, it is possible to preferably display the rousing part of the first half of the SP.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The display means is
In the introductory part, a promotional display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound emitted by a character is output, and dialogue subtitles are displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotional display in the introductory part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
The luminance data table includes a cut-in display luminance data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introductory part luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
The light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same locations as the light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the introductory part luminance data table.

Specifically, the cut-in effect and the brightness data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) are the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with station frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in and impairing the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In the period before transitioning from the introduction part in the first notification effect to the success/failure notification part,
The display means performs a prompt display prompting the player to perform a specific action,
The sound output means continues sound output,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for a first notification effect,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part in the second notification effect to the success/failure notification part,
The display means does not perform the promotion display prompting the specific action, but performs a success/failure display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect luminance data table,
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured such that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the brightness data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production, in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the win-or-fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the production seems to have stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, the first moving image data is used,
In the second scene, the second moving image data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first moving image data is moving image data in which movement of a specific character is represented by a plurality of specific character images,
The second moving image data is moving image data in which the movement of the specific character is represented by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of whether (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going into the closed mode after the closing action, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening action after going into the closed mode,
The masking display can be executed at a timing related to the introductory part,
When the shielding display performs a closing action, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs the opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the fanning part starts. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect executed in the back invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect can be executed with a character. may

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operation sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialog sound and the physical sound are output at the timing at which they overlap, the dialog sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are superimposed, the dialogue sound is output loudly so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a performance execution means;
light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
A first re-lottery for displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part after the first pattern is displayed in the first half part of the plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances. A second re-lottery effect can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is once displayed, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first pattern is swaying. It displays the first pattern,
When shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, and when the first pattern is in the second mode There is a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when it is displayed, and a transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The effect executing means, at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. The first pattern is visually recognized both when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part and when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode. Performing a specific display to be difficult, displaying the first pattern in a common display mode, and executing the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, even if the operation is performed at any timing, after that, During the time up to the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed, there may be provided a period of fluctuation of the symbols for absorbing the scale (period of fluctuation of the symbols from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and after executing the common effect with white-out, the re-lottery effect is executed. A sense of incompatibility can be prevented from occurring in the mode of movement of the pattern, and a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines in the teasing part. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and after the notification is made. and a first epilogue part in which it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the propriety notification and a second epilogue part that informs that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, display to notify that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
After that, the switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the variation command as a trigger, the variation display of the pattern is started,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for effect,
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the switching display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for effect;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for effect;
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched to the fourth symbol stop brightness data table, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. to control the light emitting means for production,
When the pattern variation display is started, the brightness data table is switched to the fourth pattern variation brightness data table, the light emission means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. and used to control the lighting means for presentation.

Specifically, the characterizing portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched even by reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking by receiving the next variation variation pattern command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

[Start 1]
Up to the win/fail reporting part, the change of scene is reported by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emitting means while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and in the course of the movable body retreating from the second position to the first position, the scene after switching is generated. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the character object motion is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to reach A in the latter half of the SP while the character object is rising. In addition, while the role product is rising, the brightness data table of the role product action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 to be described later) is changed to the brightness data table of SP latter half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 to be described later). ) is switched to the luminance data table. Also, a sound corresponding to the latter half of the SP (for example, BGM in the latter half of the SP) is output while the character is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display is not aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the luminance data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the accessory is returning to the initial position, the rousing part of the latter half of the SP can be preferably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before moving the movable body, a reduced pattern is displayed at a specific display position,
By moving the movable body, the movable body covers a specific display position,
According to the movement of the movable body, an effect display corresponding to the movement of the movable body is performed in a layer that is prioritized over the display layer of the reduced display pattern,
After the movable body starts to retreat and is no longer positioned at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to display corresponding to the performance after switching the state in which the reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the effect is switched from the SP first half reach A effect to the SP second half reach A effect by the action of the character. Also, before the action of the role object, the "2" pattern is reduced and displayed at the left and right lower corners of the screen. When the role object moves, the role object falls so that the character "P" among the characters of the role object is positioned so that it overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern "2" was displayed. do. In addition, an effect image corresponding to the action of dropping the character is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol displayed in reduced size. Then, after the role object rises from the falling position and the “2” pattern does not overlap with the role object, the effect image gradually fades, and the background and “2” pattern corresponding to the second half of the SP reach A displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being not aesthetically pleasing due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Also, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed in the middle of the movement of the character, it is possible to suitably switch the effects according to the movement of the character.

[Start 3]
The effect display is performed before the movable body moves and reaches the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the role object moves and an effect image is displayed before reaching the lowest position of the drop. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to perform a suitable changeover of the production including the character.

[Start 4]
When switching from the effect display to the display of the developed presentation, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the character may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the effect that develops in the second half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 172, when the characters are raised, the characters "POWERFUL II" and the images of the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan are displayed. may be displayed. According to this, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance with the use of the character by providing the interlocking property when the performance is switched.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the effect display invisible by going into the closed mode after the closing action, and makes the effect display visible by performing the opening action after going into the closed mode,
The occlusion display can be executed at the timing related to the introductory part,
When the shielding display performs the closing action, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the visible area of the effect display becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs the opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area in which the effect display is visible increases.

Specifically, the aforementioned shutter is an image that, when closed, renders the image of the effect being executed behind invisible, and when it is opened after being closed, the image of the effect being executed becomes visible. Also, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the fanning part, that is, before the fanning part starts. Then, when the shutter is closed, the screen brightness is reduced as the area where the effect is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is open, the screen brightness is decreased as the area where the effect is visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, the flow of production can be favorably shown by making the closure and opening of the shutter realistic. In addition, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the effect executed in the back invisible or visible, it may be an image other than the shutter, and the same effect can be executed with a character. may

[Start 6]
The image corresponding to the shield display has a shape in which a door closes from both ends of the screen at the center of the screen, or a shape in which a door closes from one end to the other end of the screen.

Specifically, the shutter described above is in a form in which it closes from the upper and lower ends of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Also, the shutters may be closed from both ends of the screen toward the center like a fusuma (sliding door). Alternatively, the shutter may be closed from the upper end of the screen toward the lower end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the effect display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, just before the shutter closes completely as shown in FIG. 58(a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of incongruity can be eliminated. . When the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60(a16), it is possible to eliminate the discomfort.

[Start 8]
After the shielding display performs the opening operation after the closing operation, the display corresponding to the introduction part is performed,
While the display corresponding to the introductory part is displayed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, the brightness of the display corresponding to the introductory part gradually increases, and until the release operation of the shielding display is completed , the display corresponding to the introductory part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introductory part begins to progress after the operation of releasing the shield display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, the SP first half reach is started after the shutter is opened. Until the shutter is fully opened, the effect of the SP first half reach is not started and the screen brightness is gradually increased, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect proceeds. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction due to execution of the effect before the shutter is opened because the effect of the SP first half reach is the effect that the player wants to pay attention to.

[Start 9]
extinguishing the light emitting means when the operation for releasing the shielding display is completed;
After the release operation of the shielding display is finished and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emission of the light emitting means is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the inflection part of SP first half reach A and the inflection part of SP first half reach B that are executed after the start part, the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, corresponding to each SP first half reach The frame lamps start lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully opened and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting in accordance with the progress of the effect in the SP first half reach. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing motion of the shielding display starts, and the closing motion ends at the timing when the effect display completely turns dark.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57(a9) described above, before the shutter starts to close, the brightness of the screen decreases first, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. It's becoming Here, if the brightness of the screen is lowered in conjunction with the shutter closing timing, the speed of the screen darkening may become too fast. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the speed of screen darkening can be made appropriate, and a series of presentations can be favorably shown.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The display means can make the effect display invisible by changing to the closed state through the closing operation, and can perform the shielding display that makes the effect display visible by performing the opening operation after changing to the closed state. can be,
The occlusion display is performed at timings related to the introductory part,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for shield display when performing shield display,
The luminance data table for the shielded display is configured so that the luminance data is switched when the shielded display performs the closing operation, and is configured so that the luminance data is not switched during the period from when the shielded display is in the closed mode until the opening operation is performed. It is configured.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights yellow, blinks red, blinks white, and lights red. In addition, the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and luminance. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up red while maintaining. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the player can enjoy the content of the effect when the shutter opens. , and as a result, it is possible to better show the performance in the ensuing part to the player.

[Start 12]
The effect display includes a display before the introductory part starts and a display during the introductory part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being performed in the start part, the shielding display performs the closing action, and then the shielding display performs the release action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are a plurality of types of introductory parts, and it is not possible to recognize which introductory part is to be executed until the operation of releasing the hidden display is completed.

Specifically, until the shutter is opened, the player does not know which SP first half reach is to be started. According to this, it is possible to have expectations about which production will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may be performed at timings other than the timing of shifting to the introductory part.

Specifically, the effect by the shutter described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing that develops in the first half of the SP. For example, it may be the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo-run. In addition, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (for example, a green pending image) that suggests a change in active pending, which is a pending display of the change, is displayed, and active pending is displayed in response to the icon image. It may be changed (for example, from blue to green). In addition, the effect by the shutter may be executed at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach. According to this, it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation by the shutter.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielded display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed after the closing operation of the shielded display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielded display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the background lights yellow, flashes red, flashes white, and lights red. In addition, while the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and luminance, in the time ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is in a state where the luminance is reduced. Luminance data is maintained so that it lights up red while maintaining. As a result, before the shutter closes, the effect in the start part is livened up by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and when the shutter is closed, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is maintained, so that the content of the effect when the shutter opens can be enjoyed by the player. , and as a result, the player can better see the performance in the subsequent fanning part.

[Start 15]
The period during which the luminance data is maintained is the period until the release operation is performed as it is after the occlusion indication is in the closed mode, or until the occupancy indication is in the closed mode and the prompting display for prompting the player's action is performed. is the period of

Specifically, in addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter is closed and automatically opened, a pattern in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed and the shutter is opened by executing a button operation may be provided. According to this, since a plurality of kinds of effects by the shutter are provided, the attraction of the effects by the shutter is improved.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the occluding display becomes the closed mode and the promoting display is performed, the brightness data that is maintained is switched to the changing brightness data, and after the promoting display is performed, the brightness data is switched to the maintained brightness data again.

Specifically, in the effect using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing the button, the infrared sensor A promotional display prompting the user to perform a motion such as holding a hand over the player may be performed, and when the player's motion corresponding to the promotional display is detected, an effect such as opening the shutter may be performed. While the shutter display is in the closed state, lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, the frame lamp) is maintained, while the shutter display is closed. At the timing when the promotional display is performed in the mode, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is switched to a luminance data table in which the lighting mode changes, lamp control is performed based on the luminance data table, and then after the promotional display is performed ( In the state where the promotion display continues), lamp control may be performed again based on the luminance data table in which the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used again after the promotion display is performed may be the same as the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting mode used before the promotion display is performed. and may be different. According to this, while the shutter display is in the closed state, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. can be made easier to draw attention to.

[Start 17]
The prompting display is a display including button images and prompting characters for prompting actions of the player,
A sound corresponding to the promotion character is output when the promotion character is displayed, and brightness data is incorporated in which the brightness data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in the effect using the shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in the closed mode, the player's action (for example, the action of pressing the button, the infrared sensor A promotional display prompting the user to perform a motion such as holding a hand over the player may be performed, and when the player's motion corresponding to the promotional display is detected, an effect such as opening the shutter may be performed. In the promotion display, a voice prompting the player to act (for example, the voice of "press") is output, and characters prompting the player to act (for example, the letters "press") are displayed. good. Furthermore, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (eg, frame lamp) in response to a voice prompting the player to act. In this way, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the action of the player, the motion of the player is determined by the voice prompting the action of the player and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be emphasized, and the player can be made to more effectively perform an action corresponding to the prompting display.

[Provocation 1]
The introductory part is
The part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state is notified,
Including a scene in which the display is updated as the ally character and the enemy character fight, and a scene in which the ally character takes damage,
The display switching interval is faster than the epilogue part,
The number of display changes is more than the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned agitation part that instigates the right or wrong has a production that is updated in a development in which friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight (for example, reach B in the first half of SP and reach B in the second half of SP). . In the production of such a teasing part, there is a scene in which a friendly character takes damage. In addition, in the effect of such a rousing part, the image display switching interval is shorter than that of the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is large. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the fanning part by making the fanning part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Provocation 2]
In the introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of the ally character is output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like described above, in the teasing part, the lines of the ally character are generated first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in the teasing part.

[Provocation 3]
In the introductory part, the display length of the first dialogue subtitles is set longer.

Specifically, the caption display of the teammate character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the caption display in another scene of the teasing part. According to this, the ally character can be recognized firmly.

[Provocation 4]
There is a scene in which the dialogue sound of the friendly character is output, but the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67(b17) and the like described above, there is a scene in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, it is possible to preferably show the caption display of the teammate character that is displayed first, and to show the screen display more preferably than adding the caption display to all the lines.

[Provocation 5]
It may be expanded from the first introductory part to the second introductory part,
Allied characters are active in both the first introduction part and the second introduction part,
In the first introductory part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed,
In the second introductory part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the agitation part described above, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first agitation part executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second agitation part executed at the timing of the second half There was a second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach. In addition, there is a scene in which the ally character plays an active role in both the first and second teasing parts. Also, in any of the teasing parts, the lines of the ally character are generated first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. According to this, the teammate character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts.

[Provocation 6]
The first character is active in the first introduction part,
The second character plays an active part in the second introduction part,
In the first introductory part, the dialogue sound of the first character is first output, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed,
In the second introductory part, the dialogue sound of the second character is first output, and the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the agitation part mentioned above, in the agitation part corresponding to Reach B in the first half of the SP, Yume-chan's character is active, and in the agitation part corresponding to Reach B in the latter half of the SP, Jam-chan and Nana-chan There was a scene where the character of was active. In Reach B in the first half of the SP, a line by Yume-chan, who is an ally character who plays an active role first, is generated, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. In Reach B in the second half of the SP, dialogues by Jam-chan and Nana-chan, the friendly characters who are active first, were generated, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the friendly character can be favorably recognized in any of the fanning parts. In addition, the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Also, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half of the excitement part.

[Provocation 7]
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is such that the luminance data using the luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. configured to

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which the character utters lines in the introductory part but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). ). In such a specific scene, since sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as lines, subtitles are set not to be displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the presentation. As a result, an effect corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the fanning part can be suitably shown to the player. 64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29 ), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35), even if there is a character's dialogue but no caption, the frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Provocation 8]
In a character appearance scene, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, and r34), colors corresponding to the corresponding characters in the preceding scene are displayed. Control is performed to light the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the color. Specifically, before the scene (r24), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r26), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue corresponding to the character of Maid A. scenario. Also, before the scene (r28), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in blue (r27) or white (r27'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. It becomes a lit scenario. Also, before the scene (r30), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in pink corresponding to Nana's character. becomes a scenario that lights up. Also, before the scene (r32), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. scenario. Also, before the scene of (r34), after the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple of (r33) or white of (r33'), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. becomes. In this way, before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, after which the game effect lamp 9 is lit in the color corresponding to the character. control is performed. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of lamps that the displayed character changes and that the player can easily understand which character is the character that has changed, and it is possible to make a suitable fanning part.

[Provocation 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character positioned on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to the character positioned on the other side of the screen.

64 (b8), (b9), FIG. 74 (e7), FIG. 94 (i32), FIG. 95 (i34), FIG. 104 (n10), FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35), even if there is a character dialogue but no caption, the color corresponding to the character is Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks. As a result, even in a scene where there is no caption display, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering a line by means of the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, so that the player can suitably see the performance in the slamming part. can.

[Instigation 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table composed of luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The introductory part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output;
The light emission control means is
In the first scene, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the first character, and the second character among the plurality of light emitting means is the light emitting color. The first character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means when the luminance data in which the light emitting means on the displayed side is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched according to the dialogue sound emitted by the first character. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is switched, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is configured not to switch,
In the luminance data table corresponding to the second scene, the light emission means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light emission means is set to the emission color corresponding to the first character, and the second character among the plurality of light emission means is The first character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means when the luminance data in which the light emitting means on the displayed side is set to the light emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in accordance with the dialogue sound emitted by the second character. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is not switched, but the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is switched.

Specifically, when a character appears, luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to . For example, as shown in FIG. 63(b4), Mumu-chan on the left side of the screen and Baku-chuu on the right side of the screen face each other. Light the left lamp and light the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the effect control CPU 120 displays a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to an effect in which Yume-chan, who is positioned on the left side of the screen as shown in FIG. 63(b5), speaks. Blink the left lamp. At time tb6, the effect control CPU 120 causes the Bakuchu positioned on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. flash. As a result, in a scene where a plurality of characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be favorably expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the effect in the fanning part can be favorably played. can show people.

[Provocation 11]
In a state where the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene in which dialogue sounds of the first character are output and a scene in which dialogue sounds of the second character are output. , the dialog subtitles are displayed in a fixed font and at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and (b6), there is a scene in which each character speaks a line under a situation in which an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, the subtitle display for the dialogue is displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs getting angry.

[Provocation 12]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound is output louder than the operation sound.

Specifically, in the fanning part, SP reach BGM is output, and there is a scene where dialogue sound and physical sound (also referred to as action sound) overlap with each other. When the dialog sound and the physical sound are output at the timing at which they overlap, the dialog sound is output with a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, while the physical sound is output as a part of the production, the reality of the production is brought out, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are superimposed, the dialogue sound is output loudly so that the contents of the production are conveyed to the player. It can be easily transmitted. Therefore, as a result, it is possible to show the performance in the fanning part better.

[Provocation 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output according to the production performed in the introductory part.
At the design stage, various sounds are output together with displays corresponding to the effects performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, a work process for actually creating various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, images for each effect corresponding to the variable time such as SP reach are created. In accordance with this video, BGM, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, dialogue sounds, etc. are added one by one using special software. The finished image and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is added. In such a series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the image, sound is output that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player by throwing away reality. Sound data is set as follows. As a result, a series of presentations can be shown favorably.

[Provocation 14]
When the output of the action sound and the output of the dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound is louder than the volume of the movement sound.

Specifically, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the SP reach BGM is adjusted to be smaller in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation while presenting reality.

[Provocation 15]
In the front view of the screen, when the output of the dialogue sound of the first character with a far sense of distance and the output of the movement sound of the second character with a close sense of distance overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is higher than the volume of the movement sound. The volume is adjusted so that the

Specifically, when the dialog sound of a character whose sense of distance is far from the player overlaps with the physical sound of which the player has a close sense of distance, the sound is adjusted so that the dialog sound is louder than the physical sound. Data is set. As a result, a sound is output that discards reality and ignores the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player.

[Provocation 16]
In the case where the operation sound and dialogue sound output overlap and subtitle display is not performed, and the case where the operation sound and dialogue sound output overlap and subtitle display is performed, the volume of dialogue sound that does not display subtitles The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound for subtitle display is louder than the volume.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and 166(C), when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound and when there is no subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound, When subtitles are present, the SP reach BGM volume is adjusted so that it sounds louder. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more relevant to SP reach content than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loudly the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[Instigation 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In the second scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introductory part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introductory part are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time longer than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby turning on the frame lamps at a plurality of mutually different timings. While lighting the frame lamp in yellow, it is possible to change the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow by changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings. As a result, in one child table WD9, it is possible to use the common grandchild table W3 for lamp control without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, but by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3. While reducing the data volume, it is possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the SP reach background. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

[Incitement 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In the second scene in the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introductory part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introductory part are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the fanning part, thereby turning on the frame lamps at a plurality of mutually different timings. While blinking in white, the time for referring to the grandchild table W4 is changed by the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, so that the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be changed to 2 or 3 times. can be done. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data volume.

[Instigation 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a first time longer than the specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time longer than the specific time.

Specifically, in any of the child table WD9 used in the backing part of SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the backing part of SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the backing part of SP final reach In order to change the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings, the amount of data used for lamp control is reduced in a plurality of ready-to-win performances. In addition, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach. In addition, in the child table WD2 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach A and in the child table WD5 used in the inflection part of the SP first half reach B, a different grandchild table is similarly prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed. good too.

[Instigation 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The brightness data table includes a specific brightness data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
The light emission control means is
In one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table and the specific luminance data table,
In one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table and the specific luminance data table,
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the first notification effect and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introductory part in the second notification effect are common luminance data tables,
The specific luminance data table is composed of a plurality of luminance data, and is constructed so that the total time of using each of the plurality of luminance data is the specific time,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a specific time,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a predetermined time shorter than the specific time.

[Provocation 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In a specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is being displayed. becomes,
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the character's lines in the teasing part. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of the first subtitle displayed first overlaps the display period of the second subtitle displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other. The fade effect causes the characters being displayed to change with different transparency. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand.

[Provocation 22]
In the scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When the dialogue sound of one character is output, the first subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed, and thereafter, when the dialogue sound of the other character is output, the second subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed. is,
The second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%, and then the first caption is displayed when the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first caption corresponding to the lines of one character is displayed, followed by a second caption corresponding to the lines of another character. subtitles may be displayed. In this case, the second caption is displayed with a transmittance of 70% so as to overlap the portion where the first caption is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first caption fades out, and the second caption fades in, resulting in display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, it is easy to understand the switching of the subtitles due to the fading effect.

[Provocation 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap and at least one of them has a fade effect, it is not output,
Output when only the secondary subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle of “Found” is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap each other, and a fade effect is applied. is not output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, it is easy to understand the switching of subtitles due to the fade effect, and since the dialog sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily grasp the contents of the presentation by sight and hearing.

[Provocation 24]
In the advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed,
When the display of the first subtitle in the lyrics display is switched to the display of the second subtitle, the display of none of the subtitles is given a fade effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(B), during the jackpot round, an effect is performed in which the character sings along with the music. Subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, even if subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because when the music is playing, the progress of the music can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the switching timing is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is representative music of the contents installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand without adding a fade effect. According to this, it is possible to omit the operation of applying the fade effect during the big win round, and the series of performances can be shown well.

[Provocation 25]
In both the introductory part and the epilogue part, the character's dialogue sound may overlap,
The introductory part has a higher ratio of overlapping dialogue sounds than the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, the subtitle display timing may overlap even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, in the epilogue part, there are many scenes in which the period from caption display to caption display is longer than in the introductory part. This is because the provocation part progresses quickly, and the epilogue part progresses less quickly than the provocation part. As a result, the introductory part is displayed more frequently than the epilogue part at the timing when the subtitle display overlaps. In such a case, by effectively adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort when switching the caption.

[Provocation 26]
Even in a given scene where the display of subtitles does not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitle is displayed or when the display of the subtitle disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is added to the subtitle display even in a predetermined scene in portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out effects may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is troublesome to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display is covered or not. Therefore, by uniformly adding a fade effect to the caption display, it is possible to prevent an increase in work load.

[Provocation 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be interchanged.
Between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, it is conceivable to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed, but if a long dialogue sound or a fast-paced dialogue sound is output, a sense of incongruity will appear. Therefore, the blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of caption display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed continuously. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without adding any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding subtitle display for long lines and subtitle display for fast-progressing lines, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur if subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incompatibility can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the caption display. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is conceivable to superimpose "Found" on the subtitle display of "Found" and then display "Found". In such a case, the caption display becomes difficult to see without the fade effect. Further, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is conceivable to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two stages above and below. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the display area for the effect, which hinders the effect in areas other than the subtitle display area. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to the caption display as in the present embodiment.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means
In the introductory part, a promotional display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed,
In the introductory part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotional display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The luminance data table includes a cut-in display luminance data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introductory part luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
The light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the cut-in display luminance data table includes at least the same locations as the light-emitting means for which luminance data is set in the introductory part luminance data table.

Specifically, the cut-in effect and the brightness data of the lamp control in the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) are the same as the lamp control in the fanning part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with station frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent the lighting/blinking of unnecessary lamps from being mixed in and impairing the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Inciting cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button where the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127 (r39) to FIG. 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the caption display is displayed before the prompt display of the button image is displayed. . According to this, since the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen while paying attention to the subtitle display, the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. can be done.

[Inciting cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sounds are not output, the dialogue sounds are output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47), there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display ends. Then, after a predetermined period of time without words has passed, the words are spoken, and subtitles are displayed for the said words. According to this, the player can concentrate on the effect during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be performed.

[Yes or No 1]
In the success/failure notification part,
The player is notified of whether the control is to be in an advantageous state or not,
A prompting display prompting the player to perform a specific action is performed,
Executed between the introductory part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the success/failure determination scene was between the introductory part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene of winning/failing determination, the player is informed whether or not the player has won a big hit after operating the trigger as the operating means. In addition, in the scene of winning or failing, the accessory was moved after the trigger operation in the case of a big hit. According to this, the attraction of the presentation is improved by making it a suitable scene for deciding whether to use the operating means.

[Yes or No 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
In the state where the expanded display is being performed before the promotional display is performed, the introduction display of the promotional display is performed, so that the expanded display becomes invisible, and after that, the expanded display is performed in a state where the expanded display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 132 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles are displayed by the teammate character, and then the characters corresponding to the operation means are displayed. Due to the screen, the effect that was being executed cannot be seen. Then, the effect executed after that becomes recognizable again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means on the entire screen, and to display the performance that has been firmly executed at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be favorably shown. .

[Yes or No 3]
The expanded display is behind the introductory display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r48) to FIG. 131 (r51), introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling operation of the operating means are displayed. A performance is in progress during the performance. According to this, by advancing the effect behind the scenes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the image (the image of (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to make the player pay attention to the development of the effect.

[Yes or No 4]
The expanded display is performed while the prompt display is being performed.

Specifically, in FIGS. 132 (r51) to 132 (r54) described above, when the trigger image is displayed as the promotion display, the tail slightly moves each time the image changes in the Bakuchu image. was In this way, the effect may proceed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the presentation may include a scene change or a character action instead of just moving the tail. According to this, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the development of the presentation during the promotion display.

[Yes or No 5]
Expanded display progresses slower than before the prompt display when performed while the prompt display is performed.

Specifically, the effect progressing while the promotion display is displayed is slower than the effect executed before the promotion display was displayed. According to this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the prompting display for operating the operation means, and to balance the prompting display and the progress of the effect. It should be noted that the effect that progresses while the promotion display is displayed may be slower than the effect that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. According to this, it is possible to make a difference in the progress speed of the effect during display of the promotion display and during display of the introductory image.

[Yes or No 6]
An echo is applied to the dialogue sound before the introductory display.

Specifically, it is preferable to echo the lines before the introductory image is displayed as shown in FIG. 130 (r47). According to this, the player can be excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[Yes or No 7]
After ending the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed while the expansion display was performed before the promotion display was performed, the introduction display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49), the introductory image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introductory image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introductory image and the caption display from overlapping.

[Yes or No 8]
The introductory part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success or failure notification,
During a predetermined period, a plurality of image data are used to describe the movement of the character,
During the slow motion period, one piece of image data is rendered with effects to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of whether (r48) in the fanning part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the effect executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from a plurality of image data, while the effect executed at (r48) is the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. image. The image of the ally character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed with the passage of time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if an image is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the periods other than the slow motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement becomes awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the amount of data can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it look as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used during the slow motion period may be any number as long as the number of images is smaller than during the other periods.

[Yes or No 9]
There is a production that includes an introductory part in which allied characters and enemy characters appear, and a final part after the introductory part.
In the introductory part, there is a predetermined period in which the scene where allies are displayed and the scene where enemies are displayed alternately.
It is possible to shift to the final part by performing the action of the player while the promotion display is being performed during the predetermined period,
In a predetermined period, the speed at which the scenes in which the allies are displayed and the scenes in which the enemies are displayed alternately increase gradually, and after the speed reaches the maximum, the promotion display is performed,
As for the depiction in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed alternately, each of the enemy and the ally is reproduced with one image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friend character and the image of the enemy character gradually increases. According to this, after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, the promotion display prompting the trigger operation is displayed, so that a scene in which the friend character has an advantage or a scene in which the enemy character has an advantage is developed. It becomes possible to incite the development of the game, and the interest is improved. In addition, by alternately switching the images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friend character and the enemy character.

[Yes or No 10]
The predetermined period in which the scene in which the ally is displayed and the scene in which the enemy is displayed are alternately applied is also applied to the scene in which the ready-to-win performance develops from one ready-to-win performance to another ready-to-win performance.

Specifically, the effect of the slow motion period in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from SP first half reach to SP last reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably execute the effect even at the timing of developing from the SP first half reach.

[Right or wrong 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a portion of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is used to change only the portion.

Specifically, during the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the friend character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, in the case of an ally character, four images such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, . good. According to this, by changing only part of the data while using the data of the character itself, it is possible to more faithfully represent the state of movement while reducing the amount of data change work.

[Yes or No 12]
A portion of the character changes during the slow motion period.

Specifically, in the slow motion period of (r48), when the character's hair and clothes are shown to move gradually from a plurality of images, the movement of the hair and clothes is approximately the same as during periods other than the slow motion period. It may be designed to appear to move at speed. Here, if the number of images is increased in accordance with the motion of the slow motion in order to make the motion look smooth during the slow motion period, the capacity becomes large. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow motion period, even if the number of images used is reduced, the movement does not become awkward, and while reducing the data capacity, it is possible to express the movement more faithfully. can.

[Right or wrong 13]
During the period before transitioning from the introductory part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification effect,
The display means performs a promotion display for prompting the player to perform a specific action,
The sound output means continues sound output,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for the first notification effect,
During the period before the transition from the introductory part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification effect,
The display means does not display a prompt to prompt a specific action, but displays a propriety display,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the luminance data table for the second notification effect,
The luminance data table for the first notification effect is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification effect is configured so that the brightness data is not switched.

Specifically, in the SP ready-to-win production, in which no operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the win-or-fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the production seems to have stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the winner/failure branch (decision timing) can be easily understood by the player. On the other hand, in the SP ready-to-win effect in which operation promotion is performed to prompt the player to operate at the success/fail branch, the sound corresponding to the operation promotion and the sound (BGM) corresponding to the ready-to-win are output, and further, the operation promotion is performed. By switching the grandchild table a plurality of times to control the frame lamps so as to correspond to , the timing of deciding whether or not to win can be favorably produced by the lighting modes of the frame lamps. In this way, the decision timing of the success/failure branching can be favorably produced by different sound control and lamp control depending on whether the operation prompting is performed or not at the success/failure branching.

[Yes or No 14]
When promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image branched depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, in FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image displaying the two characters, Yume-chan and Jam-chan, is gradually enlarged and displayed, and at the timing of (i39) Then, one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if it is a big hit, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. During the period in which one image is statically displayed for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused for use, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data and favorably promote the success/failure decision scene. It should be noted that during the period in which the images in which the two characters are displayed are gradually enlarged and displayed, as many images (for example, 10) as shown in FIGS. may be used.

[Yes or No 15]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to the first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
A second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined luminance data is maintained,
A third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD9 in reach A in the second half of the SP, it is a reach without operation prompt, and after the frame lamp blinks in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. . Specifically, in the success/failure branching in the inflection part of the reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed, the last luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used. In addition, since the luminance data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the winning/failing branch (decision timing) without excessively increasing the data capacity used for lamp control. can.

[Yes or No 16]
When the promotional display is performed, the display transitions in the order of the first display period in which the introductory display before the promotional display is performed, the second display period consisting of a moving image, and the third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is successful or not. do.

Specifically, in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), the display period of the introductory image in which the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen is be. Afterwards, there is a period of time during which prompts for activating the trigger are displayed. During the display period of the prompt display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning/failing determination, the image of the winning epilogue part will be played if it is a big hit, and the image of the losing epilogue part will be played if it is a loss. These periods are periods during which dynamic display is performed in which images appear to be moving. According to this, a series of effects can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of effects can be obtained.

[Yes or No 17]
A scenario for controlling the light-emitting means using luminance data in the case of prompt display is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to the first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched,
A third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in the child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. In this state, the frame lamps are switched one after another such as white flashing, red lighting, and red flashing.

[Yes or No 18]
As a flow from the success report part,
When it has been determined that control will not be in an advantageous state, the display for when it is determined that control will not be in an advantageous state is performed, followed by a display corresponding to the normal background.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scene shown in FIGS. 133(s1) to 136(s10) and FIGS. In the winning epilogue part, an image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character action. Also, in the unsuccessful epilogue part, the screen turns black after the production corresponding to the unsuccessful epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene of winning/failing determination, it is possible to achieve a suitable flow of presentation.

[Right or wrong 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The light emission control means is
In the introductory part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the introductory part,
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
The brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower brightness than the brightness data last used in the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final luminance data ( RGB data) is "FDC", whereas the first luminance data (RGB data) in the missing epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when losing in each of SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, it is possible to light the frame lamp in white more darkly while maintaining the same color using white lighting in the success/fail branch. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the game has been lost. Also, when transitioning to the missing epilogue part via the fanning part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the fanning part contains "D00", whereas the first brightness in the missing epilogue part The data (RGB data) is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is lost, the frame lamp can be illuminated in white, which is darker than the red flashing in the success/fail branch, so that the player can be suitably notified of the loss.

[Right or wrong 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect. and an epilogue part that informs that it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The first notification effect for notifying that the control will not be performed to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control will be performed to the advantageous state, and an epilogue that notifies that the control will not be performed to the advantageous state. consists of a part and
The second notification effect for notifying that the control is performed to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is to be performed to the advantageous state is notified. It consists of an epilogue part and
The second notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state is not performed includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be performed to the advantageous state, and an epilogue that notifies that the control is not to be performed for the advantageous state. consists of a part and
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table composed of luminance data in accordance with time data set in an upper table,
The upper table includes a first upper table, a second upper table, a third upper table, and a fourth upper table,
The luminance data table includes a first notification effect luminance data table, a second notification effect luminance data table, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means is
In the introductory part of the first notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the first upper table and the luminance data table for the first notification effect,
In the introductory part of the second notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the second upper table and the luminance data table for the second notification effect,
In the epilogue part in the first notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third upper table and a specific luminance data table,
In the epilogue part in the second notification effect that notifies that the advantageous state is not controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using the fourth upper table and the specific luminance data table,
A specific luminance data table used in the epilogue part of the first notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state, and a specific luminance data table that is used in the epilogue part of the second notification effect that notifies that the control is not performed to the advantageous state. is a common luminance data table,
The third upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data using the specific luminance data table for the first time period,
The fourth upper table is composed of storage destination data of the specific brightness data table and time data using the specific brightness data table for a second time different from the first time.

Specifically, in the child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the SP final reach child table Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode at the time of losing based on grandchild table W14. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, while in the SP final reach it takes 3900 msec. Meanwhile, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of losing is common among different reaches, the time for lamp control can be varied by referring to the grandchild table. Thus, in the child table used for each of a plurality of different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to failure in each of a plurality of different reaches. Thus, while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the loss in a suitable manner in each of the plurality of reach.

[Right or wrong 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state is
a first pattern including an introductory part until the propriety of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part to notify that the control is performed to the advantageous state;
An introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the control is not to be in the advantageous state, and the advantageous state is executed after the second epilogue part. There is a second pattern that includes a relief notification part that is notified that it is controlled to
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part in the relief notification part in the notification effect of the second pattern;
The brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to have a higher brightness than the brightness data last used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success report part,
When it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, an image is displayed when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state, and the decision not to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified by decorative symbols. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed to switch to an image corresponding to the background at the start of reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, in the case of losing after determination of winning or losing, a losing pattern is displayed in the blackout background in the losing epilogue part. After that, after the switching image of the eye-catching screen is displayed, the screen switches to the normal background at the start of reach. According to this, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen at the time of failure by the eye-catching screen.

[Loss 2]
In the epilogue part at the time of failure, the image when it is determined that the control is not in an advantageous state is displayed in blackout, and the middle pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background at the time of losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. As shown in FIG. According to this, since the image and the medium pattern at the time of failure are displayed in inverse proportion to each other in the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of failure can be favorably displayed due to the relationship between the two.

[Loss 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The display means displays the decoration pattern in the second epilogue part so that it becomes clearer in stages, and displays the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so that it becomes darker in stages, Performing a display notifying that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The number of stages in which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is darkened is greater than the number of stages in which the decoration pattern is displayed clearly.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the lost epilogue part, the number of stages required to black out the background at the time of failure from 100% transmittance to 0% is This is more than the number of steps required to fade in from 0% to 0%. Specifically, the blackout of the background has 8 stages from (X11) to (X18), whereas the fade-in of the middle pattern has 6 stages from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image at the time of failure and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and the number of steps for changing the transmittance is different. can be displayed appropriately.

[Loss 4]
The blacking out of the image when it is determined that it is not controlled to be in an advantageous state is performed before the fade-in of the middle pattern of the decoration pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of losing starts earlier than the change in which the medium pattern fades in. According to this, the image at the time of failure and the medium pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between blackout and fade-in. It is possible to make the display of the hour look good.

[Loss 5]
The cut of the image displayed when it is determined that it is not controlled to the advantageous state before blackout changes,
When it is determined that the image is not controlled to be in an advantageous state when blacking out, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the displayed image of the lost video before the blackout is switched, whereas the displayed image of the blackout does not change. According to this, the blackout can be made to look good by starting the blackout in the state of the image without change. It should be noted that the switching of the image includes switching of the picture on the screen, switching of the angle of the video, and switching of the displayed scene itself. In addition, the fact that there is no change in the image includes the fact that it is the same still image, that even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if it is moving, only a part of the image is slightly moving.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined not to be controlled in an advantageous state is blacked out, and as a result of the middle pattern of the decorative pattern fading in, the transmittance of the middle pattern becomes 0%, and the blackout requires 1. A period in which the transmittance of the image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period of time,
In a predetermined period, the pattern itself is shaken for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium pattern image changes from a state with a transmittance of 100% to a state with a transmittance of 0%, and is longer than the period during which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, as a result of the blackout of the background at the time of failure and the fade-in of the middle pattern, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transmittance of 0%, A blacked out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a symbol fluctuation period as indicated by (X19) to (X20). In the period of design fluctuation, the period of shifting the middle design from the central position to the upper position, the central position, the lower position, and the central position is defined as one period, and the fluctuation of the design may be repeated for at least two cycles. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the medium pattern is faded in from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Moreover, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in the display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a period during which the medium pattern is clearly displayed, so that it is possible to suitably show that it is a failure.

[Loss 7]
The switching display is a display including information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, the information about the pachinko machine 1 includes the title "POWERFUL II" and main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan. image is displayed. According to this, the information of the pachinko game machine 1 can be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[Loss 8]
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled in an advantageous state consists of an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in an advantageous state or not, and an advantageous part after the notification A first epilogue part that is notified that the state is controlled,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to an advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. and a second epilogue part that is notified that it is not controlled by
The display means
In the second epilogue part, display to notify that it is not controlled in an advantageous state,
After that, the switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the variation command as a trigger, the variation display of the pattern is started,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the lighting means for effect,
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the switching display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for presentation;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the lighting means for effect;
When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbols, the light emitting means for the fourth symbols is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used. to control the light emitting means for production,
When the pattern variable display is started, the luminance data table is switched to the fourth pattern variable luminance data table, the light emitting means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. is used to control the lighting means for presentation.

Specifically, the characterizing portion of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be described. The effect screen will be switched to the image at the time of losing after the effect of winning or failing. After that, after the display of the blackout where the result of the display of failure is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, after switching to the normal screen, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning/failing determination to the brightness data table at the time of losing. After that, the table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, the table is switched to the luminance data table of the background at the start of fluctuation. Here, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the luminance data table is switched to the background luminance data table at the timing of switching to the normal screen. The special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the luminance data table for the background is not switched even by reception of the symbol confirmation command. Also, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking by receiving the next variation variation pattern command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is continued until the next change. is not necessary to separately prepare, the production by the lamp can be shown without discomfort from the production at the time of failure to the next change, and a series of productions can be suitably shown.

[Loss 9]
The luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is to refer to the luminance data by looping until the change condition is satisfied,
In the introductory part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background has been updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table corresponds to the effect of the SP reach after the change when a specific change condition such as development of the SP reach is established. After that, lamp control is performed based on the SP reach luminance data table. In this case, while the effect of SP reach is being executed, in the background of lamp control based on the luminance data table for SP reach, the switching of luminance data in the luminance data table for background stops over time. continue without Further, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state when a specific change condition such as an error occurs. Lamp control based on the data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of lamp control based on the error luminance data table, switching of luminance data in the background luminance data table continues without stopping over time. This makes it possible to make the series of effects to be executed look more suitable.

[Loss 10]
After switching to the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, even if a pattern confirmation command is received, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used, and after that, even if there is no pending customer waiting command The luminance data table corresponding to the background is used continuously.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the end of the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table for the background continues even if there is no reserved memory and the customer waiting demo designation command is received. used for According to this, after switching to the brightness data table for the background, the same brightness data table can be continuously used, so that the performance by the lamps can be presented without any sense of incongruity, and the series of presentations can be favorably presented. can be done.

[Loss 11]
When the design is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special figure stops,
By receiving the design decision command, the lighting means for the fourth design is switched from blinking to extinguishing.

Specifically, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from flashing to extinguished upon reception of a symbol confirmation command that triggers the production of symbol confirmation and stop. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the special light emitting means flashes,
By receiving the next variation command, the lighting means for the fourth symbol is switched from off to blinking.

Specifically, the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguishing to blinking by receiving a variation pattern command of the next variation that triggers the start of the next variation. According to this, regarding the special figure variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow at the time of losing can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Loss 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, display to notify that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
After that, the switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the variation command as a trigger, the variation display of the pattern is started,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means,
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the switching display is performed, and using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display to control the light emitting means;
continuously using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the background display is performed to control the light emitting means;
Controlling the light emitting means by continuously using the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display when the stop display of the pattern is performed,
When the variable display of the pattern is started, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of failure is used from the effect of (X40) in which the six teammates are disappointed to the effect of (X41) in which the background image is blacked out. . After the background image blacks out, the featured image is displayed. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period of switching to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the pattern fixing period of (X45). After that, when a variation pattern command with hold is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the luminance data table is maintained during the pattern fixing period, and at the timing of switching to the next change, the background brightness data table. Further, in the pattern fixing period, the last luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching), that is, turning off is used. According to this, after switching to the luminance data table of the background, the final luminance data of the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received. can be easily recognized, and as a result, the failure can be favorably shown.

[Loss 14]
The final luminance data is turned off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the turned off.

Specifically, the final luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data for maintaining the light off. In addition, the data for keeping the light off is not used in the luminance data table for the background. According to this, since the brightness data for maintaining the lights off is not used in the brightness data table for the background, it is peculiar to the failure that the lights are off when the background is displayed. It can be made easy to recognize that it is.

[Loss 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no pending memory after the pattern is determined, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, by receiving the customer waiting designation command, the table is switched to the brightness data table for the background, so that it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the table is lost.

[Loss 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state is performed includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a second part for notifying that the control is performed to the advantageous state. 1 epilogue part,
The notification effect for notifying that the control to the advantageous state will not be performed includes an introductory part until the propriety of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and a second epilogue that notifies that the control to the advantageous state will not be performed. consists of a part and
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, display to notify that it is not controlled to the advantageous state,
After that, the switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, with the design confirmation command as a trigger, the design is stopped and displayed,
The light emission control means is
In the second epilogue part, using the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means,
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display when the switching display is performed, and using the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display to control the light emitting means;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display to control the light emitting means;
The brightness data first used in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to have a higher brightness than the brightness data last used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the final luminance data (off) in the luminance data table before displaying the eye-catching image (at the time of failure). It's becoming According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light with higher luminance than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Loss 17]
The first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introduction part.

Specifically, the first luminance data in the luminance data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in luminance than the first luminance data in the luminance data table (not including lights off) corresponding to the background at the start of the fluctuation. ing. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light with high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching is easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 .

[Character movement 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next luminance data.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly lit in rainbow color based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data are switched at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, at the time of losing, the frame lamp lights up in white and dimly based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which is longer than at the time of winning. Thus, when winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than when losing, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp can inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the win has been achieved. Furthermore, while the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more at the time of winning than at the time of losing, the lighting by the frame lamp can be made more calm at the time of losing, and as a result, the winning and losing are contrasted by the lamps. It is possible to convey to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Character movement 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the SP final reach hit epilogue part, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the rainbow chromatic color is used in the effect that the character is falling. , and achromatic colors (RGB data of “333”) alternately. As a result, by interposing the achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to emphasize the fact that the player has won a big hit and congratulate the player. After that, in the effect that the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp lights up in a smooth rainbow color without achromatic colors, indicating that a big win has been achieved. It is possible to execute an effect that congratulates the player in a calm manner. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be favorably shown to the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a celebration part after the decision to control to an advantageous state is announced, there is a scene where the enemy character is killed, there is no scene where the friendly character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the introduction part. less parts than

Specifically, the hit epilogue part described above is a part that does not transition when the game is lost, and is a part that has a scene in which the enemy character is at a disadvantage and a scene in which the ally character is at an advantage. Also, in the hit epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the production is smaller than in the fanning part. According to this, an appropriate effect can be executed in each part, and the flow of a series of effects can be favorably shown.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed with respect to the characters' dialogues is higher than the ratio of the dialogue subtitles displayed with respect to the characters' dialogues in the introductory part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the rate of displaying subtitles for characters during the SP reach, which is the inciting part. ing. According to this, by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the introductory part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time will be shortened so that the display of auxiliary subtitles will not interfere with the production. , it is possible to give priority to conveying effects by switching images. Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilogue 3]
Dialogue subtitles are always displayed in the epilogue part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for dialogue. According to this, it is possible to emphasize the feeling of blessing by clearly showing what the character is saying in the hit epilogue part.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, if dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles will not be displayed,
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are displayed when a dialogue sound is output in a scene in which an enemy character takes damage.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the teasing part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are added to the dialogue of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage (scene of catching crabs) in the winning epilogue part. According to this, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles that were not displayed in the inciting part are displayed, so that the feeling of blessing can be emphasized.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introductory part and a second introductory part, each with a different development and a different number of dialogues. It is higher than the ratio at which dialog subtitles are displayed relative to the character's dialog sound output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reach, which is a fanning part. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of displaying subtitles for characters during SP reach. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying the subtitles in the epilogue part regardless of which SP reach is executed. Also, in the hit epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. In addition, since there are more screen changes in the fanning part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to convey the effect by switching images first, so that the effect is not disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. . Thereby, it is possible to execute a suitable effect in the fanning part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialog subtitles that are finally displayed in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialog subtitles of the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the introductory part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of blessing can be emphasized. It should be noted that, when the caption display is displayed, the caption with the larger number of characters may be displayed longer than the caption with the smaller number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the introductory part, the period during which the subtitles are displayed is longer in the winning epilogue part. should be designed as

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is positioned at the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is performed,
The movable body moves according to a retraction pattern in which the movable body retracts, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display by the time the retraction pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the motion of the character object is displayed according to the motion of the character object falling. After that, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. While the character is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member retracts and returns,
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is interlocked with the timing of starting the return operation.

Specifically, on the premise that the accessory returns to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise related to the timing of the start of the returning motion. According to this, since the display is switched to the display corresponding to the epilogue at the timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the character product motion ends before the character product returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image from being displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the production is not spoiled. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts rising. Also, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the drop position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches the extinguishment.

Specifically, when the role product rises, the effect control CPU 120 determines the role based on the child table corresponding to the action of raising the role product on the role product lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the character object lamp 9A is reduced step by step so as to gradually turn off the object lamp 9A. As a result, the lighting mode of the role lamp 9A does not make the player conscious of the rise of the role, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp shows that the player has reached the second half reach A of the SP. It can draw the player's attention.

[Epilogue 10]
The BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue suggests a switch,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of the epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the BGM, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect suggesting a change is output.

Specifically, sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by the sound effect, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, BGM and a sound effect suggesting switching are output.

Specifically, BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the start of display corresponding to the epilogue as the character returns to its initial position. According to this, by suggesting the start of the epilogue part by BGM and sound effects, the epilogue part can be preferably started.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, the dialogue sound is not output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is retracted, a dialog sound is output and a dialog caption corresponding to the dialog sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the role object returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is not output in the epilogue display after the character object returns to the initial position. Subtitles should be displayed while outputting. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle from being displayed at a timing when the subtitle is difficult to see, and the epilogue part can be preferably executed.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output at the timing of the evacuation of the movable body,
At the timing when the movable body is completely retracted, a dialog sound is output, and a dialog caption corresponding to the dialog sound is displayed.

Specifically, at the timing when the character returns to the initial position, it is sufficient to output the dialogue sound and display the subtitles in the epilogue display. According to this, it is possible to make the dialogue clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be suitably executed.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue caption corresponding to the dialogue sound output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the start timing of the pattern output.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134(s6) to 135(s8) described above, the final caption display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is erased before the design effect is executed. It is designed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the caption display from being covered with the decoration pattern and misunderstanding that it is a message in the effect of the pattern display. Therefore, it is possible to suitably show the effect in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 17]
The moving image that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image at the timing when the symbol display is completed and the player recognizes the finally arranged symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, at the timing when the effect of the design is completed and the player can recognize the decoration design, the decoration design and the image such as the character displayed as the background are displayed. It is a still image. According to this, it is possible to prevent the decoration pattern from becoming difficult to see because the background of the decoration pattern is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
A moving image that is flowing before the start of designing is assumed to be a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the symbol presentation effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of drawing out the pattern.

[Epilogue 19]
A special effect is added at the same time as the stillness.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special graphic style. According to this, by adding a special mode effect to the still image, it is possible to make a suitable epilogue part by emphasizing that the image is still and suggesting that the scene has changed.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position. Ending the display, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the performance mode is switched to the hit epilogue part by moving the character object from the scene before the win/fail decision in the fanning part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the motion of the role object is displayed according to the motion of dropping the role object. After that, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the movement of the character object to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach while the character object is rising. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the action of the role product to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the role product is rising. In addition, a sound corresponding to the hit epilogue part is output while the character is ascending. In addition, during the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part that is displayed before the character changes to the initial position from (s3-5) to (s3-8), the dialogue sound is not output. . After that, in the state (s4) in which movement of the character to the initial position is completed and display of the effect image is finished, dialogue sounds are output and subtitles are displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the character object is displayed on the premise that the character object is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the character object returns to the initial position, the display will not be aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the hit epilogue part before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part in the middle of the ascending of the character, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed. Furthermore, by displaying the subtitles after completing the operation of returning to the initial position, the winning epilogue part can be preferably displayed.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed in an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and after the success or failure notification, when it is determined that the control is to be performed in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
In the introductory part, a first scene in which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the character;
a second scene in which, in the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character; there is
In the second scene, no switching effect is applied when ending the display of the final dialogue subtitle, while in the first scene the switching effect is applied when ending the display of the dialogue subtitle.

[Epilogue 22]
At the time of designing, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the visual recognition of the small pattern is not hindered by the effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the ornamental pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the design effect. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image, and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the production effect of the effect image with respect to the decoration symbols, and to make a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
At the time of designing, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the pattern output of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the ornamental design and the small design are displayed during the performance of designing. Here, the movement of the decorative design and the small design may be synchronized at the timing when the design of the decorative design is completed. Concretely, during the pattern shaking period in which the decoration pattern is completed and the pattern swings up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same motion as the decoration pattern. According to this, by synchronizing the movement of the decoration pattern and the small pattern, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the effect in the winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 24]
At the time of design drawing in the re-lottery part, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed,
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, since the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, the small pattern is not hindered by the effect.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157(B1) to 158(B5) described above, both decorative patterns and small patterns are displayed during the effect of drawing out patterns in the re-lottery part. An effect image with concentrated lines is added to the decoration pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decoration pattern has a higher priority than the decoration pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being changed and displayed while increasing the performance effect of the effect image with respect to the decorative symbols.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-lottery part, the small patterns are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and interlocked with the transition to the re-lottery part, the small patterns fluctuate again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, when the design is produced, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are once aligned. good. Then, in conjunction with the shift to the re-lottery part, both the decoration design and the small design may change again. According to this, the decorative pattern and the small pattern can be displayed in a suitable manner in synchronization.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The epilogue part is
a first scene in which the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed;
a second scene that enlarges and displays the decorative pattern using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table,
In the second scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table,
In the first scene of the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is changed to the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode. Switching, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for switching to a rainbow light emission mode,
In the second scene in the epilogue part, the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means, and at the timing associated with ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the brightness data table for enlarged display emits rainbow light. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for setting the mode;
The brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the first scene of the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode used in the second scene of the epilogue part are common brightness data tables. can be,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part and storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage destination data of the brightness data table for enlarged display and storage destination data of the brightness data table for the rainbow emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used for the winning notification effect and the grandchild table used for displaying the winning pattern, different grandchild tables are prepared for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. Each performance can be livened up by a performance with a sense of unity, while reducing the data volume used for lamp control for lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, while reducing the amount of data, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part more visible to the player by using the frame lamp.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table configured with brightness data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part to be executed and a re-lottery part to be executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified,
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene that enlarges and displays the decorative pattern using the center of the display area and notifies the result of the re-lottery,
The light emission control means is
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using the second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the brightness data table for result notification scene enlarged display is used to control the light emitting means, and at the timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the result notification scene enlarged display is performed. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for making a rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table;
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene, and at the timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the re-lottery. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have the same brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of the luminance data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene and storage destination data of the luminance data table for the rainbow emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the ramp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery is common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13 and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then the grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare a separate grandchild table for lighting the rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control while maintaining a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. Control.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (located in the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the video of the winning epilogue is finished, the reduced pattern is erased and the design effect is executed in which the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the pattern. In addition, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the pattern display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is displayed, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the development of the winning epilogue part is completed, the pattern is displayed. At the time of playing, by enlarging and displaying the decoration patterns continuously using the screen end side and the screen center, the big winning patterns can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the luminance data table, it is possible to show the scene switching appropriately. In this way, the hit epilogue part can be shown favorably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, it is positioned at the end of the display area in a state in which the decorative patterns are aligned.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (the position of the upper left corner of the screen) is displayed with "222" aligned. According to this, even while the winning epilogue image is being played, the reduced decoration pattern allows the player to recognize that the big winning display result is displayed.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the end of the display area,
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state where the decorative pattern is displayed at the end of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Zoom in using the center of the region.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed sequentially (the video of the winning epilogue is flowing), the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area of the screen. (position in the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is deleted, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner position is deleted, and the image at the center of the screen is deleted. The decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decoration pattern, and misunderstanding that some kind of message is being displayed when the pattern is displayed, and the epilogue part can be suitably reproduced. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, the decoration pattern is positioned at the end of the display area.

Specifically, the decoration pattern may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach state at the start of the SP reach. According to this, by positioning from the start of the SP reach, it is possible not to interfere with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

[Re-lottery production 1]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to a first advantageous state, a second mode of displaying the first pattern again in the second half part after displaying the first pattern in the first half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
Using the first pattern displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. By doing so, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery performance, the symbol feeding performance is executed using the symbols temporarily stopped and displayed. , the player can easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery has started. As a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances well.

[Re-lottery production 2]
When the image corresponding to the background temporarily stopping the decorative pattern alignment is displayed, the light emitting means is extinguished, and when shifting to the re-lottery screen, the light-emitting means emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the re-lottery. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp is smoothly illuminated in rainbow color and the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, After the frame lamp is turned off once, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that the start of the re-lottery performance can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 3]
When moving to the re-lottery screen, temporarily stop the decoration pattern alignment,
When temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern arrangement is displayed with a shaking display with an effect, but while the shaking display with the effect is maintained, the image corresponding to the background and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means are reproduced. Switch to lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the effect of the pattern display in the winning epilogue part, the ornamental pattern is swayed and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. Even when the background is switched from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with the concentrated lines is continuously added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smooth rainbow lighting to extinguished. In other words, from the design to the re-lottery production, the pattern fluctuation and effect mode continue, and the background and the lamp are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to make it easy to understand from which decoration pattern the re-lottery effect started.

[Re-lottery production 4]
At the start of pattern feeding, the decoration pattern that had been displayed from the epilogue is reduced,
After reducing the size, pattern feeding starts.

Specifically, at the start of the pattern feed effect in the re-lottery effect, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative pattern that has been displayed from the hit epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to show the flow of a series of presentations well without executing the process of changing to a different decoration pattern.

[Re-lottery production 5]
Pattern feeding is started with a reduced size, and the reduced sizes of other patterns are all uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect, variation is started by a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during variation is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to smoothen the appearance of the variation at the time of the pattern feed effect, and to show the flow of the series of effects well.

[Re-lottery production 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative patterns are being sent in a reduced size, transitions are made in the order of motion promotion display, acceptance of motion, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery effect, the pattern is sent with a reduced size decorative pattern. is executed, and a button prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, an effect of displaying a symbol in which the symbol is enlarged and displayed is executed. In other words, from the moment the pattern is put out, the decoration pattern that is finally notified is displayed in an enlarged manner. According to this, since the symbol is finally announced from the start of enlargement, it is possible to show the player what the final notification symbol is in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Re-lottery production 7]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances, in the first half part, after the first pattern is displayed, a replacement display is performed in which the first pattern is replaced with another pattern. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
A second re-lottery performance in which, among a plurality of types of re-lottery performances, replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part when it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled. is executable and
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second symbol in the second half part,
The second re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery effect, the "2" symbol, which was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery, is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. is used to start the re-lottery effect. When the re-extraction effect is started, the "2" pattern is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery effect is started from the reduced "2" pattern. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feed performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations from the "2" symbol. And, during the re-lottery effect, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decorative patterns are sent in order, and then again "2" ” A symbol feed effect in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started by using the decoration patterns temporarily stopped and displayed, and the decoration patterns initially temporarily stopped and displayed are displayed again after a plurality of kinds of decoration patterns are varied. According to this, the flow of a series of presentations can be shown well by the design feeding presentation in which the final display result is not immediately displayed and all the decorative designs are shown. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 8]
The pattern feeding according to a predetermined pattern is carried out in order from the temporarily stopped pattern to the next pattern. It is a production that sends to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and looping it.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order. , again, "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1" and all the decoration patterns are sent in order. In this way, since the numbers of the decoration patterns are sent in order, it is possible to clearly show the flow of the series of presentations.

[Re-lottery production 9]
While the pattern is being fed in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns to be sent are once displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol feed effect in the re-lottery effect, all the symbols are displayed with the degree of transparency of the symbols when temporarily stopped, and the degree of transparency is increased during fluctuation. Specifically, "2" pattern with 0% transparency, "2" pattern with 50% transparency, "3" pattern with 0% transparency, "3" pattern with 50% transparency, transparent Patterns are switched such as a "4" pattern with a degree of 0% and a "4" pattern with a transparency of 50%. According to this, all the patterns can be clearly displayed in a mode with low transparency during the pattern feed effect, so that it is possible to grasp what kind of pattern is being sent.

[Re-lottery production 10]
After the symbol feeding is started, the display times of the plurality of types of decorative symbols are the same until notification is given as to whether or not the player will be promoted.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding effect in the re-lottery effect, all decorative patterns such as ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``1'' are sent in order. However, the time that each pattern is displayed is the same. According to this, all patterns can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of performances can be shown well.

[Re-lottery production 11]
The action promotion display is performed during pattern feeding,
The position where the action prompting display is performed is a position that does not overlap with the pattern being sent.

Specifically, during the symbol feed effect, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position where the variation of the decorative pattern during the pattern feeding effect is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbols during the symbol feeding effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol feeding. It should be noted that a part of the promotion display may be partially overlapped with the decorative pattern during the pattern feed effect.

[Re-lottery production 12]
The action-promoting display is started during pattern feeding, and is started during the second loop of the predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation of displaying all the decorative symbols during the symbol feed effect. be started. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol feeding pattern is repeated twice in this manner, the player can be made to firmly recognize the symbol feeding effect.

[Re-lottery production 13]
When pattern feeding is started from the symbol "1", the timing at which the action promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When the symbol feed is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the action promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-lottery effect may be other than 2 symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image as the action prompting display is displayed is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display was displayed was the timing at which 2 symbols were displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the action prompting display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. That is, the number of symbols to be sent is the same regardless of which symbol the re-lottery effect is started. According to this, since control can be made constant, the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 14]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances, in the first half part, after the first pattern is displayed, a replacement display is performed in which the first pattern is replaced with another pattern. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
A second re-lottery performance in which the replacement display is performed in the first half of a plurality of types of re-lottery performances and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half when it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, the second pattern is repeatedly displayed after the second pattern is displayed in the first half part, and the second pattern is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to execute a third re-lottery effect to
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance and the third re-lottery performance are configured to have the same performance scale,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and a pattern in which an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) is displayed and then an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) is displayed. was provided. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols) are displayed after displaying the odd numbered symbols (eg, 7 symbols). In the effect of sending patterns from odd-numbered patterns to odd-numbered patterns, all the same odd-numbered patterns should be sent at the time of pattern sending. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, a suitable re-lottery effect can be achieved in any pattern without increasing the data capacity. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 15]
The re-lottery effect is displayed by combining display data other than decorative patterns and display data of various decorative patterns, reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-lottery effects.
By using common display data in each re-lottery effect, the effect scale between each re-lottery effect becomes common, and only the type of pattern sent and the pattern issued in the pattern output are each re-lottery. It differs in the lottery production.

Specifically, in the lottery effect, a pattern of displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns), and an odd numbered pattern (for example, 3 patterns) after displaying an even numbered pattern (for example, 2 patterns). and a pattern of displaying an odd numbered pattern (for example, 7 patterns) and then displaying an odd numbered pattern (for example, 7 patterns) use common data. In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design is such that the data relating to the decorative design is changed according to the pattern. According to this, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated pattern, the amount of data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery production 16]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
Displaying the first pattern with the same or substantially the same animation when the first pattern is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part of the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, the designing in the parts of FIGS. 141(A1) to 142(A5) and the designing in the parts of FIGS. 161(C1) to 162(C5) are executed using substantially the same image. be done. Concretely, the same image is used for the pattern output by the "2" pattern and the effect image, and the pattern output is executed in such a manner that the background portion is different. According to this, it is possible to make the image of the pattern output substantially the same, so that it is possible to clearly show to the player that the game has not been promoted to the definite variable pattern. It should be noted that the image of the patterned portion including the background may be completely the same. Also, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning pattern is temporarily stopped, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow color, the re-lottery effect is executed after turning off, and when the pattern is shaking and displayed, Based on the luminance data corresponding to the lottery effect (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color. As a result, the player is not misunderstood that the temporarily stopped winning pattern in the winning epilogue part has been determined due to the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed in a swinging manner is carried over during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the design confirmation period, which is performed in a short period of time, it is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is without preparing a luminance data table for special lamp control. Do not add extra capacity.

[Re-lottery production 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the pattern is displayed to when it reaches the first position while expanding.

Specifically, in the above-described pattern display effect, a series of effects are executed in which the pattern is once displayed in an enlarged size and then displayed in the normal size at the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to favorably show a series of design effects by enlarging and reducing the design.

[Re-lottery production 18]
When the decorative pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when informing whether or not the decorative pattern matching is promoted in the notification part, the display means refers to common display data,
By combining the common display data and the display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, display of a plurality of types of patterns is performed.

Specifically, in the above-described pattern presentation effect, common pattern presentation data may be used in the pattern presentation presentation data in the winning epilogue part and the pattern presentation presentation data in the re-lottery presentation. Then, a series of pattern presentation effects may be executed by combining common pattern presentation data and a plurality of decorative designs. According to this, it is possible to reduce the data volume while favorably displaying the design effect. It should be noted that substantially the same data may be used for the symbol appearance effect data in the winning epilogue part and the symbol appearance effect data in the re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery production 19]
If you do not get promoted in the re-lottery production,
When the decoration pattern matching is temporarily stopped before execution of the re-lottery and when the notification that the decoration pattern matching is not promoted in the re-lottery is performed, the light emission mode in the pattern output is the same.

Specifically, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, as a ramp control when the pattern is finally decided after the re-lottery, it is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. A grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting the rainbow color for the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part, and while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, there is a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, while reducing the data volume, the effects in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player.

[Re-lottery effect 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-lottery production,
When the decoration pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed, and when the promotion of the decoration pattern matching is notified by the re-lottery, the lighting mode in the pattern output is different,
The light emitting mode in the pattern output is more intense when the decorative pattern matching is notified to be promoted by the re-lottery than when the decorative pattern matching is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part is used as lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-lottery. The frame lamp lights up, but when the pattern of "2" is promoted by a re-lottery and replaced with the pattern of "3", the lighting of the rainbow color at time tB5 to tB9 is once in the epilogue part of "2". The lighting mode is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the pattern is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player can effectively congratulate the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-lottery production 21]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
The first pattern is shaken by changing the display mode of the first pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from when the first pattern is displayed again in the second half until the pattern confirmation period. perform a shaking display that displays the first pattern as if
The second pattern is shaken by changing the display mode of the second pattern to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode from the time when the second pattern is displayed in the second half part to the time when the pattern is fixed. Perform a shaking display that displays the second pattern as if it were there,
The first mode is a mode in which the player can more easily see the pattern than either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means is
In the re-lottery part, it is possible to execute an action prompting display that prompts the player to act,
When the action is performed at the first timing while the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern so that the pattern is in the second mode;
When the action promotion display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, if the action is performed at the second timing different from the first timing, the predetermined timing comes after the performance corresponding to the first re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the second pattern in a swinging display while maintaining the swinging speed of the swinging display of the second pattern so that the second pattern is in the third mode when the second pattern is pressed,
When the action prompting display is executed in the first re-lottery performance, display is made to make the second pattern shaking display difficult to see from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the second pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and after that, when the pattern fixing period comes, the second pattern is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the second pattern. display stop,
When the action is performed at the first timing while the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern so that the pattern is in the second mode;
When the action is performed at the second timing while the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, the first re-lottery performance is performed at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-lottery performance is executed. displaying the first pattern in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern so that the pattern is in the third mode;
When the action prompting display is executed in the second re-lottery performance, display is made to make the shaking display of the first pattern difficult to see from a predetermined timing regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing. After that, the first pattern is again displayed in a shaking display, and then, when the pattern fixing period comes, the first pattern is displayed in the first mode while maintaining the shaking speed of the shaking display of the first pattern. display stop,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding of the re-lottery effect. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the action prompting display is displayed, the common symbol appearance effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common design effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the design as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, during the period of design fluctuation, the design is shaken. The swinging period of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing of the button. Therefore, after the swinging period of the symbol, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol faces right, at the second operation timing, the symbol faces left, and at the third operation timing. , The pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, at any operation timing, a white-out effect is interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and the effect of swinging the pattern after rotating and reducing the pattern is executed. According to this, the pattern can be neatly stopped by performing a common performance regardless of when the push button 31B is operated at any timing, and a series of performances can be shown favorably.

[Re-lottery effect 22]
When the action is performed at the first timing of the effective period of the operation, after notification of whether or not promotion is performed, the decorative pattern is displayed in a swaying manner until the predetermined timing of the change comes,
When the action is performed at the second timing, which is earlier than the first timing of the effective period of the action, the action is performed earlier than the first timing until the predetermined timing of the change after notification of whether or not promotion is performed. The decoration pattern is displayed swaying as much as it is early, and the scale is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid period of operation, after notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, a display with a swinging decorative pattern is displayed (FIG. 267 (L3)). without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation effective period, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid period of operation, the display of the swinging decorative pattern was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is an example of the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the fluctuation time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be neatly stopped, and a series of performances can be favorably shown.

[Re-lottery effect 23]
The predetermined effect is started after the flickering decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while blinking in white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after white-out is executed as a common effect, a different effect from the previous patterns is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged. According to this, regardless of the position of the pattern in the shaking of the pattern of the scale absorption, by executing a different mode of production after the whiteout is interposed, the flow of the production until the pattern is stopped. It can be made not to give a sense of incongruity.

[Re-lottery effect 24]
In the shaking display of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying around the first position as an axis,
The sway display has decorative patterns in the order of 1st position, 2nd position, 3rd position, 2nd position, 1st position, 4th position, 5th position, 4th position, 1st position, and 2nd position. A predetermined effect is designed so that when the fixed period comes, the decorative patterns are always displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the swing period of the pattern, the pattern swings to the back side from (J10) to (J12), and then swings to the front side from (J13) to (J14). to the initial position. After that, after the pattern swings to the front side from (J15) to (J16), the pattern swings to the back side from (J17) to (J18) to change to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the pattern is fixed, the pattern is designed to always be positioned at the initial position in which the pattern faces the front as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Re-lottery effect 25]
The starting point for causing the light emitting means to emit rainbow light during the second part is to emit rainbow light at the start of a predetermined effect.

Specifically, it is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow colors at the timing of the white-out of (J1) in FIG. 267 . The timing of (J1) is an effect executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the location where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start opportunity instead of the timing (J1).

[Re-lottery production 26]
The effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect for notifying whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect consists of an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is notified, a success or failure notification part to which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success or failure is notified. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when is determined and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
A first re-lottery performance of displaying a first pattern in the first half part and then displaying a second pattern in the second half part among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery performances when it is determined to be controlled in a second advantageous state. is executable and
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery display of a plurality of types of re-lottery effects, in which the first pattern is displayed in the first half part and then the first pattern is displayed again in the second half part. Lottery production can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is once displayed, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode so that the first pattern is shaken. It displays the first pattern,
When transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, when transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. There is a timing to shift from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part, and a timing to shift from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode,
The effect executing means performs re-lottery from the epilogue part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode and the transition from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode. When shifting to the part, and when shifting from the epilogue part to the re-lottery part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, a specific display is performed to make the first pattern difficult to see, Displaying the first pattern in a common display mode to execute a first re-lottery effect or a second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect,
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, regardless of the timing of the operation, after that, During the time up to the predetermined timing when the re-lottery effect is executed, there may be provided a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect accompanied by a whiteout as shown from (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, even if the stick controller 31A is operated at any timing, the pattern is once displayed in a swinging manner, and then the common effect accompanied by the whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the movement of the pattern from giving a sense of incompatibility, and it is possible to suitably show a series of presentations.

[Re-lottery effect 27]
The re-lottery effect is common regardless of which of the introduction parts of the plurality of types of introduction parts wins.

Specifically, any of a plurality of ready-to-wins may be used in common from the white-out screen until the re-lottery effect is executed. According to this, the data capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

[Re-lottery effect 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was once shaken before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that sways on the spot on the front side and the back side on the axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a motion of rotating clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while enlarging. According to this, by displaying the whiteout between the extended movements of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the movement of the pattern from being uncomfortable, and the series of performances can be shown favorably. be able to.

[Re-lottery production 29]
The plurality of types of introductory parts include a predetermined introductory part that is not notified when the operation of the operating means is triggered by branching the notification of whether or not the control is in an advantageous state,
In the predetermined introductory part, there is no point where the scale is shifted, so if it is decided that the control will be in an advantageous state in the predetermined introductory part, the decoration pattern will be temporarily stopped until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no blurring in the shaking display, but the same re-lottery effect as the reach that causes the scale deviation is executed.

Specifically, among the plurality of SP reach, there are those in which the promotion of operation such as button operation is not notified in the branch at the time of determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state. In such SP reach, there is no scale shift associated with the operation. However, even in such an SP ready-to-win game, a re-lottery effect similar to that for an SP ready-to-win game in which scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, even if there is only one re-lottery effect, it is possible to prevent discomfort from being caused by the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of scale deviation. In addition, the data capacity can be reduced by using one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery effect 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery effect after the shaking display of the decorative pattern in the big hit in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of shifting to the re-lottery effect is designed so that it will be an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is one of a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) via the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). is designed to be In other words, when the swing of the pattern is one of a series of actions in which the pattern rotates clockwise, a white-out is executed by a re-lottery effect, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotated clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from giving a sense of incongruity by a series of movements of the symbols rotating to the right from the period of the fluctuation of the symbols to the re-lottery effect.

<Description of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. Some terms used in this specification are explained below.

"Variable display" (variable display) includes variably displaying multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "fluctuation" of the pattern is the update display of multiple types of patterns, such as multiple types of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern), multiple types of normal patterns, and multiple types of decorative patterns. Scroll display, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, lighting / flashing / extinguishing of lamps (4th symbol unit 50, special figure 1 variable display part 53, special figure 2 variable display part 54 etc.) and so on.

The "decorative symbol" includes symbols variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

The "reduced pattern" is a pattern in which the decorative pattern is reduced, and includes a pattern smaller than the decorative pattern. When the reduced patterns are stopped and displayed, the same number pattern as the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the screen in a smaller size than the decorative pattern.

The "small pattern" includes patterns corresponding to the variable display of decorative patterns displayed in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. The small patterns are displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the "middle" decorative design display area 5C, and the "right" decorative design display area 5R. Patterns corresponding to each of the decorative patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction.

"Pattern determination" stops the variation of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special figure 1 variable display part 53, the special figure 2 variable display part 54, and the decoration pattern, etc., and finally the special figure game Including that the design in is confirmed. For example, a state in which each of the decorative patterns fluctuating in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative pattern fluctuating in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative pattern fluctuating in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is stopped. include.

In the "design determination period", the display result is determined by stopping the variation of the fourth design unit 50, the special figure 1 variable display section 53, the special figure 2 variable display section 54, and the decoration design. Including duration. For example, the decorative patterns fluctuating in the left decorative design display area 5L, the decorative patterns fluctuating in the middle decorative design display area 5C, and the decorative patterns fluctuating in the right decorative design display area 5R are stopped and displayed. Including the state in which the result was displayed deterministically.

"Reach" means that, when the decoration symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the decoration symbols that are not stopped and displayed continue to be displayed in a variable manner. For example, the left decorative design display area 5L stops the "2" decorative design, the right decorative design display area 5R stops the "2" decorative design, but the middle decorative design display area 5C This includes the state in which the variable display of the decoration pattern is still continuing.

“Lighting off” of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is “0” (a value indicating the lowest luminance). It should be noted that "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is luminance data corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means). It may include a state with a value close to "0". The state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", is " It may be included in "turn on" or "substantially turn off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (light emitting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when the lamp is turned off. This includes a state in which the value is equal to or greater than the luminance data value (“0”) corresponding to “lights off” described above. "Lighting" includes constant lighting in which the lamp is always lit, wave lighting in which a plurality of lamps are switched from off to lighting in order, and haze lighting in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing its brightness.

"Flashing" of the lighting means (light emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is in a state other than "extinguishing", "substantially extinguished", or "lit", and the lamp is in a state of "lit" and "extinguishing". is repeated over time. Also, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes that the lamp repeats "lighting" and "almost extinguishing" with the passage of time.

"Luminance" is a value indicating brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in the present embodiment, luminance data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to luminance. For example, if the luminance data used to control a given lamp is "0", the lamp is controlled so that the given lamp has the lowest luminance (darkest lamp). When the luminance data used for the calculation is "F", the lamp is controlled so that the predetermined lamp has the highest luminance (the lamp is bright). As described above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp. When the brightness data used to control a given lamp is "0", the current flowing through the given lamp is the smallest. , when the luminance data used to control a given lamp is "F", the current flowing through the given lamp is the largest. Note that the “lamp” is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, and includes any kind of lamps such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent lamps.

The "lighting color" or "luminous color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emitted by one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if the lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light-emitting elements "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), then the three light-emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the luminance data. A current to one light emitting element causes the three light emitting elements to emit light, thereby lighting the LED in various colors. The "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light-emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights in white, although the brightness varies depending on the current that flows. In the case of an LED composed of only R (red) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red although the brightness varies depending on the current that flows.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lighting colors of the lamp include colors composed of seven kinds of colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange (orange), yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Note that the “rainbow colors” are not limited to the colors described above, and may be composed of seven other colors. Even with the same "rainbow color", the lighting mode is different between smooth lighting based on the luminance data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and blinking based on the luminance data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. In addition, the lighting mode of rainbow colors may vary depending on the set luminance data.

The "color corresponding to the character" includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, there are colors set for each character, such as green for Mumu-chan, purple for Jam-chan, and red for Bakuchu.

The "light emission color corresponding to the character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes a predetermined color for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, the "luminous color corresponding to the character" is the green lighting color (luminous color) of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the character of Yume-chan, and the purple lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to Jam-chan. (light emission color), lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu, and the like.

The "speech sound" includes a sound corresponding to a word output in accordance with the timing when a character appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utters a word. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to the words uttered by the character are output in accordance with the image of the character appearing in the performance.

The “dialogue caption” includes characters corresponding to the dialogue sound displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the dialogue sound is output. Dialogue subtitles are also referred to as subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds generated by actions of objects such as characters and objects appearing in the production. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that are likely to be produced by the actions of the objects, such as characters and objects appearing in the performance, are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes pseudo sounds that express the actions of objects such as characters and objects appearing in the presentation. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeic sound) representing the action of an object such as a character or an object appearing in the performance is output in accordance with the image of the object.

"Character action" includes an effect in which a character appearing in the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some action. For example, Mumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

In the "re-lottery effect", after temporarily stopping and displaying a normal jackpot pattern (for example, an even number pattern such as "2" pattern) that does not become a probability variable jackpot in the variable display of decorative patterns, the normal jackpot pattern is a probability variable jackpot. Including an effect that is executed before design determination in order to arouse whether or not to be promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd number symbol such as "3" symbol).

The ``replacement display'' is a presentation included in the ``re-lottery presentation'', and includes the display of images such that the temporarily stopped decoration patterns are sequentially replaced with other patterns, so that the decoration patterns are successively switched. In the present embodiment, the "replacement display" is a display in which the symbol "2" changes at high speed and is sequentially replaced with other symbols, and finally the symbol "2" or "3" stops. include.

“Repeated display” means to repeat the same display, and to repeat the display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect" and includes a display of repeatedly displaying the temporarily stopped decorative pattern with the same animation. As an example, the "repeating display" includes a display in which the symbol "7" changes at high speed and is successively replaced by other symbols, and finally the symbol "7" stops.

"Shaking display" is to display the ornamental pattern while shaking it, indicating that the variation is not finished and is in the process of being varied.

"Still display" is to display the decoration pattern stationary without moving it, indicating that the variation has ended.

"Swaying speed" is the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while the design is swinging.

The "first mode of design", "second mode of design", and "third mode of design" are modes indicating the position of the decorative design. For example, in the case of vertically swinging display of decorative patterns, if the first mode is the center position, the second mode is the upper position, and the third mode is the lower position. Further, in the case where the decorative pattern is displayed to sway in the front-rear direction, if the first mode is the front position, the second mode is the left-facing position, and the third mode is the right-facing position.

"Fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of the big win game state and notifies that the big win game state has been entered.

“Advancement” of a movable body (accessory) is an action in which a movable body (accessory) moves from its initial position. The position of the end of the movable area where the accessory moves is the advanced position.

“Retraction” of the movable body (accessory) is an action of moving the accessory as the movable body from the advanced position to the initial position. The initial position of the movable area in which the accessory moves is the retreat position.

The "effect display for moving the movable body" is a display for enhancing the visual effect of the surroundings of the character on the screen in accordance with the movement of the character as the movable body to the advanced position. For example, an effect image is displayed for making the character action stand out in accordance with the character action when the reach develops in the second half or when a big hit is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progress of a story or a series of productions. In other words, the story is continuously displayed to the player without interruption of a series of stories or the like due to scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to a group that constitutes an effect, and a part is a larger group than a scene. Parts are divided according to roles.

"Scene change"
The switching of scenes mainly refers to switching of the display, and particularly to switching of the displayed background, characters, and the like.

"Cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed as an interrupting image in the displayed image. Also, the cut-in display can indicate the degree of expectation for a big hit by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is green.

"Switching display (eye-catching display)" is an effect displayed at the time of scene change. In the present embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when changing the scene from the state indicating the loss to the normal game state. The eye-catching display has a role to make it easy to understand that the super reach has ended.

In the "shielding display (shutter display)", the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image displayed before the shielding display is displayed. is a display that shields the The shield display may shield the image by displaying something other than a shutter.

"The brightness data is switched" means that the brightness data timer defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next brightness data is used. Switching the luminance data switches the light emission mode of the lamp. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given an impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene is being updated.

"The brightness data is not switched" means that the brightness data timer defined in the grandchild table does not become 0 and the brightness data continues to be used. Since the luminance data is not switched, the lighting mode of the lamp becomes constant. Since the light emission mode of the lamp becomes constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped without being updated.

“Moving image data” is data for displaying a moving image including animation. Images displayed on an image display device 5 are switched at high speed by several tens of images per second to make them look like they are moving. The moving image data may be compressed and held.

The “first moving image data” is moving image data created using many images in order to move a character out of the moving image data.

“Second moving image data” is moving image data created using a small number of images in order to move a character out of the moving image data.

A "movement of a specific character" is a movement corresponding to a specific character among a plurality of characters appearing in the production.

“Blackout” is an effect that darkens (blacks out) by displaying a black image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The blackout may be arranged such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the duration of the blackout state.

“White-out” is an effect in which a white image is displayed (white-out) in the display area of the image display device 5 in order to make the image displayed in the display area invisible. The whiteout may be arranged such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big win varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"Specific display that makes it difficult to see" means that an image is displayed on the screen to make the displayed decoration pattern invisible to the player. For example, by displaying a white image on the entire screen (whitening out), the decoration pattern becomes invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means that a state in which a background image or the like is displayed gradually changes to a state in which a predetermined image is visible. In the present embodiment, for example, images showing words are gradually displayed from a state in which the room background is being displayed. Gradual display means that the transparency of the image showing the words is gradually lowered. For example, after the dialogue image is displayed with a transparency of 100%, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 second and displayed, so that the dialogue image is displayed after one second. Contrary to fade-in, fade-out means gradually changing from a state in which a predetermined image is visible overlapping a background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, the image showing the dialogue is gradually hidden from the state in which the image showing the dialogue is displayed on the room background. Gradual hiding means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing the dialogue. For example, after the dialog image is displayed with a transparency of 0%, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, so that the dialog image disappears after 1 second. Further, the fade effect includes cross-fade in which fade-in and fade-out are performed simultaneously and images are replaced.

<Description of the invention using multiple configurations>
An invention that has the above-described plurality of features and particularly produces a synergistic effect will be described below. A plurality of feature points may be feature points in the same part or feature points in different parts.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (1)] (2020-297)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed;
including a specific scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by the character and action sounds corresponding to the actions of the character are output;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 170, Figures 213, and 214
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. Furthermore, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed in response to dialogue sounds, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and as a result, the flow of a series of performances to be executed can be shown better. It becomes possible.

[From SP reach start to pattern confirmation (2)] (2020-298)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the course of retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means is
In a specific scene in the introductory part, outputting the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, it corresponds to the scene after switching. output sound.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figures 171 and 172
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after the switching before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (3)] (2020-300)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for moving the body, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means is
In a specific scene in the introductory part, outputting the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
A sound for moving the movable body is output when the movable body advances to the second position, and a sound corresponding to an epilogue part is output while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figures 173, and 174
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the character object completes the movement to return to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the display from being spoiled. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (4)] (2020-301)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figs. 165 to 167, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed at the time of winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed at the time of losing, so the lighting mode of the frame lamp will be a hit. It is possible to convey to the player the fact in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (5)] (2020-302)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory to notify the hit is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode After that, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without interposing achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. Then, by intuitively conveying to the player that it is a hit by the flash mode, and then giving a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it by a smooth mode, it is possible to show the flow from the announcement of the success or failure to the epilogue in a suitable manner. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (6)] (2020-303)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character, and the notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 175
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than in the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and the blessing in the epilogue part As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of performances that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (7)] (2020-304)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part to be executed and a re-lottery part to be executed after the epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawing] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery effect, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect, the player is favored. At the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then the timing to stop the pattern (the pattern confirmation command is sent Timing) does not switch the brightness data table, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, the light emission mode switches during a short period in which the pattern is stopped, and the appearance deteriorates. To suitably show an epilogue part and a re-lottery part by preventing a player from being dissatisfied with flickering due to switching of light emission, and as a result, show a series of performance flows to be executed better. becomes possible.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (8)] (2020-305)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the course of retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 172, Figures 213 and 214
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. In addition, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed in response to dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, the scene after switching can be displayed before the character object completes the return operation to the initial position. By switching to the corresponding background display, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (9)] (2020-306)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for moving the body, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.
[Drawings] Figs. 168 to 170, Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 213, Fig. 214
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed in response to dialogue sounds, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, the epilogue part can be completed before the characters return to their initial positions. By switching to the background display, the beauty of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the luminance data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (10)] (2020-307)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figures 213, 214, Figures 261, and 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 can emphasize the effect. Since the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than the epilogue part, it is possible to tell the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the win has been achieved by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (11)] (2020-308)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figures 213, 214, and 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed in response to dialogue sounds, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, a movable body movement actuator used when moving a character to notify a win. The luminance data table of is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then used in the epilogue part where the story develops. By adopting a structure in which chromatic colors are sequentially used without intervening colors, a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner is used, so that the player is intuitively informed of the winning by a flashing manner, and thereafter by a smooth manner. By giving a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it, it is possible to favorably show the flow from the notification of success or failure to the epilogue, and as a result, it is possible to show the flow of the series of performances to be executed better.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (12)] (2020-309)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 175, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and further, the display ratio of dialogue subtitles for dialogue sounds is increased in the epilogue part compared to the introductory part. By designing, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and it is possible to enhance the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part, and as a result, it is possible to show the flow of the series of productions being executed better. It becomes possible.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (13)] (2020-310)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part to be executed and a re-lottery part to be executed after the epilogue part,
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawing] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the re-lottery effect is replaced ( By performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be promoted), the player can be favorably encouraged, and at a specific timing of the re-lottery part (timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed) After switching to the luminance data table for emitting rainbow light, the luminance data table for emitting rainbow light is continuously used without switching the luminance data table even at the timing when the pattern is stopped (timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). In the short period during which the pattern is stopped, the switching of the light emission mode will make the appearance worse, and by preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flicker caused by the switching of the light emission, the epilogue part and the replay part can be prevented. The lottery part can be favorably shown, and as a result, it is possible to show the flow of a series of performances to be executed better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (14)] (2020-311)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position , End the effect display for moving the movable body when switching the scene, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body during scene switching, and the movable body moves from the second position to the second position. On the way of retracting to the first position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene switching is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used. controlling the light emitting means;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. to output the sound corresponding to the scene after switching,
By moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means in the win/fail notification part of the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. , is notified that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
When the movable body advances to the second position, the display means performs an effect display for moving the movable body at the time of success/failure notification, and during the retreat of the movable body from the second position to the first position. , Ends the effect display for moving the movable body when the success or failure is announced, displays corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displays subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character. do,
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of success/failure notification so that the movable body moves from the second position. On the way of retracting to the first position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of success/failure notification is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and the light emitting means is operated using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part. control and
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves to the second position when the movable body advances to the second position, while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. to output the sound corresponding to the epilogue part.
[Drawings] Figures 171 to 174
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the luminance data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (15)] (2020-312)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
In the introductory part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, a scene change is notified,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The light emission control means is
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part in the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is performed, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 261 and 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed at the time of winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed at the time of losing. It is possible to clearly inform the player that it has become. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than in the case of a loss, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than in the case of a hit, so that the epilogue part can be made to look good. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (16)] (2020-313)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and during the movement of the movable body from the second position to the first position , End the effect display for moving the movable body when switching the scene, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body during scene switching, and the movable body moves from the second position to the second position. On the way of retracting to the first position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene switching is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used. controlling the light emitting means;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. to output the sound corresponding to the scene after switching,
By moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means in the win/fail notification part of the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. , is notified that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
The light emission control means is
in the success/failure notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of success/failure notification;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of success/failure notification is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character can move and the introduction part can be executed smoothly. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable body, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the winning, is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors, so that it emits light in a flash mode. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops uses chromatic colors sequentially without interposing achromatic colors, so that the rainbow emits light in a smooth manner. By doing so, the player is intuitively informed of the winning by the flash mode, and after that, by giving the player a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it by the smooth mode, the flow from the winning/failure notification to the epilogue can be shown favorably. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (17)] (2020-314)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the course of retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 175
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. Furthermore, in the epilogue part, compared to the introductory part, by designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound to be higher, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and the epilogue part As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of performances to be executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (18)] (2020-315)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the course of retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 176, 177, and 182
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect are replaced by all the symbols. At the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the design is enlarged), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then the timing to stop the design (the design confirmation command is sent By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in rainbow without switching the brightness data table even at the timing of coming), the light emission mode switches during the short period when the pattern is stopped, and the appearance deteriorates. Also, by preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flickering due to the switching of light emission, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be favorably shown, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be improved. It is possible to show.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (19)] (2020-316)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
In the first epilogue part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, it is notified that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. After the effect display for moving the body is finished, the display corresponding to the first epilogue part is performed, and after the movable body has retreated to the first position, the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound emitted by the character are displayed,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the middle of retracting to the position, the brightness data table for moving the movable body is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to 1 epilogue part,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the second epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 173, 174, 261 and 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed at the time of winning, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed at the time of losing, so the lighting mode of the frame lamp will be a hit. It is possible to convey to the player the fact in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than in the case of losing, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than in the case of winning, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (20)] (2020-317)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for moving the body, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part.
[Drawing] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory to notify the hit is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode After that, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without interposing achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. Then, by intuitively conveying to the player that it is a hit by the flash mode, and then giving a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it by a smooth mode, it is possible to show the flow from the announcement of the success or failure to the epilogue in a suitable manner. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (21)] (2020-318)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for moving the body, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. [Drawings] Figures 173 to 175
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than in the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and the blessing in the epilogue part As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of performances that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (22)] (2020-319)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
a performance execution means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for moving the body, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. [Drawing] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery effect, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect, the player is favored. At the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then the timing to stop the pattern (the pattern confirmation command is sent Timing) does not switch the brightness data table, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, the light emission mode switches during a short period in which the pattern is stopped, and the appearance deteriorates. To suitably show an epilogue part and a re-lottery part by preventing a player from being dissatisfied with flickering due to switching of light emission, and as a result, show a series of performance flows to be executed better. becomes possible.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (23)] (2020-320)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and a notification that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
In the first epilogue part, when the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, it is notified that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table for movable body movement, and thereafter, from the luminance data table for movable body movement Switching to a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used. ,
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next brightness data.
[Drawings], Figures 261 to 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part which is executed in the event of a loss, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the win has been achieved. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory to notify the hit is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode is used. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without interposing achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. Intuitively conveying to the player that it is a hit by the flash mode, and then giving a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it by a smooth mode, it is possible to show the flow from the announcement of the success or failure to the epilogue in a suitable manner. , as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (24)] (2020-321)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next luminance data,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the first epilogue part in the first notification effect is the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introductory part of the first notification effect. higher than
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the first epilogue part in the second notification effect is the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introductory part in the second notification effect. higher than
[Drawing] Fig. 175, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part which is executed in the event of a loss, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the win has been achieved. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than in the introductory part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and to create a sense of blessing in the epilogue part. can be enhanced, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (25)] (2020-322)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. and a re-lottery part to be executed after the first epilogue part,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time to switch to the next luminance data,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawing] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part which is executed in the event of a loss, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the win has been achieved. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when the re-lottery effect is performed, the symbols that are likely to be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect are replaced by all the symbols, so that the player can be favored. At the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to the luminance data table that emits rainbow light, and then the timing when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent) ), the brightness data table is not switched, and by continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, the light emission mode switches during a short period of time when the pattern is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance or light emission. By preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flickering caused by switching, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be favorably shown, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. It becomes possible.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (26)] (2020-323)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] Figures 175 and 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introductory part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, so that it is a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then giving a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it in a smooth manner, it is possible to show the flow from the success/failure announcement to the epilogue in a suitable manner. Compared to the part, by designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound to be higher, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and it is possible to increase the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (27)] (2020-324)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
display means;
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawing] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introductory part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, so that it is a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. Intuitively conveying this to the player, and after that, in a smooth manner, giving a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it, it is possible to show the flow from the announcement of the success or failure to the epilogue in a suitable manner. , When performing a re-lottery performance, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, the player can be favorably encouraged, and the re-lottery part. At a specific timing (after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light. By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits light in rainbow without a problem, the appearance deteriorates due to the switching of the light emission mode in a short period in which the pattern is stopped, and flickering due to the switching of light emission causes the player to By preventing dissatisfaction with , the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be favorably shown, and as a result, the flow of a series of performances to be executed can be shown better.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (28)] (2020-325)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part to be executed and a re-lottery part to be executed after the epilogue part,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawings] Figures 175 to 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, by designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound to be higher, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and to enhance the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , In the re-lottery part, when performing a re-lottery effect, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect, the player can be favorably encouraged. At the specific timing of the re-lottery part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged), switch to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then at the timing when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the luminance data table emitting rainbow light without switching the luminance data table, the light emission mode is switched in a short period during which the pattern is stopped, and the appearance deteriorates or the light emission is switched. By preventing the player from being dissatisfied with the flickering, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be favorably shown, and as a result, it is possible to show the flow of the series of effects to be executed better. .

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (29)] (2020-403)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
In the introductory part, there is a first scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by the character and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output,
In the first scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
In the introductory part, there is a second scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the second scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figures 178 to 181
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the switching of subtitles. It is possible to show the flow of production better.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (30)] (2020-404)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
A scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed;
a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. ,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figures 178 to 181, Figures 213 and 214
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the subtitles are changed by the fading effect. is easy to understand, the switching of subtitles can be made easy to understand, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (31)] (2020-405)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the course of retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
A fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 178 to 181
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. Furthermore, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap each other, the change in the subtitles becomes easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand. It is possible to better show the flow of a series of performances.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (32)] (2020-406)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
adding a fade effect to at least one of when display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for moving the body, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part [Drawings] Figures 173, 174, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the switching of subtitles. It is possible to show the flow of production better.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (33)] (2020-407)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
adding a fade effect to at least one of when display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part,
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next luminance data.
[Drawing] Figures 178 to 181, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part which is executed in the event of a loss, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the win has been achieved. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. Furthermore, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in subtitles becomes easier to understand due to the fade effect, making it easier to understand the switching of the subtitles. It is possible to better show the flow of

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (34)] (2020-408)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
adding a fade effect to at least one of when display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, Figure 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introductory part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, so that it is a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. This is intuitively conveyed to the player, and after that, in a smooth manner, giving a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it, it is possible to appropriately show the flow from the announcement of success or failure to the epilogue. Even when is displayed, the fading effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the switching of the subtitles. It becomes possible.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (35)] (2020-409)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
adding a fade effect to at least one of when display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawings] Figures 175, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, by designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound to be higher, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and to enhance the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes it easy to understand the change in the subtitles, making it easy to understand the switching of the subtitles. It is possible to make it look better.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (36)] (2020-410)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. Consists of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined to be done, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
adding a fade effect to at least one of when display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing associated with the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawings] Figures 176 to 182
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is to be performed in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and by performing a boost until the winning or not notification is performed, the player's sense of exhilaration is enhanced, and the winning is notified. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , when the re-lottery effect is performed, by performing the replacement display using all the symbols that are likely to be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect, the player can be favorably encouraged and the re-lottery can be performed. At the specific timing of the part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and after that, the brightness data table is also used at the timing when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching, the light emission mode is switched in a short period in which the pattern is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance or flickering due to the switching of light emission. By preventing dissatisfaction with the viewer, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown appropriately, and even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes it easy to understand the change of the subtitles. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to understand the switching of subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (37)] (2020-411)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character and the action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the action of the character,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 183
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. To make it easier for a player to convey the contents of the performance by outputting the physical sound as a part of the performance to make the performance more realistic, and by outputting the dialogue sound loudly when the dialogue sound and the physical sound are overlapped. Furthermore, in the state where the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the winning epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the image of the winning epilogue part is completed and the pattern is displayed. When playing, the decorative patterns are displayed in a continuous manner using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the display of the patterns, thereby emphasizing the jackpot patterns and showing them to the player. You can make the epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (38)] (2020-412)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The introductory part is
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed;
a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed;
The luminance data table used in a scene in which dialogue sounds emitted by a character are output and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a luminescent color corresponding to the character is switched according to the action of the character. The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figs. 168 to 170, Fig. 183, Fig. 213, Fig. 214
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed in response to dialogue sounds, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, in the state where the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced pattern is displayed on the edge side of the screen. By positioning it, the image of the winning epilogue part is not disturbed, and when the development of the winning epilogue part image is completed and the pattern is displayed, the decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed so as to be continuous using the screen edge side and the screen center. In addition, by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the appearance of the symbols, the big winning symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be favorably shown. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (39)] (2020-413)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
Up to the win/fail notification part, the change of scene is notified by moving the movable body from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. In the course of retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and switches the sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 183
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the appearance of the display can be maintained. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switching in the middle of the rise of the character, the character is moved and the introduction part is executed smoothly. In addition, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced pattern is positioned at the edge of the screen so that the video of the winning epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the video of the winning epilogue part is completed. When the pattern is put out, the decorative pattern is displayed in a continuous manner using the end side of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the pattern being put out, thereby emphasizing the jackpot pattern and allowing the player to play the game. , and the epilogue part can be shown appropriately. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (40)] (2020-414)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
sound output means;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for moving the body, performing display corresponding to the epilogue part, after the movable body has retreated to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part on the way to retreat to the position, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawing] Fig. 173, Fig. 174, Fig. 183
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part by the time the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, it is possible to prevent spoiling the aesthetic appearance of the display. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the character is rising, the movement of the character and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, in the state where the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the image of the winning epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the image of the winning epilogue part is completed and the pattern is displayed. When playing, the decorative patterns are displayed in a continuous manner using the edge side of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the display of the patterns, thereby emphasizing the jackpot patterns and showing them to the player. You can make the epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (41)] (2020-415)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the control to the advantageous state. It is composed of a first epilogue part that informs that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined not to be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the propriety of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and the fact that the control is not to be controlled to the advantageous state. is configured to include a second epilogue part that is notified,
The display means is
In the first epilogue part, the decoration pattern is displayed at the end of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed,
After that, end the display of the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In both the introductory part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state and the introductory part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introductory part;
In the first epilogue part, when the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and then the decorative pattern is displayed. When enlarged display is performed using the center of the area, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is switched to the luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used by the light emitting means. to control the
In the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next luminance data is switched to the next luminance data after 1 luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time for switching to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 183, 261 and 262
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part which is executed in the event of a loss, so that the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the win has been achieved. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is emphasized more than when it is lost, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting by the frame lamp is made more calm than when it hits, so that the epilogue part can be seen appropriately. In addition, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that the video of the winning epilogue part is not disturbed, and the development of the video of the winning epilogue part is completed and the pattern is displayed. When doing so, the decorative patterns are displayed in a continuous manner using the end side of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the appearance of the patterns, thereby emphasizing the jackpot patterns and showing them to the player. You can make the epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (42)] (2020-416)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a movable body;
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introductory part until the success or failure of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a success/failure notification part in which the success or failure is notified, and a control to the advantageous state after the success/failure notification. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that
in the success/failure notification part of the notification effect executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the win/fail notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body,
In the epilogue part, when the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and then the decorative pattern is displayed using the center of the display area. when enlarged display is performed, switching from the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and using the luminance data table for enlarged display to control the light emitting means;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured so that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color are used in sequence.
[Drawing] Fig. 183, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the performance and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced production with the uplifting feeling in the introductory part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the accessory is configured to alternately repeat chromatic and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story is developed. The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, so that it is a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. This is intuitively conveyed to the player, and after that, in a smooth manner, giving a feeling of blessing without overemphasizing it, it is possible to appropriately show the flow from the announcement of success or failure to the epilogue, and furthermore, the success epilogue part. When the image is flowing, the reduced pattern is placed on the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part. By enlarging and displaying the decorative patterns continuously using the center of the screen and switching the luminance data table in conjunction with the appearance of the patterns, the big winning patterns can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part is suitable. can be shown to As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (43)] (2020-417)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. Control,
The notification effect includes a first notification effect and a second notification effect,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, a dialog sound emitted by the character is output,
In both the first notification effect and the second notification effect, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by characters and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed,
The number of lines emitted by the character differs between the first notification effect and the second notification effect,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the first notification effect. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the second notification effect is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introductory part of the second notification effect. high.
[Drawing] Fig. 175, Fig. 183
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with a sense of exhilaration in the introduction part and a feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, by designing the display ratio of the dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sound to be higher, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and to enhance the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , In the state where the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced pattern is positioned on the edge side of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part. The decoration patterns are continuously enlarged and displayed using the screen end side and the screen center, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the pattern appearance, thereby emphasizing the big winning patterns and showing them to the player. You can make the epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (44)] (2020-418)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a performance execution means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
The effect execution means can execute a notification effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part to be executed and a re-lottery part to be executed after the epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. control and
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state;
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The production executing means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among a plurality of kinds of re-lottery effects, a replacement display for replacing the first pattern with another pattern after displaying the first pattern in the first half part. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect to display the second pattern in the second half part,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is to be controlled, the replacement display is performed in the first half of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, and the first pattern is displayed again in the second half. It is possible to execute a re-lottery effect,
The first re-lottery effect is a effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the second pattern in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols from the start of the replacement display in the first half part to the display of the first symbol in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance, and corresponding to the first re-lottery performance. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At specific timing in the second half part, the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the luminance data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light-emitting mode even during the subsequent pattern determination period,
At the timing related to the start of the fanfare effect, the luminance data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare effect. .
[Drawings] Figures 176, 177, 182 and 183
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. , when the re-lottery effect is performed, by performing the replacement display using all the symbols that are likely to be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery effect, the player can be favorably encouraged and the re-lottery can be performed. At the specific timing of the part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and after that, the brightness data table is also used at the timing when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching, the light emission mode is switched in a short period in which the pattern is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance or flickering due to the switching of light emission. To suitably show an epilogue part and a re-lottery part by preventing dissatisfaction with a player, and to position a reduced pattern on the end side of a screen when the image of the winning epilogue part is displayed. When the development of the winning epilogue part video is completed and the pattern is displayed without disturbing the video of the winning epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed so that it is continuous using the screen edge side and the screen center. By switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the payout, the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be favorably shown. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

[Start of SP reach to confirmation of design (45)] (2020-419)
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
display means;
a plurality of light emitting means;
and a light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is performed during an introductory part until it is notified whether the control is to be in the advantageous state or not, and after the notification is made when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state. is composed of an epilogue part and
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
In the specific scene, the display of the second dialogue subtitle is started while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. and
adding a fade effect to at least one of when display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The display means is
In the epilogue part, while displaying the decoration pattern at the end of the display area, display the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
After that, end the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part,
At the timing related to ending the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to the brightness data table for enlarged display, and the brightness data table for enlarged display is used to operate the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181 and 183
[Effect] In a game machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not control is in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided, and the excitement until the winning or not notification is performed to increase the excitement of the player and notify the winning. By setting up an epilogue part after that and giving a feeling of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp production with the uplifting feeling in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. Even when the subtitles are displayed, the change of the subtitles becomes easy to understand due to the fading effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easy to understand. By positioning it on the edge of the screen, it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part. By enlarging and displaying the decoration pattern and switching the luminance data table interlocking with the appearance of the pattern, the big winning pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be favorably shown. As a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that are executed.

<Example of time saving control without hitting>
Next, as a time saving state, an example of executing time saving control that does not pass through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) will be described.
(Example of time saving control using time saving pattern)

(A1) In each of the characteristic portions and modifications described above, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is a form in which the transition is made via the big hit state or small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A always operates. , the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the time saving state (high base state). That is, as a time saving state, a time saving control that does not pass through a hit (big hit, small hit, etc.) may be executed.

(A2) In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be part of the losing patterns or may be part of the small winning patterns.

(A3) In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a random number dedicated to the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the losing pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries, such as lottery random numbers for big win patterns, lottery random numbers for small win patterns, random numbers for judging big win lotteries, and random numbers for fall lottery.

(A4) In addition, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small winning symbol or a losing symbol. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

(A5) In addition, when the lottery of the time saving pattern is performed and the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time saving pattern does not change according to the setting value, that is, the time saving pattern in all the setting values Although the lottery probability is the same, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

(A6) In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition in the case of lottery for time-saving symbols, even when using a dedicated random number or when using another random number, the starting port (first starting Prize-winning opening, 2nd starting prize-winning opening).

(A7) In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result of the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the time-saving design lottery When using a small winning pattern random number, a specific small winning pattern random number is used as a winning value, and when using a random number for a falling lottery judgment value in a time-saving design lottery, the random number for a falling lottery judgment value can be used as a winning value. A lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the game ball passing through the time-saving area may be selected as a time-saving design.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time saving pattern is performed using a structure, when the small winning pattern is used in combination with the time saving pattern, the number of variable display times of the time saving state (time saving number) depends on whether or not the time saving area is passed. keep it from changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, when using random numbers for time-saving patterns, a specific losing pattern random number is used as the winning value, and the random number of jackpot patterns is used for lottery of time-saving patterns. In that case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

(A10) Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be performed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the time-saving design lottery is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, without executing it in the time-saving state (high base) or high probability, regardless of which random value is used for the lottery. . However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each game machine.

(A11) In addition, regarding the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value (symbol) and each game state. In addition, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times of time reduction is different according to the time reduction design, it is possible to change the allocation lottery of the time reduction design with the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

(A13) Also, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

(A14) Moreover, the lottery result of "the number of times of time saving 0 times" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

(A15) In addition, a derivation lottery for the time saving end pattern (time saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times of time saving is the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving, or until the big hit pattern is derived and displayed. good. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

(A16) In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

(A17) In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the point in time when the time for fixing the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

(A18) In addition, in the case of lottery using structures, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state (for example, small win state) in which the structure is operated.

(A19) In addition, in the case of a game machine that is controlled to a high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit (so-called specified number of times probability variable machine (ST machine)), a high probability It is a low base state, and after the high probability low base state has been executed a specified number of times of variable display and ended, the time saving state may be controlled.

(A20) In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated.

(A21) Also, the symbol confirmation time for the time saving symbol may be different from the symbol confirmation time for the other symbols.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving patterns)
As other time-saving control using the time-saving design, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the special design is in the time-saving state. Based on the fact that the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed, there is no game control to further shift from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (such as the time saving state may occur again) without controlling the switching of the game state). Then, when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the normal state with the special pattern, and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the time-saving state, different effects may be performed (decorative pattern Regarding, in the normal state, a special pattern is displayed as a time-saving pattern, and in the time-saving state, a general lost pattern is displayed, etc.). As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B2) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of the special pattern is a time saving pattern, the special pattern is a common time saving pattern in the normal state and the time saving state, and the decoration pattern is the normal state. It may be possible to display different patterns as display results in the time saving state and the time saving state (for example, the decorative pattern displays a special pattern corresponding to the time saving pattern in the normal state, but in the time saving state, it displays a simple lost pattern, etc.) For example, do not display the symbol corresponding to the symbol). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B3) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), in the normal state, an effect is executed to suggest whether or not the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time saving pattern), but in the time saving state, the decorative pattern is executed. It is also possible not to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the display result of . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he/she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decoration pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is different between the normal state and the time saving state. may be controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the performance of the decoration pattern in the time-saving state, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B5) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) (a) not control the switching of the game state) may be configured. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the result of the variable display of the time saving pattern than the first variable display, stores information on the variable display as reserved storage information, and holds the reserved storage when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification (notification to instruct right-handed hitting), and when the time-saving state ends, the variable display based on the pending storage information is stored. until all finished. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B6) After performing the first variable display with the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display with the second special symbol, it is possible to control to an advantageous state for the player, and the normal state. Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving design is displayed in the special design, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and in the time-saving state, the time-saving design is variable with the special design. Based on the fact that the display result is displayed, there is no game control to move from the time saving state to the same time saving state (even if the time saving pattern is displayed, the time saving state is overwritten (so that the time saving state occurs again) (a) not control the switching of the game state) may be configured. The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the result of the variable display of the time saving pattern than the first variable display, stores information on the variable display as reserved storage information, and holds the reserved storage when the time saving state ends. Depending on whether or not information is stored, different effects can be executed (when shifting to time-saving control, continuous display of time-saving control, and when not shifting to time-saving control, it is possible to specify that time-saving control is not executed. During the time-saving state, the right-handed game is played in response to the right-handed notification, and until the variable display based on the remaining retention storage information stored when the time-saving state ends. Left-handed notification (notification for instructing left-handed hitting) may be omitted. As a result, suitable control can be performed according to the state when the variable display result of the time saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is improved by executing an effect according to the presence or absence of state transition).

(B7) Execute the left-handed notification in the variable display (first variable display) executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends. may As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B8) When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved storage information stored when the time saving state ends, and the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information In the case of winning (small hit, big win) in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed, the notification mode of the right-handed notification executed in response to the winning It can be different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time saving state ends, common production when there is reserved memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed and when there is no such reserved memory information (For example, when there is pending memory information in which the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the fourth pending memory information among the four remaining pending memories, the third pending memory Until the variable display based on the information, a common performance suggesting whether or not to return to the time saving state is executed, and a time saving state return performance different from the common performance is executed in the variable display based on the fourth reserved storage information. possible). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that he or she has lost money due to the display result of the decoration pattern by the performance of the notification mode of the right-handed notification, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

(B10) Production at the time of transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends and the variable display based on the remaining hold storage information The notification mode of the right-handed notification to be executed according to the hit is different from the production at the time of the time-saving state transition based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You may do so. As a result, since the presentation changes according to the game state, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) Fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends (maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result The fixed display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved storage information is executed may be common. Thereby, an increase in control data can be suppressed.

(B12) In the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining hold storage information stored when the time saving state ends is executed, the right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable based on the remaining hold storage information When the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, the game can be progressed smoothly, and the interest in the game can be improved because the instruction of how to beat is suitably issued.

(B13) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to execute a common specific effect (reach effect, notice effect) in the case of winning patterns (specific display results) such as winning patterns and big winning patterns and the case of reducing time patterns (special display results). Depending on which common specific effect is executed among the common specific effects provided in types, the ratio of the time saving pattern (special display result) may be different. Then, when the display result of the time saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, the right hitting notification may be executed in the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is possible to suitably control the effect.

(B14) After the common specific effect is executed, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time saving pattern (special display result). As a result, the variation of the effect result of the variable display is enriched, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control creates a common variation pattern for the winning pattern (specific display result), the time saving pattern (special display result), and the losing pattern (predetermined display result). can be selected, and the effect control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, depending on the type of the symbol specification command specifying the display result, Different effects in the variable display may be executable. As a result, the variety of variable display effects can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B16) After executing the common specific effect, it is possible to execute a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved by the special effect after execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, there may be cases where a special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) is executed and a case where it is not executed (for example, multiple types For example, the special effect is not executed when executing the effect with a high degree of expectation that it will be a hit among the super reach effects. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific effect, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the time saving pattern (special display result) when the special effect is executed may differ. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B19) A predetermined effect different from the common specific effect (for example, an active display whose display mode can be changed depending on the degree of expectation for winning (a display that has moved from the display position of the pending display to another display position, and is currently being executed) Depending on the production mode of (display) that can suggest the expectation level of the hit corresponding to the variable display), the expectation level (ratio) that will be the time saving pattern (special display result) will be different. good too. As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B20) In the special effect that can be executed when the time saving pattern (special display result) occurs, after executing the effect (such as time saving suggesting effect) that suggests that the time saving pattern (special display result) will be performed, the winning pattern (specified It may be possible to execute an effect (such as a special jackpot with a higher game value than the time saving state) that notifies the display result). As a result, the sense of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of the performance that excessively agitates only the time-saving state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(B21) The CPU 103 for game control can be controlled in a time saving state (special state) with a different number of time saving times (time saving duration) according to the type of time saving pattern (special display result) provided in a plurality of types (for example, the 1 hour-shortening pattern: 50 hour-shortening patterns, 2nd hour-shortening pattern: 100 hour-shortening patterns, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 is given when the time-shortening pattern stops depending on the type of effect executed (for example, the type of reach effect). You may perform the production|presentation from which the number of times of time saving (duration) differs. As a result, depending on the type of performance, the player's attention can be focused on the number of subsequent time-saving times, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B22) Based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time saving pattern is displayed in the special pattern in the normal state, the game control is performed to shift from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the progress of the game is controlled. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that receives the command. And, the command to be transmitted includes a special command that can be specified to shift (control) from the normal state to the time saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends a plurality of types of commands including the special command. When receiving, based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information, the pre-reading notice effect for the reserved memory information that occurred after the reserved memory information specified that the variable display that can shift to the time saving state (special state) is executed Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, allowed rarely, etc.). As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect control according to the game state when the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) Based on the prefetching of the pending storage information, the prefetching of the pending storage information generated after the specified holding storage information that the variable display capable of shifting (controlling) to the jackpot game state (specific game state) is executed You may make it restrict|limit execution of an advance notice production. Then, as the pre-reading foretelling effect during execution restriction of such a foreseeing foretelling effect, a common mode effect may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the effect control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B24) If the variable display based on the pending memory information is the variable display in which the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, and if the time saving pattern (special display result) is displayed, it is not displayed as if it is a variable For both the display and the display, the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect for the reserved memory information generated after the reserved memory information may be restricted. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B25) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute an effect with a higher expectation than a specific expectation (for example, if the color expectation of the reserved display is blue < green < red such as not changing the display color to red). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(B26) The pre-reading notice effect during execution restriction of the pre-reading notice effect does not execute a specific type of effect (for example, if the degree of expectation of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red not change). As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game by restricting the execution of the performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state with the transition of the game state.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times that resulted in a predetermined display result such as the number of variable display times of loss)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of times of variable display (number of continuations of variable display of loss) that has given a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) is that the number of continuations of variable display that has become a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times) may be made executable as a condition. As the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be made executable on the condition that the number of continuations of the variable display resulting in the display failure reaches the special number of times.

(C1) After performing the first variable display by the first special symbol and after performing the second variable display by the second special symbol, the game is played based on the variable display result becoming the specific display result. It is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and in the normal state, update the numerical information of the number of executions of the variable display that has resulted in a predetermined display result (loss display result, small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.), and update the numerical information. Based on, when a special condition is established that the number of times the variable display that has resulted in the predetermined display result (the number of continuations) has reached a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.) is established, the normal state is changed to a time-saving state (special state). You may do game control to shift. The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is obtained in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is obtained in the second variable display. As a result, even in a situation where either the first variable display or the second variable display can be executed, the update of the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result is obtained is continued, so that the player can be easily relieved due to the time-saving state. , the player's desire to play can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player due to the time-saving state.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined, based on the numerical information, that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed continuously a special number of times (for example, 1000 times). can be As a result, when display results disadvantageous to the player continue, the player can be relieved by shifting to the time-saving state (special state), so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when the variable display is executed even in a state (probability variable state, time saving state) different from the normal state. As a result, the player can be favorably relieved when display results disadvantageous to the player continue.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control to shift to the time saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rescue of the player when it becomes unnecessary to rescue the player, such as when the player becomes in a time-saving state (special state) advantageous to the player, and to prevent the gambling property from being increased more than necessary. can be done.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is performed a special number of times. As a result, it is possible to substantially control the time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(C7) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the backed up stored data can be backed up when specific conditions such as an initialization operation at power-on are satisfied. Data can be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power failure is initialized at the time of initialization of the data and does not remain, so that the game arcade side is prevented from being disadvantaged.

(C8) Based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.), it is possible to control the time saving state (special state) for the period of the special number of times or more (for example, 1000 times or more), During the time-saving state (special state), it is possible to control the time-saving state (special state) again based on the numerical information becoming the special number of times, and the first time-saving state (special state); A different production may be executed in the second time saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in which the second time reduction state (special state) is in an extremely disadvantageous state, the second time reduction state shortens the variable display time more than the first time reduction state. Thus, it becomes possible to change the appearance of the presentation, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, without executing such an effect, the same effect may be executed in the first time saving state (special state) and the second time saving state (special state). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of being in an extremely disadvantageous state such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), thereby suppressing the decline in the interest in the game. be able to.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) is executed, and the special condition is established when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. The 3rd process for controlling to the time saving state based on (special state) is performed. Also. A game ball can be hit separately in a first path (left game area) and a second path (right game area), and in a normal state, a game ball is hit in the first path, and in a time-saving state (special state), the second path. A game is played by hitting a game ball into the path. And, during the execution of the third process, it is not controlled to the time saving state (special state), but it is notified that it should be fired to the second path (for example, right-handed notification by right-handed lamp etc.) can be In addition, during the execution of the third process, a notification effect of shifting to a time saving state (special state) may be performed. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to execute the production of the notification of the firing direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation starts) when actually shifting to the time-saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in the variable display that satisfies the special condition, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. . As a result, since controlling to an advantageous state is given priority over controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition, the result is not more advantageous for the player, and the game interest of the player is reduced. Decrease can be suppressed.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display is started, and the numerical information becomes the specific value based on the updated numerical information becoming the specific value corresponding to the special number of times. After the variable display ends (start of next fluctuation, customer waiting), control to a time saving state (special state), and when the numerical information after updating reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset) may Thereby, the control which transfers to a time saving state (special state) can be suitably performed by managing special information.

(C12) The CPU 103 for game control selects and determines the variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and determines the variation pattern of the symbol fixation time that differs between when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. You may do so. As a result, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, it is possible to suitably execute the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first processing regarding variable display is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (4 or later ), the second processing relating to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special process flag is the third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is satisfied The 3rd process for controlling to the based time saving state (special state) is performed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect based on the command can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means) that received the command. Then, when the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value when the special state, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) according to when it is the third numerical value . As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, game control becomes easier. And if a command is changed according to the game state identified at that time, suitable effect control can be executed according to the game state by the effect control CPU 120 (effect control means).

(C14) During the time saving state (special state), when the special condition is established, the value of the special figure process flag is set to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value By doing so, it may be possible to control the time saving state (special state) again. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control.

(C15) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable display count Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is short, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the jackpot game state, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C16) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the display of the specific display result (hit pattern), the special condition (variable number of times of display Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When it hits and when it becomes a time-saving state after the end of the big hit, the time-saving state production with the same fluctuation time is used). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C17) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (variable number of times of display Condition) is established and it is controlled to the time saving state (special state), and it may be possible to execute different effects When the time is reduced, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is reduced after the end of the big hit, etc.). As a result, it becomes possible to execute the effect of the time saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and the game interest can be improved.

(C18) In the time saving state (special state), when it is controlled to the time saving state (special state) based on the fact that the special display result (time saving pattern) is displayed, the special condition (the number of times of variable display Condition) is established and the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and the same effect may be executed (for example, the variable display number becomes the time saving state under the condition of the special number of times or more When the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the big hit ends, etc.). This eliminates the need for new performance data and the like, so that development costs do not increase, and the player is not confused, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(C19) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. A ram clear command at the time of cold start, a command for notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time saving state at the time of hot start) can be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the predetermined information. Suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on (so-called effect that suggests that the first run in the morning is different, the background image is different, and whether it is far or near within 100 rotation fluctuations is performed) ) may be executable. By giving the player a first game motivation in the morning, the operation rate of the game machine can be increased and the processing load can be prevented from increasing.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 can transmit specific information (a command that can specify information about the time saving state) to the effect control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the effect control CPU 120 Based on the specific information, it may be possible to execute a special effect related to being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (such as the effect of suggesting the end of the time-saving state). As the specific information, first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown effect information), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 rotations) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is performed and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). good too. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of making a player lose money without realizing it by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and to suitably implement the command processing.

(C21) The effect control CPU 120 enters a time saving state (special state) when a special condition is established based on the fact that the variable display is executed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times, etc.) less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for time saving state suggestive effect control) that suggests being controlled, and before the variable display of the special number of times is executed, a second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times (for example 100 times), the suggestive effect can be executed each time the variable display is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a loss by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances (such as different performances when transitioning to the time saving state) are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions and when the working time saving state (special state) is controlled. As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(C23) Various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. , the backup-stored data can be initialized, and the effect control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the condition of the number of times of display), and after the backup-stored data is initialized, the specific display result (hit pattern) is displayed, and then the special Different performances are executed when being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of conditions and after being controlled to a time saving state (special state) (different performances after shifting to the time saving state, etc.). As a result, even if new functions are installed in the game machine and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to perform suitable control. In addition, since the player can grasp whether or not the backup-stored data has been initialized due to the difference in the presentation, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the probability of a big hit can be changed, the setting can be changed. Since it is possible to comprehend that there is a possibility that the game has been played, the number of elements for guessing the setting increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(D1) The execution ratio of the group notice effect may be changed depending on whether the result of the variable display is the result of deriving the time-saving symbol, the case of a big hit, or the case of a loss.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. Each configuration relating to the features of the pachinko game machine 1 may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above was a payout type game machine that paid out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinguishing of the pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, Big Bonus, The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus).

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalents of the scope of the claims.

Other modes for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on embodiments.

[Mode 1]
The game machine of form 1-0 is
Perform variable display of the first identification information (e.g., first special figure) or second identification information (e.g., second special figure) based on the establishment of the starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and the variable display is specified A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to a player when a display result (for example, a big win) is displayed,
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result. can be,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a time-saving acquisition chance effect) that suggests that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result,
As a suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, time-saving acquisition chance effect A) that suggests that the variable display of the first identification information is displayed with a predetermined display result in the non-special state, and control from the special state to the non-special state. a second suggestion effect (for example, a time-saving acquisition chance effect B) that suggests that the variable display of the second identification information is displayed with a predetermined display result in a predetermined period after the display is performed;
The period from the start of the second suggestion effect to the control to the special state after the predetermined display result is longer than the period from the start of the first suggestion effect to the control to the special state after the predetermined display result. Short (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the execution period T1 of the time saving chance production A is longer than the execution period T2 of the time saving opportunity production B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined display result is displayed in the non-special state, by lengthening the period until the control to the special state after the predetermined display result is performed, the expectation of the player can be preferably increased. In addition, when the predetermined display result is displayed during the period after the end of the special state, in which the end of the special state may give a negative impression, it is possible to return to the special state at a good tempo without executing the suggestive effect. , it is possible to favorably dispel the player's sense of disappointment, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 1-1 is
The result display period from when the display result is displayed when the variable display of the first identification information becomes a predetermined display result in the non-special state until the next variable display can be started is the second identification information in the predetermined period. Longer than the result display period when the variable display becomes a predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-35, the variable display result of the first special figure when the game state is normal In the variable display of the second special figure immediately after the end of the time saving state, that is, when the game state is normal The part where the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds when the variable display result is lost with time saving),
Having a first route and a second route different from the first route as routes through which game media can flow,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to shoot the game medium to the second path (for example, the right game area);
The performance execution means is
When controlled to a special state, it is possible to execute an promotion effect that promotes the shooting of the game medium to the second path (for example, a part that displays an image of hitting to the right on the image display device 5),
When the variable display of the first identification information becomes the predetermined display result, it is possible to execute the promotion effect during the result display period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-57, 284-63, and 284-64, When the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure when the state is the normal state is not with the time saving, the image of the right hitting notification is displayed on the image display device 5 during the period including the pattern fixing period. part),
When the variable display of the second identification information becomes the predetermined display result in the predetermined period, the promotion effect is not executed during the result display period (for example, immediately after the time saving state ends, that is, the second special when the game state is the normal state If the variable display result in the variable display shown in the figure is lost with a time saving, the pattern determination period is extremely short at 0.5 seconds, so the rush effect including the display of the right-handed notification image is not executed)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by providing a long result display period in which variable display is not performed when shifting from the non-special state to the special state after the predetermined display result, the player can be suitably notified of the state switching. can be done.

The game machine of form 1-2 is
In the result display period when the variable display of the second identification information becomes the predetermined display result in the predetermined period, the variable display of the second identification information in the predetermined period is a display result different from the predetermined display result and is not controlled to an advantageous state. It is a period common to the result display period when the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-35, when the game state is immediately after the time saving state (normal state), the variable display of the second special figure The symbol determination period when the variable display result becomes time saving loss A or time saving loss B is the variable display result of the second special figure when the game state is immediately after the time saving state ends (normal state) The part that is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the pattern confirmation period when is lost),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state can be favorably restored without excessively extending the period from when the predetermined display result is displayed in the predetermined period to when the control is performed to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The game machine of form 1-3 is
The variable display of the second identification information is the predetermined display result in the predetermined period, and the variable display of the first identification information is predetermined in the non-special state during the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the second suggestive effect. Shorter than the period from the start of the variable display that is the display result to the execution of the first suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. When time-saving loss A is won in the variable display, the period L3 from the start of variable display to the timing when the time-saving acquisition chance production starts is variable when time-saving loss A is won in the variable display of the first special figure. A portion that is set shorter than the period L1 from the start of the display to the timing at which the time saving chance production is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state can be favorably restored without excessively extending the period until the start of the second suggestive effect.

The game machine of form 1-4 is
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggesting effect (for example, a notice effect during variable display) suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state,
During the execution of the variable display in which the variable display of the second identification information results in a predetermined display result in the predetermined period, compared to the execution of the variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information results in the predetermined display result in the non-special state, There are few types of specific suggestion production executed by the production execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-81, in the variable display of the remaining hold in the time saving state in the second special figure, if the loss with time saving A is elected , The part with fewer production patterns of the notice production during the variable display that can be executed than when the time-saving loss A is won in the variable display of the first special figure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably return to the special state without excessively stirring up the specific suggestive effect.

[Mode 2]
The game machine of form 2-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A decision means (for example, CPU 103) capable of deciding to control in an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the CPU 103 sets the variable pattern shown in FIG. 284-19). the part that performs the processing) and
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state (for example, normal state) and a special state (for example, time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state;
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving missing),
The variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the non-special state is the variable display determined when the display result is not displayed with the predetermined display result in the non-special state and is not controlled to an advantageous state. It is composed of a variable display period different from the pattern (for example, the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is lost with time reduction is the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state. The part that differs from the special figure fluctuation time in the case of becoming),
The variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state while the display result is not displayed in the predetermined display result in the non-special state in the special state after the advantageous state. It is composed of at least one variable display pattern and a common variable display period among a plurality of types of variable display patterns determined when not (for example, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A The special figure fluctuation time in the case of becoming is partly common with the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A is lost),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a special feeling is heightened by having a dedicated variable display pattern when shifting to a special state after a predetermined display result with a high degree of advantage because the starting condition is more likely to be established from a non-special state than a non-special state. In addition, since there is not much change in the degree of advantage when the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result in a situation where the special state has already been controlled, the variable display pattern is used in common with other variable display patterns. Since the memory capacity of the hardware constituting the variable display pattern determining means can be reduced, the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 2-1 is
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of executing production is provided,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, a part that can execute a variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5),
By setting the variable display effect of the effect identification information to a predetermined ready-to-win mode, it is possible to execute a ready-to-win effect that suggests being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a portion where the ready-to-win effect can be displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the variable display of the variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, the execution of the ready-to-win effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-21 (C) In addition, if the variable display result of the first special figure when the game state is one of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C is lost with time saving, non-reach fluctuation pattern PA2-5 is selected and the reach effect is not executed during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the ready-to-win effect is executed, there is a risk that the display result of the variable display will be noticed, so by restricting the execution of the ready-to-win effect, the attention is drawn to the fact that the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result. can be made difficult.

The game machine of form 2-2 is
As a variable display pattern that can be determined when not controlled to an advantageous state in a special state after an advantageous state, there are multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and variable PA3-5 where the display result is lost, PC3-3 where the special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a small hit, special figure fluctuation time is 55 seconds (55000ms) and the variable display result is PC3-3), which will be out of time saving
As a plurality of types of variable display patterns, a first variable display pattern configured by a first variable display period (for example, a variable pattern with a special figure fluctuation time of 55 seconds) and a second variable shorter than the first variable display period A second variable display pattern configured by a display period (for example, a variation pattern with a special figure variation time of 50 seconds),
The variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is configured with a variable display period common to the second variable display pattern (for example, as shown as a modification, , Common special figure fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult to attract attention that the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result by configuring the variable display period with a short variable display period.

The game machine of form 2-3 is
The result display period from when the display result is displayed until the next variable display can be started is the case where the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, and the advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 284-36, in the time-saving state A, the variable display result when the variable display result becomes time-saving loss A or time-saving loss B The confirmation time is set to be the same as the variable display pattern confirmation time when the variable display result is lost),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from paying attention to the display result due to the difference in the result display period, thereby making it difficult for the player to notice that the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result.

The game machine of form 2-4 is
Hold storage means (for example, special figure hold storage unit 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information on variable display as hold storage information,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a pending notice effect (for example, a pending display notice effect) that suggests that the pending storage information of the variable display as the specific display result is stored in the pending storage means,
It is possible to execute a pending notice effect targeting the pending storage information related to the variable display in which the variable display is not displayed with the specified display result and the predetermined display result, and the pending storage information related to the variable display in which the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result. Do not execute the target pending notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-82 (A), 284-82 (B), and 284-82 (C), when the variable display result While it is possible to execute the pending display notice effect in the case where the variable display result is not with time saving part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result by preventing a situation where the player pays attention to the predetermined display result due to the reservation storage information as the predetermined display result being the target of the reservation notice effect. can make it difficult to draw attention to

The game machine of form 2-5 is
The performance execution means is
including display means (e.g., image display device 5),
Even when the pending memory information other than the pending memory information that is the target of the pending advance notice effect is the variable display pending memory information that is displayed as the predetermined display result, the variable display pending memory information that is displayed as the predetermined display result. and the pending memory information that is the target of the pending notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-84, the A part that can execute a pending display notice effect over multiple variable displays even if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is not with time saving in the memory),
The pending advance notice effect is executed by continuously displaying a similar or common display on the display means over a plurality of variable displays (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-84, over a plurality of variable displays A part where the suspended display based on the suspended memory where the variable display result is a big hit is continuously displayed in any of the production pattern α, the production pattern β, and the production pattern γ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to pay attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result by drawing attention to the variable display of the target of the pending advance notice effect.

[Mode 3]
The game machine of form 3-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. ,
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on being displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, missing time with time saving),
The effect executing means has a first special notification effect (for example, effect pattern D) as a special notification effect for notifying that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state, and a ratio of control to a second advantageous state rather than the first special notification effect. can be executed with a second special notification effect (for example, effect pattern E) with a high
The execution ratio of the second special notification production differs between the special state after the advantageous state and the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-90 and 284-92 (B), time saving state A1 to time saving state In A3 and the time-saving state C2, the ratio of execution of the variable display announcement effect in the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E when the variable display result is the big win and the big win type is the big win B is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution ratio of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after the advantageous state, the special state after the advantageous state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state. On the other hand, for example, since the player is controlled to the special state without going through the advantageous state, the expectation for the advantageous state is heightened. By increasing the execution ratio of the 2 special notification presentation, the expectation of the player can be effectively raised and the interest in the game can be improved, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 3-1 is
The effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of special notification effects (for example, a part that can execute the variable display forewarning effect with effect pattern D and effect pattern E),
When the special state is controlled after the advantageous state, there are more timings at which the special notification effect can be executed than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, during variable display in the time saving state A1 to A3 There are two execution start timings of the winning performance pattern of the announcement performance, and there are 0 execution start timings of the winning performance pattern of the announcement performance during the variable display in the time saving state C2),
There are more types of special notification effects that can be executed when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, executable in the time saving states A1 to A3 The number of probability effect patterns is 2, and the number of executable probability effect patterns in the time saving state C2 is 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the post-advantage state special state in which the player expects to stay in a row after the end of the advantageous state, the special notification performance is diversified, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the time of the consecutive residence.

The game machine of form 3-2 is
The effect executing means can execute a special notification effect at a first timing after the start of the variable display controlled to be in an advantageous state and at a second timing after the first timing (for example, FIG. 284-93 As shown in , the part where the notice effect during variable display can be executed with the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E from the first timing and the second timing),
The special state after the predetermined display result has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state C2 can perform time saving control over 685 variable displays, Time saving state A1 is once, and time saving state A2 is a part that can execute time saving control over seven variable displays)

The rate at which the special notification effect is executed at the first timing is higher when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C2, A part that makes the ratio of executing the variable display notice effect in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E higher than the time saving state A at the first timing),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the special notification performance is likely to be executed at an early timing in the special state after the predetermined display result in which the period of control is relatively long, it is possible to prevent the feeling of sluggishness from occurring and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. can be done.

The game machine of form 3-3 is
As a special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display) and than the first period There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, variable display of 685 times),
When it is controlled to the special state after the first predetermined display result, the special notification effect is executed at a lower rate than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C1 than in the time saving state A A part that sets the ratio of executing the variable display notice effect in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E to a low value),
When the special state is controlled after the second predetermined display result, the special notification effect is executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C2 than in the time saving state A. Also, the part that sets the ratio of executing the variable display notice effect in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E) to a high value),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the special notification effect is high in the post-second predetermined display result special state in which the period of control is relatively long, a sharpness can be created and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 3-4 is
As a special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display) and than the first period There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, variable display of 685 times),
The execution ratio of the second special notification effect differs between the special state after the first predetermined display result and the special state after the second predetermined display result (for example, the ratio of executing the notice effect during variable display in the effect pattern E in the time saving state C2 is higher than the ratio of executing the variable display notice effect in the effect pattern E in the time saving state C1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution ratio of the second special notification effect relatively high in the post-first predetermined display result special state in which the period in which the special state can be controlled is short, the post-first predetermined display result While it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled to the second advantageous state during the special state, for example, in the special state after the second predetermined display result in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is long By increasing the height, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a feeling of sluggishness caused by not being in an advantageous state in the special state after the result of the second predetermined display, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state is enhanced. be able to.

[Mode 4]
The game machine of form 4-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. ,
As a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) is satisfied based on the fact that a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is executed a specific number of times, a special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, , Time saving state B), and a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state) based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) C1, controllable to time saving state C2),
The effect executing means has a first special notification effect (for example, effect pattern D) as a special notification effect for notifying that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state, and a ratio of control to a second advantageous state rather than the first special notification effect. can be executed with a high second special notification effect (for example, effect pattern E),
The execution ratio of the second special notification effect differs between the special state after reaching the specific number of times and the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-91 and 284-92 (A), time saving state B and time saving Regarding the state C1, of the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E which are the effect patterns of the notice effect during variable display, the portion where the execution ratio of the effect pattern E is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution ratio of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after the predetermined display result, the variable display in the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled by the predetermined display result. Therefore, by increasing the execution ratio of the second special notification effect, it is possible to enhance the feeling of special when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result. is relatively high in the special state after reaching a specific number of times, the special state after reaching a specific number of times is a special state controlled by executing a variable display controlled to an advantageous state a specific number of times, so the second special notification By increasing the performance execution ratio, it is possible to enhance the special feeling of being controlled to an advantageous state through the variable display of a specific number of times, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced. .

The game machine of form 4-1 is
The effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of special notification effects (for example, a part that can execute the variable display forewarning effect with effect pattern D and effect pattern E),
When it is controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, there are more timings at which special notification effects can be executed than when it is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, notice during variable display in time saving state C1 There are 2 execution start timings of the performance pattern of the performance, and the execution start timing of the probability performance pattern of the notice performance during variable display in the time saving state B is 0),
There are more types of special notification effects that can be executed when the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result than when the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times (for example, executable accuracy in the time saving state C1 The number of production patterns is 1, and the number of executable hitting production patterns in the time saving state B is 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special notification effect is diversified in the special state after the predetermined display result in which the expectation for the advantageous state is heightened by being controlled without going through the advantageous state. It is possible to improve the interest of the special state after the predetermined display result.

The game machine of form 4-2 is
The effect executing means can execute a special notification effect at a first timing after the start of the variable display controlled to be in an advantageous state and at a second timing after the first timing (for example, FIG. 284-93 As shown in , the part where the notice effect during variable display can be executed with the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E from the first timing and the second timing),
The special state after reaching the specific number of times has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, the time saving state B can perform time saving control over 685 variable displays. , Time saving state C1 is a part that can execute time saving control over one time),
The ratio of executing the special notification effect at the first timing is higher when being controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times than when being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, in the time saving state B , a part that makes the ratio of executing the variable display notice effect in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E at the first timing higher than the time saving state C1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the special notification effect is likely to be executed at an early timing in the specific number of times reaching special state in which the period of control is relatively long, it is possible to prevent the feeling of sluggishness from occurring and to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. can.

[Mode 5]
The game machine of form 5-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving missing),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state, and a notification effect (for example, congratulatory effect) to notify that control is to be in an advantageous state. can be,
A special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, time saving state B) has a longer controllable period than a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state B is a time saving control over 685 variable displays can be executed, while the time saving state C1 can execute time saving control once),
As the execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern (for example, PB3, which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern) is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestive effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state. By executing the variable display at -1, the part where the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds is executed during the variable display, and then the blessing production for 15 seconds is executed), and through the specific suggestion production A second execution pattern (for example, PB3-3, which is a variation pattern for a super reach δ jackpot) for executing a notification effect at a second timing after the first timing is executed, so that variable display is performed. A part in which a 15-second blessing effect is executed after a 50-second effect including a super reach δ reach effect is executed),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate when it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times than when it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, FIG. 284- As shown in 28 and FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state B, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern. , during the variable display, a 2-second non-reach effect is executed, followed by a 15-second blessing effect),
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when it is controlled to the special state after a predetermined display result than when it is controlled to the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, FIG. 284- As shown in 28 and FIGS. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3 which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit. Thus, during the variable display, a 50-second effect including a reach effect of super reach δ is executed, and then a 15-second blessing effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player by facilitating the execution of the first execution pattern during the special state after reaching the specific number of times controlled after the variable display is executed the specific number of times. Therefore, during the special state after the predetermined display result in which the expectation for the advantageous state is heightened by being controlled to the special state without going through the advantageous state, the second execution pattern is made easy to execute. , the expectation of the player can be heightened and the amusement of the game can be improved, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 5-1 is
State control means, as a special state, based on being controlled to the advantageous state after the advantageous state special state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) can be controlled,
The rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed is higher when it is controlled to the special state after reaching a specific number of times than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 284-27 and As shown in FIG. 284-28, when the variable display result becomes a big hit in the time saving state A, PB3-1 which is a variation pattern of a non-reach big hit, PB3-2 which is a variation pattern of a normal reach big hit, and super reach δ By executing variable display in any one of the variation patterns PB3-3, the time saving state B is variable in PB3-1, which is a non-reach variation pattern, compared to the entire time saving state A. high percentage of execution),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player by facilitating the selection of the first execution pattern during the special state after reaching the specific number of times controlled after the variable display is executed the specific number of times. .

The game machine of form 5-2 is
As a special state after a predetermined display result, a special state after a first predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display), and from the first period There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, variable display of 685 times),
The rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the result of the first predetermined display is determined when the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times lower than the rate at which it is executed,
The rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the result of the second predetermined display is determined as follows: (For example, if the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state B, it is higher than the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C1 While the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot at a rate, the variation of the non-reach jackpot at the same rate as when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot in the time saving state C2. The part where variable display is executed in pattern PB3-1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after the second predetermined display result in which the special state can be controlled for a long period, the first execution pattern is selected over the special state after the first predetermined display result in which the period in which the special state can be controlled is short. By making it easier to play, it is possible to reduce the sense of sluggishness and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

The game machine of form 5-3 is
The state control means has a first advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state of the jackpot A) as the advantageous state and a second advantageous state (for example, the jackpot game state of the jackpot B) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. is controllable to
The effect execution means can execute a re-notification effect (e.g. promotion effect) for notifying that the control will be performed in the second advantageous state after being notified that the control will be performed in the first advantageous state by the notification effect,
After reaching a specific number of times, the time after the notification of the control to the first advantageous state by the notification performance in the special state is higher than the time after the notification of the control to the first advantageous state by the notification performance in the non-special state. Also, the re-notification effect is executed at a high rate (for example, if the decoration pattern temporarily stops with an even number combination during the variable display of the time saving state B (when the big hit A is notified), the variable display of the normal state In the case of a temporary stop with a combination of even numbers of decorative symbols (the part where the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the big hit A is notified),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, which is controlled after the variable display has been performed the specific number of times, even if it is notified that the first advantageous state with a low degree of advantage will be controlled, it is re-notified. Since there is a high possibility that the performance will be executed, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation even after the execution of the notification performance, so that the loss of interest due to the notification of the control to the first advantageous state can be prevented. can be prevented.

The game machine of form 5-4 is
The state control means
As an advantageous state, it is possible to control a first advantageous state (for example, a big win game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. can be,
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state based on being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a re-notification effect (e.g. promotion effect) for notifying that the control is to be made to the second advantageous state after being notified that the control is to be made to the first advantageous state by the notification effect,
After reaching the specified number of times, in the special state, it is reported that the control to the first advantageous state is performed by the notification performance, and in the special state after the advantageous state, it is notified that the control to the first advantageous state is performed by the notification performance. The ratio of re-notification effects to be executed is higher than later (for example, if the decoration pattern temporarily stops with an even number combination during the variable display of the time saving state B (when the jackpot A is notified), the time saving state A During the variable display of , when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination of even numbers (when the big win A is reported), the promotion effect is executed (re-notified the big win B) at a higher rate (part)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after reaching the specific number of times, which is controlled after the variable display has been performed the specific number of times, even if it is notified that the first advantageous state with a low degree of advantage will be controlled, it is re-notified. Since there is a high possibility that the performance will be executed, the player can play the game with a sense of expectation even after the execution of the notification performance, so that the loss of interest due to the notification of the control to the first advantageous state can be prevented. can be prevented.

[Mode 6]
The game machine of form 6-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving missing),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state, and a notification effect (for example, congratulatory effect) to notify that control is to be in an advantageous state. can be,
The special state after the advantageous state has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, the time saving state A3 can execute the time saving control over 685 variable displays Therefore, the time saving state C1 is a part that can perform time saving control over one variable display),
As an execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern (for example, FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29 As shown in , the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, and after the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds during the variable display is executed, the blessing production for 15 seconds. is executed) and a second execution pattern (for example, super reach δ jackpot variation pattern PB3- 3, by executing the variable display, a 15-second blessing effect is executed after a 50-second effect including a super reach δ reach effect is executed during the variable display);
The performance execution means is
The notification effect of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state than when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result,
When it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, it is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C1 When the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit, in the time saving state A3, it is a variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit PB3-3 When the variable display is executed and the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A3, the non-reach at a higher rate than the case where the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1 Part where variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the big hit),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player by facilitating the execution of the first execution pattern during the post-advantage special state in which the special state can be controlled for a long period of time. During the post-predetermined display result special state in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state, by facilitating the execution of the second execution pattern, the expectation of the player can be heightened and the amusement of the game can be improved. , it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The game machine of form 6-1 is
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
When the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 284-27 and As shown in Figure 284-28, the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state B is higher than the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state A3 The part where the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by facilitating the execution of the first execution pattern during the special state after reaching the specified number of times, which is controlled after the variable display has been performed for the specified number of times, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest due to the player's sense of sluggishness. can do.

The game machine of form 6-2 is
As a special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display) and than the first period There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, variable display of 685 times),
The special state after the first predetermined display result has a shorter period that can be controlled in the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state C1 can perform time saving control over one variable display. , The time saving state A2 is a part that can perform time saving control over seven variable displays),
The special state after the second predetermined display result has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state C2 can perform time saving control over 685 variable displays. , The time saving state A2 is a part that can perform time saving control over seven variable displays),
The rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the result of the first predetermined display is determined when the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times lower than the rate at which it is executed,
The rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the result of the second predetermined display is the notification effect of the first execution pattern when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, the second special figure in the time saving state C1 is better if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A3 The ratio of executing variable display in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, is higher than when the variable display result in the figure is a jackpot, and in the time-saving state C2, the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot. In the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state A2, the ratio of the variable display to be executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern, is higher than the case)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state after the result of the second predetermined display in which the period during which the special state is controlled is long makes it easier to execute the first execution pattern, thereby preventing the feeling of dullness and reducing the interest of the player. In the special state after the result of the first predetermined display in which the period during which the special state is controlled is short, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the first execution pattern is low, that is, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the second execution pattern is set relatively. By increasing the value, the speculative suggestive effect can be executed to effectively increase the expectation of the game machine, so that the interest can be improved.

[Mode 7]
The game machine of form 7-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, the special state after the predetermined display result (time saving state C1, time saving state C ), and
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state, and a notification effect (for example, congratulatory effect) to notify that control is to be in an advantageous state. can be,
As a special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over the first period (for example, one variable display) and than the first period There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, variable display of 685 times),
As the execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern (for example, PB3, which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern) is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestive effect that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state. By executing the variable display only at -1, the part where the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds is executed during the variable display and then the blessing production for 15 seconds is executed), and the specific suggestive production Then, the variable display is executed in the second execution pattern (for example, PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot) for executing the notification effect at the second timing after the first timing. A part where a 15-second blessing effect is executed after a 50-second effect including a reach effect of super reach δ is executed during display),
The performance execution means is
When it is controlled to the special state after the second predetermined display result, the notification performance of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when it is controlled to the special state after the first predetermined display result. ,
The notification performance of the second execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the first predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the second predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in FIG. 284-29, the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C2 is better than the case where the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C1 Also, the allocation for performing variable display in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, is set high, and the time saving state is better when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1. In C2, the allocation for executing variable display in PB3-3, which is a variation pattern of super reach δ jackpot, is set higher than when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the special state after the result of the second predetermined display in which the special state can be controlled for a long period of time, the first execution pattern is made easier to be executed, thereby preventing the feeling of sluggishness and reducing the interest of the player. During the special state after the first predetermined display result in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state after the second predetermined display result, the second execution pattern is easily executed, thereby making it easier for the player to execute the second execution pattern. Since it is possible to raise expectations and improve amusement in the game, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 7-1 is
State control means, as a special state, based on being controlled to the advantageous state after the advantageous state special state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) can be controlled,
When it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, the rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed is higher than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state A3 When the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit, the variable display is performed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit, or PB3-2, which is the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit. While the blessing production for 15 seconds is executed after the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds or the production corresponding to the normal reach for 20 seconds is executed, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state C2 is In the case of a big hit, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit, so that the effect corresponding to the non-reach is executed for 2 seconds during the variable display, and then for 15 seconds. The part where the blessing production is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the post-advantage state special state controlled after the advantage state, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the first execution pattern increases, and an excessive game value is imparted in a short time, resulting in gambling. can be prevented from becoming excessively high.

The game machine of form 7-2 is
State control means, as a special state, based on being controlled to the advantageous state special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) can be controlled,
The special state after the advantageous state has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, the time saving state A3 can perform time saving control over 685 variable displays. , The part where the time saving state C1 can execute time saving control over one variable display),
The performance execution means is
The notification performance of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state than when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result,
When it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, it is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate than when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 284- 27 and FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A3, PB3-1 which is a variation pattern of a non-reach big hit or PB3 which is a variation pattern of a normal reach big hit By executing the variable display at -2, the effect corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds or the effect corresponding to the normal reach for 20 seconds is executed during the variable display, and then the blessing effect for 15 seconds is executed. Then, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the super reach during the variable display A portion where a 15-second blessing effect is executed after a 50-second effect including a reach effect of δ is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player by facilitating the execution of the first execution pattern during the post-advantage special state in which the special state can be controlled for a long period of time. During the post-predetermined display result special state in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state, by facilitating the execution of the second execution pattern, the expectation of the player can be increased and the amusement of the game can be improved. , it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

[Mode 8]
The game machine of form 8-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A decision means (for example, CPU 103) capable of deciding to control in an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 -A part that executes the variation pattern setting process shown in 19),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing effects based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
with
The state control means, as a special state, based on the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., failure with time saving), the special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving State C2) can be controlled, and the specific number of times is reached when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on the execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which the specific display result is not displayed. Post special state (for example, time saving state B) can be controlled,
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either the specific display result or the predetermined display result is longer in the special state after the predetermined display result than in the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, As shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C is longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B)
The effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects suggesting that the control is to be in an advantageous state (for example, a dialog forewarning effect and a movable body forewarning effect as the forewarning effect during variable display shown in the modified example),
There are more types of suggestion effects that can be executed when the special state after a predetermined display result is not controlled to an advantageous state than the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, as shown as a modification, during variable display of time saving state C The number of notice effects during variable display that can be executed in the part that is larger than the number of notice effects during variable display that can be executed during variable display in time saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state after reaching the specified number of times, which is controlled after the execution of the variable display of the specified number of times, increases the number of times of variable display per unit period by the variable display of the short variable display period, thereby increasing the number of variable displays per unit period. In addition to reducing stress, in the special state after the predetermined display result, which can be changed at any time, including during the non-special state, due to the predetermined display result, the specific display result is not displayed There are many types of suggestive effects in the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest when the predetermined display result is displayed a plurality of times before being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved. can be done.

The game machine of form 8-1 is
The variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern that is out of order) as a variable display pattern when the control is not in an advantageous state,
The effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of suggested effects even when not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-47 and 284-48, in variable The part where the notice effect can be executed during variable display),
When the specific variable display pattern is determined, the type of suggestive effect that can be executed by the effect executing means is when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, when the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times. More than (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-52, when the variable display result is lost (when the variation pattern of loss is determined), the production control CPU 120 can execute the type of notice production during variable display is more when it is controlled in the time-saving state C than when it is controlled in the time-saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the production pattern without increasing the number of variable display patterns, so it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the hardware constituting the variable display pattern determining means.

The game machine of form 8-2 is
As a special state after a predetermined display result, a special state after a first predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display), and from the first period It is possible to control to a special state over a longer second period (for example, 685 times of variable display), and the number of times of variable display is greater than the number of denominators of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 685 times There is a special state after the second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over variable display),
In the special state after the first predetermined display result, the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in neither the specific display result nor the predetermined display result is longer than the special state after reaching the specific number of times ( For example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C1 is than the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B long part),
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either the specific display result or the predetermined display result in the special state after the second predetermined display result and the specific display result and the predetermined display result in the special state after reaching the specific number of times The difference between the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in any of the display results is the difference between the specific display result and the predetermined display result in the special state after the second predetermined display result. average of variable display patterns determined for variable displays that do not result in a variable display period and an average of variable display patterns determined for variable displays that do not result in either the specific display result or the predetermined display result in the special state after the first predetermined display result Smaller than the difference from the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C1 is the variable display result in the time saving state B). It is set longer than the average variable display time in the case of being, and the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C2 and the average variable display when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B The difference between the time is the difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C2 and the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in the time saving state C1).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the game can be played without stressing the player in the special state after the predetermined display result in which the special state can be controlled for a long period of time.

The game machine of form 8-3 is
The variable display pattern determining means has a variable display pattern common to the variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state after the second predetermined display result and when the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state after reaching the specific number of times. can be determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, as a common variation pattern when the variable display result is lost, non-reach is lost Part that can select PA3-1 which is a variation pattern of),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the variable display pattern can be shared between the special state after the second predetermined display result and the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

[Mode 9]
The game machine of form 9-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A decision means (for example, CPU 103) capable of deciding to control in an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, 19 for executing the variation pattern setting process),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on being displayed with a predetermined display result (with time saving) different from the display result,
The special state after the advantageous state is a special state after the first advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1) and a special state after the second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the special state after the first advantageous state (for example, time saving state A2, Including the time saving state A3),
The variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined when control is not performed to an advantageous state in a special state after a predetermined display result and when control is not performed to an advantageous state in at least one of a plurality of post-advantage state special states. A common variable display pattern can be determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A3, it is a non-reach lost variation pattern PA3 -1, PA3-2 which is a variation pattern of non-reach loss, PA3-3 which is a variation pattern of non-reach loss, and PA3-4 which is a variation pattern of normal reach loss can be selected, and variable display in time saving state C3 PA3-1, which is a non-reach fluctuation pattern when the result is a loss, and PA3-10, which is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, can be selected),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are a plurality of types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared by different special states, so that the data volume of the variable display pattern can be reduced. can increase

The game machine of form 9-1 is
As a special state after a predetermined display result, a special state after a first predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display), and from the first period It is possible to control to a special state over a longer second period (for example, 685 times of variable display), and the number of times of variable display is greater than the number of denominators of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 685 times There is a special state after the second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over variable display),
The variable display pattern determining means determines when the special state after the first predetermined display result is not controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the special state after the first predetermined display result is not controlled to be in an advantageous state in at least one of the plurality of special states after the advantageous state. It is possible to determine a variable display pattern common to the display pattern (as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A1 and time saving state C1, super reach δ is lost A part where PA3-5, which is a variation pattern, can be selected),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are a plurality of special states, different special states can share the variable display pattern, so that the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The game machine of form 9-2 is
The state control means sets a special state (for example, , can be controlled to the time saving state B),
As a special state after a predetermined display result, a special state after a first predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display), and from the first period It is possible to control to a special state over a longer second period (for example, 685 times of variable display), and the number of times of variable display is greater than the number of denominators of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 685 times There is a special state after the second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over variable display),
The variable display pattern determining means, when not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after the second predetermined display result, has a variable display pattern common to the variable display pattern that can be determined when not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after reaching the specified number of times. can be determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, as a common variation pattern when the variable display result is lost, non-reach is lost Part that can select PA3-1 which is a variation pattern of),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are a plurality of special states, different special states can share the variable display pattern, so that the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The game machine of form 9-3 is
The state control means sets a special state (for example, , can be controlled to the time saving state B),
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. ,
The variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern, which is a variable display pattern that is not determined when controlled to the first advantageous state, when controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, characteristic portion 130SG As shown in -4, in the case of determining the jackpot type as jackpot B when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot, a special variation pattern different from the case of determining the jackpot type as jackpot A is determined. enabling part),
The special variable display pattern is common to the special state after an advantageous state, the special state after a predetermined display result, and the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, as shown in characteristic portion 130SG-4, the special variable display pattern is , part that can be selected as a common jackpot variation pattern when the jackpot type is jackpot B in time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are a plurality of special states, different special states can share the variable display pattern, so that the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The game machine of form 9-4 is
A production capable of executing a common performance after being controlled to an advantageous state in the case of being controlled to the advantageous state during the special state after the advantageous state and the case of being controlled to the advantageous state during the special state after the predetermined display result. Provided with execution means (for example, as shown in the modification, when it is controlled from the time saving state A to the jackpot game state and when it is controlled from the time saving state C to the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 is these jackpot games A part that can execute a common production as a production based on the state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the effect after being controlled to the advantageous state can be shared by a plurality of types of special states, the capacity of the effect data can be reduced.

The game machine of form 9-5 is
Execution of performance capable of executing different performances after being controlled to the advantageous state when controlled to the advantageous state during the special state after the advantageous state and when controlled to the advantageous state during the special state after the predetermined display result. Provide means (for example, as shown in the modification, when it is controlled from the time saving state A to the jackpot game state and when it is controlled from the time saving state C to the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 is in these jackpot game states A part that can execute different productions as productions based on),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the difference in the special state, so that the interest in the game after being controlled to the advantageous state can be improved.

[Form 10]
The game machine of form 10-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A decision means (for example, CPU 103) capable of deciding to control in an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, 19 for executing the variation pattern setting process),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, the special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on being displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, time saving),
The special state after the predetermined display result has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1 performs time saving control over one variable display, while the time saving state C2 is the part that performs time saving control over 685 variable displays),
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the special state after the predetermined display result is not controlled to be in an advantageous state is shorter than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the time saving state The average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in C2 is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3),
There are fewer types of variable display patterns determined when the special state after a predetermined display result is not controlled to be in an advantageous state than the special state after an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, In the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is lost, two types of variation patterns, PA3-1 and PA3-10, can be selected, while the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3. PA3-1, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4, PA3-5 part where 5 types of fluctuation patterns can be selected when is out),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, expectations are raised excessively in the long average variable display period in the special state after the predetermined display result in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is longer than in the special state after the advantageous state, thereby creating a feeling of sluggishness. Since it is possible to prevent the situation in which the interest in the game is lowered, the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 10-1 is
A production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of executing production is provided,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern), and suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is set to a predetermined ready-to-win state to be controlled in an advantageous state. (for example, the part where the reach effect is executed in the image display device 5 when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the reach),
In the variable display in which the specific display result is not displayed, the special state after the predetermined display result is lower than the special state after the advantageous state. In the case where the time saving state C2 is higher than the time saving state A, the rate at which variable display is executed in the variation pattern of normal reach out and super reach out (ratio of reach performance) is low),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after a predetermined display result in which the controllable period of the special state is longer than that of the special state after the advantageous state, expectations are excessively heightened by the ready-to-win effect, thereby reducing the interest in the game. can be prevented.

The game machine of form 10-2 is
Effect executing means (e.g., , Production control CPU 120) provided,
As an execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern (for example, FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29 As shown in , the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, and after the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds during the variable display is executed, the blessing production for 15 seconds. is executed) and a second execution pattern (for example, super reach δ jackpot variation pattern PB3- 3, by executing the variable display, a 15-second blessing effect is executed after a 50-second effect including a super reach δ reach effect is executed during the variable display);
The performance execution means is
The notification effect of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state,
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state than when it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, FIG. 284-27 And as shown in FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 becomes a big hit, the variable display is executed at PB3-3, which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit In the variable display, after the 50-second production including the reach production of super reach δ is executed, the 15-second blessing production is executed, and if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time-saving state C2 , the variable display is performed only in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, and after the performance corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds during the variable display, the blessing performance is performed for 15 seconds. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first execution pattern is made easier to be executed during the special state after the predetermined display result, in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is longer than the special state after the advantageous state, thereby preventing the player from losing interest, To increase a player's sense of expectation and improve amusement in a game by facilitating execution of a second execution pattern during a special state after an advantageous state in which a period in which the special state can be controlled to the special state is shorter than that of the special state after a predetermined display result. can be done.

The game machine of form 10-3 is
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is met, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
As a special state after a predetermined display result, a special state after a first predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (for example, one variable display), and from the first period There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, variable display of 685 times),
The variable display pattern determination means has a variable display pattern common to the variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state after the second predetermined display result and when the special state is not controlled to the advantageous state after the specific number of times is reached. can be determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, as a common variation pattern when the variable display result is lost, non-reach is lost Part that can select PA3-1 which is a variation pattern of),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the variable display pattern can be shared between the special state after the second predetermined display result and the special state after reaching the specific number of times, the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

[Mode 11]
The game machine of form 11-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Reservation storage means (for example, special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information related to variable display as reservation storage information,
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving missing),
The special state after the predetermined display result has a longer controllable period in the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1 can perform time saving control over one variable display, while the time saving State C2 is a part that can perform time saving control over 685 variable displays),
The performance execution means is
A pending notice effect (for example, a hold display notice effect) that suggests that the hold memory information controlled to be in an advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means is provided with a plurality of types of pending notice effect patterns (for example, effect pattern α, effect pattern β, production pattern γ) can be executed,
The suspension notice effect can be executed even when the suspension storage information to be controlled in an advantageous state is not stored in the suspension storage means (for example, as shown in FIGS. A part that can execute a pending display notice effect (forecast notice) for memory),
The number of suspension notice performance patterns when no suspension storage information is stored to be controlled to an advantageous state is greater when controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result than when controlled to a special state after an advantageous state. less
The ratio of execution of the suspension notice performance when the suspension storage information controlled to the advantageous state is not stored is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in FIG. 284-82, the number of effect patterns that can be executed as a pending display notice effect is less in the time saving state C2 than in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3, and the variable display result is The rate at which the pending display notice effect is executed when there is no pending memory that becomes a big hit is lower in the time saving state C2 than in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after the predetermined display result in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is longer than in the special state after the advantageous state, the execution ratio of the pending notice effect is relatively low and the effect pattern of the pending notice effect is relatively low. Since there are few, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating due to the expectation being excessively heightened by the pending advance notice performance, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The game machine of form 11-1 is
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The effect execution means can execute the pending notice effect in a common pending notice effect pattern when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result and when the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times (for example, , As shown in FIG. 284-82 (C), in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 in the characteristic part 130SG-2, both the pending display notice effect can be executed with the effect pattern β and the effect pattern γ) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the data volume of the pending notice effect by sharing the pending notice effect pattern.

The game machine of form 11-2 is
The performance execution means is
including display means (e.g., image display device 5),
Different background display (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 284-55) can be displayed on the display means when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state and when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result,
The plurality of types of pending notice effect patterns include a specific pending notice effect pattern (for example, a panel image of a panel display effect) that can be performed in common in the post-advantage state special letter and the post-predetermined display result special state,
When the performance execution means executes the suspension notice performance according to the specific suspension notice performance pattern, the performance execution means uses a display layer of a higher order than the display layer of the background display to give priority to the specific display over the background display and perform a plurality of variables. can be displayed across the display (for example, when drawing these images, as shown in FIGS. Images such as small symbols corresponding to variable display of patterns have the highest display priority Image of the first image data, Pre-reading images such as panel display effect and pending display notice effect have higher display priority than the image of the first image data The image of the second image data, the first background image and the background image such as the second background image are drawn as the image of the third image data with the lowest display priority, and the image of the first image data and the second image A part that creates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by synthesizing the image of the data and the image of the third image data),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the same pending notice effect is executed, a visually different impression can be given in combination with the background, so it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the pending notice effect while reducing the development cost. can.

The game machine of form 11-3 is
The plurality of types of pending notice performance patterns include specific pending notice performance patterns (for example, performance pattern β and performance pattern γ) that can be performed in common in the special state after the advantageous state and the special state after the predetermined display result,
When the specific pending notice effect pattern is executed in the special state after the predetermined display result, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the specific pending notice effect pattern is executed in the special state after the advantageous state (for example , As shown in FIGS. 284-82 (A) and 284-82 (C), in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3 and the time saving state C2, the production pattern β and the production pattern γ as the production pattern of the pending display notice production is executable, but the ratio of control to the jackpot game state by executing the production pattern β or the production pattern γ for the pending display notice effect (jackpot expectation) is better in the time saving state C2 and in the time saving state A2 and Part higher than time saving state A3),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the development cost by suppressing the increase in the number of pending notice effect patterns by executing the specific pending notice effect patterns in different special states, and the degree of expectation of the specific pending notice effect pattern depending on the special state. are different, it is possible to favorably increase the expectation of the player during the special state after the predetermined display result.

[Mode 12]
The game machine of form 12-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A decision means (for example, CPU 103) capable of deciding to control in an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, 19 for executing the variation pattern setting process),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the specific display result is When a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685) is established based on the variable display that is not displayed being executed a specific number of times, it can be controlled to a special state (time saving state B) after reaching a specific number of times,
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the special state after reaching a specific number of times is not controlled to the advantageous state is shorter than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the time saving state Part where the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in the time saving state B is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in A),
The variable display pattern having the shortest variable display period among the variable display patterns determined when the special state is controlled to the advantageous state after reaching the specified number of times is determined when the advantageous state is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state. The variable display period is longer than the variable display pattern with the shortest variable display period among the variable display patterns (for example, as shown in the modified example, among the variable patterns that can be selected in the time saving state B, the special figure variation time is the shortest The variation pattern is the part where the special figure variation time is longer than the variation pattern with the shortest special figure variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected in the time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the variable display that does not result in the specific display result is executed for the specific number of times, the feeling of sluggishness during the special state after reaching the specific number of times controlled is prevented, thereby preventing the loss of interest in the game and after reaching the specific number of times. Since the feeling of blessing when the game is controlled to an advantageous state during the special state can be improved, the amusement of the game can be improved, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The game machine of form 12-1 is
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state of jackpot B) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. ,
The variable display pattern determination means selects a special variable display pattern that is not determined when controlled to the first advantageous state when controlled to the second advantageous state, in the special state after the advantageous state and the special state after reaching the specific number of times. Can be determined in common (for example, as shown in the characteristic portion 130SG-4, for the special variation pattern, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, as a common jackpot variation pattern selectable part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced by sharing the special variable display pattern in different special states.

The game machine of form 12-2 is
An effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, display of a stage image) which is not executed during the non-special state after the end of the specific period in the specific period after the special state after the advantageous state is controlled to the non-special state. (For example, production control CPU 120) provided,
Production executing means does not execute the specific production in the specific period after being controlled from the special state to the non-special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-55, after the time saving state A ends, While the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5 over 10 variable displays, after the time saving state B ends, the dedicated stage image is not displayed on the image display device 5)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in a specific period after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, the special effect is enhanced by executing a special specific effect, and the specific number of times controlled after the specific number of variable displays are executed. In the specific period after the end of the post-special state, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the specific performance increasing the disappointment of not being controlled to the advantageous state.

The game machine of form 12-3 is
Effect executing means (e.g., , Production control CPU 120) provided,
As an execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern (for example, FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29 As shown in , the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, and after the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds during the variable display is executed, the blessing production for 15 seconds. is executed) and a second execution pattern (for example, super reach δ jackpot variation pattern PB3- 3, by executing the variable display, a 15-second blessing effect is executed after a 50-second effect including a super reach δ reach effect is executed during the variable display);
The performance execution means is
When it is controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, it is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate than when it is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 284- As shown in 28, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state B, the variable display is performed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit, so that the variable display is in progress. After the production corresponding to non-reach for 2 seconds is executed, the blessing production for 15 seconds is executed),
When it is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate than when it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, FIG. 284- As shown in 27 and FIG. 284-28, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3 which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit. Thus, during the variable display, a 50-second effect including a reach effect of super reach δ is executed, and then a 15-second blessing effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player by facilitating the execution of the first execution pattern during the special state after reaching the specific number of times controlled after the variable display is executed the specific number of times. .

[Mode 13]
The gaming machine in State 13-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
A decision means (for example, CPU 103) capable of deciding to control in an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 can determine one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, 19 for executing the variation pattern setting process),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on being displayed with a predetermined display result (for example, missing time with time saving),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1, If the variable display result is not with time saving during time saving state A2 and time saving state A3 and the type is not with time saving B, after the end of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, to time saving state C2 controllable part),
The variable display period when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is shorter than the variable display period when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the non-special state (for example, FIG. 284 As shown in -6 and Figure 284-27, in the normal state, if the variable display result of the first special figure is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving and is not with time saving A, the special figure fluctuation time is 53 seconds While a certain variation pattern PA2-4 is selected, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3 is lost with time saving, the special figure fluctuation time is 2 seconds PA3-6 , PA3-7 with a special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds, PA3-8 with a special figure fluctuation time of 50 seconds, PA3-9 part is selected),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to favorably play a game in the special state after the advantage state without making the player feel uncomfortable in the variable display where the predetermined display result is displayed. can increase

The game machine of form 13-1 is
The state control means
When the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, it is controlled to the non-special state (for example, it is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A1. 7 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A22, and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A3. part),
When the variable display of the special number of times is executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, it is controlled to the non-special state (for example, it is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C1. The part that is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed with the predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number of times and the special number of times By comparison, if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state. , It is possible to control to a non-special state after the special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game state is one of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B (total time saving number counter When the value of α and the second special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more), if the variable display result is lost with time saving, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α at that time (time saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, the remaining variable display count that can perform time-saving control) and the value (1 or 685) according to the time-saving loss type are compared, depending on the time-saving loss type If the value is larger than the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α, the game state is shortened at the end of the time saving state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B) during execution While controlling the time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) according to the time-saving type, the value according to the time-saving type is less than the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α. After the time saving state (either of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, or time saving state B) ends, the part that controls to the normal state without controlling to the time saving state according to the type with time saving),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled after the special state after the advantageous state ends. , can improve the game interest.

The game machine of form 13-2 is
Controlled after the end of the post-advantage state special state by displaying a variable display with a predetermined display result during the post-advantage state special state. The average variable display period of the pattern is shorter than the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the special state after the advantageous state is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the time saving state C2 is set shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state A is lost),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the period during which the special state is controlled by the special state after the predetermined display result becomes long, the change pattern is switched to a variation pattern with a short variable display period in which the number of variable displays executed in the unit period increases. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to giving the player a sense of sluggishness.

The game machine of form 13-3 is
The variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is controlled to the advantageous state while the display result is not displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state. It is common to the variable display period of at least one variable display pattern among the plurality of types of variable display patterns determined when not determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 and 284-27, time saving state A1, time saving In the variable display of the second special figure in the state A2 and the time saving state A3, the variable display can be performed at a common special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is lost and when the time saving is lost),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result, it is possible to reduce discomfort caused by not being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The game machine of form 13-4 is
Provided with effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggesting effect (for example, variable display notice effect) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
The performance execution means is
As specific suggestive effects, a first specific suggestive effect (for example, effect pattern A) and a second specific suggestive effect (for example, effect pattern B) having a higher execution ratio in the variable display controlled to be in a more advantageous state than the first specific suggestive effect ~ production pattern E) and can be executed,
The variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed in the special state after the advantageous state is performed at a higher rate than the case where the variable display in which the specific display result is not displayed is performed in the special state after the advantageous state. 1 Specific suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-90, if the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A, the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A). The part where the notice effect during variable display is executed with effect pattern A at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the display result becomes a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, by making it easier to execute the first specific suggestive effect controlled to the advantageous state with a low degree of expectation, the advantageous state can be obtained. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the display result is displayed as the predetermined display result without expecting the player to be controlled.

[Mode 14]
The gaming machine in State 14-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state)
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means
As a special state, it is possible to control the special state after the advantageous state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is a predetermined display result different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on being displayed (for example, time saving is not displayed), and variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is executed a specific number of times. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state B) after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable display times reaches 685 volumes) is established,
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1, If the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving during time saving state A2 and time saving state A3 and the type is with time saving B part to be controlled),
When the variable display executed during the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, time saving state If the variable display result during AB is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B, the part that is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of time saving state B),
The performance execution means is
In the post-predetermined display result special state controlled by the end of the post-advantage state special state, a specific notification effect corresponding to the post-predetermined display result special state can be executed,
In the post-predetermined display result special state controlled by the end of the post-predetermined display result special state, the execution of the specific notification effect corresponding to the post-predetermined display result special state is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-45, If the variable display result during the time saving state A1 is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B (when the start condition of time saving state C2 is satisfied), the final variable display of time saving state A1 While executing the rush effect (rush effect B) in the first variable display of the special figure), when the variable display result is off with time saving during the time saving state B and the type is off with time saving B (If the condition for starting the time saving state C2 is satisfied), the part that does not execute the rush effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the control from the post-advantage special state in which the contiguous state continues to the post-predetermined display result special state gives the player a sense of security, so the specific notification performance is executed, but the variable does not lead to an advantageous state. To limit a specific notification effect at the time of control to a special state after a predetermined display result to evoke the continuation of a variable display that does not lead to an advantageous state further in a special state after reaching a specific number of times controlled after display is executed for a specific number of times. Therefore, the stress given to the player can be reduced, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 14-1 is
The state control means
When the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, it is controlled to the non-special state (for example, it is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A1. 7 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A22, and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A3. part),
When the variable display of the special number of times is executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, it is controlled to the non-special state (for example, it is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C1. The part that is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2),
It is possible to control to a non-special state when variable display is executed for a specified number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state after being controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, control to a big hit game state in a time saving state B The part that is controlled to the normal state by executing variable display 685 times without being displayed),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed with the predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number of times and the special number of times If the number of specials is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the special state after the advantageous state is over,
When the variable display executed during the special state after reaching the specified number of times is displayed with a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed in the special state after reaching the specified number of times from the specified number of times and the special number of times , and if the number of special times is greater than the number of remaining times, it is possible to control the special state after a predetermined display result after the end of the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, the game state is the time saving state A1, time saving State A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B (when the value of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more) When the variable display result is out of time saving If it is, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α at that time (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B remaining variable display number of times that can execute time saving control) and time saving missing Compare the value according to the type (1 or 685), and if the value according to the type of loss with time saving is larger than the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α, the time saving state during execution (time saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B) is controlled to a time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) corresponding to the time-saving loss type at the end of the game state, while depending on the time-saving loss type If the value is less than the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α, time saving state during execution (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B either) With time saving after the end The part that controls to the normal state without controlling to the time saving state according to the type of deviation),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state after the advantageous state or during the special state after reaching the specified number of times, after the special state after the advantageous state or the special state after reaching the specified number of times ends, after the predetermined display result It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the player is controlled to the special state, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 14-2 is
Having a first path (for example, left game area) and a second path (for example, right game area) different from the first path as paths along which game media can flow,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to shoot the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area to win the second start winning port. part),
The effect execution means can execute an promotion effect (for example, a rush effect) that promotes the shooting of the game medium to the second path,
In the non-special state, when a specific condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the display result of the variable display that satisfies the specific condition is displayed until the next variable display can be started. The result display period is set as a special period, and the promotion effect is executed by the effect execution means during the special period,
In the special state after a predetermined display result, when a specific condition is satisfied and the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the next variable display can be started after the display result of the variable display that satisfies the specific condition is displayed. The result display period until is set to a non-special period shorter than the special period, and the promotion effect by the effect execution means is not executed during the non-special period (for example, FIGS. 284-35, 284-38, and 284- As shown in 45, in the variable display in the normal state, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times (the conditions for starting the time saving state B are satisfied), the symbol fixing period is set to 81.4 seconds, so that the symbol is displayed. A rush performance is executed during the fixed period, but when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the time saving state C (the start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied), the pattern fixed period is set to 0.5 seconds, A part that shifts from the time saving state C to the time saving state B without executing the rush effect during the pattern confirmation period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the control is performed from the non-special state to the special state after reaching the specified number of times, the advantageous route changes, so it is advantageous to the player by securing the interval with the long result display period and firmly performing the promotion effect. It is possible to recognize the change of the route. Further, when the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled to the special state after reaching the specified number of times, the result display period is shortened and the promotion performance is not executed because the advantageous route does not change, thereby making the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to shift to a special state after reaching a specific number of times.

The game machine of form 14-3 is
Having a first path (for example, left game area) and a second path (for example, right game area) different from the first path as paths along which game media can flow,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to shoot the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area to win the second start winning port. part),
Effect execution means includes display means (for example, image display device 5),
The display means
a specific promotion display (e.g., a right-handed promotion image) that promotes the shooting of game media to the second path can be continuously displayed when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result,
When a specific condition is satisfied in the special state after the predetermined display result and the special state is controlled to the special state after reaching the predetermined number of times, the specific prompting display continuously displayed in the special state after the predetermined display result is taken over to the special state after reaching the specific number of times. (For example, as shown as a modification, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the time saving state C and the conditions for starting the time saving state B are satisfied, the image display device in the time saving state C A part that continues to display the right-handed promotion image displayed in the upper right of 5 even in the time saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the shooting to the second path should be continued when the special state after the predetermined display result is changed to the special state after reaching the specific number of times.

[Mode 15]
The game machine of form 15-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Reservation storage means (for example, special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information related to variable display as reservation storage information,
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
As a special state, the state control means can be controlled to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving missing),
The performance execution means is
Predetermined suspension notice performance suggesting that the variable display is the suspension memory displayed with a predetermined display result for the suspension memory stored in the suspension storage means when the control is performed from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state. (For example, pending display notice effect) can be executed,
As for the reserved memory in which the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during the special state after the advantageous state, the special after the advantageous state of the predetermined reserved notice effect suggesting that the variable display is the reserved memory displayed with the predetermined display result. Limit the execution in the state (for example, as shown in the modified example, for the case where it is possible to execute the pending display notice effect for the pending display according to the pending memory where the variable display result is not with time saving, for example, As shown in FIGS. 284-85 and 284-86, if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is not with the time saving in the maximum four pending memories stored at the end of the time saving, depending on the pending memory While making it possible to execute the pending display notice effect for the pending display, if a pending memory in which the variable display result is not with the time saving is derived during the time saving state A, the pending display according to the holding memory is targeted. The part that does not execute the pending display notice effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the post-advantage state special state, which is an advantageous situation in which the frequency of establishment of the starting condition is high, the predetermined suspension notice effect is not performed, and the post-advantage special state, which is a disadvantageous situation in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition is low. When the state is shifted to the non-special state, performing a predetermined holding notice effect makes it possible to give the player a sense of tension and improve the amusement of the game, thereby enhancing the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state. can.

The game machine of form 15-1 is
When the variable display executed during the post-advantage state special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, the state control means can control the post-advantage state special state to the post-predetermined display result special state after the end of the post-advantage state special state (for example, , When the game state is one of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B (when the value of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more) If the variable display result is lost with time saving, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α at that time (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving control can be executed in time saving state B Remaining variable display count) and the value (1 or 685) according to the type of loss with time reduction is compared, and if the value according to the type of loss with time reduction is greater than the value of the second special figure time reduction counter α , At the end of the time saving state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B) being executed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state (time saving state C1 or time saving state C2) according to the type of loss with time saving. On the other hand, if the value corresponding to the time-saving loss type is less than the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α, the time-saving state during execution (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B Part that controls to the normal state without controlling to the time saving state according to the type of time saving after the end of either)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the predetermined display result is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to not being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The game machine of form 15-2 is
The state control means
When the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, it is controlled to the non-special state (for example, it is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A1. 7 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A22, and 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state A3. part),
When the variable display of the special number of times is executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, it is controlled to the non-special state (for example, it is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C1. The part that is controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed with the predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number of times and the special number of times By comparison, if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state. , It is possible to control to a non-special state after the special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game state is one of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B (total time saving number counter When the value of α and the second special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more), if the variable display result is lost with time saving, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α at that time (time saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, the remaining variable display count that can perform time-saving control) and the value (1 or 685) according to the time-saving loss type are compared, depending on the time-saving loss type If the value is larger than the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α, the game state is shortened at the end of the time saving state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B) during execution While controlling the time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) according to the time-saving type, the value according to the time-saving type is less than the value of the second special figure time-saving counter α. After the time saving state (either of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, or time saving state B) ends, the part that controls to the normal state without controlling to the time saving state according to the type with time saving),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled after the special state after the advantageous state ends. , can improve the game interest.

The game machine of form 15-3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special figure) or second identification information (e.g., second special figure) as variable display,
The reserved storage means can store information about the variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved storage information, and can store information about the variable display of the second identification information as the second reserved storage information (for example, The part that stores the pending memory related to the variable display of the first special figure as the pending memory with the start buffer value of 1, and stores the pending memory related to the variable display of the second special figure as the pending memory with the starting buffer value of 2),
The performance execution means is
For the second suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means when the special state after the advantageous state is controlled to the non-special state, a predetermined suspension notice effect can be executed (for example, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 , If it is a reserved memory generated during the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, even if the variable display based on the reserved memory is executed in the normal state, the reserved display notice effect can be executed for the reserved memory. part),
Regarding the first suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means when the special state after the advantageous state is controlled to the non-special state, the execution of the predetermined suspension notice effect is restricted (for example, FIG. 284-82 (A) , FIG. 284-81 (B), as shown in FIG. 284-82 (C), the part where the variable display result is not executed with a reduced display notice effect in any state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by limiting the predetermined reserved notice effect for the first reserved memory information, it is judged whether or not the predetermined display result is obtained for the first reserved memory information, thereby complicating the processing of the predetermined reserved notice effect. It is possible to prevent this and simplify the production control program.

The game machine of form 15-4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special figure) or second identification information (e.g., second special figure) as variable display,
The reserved storage means can store information about the variable display of the first identification information as the first reserved storage information, and can store information about the variable display of the second identification information as the second reserved storage information (for example, The part that stores the pending memory related to the variable display of the first special figure as the pending memory with the start buffer value of 1, and stores the pending memory related to the variable display of the second special figure as the pending memory with the starting buffer value of 2),
The performance execution means is
When the variable display of the first identification information is displayed with a predetermined display result in the non-special state, a first predetermined effect (for example, rush effect A) capable of informing that the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result is executed. is possible and
When the variable display of the second identification information is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state, the effect is capable of informing that the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, the second effect being different from the first predetermined effect. A predetermined effect (for example, rush effect B) can be executed,
When the display result is displayed as a predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the second reservation storage information stored in the reservation storage means when the special state is controlled to the non-special state after the advantageous state, and after the advantageous state. When the special state is controlled to the non-special state, the display result is displayed as the predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory information stored in the reserved memory means. , It is possible to execute a common predetermined effect that can notify that it is controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, as shown as a modification, it is a normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, and during the time saving state If the variable display result based on the pending memory that occurred in 2 is out of time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state C regardless of whether the variable display is the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure. A part that can execute a rush effect B as a effect to notify that
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display result is displayed as a predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the first reserved storage information stored when the special state is controlled to the non-special state after the advantageous state. As for the second reserved storage information, by sharing the effect of notifying that it will be controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, the development man-hours of the effect can be reduced, and the capacity of the effect data can also be reduced.

The game machine of form 15-5 is
When the special state is controlled to the non-special state after the advantageous state, the performance executing means restricts the execution of the predetermined pending notice performance when the pending storage information to be controlled to the advantageous state is stored in the pending storage means. (For example, even if it is possible to execute the pending display notice effect for the pending display according to the pending memory that the variable display result is not with time saving, as shown in FIGS. 284-87, time saving state A, Among the maximum four holding memories stored at the end of the time saving state B and the time saving state C, there is a holding memory in which the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display result is present before the holding memory as the big hit. If there is a pending memory that is not with time saving, the variable display result is the pending display corresponding to the pending memory that is not with time saving. The part that does not execute the pending display notice effect for the pending display according to memory),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined display result is obtained before the control to the advantageous state, the period during which the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result is remarkably shortened, thereby giving a sense of waste. Since there is fear, by restricting the execution of the predetermined holding notice effect, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the sense of useless attraction.

[Mode 16]
The game machine of form 16-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means
As a special state, control to a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, without time saving) It is possible, and when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) is established based on the fact that the variable display in which the specific display result is not displayed is executed a specific number of times, a special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, , can be controlled to the time saving state B),
When the variable display executed during the special state after reaching the specific number of times is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, time saving state In B, if the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B, the part that is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of time saving state B),
The performance execution means is
including display means (e.g., image display device 5),
A corresponding display indicating a controllable period in the special state when it is controlled to the special state (for example, display of the remaining variable display number of times that the time saving control can be executed in the time saving state) can be displayed on the display means,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the corresponding display being displayed is not changed to a corresponding display showing a period different from the period indicated by the corresponding display (for example, FIG. 284). As shown in -45, even if the variable display result is not with time saving in time saving state B, the remaining number of times display of time saving state B is controlled after time saving state B ends. Time saving control is performed in time saving state C. The part that does not change to the value obtained by adding the remaining variable display count that can be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the variable display becomes a predetermined display result during the special state after reaching the specified number of times and the special states overlap, the period indicated by the corresponding display is changed in the middle of the special state after reaching the specified number of times. Thus, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the effect control program executed by the effect executing means.

The game machine of form 16-1 is
When a specific condition is established during the special state after a predetermined display result, the special state after the predetermined display result is terminated and the special state can be controlled after reaching a specific number of times (for example, variable display in the time saving state C1 and the time saving state C2 The part that is controlled from the time saving state C1 and the time saving state C2 to the time saving state B when the number of times reaches 685 times),
When the specific condition is satisfied during the non-special state, and when the specific condition is satisfied during the special state after the predetermined display result is reached, the corresponding display is made when the special state is controlled after reaching the specified number of times. (For example, if the variable display count reaches 685 times in the normal state, the display of the remaining number of time reductions corresponding to the time reduction state B is started from the time when it is controlled to the time reduction state B, and the game state is When shifting from the time saving state C to the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving state C is switched to the display of the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving state B by executing the shutter presentation in the image display device 5. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can accurately recognize that the special state has been entered after reaching the specific number of times.

The game machine of form 16-2 is
The performance execution means is
When the special state after predetermined display result is controlled, a background image corresponding to the special state after predetermined display result (for example, the first background image and the second background image shown in FIGS. 284-55) can be displayed on the display means. can be,
When the special state after reaching a specific number of times is controlled, a background image corresponding to the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, the first background image and the second background image shown in FIGS. 284-55) can be displayed on the display means. can be,
A specific effect (for example, Shutter effect) can be executed,
The background image corresponding to the special state becomes visible after reaching the specified number of times by eliminating the concealment by the end of the specific effect (for example, when the game state shifts from the time saving state C to the time saving state B, the shutter effect By executing, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is hidden by the shutter image, and the background image corresponding to the time saving state C displayed on the image display device 5 is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state B Part) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the background image is hidden by the specific effect, it is possible to prevent a sense of incompatibility due to abrupt switching of the background image.

The game machine of form 16-3 is
The performance execution means is
When the predetermined display result is displayed during the non-special state and the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, the corresponding display (for example, the display of the remaining number of times of shortening time) is displayed on the display means,
When a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and when the special state after reaching a specific number of times is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the special state after reaching a specific number of times, the display of the corresponding display is restricted. (For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result in the time saving state B is not with time saving and the type of time saving is not B, the variable display result is not with time saving After the end of the time saving state, it shifts to the time saving state C2, but in the time saving state C2, the remaining number of time saving is not displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on the time when the predetermined display result is displayed in the special state after reaching the specified number of times, the period during which the predetermined display result is controlled to the special state becomes extremely short, which may give a sense of waste. Therefore, by restricting the display of the corresponding display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the sense of useless pull.

[Mode 17]
The game machine of form 17-0 is
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means
Based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., without time saving), it is possible to control to a special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving state C2),
When the variable display executed during the special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it can be controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state In A3, time saving state B, time saving state C1, time saving state C2, if the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B, these time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, Time saving state B, time saving state C1, part controlled to working time saving state C2 after finishing working time saving state C2),
The performance execution means is
In the period before the end of the special state, it is possible to execute an end suggestion effect (for example, a time saving end countdown) that suggests the end of the special state,
Even if the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during the special state and the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the pre-end period before the end of the special state ends. Suggestive effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-45, the variable display result in the time saving state C becomes the time saving B and is newly controlled to the time saving state C2 after the time saving state C , The part where the display of the time saving end countdown is executed for the time saving state C (time saving state C2) that was originally controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the mode of execution of the end suggestion effect is switched depending on whether or not the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state, the control becomes complicated, so the special state in which the predetermined display result is displayed ends. To improve the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state because the control of the end suggesting performance can be prevented from becoming complicated by performing the end suggesting performance in the same manner regardless of whether or not a predetermined display result is displayed. can be done.

The game machine of form 17-1 is
The performance execution means is
including display means (e.g., image display device 5),
It is possible to display on the display means a corresponding display (for example, display of the remaining number of times of shortening) indicating a period that can be controlled to the special state when being controlled to the special state,
When the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result during the special state, even when the special state is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the period during which the corresponding display being displayed is shown. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 284-45, for the display of the remaining number of time saving, even if the condition for starting time saving state C is newly established in the time saving state being executed, Maintaining the display of the remaining number of time-savings according to the time-saving state being executed until it is controlled to the time-saving state C that satisfies the start condition again (does not change the display of the remaining number of time-savings)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of counters as the display counters for the corresponding display, it is possible to prevent the processing of performing the corresponding display from becoming complicated, and the effect control program executed by the effect executing means. data capacity can be reduced.

The game machine of form 17-2 is
The performance execution means is
Display means (for example, image display device 5
), including
It is possible to display on the display means a corresponding display (for example, display of the remaining number of times of shortening) indicating a period that can be controlled to the special state when being controlled to the special state,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, the display of the corresponding display is restricted when the special state is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state (for example, FIG. 284-45 As shown in , if the variable display result is not with time saving in the normal state, the remaining number of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5, but after the time saving state B ends When it is controlled to the time saving state C2 , A portion that does not display the remaining number of time saving in the time saving state C2 in the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result, the period during which the variable display is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result is extremely short, which may give a sense of wastefulness. By restricting the display of the display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the feeling of unnecessary pull.

The game machine of form 17-3 is
Effect execution means (for example, image display device 5)
including display means (e.g., image display device 5),
It is possible to display on the display means a corresponding display (for example, display of the remaining number of times of shortening) indicating a period that can be controlled to the special state when being controlled to the special state,
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during the special state, when the special state is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the end suggesting performance is executed in the special state after the predetermined display result. However, if the display of the corresponding display is restricted (for example, as shown as a modified example, the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B during any time saving state, the time saving In the time saving state C2 based on the missing B, the number of remaining time saving is not displayed, while the time saving end countdown is executed),
The corresponding display has a longer display period during the execution of the variable display of 1 than the end suggestion effect (for example, as shown as a modification, the display of the remaining number of time saving is more than the time saving end countdown display period is short),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the display period of the end suggesting effect for notifying the ending period of the special state after the predetermined display result is short, the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled depending on the time when the predetermined display result is displayed in the special state. Even if the period is short, it is possible to appropriately notify the end timing of the special state after the predetermined display result while preventing excessive feeling of waste.

[Mode 18]
The game machine of form 18-0 is
A variable display of identification information (for example, a special pattern) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, starting winning), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result ( ). A game machine that can be controlled by
production execution means capable of executing production;
state control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
with
The state control means
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result based on that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result,
when the variable display executed during the special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, after the special state ends, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result,
The performance execution means is
including display means;
When the special state ends, a special display regarding the giving of game value can be displayed on the display means,
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during the special state, even when the special state is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the special display is displayed on the display means when the special state ends. is viewable,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether or not the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state, the special display is displayed when the special state ends, thus preventing complication of the control for displaying the special display. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 18-1 is
The state control means can control the special state to the special state after the advantageous state based on the control to the advantageous state as the special state, and the specific condition based on the execution of the variable display in which the specific display result is not displayed for a specific number of times. When it is established, it can be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times,
The effect execution means can display the special display on the display means when the special state ends after the advantageous state, and restricts the display of the special display when the special state ends after reaching the specified number of times.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special state ends after reaching the specified number of times, it means that the player has never been controlled to be in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to being displayed.

The game machine of form 18-2 is
The performance execution means is
when variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state and the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, when the special state ends after the predetermined display result, display of the special display is restricted;
In the special state after the advantageous state, when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result and the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled after the special state after the advantageous state ends, the special state after the predetermined display result ends. Sometimes a special display can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-45, for the result production, in the normal state, the variable display result is with time reduction and the type is with time reduction B If the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2 based on what happened, the result performance is not executed, but the variable display is made in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3. If the result is out of time saving and the type of time saving out is B (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 after the end of time saving state C2), big hit in time saving state C2 The part where the result effect is executed when the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled by the game state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special state ends after the predetermined display result of transition from the non-special state, the state is never controlled to an advantageous state, so the special display is displayed in such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing. In addition, when the special state ends after the predetermined display result of transition from the special state after the advantageous state, the state is controlled to the advantageous state at least once. By appealing, it is possible to improve the game interest.

The game machine of form 18-3 is
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the post-predetermined display result special state, and after the end of the post-predetermined display result special state, the effect executing means is controlled to the post-predetermined display result special state again. When the special state ends after the display result, restrict the display of the special display (for example, in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B When it becomes (when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3), 685 times of variable display is executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2. Then, the result production is executed, but in the normal state, the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B (time saving state A1 , When it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3), it is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the variable display result is lost in these time saving states. The part where the result effect is not executed even if the variable display is executed 685 times without
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special state after the predetermined display result ends again after transitioning from the special state after the predetermined display result, it is possible that the state has never been controlled to be in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the user's interest from decreasing due to the display.

[Mode 19]
The game machine of form 19-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-5>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
A state control means (e.g., CPU03) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, based on the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., failure with time saving), the special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving is controllable to state C2),
When the variable display executed during the special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state (for example, the variable display result in any time saving state If time saving is off and time saving is off and the type is time saving off B, the part that is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the time saving state being executed),
The performance execution means is
Including effect sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
It is possible to output a predetermined background sound by the effect sound output means when it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (A), when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 A portion where the effect control CPU 120 outputs BGM from the speakers 8L and 8Rk based on any of the sound pattern R10, sound pattern R20, and sound pattern R30),
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during the special state, and after the special state ends, when the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled, the background sound being output can be changed to the specific background sound and output. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (A), if the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B in any time saving state, the time saving state After the end of BGM based on the sound pattern R10 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the BGM of the rush effect B and the right-handed promotion effect F, and then the BGM based on the sound pattern R20 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether or not the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state, the specific background sound is output by the control to the special state after the predetermined display result, so the specific background sound is output. Since it is possible to prevent complication of control, it is possible to enhance the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state.

The game machine of form 19-1 is
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, a part that can execute a variable display of the decorative pattern),
By setting the variable display effect of the effect identification information to a predetermined reach mode, it is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that it is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 can execute any reach variation pattern shown in FIG. 284-6 By selecting the part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect),
A background sound can be output during a period in which the ready-to-win effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. output),
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during the special state, and after the end of the special state, the specific background sound is output after the specific sound different from the background sound is output. output (see, eg, FIG. 285-8);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific background sound is terminated after the specific sound different from the background sound is once output, so that the player can easily recognize the transition to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The game machine of form 19-2 is
The performance execution means is
including light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.),
It is possible to emit light emitting means using the light emission control data corresponding to the special state after the advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (A), time saving state A1 and Part where light emission control of each LED is performed based on different luminance data tables in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3),
In the special state after the predetermined display result, it is possible to emit the light emitting means using the light emission control data corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (A), time saving state Part where light emission control of each LED is performed based on different luminance data tables in C1 and time saving state C2),
The first control data of the light emission control data corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result is control data that does not cause the light emitting means to emit light (for example, luminance data "000" for turning off).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the post-predetermined display result special state, the light emitting means does not emit light first, so that the player can easily recognize the transition to the post-predetermined display result special state.

[Form 20]
The game machine of form 20-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-6>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is met, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The performance execution means is
Production means (for example, image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, movable body 32, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc. ), including
In the specific variable display in which the display result is the specific display result, a special effect can be executed in which the mode of the effect means is a special mode during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), During the variable display in which the result of the variable display is a big hit, it is possible to perform a rainbow effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image in a rainbow mode, each LED emits light in a rainbow mode, and a movable object effect in which the movable body 32 is operated. is),
In a variable reach display where a specific display result is not displayed and the variable display is a specific number of times, a special effect in which the mode of the effect means is a special mode is not executed during the variable reach display (for example, in FIG. 285-3 (B) As shown, the variable display results are out of time saving (controlled to time saving state C1 or time saving state C2 after variable display), and the variable display odd number has reached 685 times (to time saving state B after variable display) Controlled) part that does not execute rainbow effect or movable body effect in variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable arrival display is not a variable display that results in a specific display result although the specific condition is satisfied. Since it is possible to prevent misidentification as a variable display, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 20-1 is
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, a part that can execute a variable display of the decorative pattern),
In the specific variable display where the display result is the specific display result, it is possible to execute a ready-to-win effect that suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is set to a predetermined ready-to-reach mode (for example, By selecting one of the big hit reach variation patterns shown in FIG.
To enable the mode of a performance means to be a special mode in a period before becoming a ready-to-reach mode in variable display, and to make the mode of the performance means to be the special mode even in a period after becoming a ready-to-reach mode in variable display. is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), in the variable display where the variable display result is a big hit, the part where the rainbow effect and the movable body effect can be executed before reaching and after reaching),
Reach effects can be executed even in the variable reach display (for example, as shown in FIGS. part where the variation pattern of can be selected),
In both the period before reaching the reach mode and the period after reaching the reach mode in the variable reach display, the mode of the effect means is not a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), the variable When the number of display times reaches 685, the part where the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are not executed before and after the reach during the 685th variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if there is a period before and after the reach mode becomes the same as the specific variable display where the display result becomes the specific display result, by executing the reach effect in the variable reach display, any period can be determined. Also, by not using a special mode, it is possible to further prevent the reaching variable display from being misunderstood as the specific variable display.

The game machine of form 20-2 is
The production means includes light emitting means (eg, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) and display means (eg, image display device 5) and
The performance execution means is
When it is a specific variable display, in the special effect, it is possible to make a special mode for both the light emitting means and the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (C), the variable display result is a big hit, each LED emits light in a rainbow mode as a rainbow effect, and a rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the reachable display is variable, neither the light emitting means nor the display means is a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. By not executing the rainbow effect before and after the reach during the variable display, the light emission of each LED in the rainbow mode and the display of the rainbow image on the image display device 5 are not performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, with regard to the specific variable display in which the display result is the specific display result, the plurality of production means are used as a special mode to excite the player, and with respect to the arrival variable display controlled to the special state, any of the production means is used. By not using the special mode, it is possible to more reliably prevent misunderstanding of the reaching variable display with the variable display resulting from the specific display.

The game machine of form 20-3 is
The performance execution means is
In the special notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the variable jackpot display) when the specific display result is displayed, the special notification effect (for example, FIG. 285- 5 (Q11), the part for displaying the message "FEVER" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
After the display result of the arrival variable display is displayed, it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times in the specific notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the 685th variable display) when it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), the part that displays the message "BATTLE RUSH rush" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
In the specific notification period, it is possible to set the mode of the production means to a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. to emit light in a rainbow mode and to display a rainbow image on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a specific variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect is executed to indicate that the display is controlled to be in an advantageous state during the special notification period, and furthermore, after reaching a specific number of times, the special state is controlled. In the specific notification period after the arrival variable display, a specific notification effect indicating that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching the specified number of times is executed, so the specific notification period after the arrival variable display and the special notification after the specific variable display It is possible to prevent the period from being misunderstood, and by making the mode of the performance means a special mode, it is possible to increase the exhilaration of being controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times, thereby improving the game interest. can be improved.

The game machine of form 20-4 is
The performance execution means is
In the special notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the variable jackpot display) when the specific display result is displayed, the special notification effect (for example, FIG. 285- 5 (Q11), the part for displaying the message "FEVER" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
After the display result of the arrival variable display is displayed, it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times in the specific notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the 685th variable display) when it is controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), the part that displays the message "BATTLE RUSH rush" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
In the specific notification period, the aspect of the production means is not a special aspect (for example, as shown as a modification, in the 685th variable display pattern confirmation period, each LED emits light and images in a rainbow mode as a rainbow effect. a portion where the rainbow image is not displayed on the display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect is executed to indicate that the control is to be in an advantageous state during the special notification period, and furthermore, after reaching a specific number of times, the special state is controlled. In the specific notification period after the arrival variable display, a specific notification effect indicating that the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times is executed, and the mode of the effect means is not set to a special mode, so the specific notification after the arrival variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding between the period and the special notification period after the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, thereby improving the game interest.

The game machine of form 20-5 is
The effect executing means can set the mode of the effect means to a special mode in the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in the special state after reaching the specific number of times controlled after the arrival variable display (for example, , In the jackpot variable display in the time saving state B, a rainbow image may be displayed on the image display device 5, or various lamps may be lit in rainbow colors.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the aspect of the effect means is set to the special aspect in the variable display that results in the specific display when the game is controlled to the special state, so that the player can be excited and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 20-6 is
The effect data for setting the effect means in the special mode in the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in the special state is used to set the effect means in the special mode in the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in the non-special state. 285-3 (C), the rainbow effect in the normal state and the rainbow effect in the time saving state In the production control CPU120 by using the same luminance data table, each LED in the normal state and time saving state to emit light in the same light emission mode part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, the aspect of the effecting means with a relatively high degree of attention to the player is made different between the special state and the non-special state, while the aspect of the effecting means with a relatively low degree of attention is the same. By doing so, it is possible to excite the player while suppressing an increase in the data volume of the performance data.

[Form 21]
The game machine of form 21-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-6>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, based on the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., failure with time saving), the special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving is controllable to state C2),
The performance execution means is
Production means (for example, image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, movable body 32, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc. ), including
In the specific variable display in which the display result is the specific display result, a special effect can be executed in which the mode of the effect means is a special mode during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), During the variable display in which the result of the variable display is a big hit, it is possible to perform a rainbow effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image in a rainbow mode, each LED emits light in a rainbow mode, and a movable object effect in which the movable body 32 is operated. is),
In the predetermined variable display in which the display result is the predetermined display result, the special effect in which the mode of the effect means is a special mode is not executed during the predetermined variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), the variable If the display result is out of time saving (controlled to time saving state C1 or time saving affection C2 after variable display), the part that does not execute rainbow production or movable body production during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined variable display that is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result is not a variable display that results in the specific display result, by not executing the special effect as the special mode in the predetermined variable display, the specific display result is obtained. Since it is possible to prevent misidentification as the specific variable display, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 21-1 is
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, a part that can execute a variable display of the decorative pattern),
In the specific variable display where the display result is the specific display result, it is possible to execute a ready-to-win effect that suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is set to a predetermined ready-to-reach mode (for example, By selecting one of the big hit reach variation patterns shown in FIG.
To enable the mode of a performance means to be a special mode in a period before becoming a ready-to-reach mode in variable display, and to make the mode of the performance means to be the special mode even in a period after becoming a ready-to-reach mode in variable display. is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), in the variable display where the variable display result is a big hit, the part where the rainbow effect and the movable body effect can be executed before reaching and after reaching),
Reach production can be executed even in a predetermined variable display where the display result is a predetermined display result (for example, when the variable display result in FIG. possible),
In neither the period before reaching the ready-to-reach mode in the predetermined variable display nor the period after entering the ready-to-reach mode, the mode of the effect means is not set to the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), the variable In the variable display where the display result is not with time saving, the part where the rainbow effect and the movable body effect are not executed before and after the reach during the variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the ready-to-win effect in the predetermined variable display, if there is a period before and after the ready-to-win mode occurs in the same manner as the specific variable display where the display result becomes the specific display result, any period is selected. Also, by not using a special mode, it is possible to more reliably prevent the predetermined variable display from being misunderstood as the variable display resulting from the specific display.

The game machine of form 21-2 is
The production means includes light emitting means (eg, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) and display means (eg, image display device 5) and
The performance execution means is
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, in the special effect, both the light emitting means and the display means can be in a special mode (for example, FIG. 285-3 (C) As shown in , when the variable display result is a big hit, each LED emits light in a rainbow mode as a rainbow effect, and a rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5),
When the display result is a predetermined variable display that results in a predetermined display result, neither the light emitting means nor the display means is a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), the variable display result is As for the variable display that is lost with time saving, the rainbow effect is not executed before and after the reach during the variable display, so that each LED emits light in a rainbow mode and the image display device 5 displays a rainbow image. missing part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, with respect to the specific variable display in which the display result is the specific display result, the plurality of production means are used as a special mode to excite the player, and with respect to the predetermined variable display controlled to the special state, any of the production means is used. By not using the special mode, it is possible to further prevent misunderstanding of the predetermined variable display as the variable display resulting from the specific display.

The game machine of form 21-3 is
The performance execution means is
In the special notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the variable jackpot display) when the specific display result is displayed, the special notification effect (for example, FIG. 285- 5 (Q11), the part for displaying the message "FEVER" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
After the predetermined display result is displayed, in the predetermined notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the variable display with time reduction) when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, the fact that it will be controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), the part that displays the message "BATTLE RUSH rush" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
In a predetermined notification period, it is possible to set the aspect of the production means to a special aspect (for example, as shown in the modified example, if the variable display result is not with time saving, in the pattern confirmation period of the variable display, A portion that enables the light emission of each LED in a rainbow mode as a rainbow effect and the display of a rainbow image on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect is executed to indicate that the display is controlled to an advantageous state during the special notification period, and furthermore, the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result. In the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display, a predetermined notification effect indicating that the predetermined display result will be controlled to the special state is executed, so the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display and the special notification period after the specific variable display It is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the above, and by making the mode of the effect means a special mode, it is possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration to be controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, so that the game interest can be enhanced. can improve.

The game machine of form 21-4 is
The performance execution means is
In the special notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the variable jackpot display) when the specific display result is displayed, the special notification effect (for example, FIG. 285- 5 (Q11), the part for displaying the message "FEVER" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
After the predetermined display result is displayed, in the predetermined notification period (for example, the pattern confirmation period of the variable display with time reduction) when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, the fact that it will be controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), the part that displays the message "BATTLE RUSH rush" in the image display device 5) can be executed,
In the predetermined notification period, the aspect of the production means is not a special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), in the design determination period of the variable display with time reduction, the rainbow aspect of each LED as a rainbow effect and the part where the rainbow image is not displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect is executed to indicate that the display is controlled to an advantageous state during the special notification period, and furthermore, the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result. During the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display, the predetermined notification effect indicating that the special state is controlled after the result of the predetermined display is executed, and the mode of the effect means is not set to the special mode, so that the predetermined notification after the predetermined variable display It is possible to prevent the period from being mistakenly recognized as the special notification period after the specific variable display, and improve the amusement of the game.

The game machine of form 21-5 is
The effect execution means can change the mode of the effect means to a special mode in the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in the variable display in the special state after the predetermined display result controlled after the predetermined variable display (for example, , In the jackpot variable display in the time saving state B, a rainbow image may be displayed on the image display device 5, or various lamps may be lit in rainbow colors.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the aspect of the effect means is set to the special aspect in the variable display that results in the specific display when the game is controlled to the special state, so that the player can be excited and the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 21-6 is
The effect data for setting the effect means in the special mode in the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in the special state is used to set the effect means in the special mode in the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in the non-special state. 285-3 (C), the rainbow effect in the normal state and the rainbow effect in the time saving state In the production control CPU120 by using the same light emission control data, each LED in the normal state and time saving state to emit light in the same light emission mode part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, the aspect of the effecting means with a relatively high degree of attention to the player is made different between the special state and the non-special state, while the aspect of the effecting means with a relatively low degree of attention is the same. By doing so, it is possible to excite the player while suppressing an increase in the data volume of the performance data.

[Form 22]
The game machine of form 22-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-7>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is met, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, decorative pattern),
In the specific variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, it is possible to emphasize the effect identification information before the display result is fixedly displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E), In the variable display where the variable display result is a big hit, the part where the stop pattern action is displayed),
In the arrival variable display in which the specific display result is not displayed and the variable display is a specific number of times, the effect identification information is not emphasized before the display result is fixedly displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E) , the part where the stop symbol action display is not performed in the 685th variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the arrival variable display controlled to the special state after reaching the specific number of times is not the specific variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, the effect identification information is emphasized before the display result is displayed. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding as a specific variable display, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 22-1 is
The performance execution means is
In the variable display effect of the effect identification information when the variable display results in a specific display result, it is possible to display the same effect identification information as the effect result of the variable display effect (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit) , the part where the decorative pattern can be displayed with the same number such as "111" or "222"),
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that can notify that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state during the variable display,
When the performance result of the specific performance is displayed, the performance identification information is displayed in a predetermined position after being enlarged with the performance identification information aligned, and the effect display with moving light for the performance identification information displayed in the predetermined position. can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 285-3 (E), 285-5, and 285-9, the part where the stop symbol action display is performed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a big hit combination ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the mode of the performance identification information in a uniform state, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The game machine of form 22-2 is
The performance execution means is
In the variable display effect of the effect identification information when the variable display does not result in a specific display result, it is possible to display a combination of non-identical effect identification information as the effect result of the variable display effect (for example, the variable display result is not If it is a miss, as shown in FIG. 285-6 (R4), with a different number combination such as “234”)
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that can notify that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state during the variable display,
When the performance result of the specific performance is shown, the combination of the non-identical performance identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped combination of the non-identical performance identification information is not enlarged, reduced or moved, and the non-identical performance is displayed. Effect display that light moves for identification information is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E) and FIG. The part where the pattern action display is not performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the combination of the non-identical performance identification information remains temporarily stopped and does not change, so that misunderstanding as a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state can be further prevented.

The game machine of form 22-3 is
The performance execution means is
including a movable body (e.g., movable body 32),
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to execute a movable body effect to move the movable body before the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B). , if the variable display result is a big hit, the part where the movable body effect can be executed before and after the reach),
When the specific display result is not displayed and the variable display count is the specific number of times, the movable body is not operated before the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in U12-3 (B), In the 685th variable display, the part where the movable body effect is not executed before reaching and after reaching),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further prevent the reaching variable display not controlled to be in an advantageous state from being misunderstood as the specific variable display controlled to be in an advantageous state depending on whether or not the movable body is operated.

[Form 23]
The game machine of form 23-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-7>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
A state control means (e.g., CPU03) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, based on the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., failure with time saving), the special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving is controllable to state C2),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a variable display effect of the effect identification information (for example, decorative pattern),
In the specific variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, it is possible to emphasize the effect identification information before the display result is fixedly displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E), In the variable display where the variable display result is a big hit, the part where the stop pattern action is displayed),
In the predetermined variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed, the effect identification information is not emphasized before the display result is confirmed and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E), the variable display result The part where the stop pattern action is not displayed in the variable display that is attached and lost),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed is not the specific variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, the effect identification information is not emphasized before the display result is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 23-1 is
The performance execution means is
In the variable display effect of the effect identification information when the variable display results in a specific display result, it is possible to display the same effect identification information as the effect result of the variable display effect (for example, when the variable display result is a big hit) , the part where the decorative pattern can be displayed with the same numbers such as "111" and "222"),
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that can notify that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state during the variable display,
When the performance result of the specific performance is displayed, the performance identification information is displayed in a predetermined position after being enlarged with the performance identification information aligned, and the effect display with moving light for the performance identification information displayed in the predetermined position. can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 285-3 (E), 285-5, and 285-9, the part where the stop symbol action display is performed when the decorative symbols are displayed in a big hit combination ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the mode of the performance identification information in a uniform state, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The game machine of form 23-2 is
The performance execution means is
In the variable display effect of the effect identification information when the variable display does not result in a specific display result, it is possible to display a combination of non-identical effect identification information as the effect result of the variable display effect (for example, the variable display result is not If it is a miss, as shown in Figure 285-6 (R4), with a different number combination such as "234"),
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that can notify that the effect is controlled to an advantageous state during the variable display,
When the performance result of the specific performance is shown, the combination of the non-identical performance identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped combination of the non-identical performance identification information is not enlarged, reduced or moved, and the non-identical performance is displayed. Effect display that light moves for identification information is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E) and FIG. The part where the pattern action display is not performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the combination of the non-identical performance identification information remains temporarily stopped and does not change, so that misunderstanding as a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state can be further prevented.

The game machine of form 23-3 is
The performance execution means is
including a movable body (e.g., movable body 32),
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to execute a movable body effect to move the movable body before the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B). , if the variable display result is a big hit, the part where the movable body effect can be executed before and after the reach),
When the display result is a predetermined variable display that results in a predetermined display result, the movable body is not operated before the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in U12-3 (B), the variable display of time saving and missing Then, the part where the movable body effect is not executed before reaching and after reaching),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further prevent a predetermined variable display that is not controlled to be in an advantageous state from being misunderstood as a specific variable display that is controlled to be in an advantageous state, depending on the presence or absence of movement of the movable body.

[Form 24]
The game machine of form 24-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-8>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is met, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The performance execution means is
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) including
In a special notification period (for example, a period of fanfare production) when the control is performed in an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed, a display indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state and a special notification corresponding to the special notification period The display can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5, the portion that displays the image of the fanfare effect in the image display device 5),
In a specific notification period (for example, pattern confirmation period) when the display result is controlled to a special state after reaching the specific number of times after the display result is displayed in the variable display where the specific display result is not displayed and the variable display reaches the specific number of times, the specific It is possible to display a specific notification display corresponding to the specific notification period on the display means (for example, a portion of the image display device 5 that displays the image of rush effect B ),
During the special notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. The portion where each LED emits light based on WA1, WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, and AT1),
In the specific notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. Part where each LED emits light based on WA3-7, WL3-7, WR3-7, EL3-7, ER3-7, LL3-7, AT3-7),
Since the first control data of the special light emission control data and the first control data of the specific light emission control data are different, the first light emission mode of the light emitting means in the specific notification period and the first light emission mode of the light emitting means in the specific notification period and are different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 285-28(A) to (F), the first grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare effect part, the first grandchild table WA21 of the rush effect A part, and the rush effect B part The first grandchild table WA31 is different from the first grandchild table WA31, and the first light emission mode (brightness data) of various lamps in the fanfare production period and the rush production B is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable reach display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state although a specific condition is satisfied. In particular, by changing the initial control data to make the initial light emission mode different, it becomes clear that the light emission mode of the light emitting means is different, so that the specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state Since misrecognition can be prevented, the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 24-1 is
At least the emission color data included in the control data of the special emission control data is different from the control data of the specific emission control data (see FIGS. 285-28),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, at least the color of light emitted by the light emitting means is different between the special notice period and the specific notice period, and the difference in the light emission mode of the light emitting means is further clarified, so that the control is performed in an even more advantageous state. It is possible to avoid mistaking it for a specific variable display.

The game machine of form 24-2 is
The first control data of the special light emission control data is light emission control data,
The first control data of the specific light emission control data is non-light emission control data (for example, the first luminance data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part is the luminance data designating "lighting", The first luminance data in the grandchild table WA31 of the production B (scene 1) part is the luminance data designating “lights out” (see FIGS. 285-28 (A) and (C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first state of the light emitting means in the special notice period and the specific notice period is light emission and non-light emission, so that the difference in the light emission state of the light emitting means becomes even clearer, so that the advantageous state is further improved. misunderstanding as a specific variable display controlled by

The game machine of form 24-3 is
The second control data next to the first control data in the special light emission control data (for example, the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, see FIG. 285-28(A)) is the first color (for example, red) light emission data. but does not include emission data of the second color (e.g., magenta) and the third color (e.g., yellow);
The second control data next to the first control data in the specific light emission control data (for example, grandchild table WA31 of rush effect B (scene 1) part, see FIG. 285-28(C)) is the second color (for example, is control data that includes light emission data of reddish purple) but does not include light emission data of the first color (e.g., red) and the third color (e.g., yellow) (modification);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the color of light emitted from the light emitting means is different between the special notification period and the specific notification period, and the difference in the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes very clear, so that the control is more reliably performed in an advantageous state. It is possible to avoid mistaking it for a specific variable display to be displayed.

[Form 25]
The game machine of form 25-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-8>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, based on the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., failure with time saving), the special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving is controllable to state C2),
The performance execution means is
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) including
In a special notification period (for example, a period of fanfare production) when the control is performed in an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed, a display indicating that the control is performed in an advantageous state and a special notification corresponding to the special notification period The display can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5, the portion that displays the image of the fanfare effect in the image display device 5),
In a predetermined notification period (e.g., pattern confirmation period) when the predetermined display result is controlled to the post-predetermined display result special state after the predetermined display result is displayed, a display indicating that the predetermined display result will be controlled to the post-predetermined display result special state A predetermined notification display corresponding to the notification period can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. part),
During the special notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. , WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, AT1),
During the predetermined notification period, the light emission means is caused to emit light using predetermined light emission control data corresponding to the predetermined notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. Based on the part where each LED emits light, and in the rush effect B, each the part where the LED emits light),
Since the first control data of the special light emission control data and the first control data of the predetermined light emission control data are different, the first light emission mode of the light emitting means in the specific notification period and the first light emission mode of the light emitting means in the predetermined notification period and are different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 285-28(A) to (F), the first grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare effect part, the first grandchild table WA21 of the rush effect A part, and the rush effect B part The first grandchild table WA31 is different from the first grandchild table WA31, and the first light emission mode (brightness data) of various lamps in the fanfare production period and the rush production B is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined variable display resulting in the predetermined display result is controlled to a special state but not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state. In particular, by changing the initial control data to make the initial light emission state different, it becomes clear that the light emission state of the light emitting means is different, so that control is performed in an advantageous state. Since it is possible to prevent misidentification as a specific variable display to be performed, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 25-1 is
at least the emission color data included in the control data of the special emission control data is different from the control data of the predetermined emission control data (see FIGS. 285-28);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, at least the color of light emitted by the light emitting means differs between the special notice period and the predetermined notice period, making it even clearer that the light emitting modes of the light emitting means differ, so that the control is performed in a more advantageous state. It is possible to avoid mistaking it for a specific variable display.

The game machine of form 25-2 is
The first control data of the special light emission control data is light emission control data,
The first control data of the predetermined light emission control data is non-light emission control data (for example, the first brightness data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare effect part is the brightness data specifying "lighting", The first luminance data in the grandchild table WA31 of the production B (scene 1) part is the luminance data designating “lights out” (see FIGS. 285-28 (A) and (C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first state of the light emitting means in the special notice period and the predetermined notice period is light emission and non-light emission, so that it becomes clearer that the light emission modes of the light emitting means are different. misunderstanding as a specific variable display controlled by

The game machine of form 25-3 is
The second control data next to the first control data in the special light emission control data (for example, the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, see FIG. 285-28(A)) is the first color (for example, red) light emission data. but does not include emission data of the second color (e.g., magenta) and the third color (e.g., yellow);
The second control data next to the first control data in the predetermined light emission control data (for example, the grandchild table WA31 of rush effect B (scene 1) part, see FIG. 285-28(C)) is the third color (for example, yellow) but not the first color (e.g., red) and the second color (e.g., magenta) emission data;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means differs between the special notice period and the predetermined notice period, and the difference in the light emission mode of the light emitting means becomes very clear, so that the control is more reliably performed in an advantageous state. It is possible to avoid mistaking it for a specific variable display to be displayed.

[Form 26]
The game machine of form 26-0 is <characteristic part 130SG-9>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is met, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
Having a first path (for example, left game area) and a second path (for example, right game area) different from the first path as paths along which game media can flow,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to shoot the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state where the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The performance execution means is
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and light emitting means (for example, attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 993, attacker LED 994) are included as effect means,
This is a display indicating that control is to be performed in an advantageous state during a special notification period (for example, a pattern confirmation period when the variable display result is a big hit) when the control is performed in an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed. can display a special notification display corresponding to the special notification period (for example, name display in right-handed promotion effect A) on the display means,
A specific notification period (for example, the number of variable display times reaches 685) when the display result is displayed in the variable display where the specific display result is not displayed and the display result is displayed in the variable display, and after reaching the specific number of times, the special state is controlled. In the symbol confirmation period when reaching), display a specific notification display (for example, name display in right-handed promotion effect F) that indicates that the special state will be controlled after reaching a specific number of times and corresponds to the specific notification period is displayable on the means,
In the special notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using special light emission control data corresponding to the special notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4, in the right-handed promotion effect A, the control data S1 Part where light emission control of attacker LEDs 991 and 992, attacker LED 993, and attacker LED 994 is performed),
In the specific notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4, in the right-handed promotion effect F, the control data S1 is used Part where light emission control of attacker LEDs 991 and 992, attacker LED 993, and attacker LED 994 is performed),
The control data that constitutes the special light emission control data is the first control data for performing the promotion notification to promote the shooting of the game medium to the second path (for example, in the right-handed promotion effect A, the LED corresponding to the right-handed path including control data S1) for sequentially emitting light in a rainbow color scheme,
The control data constituting the specific light emission control data is the second control data for performing the promotion notification to promote the shooting of the game medium to the second path (for example, in the right-handed promotion effect F, the LED corresponding to the right-handed path includes control data S3) that sequentially emits white light,
The light-emitting means is a special light-emitting means provided corresponding to the variable means capable of changing to a first state body into which the game medium can enter in an advantageous state and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to enter even with the first state body. (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992),
The first control data is control data for causing the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized manner,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized manner (for example, as shown in FIG. color blinking), but in the right-handed promotion effect F, the part where the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 do not emit light (see FIGS. 285-34 to 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable arrival display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state although the specific condition is satisfied. By not making the variable means conspicuous, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding as a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, so that the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state is enhanced. be able to.

The game machine of form 26-1 is
The light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, attacker LED 994) provided corresponding to a specific area (for example, gate switch 21) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game medium in the special state,
The second control data is control data for not emphasizing the special light emitting means but causing the specific light emitting means to emit light in the emphasized mode (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the attacker LED 994 to emit light without causing the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the specific notification period after the variable arrival display, the specific area is emphasized by emitting light not from the special light emitting means but from the specific light emitting means in an emphasized manner, thereby controlling in an advantageous state. Since it becomes clear that the display is not the specific variable display to be controlled, it is possible to avoid mistaking it for the specific variable display to be controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 26-2 is
The first control data is control data for causing the special light emitting means to emit light in a special mode that is an emphasized mode (for example, a part that flashes the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 in rainbow colors as shown in FIG. 285-4(C)). ,
The second control data is control data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized mode different from the special mode (for example, a part that blinks the attacker LED 994 in white as shown in FIG. 285-4 (C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminous mode of the specific luminous means is a different emphasizing mode from the special mode, which is the emphasizing mode of the special luminous means, so that it is further clarified that the specific variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent misunderstanding as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 26-3 is
The luminous means is
Special path light emitting means (for example, board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, attacker LED 991, 992) composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the path to the variable means;
Specific route light emitting means (for example, board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, attacker LED 994) composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the route to the specific area;
including
The first control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATA1, ATV1) for sequentially emitting light from the light emitters constituting the special path light emitting means in a special mode,
The second control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) for causing the light emitters constituting the specific path light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a mode different from the special mode (FIGS. 285-34 to 285-34). 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means indicating the route also differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, so that it is further clarified that the specific variable display is not controlled in an advantageous state. , it is possible to further prevent misunderstanding as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 26-4 is
The performance execution means is
Including effect sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
In the special notification period and the specific notification period, the effect sound corresponding to each period can be output from the effect sound output means (for example, the effect sound can be output in the right-handed promotion effect A and the right-handed promotion effect F part),
The degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means are sequentially caused to emit light according to the first control data is greater than the degree of emphasis of the light effects constituting the special route light emitting means according to the second control data. is greater than the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when sequentially emitting (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (C), the effect sound output in the right-handed promotion effect A is A portion larger than the production sound output in the right-handed promotion production F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of emphasis of the effect sound is different between the specific notification period and the special notification period, it becomes clearer that the specific variable display is not controlled in an advantageous state, which is even more advantageous. It is possible to avoid mistaking it for a state-controlled specific variable display.

[Form 27]
The game machine of form 27-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-9>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, based on the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., failure with time saving), the special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving is controllable to state C2),
Having a first path (for example, left game area) and a second path (for example, right game area) different from the first path as paths along which game media can flow,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to shoot the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state where the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The performance execution means is
Display means (for example, image display device 5) and light emitting means (for example, attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 993, attacker LED 994) are included as effect means,
This is a display indicating that control is to be performed in an advantageous state during a special notification period (for example, a pattern confirmation period when the variable display result is a big hit) when the control is performed in an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed. can display a special notification display corresponding to the special notification period (for example, name display in right-handed promotion effect A) on the display means,
In the reaching variable display where the variable display does not display the specific display result and the variable display becomes a specific number of times (for example, the pattern confirmation period when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times), after the display result is displayed, the special state after reaching the specific number of times Display a specific notification display (for example, an image of right-handed promotion effect F) corresponding to the specific notification period, which is a display indicating that it will be controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, in the specific notification period when controlled to is displayable on the means,
In the special notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. light emission control of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992, the attacker LED 993, and the attacker LED 994),
In the specific notification period, the light emitting means is caused to emit light using the specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4, in the right-handed promotion effect F, the control data S1 is used Part where light emission control of attacker LEDs 991 and 992, attacker LED 993, and attacker LED 994 is performed),
The control data that constitutes the special light emission control data is the first control data for performing the promotion notification to promote the shooting of the game medium to the second path (for example, in the right-handed promotion effect A, the LED corresponding to the right-handed path including control data S1) for sequentially emitting light in a rainbow color scheme,
The control data constituting the specific light emission control data is the second control data for performing the promotion notification to promote the shooting of the game medium to the second path (for example, in the right-handed promotion effect F, the LED corresponding to the right-handed path includes control data S3) that sequentially emits white light,
The light-emitting means is a special light-emitting means provided corresponding to the variable means capable of changing to a first state body into which the game medium can enter in an advantageous state and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to enter even with the first state body. (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992),
The first control data is control data for causing the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized manner,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized mode (for example, in the right-handed promotion effect A, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 emit light (rainbow flashing), but in the right-handed promotion effect F is a portion that does not emit light from the attacker LEDs 991 and 992. See Figures 285-34 to 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined variable display that results in the predetermined display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state although it is controlled to a special state. By not making the variable means conspicuous by emphasizing the special light emitting means, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding as a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, so that the game equipped with the special state can be prevented. The marketability of the machine can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 27-1 is
The light emitting means includes specific light emitting means (eg, attacker LED 994) provided corresponding to a specific area (eg, gate switch 21) that is advantageous to the player by entering the game medium in the special state,
The second control data is control data for not emphasizing the special light emitting means but causing the specific light emitting means to emit light in the emphasized mode (for example, as shown in FIG. A portion that causes the attacker LED 994 to emit light without causing the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display, the specific area is emphasized by emitting light not from the special light emitting means but from the specific light emitting means in an emphasized manner, thereby controlling in an advantageous state. Since it is clear that the display is not the specific variable display to be controlled, it is possible to avoid mistaking it for the specific variable display to be controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 27-2 is
The first control data is control data for causing the special light emitting means to emit light in a special mode that is an emphasized mode (for example, a part that flashes the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 in rainbow colors as shown in FIG. 285-4(C)). ,
The second control data is control data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasized mode different from the special mode (for example, a part that blinks the attacker LED 994 in white as shown in FIG. 285-4 (C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the luminous mode of the specific luminous means is a different emphasizing mode from the special mode, which is the emphasizing mode of the special luminous means, so that it is further clarified that the specific variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent misunderstanding as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 27-3 is
The luminous means is
Special path light emitting means (for example, board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, attacker LED 991, 992) composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the path to the variable means;
Specific route light emitting means (for example, board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, attacker LED 994) composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the route to the specific area;
including
The first control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATA1, ATV1) for sequentially emitting light from the light emitters constituting the special path light emitting means in a special manner,
The second control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) for causing the light emitters constituting the specific path light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a mode different from the special mode (FIGS. 285-34 to 285-34). 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means indicating the route also differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, so that it is further clarified that the specific variable display is not controlled in an advantageous state. , it is possible to further prevent misunderstanding as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 27-4 is
The performance execution means is
Including effect sound output means (for example, speaker 8L8R),
In the special notification period and the specific notification period, the effect sound corresponding to each period (for example, right-handed effect sound) can be output from the effect sound output means,
The degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means are sequentially caused to emit light according to the first control data is higher than the degree of emphasis of the light effects constituting the special route light emitting means according to the second control data. is greater than the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when sequentially emitting (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is louder than the right-handed production sound of the hitting promotion production F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of emphasis of the effect sound is different between the specific notification period and the special notification period, it becomes clearer that the specific variable display is not controlled in an advantageous state, which is even more advantageous. It is possible to avoid mistaking it for a state-controlled specific variable display.

[Form 28]
The game machine of form 28-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-10>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, when a specific condition (for example, the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times) based on execution of a specific number of times of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is met, and after reaching the specific number of times It is controllable to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
Having a first path (for example, left game area) and a second path (for example, right game area) different from the first path as paths along which game media can flow,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to shoot the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state where the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The performance execution means is
including display means (e.g., image display device 5),
In the special notification period (for example, during the pattern confirmation period of the variable jackpot display) when the control is performed in an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed, a display indicating that it is controlled in an advantageous state and corresponds to the special notification period. (for example, the name display in the right-handed promotion effect A) can be displayed on the display means, and after the display of the special notice display, a promotion display (for example, promotion display in right-handed promotion effect A) can be displayed,
A specific notification period (for example, the number of variable display times reaches 685) when the display result is displayed in the variable display where the specific display result is not displayed and the display result is displayed in the variable display, and after reaching the specific number of times, the special state is controlled. during the symbol confirmation period when reaching the second path), a promotion display (for example, a promotion display in the right-handed promotion effect F) that promotes the shooting of the game medium to the second path can be displayed on the display means, and the display of the promotion display It is possible to display a specific notification display corresponding to the specific notification period on the display means, which is a display indicating that the special state will be controlled after reaching the specific number of times later (for example, as a modification, shown in FIG. 285-4 (F) Thus, in the right-handed promotion effect F, the part that displays the name display after the promotion display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, only the notification display is different between the special notification period after the specific variable display that is controlled to be in an advantageous state and the specific notification period after the arrival variable display that is not controlled to be in an advantageous state although the specific condition is satisfied. Instead, the display order will be different from the promotion display, and it will be possible to clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the specific notification period, so the arrival variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state Specific variable display Therefore, it is possible to improve the marketability of the gaming machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 28-1 is
The performance execution means is
When displaying the promotion display during the special notification period, the character is displayed on the display means (for example, when the right-handed promotion effect A is executed as shown in FIG. the part that displays the character in the ),
When the promotion display is displayed during the specific notification period, the character is not displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. part that does not display ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether or not the character is displayed differs between the special notification period and the specific notification period, so that it is possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the specific notification period, It is possible to further prevent the reaching variable display from being misunderstood as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 28-2 is
The effect execution means can display the promotion display in the special notification period on the display means in a manner with a higher degree of emphasis than the promotion display in the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. In the promotion effect A, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed promotion image (a message of "Right-handed" and an image of an arrow pointing to the right) and a semicircular and rainbow-colored arrow image. In the device 5, the right-handed promotion image (the image of the message "Aim here!") is displayed as an image smaller in size than the right-handed promotion image in the right-handed promotion effect A, and a semicircular white arrow is displayed. the part where the image is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of emphasis of the promotional display differs between the special notice period and the specific notice period, it becomes possible to distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period more clearly. It is possible to further prevent the variable display from being misunderstood as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 28-3 is
The performance execution means is
During the special notification period, it is possible to display a special notification display (for example, the message image of "FEVER" shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)) that includes the name display of the advantageous state and does not include the rush display,
In the specific notification period, after reaching a specific number of times, a specific notification display including the name display of the special state and the rush display (for example, the message image of "BATTLE RUSH" and the message image of "rush" shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) is viewable,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of the rush display of the notification display will differ between the special notification period and the specific notification period, so it will be possible to further clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the specific notification period. , it is possible to further prevent the reaching variable display from being misunderstood as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 28-4 is
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a special notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
During the specific notification period, it is possible to display an explanation display regarding the special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. part),
During the special notification period, the explanation display regarding the special notification effect is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), the portion where only the message image of "FEVER" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of the explanation display differs between the special notice period and the specific notice period, so it is possible to further clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period. It is possible to further prevent the display from being misunderstood as a specific variable display in which the display is controlled in an advantageous state.

[Form 29]
The game machine of form 29-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-10>
Variable display of identification information (for example, special symbols) is performed based on establishment of a starting condition (for example, start winning), and it is advantageous for the player when the variable display is displayed with a specific display result (for example, big win). A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a favorable state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
State control means (e.g., CPU 103) that can be controlled to a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time saving state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be established than the non-special state,
with
The state control means, as a special state, based on the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., failure with time saving), the special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving is controllable to state C2),
Having a first path (for example, left game area) and a second path (for example, right game area) different from the first path as paths along which game media can flow,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to shoot the game medium to the second path (for example, the time saving state is a game state where the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The performance execution means is
including display means (e.g., image display device 5),
This is a display indicating that control is to be performed in an advantageous state during a special notification period (for example, a pattern confirmation period when the variable display result is a big hit) when the control is performed in an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed. can display a special notification display corresponding to the special notification period (for example, a name display in the right-handed promotion effect A) on the display means, and after the display of the special notification display, the game medium can be launched to the second path. It is possible to display a promotional display to promote (for example, a promotional display in the right-handed promotion effect A),
After the predetermined display result is displayed, the game to the second path is performed during the predetermined notification period when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, the pattern confirmation period when the variable display result is not with the time saving). It is possible to display on the display means a promotion display for promoting the shooting of the medium (for example, a promotion display in the right-handed promotion effect F), and after the display of the promotion display, it indicates that control will be performed to a special state after a predetermined display result. The display means can display a predetermined notification display (for example, a name display in the right-handed promotion effect F) corresponding to the predetermined notification period,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the notification display is simply different between the special notification period after the specific variable display controlled to the advantageous state and the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display controlled to the special state but not controlled to the advantageous state. Not only that, the display order will be different from the promotional display, and it will be possible to clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period, so the predetermined variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state. Since it is possible to prevent misidentification as a display, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state.

The game machine of form 29-1 is
The performance execution means is
When displaying the promotion display during the special notification period, the character is displayed on the display means (for example, when the right-handed promotion effect A is executed as shown in FIG. the part that displays the character in the ),
When the promotion display is displayed during the predetermined notification period, the character is not displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), the character part that does not display ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, whether or not the character is displayed differs between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period, so that it is possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period. It is possible to further prevent the predetermined variable display from being misunderstood as the specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 29-2 is
The effect execution means can display the promotion display in the special notification period on the display means in a manner with a higher degree of emphasis than the promotion display in the predetermined notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. In the promotion effect A, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed promotion image (a message of "Right-handed" and an image of an arrow pointing to the right) and a semi-circular rainbow-colored arrow image. In the device 5, the right-handed promotion image (the image of the message "Aim here!") is displayed as an image smaller in size than the right-handed promotion image in the right-handed promotion effect A, and a semicircular white arrow is displayed. the part where the image is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the degree of emphasis of the promotion display differs between the specific notice period and the special notice period, it becomes possible to further clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period, and the prescribed It is possible to further prevent the variable display from being misunderstood as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 29-3 is
The performance execution means is
During the special notification period, it is possible to display a special notification display (for example, the message image of "FEVER" shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)) that includes the name display of the advantageous state and does not include the rush display,
In a predetermined notification period, a predetermined notification display including a name display of a special state after a predetermined display result and a rush display (for example, the message image of "BATTLE RUSH" and the message image of "rush" shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) is displayed. is viewable,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the presence or absence of the rush display of the notification display differs between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period, it is possible to further clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period. , it is possible to further prevent the predetermined variable display from being misunderstood as a specific variable display that is controlled in an advantageous state.

The game machine of form 29-4 is
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a special notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies that it is controlled in an advantageous state,
During the predetermined notification period, it is possible to display an explanation display regarding the special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. part),
During the special notification period, the explanation display regarding the special notification effect is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), the portion where only the message image of "FEVER" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the presence or absence of the explanation display differs between the special notice period and the predetermined notice period, it becomes possible to further clearly distinguish whether it is the special notice period or the specific notice period, and the reachability is variable. It is possible to further prevent the display from being misunderstood as a specific variable display in which the display is controlled in an advantageous state.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 274 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 276). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 276), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, the lower left part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 274), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 276).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 276).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 276, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11 .

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is established in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by the operation of the staff of the game arcade, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 278 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot gaming state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is detected. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed according to set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 280 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 280 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 280 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 280 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the setting value is 1, and when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that, for the case where the variable special figure is the set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 280 (A).

As shown in FIG. 280 (B), for the case where the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, if the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 280 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the previous set value 6, with 65317 as the reference value of the loss with time reduction (reference value with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, in the second special figure display result determination table, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range A number within the range plus the non-common number range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 282 . When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

Figure 283 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 282 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 283, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 130SG)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 130SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 284-1 to 284-79.
(where the form is described)

In addition, in the description of each step of the flow chart in the characteristic part 130SG, for example, the place described as "step S1" is abbreviated as "S1", "normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", and "super reach" is "SP reach". ” may be abbreviated. Further, in the characteristic portion 130SG, "fluctuation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, the configuration having the same function as that of the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation or having a different form, arrangement position, etc., will be omitted from detailed explanation by attaching the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 284-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side. The direction will be used as a reference. Incidentally, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player who plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

A first embodiment of the characteristic portion 130SG will be described below. Pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. A game machine in which the probability of a big hit is set to about 1/200 is explained.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 130SG is provided with a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B as operation means that can be operated by the player instead of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Both the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B are connected to the push sensor 35B.

FIG. 284-1 is a front view showing the pachinko game machine of the characteristic portion 130SG. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 130SG has an opening/closing door frame 50 attached to the game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 on which the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 are mounted is detachable. A first effect unit 130SG100 attached to the upper center position, a second effect unit 130SG200 attached to the upper left side of the opening/closing door frame 50, and a third effect unit attached to the upper right side of the opening/closing door frame 50. It has three production units of 130SG300. The opening/closing door frame 50 includes the glass door frame 3a, and is a door frame capable of opening and closing the entire front surface of the game machine frame 3. As shown in FIG.

In addition, at the center of the lower part of the opening/closing door frame 50, there is an operation unit 600 provided with a chance button 631B on the upper part, and a lever body 631A provided rotatably as well as being able to be pushed and pulled by the player in the front-rear direction. In addition, the upper plate portion is provided with a cross key constituting a selection button 130SG35 for performing settings related to effects such as volume.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 284-2) for detecting the player's operation (movement) on the chance button 631B, and detects the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A. A push/pull sensor 625Y consisting of a push sensor (not shown) and a pull sensor (not shown) are provided, and a protrusion position sensor 625C for detecting that the lever body 631A is positioned at the protrusion position. . Further, the selection button 130SG35 has an up/down/left/right sensor 130SG36 (see FIG. 284-2) consisting of an up sensor, a down sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor for detecting each operation of the cross key of the selection button 130SG35 in the up/down/left/right direction. is provided.

Detection signals of the origin position sensor and the effect position sensor provided in the first effect unit 130SG100, the second effect unit 130SG200, and the third effect unit 130SG300, and the push/pull sensor of the operation unit 600 provided in the opening/closing door frame 50 625Y, the projection position sensor 625C, the button sensor 635B, and the detection signals of the up, down, left, and right sensors 130SG36 of the selection button 130SG35, each of the production units 130SG100 to 130SG300 and the relay board (not shown) of the opening/closing door frame 50 are provided with serial signals. By being converted into one serial signal by the signal conversion circuit and input to the effect control CPU 120, the effect control CPU 120, which controls the effect, can grasp the detection status of each sensor.

The first effect unit 130SG100 is provided with an elevating body 130SG121 movable between the origin position and the effect position by a driving means (not shown) provided in the first effect unit 130SG100. In addition, the second effect unit 130SG200 and the third effect unit 130SG300 are provided with wings 130SG221 as movable bodies (opening and closing bodies) attached to the opening/closing door frame 50 so as to be horizontally rotatable around a rotation axis facing the vertical direction, 130SG321, and character panels 130SG400A to 130SG400D as movable bodies (rotating bodies) rotatably provided on their inner surfaces. Each production unit is provided with a drive motor for driving these movable bodies, an origin position sensor and production position sensor for detecting that the movable body is positioned at the origin position or production position, and a frame LED. (See Figure 284-2).

In addition, even if variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 685 times) after power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after the occurrence of a big hit, the following When a big hit does not occur, it may be controlled to a time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or a relief time saving state) among a plurality of kinds of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided in order to rescue a player who did not get a big hit despite playing the game for a long period of time (for example, in order to suppress the amount invested in the game). , in this example, it is a game state called "play time".

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 130SG, in addition to the "big win" and "loss", "minor win" and "loss with time reduction" are provided as variable display results. When the variable display result is "small hit", opening control of the big winning opening is performed as a small win game in the same manner as the big win game, and after the end of the small win game, the game state immediately before the small win is taken over.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-1 and 284-2, in the big winning opening of the characteristic portion 130SG, there are two switches, a first count switch 130SG023 and a second count switch 130 downstream of the first count switch. One count switch is provided. Of these, the first count switch 130SG023 is a count switch for paying out prize balls by detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening, and the second count switch 130SG024 is a count switch for detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening, and the second count switch 130SG024 is a count switch for detecting a game ball entering the big winning opening. It is a count switch for controlling the game state to the jackpot game state by detecting (also called V winning).

If the variable display result is "loss with time reduction", it will not be controlled to the jackpot game state after the variable display ends as in "loss", but after the variable display ends, the time reduction state (time reduction state C1 or It is controlled to the time saving state C2).

As shown in FIG. 284-1, in this characterizing portion 130SG, the game areas are the left game area which is the left side of the center decoration frame surrounding the image display device 5 arranged substantially in the center of the game board 2, and the right side. A game ball hit weakly by the hitting ball operation handle (left hit) flows down the left game area and hit hard by the hitting ball operation handle (right hit). A game ball flows down the right game area.

As shown in FIG. 284-1, the winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5 so that the game balls flowing down the left game area can win. The ball device 7 and the gate switch 21 are arranged on the right side of the winning ball device 6A so that the game balls flowing down the right game area can win and the game balls flowing down the left game area cannot win.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the normal state in this characteristic portion 130SG is a game state in which the game ball is mainly launched toward the left game area (performs left-handed hitting). The state, the small hit game state, is a game state in which the game ball is launched mainly toward the right game area (right hitting). In other words, the variable display of the first special figure is mainly performed in the normal state, and the variable display of the second special figure is mainly performed in the time saving state.

Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 will be schematically described.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. , For example, based on the establishment of the normal pattern start condition for starting the variable display of the normal pattern, such as the end of the previous variable display of the normal pattern, the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display 20 is started. be done.

In this variable display of the normal pattern, after the start of the variation of the normal pattern, when a predetermined time as the variable display time of the normal pattern elapses, the fixed normal pattern that is the result of the variable display of the normal pattern is stopped and displayed (derived display). . At this time, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern hit pattern) such as a number indicating "7" is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern hit". On the other hand, if a normal pattern other than a normal pattern per pattern, such as a number or symbol other than a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the variable display result of the normal pattern will be "normal pattern lost". Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "win", the movable piece arranged on the right side of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to advance and retreat to the right game area. The game ball can enter the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by rolling on the movable piece while the movable piece advances to the right game area.

After the first starting condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning port formed in the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. 284-2, For example, the first special symbol display device 4A starts to variably display the special symbols when the first start condition is met, such as when the previous special symbol game or the big hit game state is completed. In addition, the second starting condition is established by detecting the game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 284-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts the variable display of the special symbols based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, by the end of the previous variable display of the special symbols or the end of the big hit game state. .

In the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbols is started, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbols are displayed. A fixed special symbol (variable display result), which is a variable display result, is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special pattern (big hit pattern) is stop-displayed as a fixed special pattern, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special pattern (small-hit pattern) different from the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed. If so, it becomes a "small hit" as a predetermined display result, and if a predetermined special pattern (time saving lost pattern) different from the big win pattern and the small winning pattern is stopped and displayed, it becomes "time saving lost". Also, if a special symbol that is neither a big win symbol, a small winning symbol, nor a lost symbol with time saving is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it will be "lost".

After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round advantageous to the player (also called "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. be. After the variable display result in the variable display of the special figure becomes "minor win", it is controlled to a small win game state as a special game state different from the big win game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 130SG, as an example, the special symbols representing the numbers "3", "5" and "7" are used as the jackpot symbols, and the special symbols representing the numbers "2" and "4" are used. A small winning pattern is used, a special pattern showing the numbers "6" and "8" is a lost pattern with time saving, and a special pattern showing a symbol "-" is a lost pattern. In addition, each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, a lost symbol with a time saving, and a lost symbol in the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A is each in the variable display of the special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be a special pattern different from the pattern, or the common special pattern in the variable display of both special patterns may be a big hit pattern, a small hit pattern, a lost pattern with a time reduction, and a lost pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the variable display result is lost with time saving, it is possible to display two types of symbols as lost symbols with time saving on the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B. In the case where the display result is lost, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can display one type of symbol as a lost symbol, but the present invention is limited to this. However, when the variable display result is lost with time reduction, it is possible to display only one type of pattern or a plurality of types of patterns in both the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B. may be

In addition, in the characteristic part 130SG, when the variable display result is lost with time saving, there are more symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B than when the variable display result is lost. Although the form was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is lost, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol The number of patterns that can be displayed on the display device 4B may be large.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the variable display result is lost with time reduction, "6" or "8" is displayed as a lost design with time reduction on the first special design display device 4A or the second special design display device 4B. , When the variable display result is lost, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B display "-" that can be easily distinguished from the lost symbol with time saving as a lost symbol. , The present invention is not limited to this, and the lost symbols with time reduction are at least partially similar to the symbols that are difficult for the player to identify (for example, the lost symbols with time reduction include the first While "8" is displayed as the 7-segment display in the special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, as the missing symbol, the 7-segment in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B "A" may be displayed as a display).

In addition, as described above, when the winning pattern with time reduction and the losing pattern are difficult to distinguish from the player, the big hit pattern and the small winning pattern are lit in common with the losing pattern with time saving and the losing pattern. By reducing the number of segs or the like, the symbols that the player can easily distinguish between the winning symbols with time saving and the winning symbols may be used.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 130SG, the form in which the game player can easily identify the lost symbols with time reduction and the lost symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is designed to make it difficult for the player to recognize the lost symbols with time saving and the lost figure. Similar patterns may be used.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 130SG, an example has been exemplified in which two types of lost symbols with time reduction can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the number of lost symbols with reduced working hours that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are different (for example, the lost symbols with reduced working hours that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A Make the number larger than the number of lost symbols with time reduction that can be displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, or increase the number of lost symbols with time reduction that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A in the second special symbol display device 4B. It may be made to be less than the number of symbols that can be displayed with reduced working hours.

In addition, in this characterizing section 130SG, an example has been exemplified in which the missing symbols that can be displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are both one type, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the number of lost symbols that can be displayed is different between the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (for example, the number of lost symbols that can be displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is the second special symbol The number of lost symbols that can be displayed on the display device 4B is increased, or the number of lost symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is made smaller than the number of lost symbols that can be displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. ).

After the big win symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the variable display of the special symbols and becomes "big win" as the result of the specific display, in the big win game state, the big winning entrance door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. During the period until the upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or until the predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the big prize opening is opened. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "3" or "10"). It should be noted that even before the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win a prize in the big winning opening). .

In addition, after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the variable display of special symbols and becomes a "small winning" as a specific display result, in the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 big winning opening The door will open multiple times. The big winning entrance door is opened multiple times until the total open time reaches a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 1.8 seconds) or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. As a result, the special variable winning ball device 7 becomes the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, the total opening time of the big winning opening door in the small winning game state is illustrated as being opened multiple times until it reaches a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 1.8 seconds). The invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening door in the small winning game state may be opened only once until a predetermined upper limit time elapses in the small winning game state.

In the small winning game state, when the game ball that has won the big winning hole passes through the second count switch 130SG024 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, a "big win" based on the passage of the second count switch 130SG024 of the game ball ” (V winning jackpot). That is, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state based on the detection of passage of the game ball through the second count switch 130SG024.

In addition, in this characterizing section 130SG, the game ball that has won the big winning opening always passes through the second count switch 130SG024. That is, when the game ball enters the big winning opening in the small winning game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the second count switch 130SG024, and after the small winning game is finished, the CPU 103 controls the game ball to the big winning game state. . In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, when the variable display result is a small hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening during the small win game, so that it is always controlled to the big win game state after the small win game is finished. It's like

Then, when the game ball is controlled to the big winning game state based on the passage of the second count switch 130SG024, the special variable winning ball device 7 big winning opening door is closed until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses. or until a predetermined number (for example 10) of winning balls are generated, the big winning opening is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed in the first state (open state) advantageous to the player.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9"). It should be noted that even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, the round game may be terminated by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball does not win in the big winning opening).

In addition, after the end of the big hit game state in this feature part 130SG, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed in a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 1 time, 7 times, 685 times) Time saving state A (described later Time saving state A1, time saving state A2, or time saving state A3) is controlled. By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, initialization processing after power-on) is executed) is performed. In the time-saving control, the variable display of the special figure is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the big hit game state, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game ball pushes the second count switch 130SG024 in the small win game state. It can be terminated when one of the conditions of passing through is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, control to shorten the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the variable display of the special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B than in the normal state, The variable display time of the variable display of the normal pattern display device 20 (normal pattern variable display time) is shorter than in the normal state, and the variable display result in the variable display of the normal pattern each time is "normal pattern". Control for improving the probability of "hit" than in the normal state, and control time for advancing and retreating the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "normal hit" Increase the possibility that the second start condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make it longer than the time, control to increase the number of advances and retreats than in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. Thus, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also called high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a combination of a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed.

By performing the high opening control, the second start winning opening increases the frequency that the game ball can win a prize than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily satisfied, and the variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. , the time until the next variable display result becomes "big win" or "minor win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed. A game state in which both the time saving control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

After turning on the power to the pachinko game machine 1 (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after the occurrence of a big win, even if the variable display is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (685 times in this example), the next big win will not occur. If it does not occur, it is controlled to the above-mentioned time saving state B, and if the variable display result is "no time saving", it is controlled to the above-mentioned time saving state C1 or time saving state C2. In these time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, and time-saving state C2, like the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3, variable display of special figures by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B Control to shorten the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) in the normal state, and the variable display time of the variable display of the general figure by the normal pattern display 20 (normal figure variable display time) than in the normal state Control to shorten the time, control to improve the probability that the variable display result in the variable display of each normal figure will be "per normal figure" than in the normal state, and the variable display result will be "per normal figure" A game ball is second-started, such as control to lengthen the control time for moving forward/backward control of the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B from that in the normal state, and control to increase the number of forward/backward movements than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easier for the player to pass through (enter) the winning hole and increase the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIG. If the variable display result of the special figure is lost with time reduction, non-reach, normal reach, super reach variation patterns (PA3-6, PA3-7, PA3-8, PA3-9) can be selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. When the variable display result of the second special figure is lost with reduced working hours, only the non-reach variation pattern (PA3-6) may be selected. By doing so, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A is not with time saving, it is noticed that the variable display result is not with time saving because the ready-to-win effect is not executed. can be made difficult.

In addition, in the modification, when the game state is the time saving state A (one of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special figure is lost with time saving , only the non-reach variation pattern (PA3-6) can be selected so that the reach effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game When the state is time-saving state A (any of time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special figure is lost with time saving, normal reach or super reach variation pattern is selected, the ready-to-win effect may not be executed, or the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super-to-win may be selected at a rate lower than that of the characteristic portion 130SG. In other words, to limit the execution of the reach effect, it is necessary to prevent the normal reach and super reach variation patterns from being selected, and even if the normal reach and super reach variation patterns are selected, normal reach and super reach are displayed during variable display. It includes not executing the ready-to-win effect and selecting the variation pattern of normal ready-to-win and super-to-win at a rate lower than that of the characteristic portion 130SG.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the variable display result becomes a big win in the variable display of the second special figure, only the big win type B can be won as an example, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, when the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special figure, there are multiple types of jackpot types (for example, jackpot A and jackpot B as shown in FIG. 284-53 (A)) as jackpot types. It may be possible to be elected.

Also, in this way, when the variable display result is a big win in the variable display of the second special figure, when the big win A and the big win B can be won as the big win types, Figs. As shown in -54 (D), the variation patterns selected when the jackpot type is the jackpot A and when the jackpot type is the jackpot B may be different. In particular, the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A is time saving state A (time saving state A3 after jackpot B in this modification), time saving state B, time saving state C (time saving state C2 in this modification). In addition, the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is the jackpot B is the time saving state A (time saving state A3 after the jackpot B in this modification), time saving state B, time saving state C (in this modification To make it easy to understand whether a big win A or a big win B is won in a variation pattern even if the game conditions are different by sharing the time saving state C2), and to reduce the data capacity of the variation pattern. can be done.

In addition, in the modification, the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is the jackpot A is part of the time saving state A (time saving state A3 after the jackpot B), time saving state B, part of the time saving state C (time saving State C2) is common, and the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is the jackpot B is part of the time saving state A (time saving state A3 after the jackpot B), time saving state B, and part of the time saving state C. (Working time saving state C2) has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. B and the time saving state C may be common, and the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is the jackpot B may be common to all the time saving state A, the time saving state B and the time saving state C.

Here, the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 130SG will be described. As shown in FIGS. 284-1 and 284-55(A), in the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 130SG, the start-up prize is won in the lower left part of the image display device 5, but the variable display is not yet executed. A pending memory display area 130SG005D that can display a pending display corresponding to memory is provided. A display area 130SG013 is provided. Furthermore, in the upper left part of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area 5SL for displaying small patterns corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the decorative pattern. The small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative patterns.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 284-55(A) to 284-55(D), the image displayed by the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 130SG differs according to the game state. For example, as shown in FIG. 284-55 (A), the variable display of the second special figure after the time saving state A (variable display based on the pending memory of the second special figure that occurred during the time saving state but was not consumed) And for the normal state other than the 10 times variable display after the variable display of these second special symbols, the image of the daytime city (first background image) is displayed as the background image of the image display device 5. there is Also, for the variable display of the second special figure after the time saving state A (variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special figure that occurred during the time saving state but was not consumed), see FIG. As shown in -55(B), a background image (dedicated stage image) different from the above-described first background image is displayed on the image display device 5 although it is in a normal state. In addition, the dedicated stage image is the variable display of the second special figure after the time saving state A as described above (variable display based on the pending memory of the second special figure that occurred during the time saving state but was not consumed) It is a background image limited to variable display ten times, and is not displayed after the time saving state B or the time saving state C ends.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-55 (A) and 284-55 (B), in the normal state, the right side of the image display device 5 reaches the ceiling (RAM is cleared or 685 times after the end of the previous jackpot game) Remaining number of times of variable display until the end of variable display 130SG202 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-55 (C), the image display device 5 in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1 (FINAL BATTLE described later) corresponds to variable display of each second special figure as a panel effect described later. 5 panel images ("No. 1" panel image according to the variable display of the 2nd special figure being executed, and "No. 2" to "No. 5" panels according to the pending memory of the 2nd special figure image) can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-55 (D), in the image display device 5 in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2 (BATTLE RUSH described later), as a background image of the image display device 5 An image of the city at night (second background image) is displayed.

FIG. 284-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing section 130SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 284-3 is an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 284-3, the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern (variable display time) such as a pattern. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that designates a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 284-4(A), the determination result (predetermined result ), and different EXT data are set according to the determination result (jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 284-4(A), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit B". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "no time saving" and the type of no time saving is "no time saving A". The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determination result that the variable display result is "with time saving" and the type of time saving is "with time saving B".

The command 8FXXH is a pattern confirmation command that designates stoppage (confirmation) of variable display of decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . Also, the design determination command is also a production control command that designates the design determination period until the start of the next variable display. In the design determination command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the design determination period.

As shown in FIG. 284-4(B), as a specific example, the command 8F00H is a first design confirmation command designating that the design confirmation period is the first design confirmation period (0.5 seconds). , command 8F01H is a second symbol confirmation command that designates that the symbol confirmation period is the second symbol confirmation period (6 seconds), and command 8F02H is the symbol confirmation period that is the third symbol confirmation period (20 seconds). Command 8F03H is a fourth symbol determination command that specifies that the symbol determination period is the fourth symbol determination period (81.4 seconds).

Command 91XXH is a recovery time ceiling time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that converts the value of the ceiling variable display counter into hexadecimal and designates it when power is restored. In the restoration ceiling time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3rd digit), different EXT data is set.

In the restoration time ceiling time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. is a command. Commands 9110H to 911FH are restoration time ceiling time reduction number 2 designation commands that designate the second digit of the value of the ceiling variable display counter. Commands 9130H to 913FH are restoration time ceiling time reduction number 3 designation commands that designate the third digit of the value of the ceiling variable display counter.

Command 94XXH is a ceiling time saving number designation command, and is an effect control command that specifies the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the ceiling time saving (time saving state B) is reached. In the ceiling time-saving number of times designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. .

In the ceiling time saving number designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 284-4 (D), the command 9400H is a ceiling time saving number A designation command that specifies that the ceiling time saving has been reached. Command 9401H is a ceiling time saving number B specification command that specifies that the remaining 1 to 125 times until reaching the ceiling time saving. Command 947EH is a ceiling time saving frequency C designation command that specifies that the remaining 126 times until reaching the ceiling time saving. Command 947FH is a ceiling time saving frequency D specification command that specifies that the remaining 127 times or more until reaching the ceiling time saving.

The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 284-4 (E), as a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed. Command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state A1) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure once after the end of the jackpot A jackpot game. . Command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state A3) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot B jackpot game is. Command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state A2) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to seven times after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C. is. Command 9504H is the fifth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time reduction state A3) in which time reduction control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times after the end of the jackpot D jackpot game. is. The command 9505H is a time saving control in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times by executing the variable display 685 times after any one of the jackpot games or after the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started. is performed is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high base state, time saving state B). Command 9506H is a game state (high base It is a seventh game state designation command corresponding to the state, time saving state C1). Command 9507H is a game state in which time saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special figure up to 685 times because the variable display result is "with time saving" and the type of time saving is "with time saving B". It is the eighth game state designation command corresponding to the high base state and the time saving state C2).

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the large winning opening to notify that the large winning opening changes from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state or the small winning game state. The command A3XXH is a winning end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big winning game state or the small winning game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big winning game state or the small winning game state (for example, "1" to "10"). be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second starting opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the pending storage display area 130SG005D or the like. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the number of special figure pending storage in the pending storage display area 130SG005D or the like. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command designating the winning determination result at the start winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command for designating the variable category of the winning determination result at the start winning.

The command D100H is a V prize notification specifying command for notifying that the second count switch 130SG024 has been turned on by passing the game ball through the second count switch 130SG024. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special figure time saving frequency notification command for notifying the remaining time saving control frequency of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a number-of-prize-balls notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (given) when a game ball enters the winning hole.

FIG. 284-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 284-5, in this characteristic portion 130SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR2 for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR3, the random number MR4 for judging the results of the display of the normal figure, the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4, and the random number MR6 for judging the difference type with time saving are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

FIG. 284-6 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 130SG. In this characteristic portion 130SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for cases such as when the display result is a "big hit", when the variable display result is a "small hit", and when the variable display result is a "loss with time reduction". . In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss with time reduction" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "loss variation pattern with non-reach time reduction"). Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss with time reduction" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "loss variation pattern with time reduction with reach"). be.

Of these variation patterns, the variation pattern of the big hit is uniformly displayed for 15 seconds to perform a blessing performance for congratulating that the variable display result is a big hit after the same special variation time as the losing variation pattern. Additional time is provided.

Here, for the jackpot variation pattern and the losing variation pattern in this characteristic portion 130SG, the period until the variable display result is notified is configured in common, and the length of the period until the variable display result is notified This prevents the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a big win or a loss.

In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern in this characteristic part 130SG, a form in which a special figure variation time of 15 seconds for executing the blessing effect after the same special figure variation time as the loss variation pattern is additionally provided is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure variation time for executing the blessing performance provided in the big hit variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds and may differ according to the game state. For example, for the jackpot variation pattern selected in the normal state, the time saving state A1, and the time saving state C1, a special figure variation time of 15 seconds is additionally provided in order to execute the blessing production, but mainly the time saving state during the continuous house In the jackpot variation pattern selected in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3, a special figure variation time shorter than 15 seconds may be additionally provided as a special figure variation time for executing the blessing performance. Furthermore, for the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2 that may not have passed through the first hit, by additionally providing a special figure fluctuation time of 15 seconds to execute the blessing effect, It is also possible to clearly notify that the display result is a big hit to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-6(A) and 284-6(B), in this characterizing portion 130SG, a plurality of different variation patterns are provided in advance according to the special symbol for executing variable display.

As shown in FIG. 284-6 (A), as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the super reach α, and the super reach. There are a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect such as β and super reach γ is executed, and a non-reach variation pattern in which no reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Moreover, even in the super reach fluctuation pattern, four or more super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In addition, in the super reach α fluctuation pattern in the first special pattern, after the reach production of super reach α, the variable display result will be lost with time reduction (with time reduction A). It also contains the variation pattern to execute. That is, the variation patterns for executing the reach performance of super reach α and the time saving chance performance include a variation pattern in which the variable display result is lost and a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss with time saving. Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern of the first special symbol includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a time-saving loss (time-saving loss B).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-6 (B), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the characteristic portion 130SG, the variation pattern of the big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol as the deviation variation pattern. Non-reach fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern with different special figure fluctuation time (normal reach fluctuation pattern in which reach production of normal reach is executed and super reach δ fluctuation pattern in which reach production of super reach δ is executed) are provided It is It should be noted that each variation pattern of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach δ of the second special symbol also includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is not with time saving.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 130SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is first determined, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table (see FIGS. 284-20 to 284-25) storing a plurality of variation patterns, etc. are stored.

The judgment table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 284-7(A), a display result judgment table 2 shown in FIG. Type determination table (for first special symbol), big hit type determination table (for second special symbol) shown in FIG. 284-7 (D), small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 284-7 (E), FIG. In addition to the time-saving loss type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in 7 (F) and the time-saving loss type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 284-7 (G), various first special figures For variation pattern determination table (see Figure 284-20, Figure 284-21), variation pattern determination table for various second special figures (see Figures 284-22 to 284-25), normal figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ), etc., are included.

FIGS. 284-7(A) and 284-7(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table 1 and the display result determination table 2. FIG. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the display result determination table 1, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing special symbol normal processing as a value for designating a special symbol for executing variable display) is 1 (first). , When the first special symbol is the object of variable display, a determination value for a big hit, a determination value for a small hit, and a determination value for a loss with time reduction are set. In the display result determination table 2, the variable display special symbol designation buffer (value set by the CPU 103 when executing special symbol normal processing as a value for designating a special symbol for executing variable display) is 2 (second). , When the second special symbol is to be variably displayed, a determination value for a big hit, a determination value for a small hit, and a determination value for a loss with time reduction are set.

As shown in FIG. 284-7 (A), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit and the judgment value corresponding to the loss with time reduction are set, but the small A determination value corresponding to a win is not set, and therefore, when the first special pattern is subject to variable display, a big win and a loss with time reduction can be won, and a small win does not occur. . Incidentally, when the variable display special figure designating buffer is the first, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/200, and the winning probability of losing with time saving is about 1/329.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-7 (B), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the determination value corresponding to the loss with time reduction, and the small hit A judgment value is set. In addition, when the variable display special figure designating buffer is the second, the winning probability of the big win is about 1/200, the winning probability of the time-saving exception is 1/100, and the winning probability of the small win is about 1/7. is.

In other words, when the variable display special symbol designating buffer is the first (when the special symbol for variable display is the first special symbol), the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIG. 284-7 (A). If it matches any of the hit determination values, it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit (jackpot A or jackpot B), and the value of MR1 is any corresponding to the loss with time reduction shown in FIG. 284-7 (A) If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined that the variable display result is to be a time-saving loss (time-saving loss A or time-saving loss B). In addition, when the variable display special symbol designating buffer is the second (when the special symbol for variable display is the second special symbol), the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIG. 284-7 (B). If it matches any of the hit determination values, it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit (big hit A or big hit B), and the value of MR1 is any corresponding to the loss with time reduction shown in FIG. 284-7 (B) When it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the variable display result is out with time saving (out with time saving A or out with time saving B), and the value of MR1 is a small hit shown in FIG. 284-7 (B) When matching any of the corresponding hit determination values, it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit.

In addition, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 284-7 (A) and 284-7 (B) is the probability of a big hit (percentage), the probability of a small hit (percentage), the probability of losing time with a short time (percentage) indicate. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state. It is also about deciding whether or not. Similarly, determining whether or not to remove the time saving means to determine whether to control to one of the time saving states (time saving state C1 or time saving state C2), but the first special symbol display It is also determined whether or not the stop symbol in the device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B should be a lost symbol with time reduction.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. Although it is determined whether or not to play, a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a time saving loss determination table are provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is made regardless of the variable display special figure designation buffer. A common table is used for the case of variable display of the pattern and the case of the variable display of the second special pattern, and the determination of the small hit and the loss with the time saving is performed separately according to the variable display special figure designation buffer. table may be used.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the first, the determination value other than the determination value corresponding to the big hit is not set as the determination value corresponding to the small hit, that is, the small hit is Although it is designed not to win, a part of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to the big win may be set as the judgment value corresponding to the small win so that the small win can be won.

Figure 284-7 (C) and Figure 284-7 (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101 is. Of these, FIG. 284-7 (C) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) This is a table for when In addition, FIG. 284-7 (D) determines the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the type of jackpot to be jackpot A or jackpot B based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result should be a jackpot pattern. It is a referenced table. In addition, in this characterizing portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-7 (C) and (D), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) is provided with only one kind of big hit B. That is, the big win that occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of the two types of big wins, namely, the big win A and the big win B, while when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Only the big win B is generated as the big win.

Figure 284-7 (E) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM101. In the small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small win pattern, the type of the small win is set to a small win A or a small win B based on the random number (MR2) for judging the type of the small win. This table is referenced to determine In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, when the game ball passes the second count switch 130SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning A, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game of the big winning C is executed. When the game ball passes the second count switch 130SG024 during the small winning game of the small winning B, that is, when the V winning big winning occurs, the big winning game with the big winning D as the big winning type is executed. It is designed to be In other words, these big wins C and D are not the big win types determined by the random number MR2 for judging the winning types extracted at the time of starting winning, but the game balls during any of the small wins A and B. is the jackpot type determined by passing through the second count switch 130SG024.

Figures 284-7 (F) and 284-7 (G) are stored in the ROM 101 with time saving loss type determination table (first special symbol), time saving loss type determination table (second special symbol ) is an explanatory view showing the . Among these, FIG. 284-7 (F) uses the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) loss type with time reduction is a table for determining In addition, FIG. 284-7 (G) uses the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) time-saving loss type It is a table when deciding.

In the time-saving loss type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving loss pattern, the type of time-saving loss is determined based on the random number (MR6) for determining the time-saving loss type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine loss A or loss B with time saving. In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-7 (F) and (G), the time-saving loss type determination table (for the first special symbol) includes time-saving loss A and time-saving loss B. While two types of time-saving loss are provided, only one type of time-saving loss B is provided in the time-saving loss type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, as the time saving loss that occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, one of the two types of time saving loss A and time saving loss B, while the second special symbol Only time saving failure B occurs when the variable display is performed.

Here, when the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 130SG is described with reference to FIG. 284-8 (A), in the present characteristic portion 130SG, as the jackpot type, the time saving control is executed after the jackpot game state is finished. ~ Jackpot D is set.

Of these jackpots A to D, jackpot A is a jackpot in which three rounds (so-called three rounds) of changing the jackpot to a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot A is over, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed once, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed up to five times. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state A1 until the game is executed.

The big win B is a big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the jackpot game state of the jackpot B is finished, the special game is executed up to 685 times with the variable display of the second special pattern, or the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is executed. A maximum of 689 times for the variable display of Time saving control is performed as time saving state A3 until a special figure game is performed.

The big win C is a big win in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeated. Further, after the jackpot game state of the jackpot C is completed, until the special game is executed a maximum of seven times with the variable display of the second special pattern as the object, or until the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are executed. The time saving control is executed as the time saving state A2 until a total of 11 special game games are executed targeting the variable display of .

The big win D is a big win in which 9 rounds (so-called 9 rounds) of changing the big winning hole to the second state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. Further, after the jackpot game state of the jackpot D is completed, the special game is executed a maximum of 685 times with the variable display of the second special pattern, or the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is executed. A maximum of 689 times for the variable display of (substantially 685 times when the variable display of the first special symbol and the number of variable display of the second special symbol reaches a total of 685 times and is controlled to the time saving state B) Time saving control is performed as time saving state A3 until a special figure game is performed.

It should be noted that, in each time-saving state, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by increasing the probability of becoming a "per normal game", that is, the second start winning Since it becomes easy to perform the variable display of a 2nd special design when it generate|occur|produces, it becomes easy to generate a small hit rather than a normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the time saving state ends, when a big hit occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and when the game ball is playing a small hit Since there is a case where a big hit is generated by winning a V prize at the time, a so-called continuous game state in which a big win game state is likely to occur continuously occurs.

In addition, in the time saving state A1 after the big hit game of the big hit A, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control for the second special symbol is executed is set to one time, so the second special Either the variable display of the pattern or the variable display of the second special pattern based on a maximum of four reserved memories occurring during the one-time variable display of the second special pattern results in a big hit or a small hit. (the sum of the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol five times in total and the ratio of the occurrence of a big hit when the game ball wins V) is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time saving state after the jackpot game of the jackpot C, since the number of special symbols games in which the time saving control is executed for the second special symbols is set to 7 times, the 7 times of the second special symbols or variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories occurring during the seven times of variable display of the second special symbol, the result of the variable display becomes a big hit or a small hit. The ratio (total ratio of occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol for a total of 11 times and the ratio of a game ball winning a V prize and a big hit) is set to about 83%.

In addition, in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot B or jackpot D jackpot game ends, the number of special figure games in which the time saving control is executed for the second special symbol is set to 685 times. Either the variable display of the second special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol based on a maximum of four reserved memories occurring during the variable display of the second special symbol 685 times, the variable display result is a big hit or The ratio of small hits (the sum of the ratio of occurrence of big hits or small wins in the variable display of the second special symbols for the above total of 685 times and the ratio of occurrence of big wins due to the game ball winning V) is set to approximately 100%. ing.

In addition, four types of jackpot A to jackpot D are provided as the jackpot types in the present characteristic portion 130SG, but the present invention is not limited to this, and five or more jackpot types may be provided, Also, three or less types may be provided.

284-8 (B) will be described with respect to the time-saving loss type in the present characteristic portion 130SG. In the present characteristic portion 130SG, as the time-saving loss type, time-saving loss A and time-saving loss B are set. ing.

Time-saving loss A is for the variable display of the second special symbol once, and for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, a maximum of 5 special symbols games are executed. Time saving control is performed as time saving state C1.

Time-saving loss A is for the variable display of the second special symbol once, and for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, a maximum of 5 special symbols games are executed. Time saving control is performed as time saving state C1.

Time saving loss B is a maximum of 685 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, and a maximum of 689 times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol When the variable display count of the display and the second special symbol reaches a total of 685 times and is controlled to the time saving state B, the time saving control is executed as the time saving state C2 until the special game is executed (actually 685 times). .

That is, as shown in FIG. 284-9 (A), in the present characteristic portion 130SG, as the time saving state, a time saving state A1, a time saving state A2, and a time saving state A3 that are controlled after the end of the jackpot game are provided. The time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 are ended by being controlled to the jackpot game state or by executing the variable display of the number of times corresponding to each time saving state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as a time saving state, a time saving state B that is controlled according to the fact that the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached 685 times since the RAM is cleared or the jackpot game is completed. The time saving state B is ended by being controlled to a jackpot game state or by executing 685 times of variable display. In addition, when the variable display is executed 685 times in the time saving state B and the game state is controlled from the time saving state B to the normal state, it is newly controlled to the jackpot game state or until the RAM is cleared. It will not be controlled to the time saving state B again.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as the time saving state, a time saving state C1 controlled when the variable display result is with time saving and the type of time saving is not with time saving A and the variable display result is with time saving There is provided a time saving state C2 that is controlled when it is lost and the time saving loss type is time saving loss B, and these time saving state C1 and time saving state C2 are controlled to the big hit game state, The total number of variable display times of the first special pattern and the second special pattern reaches 685 times (start condition of time saving state B is satisfied), or the number of times of variable display corresponding to each time saving state is executed. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-9 (B), the details will be described later, but when the game state is the normal state, the start condition of the time saving state B (the first special symbol after clearing the RAM or finishing the jackpot game 685 times of variable display with the second special symbol) is established, the time saving control of the time saving state B is executed from the next variable display, and the variable display result becomes the time saving attached deviation A , the time saving control of the time saving state C1 is executed from the next variable display, and when the variable display result is the time saving missing B, the time saving control of the time saving state C2 is executed from the next variable display.

Also, when the game state is one of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, the starting condition of the time saving state B (after clearing the RAM or finishing the big hit game, the first special symbol and the second special symbol 685 times of variable display is executed) is established, the time saving control of the time saving state B is executed from the next variable display, and if the variable display result becomes time saving missing A or time saving missing B , While maintaining the controlled time saving state (any of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3), time saving control in time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 Manage the remaining variable display count Separately from the counter (total time saving number counter α and second special figure time saving number counter α to be described later) to perform time saving control in the time saving state C1 and the time saving state C2 A counter for managing the remaining variable display number of times (to be described later Start the operation of the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β). Then, when the time saving state controlled by the execution of the variable display (either of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, or the time saving state A3) ends (the total time saving number counter α or the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α is 0), if the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β are still in operation, the finished time saving state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 either ), the time saving control in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is started.

In addition, in this feature part 130SG, when the start condition of the time saving state is satisfied during the execution of any of the time saving state, the operation of the counter corresponding to the time saving state in which the start condition is satisfied is started (the start condition is satisfied Setting a value corresponding to the time saving state to the counter corresponding to the time saving state) may be referred to as "overlapping the time saving state" or simply "overlapping".

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state B, if the variable display result becomes the time saving loss A or the time saving loss B, while maintaining the controlled time saving state (time saving state B), the time saving state Separately from the counter for managing the remaining variable display count to perform time saving control in B (total time saving number counter α and second special figure time saving number counter α described later) Time saving state C1, time saving control in time saving state C2 remaining The operation of the counter for managing the variable display count (total time saving counter β and second special figure time saving counter β described later) is started. Then, when the time saving state (time saving state B) controlled by the execution of the variable display ends (when the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special figure time saving number counter α becomes 0), the total time saving If the number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β are still in operation, the time saving control in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is started instead of the finished time saving state (time saving state B).

In addition, when the game state is the time saving state C1, the start condition of the time saving state B (the variable display is executed 685 times with the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the RAM is cleared or the jackpot game ends) If is established, switching from the time saving state C1 to the time saving state B is executed, and if the variable display result becomes the time saving loss A or the time saving loss B, the time saving control in the time saving state C1 and the time saving state C2 is performed. By setting a value corresponding to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 to the counter (total time saving number counter β and second special figure time saving number counter β) for managing the remaining variable display count to be performed, the time saving state is set Overlap.

Also, when the game state is the time saving state C2, the start condition of the time saving state B (the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been executed 685 times after the RAM is cleared or the jackpot game is finished) is established, switching from the time saving state C2 to the time saving state B is executed, and if the variable display result becomes the time saving deviation A, the second special figure time saving counter β at that time is set The value is compared with the value of "1 time" which is the number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state C1, and the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β which is a larger value in the comparison is the second special figure time saving It is set in the number counter β. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a loss with time saving B, the value set in the second special time saving number counter β at that time is the time saving number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state C2 "685 times” value, and the larger value “685” in the comparison is set to the second special-figure time-saving counter β. That is, "685" is reset to the second special figure time saving number counter β.

As described above, the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed in the normal state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in each time saving state, basically as shown in FIG. 284-10. transitions. Furthermore, even in the time saving state, if the variable display result of the first special symbol instead of the second special symbol results in a time saving loss A or a time saving loss B, as shown in FIG. 284-11. Game state transitions.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 284-2 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the contents of part or all of the RAM 102 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). be. In particular, at least data (such as a special process flag) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the game is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

The RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 130SG150 as shown in FIG. It is The game control data holding area 130SG150 shown in FIG. 284-12 includes a special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151, a general figure reservation storage unit 130SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 130SG152, a game control timer setting unit 130SG153, and a game control counter. A setting unit 130SG154 and a game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 are provided.

The special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 is a special figure game that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A and the start prize (first start prize) has occurred. (Special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) Suspended data and the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B Start winning Suspension data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) which has occurred (second start winning) but has not yet started is stored in the order of winning.

As an example, the special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 is associated with the reservation number in the winning order of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the start opening buffer value, the passage of the game ball Random number MR1 for variable display result determination, random number MR2 for hit type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition in (approach). is stored as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "8"). The number of pending data stored according to the winning in the first starting winning opening and the number of pending data stored according to winning in the second starting winning opening are four at maximum.

The suspension data stored in the special figure suspension storage unit 130SG151 in this way indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure or the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and these special figures It becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the variable display result (special figure display result) in the game.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in an individual suspension storage unit. Furthermore, in this way, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing through the second starting winning hole ( In the case of storing the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by entering) in association with the hold number in a separate hold storage unit, variable based on the first hold information One of the display and the variable display based on the second reserved storage information may be executed with priority over the variable display based on the other reserved information.

The normal pattern pending storage unit 130SG151C stores the pending information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 130SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it was detected by the gate switch 21, and the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 130SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 130SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 130SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 130SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 130SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 130SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 130SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 130SG154, random numbers that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR4 and MR6 are stored as random count values, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Accordingly, numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 284-2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the production operation in addition to the production control program. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns, and the like. there is

As an example, in the ROM 121, the production control CPU 120 controls production operations by various production devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, the decorative LED, the production model, etc.). A production control pattern table storing a plurality of types of production control patterns to be used is stored. The performance control pattern corresponds to various performance operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is composed of data indicating the content of the control. The effect control pattern table may store, for example, a special figure variable display time effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, various effect control patterns, and the like.

The effect control pattern at the time of special figure variable display corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation display of the fixed special symbol that is the result of the special figure display. , such as the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, the reach performance, the effect display operation in the re-lottery effect, etc., or the various effect display operations without the variable display of the decorative pattern, etc. It is configured. The notice effect control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control contents of the effect operation to be the notice effect executed corresponding to the notice patterns for which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. Various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations to be executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

The special figure variable display performance control patterns may include a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance control patterns in which the performance mode in each ready-to-win performance is different for each variation pattern for executing the ready-to-win performance, for example.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 130SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 130SG190 shown in FIG. 284-13 (A) includes a effect control flag setting portion 130SG191, a effect control timer setting portion 130SG192, a effect control counter setting portion 130SG193, and a effect control buffer setting portion 130SG194. I have it.

The effect control flag setting unit 130SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 130SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 130SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 130SG192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 130SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 130SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 130SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 130SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 130SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1" to " 8") and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command and number of reserved memories Three commands called notification commands (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A, these start winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variation category designation commands, and pending storage number notification commands are associated with each other, and the first special figure pending storage and the second special A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the data separately from the reserved storage of the drawing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted upward one by one as will be described later, when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1") is started. In addition, the memory contents of the buffer number "0" storing the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is satisfied are cleared in the decoration symbol variation stop processing executed when the variable display is ended. ing.

Furthermore, in the start winning command buffer 130SG194A of the characteristic part 130SG, in the later-described pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 284-42), a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of the pending display or the active display is set. and the panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the panel corresponding to the variable display and the panel corresponding to the second special figure pending storage displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1. and are reserved for each buffer number.

At the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 stores commands from the top (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry of the start winning receive command buffer 130SG194A. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, in the storage area corresponding to the end of the buffer number corresponding to the reserved storage, the starting entrance winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variation category designation command, and the reserved storage number notification command are stored in this order. It will be done.

284-13(B), the command stored in the start winning command buffer 130SG194A is an entry (buffer number "0") is deleted, and what is stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1") and the start The storage contents of the entries following the pending storage of the variable representation to be displayed are shifted. For example, when the variable display of decorative patterns is completed in the storage state shown in FIG. Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "3". , "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it is determined whether or not the start winning prize designation command, the symbol designation command, and the reserved storage number notification command are received. If the command is received, these commands may be stored at the beginning of the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A as the reserved storage of each special figure.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 130SG will be described. Figure 284-14 is a flow chart showing the game control main process shown in Figure 277 .

In the game control main processing in the characteristic portion 130SG, when the processing of step S7 is executed, the CPU 103 specifies the value of the variable display counter described later from the restored information, and recovers according to the value of the specified variable display counter. Transmit the time ceiling time reduction number designation command and the ceiling time reduction number designation command (step 130SGS007a, step 130SGS007b), and proceed to step S10. In addition, when the CPU 103 executes the process of step S9, it sets the value of the ceiling variable display counter to 685, and transmits a restoration time ceiling time reduction number designation command according to the value of the ceiling variable display counter (685). (Step 130SGS009a, Step 130SGS009b) and proceed to Step S10.

FIG. 284-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol process processing in this characterizing section 130SG. In the special symbol process processing in this characterizing portion 130SG, the special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss with time saving" or not, or "big hit" is determined based on the random number value for determining the display result. Determine (predetermine) before the display result is derived and displayed . Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, a lost symbol with time reduction, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. be. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning hole and the second starting winning hole is stored, and the start condition of the special game is established in the order of winning (also known as the order of winning). Say).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a random value for determining the variation pattern is set based on the result of pre-determination of whether the display result is "big hit", "small hit", "loss with time saving", or "loss". It includes a process of determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns using In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It designates the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "loss" or "loss with time saving", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small win" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this jackpot opening processing, a processing for measuring the elapsed time from opening the jackpot, and based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 130SGS023, etc. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this small winning opening process, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 130SGS023. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the large winning opening from an open state to a closed state, a process of determining whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second count switch 130SGS024, and the like. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit game state ends, if the game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SGS024, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" and the small hit process ends. Further, when the small winning game state ends, if the game ball is not detected by the second count switch 130SGS024, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

FIG. 284-16 is a flow chart showing the start prize determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the starting winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. (130SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (130SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (130SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 130SG154, it should have specified the number of 1st special figure reservation memory. 130SGS102 when the first special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value (130SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 is set to "1" (130SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at 130SGS101 (130SGS101; N), and when the number of first special figure reserved storage has reached the upper limit at 130SGS102 (130SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by , it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is on (130SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (130SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not "4" as the upper limit storage number is reached (130SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 130SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In 130SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (130SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 is set to "2" (130SGS106). .

After executing either of the processes of 130SGS103 and 130SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (130SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (130SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 130SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the processing of 130SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the hit type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 130SG154. Random number MR2, random number MR3 for determining variation pattern, and random number MR6 for determining loss type with time reduction are extracted (130SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way and the starting port buffer value are stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit (130SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of hit determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit". is used to determine the big hit type/small hit type when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The random value MR6 for judging the type of loss with time reduction is used to determine the type of loss with time reduction when the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is "loss with time reduction". By executing the process of 130SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of 130SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (130SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After the process of 130SGS111, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (130SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (130SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. be done.

After executing the process of 130SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start buffer value is "1" (130SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (Y at 130SGS114), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (130SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (N at 130SGS114), the start buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (130SGS116), and then the start winning process is executed. finish. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 284-40(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed by 130SGS 112 in FIG. 284-39 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 130SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is displayed by the special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIG. 279 and FIG. 284-15). Whether to control to the big hit game state as "big hit", whether to control to the small hit game state as "small hit", and whether to control to any time saving state as "time saving loss" done. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (FIGS. 279, S111 in FIGS. 284-15, and FIG. 284-19), the determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not it is determined to derive and display a big hit pattern, a small hit pattern, and a lost pattern with time saving as a special figure display result. Thus, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, whether or not a big win or a small win is determined. Whether or not, it is determined that the special figure display result will be "big hit", "small hit", "loss with time reduction" before it is determined whether or not it is lost with time reduction, and the result of this determination Based on this, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice such as a panel display effect, a pending notice effect, or the like, as will be described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 284-17, the CPU 103 first identifies whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (step 130SGS121). Then, it is determined whether or not the set starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS122a). If the start buffer value is 1, select the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. The display result determination table 2 shown in 284-7(B) is selected, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS123a (step 130SGS122c).

At step 130SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 extracted at step 130SGS109 with the selected display result determination table, and determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. If the random number MR1 is outside the big hit determination range, it is determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination range (step 130SGS123b). If the random number MR1 is out of the small hit determination range, it is further determined whether or not the random number MR1 is within the time saving loss determination range (step 130SGS123c).

When the random number MR1 is within the time saving loss judgment range, transmission setting of a symbol designation command corresponding to the time saving loss is performed (step 130SGS124). Then, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS125a). If the start buffer value is 1, select the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. If there is, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 284-24 (D) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS125c).

In step 130SGS123c, when the random value MR1 is out of the range of loss judgment value with time saving, that is, when the variable display result is a loss, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the loss (step 130SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS126b). If the starting port buffer value is 1, if the game state is a normal state, select the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. If so, select the first special figure variation pattern determination table G, and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS126c).

Also, if the starting port buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. If it is state A2 or time saving state A3, the second special figure variation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. Select the second special figure variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 284-24 (A), and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS126d).

Further, in step 130SGS123b, when the random number MR1 is within the small hit determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 130SGS127). And, when the game state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, the second special figure variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. Figure 284-23 (C) for the second special figure variation pattern determination table G, the gaming state is normal state, time saving state B, time saving state C2 if any of the second shown in Figure 284-24 (C) 2 Select the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table K and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS128).

Further, in step 130SGS123a, when the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 130SGS129). Then, it is determined whether or not the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS130a). If the starting port buffer value is 1, if the gaming state is the normal state, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. In that case, select the first special figure variation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-21 (B) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (130SGS130b).

Also, if the starting port buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the normal state, if the gaming state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, the second special figure variation shown in FIG. 284-22 (B) Pattern determination table B, when the game state is the time saving state A2 or time saving state A3, the second special figure variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 284-23 (B), the game state is the normal state, time saving state B, time saving If it is either state C2, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG. 284-24 (B) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS130c).

At step 130SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected variation pattern determination table with the random number MR3 extracted at step 130SGS109, and determines the variation category from non-reach, super reach, and others (normal reach). Then, transmission setting of the variable category designation command (any one shown in FIG. 284-17(B)) according to the determination result is performed, and the random value determination process at the time of winning is completed (step 130SGS132).

In addition, the commands set for transmission in steps 130SGS124, 130SGS126a, 130SGS127, 130SGS129, and 130SGS132 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in FIG.

Figure 284-18 is a flow chart showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) shown in Figure 284-15. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a pending memory in the special symbol pending storage unit 130SGS151 (step 130SGS541). When there is no reservation memory in the special figure reservation storage unit 130SGS151, the demonstration display setting is performed and the special design normal processing is terminated (step 130SGS572). Also, if there is a pending memory in the special figure pending storage unit 130SGS151, read and specify the starting port buffer value, the random number MR1 to MR3, MR6 from the pending number "1" of the special figure pending storage unit 130SGS151 (step 130SGS542) . In addition, the value of the special figure reservation memory number and the total reservation memory number for variable display is reduced by -1, and the storage contents of the special figure reservation storage unit 130SGS151 are shifted (step 130SGS543).

Also, it is determined whether or not the startup buffer value specified in step 130SGS542 is 1 (step 130SGS554a). If the starting mouth buffer value is 1, set the variable display special figure designation buffer value to 1 (step 130SGS544b), if the starting mouth buffer value is 2, if the starting mouth buffer value is 2, Set the variable display special figure designation buffer value to 2 (step 130SGS544c).

Then, the display result determination table corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer value is set (step 130SGS555). Then, the random number MR1 read at step 130SGS542 is compared with the display result determination table set at step 130SGS555 to determine whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 130SGS556). If the value of the random number MR1 is out of the big hit range, it is further determined whether or not the random number MR1 is in the small hit range (step 130SGS557). If the value of the random number MR1 is within the small hit range, that is, if the variable display result is a small hit, a small hit flag is set (step 130SGS588). Then, select the small hit type determination table (see FIG. 284-7 (E)) (step 130SGS588a), small hit by comparing the selected small hit type determination table and the random number MR2 read in step 130SGS542 Determine the type (step 130SGS588b). Then, set a small hit type buffer value corresponding to the determined small hit type, and proceed to step 130SGS564 (step 130SGS588c).

Further, when the value of the random number MR1 is out of the small hit range, it is further determined whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of time reduction with loss (step 130SGS559). If the value of the random number MR1 is out of the range of time saving, that is, if the variable display result is a loss, the process proceeds to step 130SGS564. When the result of the variable display is the missing time saving, the time saving missing flag is set (step 130SGS560). Then, select the time-saving loss type determination table (see Figures 284-7 (F) and Figure 284-7 (G)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer, and the selected time-saving loss type determination table and step By comparing with the random value MR6 read out in 130SGS542, the loss type with time reduction is determined (step 130SGS562). Then, a time-saving loss type buffer value corresponding to the determined time-saving loss type is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS564 (step 130SGS563).

If the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range at step 130SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a jackpot flag is set (step 130SGS566). Then, select the jackpot type determination table (see FIGS. 284-7 (C) and 284-7 (D)) according to the variable display special figure designation buffer (step 130SGS567), the selected jackpot type determination table and step The jackpot type is determined by comparing with the random value MR1 read out at 130SGS542 (step 130SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS570 (step 130SGS569).

At step 130SGS564, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the ceiling reached flag indicating that the control has been performed to the time-saving state B due to the RAM being cleared or the variable display being executed 685 times since the end of the previous jackpot game has already been set. do. When the ceiling reached flag is set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS570, and when the ceiling reached flag is not set, the value of the variable ceiling display counter is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS565), and the value of the variable ceiling display counter is decreased. The transmission setting of the command for specifying the number of times of shortening of working hours according to is performed, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS570 (step 130SGS565a).

It should be noted that the ceiling time-saving number of times designation command set to be transmitted in step 130SGS565a is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG.

At step 130SGS570, the CPU 103 determines a fixed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process, and the special symbol normal process is terminated (step 130SGS571).

FIG. 284-19 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure (step 130SGS131). Whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special figure may be determined by whether or not the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, for example. If it is a variable display of the first special figure, select the variation pattern determination table from the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 284-20 and FIG. 130SGS135 (step 130SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is off, the game state is the normal state, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is 2 or less, select the first special figure variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 284-20 (A) However, if the variable display result is off, the game state is the normal state, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is 3 or more, the first special figure variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 284-20 (B) is selected. Then, if the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is the normal state, select the first special figure variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. If the missing type is time saving missing A and the game state is normal state, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 284-20 (D) is selected, and the variable display result is time saving missing If the time-saving loss type is time-saving loss B, the game state is normal state, and the number of the first special figure pending storage is 2 or less, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 284-20 (E) is selected, and if the variable display result is lost with time saving and the type of time saving is lost B, the game state is normal state, and the number of first special figure pending storage is 3 or more, Figure 284-20 (F ) to select the first special figure variation pattern determination table F shown.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is either the time saving state A to the time saving state C, the first special figure variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 284-21 (A) is selected, and the variable display If the result is a big hit and the game state is one of the time saving state A to the time saving state C, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-21 (B) is selected, and the variable display result is with time saving If the game state is one of the time saving state A to the time saving state C, the first special figure fluctuation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 284-21 (C) is selected.

Also, if the variable display to be executed in step 130SGS131 is the variable display of the second special figure, whether any of the time saving flag is set, that is, any time saving state of time saving state A to time saving state C (step 130SGS133a). If none of the time saving flags are set, that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, proceed to step 130SGS134a, and if any of the time saving flags are set, the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state The value of the time saving state variable display number counter for counting the number of times is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS134a (step 130SGS133b).

In step 130SGS134a, the CPU 103 creates a variation pattern determination table according to the variable display result, the gaming state, the value of the time saving state variable display number counter (the number of variable display times of the second special figure in the time saving state), etc. -25 and proceed to step 130SGS134b (step 130SGS134a).

For example, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 284-22 (A), and the variable display result is a big hit, If the game state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, the second special figure variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 284-22 (B) is selected, the variable display result is a small hit, If it is a time saving state C1, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. Select the second special figure variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 284-22 (D).

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is either the time saving state A3 or the time saving state A2 after the big win B, or the time saving state A3 after the big win D, the 1st to 7th times and the 12th to 685th times, see Figure 284-23. Select the second special figure variation pattern determination table E shown in (A), the variable display result is a big hit, the game state is a time saving state A3 or a time saving state A2 after a big hit B, and a time saving state A3 after a big hit D 1 to 1 If it is one of the 7th and 12th to 685th times, the second special figure variation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. Time saving state A3 or time saving state A2, 1st to 7th time and 12th to 685th time of time saving state A3 after big hit D If any of the second special figure variation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 284-23 (C) is selected, and if the variable display result is off with time saving, the game state is either time saving state A3 after big hit B or time saving state A2, time saving state A3 after big hit D, 1st to 7th and 12th to 685th Select the second special figure variation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-23 (D).

In addition, the variable display result is lost, the game state is the normal state, the 8th to 10th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, the time saving state B, the time saving state C2, the winning notification non-execution flag not set and 2 If it is one of the variable displays after the first time, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. The 8th to 10th variable display in the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, if either the time saving state C2, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG. If the result is a small hit, the game state is the normal state, the 8th to 10th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, the time saving state B, or the time saving state C2, the second shown in FIG. 284-24 (C) 2 Select the special figure variation pattern determination table K, the variable display result is out of time reduction, the 8th to 10th variable display in the time reduction state A3 after the game state is a big hit D, the time reduction state B, or the time reduction state C2 If so, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table L shown in FIG. The second special figure variation pattern determination table M shown is selected, and the variable display result is lost, and when the game state is the time saving state C2, when the winning notification non-execution flag is set, the first variable display in the time saving state C2 If any, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table N shown in FIG. 284-24 (F).

The time-saving loss winning notification non-execution flag is when the variable display result becomes "time-saving loss B" in any of the time-saving state A or time-saving state B variable display, the time-saving state being executed is It is a flag that is set in order to inform that control is again made to the time saving state C2 due to the winning of the "time saving loss B" after the end.

Also, if the variable display result is off and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, select the second special figure variation pattern determination table O shown in FIG. 284-25 (A), If the variable display result is a big hit and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, the second special figure variation pattern determination table P shown in FIG. 284-25 (B) is selected and variable display If the result is a small hit and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, the second special figure fluctuation pattern determination table Q shown in FIG. 284-25 (C) is selected, and the variable display result is off with the time saving, and if the game state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, the second special figure variation pattern determination table R shown in FIG. 284-25 (D) is selected.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-23 to 284-25, whether after the jackpot B or after the jackpot D for the time saving state A3 is specified from the game state designation command stored in the jackpot end processing described later. (see step 130SGS340 in FIG. 284-41).

After the execution of step 130SGS134a, the CPU 103 clears the time saving lost winning notification non-execution flag if it is set, and proceeds to step 130SGS135 (step 130SGS134b).

At step 130SGS135, the CPU 103 compares the variation pattern determination table selected at step 130SGS132 or step 130SGS134b with the random number MR3 read at step 130SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern. Then, along with performing the variable display start setting of the special pattern (step 130SGS136), perform the transmission setting of various commands for starting the variable display such as the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result designation command according to the determined variation pattern ( Step 130SGS137), a variable display time timer is set according to the variation pattern (step 130SGS138). Finally, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process, and the variation pattern setting process is terminated (step 130SGS139). In addition, various commands set for transmission in step 130SGS137 are transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG.

As described above, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 284-26, when the game state is the normal state, if the variable display result is "miss", the special symbol variation time is 12000 ms. is non-reach out (PA1-1), special figure fluctuation time is 5000ms shortened non-reach out (PA1-2), special figure fluctuation time is 20000ms normal reach out (PA2-1), special figure fluctuation time Out of super reach α (PA2-2) which is 43000ms, out of super reach β (PA2-3) with special figure fluctuation time of 53000ms, out of super reach α (PA2-4) with special figure fluctuation time of 53000ms If the variable display result is "big hit", normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) with special figure fluctuation time 20000 + 15000ms, super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) with special figure fluctuation time 43000 + 15000ms , The variation pattern is determined from the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) with a special figure variation time of 53000 + 15000 ms, and if the variable display result is "loss with a short time" Super reach α with a special figure variation time of 55000 ms Time saving out (PA2-6), non-reach time saving out (PA2-7) with special figure fluctuation time of 12000, non-reach time saving out (PA2-8) with special figure fluctuation time of 5000ms determine the pattern.

In addition, for the deviation variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number MR3 is set as shown in Figures 284-20 and 284-21, non-reach variation The pattern is the easiest to determine, and it becomes difficult to determine in the order of the variation patterns of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display in the normal state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number MR3 is set as shown in FIGS. The fluctuation pattern is the easiest to determine, and the fluctuation patterns of super reach α and normal reach are difficult to determine in that order. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in the non-reach variation pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, normal reach, It is set so that the ratio of the variable display result to be a big hit increases in the order of the variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. In other words, the shorter the special figure fluctuation time, the lower the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit, and the longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the ratio of the variable display result to the big hit.

Also, if the gaming state is one of the time saving states, as shown in FIG. ), and if the variable display result is a “jackpot”, the variation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) with a special figure variation time of 50000 + 15000ms is determined, and the variable display result is “with time saving If "off", it is determined to the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach time-saving off (PA2-5) special figure fluctuation time is 500ms.

Also, regarding the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. Determined as a variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA3-1) of 2000 ms, and if the variable display result is "big hit", determined as a variation pattern of non-reach big hit (PB3-1) with special figure variation time of 2000 + 15000 ms Then, if the variable display result is "small hit", the variation pattern of non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "loss with time saving" , Tokuzu fluctuation time is 50000ms non-reach time-saving loss (PA3-9) to determine the fluctuation pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-27 (B), when the gaming state is the time saving state A1, if the variable display result is "missing", the super reach δ with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 ms is lost ( PA3-5) is determined to be the variation pattern, and if the variable display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of super reach δ jackpot (PB3-3) with a special figure variation time of 50000 + 15000ms is determined, and the variable display result is If it is a "small hit", the variation pattern of the super reach δ small hit (PC3-3) with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 + 15000 ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "loss with time saving", special figure fluctuation time is 50,000 ms, and the variation pattern of super reach δ with short time (PA3-8) is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-27 (C), when the gaming state is the time saving state A3 after the big hit B, if the variable display result is "lost", the special figure fluctuation time is 2000 ms. The variation pattern of reach loss (PA3-1) is determined, and if the variable display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of non-reach big hit (PB3-1) with a special figure variation time of 2000 + 15000 ms is determined and variable display. If the result is "small hit", the variation pattern of non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "loss with time saving", special figure fluctuation The fluctuation pattern of non-reach time saving loss (PA3-6) whose time is 2000 ms is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-27 (D), if the gaming state is the 1st to 7th variable display in the time saving state A2, if the variable display result is "off", the special figure fluctuation time The variation pattern is determined from the non-reach loss (PA3-2) of 7000ms and the normal reach loss (PA3-4) of which the special figure variation time is 20000ms, and if the variable display result is "big hit", the special figure variation time is 20000 + 15000ms normal reach big hit (PB3-2) variation pattern, and if the variable display result is "small hit", the variation pattern is normal reach small hit (PC3-2) with special figure fluctuation time 20000 + 15000ms Determined, if the variable display result is "loss with time saving", the variation pattern is determined to normal reach time saving loss (PA3-7) with a special figure variation time of 20000 ms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-27 (E), when the game state is the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, when the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display in the time saving state A3, the variable display If the result is "missing", the variation pattern is determined from the non-reach loss (PA3-2) with special figure fluctuation time 7000ms and the normal reach loss (PA3-4) with special figure fluctuation time 20000ms, variable If the display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB3-2) with special figure variation time of 20000+15000ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "small hit", special figure variation time is 20000+15000ms. If the variation pattern is determined for the normal reach small hit (PC3-2), and if the variable display result is "time saving loss", the special figure fluctuation time is 20000ms Normal reach time saving loss (PA3-7) variation pattern to decide.

Also, when the gaming state is the 8th to 10th variable display in the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "missing", the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA3-1) with a special figure variation time of 2000ms If the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined to be a non-reach big hit (PB3-1) variation pattern with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms, and if the variable display result is "small hit", Determined as a variation pattern of non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special figure variation time of 2000 + 15000ms, and if the variable display result is "loss with time reduction", special figure variation time is 2000ms Non-reach time reduction with loss (PA3-6) is determined as the variation pattern.

Also, when the game state is the 11th variable display in the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "missing", the variation pattern is determined to non-reach loss (PA3-3) with a special figure variation time of 15000 ms Then, if the variable display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of normal reach big hit (PB3-2) with special figure variation time of 20000 + 15000 ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "small hit", special figure variation Determine the variation pattern to the normal reach small hit (PC3-2) with a time of 20000 + 15000ms, and if the variable display result is "time saving loss", normal reach time saving loss with a special figure fluctuation time of 20000ms (PA3-7) to determine the variation pattern.

Then, when the gaming state is the 12th to 685th variable display in the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "missing", the special figure fluctuation time is 7000 ms non-reach loss (PA3-2) and special figure A variation pattern is determined from the normal reach loss (PA3-4) with a variation time of 20000ms, and if the variable display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB3-2) with a special figure variation time of 20000 + 15000ms If the variable display result is "small hit", the variation pattern is determined to normal reach small hit (PC3-2) with a special figure fluctuation time of 20000 + 15000ms, and the variable display result is "missing with time saving" For example, the variation pattern is determined to be off (PA3-7) with normal reach with a short time, which has a special figure variation time of 20000 ms.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-28, when the gaming state is the time saving state B, if the variable display result is "missing", the special figure fluctuation time is 2000ms non-reach loss (PA3-1) If the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined to be a non-reach big hit (PB3-1) variation pattern with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms, and the variable display result is "small hit" If there is, it is determined to be a variation pattern of non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms, and if the variable display result is "loss with time saving", non-reach with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000ms It is determined to be a variation pattern with time saving (PA3-6).

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-29 (A), when the gaming state is the time saving state C1, if the variable display result is "missing", the super reach δ with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 ms is lost ( PA3-5) is determined to be the variation pattern, and if the variable display result is "big hit", the variation pattern of super reach δ jackpot (PB3-3) with a special figure variation time of 50000 + 15000ms is determined, and the variable display result is If it is a "small hit", the variation pattern of the super reach δ small hit (PC3-3) with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 + 15000 ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "loss with time saving", special figure fluctuation time is 50,000 ms, and the variation pattern of super reach δ with short time (PA3-8) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-29 (B), when the gaming state is the time saving state C2, the time saving lost winning notification non-execution flag is set, or the first time variable of the time saving state C2 In the case of display, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA3-10) with a special figure variation time of 30000ms is determined, and the variable display result is "jackpot" For example, the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms is determined, and if the variable display result is a "small hit", the non-reach small hit (PB3-1) with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms PC3-1) is determined to be a variation pattern, and if the variable display result is "time saving loss", the variation pattern of non-reach time saving loss (PA3-6) whose special figure fluctuation time is 2000 ms is determined.

Also, if the gaming state is the 2nd to 685th variable display in the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is "missing", the special figure fluctuation time is 2000ms non-reach out (PA3-1) If the variation pattern is determined and the variable display result is "big hit", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach big hit (PB3-1) with a special figure variation time of 2000 + 15000 ms, and if the variable display result is "small hit" For example, the variation pattern of the non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special figure variation time of 2000 + 15000ms is determined, and if the variable display result is "loss with time saving", the special figure variation time is 2000ms. It is determined to the variation pattern of hit/miss (PA3-6).

Next, the average variable display time of the second special symbol when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, the working time saving state A3, the working time saving state B, the working time saving state C1, and the working time saving state C2 in the present characteristic portion 130SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 284-30 to 284-32.

First, for the case where the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A1, only PA3-5 with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 ms is determined (see FIGS. 284-22 (A) and 284-27 (B) ), the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A1 is 50000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (A).

In addition, when the variable display result for the time saving state A2 becomes blurred, PA3-2 with a special figure fluctuation time of 7000ms has a ratio of 100/997, and PA3-4 with a special figure fluctuation time of 20000ms is 897/ Since it is determined as a variation pattern at a rate of 997 (see FIGS. 284-23 (A) and 284-27 (D)), the average variable display of the second special figure in which the variable display result is out in the time saving state A2 The time is 18696.08825 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(B).

Also, when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A3 after the big hit B, PA3-2 with a special figure fluctuation time of 7000ms has a ratio of 100/997, PA3- with a special figure fluctuation time of 20000ms 4 is determined as a variation pattern at a rate of 897/997 (see FIGS. 284-23 (A) and 284-27 (C)), so the variable display result is out in the time saving state A2. The average variable display time in the figure is 18696.08825 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(C).

Also, if the variable display result is lost for the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, PA3-2 with a special figure fluctuation time of 7000 ms for the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display PA3-4 with a ratio of 100/997 and a special figure fluctuation time of 20000 ms is determined as a fluctuation pattern at a ratio of 897/997 (see FIGS. 284-23 (A) and 284-27 (E)) , The average variable display time of the second special figure for the 1st to 7th times and 12th to 685th times when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D is 18696. 08825 ms. Furthermore, for the 5th to 8th variable display, only PA3-6 with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 ms is determined as a fluctuation pattern (see FIGS. 284-24 (A) and 284-27 (E)), In the time saving state A3 after the big hit D, the average variable display time of the 8th to 10th second special figure when the variable display result is lost is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (D). Then, for the 11th variable display, only PA3-3 with a special figure fluctuation time of 15000 ms is determined as a fluctuation pattern (see FIGS. 284-25 (A) and 284-27 (E)), so a big hit In the time saving state A3 after D, the average variable display time of the 11th second special figure in which the variable display result is lost is 15000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (D). From the above, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A3 after the big hit D is 18617.57093 ms.

Then, based on the numerical values calculated in these Figures 284-30 (C) and Figure 284-30 (D) Calculate the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is lost in the entire time saving state A3 Then, it becomes 18656.82959 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(E).

From the above, the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A1 to time saving state A3 is 22904.91502 ms by the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (F).

In addition, the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A3 calculated in FIG. 284-30 (D) It is a value when the variable display is executed 685 times without being won in either and the time saving state A3 is completed without being controlled by the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. In consideration of the case of winning one of the big hit, small hit, and loss with time saving during the time saving state A3, and the case of being controlled to the time saving state B during the time saving state A3, the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A3. You may calculate the average variable display time of the second special figure in the case of.

Also, for the case where the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B, only PA3-1 with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 ms is determined (see FIGS. 284-24 (A) and 284-28), so The average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-31.

Also, if the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C1, only PA3-5 with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 ms is determined (see FIGS. 284-22 (A) and 284-29 (A) ), the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C1 is 50000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-32 (A).

Also, if the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C2, for the first variable display, only PA3-10, which has a special figure variation time of 30000 ms, is determined as the variation pattern (Figure 284-24 ( F) and Figure 284-29 (B)), the average variable display time of the first second special figure in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C2 is 30000 ms according to the formula shown in Figure 284-32 (B) Become. Then, for the 2nd ~ 685th variable display, only PA3-1 special figure variation time is 2000ms is determined as a variation pattern (see Figure 284-24 (A) and Figure 284-29 (B)), The average variable display time of the second special figure of the 2nd to 685th time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C2 is 2000ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-32 (B). From the above, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C2 is 2040.875912 ms.

Then, based on the numerical values calculated in FIGS. 284-32 (A) and 284-32 (B), the average variable of the second special figure when the variable display result is out in the entire time saving state C1 and time saving state C2 When the display time is calculated, it is 20620.43795 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-32(C).

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 284-30 to 284-32, in this characteristic portion 130SG, when comparing the overall time saving state B and the overall time saving state C, the time saving state C is more variable display result than the time saving state B The average variable display time of the variable display of the second special figure is set long. In addition, when the time saving state B and the time saving state C1 are compared, the average variable display time of the variable display of the second special figure in which the variable display result is different is set longer in the time saving state C1 than in the time saving state B. Furthermore, when comparing the entire time-saving state A and the time-saving state C2, the average variable display time of the variable display of the second special figure in which the variable display result is different from the time-saving state C2 is set longer. It is

Figures 284-33 and 284-34 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in Figure 284-15. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol fixing period timer, which will be described later, is in operation (step 130SGS201). When the symbol confirmation period is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (step 130 SGS202), and the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation command is performed ( step 130 SGS 203). Incidentally, the symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 278 by the CPU 103.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 130SGS204). When the jackpot flag is set, if any of the time saving flags is set, the time saving flag is cleared (step 130SGS205), and the value of the time saving state variable display frequency counter is cleared (step 130SGS206). Furthermore, according to the jackpot type, the transmission setting of the win start 1 designation command or the win start 2 designation command and the transmission setting of the game state designation command indicating that the game state is the normal state are performed, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS207). , step 130 (SGS 208). Incidentally, the hit start designation command and the game state designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 278 by the CPU 103 .

Further, when the pattern fixing period timer is in operation in step 130SGS201, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern fixing period timer by -1 (step 130SGS209), and determines whether the pattern fixing period timer has timed out ( step 130 SGS 210). When the pattern fixing period timer has not timed out, the special pattern stopping process is terminated, and when the pattern fixing period timer has timed out, further, whether the stopped pattern being derived and displayed is a lost pattern or a lost pattern with time saving. It is determined whether or not (step 130SGS211). When the stop symbol being derived and displayed is a missing symbol or a missing symbol with time saving, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and the special symbol stop process is terminated (step 130SGS212). If the displayed stop symbol is not a lost symbol or a lost symbol with time saving, it is determined whether or not the derived stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 130SGS213). When the derivation-displayed stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 130 SGS214), and the derivation display is performed. If the stopped symbol is not a big hit symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small winning opening pre-processing, and the special symbol stopping process is terminated (step 130SGS215).

Further, when the jackpot flag is not set in step 130SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the total time saving number counter α is 1 or more (step 130SGS216). In addition, the total time-saving counter α is the total value of the maximum time-saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time-saving control number of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B (“5”, “11”, “ 689") is set.

When the value of the total time saving frequency counter α is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving frequency counter α is decremented by -1 (step 130SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether or not the finished variable display is the first special figure variable display (step 130SGS218). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, proceed to step 130 SGS220, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (when the finished variable display is the second special figure variable display), the second The value of 2 special figure time saving counter α is -1 and the process proceeds to step 130SGS220 (step 130SGS219). In addition, the second special figure time saving number counter α, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol ("1", "7", "685") is set is a counter.

At step 130SGS220, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter β is 1 or more (step 130SGS220). In addition, the total time saving number counter β is, in the time saving state C, the total value of the maximum time saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol ("5" or "689") is set. is.

When the value of the total time saving number counter β is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving number counter β is decremented by -1 (step 130SGS221). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether or not the finished variable display is the first special figure variable display (step 130SGS222). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, proceed to step 130 SGS224, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (when the finished variable display is the second special figure variable display), the second The value of 2 special figure time saving counter β is -1 and the process proceeds to step 130SGS224 (step 130SGS223). In addition, the second special figure time saving number counter β is a counter in which the maximum number of times of time saving control of the second special symbol ("1" or "685") is set in the time saving state C.

In step 130SGS224, the CPU 103 selects one of the time saving A flags (time saving A1 flag indicating that it is a time saving state A1, time saving A2 flag indicating that it is a time saving state A2, and time saving A3 flag indicating that it is a time saving state A3. or) is set. If any of the time saving A flag is not set, proceed to step 130SGS230, if any of the time saving A flag is not set, further, the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special figure time saving number counter α has become 0, that is, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the maximum number of times of time saving control has ended in the time saving state being controlled (step 130SGS225). If the value of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α is not 0, proceed to step 130 SGS230, if the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special figure time saving number counter α is 0 clears the time saving A flag that has been set (step 130SGS226) and clears the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α (step 130SGS227).

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter β is 1 or more (step 130SGS228). If the value of the total time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, proceed to step 130 SGS230, and if the value of the total time saving number counter β is 1 or more, set the time saving C2 flag indicating the time saving state C2 and step Go to 130SGS230 (step 130SGS229).

In step 130SGS230, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving B flag indicating that the time saving state B is set. If the time saving B flag is not set, proceed to step 130 SGS236, if the time saving B flag is set, further check whether the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special figure time saving number counter is 0 Determine (step 130SGS231). If the value of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α is not 0, proceed to step 130 SGS236, if the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special figure time saving number counter α is 0, time saving Along with clearing the B flag (step 130SGS232), clear the values of the total time saving counter α and the second special figure time saving counter α (step 130SGS233).

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the total time reduction counter β is 1 or more (step 130SGS234). If the value of the total time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, proceed to step 130 SGS236, and if the value of the total time saving number counter β is 1 or more, set the time saving C2 flag indicating the time saving state C2 and step. 130SGS236 (step 130SGS235).

In step 130SGS236, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time saving C flags (the time saving C1 flag indicating the time saving state C1 or the time saving C2 flag indicating the time saving state C2) is set. If any time saving C flag is not set, proceed to step 130 SGS240, if any time saving C flag is set, the value of the total time saving number counter β or the second special figure time saving number counter β is 0 (Step 130SGS237). If the value of the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β is not 0, proceed to step 130 SGS240, if the value of the total time saving number counter β or the second special figure time saving number counter β is 0, set While clearing the time saving C flag (step 130SGS238), clear the values of the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β and proceed to step 130SGS240 (step 130SGS239).

At step 130SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set. When the small hit flag is set, the transmission setting of the hit start 3 designation command or the hit 4 start designation command is performed according to the small hit type, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242. In addition, the hit start 3 designation command and the hit 4 start designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control processing shown in FIG. 278 by the CP 103.

When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 has already cleared the RAM or executed variable display 685 times since the end of the previous big hit game, and the ceiling reached flag indicating that the time saving state B has been set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 130SGS251a). If the ceiling reached flag is set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS258, and if the ceiling reached flag is not set, the value of the ceiling variable display counter is 0, that is, the finished variable display is RAM cleared or the previous It is determined whether or not the variable display is 685 times from the end of the jackpot game (step 130SGS251b). If the value of the variable ceiling display counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 130SGS258, and if the value of the variable ceiling display counter is 0, the ceiling reached flag and the time saving B flag are set (step 130SGS251c, step 130SGS252). Also, "689" is set to the total time saving number counter, and "685" is set to the second special figure time saving number counter α, respectively, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS255 (step 130SGS253, step 130SGS254).

At step 130SGS255, the CPU 103 determines whether or not any of the time saving C flags is set. If none of the time saving C flag is set, proceed to step 130SGS242, if any time saving C flag is set, clear the set time saving C flag, total time saving counter β and Clear the value of the second special figure time saving counter β (step 130SGS256, step 130SGS257a). Further, the value of the time saving state variable display frequency counter is set to "0", and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS257b).

In step 130SGS258, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the loss flag with time reduction is set. If the time-saving loss flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS242, and if the time-saving loss flag is set, the time-saving loss type is specified (step 130SGS259), and the specified time-saving loss type is the time-saving loss type. It is determined whether or not it is deviation A (step 130SGS260).

When the specified loss type with time saving is loss A with time saving, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is 1 or more. If the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is 1 or more, proceed to step 130 SGS242, if the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, further either time saving A flag or time saving B It is determined whether the flag is set (step 130SGS262a). If any of the time saving A flag or the time saving B flag is set, the process proceeds to step 130 SGS263, and if neither the time saving A flag nor the time saving B flag is set, the time saving C1 flag is set, and the time saving state is variable "0" is set in the display count counter and the process proceeds to step 130SGS263 (step 130SGS262b, step 130SGS262c).

At step 130SGS263, the CPU 103 sets the total time reduction counter β to "5". Furthermore, "1" is set to the second special figure time saving counter and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS264).

On the other hand, in step 130SGS260, when the specified loss with time reduction type is loss with time reduction B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 130SGS265). If the gaming state is not the normal state, proceed to step 130SGS267, if the gaming state is the normal state, further whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2, that is, the finished variable display is the second special It is determined whether or not it is a variable display of a figure (step 130SGS266). When variable display special figure specification buffer value is 1, it advances to step 130SGS267, when variable display special figure specification buffer value is 2, it advances to step 130SGS268.

In step 130SGS267, the CPU 103 determines whether or not any of the time saving A flag or the time saving B flag is set. When any of the time saving A flag or the time saving B flag is set, it progresses to step 130SGS268. In step 130SGS268, a time saving loss winning notification non-execution flag is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS272.

If neither the time saving A flag nor the time saving B flag is set in step 130SGS268, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving C2 flag has already been set (step 130SGS269). When the time saving C2 flag has not already been set, the time saving C2 flag is set (step 130SGS270), the time saving state variable display frequency counter is set to "0", and the process proceeds to step 130SGS272.

In step 130SGS272, the CPU 103 sets "685" to the second special figure time saving number counter β. Also, "689" is set in the total time reduction counter β, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS273).

In addition, if the time saving C2 flag is already set in step 130SGS269, the CPU 103 compares the value set in the second special figure time saving counter with "685" (step 130SGS274), and the second special figure time saving number of times It is determined whether or not the value set in the counter is 685 or less (step 130SGS275). If the value set in the second special figure time saving number counter is not less than 685, proceed to step 130SGS242, and if the value set in the second special figure time saving number counter is not more than 685, step 130SGS271, 130SGS272 , 130SGS273 are executed and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242.

Then, in step 130SGS242, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the situation to the pattern fixing period timer, and performs transmission setting of a pattern fixing period designation command according to the set value. Furthermore, the transmission setting of the game state designation command according to the game state is performed, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 130SGS243).

Incidentally, the symbol determination period designation command and the game state designation command are transmitted to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control processing shown in FIG.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-33, when the gaming state is one of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state B (the total time saving number counter α and the second When the value of the special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more), if the variable display result becomes a time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β depending on the type of time saving When the value of the total time reduction counter α and the second special time reduction counter α becomes 0, a value of 1 or more is set to the total time reduction counter β and the second special time reduction counter β Although the form which controls a game state to time saving state C2 was illustrated based on being set, the present invention is not limited to this, game state is time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving When the state B is either (when the value of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more) If the variable display result becomes missing with time saving, at that time The value of the second special figure time-saving counter α (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, remaining variable display number of time-saving control that can be executed in time-saving state B) and value according to time-saving deviation type (1 or 685), and if the value corresponding to the type of time saving is larger than the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α, the time saving state during execution (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B) While controlling the game state to the time saving state (time saving state C1 or time saving state C2) according to the time saving type at the end of the time saving type, the value according to the time saving type is the second special If it is less than the value of the time saving number counter α in the figure, after the end of the time saving state (any of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B) in progress You may control to a normal state without controlling. As a result, if the variable display result is not with time saving when it is either time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, or time saving state B, these time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 , the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is controlled after either of the time saving state B, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Figures 284-35 to 284-38 are diagrams showing the symbol fixing period corresponding to each situation. In the process of step 130SGS242, the CPU 103 may set a value corresponding to the symbol determination period for each situation shown in FIGS. 284-35 to 284-38 to the symbol determination period timer.

In this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-35 to 284-38, four types of pattern fixing periods of 0.5 seconds, 6 seconds, 20 seconds, and 81.4 seconds are set as the pattern fixing periods. there is In particular, for some cases such as when the variable display result is lost with time saving or when the variable display result is lost and the 685th variable display is performed, the pattern confirmation period will be 6 seconds, 20 seconds, or 81.4 seconds. As a result, it is possible to execute a rush effect for being controlled to the corresponding time-saving state during these symbol fixing periods. On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a loss with time saving, the pattern fixing period is 0.5 seconds, so that it is impossible to execute the rush effect for being controlled to the corresponding time saving state during these pattern fixing periods. Some exist. It should be noted that the shortest 0.5 second of these plural pattern fixing periods is sufficient time for the player to visually recognize the stopped decoration pattern, and the next variable display is not executed (or the effect is not performed). It is set as a time to minimize stress caused by not progressing).

Figure 284-39 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of Figure 284-15 as the small hit open process, in the small hit open process, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the open time timer. -1 (130SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the open time timer has timed out (130SGS282).

When the opening time timer has timed out, the process shifts to 130SGS293, and when the opening time timer has not timed out, it is determined whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (130SGS283). When it is time to open the large winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the opening of the large winning opening by driving the solenoid 130SG083 (130SGS284). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command during the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (130SGS285), and the process proceeds to 130SGS286. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening set for transmission in 130SGS285 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. If it is not the time to open the big winning hole, the process proceeds to 130SGS286 without going through 130SGS284 and 130SGS285.

At 130SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is time to close the big winning opening (130SGS286). When it is time to close the big winning opening, the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 130SG083 to close the big winning opening (130SGS287). Then, the transmission setting of the designated command after the opening of the big winning opening corresponding to the round is performed (130SGS288), and the process proceeds to 130SGS289. It should be noted that the command for specifying during opening of the big winning opening, which is set for transmission in 130SGS288, is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control processing. If it is not the closing timing of the big winning opening, the process proceeds to 130SGS289 without going through 130SGS287 and 130SGS288.

At 130SGS289, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on (130SGS289). When the second count switch 130SG024 is not turned on, the processing during small hit opening is completed, and when the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on, the second count switch 130SG024 is already turned on, That is, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the second count switch 130SG024 is set (130SGS290). When the V winning flag is set, the small winning opening process is ended, and when the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (130SGS291).

And CPU103 performs the transmission setting of the V prize notification command with respect to the production|presentation control board 12 (130SGS292). Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process.

Then, at 130SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (130SGS293), which is a value corresponding to the small-hit end processing (S120), and ends the small-hit open processing.

Figure 284-40 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in 130SGS120 of Figure 284-15 as small hit end processing. It is determined whether or not there is (130SGS301). When the small hit end display timer is not in operation (130SGS301; N), the small win flag is cleared (130SGS302), and transmission setting of a hit end designation command corresponding to the small win is set for the performance control board 12 (130SGS303). ). Incidentally, the hit end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. Then, a value corresponding to the small-hit end display time is set to the small-hit end display timer (130SGS304), and the small-hit end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit end display timer is in operation, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by -1 (130SGS305). Then, it is determined whether or not the small-hit end display time has elapsed, that is, whether or not the small-hit end display timer has timed out (130SGS306). When the small hit end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on (130SGS307). When the second count switch 130SG024 is not turned on, the small winning end processing is terminated, and when the second count switch 130SG024 is turned on, the second count switch 130SG024 is already turned on, that is, It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the second count switch 130SG024 is set (130SGS308). When the V winning flag is set, the minor winning end process is ended, and when the V winning flag is not set, the V winning flag is set (130SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 (130SGS310), and ends the small winning end processing. Incidentally, the V winning notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process.

Further, when the small hit end display time has passed at 130SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (130SGS311). When the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the big hit flag (130SGS312, 130SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the big win type from the "big win C" and the "big win D" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (130SGS314). In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-7 (E), the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C" if the jackpot type in which the V prize is generated is "small hit A". If the type of small win in which the V prize is generated is "small win B", the type of big win is determined to be "big win D". Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 (130SGS315), the determined jackpot type Remember.

In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 130SGS316, step 130SGS317), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (S114) ( 130SGS318), ending the small hit end process.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 130SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024 not only during the small winning game but also during the period until the small winning end display time after the small winning game ends. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the big winning hole just before the end of the small winning game, the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024, so that the big winning game is executed after the end of the small winning end process. It's like

In addition, when the V winning flag is not set in 130SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (130SGS319), End the termination process.

FIG. 284-41 is a flow chart of the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 284-15. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 103 SGS321). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 130SGS322a), and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 130SGS322b). Incidentally, the jackpot end designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. Also, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 is set in the big win end display timer, and the big win end processing is ended (step 130SGS322c). .

Further, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation at step 130SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 130SGS324). ). When the big win end display timer has not timed out, the big win end processing is ended, and when the big win end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether or not the big win type is the big win A (step 130 SGS325). . When the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, "1" is set to the second special figure time saving number counter α, and "5" is set to the total time saving number counter α (step 130SGS326, step 130SGS327). Then, the time saving A1 flag indicating that the time saving state A1 is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS327a).

Also, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot D (step 130SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot D, set "685" to the second special time reduction number counter α and set "689" to the total time reduction number counter α (step 130SGS329, step 130SGS330). Then, the time saving A3 flag indicating that the time saving state A3 is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS330a).

Also, when the jackpot type of the jackpot is not the jackpot B or the jackpot D, the jackpot type is set to the jackpot C, and the second special figure time saving number counter α is set to "7", and the total time saving number counter α "11" is set (step 130SGS335, step 130SGS336). Then, a time saving A2 flag indicating that it is controlled to the time saving state A2 is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS336a).

At step 130SGS339, the CPU 103 clears the ceiling reached flag if the ceiling reached flag is set. Then, "685" is set in the ceiling variable display counter (step 130SGS339a), and transmission setting of the game state designation command corresponding to the executed jackpot type is performed (step 130SGS339b). Incidentally, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the above-described command control process. In addition, the game state designation command set for transmission is stored (step 130SGS340), the time-saving state variable display number counter is set to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

FIG. 284-42 is a flow chart showing the effect control process processing in this characterizing section 130SG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 284-42, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process in this feature part 130SG, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, in the normal state, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2, As a pre-reading notice, a holding display notice effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a big hit depending on the display mode of the holding display, one time variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, and the second immediately after that A panel image is displayed on the image display device 5 for four times of variable display of 2 special patterns, and a panel effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit at different ratios according to the display mode of these panel images. is executable. In addition, when execution of the pending display notice effect is decided, in the start winning time reception command buffer 130SGS194A, a value corresponding to the display mode of the determined pending display is set as a pending display flag value corresponding to the pending storage of the effect object. , when it is decided to execute the panel display effect, a value corresponding to the display mode of the determined panel display is set as a panel display flag value corresponding to the pending memory of the object of effect in the start prize receiving command buffer 130SGS194A. 284-14(B)).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes result effect execution processing (step 130SGS162). In the result production execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out are counted, and the last variable display in the time saving state (time saving state A1 and time saving state C1 are When the variable display of four times immediately after the end of the time-saving state is completed and controlled to the normal state (during the pattern fixing period), an image display device displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls that have been paid out. 5, the process for executing the result effect displayed in FIG. It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 130SG, when it is controlled to the time saving state A3, exceptionally, the result effect may be executed from the pattern confirmation period of the 7th variable display of the 2nd special figure to the 11th variable display. be.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 executes rush effect execution processing (step 130SGS162). In rush performance execution processing, for example, from during the ending performance of the big win game to during the first variable display after the big win game, the time saving state A (one of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, or the time saving state A3) is controlled. Also, the RAM was cleared and the 685th variable display pattern confirmation period from the previous jackpot game was controlled to the time saving state B, and the variable display result was "time saving lost" in the variable display pattern confirmation period. A rush effect is executed to notify that the control has been made to C (time saving state C1 or time saving state C2).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of steps S170 to S172 as in FIG. The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 provides a command (first symbol confirmation command, second symbol confirmation command, third symbol confirmation command) specifying to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol received in the variable display effect process. Based on the receipt of the confirmation command or the fourth symbol confirmation command, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped over the symbol confirmation period indicated by the symbol confirmation command. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (rush effect and result effect shown in FIGS. 284-44) according to the variable display result, the number of times of variable display, and the transition of the game state. Although the details will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the rush effect not only during the special figure per waiting process but also during part of the variable display (during execution of the effect process during variable display).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state is received from the main board 11 at the end of the symbol fixing period. Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "4". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "6", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "lost". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the small hit of step 130SGS176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "7", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "7". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

FIG. 284-43 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 284 and 284-42. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether or not the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command is received. Determine (step 130SGS601). When the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A are stored in the buffer. It is shifted upward by one number (step 130SGS602). The content of the buffer number "0" is erased because it cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift. If the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process is terminated. After executing step 130SGS602, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 130SGS605), and the stop design of the decorative design according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. is determined (step 130SGS606).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the ceiling reaching remaining number of times, which is the remaining variable display number of times until the variable display number of times reaches 685 times after clearing the RAM or after finishing the previous big hit game, on the image display device 5. Reached remaining number of times display processing (step 130SGS607), time saving remaining number of times display processing (step 130SGS608) for displaying the remaining time saving control number of times in the time saving state (remaining time saving number of times) on the image display device 5, the remaining time saving control number of times in the time saving state Time-saving end countdown display processing (step 130SGS609) for displaying the countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends when the predetermined number of times is reached (also called countdown effect, time-saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 (step 130SGS609), variable display During the variable display, a variable display notice effect determination process (step 130 SGS610) for executing a variable display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit is executed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern, game state, and variable display result (step 130SGS611), and starts the process timer (step 130SGS612).

Each process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

In addition, as will be described later, the feature part 130SG exemplifies a mode in which the remaining number of times of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, and when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power failure or the like during the variable display, power Even if is restored, the display of the remaining number of time saving is not resumed during the variable display, and the display of the remaining number of time saving is restarted at the start of the next variable display (timing when the value of the time saving number counter is updated) good. In addition, power supply is not performed in a state (during the customer waiting state) where the variable display is not executed because there is no pending memory although it is controlled to one of the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2. Even if it is stopped, the display of the remaining number of time saving will not be resumed even if the power is restored, and the remaining number of time saving will be displayed from the start of the next variable display or the variable display after the value of the time saving number counter is updated. should be restarted.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (130SGS613). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characterizing section 130SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (130SGS614). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (130SGS615). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S172) (130SGS616).

Incidentally, in the effect processing during variable display, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each decremented by one. Then, the effect device is controlled according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the decorative pattern is realized according to the value of the variable display time timer. Stop the variable display and set the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (S173).

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the processing included in the performance control process processing, so that in the time saving state in the characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. A BATTLE effect, a BATTLE RUSH effect, a result effect A, and a result effect B can be executed. Among these effects, the rush effect A is a effect that is executed when the time saving control is started, and is a effect that notifies the start of the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, and the rush effect B is the time saving control. It is an effect that is executed when it is started, and is an effect that notifies the start of the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2.

The FINAL BATTLE production is a production that is executed in the variable display of the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1 and the variable display of the second special figure up to four times in the normal state after that, and the friend character displayed on the panel (panel The character displayed in the display effect) battles with the enemy character and wins to acquire a BATTLE RUSH (a big hit by being controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state based on the variable display of the second special figure). It is an effect to inform that it is controlled to the time saving state A2 or the time saving state A3 after the game ends.

The BATTLE RUSH production is a production executed in variable display of time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, in which a friendly character and an enemy character battle and a movable body falls during the variable display. BATTLE RUSH continues by doing (a teammate character wins) (controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the variable display of the second special figure, so that after the big hit game ends, the time saving state A2 or the time saving state A3 is controlled).

The result performance A is a performance that is executed when the variable display of the second special figure ends up to four times after the time saving control ends in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, and the time saving state from the first hit. By displaying on the image display device 5 the number of big hits and the number of winning balls until the end of , the end of the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1 (FINAL BATTLE) is notified.

The result performance B is a performance executed when the time-saving control ends in the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, the time-saving state B, and the time-saving state C2. By displaying the number of awarded balls on the image display device 5, it is an effect to notify the end of the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2 (BATTLE RUSH). Moreover, the result production B may be exceptionally executed during the eleventh variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A3.

Of these effects, the rush effect A and the rush effect B are executed according to the timing when the variable display result is out of time saving, RAM clear or the timing when the number of variable displays from the previous variable display reaches 685 times. The presence or absence of and the execution timing are different. For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45 (A), in the normal state, if the number of times of variable display from the RAM clear or the previous variable display reaches 685 times (start condition of time saving state B is satisfied), In the pattern confirmation period of the ceiling time-saving variable display (685th variable display), the rush effect B is executed, and if the variable display result becomes time-saving loss A (the start condition of the time-saving state C1 is satisfied), time-saving is attached. When the rush performance A is executed during the design determination period of the winning A winning variable display, and the variable display result becomes losing B with time saving (the starting condition of the time saving state C2 is satisfied), the losing B winning variable display with time saving is performed. A rush performance B is executed during the pattern fixing period.

Also, in the time saving state A1, when the variable display result is the time saving loss A (the start condition of the time saving state C1 is met), the rush effect is not executed, and the variable display result is the time saving loss B. In the case (the conditions for starting the time saving state C2 are satisfied), the rush effect B is executed during the variable display in the time saving state A1.

In addition, in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2, the variable display result was the time saving missing A or the time saving missing B (starting conditions for the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 were satisfied). In any case, the rush effect is not executed.

Then, in the time saving state C1, when the number of times of variable display since RAM clear or the previous variable display reaches 685 times (the condition for starting the time saving state B is satisfied), the ceiling time saving variable display (variable display of the time saving state C1 And the 685th variable display), the rush effect B is executed in the pattern determination period, and when the variable display result becomes the time saving loss B (the start condition of the time saving state C2 is satisfied), the time saving loss B winning variable. During the variable display of the display (variable display of the time saving state C1), rush performance B is executed. In addition, when the variable display result becomes time-saving loss A (starting condition of time-saving state C1 is satisfied), rush effect is not executed.

Furthermore, for the result production A and the result production B, the presence or absence of execution and the execution timing differ depending on the target time saving state. For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45 (D), when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1 is targeted, the result production A is the second special figure immediately after the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1 The fourth variable Executed during the symbol determination period of the display, and when the time saving state A2 is targeted, the result performance B is executed during the symbol determination period of the final variable display (variable display of the 7th second special figure). In addition, neither the result performance A nor the result performance B is executed for the time saving state A3 and the time saving state B after the big hit B, and the time saving state A3 after the big hit D is the second special figure in the time saving state A3. The result production B is executed from the symbol fixing period of the 7th variable display to the 11th variable display, and the result production A is executed during the symbol fixing period of the final variable display (685th variable display of the 2nd special figure). and result effect B are not executed.

In the variable display in this characterizing portion 130SG, as described above, it is possible to display the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours and count down the end of shortening of working hours. The display of the remaining number of times of time saving and the countdown of the end of time saving are generally displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 284-46. For example, regarding the time saving end countdown, in the final 10 times of variable display in the time saving state, the number corresponding to the number of times of variable display is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) from the start timing of the variable display. be done. Further, the display of the remaining number of times of time saving is started on the image display device 5 from the first variable display start timing when the time saving state is controlled. Further, the numerical value displayed as the remaining number of times of time saving (the value corresponding to the remaining number of times of variable display) is updated at the timing when each variable display is started. The example shown in FIGS. 284-46 is the display of the time saving end countdown and the remaining number of time saving times for the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2, but for the time saving state A2, the variable display in which the time saving control is executed Since the number of times is 7, the display of the time saving state end countdown and the remaining number of time saving starts from the start timing of the first variable display.

Here, the display of the remaining number of times of time saving and the countdown for the end of time saving are performed or not and the display mode differs depending on the starting situation of the target time saving state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45 (B), in the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied when the game state is the normal state, the normal time saving remaining in the image display device 5 Display the number of times. In addition, for the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, the number of remaining time saving times in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 at the time when the starting condition is satisfied The display is maintained without changing from the display to the display of the number of times of time saving according to the time saving state C1.

In addition, for the time saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, the display of the remaining number of time saving is changed from the display corresponding to the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3. maintain without Then, when the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 are terminated and the time saving state C2 is controlled, the display of the remaining number of time saving is not changed to the display of the remaining number of time saving according to the time saving state C2. to hide.

In addition, regarding the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time saving times in the time saving state B at the time when the starting condition is satisfied is changed to the display of the number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving state C1. display without

Further, in the time saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time saving is maintained without being changed from the display according to the time saving state B. Then, when the time saving state B is terminated and the control is made to the time saving state C2, the display of the remaining number of time saving is not changed to the display of the remaining number of time saving according to the time saving state C2 and is not displayed.

In addition, for the time saving state B in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, first, the shutter is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in which the remaining number of time saving corresponding to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is displayed. By displaying the image, a shutter performance is executed to make the image displayed in the display area temporarily invisible or difficult to be visually recognized. Then, when the shutter image is hidden by being controlled to the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of times of saving time is switched to the display of the remaining number of times of saving time according to the time saving state B.例文帳に追加

In addition, for the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is established in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 (first time saving state shown in FIG. 284-45 (B)) in execution Time saving according to The display of the remaining number of times is maintained without being changed to the display of the remaining number of times according to the time saving state C1 (the second time saving state shown in FIG. 284-45 (B)) in which the start condition is met.

In addition, for the time saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, first, the number of remaining time saving corresponding to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 as the first time saving state is displayed as the second time saving state. The display of the remaining number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving state C2 is maintained without being changed. After the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 as the first time saving state ends, the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 as the first time saving state is displayed as the second time saving state. The display is not changed to display the remaining number of times of time saving according to the time saving state C2, and is not displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-45 (C), in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, regardless of whether the conditions for starting any of the time saving state are satisfied during the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1 First, the image display device 5 does not display the countdown effect (time saving end countdown).

In addition, in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2 when none of the starting conditions for the time saving state are satisfied, and the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, When the condition for starting the time saving state C2 is satisfied, the countdown production (time saving end countdown) is performed on the image display device 5 in the last 10 variable displays for the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2 being executed. display. It should be noted that the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2 when the display of the countdown effect (time saving end countdown) is being performed on the image display device 5 in the last 10 variable displays When the condition for starting B is met, the display of the countdown performance (time saving end countdown) is interrupted at the end of the variable display when the condition for starting the time saving state B is met.

In addition, in the time saving state B, when the starting conditions for any of the time saving states are not satisfied during the time saving state B, and when the starting conditions for the time saving state C1 and the time saving state C2 are satisfied, the time saving state B is targeted. In the last 10 times of variable display, the image display device 5 displays a countdown effect (time saving end countdown).

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-43, in the variable display start setting processing in the present characterizing section 130SG, by executing the variable display notice effect determination processing (step 130SGS610), the variable display notice effect is set during the variable display. It is executable. In addition, in the process of determining the notice effect during variable display, when the game state is the normal state, only the variable display of the first special figure is targeted, and whether or not the notice effect during variable display is executed and the effect pattern of the notice effect during variable display are determined. It is possible to decide, and if the game state is one of the time-saving states, only the variable display of the second special figure is targeted, and the execution pattern of the notice effect during the variable display and the effect pattern of the notice effect during the variable display are decided. It is possible.

The execution determination ratio of the notice effect during variable display and the determination ratio of each effect pattern in the normal state differ according to the variation pattern and the jackpot type, as shown in FIGS. 284-47. Here, as shown in FIG. 284-47, in the normal state, it is possible to decide the effect pattern of the notice effect during variable display from among five effect patterns, effect pattern A to effect pattern E.

Regarding the execution decision ratio of the notice effect during variable display and the decision ratio of each effect pattern, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot expectation) is set to be the lowest when it is decided not to execute the notice effect during variable display. It is When the performance pattern A of the notice performance during variable display is determined, the ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big win expectation) is set higher than when the non-execution of the notice performance during variable display is determined. When the performance pattern B of the notice effect during variable display is determined, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (jackpot) is higher than the case where the performance pattern A of the notice effect during variable display is determined degree of expectation) is set high, and when the performance pattern C of the notice performance during variable display is determined, the variable display result is higher than the case where the performance pattern B of the notice performance during variable display is determined. is set to be a big hit (big hit expectation), and if it is decided to execute the effect pattern D or effect pattern E of the notice effect during variable display, the effect pattern C of the notice effect during variable display is determined. The ratio of the variable display result to a big win (big win expectation) is set higher than when execution is determined.

Here, if attention is paid to the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E, the effect pattern D is a effect pattern that can be determined only when the variable display result is a big win and the big win type is a big win A, and the effect pattern E is a variable display result. This is a performance pattern that can be determined only when the big win and the big win type is the big win B.例文帳に追加

That is, when the forewarning performance during variable display is executed in performance pattern D or performance pattern E, the variable display result is always a big hit (big hit expectation is 100%). The performance pattern D is a performance pattern for reporting that the big win type is the big win A, and the performance pattern E is a performance pattern for reporting that the big win type is the big win B.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is any time saving state (and variable display of the second special figure), as shown in FIG. Except for the fact that the performance pattern A of the variable display forewarning effect is determined at a rate of 100%, the variable display foreshadowing effect is determined to be non-executable regardless of the variation pattern or the variable display result. there is

284-49 and FIGS. 284-50(A) to 284-50(F), production pattern A is a production pattern in which an image of character A is displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. In effect pattern B, the image of character A is displayed next to the image of character B on the image display device 5 during variable display. This is a production pattern in which an image of character A, an image of character B, and an image of character C are displayed in order. , and character D are sequentially displayed, and effect pattern E is an effect pattern in which an image of character A, an image of character B, an image of character C, an image of character D, and an image of character E are sequentially displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. This is the production pattern to be displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-50(F), effect pattern E is also a effect pattern in which a background image of rainbow colors (rainbow mode) is displayed as the background image of character E. FIG.

As described above, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-51 (A), the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state A1 is lost is 50000 ms, and the variable display in the time saving state A2 The average variable display time when the result is wrong is 18696.08825ms, the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in time saving state A3 is 18656.82959ms, and the variable display result in the whole time saving state A is wrong In this case, the average variable display time is 22904.91502 ms.

Further, the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state B is out is 2000 ms. In addition, the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state C1 is not correct is 50000 ms, and the average variable display time when the variable display result is not correct in the time saving state C2 is 2040.875912 ms. The average variable display time in the case where the variable display result in the entire C is out is 26020.43795 ms.

Then, as shown in FIG. 284-52, in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2, the notice effect during the variable display has a variation pattern PA3-10. Only possible if there is. That is, among these time saving states, the time saving state in which the notice effect during variable display can be executed is only the time saving state C2 in which the variable display can be executed in the variable pattern PA3-10, and can be executed in the variable pattern PA3-10. Effect pattern A is the only effect pattern of the advance notice effect during variable display.

Next, the flow of presentation in the variable display in the characteristic portion 130SG will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 284-56, when the game state is the normal state, the reach effect of the super reach effect is started by the progress of the variable display of the first special figure and a predetermined period elapses. As a part, an operation facilitating image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the user to operate the second push button 3631B (X1 to X5). At this time, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, a movable body presentation in which the movable body 32 falls is executed as part of the ready-to-win presentation. After that, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit (X6 to X10). After that, after the image display device 5 displays a notification image for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the game ball is hit toward the right game area in the big win game state for the player. A right-handed notification for notifying that these game balls are to be won in the big winning opening and a round effect during the round game are displayed (X11 to X13).

When the jackpot game is the jackpot A jackpot game, as shown in FIGS. 284-57 and 284-58, when the jackpot game ends, a rush effect indicating that the time-saving state A1 is controlled via the jackpot ending effect. A is executed. During execution of the rush performance A, if there is a reserved memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special figure is executed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). be done. In addition to being controlled to the time saving state A1, as the rush effect A, the time saving state A1 hits the game ball toward the right game area for the player, so that the game ball goes to the second start winning opening. is executed to notify that it is in the state of executing the variable display of the second special figure by winning (A1 to A4).

When the player hits the game ball toward the right game area according to the rush performance A, the variable display of the second special figure is started when the game ball wins the second starting winning hole. At this time, a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure is displayed on the image display device 5 as a panel effect. Then, when the player hits the game ball toward the right game area and the game ball wins the second start winning slot, the image display device 5 displays a panel corresponding to each reserved memory of the second special figure as a panel effect. Additional images are displayed. These panel images are displayed at maximum five (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special figure being executed and the maximum number of pending memories ("4") of the second special figure.

When one variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 ends, the game state is controlled from the time saving state A1 to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special figure is displayed. be started. In the variable display, when the decorative symbols stop at the ready-to-win combination, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small hit, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, the movable body effect of dropping the movable body 32 is executed. The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit. After that, an image ("Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area and cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball. image) is displayed (B1 to B3).

When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the second count switch in the image display device 5 is detected. 130SG024 detects a game ball during a small winning game, that is, after displaying an image notifying that a V prize has occurred, an image ("FEVER" image) indicating that the game is controlled to a big winning game is displayed. displayed (B4-B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a loss, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop with a combination indicating a loss, and the variable display result is a loss. is reported. After that, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth pending storage of the second special figure, after the number of times of variable display of the remaining second special figure is notified in the image display device 5, the second special figure An image similar to that of the first reserved memory is displayed (B6-B8).

Then, when all the variable displays corresponding to the pending storage of the second special symbol are lost, the second special symbol is suspended on the image display device 5 during the pattern confirmation period of the variable display of the last second special symbol. An image (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") indicating that all variable displays corresponding to the memory have been completed is displayed. After that, while the dedicated stage image is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the first special figure is executed ten times. In addition, while the dedicated stage image is being displayed, an image is also displayed for instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). (B9-B12).

In one of the time-saving states, the player hits the game ball into the right game area to win the game ball into the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special figure is mainly executed. After the end of the big hit game via the small hit of these second special symbols, it will be controlled to the time saving state A2 or the time saving state A3.

When the time saving state A2 is controlled after the end of the big hit game, that is, when the variable display result is a small hit and the small hit type is a small hit A, as shown in FIG. As a variable display, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a small hit. After that, an image ("Aim for V!") is displayed on the image display device 5 to instruct the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area and cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball. image) is displayed. When the player hits a game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image and one of the game balls is detected by the second count switch 130SG024, the second count switch in the image display device 5 is detected. 130SG024 detects a game ball during a small winning game, that is, after displaying an image notifying that a V prize has occurred, an image ("FEVER" image) indicating that the game is controlled to a big winning game is displayed. are displayed (C1 to C4).

Next, when the big-hit game via the small-hit game ends, an image corresponding to the number of prize balls won in the big-hit game is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ending effect. Then, after executing the rush effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is different according to the number of times that the time saving state has already been controlled, the first variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is performed. be started. In the time-saving state A2, the variable display of decorative patterns is executed in a state where the background image (second background image) of the city at night is displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

In addition, in the time saving state A2, when the variable display result is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss with time saving, and 7 times of variable display (7 times of variable display of the second special figure) is completed, The result effect is started in the seventh variable display pattern fixing period. As the result performance, a value corresponding to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any of the time-saving states and the total number of won prize balls is displayed. In addition, if there is a pending memory of the second special symbol at the start of the result production, variable display of the second special symbol a maximum of four times according to the pending memory of the remaining second special symbols (remaining pending memory). Is executed in a very short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) (C9-C11).

When none of the variable displays corresponding to the remaining pending storage result in a big hit, a small hit, or a loss with time reduction, the stage background image is started to be displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). An image instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the left game area is also displayed. Thereafter, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until the ten times of variable display are completed (C12 to C14).

Also, when it is controlled to the time saving state A3 after finishing the big hit game via the small hit, that is, when it is controlled to the time saving state A3 after finishing the big hit game of the big hit D, first, it is the same as the case of being controlled to the time saving state A2. 2, a stop display with a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, a display of an image displaying "Aim for V!" , display of an image ("FEVER" image) indicating that the game is controlled to a jackpot game, display of an image according to the number of prize balls won in the jackpot game, display of an image according to the number of times the game has already been controlled to the time-saving state. In the state where the image displayed on the device 5 is partly different, the rush effect B and the second background image are displayed, and the decoration pattern variable display is executed seven times (C1 to C9 in FIG. 284-59).

Here, as shown in FIG. 284-60, the variable display result is neither a big win, a small win, or a time-saving loss, and the seventh decorative pattern variable display (7 times variable display of the second special figure). When is finished, the result effect is started in the seventh variable display pattern fixing period. As the result performance, a value corresponding to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any of the time-saving states and the total number of won prize balls is displayed. In addition, during the execution period of the result production, the variable display of the decoration pattern (variable display of the second special figure) is executed in a very short special figure variation time (0.5 seconds) three times. When the variable display results of the three times of variable display of the decorative pattern (8th to 10th variable display) do not result in a big hit, a small hit, or a loss with a time saving, further variable display of the decorative pattern (11) variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

Then, when the variable display result in the eleventh variable display is neither a big win, a small win, or a loss with time saving, the image display device 5 emits light corresponding to the falling of the movable body 32 as the movable body 32 falls. An effect image is displayed. After the movable body 32 falls, when the movable body 32 returns to the standby position (upper position of the image display device 5) before the fall, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened (displayed in black). . After the dark display ends, an image indicating that the time saving state has not ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Further, on the image display device 5, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation reception period of the second push button 3631B ends, the time saving control number in the time saving state in the image display device 5 is 685 times, that is, substantially Specifically, a V-stock performance is executed to notify that the variable display result will be a big win or a small win during the time saving state. After that, when the V-stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 (D7-D9). In particular, as shown in FIGS. 284-60 (D2) to 284-60 (D8), in the V stock production from the result production in the time saving state A3, unlike the result production corresponding to the time saving state A2, the result production In order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time saving control will continue to be executed even after the end of the game, the right hitting notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden. It should be noted that the right hitting notification image in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 is restarted from the start timing of the twelfth variable display.

In addition, if the game state is the normal state and the variable display special figure is the first special figure, the variable display result is not with time saving and when the type is with time saving is not A, the decorative pattern is not After the combination shown is stopped and displayed, rush effect A similar to A2 to A4 in FIG. 284-57 is executed during the symbol stop period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-61, when the game state is the normal state and the variable display result is the first special figure, the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving A. In such a case, after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure, rush effect B is executed. As the rush effect B at this time, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened (displayed in black). After the darkening display is completed, the image of the predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5, white-out (white display) is performed, and the darkening display is performed again (E1 to E6).

After the dark display ends, the image display device 5 displays the image of the predetermined character again, and then displays an operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period of the second push button 3631B ends, the game state is controlled to the time saving state B in the image display device 5, that is, the time saving control number is 685 times, a V-stock effect is executed (E7-E9) to notify that the variable display result will be a big hit or a small hit during the time-saving state.

After that, it is notified that the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state B, and that the variable display result becomes a big hit by dropping the movable body 32 during the variable display in the time saving state B. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area on the image display device 5 so that the game ball wins the second start winning hole. (an image displaying "Aim here!") is displayed. Then, when the pattern fixing period ends, the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 (“BATTLE RUSH”, which is the time saving state B), and the decorative pattern is variable according to the variable display of the second special figure. Display is started (E10 to E12).

Next, the case where the value of the ceiling variable display counter becomes 0 when the game state is the normal state, that is, the variable display is executed 685 times since the RAM was cleared or the last big win game ended will be described. As shown in FIG. 284-62, the ceiling reaching remaining count display 130SG202 is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5 in the normal state. Here, when the value of the ceiling variable display counter is any one of 101 to 685, the ceiling reaching remaining number display 130SG202 is displayed in the first mode. In addition, when the value of the ceiling variable display counter is any one of 11 to 100, the ceiling reaching remaining number display 130SG202 is displayed in a second mode in which the vertical and horizontal sizes are larger than those in the first mode (F1, F2 ).

In addition, when the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) at the time of power restoration cannot normally receive the restoration time ceiling time reduction number designation command, or when the power supply is restored, the production control board 12 receives the restoration time ceiling time reduction number designation command. If the performance control CPU 120 cannot recognize the current value of the ceiling variable display counter due to momentary power failure after normal reception, the ceiling reaching remaining number display may be limited. In this case, only the number indicating the number of remaining times of reaching the ceiling may be hidden, or the interface displaying the remaining number of times of reaching the ceiling (the image display device 5 in the case of the characteristic part 130SG) may be hidden. Further, when the display of the remaining number of times reaching the ceiling is limited in this way, the display of the remaining number of times reaching the ceiling may be restarted when the ceiling time saving number specifying command is normally received.

Then, when the variable display is executed and the value of the ceiling variable display counter becomes 10, a predetermined period (for example, 1 second ), the remaining 10 variable displays are performed in the center of the image display device 5 to indicate that it is controlled to the time saving state B (display of “10 times until BATTLE RUSH”). . After that, every time a new variable display is started, the remaining variable until the time-saving state B is controlled at the center of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) from the start of the variable display. The number of display times (“9 times until BATTLE RUSH”, . . . , “0 times until BATTLE RUSH”) is displayed (F3 to F6).

When variable display (RAM clear or 685th variable display from the end of the previous big win game) is started, the value of the ceiling variable display counter finally becomes 0, and the variable display result of the variable display is a big win, a small win, or a small win. If it is not either of the time-saving loss, after the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the loss (F7 to F9), the rush effect B shown in FIG. In the state in which the background image is displayed, the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure is started (E2 to E12 shown in FIG. 284-61).

Next, a description will be given of a case in which the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure is lost with reduced working hours when the game state is the normal state. First, as shown in FIGS. 284-63 and 284-73, if the time-saving loss type is time-saving loss A, the image display device 5 shows the decorative pattern as the reach production result of super reach α once the loss. When displayed in combination (swinging display), the variable display result suggests that the time saving is not attached and the time saving is not attached The type of time saving is not attached A is performed. G1-G5).

As the time-saving acquisition chance effect, the image display device 5 displays an operation prompting image prompting the operation of the second push button 3631B. At this time, if the variable display result is with no time saving and the type of time saving with no A is the time saving with no type A, the player operates the chance button 631B or when the operation reception period of the chance button 631B ends, the movable body 32 falls. Then, the notification image indicating the winning of the time-saving loss A is displayed on the image display device 5 (G5 to G8). Then, when the variable display ends and the time saving C1 flag is set, rush effect A ((A2) to (A4)) shown in FIG. 284-57 is started from the pattern fixing period of the variable display. In addition, during the execution of the rush performance, if there is a reserved memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special figure is extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) executed. And after the end of rush production A, variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable display of the second special figure once as in the time saving state A1, and then four second special figures after being controlled to the normal state and variable display of decorative patterns based on the variable display of the drawing is executed (see FIGS. 284-57).

On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a failure, when the player operates the chance button 631B or when the period for accepting the operation of the chance button 631B ends, the image display device 5 displays an effect image in which the decoration pattern cracks. After that, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (G9, G10).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-64 and 284-73, when the time-saving loss type is time-saving loss B, the image display device 5 stops and displays the decorative symbols in combination with the non-reach loss. Then, in the pattern fixing period of the variable display, rush effect B and V stock effect shown in FIG. 284-61 are executed. After that, it is notified that the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state C2, and that the variable display result becomes a big hit due to the movable body 32 falling during the variable display in the time saving state C2. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area on the image display device 5 so that the game ball wins the second start winning hole. (an image displaying "Aim here!") is displayed. Then, when the pattern fixing period ends, the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 (“BATTLE RUSH” which is the time saving state C2), and the decoration pattern is variable according to the variable display of the second special figure. Display is started (H2 to H12).

Next, when the game state is the time saving state A1, the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure will be a case where the time saving is not attached and the time saving is not attached. As shown in FIG. 284-74, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol during execution of the rush effect A after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is completed, the first special symbol will be processed up to four times based on the suspended memory of these first special symbols. The variable display of the special figure is executed, but the variable display result in one of the four maximum variable displays of the first special figure is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving and is not with time saving A (with time saving Loss A is elected), and the number corresponding to the time saving counter β and the second special time saving number counter β is set according to the time saving A, but the time saving C1 flag is not set. Become. In this state, when the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is executed once, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α set at the end of the big hit game and the loss A with time saving are won. The game state is controlled from the time saving state A1 to the normal state by both the value of the second special figure time saving counter β being set to 0. After that, like the normal state after the time saving state A1, the variable display of the second special figure is executed up to four times (see FIGS. 284-58).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-65 and 284-74, the variable display result is out of time reduction and out of time reduction in one of the variable display of the first special figure up to 4 times and the type is out of time reduction out B When it becomes (time saving loss B is elected), the numerical value corresponding to the time saving loss B to the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β is set itself, but the time saving C2 flag is set. (I1, I2). When the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is started in this state, the rush effect B and the V stock effect shown in FIG. 284-61 are executed in the variable display. After that, it is notified that the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state C2, and that the variable display result becomes a big hit due to the movable body 32 falling during the variable display in the time saving state C2. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area on the image display device 5 so that the game ball wins the second start winning hole. (an image displaying "Aim here!") is displayed. Then, when the pattern fixing period ends, the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 (“BATTLE RUSH” which is the time saving state C2), and the decoration pattern is variable according to the variable display of the second special figure. Display is started (I3 to I12).

Next, when the game state is the time saving state A2, the case where the variable display result is a loss with time saving in the variable display of the first special figure will be described. As shown in Figure 284-75, for example, when the variable display of the second special figure is already executed in the time saving state A2, the game ball accidentally wins the first start winning opening, and the variable based on the starting winning When the variable display result of the display is off with time saving and the type is off with time saving and the type is off with time saving A (off with time saving A is elected), the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β With time saving to Although the setting itself of the numerical value corresponding to the deviation B is performed, the time saving C1 flag is not set. In this state, when the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is executed once, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α set at the end of the big hit game and the loss A with time saving are won. Both the value of the set second special figure time saving number counter β is -1, and the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β becomes 0. Therefore, the time saving state A2 (the state where the time saving A2 flag is set) continues without the time saving C1 flag being set. In other words, when the time saving loss A is elected in the variable display of the first special figure of the time saving state A2, the game progresses while being controlled in the time saving state A2, and the time saving state even after the time saving state A2 ends. It is not controlled by C1.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 284-66 and 284-75, the game ball wins the first start winning port by mistake when the variable display of the second special figure is already being executed in the time saving state A2, When the variable display result of the variable display based on the start winning is out of time reduction and the type of time reduction out is B (time reduction out B is elected), the total time reduction counter β and the second special time reduction number Although the setting itself of the numerical value corresponding to the time-saving loss B to the counter β is performed, the time-saving C1 flag is not set. In this state, when none of the big win, the small win, and the loss with time saving is won and the variable display is executed seven times without being controlled by the time saving state B, the time saving A2 flag is executed at the stop timing of the seventh variable display. is cleared, and the time saving C2 flag is newly set based on the fact that the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β has not yet become 0.

Also, in the time saving state A2, the result effect B is executed during the pattern fixing period of the seventh variable display and at the beginning of the eighth variable display. As the result production B, an image of a shooting star (shooting star production) is displayed as a production to notify that the time-saving loss B has been won during the time-saving state A2 from the timing when the eighth variable display is started. (J1-J3). After the result effect B ends, the V stock effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the eighth variable display (the first variable display in the time saving state C2) ends. After that, as the time saving state C2, variable display of the decoration pattern according to the variable display of the second special figure is executed in the state where the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the time saving state A2 (J4 ~J8). In particular, as shown in FIGS. 284-66 (J2) to 284-66 (J3), if the variable display result is out of the time saving state A2 and the time saving out type is out of the time saving out B, During the result production, the right hitting notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden in order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the control to the time saving state C2 will be performed after the time saving state A2 ends. becomes. Note that the right-handed notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is different from the result production corresponding to the time-saving state A2 in the V-stock production from the result production in the time-saving state A2, even if the result production ends. In order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the control will continue to be executed, the right hitting notification image in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden. In addition, the right hitting notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is restarted from the start timing of the first variable display in the time saving state C2.

Next, when the game state is the time saving state A1, the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure is out of time saving and the type of time saving is out B (time saving out B is elected case) will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 284-67 and 284-76, if there is a pending memory of the first special symbol during execution of the rush effect A after the jackpot game of the jackpot A is completed, the maximum Variable display of the first special figure is executed four times. Then, after the rush effect A and the variable display of the first special figure are finished, the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is executed. If the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure is out of time saving and the type of time saving out is out B (when time saving out B is elected), the variable display result is out Similarly, panel effects are executed in the variable display (K1, K2). Then, after the panel effect is executed, immediately after the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a failure as the display result of the variable display, rush effect B and V stock effect shown in FIGS. K7, H3-H10). After the rush performance B and the V stock performance are finished and the variable display in the time saving state A1 is finished, the time saving A1 flag is cleared and the time saving C2 flag is set to control to the time saving state C2. After that, while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the decoration pattern is performed according to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, in the variable display based on the pending memory of the second special figure that occurred in the time saving state A1 (variable display of the second special figure up to four times immediately after the time saving state A1 (normal state)), the variable display result is with time saving A case where the lost and time-saving loss type is time-saving loss B (when time-saving loss B wins) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 284-76, if there is a pending memory of the first special symbol during the execution of rush effect A after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, a maximum of four times based on the suspended memory of these first special symbols. Variable display of the first special figure is executed. Then, after the rush effect A and the variable display of the first special figure are finished, the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is executed. When the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure is a loss, the image display device 5 stops displaying a combination of decoration symbols indicating a loss, and the variable display ends. At this time, the game state is controlled to the normal state by clearing the time saving A1 flag. Then, if the loss B with time reduction is elected in any of the variable display of the second special figure up to four times in the game state, the decoration pattern is the same as the variable display of the second special figure immediately after the normal time saving state A1 is displayed in a combination indicating a failure, and immediately after that, rush effect B and V stock effect shown in FIG. 284-64 are executed (H3 to H10). After the rush effect B and the V stock effect are finished and the variable display in the normal state is finished, the time saving C2 flag is newly set to control to the time saving state C2. After that, while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5, the variable display of the decoration pattern is performed according to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Next, when the game state is the time saving state A2, the case where the variable display result is the time saving loss and the time saving loss type is the time saving loss B (when the time saving loss B wins) will be explained. As shown in Figures 284-68 and 284-77, when the time-saving loss B is elected in any variable display in the time-saving state A2, time-saving to the total time-saving counter β and the second special figure time-saving number counter β Although the setting itself of the numerical value corresponding to the missing B is performed, the time saving C2 flag is not set.

In this state, every time the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is executed, the value of the second special figure time saving counter α set when it is controlled to the time saving state A2, and the time saving deviation B are elected. Both the value of the second special figure time saving counter β set by doing is -1. For this reason, the time saving state A2 (state in which the time saving A2 flag is set) continues without the time saving C2 flag being set. In other words, when the loss B with time saving is won in the variable display of the time saving state A2, the game proceeds while being controlled to the time saving state A2.

The variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is executed up to seven times without winning any of the big hits, small hits, and time saving loss, and without being controlled in the time saving state B, that is, the second special When the time saving A2 flag is cleared because the value of the figure time saving number counter α becomes 0, the time saving C2 flag is set based on the fact that the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is 1 or more (time saving (controlled to state C2).

Then, the result effect B is executed at the beginning of the pattern fixing period of the seventh variable display in the time saving state A2 and the first time variable display in the time saving state C2. As the result production B, an image of a shooting star (shooting star production) is produced as a production to notify that the time-saving loss B was won during the time-saving state B from the timing when the first variable display in the time-saving state C2 was started. is displayed (L1 to L3). After the result effect B ends, the V stock effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the first variable display in the time saving state C2 ends. After that, as in the time saving state C2, variable display of the decoration pattern according to the variable display of the second special figure is executed in a state where the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the time saving state B (L4 ~L8).

Next, variable display based on the pending memory of the second special figure that occurred during the seventh variable display in the time saving state A2 (variable display of the second special figure up to four times immediately after the time saving state A2 (normal state)) A case where the variable display result is lost with time saving and the type of time saving is lost and the type of time saving is lost B (when time saving lost B is won) will be described.

First, as shown in FIGS. 284-69 and 284-77, the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is a big hit, a small hit, and a time saving loss. It is executed up to 7 times without being controlled, that is, the time saving A2 flag is cleared by the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α becoming 0 (the game state is controlled to the normal state). Then, the result effect B is executed from the start timing of the pattern fixing period of the variable display. During the execution of the result performance B, if there is a second special figure pending memory, the variable display based on the second special figure pending memory is executed in a very short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). (M1, M2).

Here, when the time-saving loss B is won in any of the variable displays of the second special figure during the execution of the result production B, it is indicated that the time-saving loss B has been won from the timing when the variable display is started. An image of a shooting star (shooting star effect) is displayed as the effect to be notified. After the result effect B ends, the V stock effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the variable display in the normal state ends. After that, as the time saving state C2 due to the fact that the time saving C2 flag is set, the decoration pattern according to the variable display of the second special figure in the state where the second background image is displayed in the image display device 5 as in the time saving state A2 is executed (M3 to M8).

Next, when the game state is the time saving state A2, the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure is not with time saving and the type of time saving is not B (with time saving B is elected case) will be explained. As shown in Figures 284-70 and 284-78, when the time-saving loss B is elected in any variable display in the time-saving state A2, time-saving to the total time-saving counter β and the second special figure time-saving number counter β Although the setting itself of the numerical value corresponding to the missing B is performed, the time saving C2 flag is not set.

In this state, every time the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is executed, the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α set when it is controlled to the time saving state A2, and the loss B with time saving are elected. Both the value of the second special figure time saving counter β set by doing is -1. For this reason, the time saving state A2 (state in which the time saving A2 flag is set) continues without the time saving C2 flag being set. In other words, when the loss B with time saving is won in the variable display of the time saving state A2, the game proceeds while being controlled to the time saving state A2.

The variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is executed up to seven times without winning any of the big hits, small hits, and time saving loss, and without being controlled in the time saving state B, that is, the second special When the time saving A2 flag is cleared because the value of the figure time saving number counter α becomes 0, the time saving C2 flag is set based on the fact that the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is 1 or more (time saving (controlled to state C2).

Then, the variable display in the time saving state C2 is newly started without performing any effect during the symbol fixing period of the seventh variable display in the time saving state A2. That is, in the image display device 5, while the second background image is being displayed as in the time saving state A2, the variable display of the decoration pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure is executed (N1, N2).

Next, immediately after the game state is controlled to the time saving state C1, in the variable display of the first special figure before the variable display of the second special figure, the number of times of variable display from the RAM clear or the previous big hit game is 685 times. The case where it is controlled to the time saving state B by having reached is demonstrated. First, as shown in FIGS. 284-71 and 284-78, in the same way as when the above-described time-saving loss A is elected, a combination in which the decorative pattern once indicates a loss as a reach effect result of super reach α in the image display device 5 After being displayed (swinging display) in , time saving acquisition and acquisition chance production are executed. Then, as a production result of the time saving chance production, the notification image indicating the falling of the movable body 32 and the winning of the time saving loss A on the image display device 5 is displayed (O1 to O8).

When the variable display ends and the time saving C1 flag is set, the time saving state C1 is set. Then, during the symbol fixing period, rush effect A ((A2) to (A4)) shown in FIG. 284-57 is started. Here, during execution of the rush effect, if there is a reserved memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special figure will be a very short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) However, in any variable display based on the reserved memory of these first special symbols, the starting condition of the time saving state B is satisfied when the number of variable display times from the RAM clear or the previous big hit game reaches 685 times. Then, the time saving C1 flag is cleared and the time saving B flag is set at the timing when the variable display that satisfies the condition for starting the time saving state B ends. That is, the game state is controlled to the time saving state B instead of the time saving state C1 (O9, O10).

After that, the rush effect B and the V stock effect are executed in the variable display symbol fixing period in which the conditions for starting the time saving state B are established. Then, when the pattern fixing period ends, the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 (“BATTLE RUSH” which is the time saving state C2), and the decoration pattern is variable according to the variable display of the second special figure. The display starts (H3-H11 in Figure 284-64).

Next, immediately after the game state is controlled to the time saving state C2, in the variable display of the first special figure before the variable display of the second special figure, the number of times of variable display from the RAM clear or the previous big hit game is 685 times. The case where it is controlled to the time saving state B by having reached is demonstrated. First, as shown in FIGS. 284-72 and 284-79, if the time saving loss type is time saving loss B, the decoration pattern in the image display device 5 is stopped and displayed in combination with non-reach loss, and the game The state is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state C2. Then, in the pattern fixing period of the variable display, rush effect B and V stock effect shown in FIG. 284-61 are executed. After that, it is notified that the image display device 5 is controlled to the time saving state C2, and that the variable display result becomes a big hit due to the movable body 32 falling during the variable display in the time saving state C2. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area on the image display device 5 so that the game ball wins the second start winning hole. (image displaying "Aim here!") is displayed (P1 to P10).

Here, during execution of the rush effect, if there is a reserved memory of the first special figure, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special figure will be a very short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) However, the condition for starting the time saving state B is established when the number of times of variable display from the RAM clear or the previous big hit game reaches 685 in any one of the variable displays based on the reserved memory of these first special symbols. Then, the time saving C2 flag is cleared and the time saving B flag is set at the timing when the variable display that satisfies the condition for starting the time saving state B ends. That is, the game state is controlled to the time saving state B instead of the time saving state C2. Then, when the design determination period ends, the variable display of the decoration design corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is started in the state where the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 (P11).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIG. In this case, the pattern confirmation period is 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds, but immediately after the time saving state ends, that is, when the game state is normal state Variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure The pattern fixing period is 0.5 seconds when the time saving is lost. In addition, as shown in Figure 284-57, Figure 284-63, and Figure 284-64, when the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the game state is normal state is lost with time saving , displays the image of the right-handed notification on the image display device 5 during the period including the pattern confirmation period, but immediately after the time saving state ends, that is, when the game state is the normal state, in the variable display of the second special figure When the result of the variable display is a loss with time saving, the rush performance including the display of the image for notifying the hitting to the right is not executed because the symbol fixing period is extremely short as 0.5 seconds. For this reason, when the game state is the normal state, the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure is set to 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds. It is possible to suitably notify the player of the switching of the game state. Furthermore, when the game state is the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, the pattern fixing period is set as short as 0.5 seconds when the variable display result is not with the time saving in the variable display of the second special figure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest in the game due to excessive switching of the game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, if the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure when the game state is the normal state is lost with time saving, the image display device 5 during the period including the symbol confirmation period , but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game state is controlled from one of the time-saving states to the normal state, the image display device In step 5, a left-hand shot notification image may be displayed to notify the player to hit the game ball toward the left game area. Immediately after any time-saving state is controlled to the game state, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be either a big win, a small win, or a loss with time-saving by the variable display based on the reserved memory stored at that time. (For the player, there is a possibility that the state of hitting the game ball toward the right game area will continue.) Therefore, the display of the left hitting notification image on the image display device 5 is a variable display based on the pending memory generated in the time saving state. It is desirable to execute after finishing everything.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-35, in the variable display of the second special figure when the game state is immediately after the end of the time saving state (normal state), the variable display result becomes time saving loss A or time saving loss B The pattern confirmation period in this case is 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the pattern confirmation period when the variable display result is lost in the variable display of the second special figure when the game state is immediately after the end of the time saving state (normal state). is set to For this reason, when the variable display result of the second special figure when the game state is immediately after the end of the time saving state (normal state) is the time saving loss A or the time saving loss B, the variable display result is displayed. It is possible to suitably return to the time saving state without excessively extending the period from when the variable display of the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is started.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-6, 284-26, and 284-27, the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is a special figure fluctuation time when it is lost with time saving Is partly common with the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is lost, and when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A is lost with time saving The special figure fluctuation time is an example of a form that is partially common with the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A is lost, but the present invention is limited to this Instead, the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is lost with time saving is the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is lost On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A is lost with time saving is the special figure when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A is lost It may be partly common to the variable time. By doing so, when the variable display result is lost with time saving in the normal state (when it is controlled to the time saving state C), the variable display is performed with a variation pattern having a dedicated special figure variation time By doing so, it is possible to enhance the feeling of specialness, and when the variable display result is not with the time saving again in the situation where the time saving state C has already been controlled, the advantage for the player does not change so much, so it is different from other fluctuation patterns. The memory capacity of the ROM 101 in the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced by executing the variable display according to the variable pattern having the common special figure variable time, so the product in the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state. can enhance sexuality.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-21 (C), the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the game state is one of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C is with time saving In the case of losing, the non-reach variation pattern PA2-5 is selected, that is, the reach performance is not executed during the variable display. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variable display result does not include time saving.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure in the case where the game state is either the time saving state A, the time saving state B, or the time saving state C , PA2-5, which is a non-reach variation pattern, is selected, that is, a form in which the reach effect is not executed during variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. , When the game state is either time saving state A, time saving state B, or time saving state C, in the variable display of the first special figure, if the variable display result is missing with time saving, the ratio is lower than the normal state By determining the reach fluctuation pattern in , the reach effect can be executed during the variable display, or even if the reach fluctuation pattern is determined at the same rate as the normal state, effects other than the reach effect will be executed during the variable display. You may In other words, to limit the execution of the reach production, it is possible to select no reach fluctuation pattern, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected at a lower rate than the normal state, and variable display is being performed when the reach fluctuation pattern is selected. Including executing a production different from the reach production.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is any one of time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C. Only, when the game state is one of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C, the variable display result of the second special figure is the loss with the time saving. Restrict the execution of the reach production. You may

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-22, when the variable display result is other than the big hit in the variable display of the second special figure when the gaming state is the time saving state A1, the special figure variation PA3-5 where the time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is lost, PC3-3 where the special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a small hit, special figure fluctuation time 55 Second (55000ms) PC3-3 is provided and the variable display result is lost with time saving, and the variable display result is lost in the variable display of the second special figure when the game state is time saving state A1 The case and the case where the variable display result is a small hit are exemplified in the form in which the special figure fluctuation time is common, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is the time saving state A1. It may be a common special figure fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds) when the variable display result is lost in the variable display of the second special figure in a certain case and when the variable display result is lost with time saving. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display result of the second special figure has become missing with time saving in the time saving state A1.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-36, in the time saving state A, the variable display symbol determination time when the variable display result becomes time saving A or time saving loss B is the time when the variable display result is lost. Since it is set to be the same as the pattern fixing time of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the situation where the player pays attention to the variable display result due to the difference in the pattern fixing time, so that the variable display result is lost with time saving. can be difficult to draw attention to.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 130SG, in the time saving state A, the variable display symbol determination time when the variable display result is time saving A or time saving B is the variable display symbol determination time when the variable display result is no. Although the form that is set to be the same as the pattern confirmation time is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display symbol fixing time may be set to be the same as the variable display symbol fixing time when the variable display result is a small win.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-28 and 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state B becomes a big hit, variable display at PB3-1 which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern By executing, the blessing production for 15 seconds is executed after the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds is executed during the variable display, but the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C1. In this case, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. A second blessing effect is executed. Therefore, in the time saving state B, if the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern, so that the reach production is performed during the variable display. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to the excessive execution of the performance with a long execution period such as the like, and in the time saving state C1, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit, it is a super reach. By executing the variable display in PB3-3 which is the variation pattern of the δ jackpot, the expectation of the player can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved, so the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state. can increase

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-28, when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A, PB3-1 is a non-reach big hit variation pattern, and PB3 is a normal reach big hit variation pattern. -2, and PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ, the variable display is executed. In other words, in the time saving state B, compared to the entire time saving state A, the ratio of executing variable display in PB3-1, which is a non-reach variation pattern, is high. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player due to the excessive execution of the performance having a long execution period.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state C1 becomes a big hit, it is variable at PB3-3 which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit By executing the display, after the 50-second effect including the ready-to-reach effect of super reach δ is executed during the variable display, the 15-second blessing effect is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C2, the variable display is performed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, for 2 seconds during the variable display. 15 seconds of blessing effect is executed after the effect corresponding to non-reach is executed. That is, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state B, it is a non-reach big hit variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1. While variable display is executed in a certain PB3-1, variable in PB3-1 which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern at the same rate as when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C2 display is performed. For this reason, in the time-saving state C2, in which the number of variable displays that perform time-saving control is 685 times at maximum, variable display in a shorter period than in the time-saving state C1, in which the number of variable displays that perform time-saving control is only one Effect during variable display and congratulatory effect corresponding to the variable display) can be easily executed, thereby reducing the sense of sluggishness and suppressing the decline in the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state C1 is a big hit, it is variable in PB3-3 which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit By executing the display, after the 50-second effect including the ready-to-reach effect of super reach δ is executed during the variable display, the 15-second blessing effect is executed. On the other hand, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state A3, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit, or PB3-2, which is the variation pattern of the normal reach big hit. As a result, the effect corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds or the effect corresponding to the normal reach for 20 seconds is executed during the variable display, and then the blessing effect for 15 seconds is executed. That is, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1, the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A3 Variable display is executed at PB3-3. In addition, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A3, the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1. Variable display is executed at PB3-1. Therefore, the time-saving state A3, in which the number of times of variable display for time-saving control is maximum 685 times, suppresses the decrease in interest of the player by executing the variable display in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot. In the time-saving state C1, in which the number of times of variable display for time-saving control is one, variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, to increase the player's expectation. As a result, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-28, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state B becomes a big hit, variable display at PB3-1 which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern is executed, the effect corresponding to non-reach for 2 seconds is executed during the variable display, and then the blessing effect is executed for 15 seconds. On the other hand, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state A3, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, or PB3-2, which is the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot. As a result, the effect corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds or the effect corresponding to the normal reach for 20 seconds is executed during the variable display, and then the blessing effect for 15 seconds is executed. That is, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state B, the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A3. Since the variable display is executed at PB3-1, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the player's sense of sluggishness in the time-saving state B.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A3 is a big hit, PB3-1 or normal reach big hit which is the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit By executing the variable display in PB3-2, which is the variation pattern, during the variable display, the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds or the production corresponding to the normal reach for 20 seconds is executed, followed by the blessing production for 15 seconds. is executed. When the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the super reach δ during the variable display. After the performance of 50 seconds including the ready-to-win performance is executed, the blessing performance of 15 seconds is executed. Then, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only with PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit, for 2 seconds during the variable display 15 seconds of blessing effect is executed after the effect corresponding to non-reach is executed.

That is, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A3, it is a non-reach big hit variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1. The ratio of executing variable display at -1 is high, and if the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C2, the variable display result of the second special figure will be a big hit in the time saving state A2. The rate at which the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the non-reach jackpot variation pattern, is set higher than in the case. Therefore, the time-saving state C2, in which the number of times of variable display for executing time-saving control is 685 times at maximum, is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern PB3-1. In the time-saving state C1, in which the number of times of variable display for performing time-saving control is 1, the variable display is not performed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, that is, relative Furthermore, by increasing the ratio of execution of variable display in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ, the reach performance of the super reach δ is executed to effectively increase the expectation of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Since it can be done, interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3 which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit. Thus, during the variable display, after the 50-second effect including the ready-to-reach effect of super reach δ is executed, the 15-second blessing effect is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C2, the variable display is performed only with PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, so that the non-2 seconds during the variable display After the performance corresponding to reach is executed, the blessing performance for 15 seconds is executed. That is, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C2, it is a non-reach big hit variation pattern than when the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C1. The allocation that the variable display is executed at -1 is set high, and if the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C1, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state C2 A higher allocation is set for executing variable display in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, than in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, in the time-saving state C2 in which the number of times of variable display for executing time-saving control is maximum 685 times, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, to prevent the player from feeling slow. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest, and in the time-saving state C1 in which the number of times of variable display for executing time-saving control is one time, the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the expectation of the player Since the feeling can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A3 is a big hit, PB3-1 or normal reach big hit is a variation pattern of the non-reach big hit By executing the variable display in PB3-2, which is the variation pattern, during the variable display, the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds or the production corresponding to the normal reach for 20 seconds is executed, followed by the blessing production for 15 seconds. is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C2, the variable display is performed only with PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, so that the non-2 seconds during the variable display After the performance corresponding to reach is executed, the blessing performance for 15 seconds is executed. Therefore, in the time saving state A3, the ratio of executing the variable display in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, is high, so that excessive game value is given in a short time, and the gambling property is excessive. You can prevent it from becoming too expensive.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A3 becomes a big hit, PB3-1 or normal reach big hit which is the variation pattern of the non-reach big hit By executing the variable display in PB3-2, which is the variation pattern, during the variable display, the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds or the production corresponding to the normal reach for 20 seconds is executed, followed by the blessing production for 15 seconds. is executed. When the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the super reach δ during the variable display. After the performance of 50 seconds including the ready-to-win performance is executed, the blessing performance of 15 seconds is executed. Therefore, in the time-saving state A3 in which the number of times of variable display in which the time-saving control is executed is a maximum of 685 times, the variable display is likely to be executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, so that the interest of the player is reduced. In the time-saving state C1 in which the number of times of variable display in which time-saving control is executed is 1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. Since the sense of anticipation for the game can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state can be enhanced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C1 is longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B The difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is not set in the time saving state C2 and the average variable display time when the variable display result is not in the time saving state B is, in the time saving state C2 Since it is set smaller than the difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost and the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C1, the period during which time saving control can be performed The game can be played without stressing the player in the time-saving state C2 in which is relatively long.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, as a common variation pattern when the variable display result is lost, a non-reach lost variation pattern PA3 -1 can be selected. That is, since the variation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the variation pattern can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, a form in which some variation patterns can be selected in common when the variable display result is different in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 is exemplified, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited, and in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, all the variation patterns may be commonly selectable when the variable display result is wrong.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, it is possible to execute a so-called step-up effect in which the displayed character changes step by step as a forewarning effect during the variable display, which suggests that the game state will be controlled to the jackpot game state during the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the notice effect during variable display, there are multiple types of effects (for example, the percentage of control to the jackpot game state by the displayed lines is suggested. It may be possible to execute a speech announcement effect, a movable body announcement effect that suggests a ratio of being controlled to a big hit game state depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32, etc.). In this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of types of effects as notice effects during variable display, the average variable display time in the case where the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C as in the present characteristic part 130SG In addition to setting longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost (see FIG. 284-51), the number of notice effects during variable display that can be executed during the variable display of the time saving state C is set to the time saving state B may be set to be larger than the number of notice effects during variable display that can be executed during variable display. By doing so, in the time saving state B, the stress of the player is reduced by increasing the number of times of variable display per unit period by variable display with a short variable display time, and in the time saving state C, the variable display result is By increasing the number of notice performances during variable display that can be executed in the event of a loss, the player's interest is reduced when the variable display result is a loss with time reduction a plurality of times before being controlled to a big win game state. can be prevented, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-52, when the variable display result is lost (when the variation pattern of loss is determined), the types of notice effects during variable display that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 are: Since the number of times when the state C is controlled is more than when the time saving state B is controlled, the performance patterns of the variable display can be increased without increasing the variation patterns, and the ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100.例文帳に追加storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display result of the figure is not with time saving, it is possible to execute rush effect A as an effect to notify that it is controlled to the time saving state C1, and the variable display result of the second special figure is not with time saving When it becomes, the rush production B is executed as an effect to notify that it is controlled to the time saving state C2, that is, when the variable display result of the first special figure is lost with the time saving and the variable display of the second special figure In the case where the result is no time saving, a form in which a different rush effect can be executed as an effect for notifying that the time saving state C is controlled is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, depending on the situation, depending on the situation, if the variable display result of the first special figure is not with time saving and if the variable display result of the second special figure is not with time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state C. A common rush effect may be made executable as the effect for notifying that. For example, when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state except immediately after the end of the time saving state is out of time saving, a rush effect A can be executed as an effect to notify that it is controlled to the time saving state C1. , When the result of the variable display of the second special figure in any of the time-saving states is not with time-saving, rush performance B is executed as a performance for informing control to the time-saving state B.例文帳に追加Then, in the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result based on the pending memory that occurred during the time saving state is lost with the time saving, the variable display is the first special variable display and the second special A rush effect B may be executed as a effect for notifying that the time-saving state C is controlled in either of the variable displays in the figure. By doing so, in the variable display corresponding to the first special figure reservation memory that was stored immediately after the end of the time saving state, for the rare situation where the variable display result is lost with time saving, about the second special figure reservation memory By sharing the effect (executing the rush effect B) with the effect informing that it is controlled to the time saving state C (executing the rush effect B), the man-hours for developing the effect can be reduced, and the capacity of the effect data can also be reduced.

In addition, as this modification, in the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result based on the reservation memory that occurred during the time saving state is lost with the time saving, the variable display is the first special figure Illustrated a form in which the rush production B is executed as an effect for notifying that the time saving state C is controlled in either the variable display or the variable display of the second special figure, but the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state Then, if the variable display result based on the pending memory that occurred during the time saving state is not with time saving, the variable display is either the first special figure variable display or the second special figure variable display Time saving As an effect for notifying that the state is controlled to the state C, an effect different from the rush effect A and the rush effect B may be executed. That is, the common predetermined effect in the present invention may be the rush effect B corresponding to the second predetermined effect, the rush effect A corresponding to the first predetermined effect, or the rush effect B corresponding to the second predetermined effect. may have different presentations.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A3, it is a variation pattern of non-reach loss PA3-1, and a variation pattern of non-reach loss PA3 -2, it is possible to select PA3-3, which is a variation pattern of non-reach loss, and PA3-4, which is a variation pattern of normal reach loss, and when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C3, non-reach loss A variation pattern PA3-1 and a non-reach variation pattern PA3-10 can be selected. That is, in the time saving state A3 and the time saving state C2, it is possible to commonly select PA3-1, which is a non-reach loss variation pattern when the variable display result is a loss. Therefore, even if a plurality of types of time saving states are provided, since the variation pattern can be shared in different time saving states, the data volume of the variation pattern can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state is enhanced. be able to.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display result is out in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, the super reach δ is a variation pattern of the loss Select PA3-5 that is, In the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, if the variable display result is different, by selecting PA3-5 as a common variation pattern, even if there are multiple types of time saving state, the variation pattern is shared in different time saving states. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, as a common variation pattern when the variable display result is lost, a non-reach lost variation pattern PA3 -1 can be selected. That is, since the variation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the variation pattern can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, a form in which some variation patterns can be selected in common when the variable display result is different in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 is exemplified, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited, and in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, all the variation patterns may be commonly selectable when the variable display result is wrong.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, when the time saving state A, time saving state B, time saving state C is controlled to the big hit game state, the production control CPU 120 executes the production (round production etc.) based on the big hit game state. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is controlled from two or more time saving states to a big hit game state (for example, when it is controlled from a time saving state A to a big hit game state When it is controlled from the time saving state C to the big hit game state), the production control CPU 120 may be able to execute a common production as the production based on these big hit game states. By doing so, the performance after being controlled to the jackpot game state can be shared in a plurality of types of time-saving states, so that the volume of performance data can be reduced.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, when the time saving state A, time saving state B, time saving state C is controlled to the big hit game state, the production control CPU 120 executes the production (round production etc.) based on the big hit game state. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is controlled from two or more time saving states to a big hit game state (for example, when it is controlled from a time saving state A to a big hit game state When it is controlled from the time saving state C to the big hit game state), the effect control CPU 120 may be able to execute different effects as effects based on these big hit game states. In this way, after being controlled to the big win game state, an appropriate performance can be executed according to the difference in the time saving state, so that the game amusement after being controlled to the big win game state can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-27, 284-29, and 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state C2 is time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state It is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure at A3. Furthermore, in the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is lost, two types of variation patterns, PA3-1 and PA3-10, can be selected, while the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 If the result of the variable display is a failure, it is possible to select five types of variation patterns PA3-1, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4 and PA3-5. Therefore, in the time saving state C2, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the expectation is excessively heightened by the long average variable display time, which creates a feeling of sluggishness and reduces the interest in the game, and the pachinko game equipped with the time saving state can be prevented. The marketability of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 becomes a big hit, it is variable at PB3-3 which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ big hit By executing the display, after the 50-second effect including the ready-to-reach effect of super reach δ is executed during the variable display, the 15-second blessing effect is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state C2, the variable display is performed only with PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, so that the non-2 seconds during the variable display After the performance corresponding to reach is executed, the blessing performance for 15 seconds is executed. That is, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state C2, it is a non-reach big hit variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit in the time saving state A1. The allocation that the variable display is executed at -1 is set high, and if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A1 is a big hit, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state C2 A higher allocation is set for executing variable display in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, than in the case of a jackpot. Therefore, in the time-saving state C2 in which the number of times of variable display for executing time-saving control is maximum 685 times, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variation pattern of the non-reach jackpot, to prevent the player from feeling slow. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest, and in the time-saving state A1 in which the number of times of variable display for executing time-saving control is 1, the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the expectation of the player It is possible to heighten the feeling and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, as a common variation pattern when the variable display result is lost, a non-reach lost variation pattern PA3 -1 can be selected. That is, since the variation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the variation pattern can be reduced. In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, a form in which some variation patterns can be selected in common when the variable display result is different in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 is exemplified, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited, and in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, all the variation patterns may be commonly selectable when the variable display result is wrong.

It should be noted that, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 and 284-29, in the time saving state C2, while it is possible to execute variable display in a non-reach variation pattern, normal reach and super reach However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the time saving state C2, it is possible to perform variable display with the normal reach or super reach fluctuation patterns. good too. In particular, when the variable display result is lost, the rate at which variable display is executed in the variation pattern of normal reach lost or super reach lost in time saving state C2 than in time saving state A (percentage at which reach effect is performed) ) can be set lower. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decline in the interest in the game due to excessively high expectations due to the ready-to-win performance in the time saving state C2 in which the period in which the time saving control can be executed is longer than in the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2. .

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-28, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state B is a big hit, variable display at PB3-1 which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern By executing, the blessing production for 15 seconds is executed after the production corresponding to the non-reach for 2 seconds is executed during the variable display, but the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit in the time saving state A1. In this case, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. A second blessing effect is executed. Therefore, in the time saving state B, if the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach big hit variation pattern, so that the reach production is performed during the variable display. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest of the player due to the excessive execution of the performance with a long execution period such as, and in the time saving state AA1, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a big hit, super reach By executing the variable display in PB3-3 which is the variation pattern of the δ jackpot, the expectation of the player can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved, so the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state. can increase

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-55, after the end of the time saving state A, while the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5 over ten times of variable display, after the end of the time saving state B or the time saving state C , the dedicated stage image is not displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the variable display of the second special figure after the time saving state A (variable display based on the pending memory of the second special figure that occurred during the time saving state but was not consumed) and after the variable display of these second special figures In the 10 times variable display, special feeling can be enhanced by displaying a dedicated stage image on the image display device 5, and with respect to the variable display after the end of the time saving state B, the jackpot game state is set during the time saving state B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest due to the display of the dedicated stage image increasing the disappointment of not being properly controlled.

It should be noted that, in this feature portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-6, 284-27, and 284-51, the length of the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B is the time saving state In A, the variable display result is set to the length of the special figure fluctuation time at which the big hit or less is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the most special figure among the variation patterns that can be selected in the time saving state B The variation pattern with a short variation time may have a longer special figure variation time than the variation pattern with the shortest special figure variation time among the variation patterns that can be selected in the time saving state A. In this way, if you set the length of the special figure variation time when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state B longer than the length of the special figure variation time when the variable display result is a big hit in the time saving state A, this By shortening the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state B as well as the characteristic part 130SG than the average special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A By preventing the pause in the time saving state B, the game interest is prevented from being lowered, and the game interest can be improved by enhancing the feeling of blessing when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state B, so that the time saving can be achieved. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the state can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-6 and 284-27, if the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is not with time saving and when the type is with time saving is off with time saving A, special figure fluctuation time While the variation pattern PA2-4 is 53 seconds is selected, if the variable display result of the second special figure is lost in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3, the special figure fluctuation time is 2 seconds One PA3-6, PA3-7 special figure fluctuation time is 20 seconds, PA3-8 special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds, PA3-9 is selected, that is, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time saving state A3 is not with time saving, the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving A The special figure fluctuation time is set shorter than the case. Therefore, the game can be suitably played in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 without making the player feel uncomfortable in the variable display result in which the variable display result is not with the time saving state, so the time saving state is installed. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-68 and 284-77, the variable display result in the time saving state A (in the example shown in FIGS. 284-68 and 284-77 time saving state A2) is with time saving and time saving with off type is the time-saving loss B, after the time-saving state A ends, control is performed to the time-saving state C2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state C2 is lost is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state A is lost. Since it is set, if the variable display result in the time saving state A is not with time saving and the type of time saving is not B and the period during which the time saving state is controlled becomes longer, it is executed in the unit period. By switching the variation pattern so that the number of times of variable display increases, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game caused by giving the player a pause.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-6 and 284-27, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, when the variable display result is lost, the special figure variation time is 50 seconds Super Variation pattern PA3-5 of reach δ loss is selected, and when the variable display result is loss of time saving, variation pattern PA3-8 of super reach δ time saving loss having a special figure variation time of 50 seconds is selected. . Also, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2, when the variable display result is lost, the normal reach variation pattern PA3-4 of the special figure variation time is 20 seconds can be selected. Then, when the variable display result is lost with reduced working hours, the variation pattern PA3-7 of normal reach reduced working hours with special figure fluctuation time of 20 seconds is selected. Then, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is lost, the variation pattern PA3-1 of the non-reach loss and the special figure variation time is 2 seconds. The variation pattern PA3-4 of normal reach loss of 20 seconds can be selected, and if the variable display result is time saving loss, the special figure fluctuation time is 2 seconds Non-reach time saving loss variation A pattern PA3-6 and a variation pattern PA3-7 with a normal reach time reduction with a special figure variation time of 20 seconds can be selected. In other words, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, it is variable at the common special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result is lost and when the time saving is lost Display is enabled to be performed. Therefore, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, when the variable display result is not with the time saving, the discomfort caused by not being controlled to the time saving state C2 is reduced. can be done.

In addition, in this feature part 130SG, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is lost and if the time saving is lost, some variables Although the form in which the special figure fluctuation time of the display is common is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, variable The special figure fluctuation time of some variable display may be common in the case where the display result is lost and when the time saving is lost.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-45, when the variable display result is not with time saving and when the type of time saving is off during the time saving state A1 is not with time saving B (when the starting condition of time saving state C2 is satisfied) , While executing the rush effect (rush effect B) in the final variable display of the time saving state A1 (the first variable display of the second special figure), the variable display result during the time saving state B is removed with time saving and with time saving When the loss type is the loss B with time saving (when the condition for starting the time saving state C2 is satisfied), the rush effect is not executed. That is, since the player feels secure in the control from the time saving state A1 to the time saving state C2 in which the continuous state continues, the rush performance is executed, but the time saving state B is not controlled to the jackpot game state 685 times. In the time-saving state C2 controlled after the variable display is executed, stress is given to the player by restricting the execution of the rush performance to remind the variable display to continue without being controlled to the jackpot game state. can be reduced, it is possible to enhance the marketability in the time-saving state.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, if the variable display result during the time saving state B is off with time saving and the type of time saving is off B (when the start condition of time saving state C2 is satisfied), rush production is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , During the time saving state A or the time saving state C, the variable display result is not with the time saving and the type of the time saving is not with the time saving B. The rush effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the time saving state A or the time saving state C. During the state C, the rush performance may be executed in a smaller display area than when the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B, or it is variable during time saving state A or time saving state C. The rush performance may be executed in a shorter period than the case where the display result is without time saving and the type of time saving is without time saving B. In other words, limiting the execution of the rush effect includes reducing the execution frequency of the rush effect, reducing the range in which the image of the rush effect is displayed, shortening the execution period of the rush effect, etc. ing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-35, 284-38, and 284-45, in the variable display in the normal state, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times (start condition of time saving state B is satisfied) By setting the pattern fixing period to 81.4 seconds, the rush effect is executed during the pattern fixing period, but when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the time saving state C (the start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied) By setting the pattern fixing period to 0.5 seconds, the time saving state C is shifted to the time saving state B without executing rush performance during the pattern fixing period. For this reason, when the control is performed from the normal state to the time saving state B, a long pattern fixing period is ensured because the path that is advantageous to the player (whether the game ball is hit toward the left game area or the right game area) changes. The player can be made to recognize the change in the route that is advantageous to the player by performing the rush effect. In addition, when the time-saving state C is controlled to the time-saving state B, the path that is advantageous to the player does not change (continues to hit the game ball toward the right game area), so the pattern fixing period is shortened and the rush performance is executed. By not doing so, it is possible to favorably shift to the time saving state B without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-56 to 11-72, in the game state in which the player hits the game ball toward the right game area such as the jackpot game state, the time saving state A, the time saving state B, the time saving state C, etc. An example is shown in which a right-handed promotion image is displayed along with an arrow in the upper right part of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the right-handed promotion image is , When moving from a specific time-saving state to another time-saving state, when moving from the time-saving state to a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and when moving from a big hit game state or a small game state to a time-saving state may be displayed as In particular, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the time saving state C and the conditions for starting the time saving state B are met, the right-handed promotion image displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 in the time saving state C is displayed. By continuing to display even in the time saving state B, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is a state in which the player should continue to drive the game class into the right game area.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-9, if the variable display result in the time saving state C is lost with the time saving, it is possible to control the time saving state C again after the time saving state C being executed is completed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in game interest due to not being controlled to the time saving state C again even if the variable display result is not with the time saving in the time saving state C.例文帳に追加

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, in this characteristic portion 130SG, the remaining variable display count (remaining time saving number display) that can perform time saving control in the time saving state can be displayed on the image display device 5. , Even if the variable display result in the time saving state B is not with the time saving, the remaining number of times display of the time saving state B is the remaining variable display that can perform the time saving control in the time saving state C controlled after the time saving state B ends. It does not change to the numerical value added to the number of times (does not change from the display of the remaining number of time saving in the time saving state B). As a result, when the variable display result is not with the time saving in the time saving state B, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming complicated by changing the remaining time saving number display in the middle of the time saving state B, and effect control. It is possible to reduce the data volume of the performance control program executed differently by the CPU 120 for use.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, in this characteristic portion 130SG, the game state is changed from the time saving state C to the time saving state B by reaching 685 times in the time saving state C. It has become. Here, when the number of variable display times reaches 685 times in the normal state, the display of the remaining number of time saving corresponding to the time saving state B is started from the time when it is controlled to the time saving state B, and the game state changes from the time saving state C When shifting to the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of times of time saving corresponding to the time saving state C is switched to the display of the remaining number of times of saving time corresponding to the time saving state B by executing the shutter performance in the image display device 5. The player can accurately recognize that the state B has been reached.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the game state shifts from the time saving state C to the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time saving times corresponding to the time saving state C is once hidden by the shutter image by executing the shutter effect, and the shutter image is displayed. Although the display of the remaining number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving state C is switched to the display of the remaining number of time-savings corresponding to the time-saving state B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state changes from the time-saving state C. When shifting to the time saving state B, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is hidden by the shutter image by executing the shutter effect, and the background image corresponding to the time saving state C displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed. You may switch to the background image corresponding to the time saving state B. FIG. In this way, the background image is once concealed by the shutter performance, thereby preventing discomfort due to abrupt switching from the background image corresponding to the time saving state C to the background image corresponding to the time saving state B.例文帳に追加

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result is not with time saving in the normal state, the remaining number of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5, but after the time saving state B ends, the time saving state C2 , the image display device 5 does not display the remaining number of times of time saving in the time saving state C2. In particular, in this characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284 to 45, in any time saving state, if the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving and B is not with time saving, the variable display After the end of the time saving state in which the result is that the time saving is not included, the state shifts to the time saving state C2, but the remaining number of time saving is not displayed in the time saving state C2. In other words, when the remaining number of times of time saving is displayed in the time saving state B, the period in which the time saving control is executed after being controlled to the time saving state C2 becomes extremely short depending on the time when the remaining number of times of time saving is displayed. Since there is a possibility of giving a feeling of pulling, by not displaying the remaining number of times of saving time in the time saving state C2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the feeling of unnecessary pulling.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the time saving state B ends, the image display device 5 does not display the remaining number of time saving in the time saving state C2. is not limited to this, when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the time saving state B ends, the display of the remaining number of time saving in the time saving state C2 in the image display device 5 in a shorter period than the time saving state B Alternatively, the display of the remaining number of times of time saving in the time saving state C2 may be displayed in an area smaller than that of the time saving state B on the image display device 5 . That is, restricting the display of the remaining number of times of reduced working hours includes not displaying the remaining number of reduced hours, reducing the display range of the remaining number of reduced hours, and the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, the variable display result in the time saving state C becomes the time saving deviation B, and when it is newly controlled to the time saving state C2 after the time saving state C, the time saving state that was originally controlled The display of the time saving end countdown is executed for C (time saving state C2). That is, in this characteristic part 130SG, if the execution mode of the time saving end countdown is switched depending on whether or not the variable display result during the time saving state C is lost, the control becomes complicated, so the original time saving state C ends. Until now, by performing the time saving end countdown in the same way regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a time saving end countdown, it is possible to prevent the control of the time saving end countdown from becoming complicated, and a pachinko machine equipped with a time saving state The marketability in 1 can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, for the display of the remaining number of times of time saving, even if the starting condition of the time saving state C is newly satisfied in the time saving state during execution, the starting condition is satisfied again to the time saving state C By maintaining the display of the remaining number of time-savings according to the time-saving state during execution (do not change the display of the remaining number of time-savings) until it is controlled, multiple time-saving counters as counters for displaying the remaining number of time-savings can be prevented from complicating processing for displaying the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours, and the data capacity of the performance control program executed by the performance control CPU 120 can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-46, the characteristic part 130SG exemplifies a form in which the display period of the time saving end countdown is shorter than the display of the remaining number of time saving, but the present invention is limited to this. However, the display period of the remaining number of time saving may be shorter than the time saving end countdown. Also, in this way, for the form in which the display period of the remaining number of time saving is shorter than the time saving end countdown, the variable display result is not with time saving during any time saving state and the type is not with time saving B In this case, in the time saving state C2 based on the time saving loss B, the remaining number of time saving is not displayed, but the time saving end countdown may be executed. In this way, even if the period controlled to the time saving state C2 is short, the end timing of the time saving state C2 is suitably notified to the player while preventing excessive feeling of waste. can do

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-45, for the time saving end countdown, when the variable display result is not with time saving in the time saving state C2 and the type is not with time saving B (after the end of the time saving state C2 If it is controlled to the time saving state C2), the time saving end countdown is performed for the time saving state C2 in which the variable display result is not working time saving, so whether the variable display result is not working time saving in the time saving state C2 Regardless of whether or not, the time saving end countdown is displayed on the image display device 5 when the time saving state C2 ends, so that the control for displaying the time saving end countdown can be prevented from becoming complicated, so the time saving state is installed. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-45, as for the result production, the result production is executed when the time saving state A1 and the time saving state A2 are ended, and the result production is executed when the time saving state B is ended. never. That is, when the variable display result is executed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state B, the result performance is executed in a situation where the jackpot game state is never controlled. It is possible to prevent the decline of the game interest due to.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 130SG, while the result production is executed when the time saving state A1 and the time saving state A2 are ended, the result production is not executed when the time saving state B is ended. The invention is not limited to this, and when the time saving state B ends, the result performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends, or the time saving state A1 or The result performance may be executed in a smaller display area than when the time saving state A2 ends, or the result performance may be executed in a shorter period than when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends. In other words, limiting the execution of the result effect includes reducing the execution ratio of the result effect, reducing the display area for displaying the image of the result effect, shortening the execution period of the result effect, and the like. ing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, regarding the result production, in the normal state, the variable display result is the time saving with no off and the time saving with no out type is the time saving with no out type is the time saving state C2 based on the big hit game state If the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled, the result effect is not executed, but the variable display result is not with time saving in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, and the type is not with time saving. When it is lost B (when it is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3), 685 times variable display without being controlled to the big hit game state in the time saving state C2 is executed, the result effect is executed. In other words, when the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the variable display result is a time saving loss in the normal state and the time saving loss type is a time saving loss B ends (variable 685 times without being controlled to the big hit game state When the display is executed), the state is never controlled to the jackpot game state, so it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the execution of the result production in such a situation. . In addition, when the time saving state C2 based on the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 ends (in the big hit game state) When the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled, the situation is that the state is controlled to the big win game state at least once, so the number of awarded balls is appealed by executing the result production. By doing so, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, as described above, in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, if the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving When the state is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the state A3), when the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2, the result production is executed, but the normal state, In the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is not with time saving and the type is not with time saving B (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 after the end C2), even if variable display is performed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the variable display result is not with the time saving in these time saving states. No result effect is executed. That is, when the time saving state C2 overlaps, the result performance is not executed even if the overlapping time saving state C2 ends. Therefore, in the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the variable display result is no time saving in the normal state, if the variable display result is no time saving (when the time saving state C2 overlaps), the overlapping time saving state When C2 ends, it can be in a state in which the game is never controlled to the jackpot game state, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the execution of the result presentation in such a situation.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the time saving state C2 overlaps, the form in which the result production is not executed when the overlapping time saving state C2 ends has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, When the time saving state C2 overlaps, when the overlapping time saving state C2 ends, the result performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the other time saving state ends, or the other time saving state ends. The result performance may be executed in a smaller display area than the time, or the result performance may be executed in a shorter period than when the other time-saving state ends. In other words, to limit the execution of the result production when the overlapping time saving state C2 ends, the result production is executed at a lower rate than when the other time saving state ends, and the other time saving state ends It includes executing the result production in a display area smaller than the time, executing the result production in a period shorter than when the other time saving state ends, and the like.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

(Characteristic part 130SG-1)
For example, in the characteristic portion 130SG, a form in which the time-saving acquisition chance effect can be executed only in the variable display of the first special figure is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the characteristic portion 130SG-1 is shown in the figure. As shown in 284-80, the time-saving acquisition chance presentation may be made executable by both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In this way, when the time reduction acquisition chance production can be executed in both the variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure variable display, PA2-4, which is a variation pattern for executing the time reduction acquisition chance production, and By making PA2-6 executable by variable display of the first special figure and the second special figure, the variable display of the first special figure and the variable display other than the remaining hold immediately after the time saving state in the second special figure With (variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state), the variable display can be executed with PA2-4 and PA2-6 which are the fluctuation patterns described above, and the remaining reservation immediately after the time saving state in the second special figure In the variable display (variable display of the second special figure immediately after being controlled to the normal state), the variable display may be executed with a variation pattern other than PA2-4 and PA2-6 described above.

Furthermore, when performing the variable display of the first special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6, and when performing the variable display of the second special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 , While the start timing of the reach production of super reach is set to the same time, the production period is different as the reach production of the super reach and at least part of the production content is different (super reach α- 1 reach production and super reach α-2 reach production) are executed, and as a time saving chance production, the production period is different and at least part of the production content is different (Time saving acquisition chance production A and What is necessary is just to perform time saving acquisition chance production B).

Here, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the execution period of the reach effect of super reach α-1 when executing the variable display of the first special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 is PA2-4 Or set shorter than the execution period of the reach production of super reach α-2 when executing the variable display of the second special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-6 (from the start of the variable display of the reach production of super reach α-1 L1 is the period until the end timing (the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped due to a combination of missing patterns), and the end timing of the reach effect of super reach α-2 from the start of the variable display (the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped due to a combination of lost patterns) The period until the timing) is L2, and the relationship of L2>L1) is executed) and the time-saving acquisition chance production A when executing the variable display of the first special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 The period T1 is longer than the execution period T2 of the time reduction acquisition chance production B when executing the variable display of the second special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 (execution period of the time reduction acquisition chance production: T1 >T2). That is, when performing the variable display of the second special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6, the case of performing the variable display of the first special figure in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 A period from the start of the time-saving acquisition chance presentation to the end of the time-saving acquisition chance presentation and the end of the variable display (until the time-saving C1 flag is set) is set shorter than that.

In addition, in the variable display of the remaining hold immediately after the time-saving state in the second special figure (variable display of the second special figure immediately after being controlled to the normal state), by executing the time-saving acquisition chance production B as a time-saving acquisition chance production , L3 is the period from the start of the variable display to the timing when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped due to the combination of the missing patterns (the start timing of the time-saving acquisition chance production), and the variable display based on the remaining hold immediately after the time-saving state in the second special figure. In the case where time-saving loss A is won, the period L3 from the start of variable display to the timing when the time-saving acquisition chance production starts is variable display start when time-saving loss A is won in the variable display of the first special figure. is set shorter than the period L1 from to the timing when the time saving acquisition chance performance is started.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special figure is executed in the normal state, the execution period of the time-saving acquisition chance effect is relatively long T1, so that the player is controlled to the time-saving state C1. The second special figure variable display (variable display due to remaining hold) is performed up to four times immediately after the time saving state, which can appropriately increase the expectation and gives a negative impression due to the end of the time saving state. In the period, the execution period of the time-saving acquisition chance presentation is T2 shorter than T1, so that when the loss A with the time-saving is won, the game is returned to the time-saving state at a good tempo, thereby favorably wiping away the regret of the player. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the time saving state.

In addition, when the execution period T1 of the time saving chance production A is compared with the notice production execution period X during variable display, the execution period T1 of the time reduction acquisition chance production A is set longer than the notice production execution period X during variable display. (T1>X), and furthermore, when comparing the execution period T2 of the time saving chance production B execution period Y and the execution period Z of the notice production during variable display, the notice production execution period during variable display Y and variable display notice effect executable period Z are set shorter than time saving acquisition chance effect B execution period T2 (Y>T2, Z>T2). In other words, the time-saving acquisition chance performance A suggests a shift to the time-saving state C1 in the normal state, so even if the player is encouraged to shift to the time-saving state C1 over a long period of time, the player is less stressed. When it is already controlled to one of the time saving states, it is more advantageous for the player to be controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state than to shift to the time saving state C1, so the time saving acquisition chance performance B. Since there is a risk of causing a decrease in interest instead of inciting the transition to the time saving state C1 for a long period of time, the time saving chance production Bwo is executed in a shorter period than the notice production during variable display. there is

Furthermore, in the period when the variable display of the second special figure is executed up to four times immediately after the time saving state (variable display due to the remaining hold), in the variable display where the time saving loss A is won, time saving from the start of the variable display The period L3 until the start timing of the acquisition chance production B is the period L1 from the start of the variable display to the start timing A of the reduction acquisition chance production when the loss with time reduction A is won in the variable display of the first special figure. Immediately after the time saving state in 2 special figures, the period L2 from the start of the variable display when the loss with time saving A wins in the variable display other than the variable display of the 2nd special figure up to 4 times to the start timing of the time saving chance production B Since it is set shorter than , it is possible to suitably return to the time saving state without excessively delaying the period until the start of the time saving chance performance B.

Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is lost, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of normal reach when the variable display of the first special figure is executed in the fluctuation pattern of PA2-6, the notice effect during the variable display is executed. Variable display start when executing variable display of the second special figure (variable display other than the remaining pending variable display in the second special figure) in the variable display possible period X, PA2-6 fluctuation pattern From the start of the normal reach to the start of the normal reach, the period Y during which the notice effect can be executed during the variable display, and the variable display when executing the variable display of the remaining hold of the time saving state in the second special figure From the start of the variable display Assuming that the period until the start of the normal reach is a variable display notice effect executable period Z during which the variable display notice effect can be executed, as shown in FIG. Effect patterns that can be executed as the variable-display advance notice effect may be different in the during-display notice effect executable period Y and the variable-display notice effect executable period Z. - 特許庁

In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-81, the number of effect patterns of the variable display forewarning effect executable during the variable display foreshadowing executable period Z is variably displayed during the variable display forecast effect executable period X. Less than the number of production patterns of the notice production, that is, if time-saving loss A wins in the variable display of the remaining hold in the time-saving state in the second special figure, the time-saving loss in the variable display of the first special figure The number of execution patterns of notice effects during variable display may be smaller than when A wins. By doing so, in the case where the time-saving loss A is elected in the variable display of the remaining hold in the time-saving state in the second special figure, it is suitably in the time-saving state without excessively fanning by the notice effect during the variable display. can be restored.

It should be noted that, in this feature part 130SG, as shown in Figure 284-81, in the variable display of the remaining hold in the time-saving state in the second special figure, if the time-saving loss A is won, the variable display of the first special figure Although the number of production patterns of the notice production during the variable display that can be executed is less than the case where the loss with time saving A is won, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving in the second special figure is illustrated. In the variable display of the remaining hold in the state, if the loss A with time reduction is won, the notice effect during the variable display may be disabled. In other words, the fact that "there are few types of specific suggestive effects to be executed" in this characteristic part includes that the forewarning effect during variable display is not executed in any of the effect patterns.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG-1, the time saving acquisition chance production B is exemplified by both the variable display of the first special figure and the variable display of the second special figure, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited, but in the case of executing the variable display of the second special figure, in the time saving state with a relatively small number of time saving control such as time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state C1, time saving acquisition chance production B While it is executable, in a time saving state with a large number of time saving control such as a time saving state A3 and a time saving state C2 (a time saving state controlled to a jackpot game state with an extremely high probability), even if the time saving acquisition chance production B is restricted. good. In addition, if the variation pattern in which the time saving chance production B is executed in the time saving state A3 and the time saving state C2 is selected, a dedicated reach production or variable display notice production until the end of the original time saving chance production B may be executed.

In addition, as described above, when the variation pattern in which the time reduction acquisition chance production B is executed in the time reduction state A3 and the time reduction state C2 is selected, a dedicated reach production or variable In the case of executing the notice effect during display, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the execution period (T2) of the original time saving chance production B is shorter than the execution period (T1) of the time saving chance production A, Even if a dedicated ready-to-win performance or a notice performance during variable display is executed, the sense of incongruity caused by the fact that the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is not executed for the player can be suppressed to a low level, and the variable display can be suitably adjusted.

In the above example, the time reduction acquisition chance production B is not executed in the time reduction state A3 and the time reduction state C2, but when the variation pattern in which the time reduction acquisition chance production B is executed in the time reduction state A3 and the time reduction state C2 is selected. 1 exemplifies a mode in which the variable display is adjusted while suppressing the discomfort given to the player by executing a dedicated effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state A3, the time saving state In C2, the variation pattern in which the time saving acquisition chance presentation B is executed may not be selected in the first place.

(Characteristic part 130SG-2)
Further, in the characterizing section 130SG, the holding display notice effect can be executed, and the presence or absence of the holding display notice effect and the effect pattern can be determined in the pre-reading notice setting process (S161). Regarding the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice effect and the effect pattern, the characteristic part 130SG-2 is shown in FIGS. You just have to decide. In the pending display notice effect, the production pattern α is a production pattern in which the pending display is displayed in blue, the production pattern β is a production pattern in which the pending display is displayed in green, and the production pattern γ is a production pattern in which the pending display is displayed in red. It is a production pattern displayed in .

In the examples shown in FIGS. 284-82 (A), FIG. White display of display) ratio is the highest, the execution ratio of the pending display notice effect production pattern α is lower than the non-execution ratio of the hold display notice effect production pattern β, and the execution ratio of the hold display notice effect production pattern β is the hold display It is set lower than the execution ratio of the performance pattern α of the notice performance, and the execution ratio of the performance pattern γ of the pending display notice performance is set lower than the execution ratio of the performance pattern β of the suspension display notice performance. Also, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of non-execution of the pending display notice effect (white display of the pending display) is the lowest, and the execution ratio in the production pattern α of the pending display notice effect is the non-execution of the pending display notice effect. higher than the execution ratio, the execution ratio in the production pattern β of the pending display notice effect is higher than the execution ratio in the production pattern α of the pending display notice effect, and the execution in the production pattern γ of the pending display notice effect is the hold display notice It is set higher than the execution ratio in the effect pattern β of the effect.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 284-82 (A), 284-82 (B), and 284-82 (C), the holding display notice effect is shown in the case where the variable display result is a loss and the case where it is a big hit. can be executed, the pending display notice effect is not executed when the variable display result is lost with time saving. By doing so, the variable display result is always displayed in white (non-execution of the pending display notice effect) is prevented, that is, the variable display result is displayed in colors such as blue, green, red, etc., which prevents the player from paying attention to the fact that the time saving is not included. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the special pattern and the decorative pattern are displayed in combination with the self-supporting and missing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-82 (B), as the pending display notice effect for the second special figure in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3, production pattern α, production pattern β, production pattern γ 3 It is possible to execute the pending display forewarning effect in each production pattern, and when the variable display result is non-reach out, execution with the performance pattern α of the pending display forewarning effect is determined at 5%, and the variable display result is When the normal reach is lost, the performance pattern α of the pending display notice effect is determined at 20%, and when the variable display result is the super reach loss, the performance pattern α of the pending display notice effect is executed at 30%. The performance pattern β of the pending display notice effect is determined to be 20%, and the performance pattern γ of the pending display notice effect is determined to be 10%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-82 (C), as a pending display notice effect for the second special figure in the time saving state C2, the effect pattern β and the effect pattern γ are suspended in two effect patterns. In addition to being able to execute the display notice effect, if the variable display result is non-reach or normal reach, the execution of the hold display notice effect is not decided, and if the variable display result is super reach, hold display The performance pattern β of the notice effect is determined at 10%, and the performance pattern γ of the pending display notice effect is determined at 5%.

In other words, the number of performance patterns that can be executed as a pending display notice effect is less in the time saving state C2 than in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3, and if there is no pending memory where the variable display result is a big hit, the pending display notice effect is performed. The ratio of execution is lower in the time saving state C2 than in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3. Therefore, in the time saving state C2 of the present characteristic part 130SG-2, it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the excessive increase in expectation due to the holding display notice effect, and the pachinko equipped with the time saving state. The marketability of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-82 (C), in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 in this feature part 130SG-2, both the pending display notice effect can be executed with the effect pattern β and the effect pattern γ. It's becoming In particular, in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the performance pattern β and the performance pattern γ of the pending display notice performance can be executed at the same rate, thereby reducing the data capacity required for the pending display notice performance. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-82 (A) and 284-82 (C), in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3 and the time saving state C2, the production pattern β and the production pattern as the production pattern of the pending display notice production γ can be executed, but the ratio of control to the big hit game state by executing the production pattern β or the production pattern γ for the pending display notice effect (big hit expectation) is the time saving state C2 is the time saving state A2 And it is set higher than the time saving state A3. In this way, in the characteristic part 130SG-2, part of the effect patterns of the pending display notice effect can be executed in common in different time saving states, thereby suppressing an increase in the number of effect patterns of the pending display notice effect. The development cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced by the reduction of the development cost of the pachinko game machine 1, and the expectation of a big hit between the performance pattern β and the performance pattern γ is higher in the time saving state C2 than in the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3, thereby reducing the time. It is possible to preferably increase the player's expectation for the pending display announcement effect during the state C2.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 284-82 (A), 284-82 (B), and 284-82 (C), the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the holding that occurred during the time saving state C2 In the case of memory, even when variable display based on the reserved memory is executed in a normal state, the reserved display notice effect can be executed for the reserved memory, and in any state, the variable display result is time-saving. The suspension display forewarning effect is not executed for the case of losing the tie. Therefore, as shown in Figure 284-83, for the hold display based on the maximum of four hold memories stored immediately after the end of the time saving state, either the first special figure hold memory or the second special figure hold memory Even if there is, the variable display is executed during the execution of the result performance without executing the reservation display advance notice performance, and the shooting star performance or the V stock performance is executed based on the fact that the result of the variable display is not accompanied by time saving.

In addition, as described above, in this characteristic portion 130SG-2, the pending display notice effect is not executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is not with time saving, so as shown in FIGS. 284-84 There may be a case where a holding memory that the variable display result is a big hit occurs after a holding memory that the variable display result is a loss with time saving. In this case, while the suspended display based on the suspended memory in which the variable display result is a big hit over a plurality of variable displays is continuously displayed in any of the production pattern α, the production pattern β, and the production pattern γ. After the variable display of time-saving and loss is executed, the reach performance of super reach α and the time-saving acquisition chance performance are executed without executing the variable display of the big hit, and the variable display is stopped, the game state changes to the time-saving state C1. to be controlled. For this reason, in this characteristic part 130SG-2, the player can be made to pay attention to the pending display of the big hit behind it instead of the pending display of the time saving and losing, so that the combination of the special pattern and the decorative pattern showing the time saving and losing is possible. It is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to what is displayed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as a pending display notice effect, the target pending display is displayed in a common display mode (any of the production pattern α, the production pattern β, and the production pattern γ) over a plurality of variable displays. Although the form of display is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the pending display notice effect, at least a part of the display mode of the target pending display is displayed over a plurality of times of variable display. You may make it change. Furthermore, the ratio of control to the big win game state may be made different according to the change pattern of the display mode of the pending display which is the object of these pending display notice effects.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 130SG-2, the form in which the pending display notice effect is not executed is exemplified for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result does not include time saving, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute the pending display notice effect also for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory that the variable display result is lost with time saving.

In this way, for the case where it is possible to execute the suspension display notice effect also for the suspension display corresponding to the suspension storage in which the variable display result is lost with time saving, for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-85 and 284-86 , If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is not with the time saving in the maximum of 4 pending memories stored at the end of the time saving, it is possible to execute the pending display notice effect for the pending display according to the pending memory On the other hand, when the holding memory that the result of the variable display is not with the time saving is derived during the time saving state A, the holding display notice performance may not be executed for the holding display according to the holding memory. By doing so, the variable display immediately after the time saving state ends can give the player a sense of tension and improve the game interest, so that the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state is enhanced. can be done.

Furthermore, even if it is possible to execute the holding display notice effect for the holding display according to the holding memory that the variable display result is not with time saving, as shown in Figure 284-87, time saving state A, time saving state B. Among the maximum four holding memories stored at the end of the time-saving state C, there is a holding memory in which the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display result is attached to the holding memory before the big hit. If there is a pending memory that will be lost, the variable display result will be a pending memory that will be a big hit while executing the pending display notice effect for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory that will be lost with time saving. The pending display notice effect may not be executed for the corresponding pending display.

By doing so, the variable display result is a big hit in the pending memory (second special figure pending memory) stored at the end of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C Before the pending memory If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a loss with time saving A, it will be controlled to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 before being controlled to the jackpot game state, and the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 will be controlled. Even if the variable display result becomes a big win in the first variable display, the time-saving state C is achieved by not executing the pending display notice performance for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory that the variable display result becomes the big win. It is possible to reduce the sense of useless pulling due to the extremely shortened period of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG-2, there is a holding memory in which the variable display result is a big hit in the maximum four holding memories stored at the end of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C, and , If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is not with time saving before the pending memory that becomes the big hit, the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is not with time saving is targeted. is executed, and the pending display announcement effect is not executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, Among the maximum four holding memories stored at the end of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the time-saving state C, there is a holding memory in which a variable display result is a big hit, and before the holding memory to be the big hit. If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is not with time saving, the pending display notice effect is executed for the pending display according to the pending memory in which the variable display result is not with time saving, while the variable display result is A holding display forewarning performance targeting the holding display corresponding to the holding memory that becomes a big hit is executed before the holding memory that becomes the big hit at a lower rate than when there is a holding memory in which the variable display result is time-saving and lost. Alternatively, it may be possible to execute the performance pattern more than the case where the variable display result is the suspended display corresponding to the suspended memory that the time saving is not attached.

In other words, there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a big hit in the maximum four pending memories stored at the end of the time saving state C, and the variable display result is attached to the holding memory before the big hit. In the form of restricting the execution of the pending display notice effect when there is a hold memory that becomes a loser, the hold display notice effect for the hold display corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable display result is a big hit is not executed. The holding display notice effect for the holding display corresponding to the holding memory where the variable display result is a big hit is lower than the case where there is no holding memory where the variable display result is time saving before the holding memory that becomes the big hit. Making it possible to execute at a ratio, holding that the variable display result will be lost with time reduction before the holding display that targets the holding display according to the holding memory that the variable display result is a big hit before the holding memory that is the big hit It includes making it possible to execute with fewer production patterns than when there is no memory.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG-2, a mode is illustrated in which the pending display notice effect can be executed even for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is not with time saving, but the present invention is based on this. It is not limited, and if a plurality of pending memories are stored in which the variable display result is not with time saving in the pending memory, among the plurality of pending memories in which these variable display results are not with time saving, first Only the reserved memory in which the variable display is executed may be subject to execution of the reserved display notice effect, and the other reserved memories may not be subjected to the reserved display notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of wasteful drawing due to the variable display result again being the loss of time saving after the game state is controlled to the time saving state C.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 130SG-2, in the image display device 5, the number of the first special figure reserved storage, the number of the second special figure reserved storage, the small pattern corresponding to the variable display of the decoration pattern, the panel display effect and the reservation display notice A form of displaying background images such as a read-ahead image such as an effect and a first background image and a second background image is exemplified. For example, these images are drawn as shown in FIGS. When doing so, the image of the first image data with the highest display priority, the image of the first image data with the highest display priority, the panel display effect The display priority is lower than the image of the first image data for the pre-reading image such as the pending display notice effect The image of the second image data, the background image such as the first background image and the second background image has the lowest display priority An image to be displayed on the image display device 5 may be created by drawing an image of the third image data and synthesizing the image of the first image data, the image of the second image data, and the image of the third image data. . By doing so, even if a common pre-reading notice is executed in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C2, it is possible to give a visually different impression depending on the background image, so the development cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced. A sound that preferably enhances the performance effect of the pre-reading notice can be obtained after the reduction.

(Characteristic part 130SG-3)
Further, in the characteristic portion 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-48, the execution ratio of the notice effect during the variable display in the variable display of the second special figure is exemplified in a form that is common in all the time saving states, but the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIGS. 284-90 to 284-92 as the characteristic portion 130SG-3, the execution ratio of the notice effect during variable display in the variable display of the second special figure is set to the time saving state A1 ~ Time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, and time-saving state C2 may be different.

As shown in FIGS. 284-90 and 284-92 (B), in the time saving state A1 to the time saving state A3 and the time saving state C2, the variable display notice when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit B The rate at which the effect is executed in the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E is different. In particular, in the time saving state A1 to the time saving state A3, the ratio of execution of the notice effect during the variable display in the production pattern E is set higher than the time saving state C2, so in the time saving state A1 to the time saving state A3 By executing the notice effect during variable display in the effect pattern E, a special feeling can be enhanced during the continuous game, and the marketability of the game machine equipped with the time-saving state can be enhanced.

In addition, regarding the notice effect during variable display when the variable display result is a big hit and the jackpot type is a big win B, the time saving state C2 is better than the time saving state A1 to time saving state A3. However, in this case, the notice effect during variable display is executed in the effect pattern E during the time saving state C2, thereby effectively increasing the player's expectation. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by increasing it, and to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the time saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-90, if the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A, the notice effect during the variable display is higher than the case where the variable display result is lost in the time saving state A. It is designed to be executed in production pattern A. Therefore, by executing some kind of advance notice performance during variable display, the player does not expect that the special symbols are displayed in combination with time reduction and loss, and the notice performance during variable display is the performance pattern A.例文帳に追加It is possible to make it difficult for a player to recognize that a special pattern and a decorative pattern are displayed in a combination of time reduction and loss without making the player expect that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by execution. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 284-91 and 284-92 (A), for the time saving state B and the time saving state C1, the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E, which are the effect patterns of the notice effect during variable display, The execution ratio of the production pattern E is different. In particular, in this characteristic portion 130SG-2, since the execution ratio of the performance pattern E is set higher in the time saving state B than in the time saving state C1, it is controlled to the jackpot game state during the time saving state B. It is possible to enhance the special feeling to the pachinko game machine 1, and to enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state.

In addition, it is possible to set the execution ratio of the performance pattern E higher in the time saving state C1 than in the time saving state B, but in this case, it is possible to enhance the special feeling when the time saving state C1 is controlled. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-90 to 284-92, in the time saving state A, both the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E, which are the effect patterns of the notice effect during variable display, can be executed, and the time saving state B , both the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E, which are the performance patterns of the notice performance during the variable display, cannot be executed, and in the time saving state C1, the performance pattern D and the performance pattern which are the performance patterns of the notice performance during the variable display. Of E, only the performance pattern E can be executed, and in the time saving state C2, both the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E, which are the performance patterns of the notice performance during variable display, cannot be executed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284-93(A), in the characteristic portion 130SG-3, the execution start timing of the notice effect during variable display for each variation pattern is the first timing and the timing after the first timing. A certain second timing is provided, and the execution start timing of the notice effect during variable display in each time saving state is determined by the ratio shown in Fig. 284-93 (B).

As described above, as shown in FIG. 284-93 (C), there are two execution start timings of the hit production pattern (production pattern D and production pattern E) of the notice production during variable display in the time saving state A1 to A3, and the execution The number of possible hitting effect patterns (effect pattern D and effect pattern E) is two. In the time saving state C1, there are two timings for starting the execution of the winning effect pattern (effect pattern D and effect pattern E) of the notice effect during variable display, and the number of executable hitting effect patterns (effect pattern D and effect pattern E). becomes one. In the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, there are 0 timings for starting the execution of the winning effect patterns (effect pattern D and effect pattern E) of the notice effect during variable display, and the executable hitting effect patterns (effect pattern D and effect Pattern E) The number is 0.

In this way, in the time saving state A1 to the time saving state A3, the number of hit production patterns (production pattern D and production pattern E) of the notice production during the variable display that can be executed more than the time saving state C2 and the execution start timing of the corresponding certain production pattern Due to the large number, the advance notice effect during variable display in the time saving state A1 to the time saving state A3 is diversified, so that the interest of the continuous house in the time saving state A1 to the time saving state A3 can be improved.

In addition, the time saving state C1 has more execution start timings of the execution start timing of the definite effect pattern (effect pattern D and effect pattern E) of the notice effect during the variable display that can be executed than the time saving state B, so that the time saving state Since the advance notice effect during variable display in C1 is diversified, interest in the time saving state C1 can be improved.

284-93, the characteristic portion 130SG-3 exemplifies a form in which the notice effect during variable display cannot be executed in the time saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this. Also in the time-saving state C2, the notice effect during variable display may be executable. In particular, when it is possible to execute the notice effect during the variable display even in the time saving state C2, the notice effect during the variable display is performed at the first timing in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E (accurate effect pattern) in the time saving state C2. You may set the ratio to perform higher than the time saving state A. By doing so, in the time saving state C2 in which the period to be controlled is relatively long, the notice effect during variable display is likely to be executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E from an early timing (first timing). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of and suppress the decline in game interest.

In addition, as described above, when it is possible to execute the notice effect during variable display even in the time saving state C2, in the time saving state C2, the notice effect during variable display is performed more than the time saving state A. pattern) is set high, and in the time saving state C1, the ratio of executing the notice effect during variable display in the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E (probability pattern) is set lower than in the time saving state A. (Percentage of execution of hit probability effect pattern: time saving state C2>time saving state A>time saving state C1). In this manner, in the time-saving state C2 in which the period to be controlled is relatively long, the proportion of executing the notice performance during variable display in the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E is high, so that the game is sharp and interesting. can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the ratio of executing the notice performance during variable display in the performance pattern E in the time saving state C2 to be higher than the ratio of executing the notice performance during variable display in the performance pattern E in the time saving state C1, the time saving state C2 is achieved. Since it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the delay caused by not being controlled to the jackpot game state, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state can be enhanced.

In addition, as the modification, the ratio of executing the notice effect during variable display in the performance pattern E in the time saving state C2 is made higher than the ratio of executing the notice effect during variable display in the effect pattern E in the time saving state C1. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The production may be performed at a higher rate than the production pattern D and the production pattern E. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state of the jackpot B during the time saving state C1, so that the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving state is enhanced. can be enhanced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-93, this characteristic portion 130SG-3 exemplifies a form in which the notice effect during variable display cannot be executed in the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to execute the notice effect during variable display even in the time saving state B.例文帳に追加In particular, if it is possible to execute the notice effect during variable display even in the time saving state B, in the time saving state B, the notice effect during the variable display is performed at the first timing in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E (accurate effect pattern). You may set the ratio to perform higher than the time saving state C1. By doing so, in the time saving state B in which the period to be controlled is relatively long, the notice effect during variable display is easily executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E from an early timing (first timing). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of and suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

(Characteristic part 130SG-4)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 130SG, when the result of the variable display of the second special figure is a big hit, only the big win B is determined as the big win type, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As shown in FIGS. 284-94 (A) and 284-94 (B) as the characteristic portion 130SG-4, when the variable display result of the first special figure is a big hit and when the variable display result of the second special figure is It may be possible to determine the big win A and the big win B as the big win types in both cases of the big win.

In this way, both when the variable display result of the first special pattern is a big hit and when the variable display result of the second special pattern is a big hit, the jackpot types A and B can be determined. Regarding, as shown in FIGS. 284-94 (C) and 284-94 (D), if the jackpot type is jackpot A, a combination of even numbers of decorative patterns at the end timing of the ready-to-win effect (for example, " 222", ``444'', ``666'', and ``888''), and a promotion suggesting performance and a big win suggesting that the jackpot type is a big win B as a part of the blessing performance until the end timing of the variable display. It is also possible to make it possible to execute a jackpot type notification performance for notifying which of the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the hit type is the big hit B, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the end timing of the ready-to-win performance with an even-numbered combination (for example, ``222'', ``444'', ``666'' and ``888''). , As a part of the blessing performance up to the end timing of the variable display, a promotion suggesting performance suggesting that the big win type is the big win B and a big win type reporting performance notifying whether the big win type is the big win A or the big win B. On the other hand, at the end timing of the ready-to-win performance, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in combinations of odd numbers (for example, ``111'', ``333'', ``555'', and ``777'') until the end timing of the variable display. You may perform the blessing production|presentation which does not include the promotion suggestion production|presentation mentioned above and the jackpot type notification production|presentation.

In this way, if the combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped at the end of the ready-to-win production and the presence or absence of execution of the promotion suggesting production and the jackpot type notification production are changed according to the jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 284-94 (E) In addition, the ratio of the even number arrangement and the odd number arrangement, which are the modes of temporary stop of the decorative symbols, may be varied according to the game state and the type of the jackpot. In addition, if the temporary stop mode of the decorative pattern is determined to be even-numbered (if it is decided to execute the promotion suggestion production and the jackpot notification production in part of the blessing production), the production pattern that is the production pattern of the promotion suggestion production The pattern X and the performance pattern Y may be determined at different ratios according to the jackpot type.

As shown in FIGS. 284-96, the effect pattern X of the promotion suggesting effect displays a repeated hitting promotion image for instructing the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 631B on the image display device 5. This is an effect that repeatedly switches the jackpot type between jackpot A (display of "3R" on the image display device 5) and jackpot B (display of "10R" on the image display device 5) at high speed in accordance with repeated hits of the button 631B. On the other hand, in the effect pattern Y of the promotion suggesting effect, the image display device 5 displays a repeated hitting promotion image instructing the player to press and hold the chance button 631B. The jackpot type is an effect in which the jackpot A (display of "3R" on the image display device 5) and the jackpot B (display of "10R" on the image display device 5) are repeatedly switched at high speed.

284-94(E) to determine the temporary stop state of the decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. When the type is reported to be the big win A), the promotion suggesting performance is further executed and the big win B is reported as the big win type reporting performance (it is re-notified that the big win type is the big win B, also called promotion). The ratio (promotion rate) is set so that the normal state is the lowest, and increases in order of time reduction state A1 to time reduction state A3, time reduction state B, time reduction state C1 to time reduction state C2 (promotion rate: time reduction state C (time reduction State C1, time saving state C2)>time saving state B>time saving state A (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3)>normal state).

As described above, when comparing the case where the game state is the normal state and the case where it is the time saving state B, when the decoration pattern temporarily stops with an even number combination during the variable display of the time saving state B (the jackpot A is notified ), the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with an even number combination during the variable display in the normal state (when the big win A is reported) (the big win B is re-reported). (if applicable). That is, in the time-saving state B, even if the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in a combination of an even number during variable display (the jackpot A is notified), there is a possibility that the jackpot B will be notified again as a jackpot type notification effect than in the normal state. is high, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the temporary stop of the even-numbered combination of the decorative symbols during the variable display. You can prevent the loss of interest.

Furthermore, when the game state is the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B is compared, when the decoration pattern temporarily stops with an even number combination during the variable display of the time-saving state B (when the jackpot A is notified ), the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the combination of decorative symbols with an even number is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the time saving state A (when the jackpot A is notified) (the jackpot B is notified again) ). That is, in the time-saving state B, even if the combination of decorative symbols with an even number temporarily stops during variable display (the jackpot A is notified), the jackpot B can be notified again as a jackpot type notification effect than in the time-saving state A. Since the performance is high, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the temporary stop of the combination of the even-numbered decorative patterns during the variable display, and the temporary stop of the even-numbered combination of the decorative patterns. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest due to

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG-4, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a big hit, the type of the big win can be determined from the big win A and the big win B having a larger number of rounds than the big win A. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of determining the jackpot type to be the jackpot B when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot, the jackpot type is decided to be the jackpot A. It may be possible to determine a special variation pattern different from the case. Further, the special variation pattern may be selectable as a common jackpot variation pattern when the jackpot type is the jackpot B in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C. By doing so, even if a plurality of types of time saving states are provided, the variation pattern can be shared in different time saving states, so that the data capacity of the variation pattern can be reduced.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 130SG, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the time saving state A and the time saving state C, the game state is controlled to the time saving state B from the end of the 685th variable display. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in time saving state A and time saving state C, the time saving state being executed (time saving state A, time saving state C) You may control a game state to the time saving state B after completion|finish of. By doing so, it is possible to unify the control when the start condition of the other time saving state (second time saving state) is satisfied during the time saving state of 1 (first time saving state), so the control load of the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 130SG, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the normal state (the condition for starting the time saving state B is satisfied), or when the variable display result is out of time saving (the start of the time saving state C If the condition is satisfied), the game state is controlled to the time saving state B or the time saving state C from the end timing of these variable display, that is, the start timing of the pattern fixing period (Figs. 284-33, 284 -34), the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the normal state (the condition for starting the time saving state B is satisfied), or when the variable display result is out of time saving (The condition for starting the time saving state C is satisfied), the game state may be controlled to the time saving state B or the time saving state C at the end timing of the symbol fixing period of these variable displays.

Furthermore, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times in the normal state as in the characteristic portion 130SG (the condition for starting the time saving state B is satisfied), or when the variable display result is out of time saving (time saving state C When the start condition is satisfied), the game state is controlled to the time saving state B or the time saving state C from the end timing of these variable displays. From the control timing), the display of a right-handed promotion image with an arrow and "Right-handed" written on the upper right part of the image display device 5 may be started. By doing so, the timing when the game state is controlled to the time saving state B or the time saving state C can be matched with the display start timing of the right hitting promotion image, so that the game ball is directed to the right game area for the player. Launch can be accelerated in a more precise period.

(Characteristic part 130SG-5 to 10)
As shown in FIG. 285-1, the wings 130SG221 and 130SG321 provided on the left and right sides of the opening/closing door frame 50 are provided with a plurality of frame LEDs as the frame lamps 9b. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-1(A), a plurality of frame LEDs 901 are arranged in a vertical direction on the upper left of the front edge of the left wing 130SG221, and a plurality of frame LEDs 902 are arranged on the lower left of the front edge. are arranged vertically. In addition, a plurality of frame LEDs 903 are vertically arranged in a row at the upper right front edge of the right wing 130SG321, and a plurality of frame LEDs 904 are arranged in a row at the lower right of the front edge.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-1(B), character panels 130SG400A to 130SG400D displaying characters appearing in various effects are provided on the inner surfaces of the left and right wings 130SG221 and 130SG321. is provided with a plurality of frame LEDs as frame lamps 9b. Specifically, a plurality of frame LEDs 911 to 916 are provided around the upper left character panel 130SG400A, a plurality of frame LEDs 917 to 922 are provided around the lower left character panel 130SG400B, and a plurality of frame LEDs 917 to 922 are provided around the upper right character panel 130SG400C. , a plurality of frame LEDs 923 to 928 are provided, and a plurality of frame LEDs 929 to 934 are provided around the lower right character panel 130SG400D. Note that these frame LEDs may be provided at locations other than those described above.

As shown in FIG. 285-2(A), the game board 2 is formed with an opening 2c for making the image display device 5 visible, and a plurality of board LEDs are provided around the opening 2c. It is Specifically, board LEDs 951 to 956 are provided on the upper left side of the game board 2, board LEDs 957 to 962 are provided on the lower left side, board LEDs 963 to 968 are provided on the upper right side, and board LEDs 963 to 968 are provided on the lower right side. is provided with board LEDs 969 and 970 . The left board LEDs 951 to 962 are arranged on the first flow-down path for game balls provided on the left side of the opening 2c, and the right board LEDs 963 to 970 are arranged on the second flow-down path for game balls provided on the right side of the opening 2c. It is These panel LEDs may be provided at locations other than those described above.

Also, the movable body 32 arranged above the opening 2c of the game board 2 is provided with a plurality of movable body LEDs as the movable body lamps 9d. Specifically, the movable body LEDs 981 to 986 are arranged at positions corresponding to the logo "XXX" displayed on the front surface of the movable body 32, and the movable body LEDs 987 and 988 are arranged to correspond to the logo "XXX" displayed on the front surface of the movable body 32. ” is placed at a position corresponding to Note that these movable body LEDs may be provided at locations other than those described above.

In this way, the upper left board LEDs 951 to 956 and the lower left board LEDs 957 to 962 are arranged along the first flow path, and the upper right board LEDs 963 to 968, the movable body LEDs 981 to 986, and the lower right board LEDs 969 to 970 are arranged. It is arranged along the second flow path.

Also, the special variable winning ball device 7 provided at the lower right of the opening 2c of the game board 2 is provided with a plurality of attacker LEDs as the attacker lamps 9c. Specifically, a plurality of attacker LEDs 991 are provided at an upper position of the large winning opening door 7A, and a plurality of attacker LEDs 992 are provided in an area corresponding to a large winning opening (so-called "attacker") below the large winning opening door 7A. is provided, an attacker LED 993 is provided near the second count switch 130SG024, and a plurality of attacker LEDs 994 are provided near the second starting port switch 22B (variable winning ball device 6B) and at the lower position of the gate switch 21. is provided. That is, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are attacker LEDs capable of emitting light in the area corresponding to the big winning opening, and the attacker LED 993 is an attacker LED capable of emitting light in the area corresponding to the second count switch 130SG024 (so-called V area). , The attacker LED 994 is an attacker LED capable of emitting light in the vicinity of the second starting switch 22B and the area corresponding to the gate switch 21 (so-called "general electric"). In each of the production V and the right-handed promotion production F, target areas can be individually illuminated. These attacker LEDs may be provided at locations other than those described above.

As shown in FIG. 285-2(B), the frame LEDs 901 to 904 as the frame lamp 9b correspond to the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table "WAXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later. The frame LEDs 911 to 922 emit light based on the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table “WLXX” (“X” is any alphanumeric character) described later, and the frame LEDs 923 to 934 emit light based on the luminance data described later. Light is emitted based on the luminance data described in the column of "WRXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) of the luminance data table.

Further, the board LEDs 951 to 962 emit light based on the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table "ELXX" ("X" is an arbitrary alphanumeric character) described later, and the board LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on the luminance data described later. Light is emitted based on the luminance data described in the column of the table "ERXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character).

Movable body LEDs 981 to 988 as the movable body lamp 9d emit light based on luminance data described in a column of a luminance data table "LLXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later. Also, the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 as the attacker lamp 9c emit light based on the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table "ATXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later.

<Production mode in various game states>
Next, normal state, jackpot game state, time saving state A1, C1, time saving state A2, A3, B, sound pattern of BGM (background sound) in each of C2, various lamps (frame LED 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LED 951 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994) will be described with reference to FIG. 285-3(A).

In this feature part, BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the game state and period and each LED (frame LED 901-904, 911-922, 923-934, board LED 951-956, 957-962, 963 ˜968, 969-970) have different emission modes.

For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (A), when the game state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 outputs BGM to the speaker based on the sound pattern N10 during the variable display (high-speed scrolling) period of the decorative symbols. Output from 8L and 8R, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on a brightness data table (not shown) for variable display. During the ready-to-win effect execution period, BGM is output based on the sound pattern N20, and frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are displayed in the luminance data table for ready-to-win effect. (not shown). In the execution period of the notification effect, the BGM is output based on the sound pattern N30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, the board LEDs 951 to 970, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are displayed in the brightness data table for the notification effect. (not shown).

Further, when the game state is the jackpot game state, BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern F10, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are output from the brightness data table WA1 and the brightness data table WA1 during the fanfare effect execution period (fanfare effect part). Brightness data table WL1 and WR1 for frame LEDs 911 to 934, brightness data table EL1 for board LEDs 951 to 962, brightness data table ER1 for board LEDs 963 to 970, brightness data table LL1 for movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and brightness data for attacker LEDs 991 to 994. Light is emitted based on the table AT1. In the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect A, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F10, frame LEDs 901-904 are displayed in the brightness data table WAA, frame LEDs 911-934 in the brightness data tables WLA and WRA, and board LEDs 951-962 in the brightness data table. The table ELA, the board LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on the luminance data table ERA, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on the luminance data table LLA, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on the luminance data table ATA. In the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect V, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F10, the frame LEDs 901-904 are displayed in the luminance data table WAV, the frame LEDs 911-934 are displayed in the luminance data tables WLV and WRV, and the board LEDs 951-962 are displayed in the luminance data table. The table ELV, the board LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on the luminance data table ERV, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on the luminance data table LLV, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on the luminance data table ATV. During the execution period of the mid-round effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, the board LEDs 951 to 970, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness for the mid-round effect. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of the ending effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, the board LEDs 951 to 970, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are displayed in the luminance data table for the ending effect. (not shown).

In addition, when the game state is either the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1 (during "FINAL BATTLE"), during the execution period of the rush performance A (rush performance A part), the BGM is played to the speaker 8L based on the sound pattern B10. , 8R, frame LEDs 901 to 904 in luminance data table WA2, frame LEDs 911 to 934 in luminance data tables WL2 and WR2, board LEDs 951 to 962 in luminance data table EL2, board LEDs 963 to 970 in luminance data table ER2, movable body The LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on the luminance data table LL2, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on the luminance data table AT2. In the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect F, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B10, the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are displayed in the brightness data table WAF, the frame LEDs 911 to 934 in the brightness data tables WLF and WRF, and the board LEDs 951 to 962 in the brightness data table. The table ELF, the board LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on the luminance data table ERF, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on the luminance data table LLF, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on the luminance data table ATF. During the execution period of the time-saving production, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B20, and the frame LEDs 901-904, 911-934, the board LEDs 951-970, the movable body LEDs 981-988, and the attacker LEDs 991-994 are set to the brightness for the FINAL BATTLE production. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of the result production A, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B30, and the frame LEDs 901-904, 911-934, the board LEDs 951-970, the movable body LEDs 981-988, and the attacker LEDs 991-994 have the luminance for the result production A. Light emission is controlled based on a data table (not shown).

In addition, when the game state is one of the time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2 (during "BATTLE RUSH"), the BGM is played during the execution period of rush production B (rush production B part). Output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound pattern R10. EL3 to 7, board LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on luminance data tables ER3 to ER7, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on luminance data tables LL3 to LL7, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on luminance data tables AT3 to AT7. In the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect F, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B10, the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are displayed in the brightness data table WAF, the frame LEDs 911 to 934 in the brightness data tables WLF and WRF, and the board LEDs 951 to 962 in the brightness data table. The table ELF, the board LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on the luminance data table ERF, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on the luminance data table LLF, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on the luminance data table ATF. During the time-saving production execution period, BGM is output based on the sound pattern R20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to BATTLE RUSH production brightness. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of the result production B, BGM is output based on the sound pattern R30, and the frame LEDs 901-904, 911-934, the board LEDs 951-970, the movable body LEDs 981-988, and the attacker LEDs 991-994 have the luminance for the result production B. Light emission is controlled based on a data table (not shown).

In addition, in this characteristic part, if the variable display result is a big hit or time saving is lost, and if the number of variable display times reaches 685 times (when the start condition of time saving state B is satisfied), these big hits or time saving are lost Election of each LED (Frame LED 901-904, 911-922, 923-934, Board LED 951-956, 957-962, 963-968, 969-970) Rainbow It is possible to execute a rainbow effect of emitting light in a (rainbow color) mode, displaying a rainbow image (image in rainbow mode) on the image display device 5, and a movable body effect of moving the movable body 32.

For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), in the case where the variable display result is a big hit (jackpot winning), the effect control CPU 120 controls the reach before the variable display in which the variable display result is a big win, the reach After that, while the rainbow effect and the movable body effect can be executed at each timing when the control of the jackpot game state is started, the rainbow effect and the movable body effect are not executed during the pattern fixing period.

In addition, when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times (ceiling reaching fluctuation), the effect control CPU 120 executes rainbow effect and movable body effect at each timing before reach and after reach during the 685th variable display. On the other hand, the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are executed during the design determination period and the control start of the time saving state B. That is, during the variable display in which the number of times of variable display is 685 in this characteristic part, that is, during the variable display in which the conditions for starting the time saving state B are satisfied, the rainbow effect and the movable body effect are not executed.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is not with time saving and the type of time saving is not with time saving A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display result is without time saving before reach, after reach, during variable display. The rainbow effect and the movable body effect are not executed at each timing when the control of the time saving state C1 is started during the pattern determination period.

In addition, when the variable display result is not with time saving and the type of time saving is not with time saving B, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display result is without time saving before and after reach during variable display. While the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are not executed at each timing, the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are executed at the timing when the control of the time saving state C2 is started. In other words, if the variable display result in this characteristic part is not with time saving (when it is controlled to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 after the variable display), rainbow production and movable body production during the variable display and during the design determination period is not executed.

In particular, when the result of the variable display is a big win, the effect mode of the rainbow effect differs according to the game state in which the variable display is executed. For example, as shown in the left diagrams of FIGS. 285-3(C) and 285-3(D), the rainbow effect when the game state is the normal state has 5 steps as a step-up effect (see FIG. 284-50). This effect is to display a rainbow image (background image) together with the image of the character E, which is the image of the eyes. It is a production that emits light at. On the other hand, as shown in the right diagrams of FIGS. 285-3 (C) and 285-3 (D), the rainbow effect in the case where the gaming state is the time-saving state is the effect executed together with the rush effect B during the symbol determination period. In this case, an image different from the rainbow mode (non-rainbow mode image) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the image of the character E, which is the image of the fifth stage, is displayed as a step-up effect. It is a production that emits light in a rainbow mode.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 285-3 (C) and 285-3 (D), in the rainbow effect executed in the normal state and the rainbow effect executed in the time saving state, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 While the display luminance data table used for causing each LED to emit light is different, the emission luminance data table used for causing each LED to emit light is common.

In addition, in the variable display in this characteristic part, as shown in FIGS. It is possible to perform a stop pattern action display in which the size is temporarily enlarged, then returned to the normal size (reduced), and after the reduced pattern is displayed in a flashing manner (flash display), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. However, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 performs the stop pattern action display depends on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a time-saving loss, and whether the number of variable display times has reached 685 times ( (whether or not the conditions for starting the time saving state B are satisfied).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 285-3(E) and 285-9(A) to 285-9(E), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 stops symbol action. The display is executed, but when the variable display result is lost with time saving and when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times (start condition of time saving state B is satisfied), the effect control CPU 120 executes stop symbol action display do not do. It should be noted that, although not shown, even when the variable display result is lost, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the stop symbol action display.

In this characteristic part, as shown in FIG. 285-4(A), as right-handed promotion effects (promotion displays), there are three types of right-handed promotion effects: right-handed promotion effects A, right-handed promotion effects V, and right-handed promotion effects F. It is possible to execute a hitting promotion effect.

The right-handed promotion performance A is a performance executed during the execution period of the fanfare performance based on the variable display of the big win when the result of the variable display of the first special figure is a big win. On the other hand, it is an effect that prompts the game ball to enter the big winning hole by launching the game ball toward the right game area. Further, in the right-handed promotion effect A, light emission control of each attacker LED (attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 994, attacker LED 993) is executed based on the luminance data tables WAA, WLA, WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, ATA. It has become so.

The right-handed promotion effect V is an effect executed during the execution period of the fanfare effect based on the variable display resulting in the small win when the result of the variable display is a small win. This is an effect that prompts the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball (generate V winning) by launching the game ball toward the game area. Further, in the right-handed promotion effect V, light emission control of each attacker LED (attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 994, attacker LED 993) is executed based on the luminance data tables WAV, WLV, WRV, ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV. It has become so.

The right-handed promotion performance F is a performance executed during the execution period of a rush performance (a rush performance A or a rush performance B) corresponding to the controlled time-saving state when controlled to any of the time-saving states. , It is an effect that urges the player to detect the game ball by hitting the game ball toward the right game area (normally establish the start condition of the symbol). Further, in the right-handed promotion effect F, light emission control of each attacker LED (attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 994, attacker LED 993) is executed based on the luminance data tables WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF. It has become so.

More precisely, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), as the promotion display of the right-handed promotion effect A, a character image is displayed in the lower left part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display area of the image display device 5 is displayed. An image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is shown in the lower right part, and a right-handed shot is shown in the central part of the image display device 5 to urge the player to hit the game ball toward the right game area to win the game ball into the big winning hole. A promotional image (a message of “Right shot” and an image of an arrow pointing right), and a semicircular arrow image convex upward from the left to the right on the upper part of the image display device 5 are displayed in a rainbow color scheme (rainbow colors). be done.

In the image display device 5, the background images of the character image, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7, the right-handed promotion image, and the upward semicircular arrow image are displayed from the center of the image display device 5. An effect image is displayed in which a plurality of radial straight lines extend toward the edge of 5 . Furthermore, in the right-handed promotion effect A, the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 in the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is more conspicuous than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 993 and the attacker LED 994. It is highlighted by being displayed in a color scheme or with high brightness.

During the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect A, a sound of "right-handed" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed performance sound that urges the player to enter the game ball into the big winning hole. be done.

As the promotion display of the right-handed promotion effect V, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is displayed in the lower right part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is displayed in the center part of the image display device 5 toward the right game area for the player. Right hitting promotion image (image of message "Aim for V!!") prompting the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball (generate V winning) by hitting the game ball, the upper part of the image display device 5 , a semicircular arrow image convex upward from the left to the right is displayed in white. In the right-handed promotion effect V, the right-handed promotion image is displayed in the same size as the right-handed promotion image displayed in the right-handed promotion effect A.

Furthermore, in the right-handed promotion effect V, in the image of the special variable winning ball device 7, the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 993 is more conspicuous than the parts corresponding to the arrangement positions of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 and the attacker LED 994. It is highlighted by being displayed in a color scheme or with high brightness.

During the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect V, the sound of "Aim for the V" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the right-handed effect sound to urge the player to enter the game ball into the big winning hole. output.

As the promotion display of the right-handed promotion effect F, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the image display device 5, and the center portion of the image display device 5 is directed toward the player toward the right game area. The upper part of the image display device 5, which prompts the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball (generate V winning) by hitting the game ball (the image of the message "Aim here!") , a semicircular arrow image convex upward from the left to the right is displayed in white. In the right-handed promotion effect F, the right-handed promotion image is displayed in a size smaller than the right-handed promotion image displayed in the right-handed promotion effect A and the right-handed promotion effect V (the size of the right-handed promotion image : Right-handed promotion effect A=Right-handed promotion effect V>Right-handed promotion effect F).

Furthermore, in the right-handed promotion effect F, the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 994 in the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is more conspicuous than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 and the attacker LED 993. It is highlighted by being displayed in a color scheme or with high brightness.

During the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect V, the sound of "Aim for the V" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the right-handed effect sound to urge the player to enter the game ball into the big winning hole. output.

Here, focusing on the lighting mode of each attacker LED during execution of the right-handed promotion effect, as shown in FIG. , WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA, the positions corresponding to the arrangement positions of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 in the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 are changed to the attacker LED 993 and the attacker LED 993. While the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are blinking in a rainbow color scheme (rainbow color) in response to the highlighted display from the location corresponding to the arrangement position of the LED 994, the attacker LED 993 and the attacker LED 994 are kept off. be.

During the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect V, light emission control is executed based on the brightness data tables WAV, WLV, WRV, ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV, so that the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is improved. Among them, the location corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 993 is highlighted more than the location corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LEDs 991, 992 and the attacker LED 994, while the attacker LED 993 blinks in white. , the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 and the attacker LED 994 are kept off.

During the execution period of the right-handed promotion effect F, light emission control is executed based on the brightness data tables WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF, so that the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is improved. Among them, the location corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 994 is highlighted by being displayed in a color scheme or high brightness that is more conspicuous than the locations corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LEDs 991, 992 and the attacker LED 993. , the attacker LED 994 blinks in white, while the attacker LEDs 991, 992 and the attacker LED 993 remain off.

During execution of the right-handed promotion effect A, the LEDs corresponding to the right-handed path are sequentially illuminated in a rainbow color scheme. The LEDs corresponding to the right-handed path are sequentially lit in white.

Further, focusing on the right-handed effect sound, as shown in FIG. A right-handed production sound is output from. On the other hand, during the execution of the right-handed promotion performance F, the right-handed performance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume smaller than that during the execution of the right-handed promotion performance A and during the execution of the right-handed promotion performance V ( Sound volume of right-handed hitting effect sound: Right-handed hitting promotion effect A=Right-handing promoting effect V>Right-handing promoting effect F).

As described above, as shown in FIG. 285-4(E), in the right-handed promotion effect A, the character image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-handed promotion image is the same size as the right-handed promotion effect V. In addition, it is an effect displayed in a size larger than the right-handed promotion effect F. In addition, the right-handed promotion effect A is the promotion display ( Acceleration display of right hitting promotion effect A) is displayed. Note that when a name is displayed on the image display device 5 in the right-handed promotion effect A, no message image other than the name display is displayed (for example, below the message image of "FEVER" which is the name display) There is no display of a message image (rush display) such as “rush” or a message image (big hit explanation display) indicating conditions for the variable display result to be a big hit).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-4(E), in the right-handed promotion effect V, the character image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-handed promotion image is the same size as the right-handed promotion effect A and has the same size as the right-handed promotion effect A. This is an effect displayed in a size larger than the effect F. In addition, the right-handed promotion effect V is shown in FIG. The promotion display (promotion display of right-handed promotion effect V) is displayed. Note that when a name is displayed on the image display device 5 in the right-handed promotion effect V, no message image other than the name display is displayed (for example, below the message image of "FEVER" which is the name display) There is no display of a message image (rush display) such as “rush” or a message image (big hit explanation display) indicating conditions for the variable display result to be a big hit).

Then, as shown in FIG. 285-4(E), in the right-handed promotion effect F, the character image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-handed promotion image is displayed from the right-handed promotion effect A and the right-handed promotion effect F. is also displayed in a small size. In addition, the right-handed promotion effect F is displayed on the image display device 5 (a message image of “FINAL BATTLE” corresponding to the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, the time saving After the display of the message image of "BATTLE RUSH" corresponding to the state C2), the promotion display (promotion display of the right-hand hitting promotion effect F) shown in FIG. 285-4(B) is displayed. In addition, when the name is displayed on the image display device 5 in the right-handed promotion effect F, in addition to the message image other than the name display, the message image of "Rush" (rush display) and the variable display result are the big hits. A message image (big win explanation display) showing the condition (if the movable body 32 falls during the variable display, a big win will occur) is also displayed.

As for each right-handed promotion effect shown in this characterizing part, as shown in FIG. (See FIG. 285-4 (B)) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For at least one right-handed promotion effect, the name display may be displayed after the promotion display corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 . For example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(F), in the right-handed promotion effect F, after the promotion display corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect F is displayed on the image display device 5, the right-handed promotion effect F is displayed. On the other hand, in the right-handed promotion effect A and right-handed promotion effect V, the name display corresponding to each right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the present characteristic part. After that, an promotion display corresponding to each right-handed promotion effect may be displayed.

In addition, in this characteristic part, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), when the number of times of variable display reaches 685 times, the rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow effect is performed during the design determination period of the 685th variable display. , and the rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5 (executing the rainbow effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the 685th variable display pattern confirmation period In , the light emission of each LED in the rainbow mode as the rainbow effect and the display of the rainbow image on the image display device 5 may not be performed (the rainbow effect may not be performed).

In addition, in this characteristic part, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), when the variable display result is a loss with time saving, in the pattern confirmation period of the variable display, in the rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow effect , and the display of the rainbow image on the image display device 5 is not performed (the rainbow effect is not performed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the result of the variable display is not with time saving. In this case, it is possible to make it possible for each LED to emit light in a rainbow mode as a rainbow effect and to display a rainbow image on the image display device 5 (a rainbow effect can be executed) during the pattern fixing period of the variable display.

Next, FIG. 285-5 is a diagram showing the production mode from the big hit fluctuation to the rush production A via the big hit, and FIG. FIG. 285-7 is a diagram showing the effect mode of the rush effect B, and FIG. 285-8 is a diagram showing the effect mode when the loss B with time saving is won during the time saving state A1.

285-5 to 285-8, extended commands generated corresponding to each production part and production scene, BGM (sound pattern) output as background sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, image display device 5 The display mode of the image displayed in , and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 9b are shown. 285-8 corresponds to the presentation mode of FIG. 284-65.

In Figure 285-5, the production scenes (Q11) and (Q12) correspond to the fanfare production part, the production scene (Q13) corresponds to the mid-round production part, and the production scenes (Q14) to (Q16) and later are rush production A. It corresponds to the part. In FIG. 285-7, production scenes (S2) to (S11) correspond to rush production B part, and production scene (S12) and subsequent ones correspond to BATTLE RUSH production part. Also, in FIG. 285-8, production scenes (T1) to (T3) correspond to the rush production part A, production scenes (T4) to (T12) correspond to the rush production part B, and the production scene (T13) onwards. corresponds to the BATTLE RUSH production part. It should be noted that the display mode displayed in each production scene is merely an example, and a plurality of images that are not shown are actually displayed.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 285-10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 turns on/blinks/lights off one or more lamps (LEDs) among a plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. It outputs luminance data for making the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting / blinking / light extinction performed with respect to lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for production|presentation control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the effect control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 subject to lamp control. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/lights off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 store a brightness data table storing brightness data for lamp control of each game effect lamp 9 . The brightness data table is the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the brightness for SP reach used in each part during SP reach (flashing part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, character action part, etc.) It includes a data table and a luminance data table for background.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability/low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, and a jackpot game. The jackpot background luminance data table used during the round of the state, the ending background luminance data table used in the ending state in which the ending effect that informs the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the low probability high base state (time saving state), and a time-saving background luminance data table used in the state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of game states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot game state, an ending state, and a time saving state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on whether the That is, the effect control CPU 120 uses one of the background luminance data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs luminance data based on the background luminance data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority when using each of the error luminance data table, the SP reach luminance data table, and the background luminance data table is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-10, the priority is higher when used in the order of the luminance data table for error, the luminance data table for SP reach, and the luminance data table for background.

For example, the production control CPU 120, when developing into SP reach while outputting luminance data based on the normal background luminance data table in the normal state, the SP reach luminance data table corresponding to the SP reach is displayed in the normal background. The SP reach luminance data table is used preferentially over the SP reach luminance data table, and luminance data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach luminance data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a mode corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background, and the SP reach develops, the mode corresponding to the SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. , the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. While the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for normal background is not output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, luminance data based on the background luminance data table is output to the LED driver, and when a big hit results in a fanfare state, luminance data based on the fanfare background luminance data table is output to the LED driver. output.

More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses a background luminance data table corresponding to the game state under control while timing the lamp control time corresponding to the game state under control with a timer. However, if it develops into SP reach or the like, the luminance data table for SP reach corresponding to the SP reach is preferentially used over the luminance data table for background and the luminance data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the clocking of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the SP ready-to-win luminance data table. Since the luminance data contained in the data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table is not output to the LED driver. ing. After the end of the SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data included in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

Further, for example, when an error occurs while outputting luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach during SP reach, the effect control CPU 120 sets the luminance data table for error corresponding to the error to SP reach. It outputs the luminance data to the LED driver based on the error luminance data table, which is used with priority over the error luminance data table. As a result, if an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control in a mode corresponding to SP reach based on the brightness data table for SP reach, a game effect is generated in a mode corresponding to the error based on the brightness data table for error. Lamp 9 is lamp controlled. While the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. When returning to the game state of , luminance data based on the luminance data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the effect control CPU120, while measuring the time of the lamp control corresponding to the SP reach under control by the timer, using the brightness data table for the SP reach corresponding to the SP reach to the LED driver brightness Data is output, but when an error occurs, the brightness data table for error corresponding to the error is preferentially used over the brightness data table for SP reach, and brightness data is output to the LED driver. During this time, the effect control CPU 120 keeps updating the value of the timer without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the brightness data table for SP reach. That is, the effect control CPU 120 continues to update the luminance data included in the SP reach luminance data table even while the game effect lamp 9 is under lamp control based on the error luminance data table, but the SP reach luminance data table Since the luminance data contained in the luminance data table has a lower priority than the luminance data contained in the error luminance data table, the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table should not be output to the LED driver. It's becoming After the error is released, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the luminance data table for SP reach to the LED driver again from the continuation of the luminance data that has been continuously updated.

<Lighting Mode of Game Effect Lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting luminance data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In the present embodiment, terms relating to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9 such as the frame lamp 9b, the board lamp, the movable body lamp 9d, and the attack lamp 9c are "turned off", "almost turned off", "turned on", and "blinking". and so on. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "lights off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of zero. The term "almost extinguished" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" to be described later).

For example, when RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as luminance data of the frame lamp 9b is "000", the frame lamp is "turned off". Also, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white with extremely low luminance (see FIG. 285-19). In the present embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "almost extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

When W (White) data defined as luminance data of the movable body lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c is "0", the movable body lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c are "turned off". Further, when the luminance data (data of W) of the movable body lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c is "1", the movable body lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c are lit with extremely low luminance. In the present embodiment, the state of the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially extinguished" for the sake of convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always lit, wave lighting, in which a plurality of lined lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are sequentially switched from off to on, and lighting when the game effect lamp 9 is on. It also includes haze lighting that dimly lights while changing the luminance. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the luminance data is any one of "2" to "F". The brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F", where "0" is no brightness, "1" is the lowest brightness, and "F" is the highest brightness. becomes higher.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode other than the above-described "turning off" or "turning on" of the game effect lamp 9, in which the lighting luminance of each lamp is a first luminance and a second luminance higher than the first luminance. including alternately switching between For example, "blinking" includes repeating turning on and off or almost off. This includes switching over time between the luminance data being "0" and "1". As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is haze lighting. , and blinking are different in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and extinguishing or substantially extinguishing.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be described with reference to FIGS. 285-11 to 285-36.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using luminance data table]
The effect control CPU 120 uses the luminance data table stored in the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 to light/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 . The sub-fluctuation time is a counter that is decremented by 1 in one frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. The display control unit 123 controls the ROM 121 or Based on the image data (moving image data, animation data) stored in the RAM 122, display control of the image display device 5 is performed. The display control unit 123 provides an extended command (for example, an extended command DXXX (“X” is an arbitrary Alphanumeric characters)) is set, and the extension command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the effect display (effect scene) whose display is controlled by the display control unit 123 based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123 .

For example, FIG. 285-11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 285-11, when the display control section 123 performs display control for the fanfare effect part, it transmits an extended command (BC02) for designating the fanfare effect part to the effect control CPU 120 . The effect control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the fanfare effect part based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123 .

In the parent table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each lamp. , and information specifying a child table (a specified address of the child table) to be referred to during lamp control for each lamp. In the parent table, only lamps to be controlled are specified, and lamps not to be controlled are not specified. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 285-13(A), which will be described later, the frame lamp 9b, the board lamp, the movable body lamp 9d, and the attacker lamp 9c are designated as lamp control targets. 600000 ms is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. In the parent table shown in FIG. 285-13(A), child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 are designated for the frame lamp 9b, child tables EL1 and ER2 are designated for the board lamp, and movable body lamps are designated. Child table LL1 is designated for 9d, and child table AT1 is designated for attacker lamp 9c.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, in the parent table for the fanfare effect part, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp 9b. In order to time this 600000 ms (10 minutes), 1 is subtracted from the counter every 10 ms. That is, the effect control CPU 120 counts 600000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60000 times. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600000 ms (10 minutes) is clocked. In the parent table for the fanfare production part, WA1/WL1/WR1 are designated as child tables.

In the child table, information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 and a grandchild table to be referenced at each time when lamp control is performed are specified. information (designated address of grandchild table). For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 285-13(B), which will be described later, a grandchild table (WA11-17/WL11-17/WR11-17, etc.) is referenced for each time ta1-ta15. is specified.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, in the child table WA1/WL1/WR1 for the fanfare production part, 800, 200, 130 . . . , and the effect control CPU 120 counts 800, 200, 130 . The grandchild tables designated by the tables WA1/WL1/WR1 are used for lamp control. For example, in the child table WA1 for the fanfare production part, RA11 and WA11 to WA17 are designated as grandchild tables.

The grandchild table stores information specifying a lamp (lighting position) to be subjected to lamp control among various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and luminance data used at each time when lamp control is performed. ing. For example, the grandchild tables RA11 to RA13 corresponding to time ta1 store luminance data corresponding to RGB used every 40 ms.

The luminance data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the object of lamp control. For example, the frame lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three elements "R", "G", and "B", and the luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. . Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 levels of current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the lowest value (for example, 0), and when the luminance data is F The current value becomes the maximum value. For example, when luminance data “A” is output to the element “R”, a current corresponding to the luminance data “A” flows through the element “R”, and an element “G” receives “1”. When the luminance data is output, the current corresponding to the luminance data of "1" flows through the element of "G", and when the luminance data of "F" is output to the element of "G", the current corresponding to the luminance data of "F" is output. A current corresponding to the luminance data of 'G' flows through the element 'G'.

The frame lamp 9b can emit light in various colors by applying a current corresponding to luminance data to each element of RGB. Further, the frame lamp 9b can be illuminated in a color or the like according to each effect or character by emitting light based on luminance data. As an example, in the fanfare effect, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in red. In rush effect A, data of “F0F” is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light reddish purple. In the rush effect B, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the luminance data, and the current corresponding to the data flows to light the LED in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, for example, in the grandchild table WA11 corresponding to time ta2, “FFF” and “444” are alternately specified at intervals of 30 ms as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. ing. The effect control CPU 120 counts 200 ms, which is the time specified by the child table, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms. Output to the LED driver. Then, based on the received luminance data, the LED driver causes a current corresponding to the luminance data to flow through the specified LED. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 can lamp-control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a timer corresponding to each of the parent table, the child table, and the grandchild table. Lamp control is performed based on the table, child table, and grandchild table.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data from the first specified location of the grandchild table, and when the output of the luminance data is completed up to the last specified location of the grandchild table, the grandchild table is displayed. If the value of the timer corresponding to the specified child table still remains, output of luminance data is started again from the first specified location of the corresponding grandchild table. On the other hand, when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table designating the grandchild table becomes 0 while the luminance data is being output based on the grandchild table, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after switching.

The timer management of the child table by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 285-12 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of the child table. As shown in FIG. 285-12, in the child table for the fanfare production part, 200 ms is specified as the time ta2 during which lamp control is performed for the frame lamp 9b, and WA11, WL11, and WR11 are specified as grandchild tables. ing. In the grandchild table WA11, "FFF" and "444" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 ms as luminance data (RGB data) for each lamp. For convenience of explanation, the data "FFF" in the first 30 ms is called data 1, and the data "444" in the next 30 ms is called data 2.

The effect control CPU 120 counts 200 ms specified by the child table WA1 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and until the clock reaches 200 ms, data 1 and data 2 are generated at intervals of 30 ms based on the grandchild table WA11. is output to the LED driver, but if the clock has not reached 200 ms after outputting data 1 to data 2, the luminance data is again output to the LED driver in order from the first data 1. When the clock reaches 200 ms, the effect control CPU 120 stops outputting luminance data based on the grandchild table WA11 at that point, and starts outputting luminance data based on the next grandchild table W12 specified by the child table. do. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has passed.

It should be noted that, like the parent table shown in FIG. 285-13(A), which will be described later, child data is specified over 600000 ms (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table plays a role in troubleshooting. responsible for That is, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the effect control command from the CPU 103. Even when the CPU 120 does not receive the performance control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so that different lamp controls are prevented from being performed one after another from the point where trouble occurs. can do.

Also, as in the child table shown in FIG. 285-13(B), which will be described later, grandchild data is specified over 600000 ms (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and 10 minute data in such a child table is , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, the role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first designated location of the child table due to the timer of the parent table still remaining. responsible for

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 285-17, which will be described later, luminance data is specified over 600000 ms (10 minutes) at the final specified location. When the value of the timer corresponding to becomes 0, it plays the role of preventing the lamp control from being performed again from the first designated place of the grandchild table due to the timer of the child table still remaining.

In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to be 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with the determined single light emission, thereby preventing the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can be done. Furthermore, if the luminance data for 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem that the lighting of the lamp continues to change. can.

As described above, the luminance data table consists of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table. Of these, only characteristic tables are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the fanfare production part]
FIG. 285-13(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the fanfare production part. As shown in FIG. 285-13(A), in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the fanfare production part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes). Information designating child tables (WA1, WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, AT1) referred to during lamp control for the game effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 285-13(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the fanfare production part. As shown in FIG. 285-13(B), in the child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 of the frame lamp 9b, the time of the fanfare production part is subdivided for the frame lamp 9b, and the grandchild table referred to in each time zone. is specified. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta13, and ta15, grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-14 (A) to (C), in the grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13, seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at intervals of 30 ms as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. are sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13 to smoothly light each of the frame lamps 9b in a rainbow color corresponding to winning determination.

Grandchild tables WA11, WL11, and WR11 are specified at times ta2, ta4, ta6, ta8, and ta10. The grandchild tables WA11, WL11, and WR11 correspond to the grandchild table WA11 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 285-15(A), in the grandchild table WA11, "FFF" and "444" are specified alternately at intervals of 30 ms as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. It is The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA11 to blink the frame lamp 9b in white. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control over 200 ms (30 ms×6) based on the grandchild table WA11 at time ta2, thereby blinking the frame lamp 9b three times in white.

At times ta3, ta5 and ta7, grandchild tables WA13-15, WL13-15 and WR13-15 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-15(C) to 285-15(E), the grandchild tables WA13 to WA15, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, have similar colors of green "0F0" at intervals of 30 ms. Various luminance data are specified in the range of . The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA13-15, WL13-15, and WR13-15 to light the frame lamp 9b in a green color.

Grandchild tables WA12, 16, 17, WL12, 16, 17, and WR12, 16, 17 are specified at times ta9, ta11, ta12, and ta14. The grandchild tables WA12, 16, and WA17, as shown in FIGS. 285-15(B), (F), and (G), are RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, and red at 30 ms intervals. Various luminance data within the range of similar colors of "F00" are specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA12, 16, 17, WL12, 16, 17, and WR12, 16, 17, thereby lighting the frame lamp 9b in a reddish color.

In this way, in the child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 of the fanfare production part, the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b lights/blinks while changing the color to the green-based color or the red-based color with white blinking. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), a fanfare effect for congratulating the start of the jackpot game state can be enhanced.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect A part]
FIG. 285-16(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the rush effect A part. As shown in FIG. 285-16(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush effect A part, the maximum time during which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes). Information designating child tables (WA2, WL2, WR2, EL2, ER2, LL2, AT2) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 285-16(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the luminance data table used for the rush effect A part. As shown in FIG. 285-16(B), in the child tables WA2, WL2, and WR2 of the frame lamp 9b, the time of the rush effect A part is subdivided for the frame lamp 9b, and the grandchildren referred to in each time zone are subdivided. A table is specified. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at times tb1 and tb2, grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-17A to 285-17C, in the grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21, "000" ( light-off) is specified. For the second luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "F0F" is designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21, thereby basically extinguishing the frame lamp 9b (instantaneously lighting reddish purple based on the second luminance data).

At time tb3-tb24 (excluding tb10, tb19, tb22), grandchild tables WA22-2A, WL22-2A, WR22-2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, 29) is specified. Grandchild tables WA22-2A, WL22-2A, and WR22-2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29) are grandchild tables shown in FIGS. As in tables WA22, 23, WL22, 23, and WR22, 23, "F0F" and "000" are specified at intervals of 30 ms as RGB data output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA22-2A, WL22-2A, and WR22-2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, 29), The lamp 9b is flashed in reddish purple. In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the grandchild tables WA22-2A, WL22-2A, and WR22-2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29) at each time tb3-tb24. ), the frame lamp 9b is blinked in reddish purple a predetermined number of times by performing lamp control over a predetermined number of ms (30 ms×n times).

At times tb10, tb19, and tb22, grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29 are specified. The grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29 represent RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, such as white-purple, purple-white blinking, etc., at 30 ms intervals. Various luminance data within the range of colors similar to purple flashing "0F0" are specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29 to light the frame lamp 9b in reddish purple.

In this way, in the child tables WA2, WL2, and WR2 of the rush effect A part, the frame lamp 9b is turned off until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, and then basically lights up/blinks in a reddish-purple color. Since the luminance data is switched as shown in FIG. The rush performance A can be livened up.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 1) part]
FIG. 285-18(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. As shown in FIG. 285-18(A), in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes) and information designating child tables (WA3, WL3, WR3, EL3, ER3, LL3, AT3) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-18(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. As shown in FIG. 285-18(B), in the child tables WA3, WL3, and WR3 of the frame lamp 9b, the grandchild table referred to in the rush effect B (scene 1) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-19A to 285-19C, in the grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31, "000" ( light-off) is specified. For the second luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FF0" is designated, and for the third to fifth luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FFF" and "666" are designated. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31, thereby basically extinguishing the frame lamp 9b (instantaneously turning on yellow based on the second luminance data).

In this way, in the child tables WA3, WL3, and WR3 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part, the frame lamp 9b is basically extinguished from the start. As shown in S2) and (S6), it is possible to boost the rush effect B that informs that the control (BATTLE RUSH effect) of the time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 is started (enters).

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 2) part]
FIG. 285-20(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part. As shown in FIG. 285-20(A), in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes) and information designating child tables (WA4, WL4, WR4, EL4, ER4, LL4, AT4) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-20(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part. As shown in FIG. 285-20(B), in the child tables WA4, WL4, and WR4 of the frame lamp 9b, the time of the rush effect B part is subdivided for the frame lamp 9b, and the grandchildren referred to in each time zone are subdivided. A table is specified. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time td1, since none of the grandchild tables is specified, the effect control CPU 120 basically turns off the frame lamp 9b.

At times td2-td11, grandchild tables WA41A-41J, WL41A-41J, and WR41A-41J are specified. The grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J are connected to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, like the grandchild tables WL41A, 41B, WR41A, and 41B shown in FIGS. Yellowish colors (low luminance) such as “ECA” and “000” are specified at intervals of 30 ms (40 ms in some cases) as RGB data to be output. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA41A-41J, WL41A-41J, and WR41A-41J to light the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color (low luminance). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control over a predetermined ms (30ms×n times) based on the grandchild tables WA41A-41J, WL41A-41J, and WR41A-41J at each time td2-td11. The frame lamp 9b is turned on in a yellowish color (low luminance).

Thus, in the child tables WA4, WL4, and WR4 of the rush effect B part (scene 2), the frame lamp 9b is turned off until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, and then basically turns yellow (low light). Since the luminance data is switched so that it lights up / blinks at the luminance), as shown in FIGS. A rush effect B for informing the start (plunging) can be made lively.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 3) part]
FIG. 285-22(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part. As shown in FIG. 285-22(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes) and information designating child tables (WA5, WL5, WR5, EL5, ER5, LL5, AT5) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-22(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part. As shown in FIG. 285-22(B), in the child tables WA5, WL5, and WR5 of the frame lamp 9b, the time of the rush effect B part is subdivided for the frame lamp 9b, and the grandchildren referred to in each time zone are subdivided. A table is specified. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time te1, only grandchild table WA52 is specified. As shown in FIG. 285-23(A), in the grandchild table WA52, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, yellowish colors (low luminance) such as "FC0" are displayed at intervals of 30 ms. Corresponding luminance data is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA52 to basically light the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color (low luminance).

At times te2-te6, grandchild tables WA52, WL51A-51C, and WR51A-51C are specified. As shown in FIG. 285-23(A), in the grandchild table WA52, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, yellowish colors (such as "600" and "000") are displayed at intervals of 30 ms. low brightness) is specified. Further, as shown in FIGS. 285-23B to 285-23F, as in grandchild tables WL51A to 51C and WR51A to 51C, RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b is displayed at intervals of 30 ms. , low-luminance red, green, and blue such as "600", "006", and "060" are specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA52, WL51A-51C, and WR51A-51C, thereby lighting the frame LEDs 901-904 of the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color (low luminance), and the frame LEDs 911-934. lights up in red, green, and blue (low brightness).

In this way, in the child tables WA5, WL5, and WR5 of the rush effect B part (scene 3), the frame lamps 9b are illuminated mainly in low-brightness yellow and low-brightness red, green, and blue. Since the data is switched, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S5), the control of the time saving state A2, A3, B, C2 (BATTLE RUSH production) is started (entering) rush production B to inform It can be heaped up.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 4) part]
FIG. 285-24(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part. As shown in FIG. 285-24(A), in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 5000 ms (5 seconds) and information designating child tables (WA6, WL6, WR6, EL6, ER6, LL6, AT6) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-24(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part. As shown in FIG. 285-24(B), in the child tables WA6, WL6, and WR6 of the frame lamp 9b, the grandchild table referred to in the rush effect B (scene 4) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time tf1, only grandchild tables WA61 and WL61 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-25(A) and (B), in the grandchild tables WA61 and WL61, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b corresponds to seven colors (rainbow colors) at intervals of 30 ms. Various brightness data and brightness data corresponding to "000" (light off) are alternately specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA61 and WL61 to blink each of the frame lamps 9b in a rainbow color (also referred to as rainbow color) corresponding to winning confirmation.

In this way, in the child tables WA6, WL6, and WR6 of the rush effect B part (scene 4), the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b blinks in rainbow color, so that the display in FIG. As shown, "V STOCK", that is, an effect for notifying that there is a big hit pending memory can be enhanced.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 5) part]
FIG. 285-26(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part. As shown in FIG. 285-26(A), in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes) and information designating child tables (WA7, WL7, WR7, EL7, ER7, LL7, AT7) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-26(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part. As shown in FIG. 285-26(B), in the child tables WA7, WL7, and WR7 of the frame lamp 9b, the grandchild table referred to in the rush effect B (scene 5) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time tg1, grandchild tables WA71, WL71, and WR71 are specified. As shown in FIG. 285-27(A), in the grandchild table WA71, luminance data corresponding to "000" (turned off) are stored at intervals of 30 ms as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. specified. For the fifth and subsequent luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FF0", "770", "000", etc. are designated. The effect control CPU 120 basically lights the frame lamp 9b in yellow by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA71 to WA74.

At times tg2-tg4, grandchild tables WA71-74, WL71-74, and WR71-74 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-27B to 285-27D, in the grandchild tables WA72 to WA74, "FF0", "440" and "FF0", "440" and "FF0" at intervals of 30 ms are output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b as RGB data. , “310”, etc. are specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA71 to WA74 to basically light/blink the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color.

In this way, in the child tables WA7, WL7, and WR7 of the rush effect B (scene 5) part, the luminance data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b basically lights in a yellowish color. 7 (S10), it is possible to boost the rush effect B that informs that the control of the time saving states A2, A3, B, C2 (BATTLE RUSH effect) is started (enters).

[Comparison of Ramp Control between Fanfare Effect, Rush Effect A, and Rush Effect B]
FIGS. 285-28(A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining the comparison of ramp control between the fanfare effect, the rush effect A, and the rush effect B. FIG. In the following, the lamp control of the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in the frame lamp 9b will be explained as an example, and the explanation of the lamp control of the frame LEDs 911 to 934 will be omitted. good too.

First, using FIGS. 285-28(A) to (C), the first and second luminance data in the first grandchild table (first grandchild table) of each effect part are compared.

As shown in FIG. 285-28(A), at the start of the fanfare production part, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table RA11. In the grandchild table RA11, "F06", "F08", "F0A", and "F0C" (red series colors) are displayed at 40 ms as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. "F00" (red) is specified at 40 ms as the second RGB data. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table RA11 to light up the frame lamp 9b in a reddish color corresponding to the start of the fanfare effect informing the start of the control of the jackpot game state. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(B), at the start of the rush effect A part, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table WA21. In the grandchild table WA21, "000" (light off) is specified at 20 ms as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904, and "000" is specified at 20 ms as the second RGB data. F0F" (magenta) is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA21, thereby first extinguishing the frame lamp 9b in response to the start of the rush performance A that notifies the start of the control of the time saving states A1 and C1. After that, it is lit in reddish purple, which is the main color of rush effect A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(C), at the start of the rush effect B part, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table WA31. In the grandchild table WA31, "000" (off) is specified at 20 ms as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904, and "000" is specified at 10 ms as the second RGB data. FF0” (yellow) is specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA31 to correspond to the start of the rush effect B that notifies that the control of the time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 is started, and the frame lamp 9b. is first turned off, and then turned on in yellow, which is the main color of rush effect B.

In this way, in the variable display reaching the time saving state B or the variable display in which the display result wins the time saving A and B, it is not the variable display controlled to the jackpot game state, so the image display device 5 aspect and the By making the mode of the frame lamp 9b different from the variable display of the big win, in particular, by making the initial luminance data different to make the initial light emission mode different, it becomes clear that the light emission mode of the frame lamp 9b is different. , since it is possible to prevent misidentification as a jackpot variable display controlled to the jackpot game state, it is possible to enhance the marketability of the game machine equipped with the time saving state.

Next, using FIGS. 285-28(D) to (F), primary colors in the first and next grandchild tables (first and second grandchild tables) of each production part are compared.

As shown in FIG. 285-28(D), at the start of the fanfare production part, lamp control is first performed based on the first grandchild table RA11. In the grandchild table RA11, various luminance data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely designated as RGB data to be output to the lamps included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. FIG. Then, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA11. In the grandchild table WA11, luminance data corresponding to blinking white is designated as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901-904. In this manner, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables RA11 and WA11 at the start of the fanfare effect part, thereby setting the frame lamp 9b to a red-based color including red (first color), which is the main color. to turn it on.

Also, as shown in FIG. 285-28(E), at the start of the rush effect A part, first, ramp control is performed based on the first grandchild table WA21. In the grandchild table WA21, luminance data corresponding to turning off is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901-904. Next, in the rush effect A part, ramp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA22. In the grandchild table WA22, luminance data corresponding to reddish-purple system colors are designated as RGB data to be output to the lamps included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. FIG. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA21 and WA22 at the start of the rush effect A part. 2 colors).

Also, as shown in FIG. 285-28(F), at the start of the rush effect B (scene 1) part, first, lamp control is performed based on the first grandchild table WA31. In the grandchild table WA31, luminance data corresponding to turning off is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901-904. Next, in the rush effect B (scene 2) part, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA41. In the grandchild table WA41, luminance data corresponding to yellowish colors are designated as RGB data to be output to the lamps included in the frame LEDs 901-904. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA31 and WA41 at the start of the rush effect B part (scene 1, scene 2). It is lit in a yellowish color including yellow (third color).

Similar colors will now be described with reference to FIGS. 285-29. Color has three attributes: hue (tint), lightness (luminance, brightness), and saturation (vividness). 2. A combination of colors (adjacent colors) that have the same tone (hue group with the same luminance, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividity)) and that are adjacent to each other in terms of hue; 2. combinations of the same hue but different tones; Color combinations that differ only in lightness or saturation are included.

285-29 (A ) and (B), the three primary colors of light, red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [ 00F] are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees, each of the three colors is dissimilar to each other. Colors that have a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue circle are "similar colors", and are not limited to combinations of colors that are adjacent to each other on the hue circle.

For example, when red (R) is used as a reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees toward yellow (Y) and 30 degrees toward light blue (C) (total of 60 degrees) are colors similar to red (R). When green (G) is used as the reference color, colors that fall within the range of 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total of 60 degrees) are similar colors to green (G). When (B) is the reference color, colors belonging to the range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the magenta (M) side (60 degrees in total) are similar to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, a combination of colors having a hue difference within an angle of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel may be defined as "similar colors".

In addition, similar colors include warm colors such as red and yellow that give a feeling of warmth, cold colors that give a feeling of coldness such as blue and purple, and green and purple. It preferably includes a combination of colors included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors positioned between warm and cool colors.

In this embodiment, as explained with reference to FIGS. 285-28(A) to (C), the first luminance data of the fanfare effect part is the data corresponding to "lighting", whereas the rush effect A part And the first luminance data of the rush effect B part is data corresponding to "lights off", so the first luminance data is different. If the initial luminance data are all "lighting", each luminance data may have a different color code. In this case, the initial brightness data of each of the fanfare effect part, rush effect A part, and rush effect B part have different color codes, but preferably have colors that do not belong to the above-described “similar colors”.

In addition, the second luminance data of the fanfare production part is the main color red "F00", the second luminance data of the rush production A part is the main color red purple "F0F", and the second luminance data of the rush production B part is The luminance data is set to yellow "0FF", which is the main color, and each color is set to a color that does not belong to "similar colors" of other colors, as shown in FIG. 285-29(B). , the difference between the jackpot game state and the time saving state can be clearly indicated.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 285-28(A) to (C), the first luminance of the first grandchild table of each of the fanfare effect part, the rush effect A part, and the rush effect B part Although the form in which the data and the second luminance data are different has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. 285-28 (D) to (F), even if the luminance data of the second is the same, the fanfare effect part, the rush effect A part, and the rush effect B part each Of the primary color of the first grandchild table of the first child table and the primary color of the second grandchild table, at least the primary color of the first grandchild table should be different.

In addition, the main colors of each of the fanfare production part, rush production A part, and rush production B part were red "F00", reddish purple "F0F", and yellow "0FF", but they are colors that do not belong to other similar colors. If there is, it can be changed arbitrarily.

Further, the second control data next to the first control data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare effect part includes the light emission data of the first color (eg red), but the light emission data of the second color (eg magenta) and the third color (eg magenta). Control data that does not include light emission data for a color (eg, yellow). yellow) but does not include the first color (e.g., red) and second color (e.g., magenta) emission data, but the present invention is limited to this. However, for example, when the first rush effect for entering the time saving state B and the second rush effect for entering the time saving states C1 and C2 can be executed separately, the first rush effect in the first rush effect The second control data next to the luminance data includes emission data of the second color (e.g., magenta), but includes emission data of the first color (e.g., red) and third color (e.g., yellow). The second control data next to the first luminance data in the second rush effect includes light emission data of the first color (for example, red), but the second color (for example, magenta) and the third color Control data that does not include light emission data for a color (eg, yellow) may be used.

Further, the "primary color" means all luminance data specified in the luminance data table used for lamp control of the frame lamp 9b in each of the fanfare production part, rush production A part, and rush production B part (production period). Among them, the predetermined color or system color that emits light for the longest time may be used.

As shown in FIG. 285-28(G), the “main color” of the fanfare production part is red “F00”, the “main color” of the rush production A part is reddish purple “F0F”, and the rush production B part The "principal color" of is set to yellow "0FF", but not only the color that emits light for the longest time with the luminance data corresponding to these color codes, but also the time that emits light with the similar color of the predetermined luminance data. Any length longer than the similar color of the luminance data may be used.

Specifically, in the fanfare production part, the ratio of time to emit light in “red system color” is 40%, the ratio of time to emit light in “yellow system color” is 10%, and the ratio of time to emit light in “green system color” is 40%. The percentage is 25%, the percentage of time that emits light in "reddish purple color" is 5%, the percentage of time that emits light in "blue color" is 5%, and the proportion of time that emits light in "light blue color" is 5%. , the proportion of time during which light is emitted in "white-based colors" is set to 10%. Therefore, the "red-based color", which has the largest ratio of light emission time of 40%, is defined as the "main color".

In the rush effect part A, the proportion of time that emits light in "red color" is 5%, the proportion of time that emits light in "yellow color" is 5%, and the proportion of time that emits light in "green color" is 20%. , the percentage of time that emits light in “reddish purple color” is 40%, the percentage of time that emits light in “blue color” is 20%, the percentage of time that emits light in “light blue color” is 5%, and the percentage of time that emits light in “light blue color” is 5%. The ratio of the time for which light is emitted in "color" is set to 5%. Therefore, the "magenta color", which has the highest ratio of light emission time of 40%, is defined as the "main color".

In the rush effect B part, the proportion of time that emits light in "red color" is 20%, the proportion of time that emits light in "yellow color" is 40%, and the proportion of time that emits light in "green color" is 20%. , the percentage of time that emits light in "reddish purple color" is 5%, the percentage of time that emits light in "blue color" is 5%, the proportion of time that emits light in "light blue color" is 5%, and the proportion of time that emits light in "light blue color" is 5%. The ratio of the time for which light is emitted in "color" is set to 5%. Therefore, the "yellowish color", which has the highest ratio of light emission time of 40%, is defined as the "main color".

In addition, in the above description, the color with the highest ratio of light emission time in each production part is exemplified as the "main color", but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the luminance data table in each production part The color corresponding to the color code with the largest number of designations may be set as the "principal color".

285-28, lamp control of the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in the frame lamps 9b of the fanfare effect part, rush effect A, and rush effect B has been described, but other frame LEDs 911 to 934, board lamps, movable bodies As for the lamp 9d, the same lamp control as the frame LEDs 901 to 904 may be performed in each of the fanfare effect part, rush effect A, and rush effect B, or different lamp control may be performed.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed promotion effect A part]
FIG. 285-30(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the right-handed promotion effect A part. As shown in FIG. 285-30(A), in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the right-handed promotion effect A part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 2000 ms (2 seconds). and information designating child tables (WAA, WLA, WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, ATA) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-30(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c in the brightness data table used in the right-handed promotion effect A part. As shown in FIG. 285-30(B), in the child tables ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA of the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, the grandchild table referred to in the right-handed promotion effect A part is specified. ing. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time th1, grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, LLA1, and ATA1 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-31 (A) to (C), in the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, RGB data output to each lamp included in the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed at intervals of 20 ms. Luminance data corresponding to various colors such as "F00", "0F0", and "00F" are specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1 to light the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d in a plurality of colors.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-31(D), in the grandchild table ATA1, as RGB data output to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c, various colors corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at intervals of 30 ms. Luminance data is designated, and luminance data corresponding to "0" (light off) is designated at intervals of 30 ms as W data to be output to the attacker LEDs 992-994. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATA1 to light only the attacker LED 991 in rainbow colors.

Thus, in the child tables ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA of the right-handed promotion effect A part, the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d are directed in the moving direction of the game ball so as to follow the second flow-down path of the game ball. 285-5 (Q12), since only the attacker LED 991 corresponding to the big winning opening lights up in rainbow colors in the attacker lamp 9c. In addition, with the start of the control of the big win game state, the winning area (big winning opening) that the player aims at in the right-handed game can be suitably notified.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed promotion effect V part]
FIG. 285-32(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the right-handed promotion effect V-part. As shown in FIG. 285-32(A), in the parent table in the luminance data table used for the right-handed promotion effect V part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 2000 ms (2 seconds). and information designating a child table (WAV, WLV, WRV, ELV, ERV, LLV, ATV) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 285-32(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of child tables for the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c in the brightness data table used for the right-handed promotion effect V part. As shown in FIG. 285-32(B), in the child tables ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV of the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, the grandchild table referred to in the right-handed promotion effect V part is specified. ing. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time ti1, grandchild tables ELV1, ERV1, LLV1, and ATV1 are specified. The grandchild tables ELV1, ERV1, and LLV1 are substantially the same as the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, and therefore are omitted. As shown in FIG. 285-32(C), in the grandchild table ATV1, as RGB data output to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c, various luminances corresponding to "000" (light off) are displayed at intervals of 30 ms. Data is specified, and as W data output to attacker LEDs 992 and 994, luminance data corresponding to "0" (light off) is specified at intervals of 30 ms, while W data output to attacker LED 993 is: Luminance data corresponding to "F" (white) and "0" (off) are specified at intervals of 30 ms. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATV1 to cause only the attacker LED 993 to flash white.

In this way, in the child tables ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV of the right-handed promotion effect V part, the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d are directed in the moving direction of the game ball along the second flow-down path of the game ball. In the attacker lamp 9c, only the attacker LED 993 corresponding to the V switch, which is the second count switch 130SG024, blinks in white. As shown in , with the start of the control of the small winning game state, it is possible to suitably notify the winning area (V winning opening) that the player aims at by the right-handed game.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed promotion effect F part]
FIG. 285-33(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the right-handed promotion effect F part. As shown in FIG. 285-33(A), in the parent table of the luminance data table used for the right-handed promotion effect F part, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes). and information designating child tables (WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, ATF) referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

FIG. 285-33(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c in the luminance data table used for the right-handed promotion effect F part. As shown in FIG. 285-33(B), in the child tables ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF of the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, the grandchild table referred to in the right-handed promotion production part F is specified. ing. In this embodiment, only the particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and the other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and the description thereof is omitted.

For example, at time tj1, grandchild tables ELF1, ERF1, LLF1, and ATF1 are specified. The grandchild tables ELF1, ERF1, and LLF1 are almost the same as the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, and therefore are omitted. As shown in FIG. 285-33(C), in the grandchild table ATF1, as RGB data output to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c, various luminances corresponding to "000" (light off) are displayed at intervals of 30 ms. Data is specified, and as W data output to attacker LEDs 992 to 993, luminance data corresponding to "0" (light off) is specified at intervals of 30 ms, while W data output to attacker LED 994 is: Luminance data corresponding to "F" (white) and "0" (off) are alternately designated at intervals of 30 ms. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATF1 to cause only the attacker LED 994 to blink in white.

Thus, in the child tables ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF of the right-handed promotion effect F part, the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d are directed in the moving direction of the game ball so as to follow the second flow-down path of the game ball. 285-5 (Q16 ), with the start of control of the time-saving state, it is possible to suitably notify the winning area (second start winning opening and gate) that the player aims for by the right-handed game.

[Comparison of ramp control among right-handed promotion effect A, right-handed promotion effect V, and right-handed promotion effect F]
FIGS. 285-34 to 285-36 are diagrams for explaining the comparison of the ramp control between the right-handed promotion effect A, the right-handed promotion effect V, and the right-handed promotion effect F. FIG. In the following, the lamp control of the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d will be explained as an example, and the lamp control of the frame lamp 9b will be omitted. It may be control.

As shown in FIGS. 285-34 (A) to (D), in the right-handed promotion effects A, V, and F, the image display device 5 is aimed at the special variable winning ball device 7 (attacker) and the right-handed operation is performed. (For example, an arrow image Z101 and an attacker image Z102) are displayed, and the board lamp and the movable body lamp 9d are sequentially turned on along the second flow path, and the area to be awarded by the attacker Lamp control is performed to blink the corresponding lamp.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-35, the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild tables LLA1, ELA1, and ERA1 (see FIG. When the grandchild table corresponding to the body lamp 9d is arranged so as to correspond to the layout of each lamp on the game board 2, from the left side to the right side, the lower left board LEDs 957 to 962, the upper left board LEDs 951 to 956, and the movable body LED 981. 988, upper right board LEDs 963-968, and lower right board LEDs 969-970.

As shown in FIG. 285-35, at time tk1, luminance data "000" (light off) for all lamps is specified, but at time tk2, lighting data for the upper left panel LEDs 951 to 953 are specified, and time At time tk3, lighting data for upper left board LEDs 954 to 956 and movable body LEDs 981, 982, 987, and 988 are specified. At time tk4, lighting data for movable body LEDs 983 and 984 are specified. 986 lighting data is designated, at time tk8 lighting data for the upper right board LEDs 963 to 965 are designated, at time tk9 lighting data for the upper right board LEDs 966 to 965 are designated, and at time tk13 the lower right board Lighting data for the LEDs 969 and 970 is specified. Note that the lower left board LEDs 957 to 962 are arranged in the first flow-down path, and are not targeted, so extinguished data is designated.

Therefore, at times tk1 and tk2, the upper left board LEDs 951 to 953 and 954 to 956 are lit in order (see FIG. 285-34 (A)), and at times tk3 to 7, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 are lit in order (see FIG. 285-34 (B)), from time tk8 to tk12, the upper right board LEDs 963 to 968 are lit in order (see FIG. 285-34 (C)), and from time tk13 onwards, the lower right board LEDs 969 and 970 are lit in order. Lights up (see Figure 285-34(D)). Thus, in the right-handed promotion effects A, V, and F, various lamps are lit according to the change of the arrow image Z101 extending in accordance with the movement of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

In addition, as the luminance data of these lower left board LEDs 957 to 962, upper left board LEDs 951 to 956, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, upper right board LEDs 963 to 968, and lower right board LEDs 969 to 970, right-handed promotion effect A and right-handed In the promotion effect V, brightness data that lights up in seven colors (rainbow colors) is specified, but in the right-handed promotion effect F, a single color other than seven colors (rainbow colors) (for example, white, red, green, blue, etc.) Luminance data for lighting may be specified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-36 (A), in the grandchild table ATA1 of the attacker lamp 9c in the right-handed promotion effect A, as data output to the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 arranged in the big winning opening to be awarded , the luminance data corresponding to lighting and lighting are alternately specified, and the luminance data corresponding to lighting is alternately specified as the data output to the other attacker LEDs 993 to 994. Lamp control is performed to blink the lamp corresponding to the big winning opening area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-36(B), in the grandchild table ATV1 of the attacker lamp 9c in the right-handed promotion effect V, lighting and light-off are specified alternately, and the brightness data corresponding to light-off are alternately specified as data to be output to other attacker LEDs 991 to 992 and 994. Lamp control is performed to blink the lamp corresponding to the V area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-36 (C), in the grandchild table ATF1 of the attacker lamp 9c in the right-handed promotion effect F, as data output to the attacker LED 994 arranged in the second start winning opening to be the winning target , luminance data corresponding to lighting and lighting are alternately specified, and luminance data corresponding to lighting is alternately specified as data to be output to other attacker LEDs 991 to 993. Lamp control is performed to blink the lamp corresponding to the normal electric area.

In addition, in the characterizing part 130SG, the form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

Still another form for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 286 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 286, it is provided on the right side of the game area. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display special symbols as a plurality of types of special identification information. A special design is also called a "special design." The variable display of special symbols is also called a "special symbol game". Both the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

"Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner. "Variable display" also means that a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner with respect to other symbols such as effect symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols. The production design is also called a decoration design or a decoration design. Variable display is also referred to as variable display or simply variation. Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation, enlargement, and reduction of one or more patterns. Variation may include a mode of blinking a certain symbol. In the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are displayed in an updatable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, a plurality of types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of arbitrary patterns, a predetermined pattern is stopped and displayed as a display result at the end. A stop display is also referred to as a derivation display, or simply a derivation. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the variable display is also called a final stop symbol or a fixed symbol. The final stop symbol in the special symbol game is also called a fixed special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also referred to as the variable display result. The display result of a special design is also called a special figure display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol variation time, which is the variation time of the special symbol, and is also called variable display time.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also called "first special symbol". The special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also called a "second special symbol". A special game using the first special game is also called a "first special game". A special game using the second special game is also called a "second special game". There may be one type of special symbol display device that variably displays the special symbols.

A normal symbol display device 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 . In the example shown in FIG. 286, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display device 20 can variably display normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary design is also called 'Fu-zu'. The variable display of normal symbols is also called a “normal game”. The normal symbol display 20 is configured using a 7-segment LED or the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which some or all of the plurality of LEDs are turned on, or a pattern in which all of the plurality of LEDs are turned off. The final stop pattern in the general pattern game is also called a fixed normal pattern. The normal pattern display result is also called a normal pattern display result. The execution time during which the normal pattern is variably displayed in the general pattern game is also referred to as general pattern fluctuation time.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 may be configured using any one of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), a projector, and a screen. In addition, the image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image. The image display device 5 can display various effect images. In addition, the image display device 5 can display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image, without being limited to the effect image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, the performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the first special game and the second special game. The production pattern is a display pattern showing numbers and the like, and serves as a plurality of types of decoration identification information different from special patterns and normal patterns. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 286, "left", "middle" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are provided, and the first special symbol game or the second special symbol is provided. In synchronism with the game, for example, the performance symbols are displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction or being updated, thereby performing variable display of the performance symbols. The synchronously executed special game and the variable display of the performance symbols are also generically called simply the variable display. Synchronization of the variable display may be such that the timing at which pattern variation is started and the timing at which the pattern is finally stopped and displayed after the variation is completed are common timings for different types of symbols. . The final stop pattern in the variable display of the production pattern is also called a fixed production pattern, a fixed decorative pattern, or a fixed decorative pattern. Since the variable display of the performance symbols is synchronized with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the variable display time of the performance symbols is the same as the special symbol fluctuation time.

Even if a display area is provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. good. Suspended presentations and active presentations are also collectively referred to as variable presentation-enabled presentations that correspond to variable presentations. A display area for holding display is also called a holding display area. A display area for active display is also called an active display area. The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The total value of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count. Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 286, a first suspension display device 25A and a second suspension display device 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. . The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs. Above the normal pattern display 20 shown in FIG. 286, a normal pattern holding display 25C including a plurality of LEDs is provided. 25 C of normal-map reservation|holding indicators display the number of normal-map reservation|holding memory|storages by the lighting number of LEDs. The number of reserved memory for the normal pattern is the number of reserved memory corresponding to the normal pattern game.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. Winning ball device 6A, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member, forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter. When the game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the first start condition for executing the first special figure game can be established. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second starting prize opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric accessory solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 287 as a normal electric accessory. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, whereby the second start-up is performed. A closed state in which game balls do not enter the winning opening is established. The closed state of the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as the closed state of the second start winning opening. The variable winning ball device 6B becomes an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning hole by moving the movable wing to the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the ON state. The open state of the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as the open state of the second starting winning hole. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as three, are paid out, and the second start condition for executing the second special figure game can be established. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can be changed between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

The entry of the game ball into the first starting winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also referred to as the first starting winning. The entry of the game ball into the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also referred to as second starting winning. A game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 21A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 21B shown in FIG. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning prize, the addition update of the first reserved memory number becomes possible, and the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A can be executed as the first special symbol game. Based on the occurrence of the second start winning, the second reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the variable display of the special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B can be executed as the second special symbol game.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a general prize winning opening 10 is provided which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 286, two general winning openings 10 are provided at the lower left corner of the game area. When a game ball enters one of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, such as ten, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first path and a second path are provided as flow paths along which game balls flow. The first path is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left area of the image display device 5 is also called a left game area or a left game area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also called a right game area or a right game area. The left game area and the right game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area, the arrangement of the game nails, or the like. Shooting a game ball toward the left game area in order to make the game ball flow down the first path is also called left hitting. Shooting a game ball toward the right game area in order to make the game ball flow down the second path is also called right hitting. The first path is also referred to as a left-handed path. The second path is also called a right-handed path. The first route and the second route may be composed of different routes, or may be a route in which a part is shared.

A game ball is shot from the ball shooting device and struck into the game area in response to the operation of a ball operating handle provided on the ball shooting device. When the game ball hit into the game area is guided to the left game area and flows down the first path, for example, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, so that it is guided to the second path in the right game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce. When the game ball hit into the game area is guided to the right game area and flows down the second path, for example, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, so that it is guided to the first path in the left game area. It becomes impossible or difficult to induce.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on the first path in the left game area, and allows game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the second path in the right game area, and allows game balls flowing down the second path to enter. In addition, the variable winning ball device 6B may be able to enter the game ball flowing down the first path in the left game area. The variable winning ball device 6B may be arranged such that a game ball flowing down the second path in the right side gaming area is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first path in the left side gaming area.

A passage gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50 are provided on the second path in the right game area. The passage gate 41 forms a passage area through which game balls can pass. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the normal reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 20 can be executed as the normal pattern game.

The special variable winning ball device 50 forms a large winning opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a large winning opening solenoid 82 as a special electric accessory. An upper portion of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage having a passage width in the front-rear direction to the extent that game balls can pass therethrough. This guide path slopes down from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on both sides of the extended passage, the front side and the back side. At the center of the guiding path, there is formed an accessory entrance that serves as a big winning entrance. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front-rear direction is provided as a member for opening and closing the large winning opening at a position where the large winning opening can be opened and closed. In the special variable prize winning ball device 50, a fixing member 53 forming a fixed passage is provided in a portion of the guide passage where the large winning opening is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by a large winning prize opening solenoid 82, and can move forward and backward to open and close the accessory entrance that serves as a large winning prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a game ball that enters from the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. - 特許庁Inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a V winning area 51, which is a specific area, is provided as a winning area through which game balls can pass. Further, inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a normal area different from the V winning area 51 is provided. Above the V winning area 51, a plate-shaped distribution member is provided as a V winning opening opening/closing member that can switch the V winning area 51 between an open state and a closed state. The distribution member is driven by a specific area solenoid 83 and is capable of advancing and retreating to open and close the V winning area 51 . A game ball can pass through the V winning area 51 when it is in an open state, and a game ball cannot pass through it when it is in a closed state. A game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected by the specific area switch 24 . A game ball that has not passed through the V winning area 51 passes through the normal area. A game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 and a game ball that has passed through the normal area without passing through the V winning area 51 are detected by the discharge port switch 26, and then released outside the special variable winning ball device 50. discharged to

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for the game machine, and a game effect lamp 9 for lighting effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. there is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED. At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

At the lower right position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine, there is provided a ball-hitting operation handle operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area by the ball-hitting device. The hitting operation handle is also called an operation knob. At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device. A serving tray is provided. The hitting ball supply plate is also called an upper plate. Below the upper plate, there is provided a prize ball storage plate in which the awarded balls flow down and are stored when the upper plate is full. The prize ball storage plate is also called a lower plate.

A stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A can be gripped and tilted by the player, and is provided with a trigger button that can be pushed and pulled by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B shown in FIG. In the pachinko game machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are used as detection means for detecting actions such as player's operations, but detection means other than these may be used.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the previous normal game is being executed, even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed, so the normal game based on the passage cannot be performed. , for example, up to a predetermined upper limit number, such as "4". In the general pattern game, when a specific normal pattern such as a general pattern winning pattern is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern winning". On the other hand, when a normal pattern other than the normal per pattern, such as a normal pattern losing pattern, is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". In the case of "normal hit", the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period. At this time, the second start winning opening is opened.

When a game ball enters through a first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A can be started. When a game ball enters through a second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B can be started. In addition, during the period during which the special game is being executed, or during the period during which the game ball is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state, even if the game ball enters the start prize opening and the start prize is generated, Since the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately, the special game based on the starting prize is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number such as "4". In the special symbol game, when a specific special symbol such as a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes a "big hit". On the other hand, when a predetermined special symbol different from the big win symbol, such as a small winning symbol, is stop-displayed as the fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "small winning". Further, when a special symbol different from the big win symbol or the small win symbol such as a lost symbol is stop-displayed as the fixed special symbol, the display result of the special symbol becomes "loss". Furthermore, when a special pattern different from a big hit pattern, a small hit pattern, and a losing pattern, such as a time saving pattern, is stopped and displayed as a fixed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time saving". . The special pattern may not include the time saving pattern. That is, the display result of the special symbol may not include "time saving".

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time is, for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, until the timing when a predetermined period of time elapses, or the timing when the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. Continued. The predetermined period during which the large winning opening can be controlled to be open is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in the big winning game state is called a round or a round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined upper limit number of times, such as 15 times or 2 times, is reached. In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

When the display result of the special symbol becomes "big win", it includes a plurality of big win types. For example, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state such as the opening mode of the big winning port such as the number of rounds and the upper limit of the opening period, the normal state, the time saving state, and the variable probability state is set to a plurality of different settings, and the jackpot is set according to each setting. A type is specified. A plurality of jackpot types may include a part or all of a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained. Alternatively, the prize balls that can be obtained may include the same level of jackpot types. The control to the big win game state based on the display result of the special pattern being a "big win" is also called a big win in the pattern, a big win by the special pattern, a big win in the variable display, or a direct hit.

In the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbols becomes "small hit", the game is controlled to the small win game state. In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in the same opening mode as the big winning game state at the time of some jackpot types. It is sufficient that the big winning openings can be opened in a similar manner by sharing the number of times of opening and the opening period. Alternatively, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in an opening mode different from the big winning game state. Similar to the big hit type, even when the display result of the special symbol is "small hit", a plurality of small hit types may be included. The big hit type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the big winning opening in the small winning game state is also called starting operation. When the game ball is in the small winning game state, the special variable winning ball device 50 is opened to become the big winning opening, and the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24. A condition for generating a big win is established, and control to a big win game state becomes possible. Controlling to the big win game state based on the occurrence of the V prize by the game ball passing through the V winning area 51 in the small win game state is also called a big win via a small win.

After the jackpot game state is finished, the game state can be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state corresponding to the jackpot type. Further, in the special symbol game, after the display result of the special symbols becomes "time saving", the game state is controlled to the time saving state without being controlled to the jackpot game state. The time saving state is a gaming state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The game state in which the second special figure game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to enter through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball is likely to pass through the second start winning opening is also called base control. Base control in the normal state is also called normal base control or low base control. Base control in the time saving state includes high base control. In addition to high-based control, the time-saving state may include mid-based control. Medium base control is base control in which a game ball is more likely to pass through the second start winning opening than in low base control, but more difficult to pass through the second start winning opening than in high base control. The game state in which the middle base control is performed is also called a middle base state. A game state in which high base control is performed is also referred to as a high base state. High base control is also called high opening control.

In the case of the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, it is possible to stop display of the time-saving design as a display result of the special design. However, in the case of medium base state and high base state, even if the time saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the display of the special pattern, the base control based on the time saving pattern is not performed, and the medium base state or high base state is not performed. A new control transition to the high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time compared to the normal state is possible. Accordingly, the time saving state is also referred to as a time shortening state.

Since the time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols such as the second special symbol is improved, it is included in the special state advantageous to the player, which is different from the jackpot game state. When the game state is the variable probability state, in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is possible in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. Accordingly, the probability variable state is also referred to as the probability variable state. The probability variable state is included in the special state advantageous to the player, which is different from the jackpot game state, because the variable probability state is a state in which the special symbol variation efficiency is improved and the "big win" is likely to occur. The time-saving state and probability variable state are continued until any one of the predetermined end conditions such as execution of the special figure game for a predetermined number of times and control to the next jackpot game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut. The time-saving state of cutting the number of times is also called the time-saving state of cutting the number of times. The probability-variable state of the number-of-times cutting is also called a number-of-times-cutting probability variation.

The normal game state is an advantageous state such as a big win game state that is advantageous to the player, a predetermined state such as a small win game state, and a game state that is not included in special states such as a time saving state and a variable probability state. In the normal state, the probability that the display result in the normal game is "normal game", the probability that the display result in the special game is "big hit", etc. are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. It is in play state. The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a control state after executing the initial setting process without executing a predetermined recovery process after power-on, such as when the system is reset.

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include the variable probability state as the game state.

After the small winning game state is finished, there are two cases: a case where the game state is controlled to the big winning game state based on the occurrence of the V winning prize, and a case where the game state before entering the small winning game state is not changed without generating the V winning prize. be. However, when the display result of the special game is "small hit" and the special game is executed a predetermined number of times in the cut, the control of the time saving state and the variable probability state ends and the normal state may occur. . In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include the small winning game state as the game state. That is, the display result of the special symbols may not include the "minor hit".

It may be possible to control the game state to the time saving state when the time saving condition based on the number of execution times of the variable display is established. Such a time-saving state is also referred to as relief time-saving. The time-saving condition is that after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the occurrence of a big hit, or after the display result of the special figure game becomes "time-saving", even if the variable display is executed for a specific number of times, a new big-hit game state or When control to a time saving state is not performed, what is necessary is just to be the conditions which can be established.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. This effect includes an effect for notifying the progress of the game and an effect for exciting the game. These effects include displaying various effects images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, and operating the stick controller. Vibration of 31A or push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, as long as it can be executed using any production device.

The effect that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game includes variable display of the effect symbols. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L provided on the screen of the image display device 5, At 5C and 5R, the variable display of the effect symbols is started. When the finalized special symbols that are the display result in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game are stop-displayed, the finalized performance symbols that are the display result are stop-displayed in the variable display of the performance symbols. The fixed effect pattern is composed of a combination of three effect patterns corresponding to the "left", "middle" and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. During the period from the start of the variable display of the performance symbols to the end thereof, the display mode in the variable display of the performance symbols may be the ready-to-win mode. The ready-to-win mode is a mode in which, when the performance symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the performance symbols that have not yet stopped continue to fluctuate. . The fact that the display mode in the variable display of the production pattern is the ready-to-win mode is also said to be the ready-to-win.

The ready-to-win effect can be executed in response to the variable display of the effect pattern becoming the ready-to-win mode. The pachinko game machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of ready-to-win effects so that the ratio of the display result of the variable display to be a "jackpot" differs when the effect modes are different. The ratio of "big win" corresponding to the effect mode is also called "big win reliability" and "big win expectation". The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, normal ready-to-win and super ready-to-win with higher reliability of big win than normal ready-to-win. In addition, a short reach and a long reach whose execution time is longer than the short reach may be included in correspondence with the execution time of the reach effect.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big win", the determined performance symbols that become a predetermined big win combination are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the performance symbol display result. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the same production pattern, for example, a production pattern showing the number "7", is aligned and on a predetermined effective line. displayed to stop. In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big winning game state, odd-numbered performance symbols such as a performance symbol showing the number ``7'', for example, may be stop-displayed together. In the case of a ``non-probability variable big win'' that is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game state, even-numbered performance symbols such as a performance symbol showing the number ``6'', for example, may be stop-displayed together. The "non-probable variable jackpot" is also referred to as the "normal jackpot". In this case, the odd production design is also referred to as a probability variable design. The even-numbered production pattern is also called a non-variable pattern or a normal pattern. After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small win", fixed performance symbols that are a predetermined small win combination are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as the display result of the performance symbols. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" performance symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the same performance symbols, such as a performance symbol indicating a number other than "7", are aligned and a predetermined effective line is displayed. May be paused on top. A common fixed performance symbol may be stop-displayed when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big win" and when it becomes a "minor win".

When the display result of the special figure game is "losing", the display result may be stopped and displayed without being in the ready-to-win state in the variable display of the effect symbols. In this case, as a result of displaying the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach mode is also called non-reach loss. When the display result of the special game is "losing", the variable display of the production pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the display result may be stopped after the ready-to-win production is executed. In this case, as a result of the display of the performance symbols, the determined performance symbols of the ready-to-win combinations other than the big winning combination and the small winning combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect pattern of the ready-to-win combination is stopped and displayed after the ready-to-win state is reached is also called a ready-to-win failure.

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko game machine 1 include display corresponding to variable display such as pending display and active display. In addition, for example, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit during the variable display of the effect symbols. The notice effect includes the variable notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit corresponding to the variable display during execution, and the predictive notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit corresponding to the variable display before the execution of which the execution is suspended. may contain. The pre-reading advance notice effect may be capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of variable display compatible display such as suspended display and active display to a mode different from usual.

On the screen of the image display device 5, once the performance symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the performance symbols, and then the variable display is restarted, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. It may be possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that makes it look like. The pseudo-continuous performance may be set so that the reliability of the big win is higher when the number of times of re-fluctuation for resuming the variable display after temporarily stopping the performance pattern is larger than when the number of times of re-fluctuation is small. . The variable display of the performance symbols may include a case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed before the ready-to-win state is established and a case where the pseudo-continuous performance is executed after the ready-to-win state is established. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, the pseudo-continuous performance may be executed at a plurality of timings.

During the control of the big-hit game state, it is possible to execute the performance during the big-hit game for notifying the big-hit game state. The effect during the big win may include the effect of notifying the number of rounds and the promotion effect of suggesting or notifying that the advantage of the big win game state is improved. During the control of the small-hit game state, it is possible to execute a performance during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state. By executing a common performance during the control of the big win game state and during the control of the small win game state, the player can determine whether the current game state is the big win game state or the small win game state. It may be made unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

In a non-game state in which no special game or the like is executed and the game is not progressing, an effect image for demonstration can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.例文帳に追加The effect image for demonstration is also called a demo image. The display of the demonstration image is also called demonstration display. The production by the demonstration display is also called a customer waiting demonstration production.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The progress of the game is the execution of various games and game states such as execution of special game with management of suspension, execution of general game with management of suspension, big hit game state, small hit game state, time saving state, probability variable state, etc. including the migration of The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100 , a switch circuit 110 and a solenoid circuit 111 .

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number It can be configured including a circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 . Some or all of the ROM 101, RAM 102, and random number circuit 104 may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be built in the game control microcomputer 100. good. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . Various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, starter switches such as a first starter switch 22A and a second starter switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big winning opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM 101 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data which ROM101 memorize|stores includes the table data etc. which comprise the table used for a variation pattern, production|presentation control command, other various setting, determination, and determination. The RAM 102 is a temporary storage device that provides a work area used for game control and a stack for saving data. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that stores the contents stored in part or all of the storage area so as to be recoverable within a predetermined period of time even when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes storage areas capable of storing various data used for game control, such as counters, timers, buffers, and storage areas for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 can control the progress of games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing processes corresponding to programs stored in the ROM 101 . The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers used to control the progress of the game. A random number used to control the progress of a game is also called a game random number. Part or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by CPU 103 . The I/O 105 includes an input port to which various signals are input and an output port to which various signals are output. Various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110 . Various signals output from the output port of the I/O 105 are the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation display device 25A, the second reservation display device 25B, A signal for controlling the normal figure holding display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal for driving the normal electric accessory solenoid 81, the big winning opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc., may be included.

The main board 11 outputs an effect control command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 12 as part of the operation of controlling the progress of the game by means of the game control microcomputer 100 . The effect control command is a command that designates or notifies the progress of the game or the like. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control commands include commands for specifying various determination results on the main board 11, such as the display results of the special game, winning types, and variation patterns, and for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the big winning opening, and winning. , the number of pending memories, the game state, and a command specifying the occurrence of an error.

The performance control board 12 is a sub side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function capable of receiving a performance control command and controlling the performance based on the received performance control command. The effects that can be controlled by the effect control board 12 are various effects according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also include various notifications such as error notification and power failure recovery notification. The performance control board 12 includes a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of the effect together with the display control unit 123 . This process is a process for realizing various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determination of the effect to be executed. The effect control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data of various tables, and uses the RAM 122 as a main memory. The effect control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and may be a signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes mainly display-related effects based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. control possible. The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the audio control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 . The sound designation signal designates sounds to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates a lighting mode or an extinguishing mode of the game effect lamp 9 . By supplying the sound designation signal and the lamp signal, it becomes possible to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the motor or solenoid of the movable body 32 or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32 . A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the effect control board 12 .

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers used when controlling the execution of various effects. A random number used to control the execution of an effect is also called a random number for effect. The effect random number may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the effect control CPU 120 . The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for receiving effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for the detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for the detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output ports of the I/O 125 are an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for an audio designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14. and an output terminal.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal to the speaker. Output from 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and controls the game effect lamp in a manner specified by the lamp signal. 9 is turned on or off. In this manner, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on the signal from the display control section 123. FIG. It should be noted that control of sound output and lamp lighting and extinguishing, such as supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, and control of the movable bodies 32, such as supply of signals for operating the movable bodies 32, are partly performed by the effect control CPU 120. Or you may make it run all. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 287, a plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function, or unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 287, one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions. good.

The power supply board 17 can supply electric power from an AC power supply such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 . The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have it. The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending power-on by operating the power switch 91 . A switch circuit 110 on the main board 11 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process.

FIG. 288 is a flow chart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11 . When the game control main process shown in FIG. 288 is started, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). As a result, no other processing is executed thereafter until interrupts are permitted. Subsequently, the built-in device register is set (step S902). In setting the built-in device register, for example, the built-in device register setting table is used to store the set value of the built-in device register at the specified built-in device address. The built-in device registers correspond to various circuits and electronic parts such as PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) as a timer counter which is a timer circuit, random number circuit 104, input port of I/O 105, serial communication circuit, and RWM access control circuit. It is acceptable as long as it is provided In addition, initialization of a stack pointer, setting of an interrupt vector, and the like may be performed.

Subsequently, RWM check processing (step S903) is executed, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S904). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the contents stored in the RAM 102 as a backup RAM are normal. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S904 that the restoration condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. The RWM check processing in step S903 includes checksum calculation processing. The checksum data obtained as the processing result is compared with the data stored in the checksum buffer. is normal. In step S904, whether or not the recovery condition can be satisfied may be determined based on the results of confirming or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors by the RWM check processing in step S903.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S904; Yes), settings for recovery are made. The setting for recovery includes specification of the command transmission table for backup (step S905) and specification of the setting table for backup (step S906). The backup time command transmission table includes table data for transmitting to the effect control board 12 a power failure restoration designation command designating that restoration using backup data has been performed. The setting table at the time of backup includes table data used for initial setting of the work area when recovery is performed using backup data. To designate a table, a value corresponding to the top address of the table stored in the ROM 101 is stored in a general-purpose pointer or table pointer. The same is true for other tables.

When the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S904; No), the setting for initialization is performed. The settings for initialization include RWM initial setting processing (step S907), designation of command transmission table at initialization (step S908), and designation of setting table at initialization (step S909). The RWM initial setting process includes a process of initializing the work area by storing clear data in a predetermined area serving as the work area in the RAM 102 . The command transmission table at the time of initialization includes table data for transmitting to the effect control board 12 a power-on designation command designating that the initialization at the time of power-on has been performed. The initialization setting table includes table data used for initial setting of the work area when the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. For example, the initialization setting table includes table data for setting the count value of the specific number counter to the specific number initial value. The setting table at initialization includes table data for setting the value stored in the specified number of times command buffer to the upper limit value of the specified number of times command. The specific number of times is the number of executions of variable display as a time saving condition for shifting the game state from the normal state to the time saving state when the period of not being controlled to the jackpot game state or the time saving state continues.

Thereafter, command set processing (step S9010) and data set processing (step S9011) are executed. The command set process includes a process for transmitting an effect control command to the effect control board 12 by storing the command data specified in the command transmission table in the serial communication data register. The data setting process includes a process of storing a specified value at an address indicated by the table data using the data setting table specified by the pointer, and a process of clearing the stored contents of the address indicated by the table data.

Then, after executing the wait process (step S9012), the specific number of times command transmission process (step S9013) is executed. In the wait process, by waiting until a predetermined period of time has passed, sub-boards such as the effect control board 12 can be reliably activated. The specified number of times command processing is a process for transmitting to the presentation control board 12 an effect control command designating the count value of the specific number of times counter when the power is turned on. The specific number counter is provided at a predetermined address in the RAM 102, and may be capable of counting the remaining number of times until the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number corresponding to the time saving condition.

Following the specific number of times command transmission processing in step S9013, interrupt initialization (step S9014) is performed, and the PTC counter output value is set so that a periodic timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time, such as 4 milliseconds. , enter loop processing. In this loop processing, interrupt prohibition (step S9015), initial value determination random number update processing (step S9016), and interrupt permission (step S9017) are repeatedly executed. After that, every time an interrupt request signal is sent from the PTC to the CPU 103, the CPU 103 is enabled to execute timer interrupt processing. As a result, the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined time intervals, such as 4 milliseconds.

FIG. 289(A) is a flow chart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. The CPU 103 can execute game control timer interrupt processing by receiving an interrupt request signal from the PTC and accepting the interrupt request. The game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 289(A) includes power-off processing (step S9021), switch processing (step S9022), main side error processing (step S9023), and game random number update processing (step S9024 ), special symbol process processing (step S9025), normal symbol process processing (step S9026), information output processing (step S9027), prize ball processing (step S9028), and main side display control processing (step S9029) and includes

The power-off processing in step S9021 includes processing for confirming a power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 and determining whether or not power-off has occurred. When power failure occurs, checksum calculation processing is executed, checksum data is set in the checksum buffer, and then settings for power failure such as prohibition of RWM access are performed. In the switch processing of step S9022, detection signals from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starter switch 22A, the second starter switch 22B, the count switch 23, etc. that are input via the switch circuit 110 are received. includes a process of determining The reception result of the detection signal is set in the switch-on buffer. The main-side error processing of step S9023 includes a process of diagnosing the pachinko game machine 1 for abnormality and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The game random number update process in step S9024 includes a process of updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

FIG. 289(B) shows an example of game random numbers. The game random numbers are a random number MR1 for special symbol determination, a random number MR2 for winning symbol selection, a random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2, a random number MR4 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern. , a random number MR6 for normal symbol hit determination, and a random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6. The random number MR1 for special design determination is used when judging the display result of the special design, such as whether the display result of the special design is a "big hit" or whether the display result of the special design is a "small hit". used for The random number MR2 for selecting the winning pattern is a plurality of fixed special patterns, such as a big winning pattern when the display result of the special pattern is set to "big hit" and a small winning pattern when the display result of the special pattern is set to "small hit". It is used when selecting from the special symbols of . The random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2 is used to create the initial value of the random number MR2. The random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is used for selecting the variation pattern type of the special symbol. The random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is used for determining the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type. The random number MR6 for normal symbol hit determination is used when determining the display result of the normal symbol, ie, whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is set to "normal symbol hit". The random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6 is used to generate the initial value of the random number MR6. The random number MR3 for determining the MR2 initial value and the random number MR7 for determining the MR6 initial value are used not only in the game random number update process of step S24, but also in the initial value determination random number update process of step S9016 shown in FIG. It should be updatable.

The variation pattern is one or more variation patterns included in the variation pattern type selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type. It is determined using the value of the determination random number MR5. The variation pattern designates various variable setting items including a special figure variation time which is the execution time of a special figure game, a mode of variable display of performance symbols, and contents of performance during variable display of performance symbols. The special figure fluctuation time is also the execution time in the variable display of the production design. The aspect of the variable display of the effect pattern includes the presence or absence of reach. The production contents during the variable display of the production pattern include the type of ready-to-win production. The variation pattern is also called a variable display pattern. The variation pattern type is a group including one or a plurality of variation patterns classified in advance based on, for example, an effect mode during variable display of effect symbols.

The special symbol process processing of step S9025 shown in FIG. 289(A) includes the execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, the control of the big hit game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc., and the variable display of the special symbols. It includes processing related to the game state. The normal symbol process processing of step S9026 includes the management of the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal pattern hit". It includes processing related to display and state control of the second start winning opening. Information output processing in step S9027 sets an information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as jackpot information, starting information, and probability variation information. The jackpot information indicates the number of occurrences of jackpots and the like. The starting information indicates the number of starting winnings and the like. The probability variation information indicates, for example, the number of times the probability variation state has occurred. The prize ball processing in step S9028 includes prize ball command output counter addition processing and prize ball control processing. In the prize ball command output counter addition process, a prize ball number table is used to determine whether the switch is turned on, and when the switch is detected to be on, the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter are updated. The prize ball control process selects the process corresponding to the prize ball process code, and controls the payout of the prize balls based on the detection of the game balls. The main side display control process of step S9029 includes display setting of the first special symbol and display setting of the second special symbol. The display setting of the first special symbol is a setting for controlling the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A to be updatable by executing the special symbol control process. The display setting of the second special symbol is a setting for controlling the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B to be updatable by executing the special symbol control process.

FIG. 290(A) is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 289(A) as special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting prize determination process (step S101). The starting prize determination process includes a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting prize, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number. When the occurrence of the start winning prize is detected, if the pending memory number is less than the upper limit value, a random value used for determining the display result, winning type, variation pattern, etc. is extracted. The extracted random value is stored as reserved information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After updating the storage of the pending information and the number of pending memories, to the effect control board 12, there is a command setting for transmitting the effect control command that specifies the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination. done. By such command setting, the effect control command at the time of start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁

CPU103 reads the special figure process code memorize|stored in the predetermined address of RAM102, after performing the start winning a prize determination process of step S101 (step S102). The special figure process code can be updated to any one of 00 [H] to 0B [H], and is also called a special symbol process code. [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. The CPU 103 selects and executes a process corresponding to the read value of the special figure process code (step S103). This makes it possible to control the progress of the game regarding the variable display of the special symbols.

FIG. 290(B) shows an example of a process that can be executed in correspondence with the special symbol process code in the special symbol process. The special symbol process processing includes special symbol normal processing corresponding to the special symbol process code 00 [H] and special symbol process code corresponding to the special symbol process code 01 [H] as executable processing corresponding to the special symbol process code. Special symbol variation processing, special symbol stop processing corresponding to special symbol process code 02 [H], small hit pre-opening processing special symbol process code corresponding to 03 [H], special symbol process code is 04 [ H], a small hit open process corresponding to the special process code 05 [H], a small hit discharge ball waiting process corresponding to the special process code 06 [H] , Small winning end processing corresponding to special process code 07 [H], big winning opening pre-processing corresponding to special process code 08 [H], special process code corresponding to 09 [H] large winning opening opening process, special winning opening post-opening process corresponding to special figure process code 0A [H], and jackpot end processing special figure process code corresponding to 0B [H]. .

The special symbol normal processing includes processing capable of determining whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reservation information. In the special symbol normal processing, based on the value of the random number MR1 for judging the special symbol, whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a "big win" or "a small win", and whether or not it is a "time saving". It includes processing that can determine whether or not to The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining a fixed special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of special symbols in response to the determination of the display result. The special symbol normal process includes a process of determining a variation pattern. Thus, in the special symbol normal process, when variable display of special symbols is started, before the display result is derived and displayed, various judgments and decisions (predetermined) regarding variable display are performed, Special figure process code is updated to 01 [H].

The CPU 103 reads various tables from the ROM 101 and refers to them when performing various determinations and determinations based on random numbers. The same applies to other judgments and determinations using random numbers on the main board 11 . Even when random numbers are not used, a necessary table may be read out from the ROM 101 and referenced to perform various determinations, decisions, settings, and the like. In the effect control board 12, various kinds of tables may be read out from the ROM 121 and referred to, and various determinations, determinations, settings, and the like may be performed.

In the special symbol normal process, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol, even if the special symbol 2 priority digestion control is performed good. Alternatively, in the special symbol normal processing, in accordance with the order in which the game balls win in the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the conditions for starting the special figure game are established in the winning order, thereby controlling the winning order digestion. may be performed.

In the special symbol variation processing, the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is measured, and the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. It includes a process of determining whether or not When the special figure fluctuation time elapses, the symbol stop time for stop-displaying the confirmed special symbols is set, the count values of various counters are updated, and the special figure process code is updated to 02 [H]. In the special symbol stop processing, the elapsed time after the special symbols stop varying in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is measured, and the symbol stop time set in the special symbol variation processing is measured. includes a process of determining whether or not has elapsed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the special figure process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the special figure process code is updated to 08[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the special figure process code is updated to 03 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving" or "loss", the special figure process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "big win", setting corresponding to the start of the big win game state is performed. When the display result of the variable display is "small win", setting corresponding to the start of the small win game state is performed. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving", the setting for controlling the game state to the time saving state is performed.

In the small hit opening preprocessing, based on the fact that the display result of the variable display is "small hit", setting is made to open the big winning opening in the small win game state, and the special process code is set to 04 [ H]. The small-hit open process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time after the large winning opening is opened in the small-hit game state, and determining whether or not the opening time for the small-hit has passed. When the opening time for small hits has passed, the special figure process code is updated to 05 [H] along with the setting for closing the big winning opening. After the small hit opening process, the winning of the big winning opening in the small winning game state is detected, and the special figure process code is updated to 06 [H] after the lapse of a predetermined time. The small winning ball standby process includes a process of setting a large winning hole discharging ball error, determining passage through the V winning area 51, and determining completion of discharge of the big winning hole. When it is determined that the discharge of the big winning opening is completed, the special figure process code is updated to 07 [H] along with the setting before the end of the small hit. The small hit end process includes a process of determining whether or not the V winning area 51 is passed by the specific area passing flag. The specified area passage flag is set to a designated value 01 [H] corresponding to the ON state when there is a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 . When the specific area passing flag is ON, the special figure process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the start setting of the jackpot. When the specific area flag is off, along with the end setting of the small hit, the special figure process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

In the pre-opening processing for the big winning gate, settings are made to control the opening of the big winning gate, such as updating the counter for the number of times the big winning gate is opened and setting when opening the big winning gate, including operating settings for the big winning gate. Update the special figure process code to 09 [H]. The processing during the opening of the big winning opening measures the time elapsed since the opening of the big winning opening in the jackpot game state, and detects the winning of the big winning opening. When the opening time for the big win has passed, the special figure process code is updated to 0A[H] along with the setting for closing the big winning hole. In the processing after opening the large winning opening, after setting the error of the ball discharged from the large winning opening, the end of the time after the opening of the large winning opening is determined. includes a process of determining the count value of When the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter is less than the maximum number of large winning opening opening times, the special figure process code is updated to 08[H] and the next round can be started. When the count value of the big winning mouth opening number counter is the maximum value of the number of times the big winning mouth is opened, along with the setting at the end of opening including the setting of the jackpot ending performance time, the special figure process code is updated to 0B [H]. . The jackpot end processing includes processing for determining whether or not the jackpot end effect time has elapsed. When the jackpot end presentation time elapses, the jackpot end setting including the game state setting at the time of the jackpot end is cleared, and the special figure process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

The special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing includes a special symbol big hit determination process and a special symbol small hit determination process. Also, the special symbol normal processing may include a special symbol time reduction determination process. In these determination processes, using the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out from the buffer for special symbol determination, a special symbol determination value check is performed to determine which determination range the value is included in. For example, when the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the big hit determination range, it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is "big hit" by the special symbol big hit determination process. Further, when the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the small hit determination range, it is determined that the display result of the special symbol is a "small hit" by the special symbol small hit determination process. When the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is included in the time saving determination range, it may be determined that the display result of the special symbol is set to "time saving" by the special symbol time saving determination process.

FIG. 291 shows an example of determination of the special symbol display result, which is the display result of the special symbols. The specified value for the start-up winning prize is set to "1" corresponding to the first start-up winning due to the game ball entering the first start-up winning opening, and the game ball entering the second start-up winning opening. "2" is set corresponding to the case of the second start winning. That is, when the start opening designated prize value is "1", the first special symbol game, which is a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, is executed. On the other hand, when the start opening designated winning value is "2", the second special symbol game, which is a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, is executed. In the special symbol big hit determination process, special symbol small hit determination process, and special symbol time reduction determination process, the special figure display result corresponds to the case where the start opening winning designation value is "1" and the case where it is "2". An MR1 judgment value to be compared with the value of the random number MR1 is set so as to determine one of "big hit", "small hit", "time saving", and "losing". The MR1 determination value to which the special figure display result is assigned to "big hit" is also called a big hit determination value. The MR1 determination value to which the special figure display result is assigned to the "small hit" is also called a small hit determination value. The MR1 determination value to which the special figure display result is assigned to "time saving" is also called time saving determination value. The big-hit probability based on the setting of the big-hit determination value indicates the ratio of the big-hit by the special game. The small-hit probability by setting the small-hit determination value indicates the ratio of the small-hit by the special game. The time saving probability by setting the time saving judgment value indicates the rate at which the base control can be changed by the special figure game.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 17 or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main processing.

292 is a flow chart showing the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control board 12. FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 292 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes an initialization process (step S71). The initialization process includes clearing of the RAM 122, setting of various initial values, and register setting for the timer circuit mounted on the effect control board 12. At this time, an initial operation control process (step S72) is executed. The initial motion control processing includes control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position, control for confirming a predetermined motion, and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined period of time, such as 2 milliseconds, elapses based on, for example, a register setting for the timer circuit. When the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated to wait.

If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S74), and command analysis processing (step S75) is executed. Command analysis processing, for example, after reading various production control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, to the read production control command Processing such as corresponding setting and control is included. For example, which production control command has been received, or the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing, etc., and the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. , the reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on. When the effect control command specifies a game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process (step S76) is executed. The effect control process includes, for example, the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. It includes control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of. Determination, determination, setting, etc., based on the performance control command transmitted from the main substrate 11, etc. are performed for the control contents of the performance operation using various performance devices. Random number update processing for production (step S77) is executed following the production control process. The effect random number update process updates at least part of the effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 12 by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to step S73.

FIG. 293(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 shown in FIG. 292 as the effect control process. The effect control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead effect setting process (step S151) in the effect control process. The look-ahead effect setting processing includes, for example, processing such as determination, determination, and setting regarding the execution of the look-ahead prediction effect based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11 . Moreover, processing for displaying a pending display based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command is included.

After executing the look-ahead effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 reads the effect process code stored in the predetermined address of the RAM 122 (step S152). The production process code can be updated to any of 00[H] to 0A[H], and is also called production control process code. The effect control CPU 120 selects and executes a process corresponding to the read value of the effect process code (step S153). Thereby, it becomes possible to control the execution of the production including the variable display of the production pattern.

FIG. 293(B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to the production process code in the production control process. The production control process processing includes a variation pattern command waiting process corresponding to the production process code 00 [H] and a production pattern command processing corresponding to the production process code 01 [H] as executable processes corresponding to the production process code. Fluctuation start processing, production pattern fluctuation process corresponding to production process code 02 [H], production design fluctuation stop processing corresponding to production process code 03 [H], production process code to 04 [H] A corresponding small hit display process, a small hit open process corresponding to the production process code 05 [H], a small hit end production process corresponding to the production process code 06 [H], and a production process code 07 [ H], mid-round processing with a production process code of 08 [H], post-round processing with a production process code of 09 [H], and production process code of 0A [H]. and a jackpot end effect process corresponding to the

Variation pattern command reception waiting processing includes processing that can determine whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 is received. For example, the presence or absence of reception can be determined by whether or not the variation pattern specification command reception flag set in the command analysis process is on. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command is received, the effect process code is updated to 01[H]. Demonstration display control is performed when it is determined that no variation pattern designation command has been received. The effect symbol variation start processing includes processing for controlling to start the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the special symbol game. For example, in response to the received variation pattern command, the production pattern for the production at the time of fluctuation is selected, the timing value of the production process timer for measuring the production execution time is started to be updated, and the production process code is updated to 02 [H]. be done. The performance symbol change processing includes processing for controlling the switching timing of each performance element constituting the performance pattern and determining whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the measured value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 03[H]. The production pattern fluctuation stop processing is based on the fact that the production execution time has elapsed or the completion condition of the production at the time of fluctuation is satisfied, such as the reception of the production pattern confirmation command, and the end control of the production at the time of fluctuation is performed. It includes processing to control so that the effect result corresponding to the special symbol can be displayed. Then, the rendering process code is updated and various settings are performed according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the effect process code is updated to 07[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "minor hit", the effect process code is updated to 04[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving" or "loss", the production process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

The small win display processing includes setting processing for performing a small win fanfare effect when a small win occurs. The small-win fanfare performance includes a small-win display in which a performance image for notifying the occurrence of a small-win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the time for the small-win fanfare performance elapses. When the small winning fanfare performance time elapses, the performance process code is updated to 05[H] along with the ending control of the small winning fanfare performance. In the minor winning opening processing, setting is made for performing a minor winning opening performance in response to the opening of the big winning opening in the minor winning game state, and the performance process code is updated to 06 [H]. The small-hit end effect processing includes a process of controlling to display an effect image for notifying the end of the small-hit game state on the screen of the image display device 5 . In addition, when a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 24 in the small winning game state and it is determined that V winning has occurred, the execution control of V winning performance for notifying the occurrence of V winning is performed. When V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the effect process code is updated to 07 [H]. When the V prize is not generated in the small winning game state, the effect process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

The big win display processing includes setting processing for performing a fanfare effect when a big win occurs. The fanfare performance includes a big win display in which a performance image for notifying the occurrence of a big win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the fanfare performance time elapses. When the fanfare effect time elapses, the effect process code is updated to 08[H] along with end control of the fanfare effect. In-round processing includes display settings during the round in the jackpot gaming state. When the round end condition is established, if the final round is not ended, the performance process code is updated to 09 [H], and if the final round is completed, the performance process code is updated to 0A [H]. The post-round processing includes display settings between rounds in the jackpot gaming state. Then, when the round start condition is established, the production process code is updated to 08[H]. The jackpot end effect includes a process of controlling to display an effect image notifying the end of the jackpot game state on the screen of the image display device 5 . After that, when the notification time of the end of the jackpot has passed, the effect process code is cleared and updated to 00 [H] which is the initial value.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, functions, processing, and operations described in the basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and in order to solve at least one problem in the prior art, some of the features explained in the above embodiment It may be provided with the configuration of. In the above embodiment, when a matter that is a more specific concept is described, an invention of a generic concept using a matter of the same family or a similar matter, or an invention of a generic concept using a common property is the invention of the present application. It may have some of the structures and characteristics described in the above embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, or an enclosed type that encloses game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winning. It may be a game machine.

Only one type of pattern such as a sign indicating "-" may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of this pattern. One type of pattern may be displayed during the variable display, and this pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, as a display result, the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed, and a non-display state may be set in which no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be provided with a configuration in which the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed corresponding to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a different jackpot determination value for each set value that is set, it may be possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot and the ball output rate. As a specific example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot. lower. In this case, if 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. During execution of the variable display, it may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 at a predetermined rate. The suggestion about the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether or not the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . The setting suggesting effect may suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit by an arbitrary effect, and may suggest the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In place of part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, or together with part or all of the suggestion about the control of the big win game state, a suggestion about control of a state advantageous to the player different from the big win game state is provided. can be anything. For example, it may be one that suggests a variable probability state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as the advantageous state, a suggestion may be made according to whether or not control is to be performed regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded.

The invention relating to the game machine is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1, and can be applied to slot machines as appropriate. In the slot machine, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by the player. It is possible to execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols. In a slot machine, an advantageous state advantageous to a player may include one or more of so-called bonuses such as big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

Programs and data for realizing various controls including the progress of a game and the execution of effects can be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a game machine such as the pachinko game machine 1 via a detachable recording medium. It may be possible, or it may be possible to distribute and provide it by installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, it may be provided with a communication processing unit connectable to an external device on a network via a communication line or the like, and may be distributed or provided by downloading the program or data from the external device. The mode of execution of games and presentations may be executable by installing a detachable recording medium, or programs and data downloaded via a communication line etc. may be temporarily stored in an internal memory or the like. or can be directly executed using hardware resources in an external device on a network connected via a communication line, or another computer device A game or performance may be executed by exchanging data via a network.

Expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" when comparing various ratios such as the determination ratio of processing and data, the execution ratio of effects, etc. may include being For example, one decision result or execution content may include a case where there is no decision or execution at a rate of "0%", or a case where there is always a decision or execution at a rate of "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 22AK)
FIG. 294-1 is an address map of the memory area in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. As shown in FIG. 294-1, the memory area in the game control microcomputer 100 is the memory area from the address 0000 [H] assigned to the ROM 101 to the address 2FFF [H], and the address F000 [ H] to address F3FF[H].

The memory area of the ROM 101 includes a game program area (addresses 0000[H] to 0BD5[H]) in which game programs related to game control are stored, and a game data area (address 1000[H]) in which game data used in the game program is stored. H] to 1B7C [H]), non-game program area (address 2000 [H] to 250F [H]) where non-game programs related to various controls different from game control are stored, and non-game programs used for non-game programs A non-game data area (2510 [H] to 25A1 [H]) where game data is stored, an unused area (addresses 0BD6 [H] to 0FFF [H], 1B7D [H] to 1FFF [H], 25A2 [H] to 2FFF [H]).

The memory area of the RAM 102 includes a game work area (addresses F000 [H] to F0DE [H]) used as a work area for game control, and a game stack area (addresses F1EC [H] to F1FF [ H]), a non-game work area (address F300 [H] to F331 [H]) used as a work area for various controls different from game control, and a non-game stack area (address F3F2[H] to F3FF[H]), unused areas, etc. (addresses F0DF[H] to F1EB[H], F200[H] to F2FF[H], F332[H] to F3F1[H]), including.

FIG. 294-2 shows a configuration example of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. FIG. The effect control command has, for example, a two-byte structure, the first byte being MODE data indicating the type of the command, and the second byte being EXT data indicating the specific contents of the command. MODE data and EXT data are also collectively referred to as command data. The leading bit of MODE data is always set to a bit value of "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is always set to a bit value of "0". This makes it possible to clearly and simply distinguish whether the received data in the effect control board 12 is the first byte or the second byte of the effect control command.

Command 80XX[H] is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern. In the command data, XX[H] indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set corresponding to the contents specified by the effect control command. The variation pattern specification command can set different EXT data corresponding to the specified content of the variation pattern. Command 8CXX[H] is an effect design designation command for designating the display result of variable display. Different EXT data can be set for the performance symbol specifying command in accordance with the stored value of the performance symbol information buffer. The effect symbol information buffer stores a value indicating the type of the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display. Command 8D01 [H] is a first variation start designation command that designates the start of variation of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 [H] is a second variation start designation command that designates the start of variation of the second special symbol. The variation pattern specification command, the effect pattern specification command, the first variation start specification command and the second variation start specification command are included in the variation start time command transmitted corresponding to the start of the variable display. However, the first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command correspond to the case where the execution of the first special game is started and the case where the execution of the second special game is started, One is sent and the other is not.

Command 8FXX [H] is a production design determination command that designates stop display as production design finalization display. Different EXT data can be set for the effect symbol determination command corresponding to a plurality of types of symbol stop setting. Command 9002 [H] is a power-on designation command that designates RWM initialization when power is turned on. The command 91XX[H] is a first specific number of times designation command for designating the count value of the specific number of times counter when the power is turned on. The first specific number of times designation command can set different EXT data corresponding to the count value of the specific number of times counter. The command 9202 [H] is a power failure recovery specification command that specifies RWM backup recovery when power is turned on. Command 94XX [H] is a second specific number of times designation command for designating the storage value of the specific number of times command buffer during game control. The second specified number of times command can set different EXT data corresponding to the stored value of the specified number of times command buffer. Command 95XX[H] is a background color designation command for designating the display color of the background screen. The background color designation command can set different EXT data corresponding to the display color of the background screen. The command 9F03[H] is a customer waiting demo command that designates a demonstration display in a non-game state where the game is stopped.

Command A0XX [H] is a jackpot start designation command that is transmitted corresponding to the start of a jackpot game, which is a game in the jackpot game state, and can designate fanfare display. For the jackpot start designation command, different EXT data can be set corresponding to the setting of the fanfare display or the like. The command A1XX[H] is a jackpot end designation command that is transmitted corresponding to the end of the jackpot game and can designate a jackpot end display. The jackpot end designation command can set different EXT data corresponding to the setting of the jackpot end display or the like. Command A6XX [H] is a small-hit start designation command that is transmitted corresponding to the start of a small-hit game, which is a game in the small-hit game state, and can designate a small-hit fanfare display. The small-hit start designation command can set different EXT data corresponding to the setting of the small-hit fanfare display. Command A7XX[H] is a small-hit end designation command that is transmitted corresponding to the end of the small-hit game and designates a small-hit end display. The small-hit end designation command can set different EXT data corresponding to the setting of the small-hit end display.

The command AE00 [H] is transmitted in response to the game ball passing through the V winning area 51, which is a specific area provided inside the special variable winning ball device 50, and is a specific area where the V winning display can be designated. It is a pass command. The command C0XX[H] is a first effect storage information designation command capable of designating the first reserved memory number as the first effect memory information number. Different EXT data can be set for the first effect storage information designation command in correspondence with the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX[H] is a second effect storage information designation command capable of designating a second reserved memory number as the second effect memory information number. The second effect storage information specifying command can set different EXT data corresponding to the second reserved storage number.

FIG. 294-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of RWM initialization processing. For example, in step S7 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, RWM initial setting process as shown in FIG. In the RWM initial setting processing shown in FIG. is set to 02FF[H] (step AKS013). After storing the clear data in the transfer source address (step AKS014), the block transfer instruction is executed (step AKS015).

The address F000[H] set at step AKS011 is the top address assigned to the RAM 102, and its storage area is included in the game work area shown in FIG. 294-1. The address F001[H] set in step AKS012 is the address next to the address F000[H] set as the transfer source address, and enables writing of data indicating the same value in a storage area with consecutive addresses. . The number of transfers 02FF[H] set at step AKS013 corresponds to the size of the memory area including the game work area and game stack area shown in FIG. 294-1. Therefore, after storing the clear data in step AKS014, by executing a block transfer instruction in step AKS015, the memory area including the game work area and the game stack area is initialized by writing the clear data. . Initialization of the memory area by such RWM initial setting processing is also referred to as initial setting at power-on.

FIG. 294-4 is a flow chart showing an example of command set processing. When the command set process is executed, a value corresponding to the start address of the command transmission table is stored in the pointer in the caller process. A pointer used in command set processing holds an address value that is a table read position in the command transmission table. The pointer used in the command set process may be constructed using, for example, the HL register included in the general-purpose register among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103 . The HL register is a pair register that combines an H register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register, and an L register, which is an 8-bit register also included in the general-purpose register, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. , 16-bit length calculation, etc., and can be used as a pointer to specify the address of the memory area.

In the command set process, the CPU 103 first sets the table head data to the number of processes (step AKS021). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103 . In command set processing, the value corresponding to the number of processing is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS022). The work area reference bit here may be the first bit in the 1-byte table data read in step AKS021.

Corresponding to step AKS022, if the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0" (step AKS022; No), for example, by changing the value stored in the B register, the number of processes is reduced to "1". ” (step AKS023). If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS022; Yes), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS024).

After that, data for command upper byte is read (step AKS025). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the A register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register among the internal registers provided in the CPU 103 . If the bit value of the work area reference bit is "1" at step AKS022, the process proceeds to step AKS025 without executing step AKS024, so that the table head data is read as command upper byte data. Subsequently, the data read by step AKS025 is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS026). The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register, and transmits and outputs the read data to the performance control board 12 by the serial communication method. Therefore, the MODE data, which is the command upper byte, can be transmitted to the effect control board 12 by steps AKS025 and AKS026.

After step AKS026, the table reading position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS027). Then, the command lower byte data is read (step AKS028). The command lower byte data is composed of 8 bits including a 1-bit leading bit that serves as a work area reference bit and 7 data bits other than the work area reference bit. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS029).

Corresponding to step AKS029, when the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0" (step AKS029; No), the command extension data address table is specified (step AKS030). For example, after the address of the command transmission table is saved in the DE register included in the general-purpose register, the value corresponding to the leading address of the command extension data address table is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. Then, the command extension data is read (step AKS031). At this time, the data whose bit value in the work area reference bit is cleared to "0" indicates the offset value designating the read position in the command extension data address table. The table data of the read position obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the command extension data address table is used as the lower byte of the command lower byte read address. Among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, the Q register included in the special register stores F0[H] corresponding to the upper byte of the address assigned to the game work area. By setting the value stored in the special register as the upper byte of the command lower byte read address, the data obtained from the command lower byte read address is stored in the A register as command extension data to be used for the command lower byte to be transmitted. Stored.

If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" corresponding to step AKS029 (step AKS029; Yes), read data is stored in the serial communication data register after step AKS031 (step AKS032). If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0", the command lower byte data read out in step AKS028 is used as the lower byte of the command to be transmitted as it is and stored in the serial communication data register. If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1", the command extension data read in step AKS031 is used as the lower byte of the command to be transmitted and stored in the serial communication data register. Thereby, the EXT data, which is the command lower byte, can be transmitted toward the effect control board 12 .

Next, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS033). At this time, it is determined whether or not the number of processes after updating has become "0" (step AKS034). When the number of processes is other than "0" corresponding to step AKS034 (step AKS034; No), it progresses to step AKS024 and controls transmission of the production|presentation control command using the following table data etc. to be possible. On the other hand, if the number of processes is "0" (step AKS034; Yes), the command set process is terminated.

FIG. 294-5 shows a configuration example of a command transmission table. Among them, FIG. 294-5(A) is the command transmission table AKT01 when the number of transmission commands is "2" or more. FIG. 294-5(B) is the command transmission table AKT02 when the number of transmission commands is "1". In the command transmission table AKT01, the number of processes is designated by the table data at the top address of the table. On the other hand, the command transmission table AKT02 does not include table data specifying the number of processes. Whether or not the command transmission table includes table data specifying the number of processes can be specified from the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data at the table top address.

In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in FIG. 294-5(A) when the number of transmission commands is "2" or more, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data of the table top address is set to "0". . On the other hand, in the command transmission table AKT02 shown in FIG. 294-5(B) when the number of transmission commands is "1", the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data of the table head address is set to "1". It is At step AKS022 of the command set process shown in FIG. 294-4, it is determined whether or not the bit value of the work area reference bit is "0" using the table head data read at step AKS021. Then, when the bit value of the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0", the number of processes is overwritten to "1" in step AKS023. As a result, when the number of transmission commands is "1", the command transmission table does not include table data specifying the number of processes, and the number of processes can be set to "1" in the command set process. Capacity can be reduced.

Also, in the command transmission table, the table data, which is the command lower byte data, can specify whether or not to refer to the command extension data address table by the bit value of the work area reference bit. For example, when referring to the command extension data address table to read the command extension data to be the command lower byte, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data is set to "1". In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in FIG. 294-5(A), the bit value of the work area reference bit in the second command lower byte data is set to "1". Command extension data for setting the command lower byte will be read. On the other hand, if the command lower byte data is used as the lower byte of the command that transmits the command lower byte data as it is without referring to the command extension data address table, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data is set to "0". is set. In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in FIG. 294-5(A), since the bit value of the work area reference bit in the first command lower byte data is set to "0", the command extension data address table is not referenced. Then, the command lower byte data is used as it is as the lower byte of the command. When referring to the command extension data address table, by using the bit values other than the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data as the offset value with respect to the top address of the command extension data address table, reading in the command extension data address table is performed. A position can be specified. In this manner, whether or not the command extension data address table is referred to depends on whether the bit value of the work area reference bit included in the command lower byte data is "0" or "1." As a result, while preventing the data capacity of the command transmission table from increasing, it is possible to flexibly use various types of data to set the transmission of the command lower byte.

FIG. 294-6 shows a configuration example of the command extension data address table AKT11. The command extension data address table is composed of table data indicating a plurality of reference data lower addresses such as command transmission reference data lower addresses ADU01 to ADU05. At step AKS031 of the command set process shown in FIG. 294-4, the command lower byte data read at step AKS028 is used to specify the read position in the command extension data address table AKT11. The table data read from that read location constitutes the lower byte at the read address of the command extension data. For example, the table data indicating the command transmission reference data lower addresses ADU01 to ADU05 can all constitute the lower bytes in the read address of the command extension data. The command extension data acquired in this manner is stored in the serial communication data register in step AKS032 of the command set processing. Thereby, the command extension data can be transmitted toward the effect control board 12 as the EXT data which is the command lower byte.

FIG. 294-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of dataset processing. When the data set process is executed, the value corresponding to the top address of the data setting table is stored in the pointer in the calling process. A pointer used in data setting processing holds an address value that is a table read position in the data setting table. The pointer used in the data set process may be configured using, for example, the HL register included in the general-purpose register among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103 .

In the data setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the table head data to the number of processes (step AKS041). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103 . In data set processing, the B register stores a value corresponding to the number of processing. Next, it is determined whether or not the number of processes is "0" (step AKS042).

Corresponding to step AKS042, when the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS042; No), the setting destination address and setting data are read (step AKS043). For example, the table data read from the next address of the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored as the lower byte of the setting destination address, and the E register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103 store in Also, the table data read from the address corresponding to the value 2 larger than the stored value of the pointer is stored in the A register as setting data. Thereafter, the table reading position is updated by adding 2 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS044). The CPU 103 may be able to execute the processing corresponding to steps AKS043 and AKS044 by an INLD instruction prepared as one instruction of 2-byte configuration.

After step AKS044, the setting data is stored in the setting destination address (step AKS045). For example, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, the D register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register, stores F0 [H] corresponding to the upper byte of the address assigned to the game work area. . By storing the data stored in the A register in the data setting address obtained from the value stored in the DE register, the data setting of the setting destination address becomes possible. At this time, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS046), and it is determined whether or not the number of processes after updating has become "0" (step AKS047). When the number of processes corresponding to step AKS047 is other than "0" (step AKS047; No), the process returns to step AKS043 and controls to enable data setting using the next table data or the like.

When the number of processes corresponding to either step AKS042 or AKS047 is "0" (step AKS042; Yes, step AKS047; Yes), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer. (step AKS048). Then, the read position data is set to the number of processes (step AKS049). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether or not the number of processes is "0" (step AKS050). When the number of processes is "0" corresponding to step AKS050 (step AKS050; Yes), the data set processing ends.

When the number of processes is other than "0" corresponding to step AKS050 (step AKS050; No), the table reading position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS051). Then, the lower byte of the work address is read (step AKS052). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the E register as the lower byte of the work address. After that, the work address data is cleared (step AKS053). For example, by clearing the storage area of the work address obtained from the stored value of the DE register, the data of the work address can be cleared. At this time, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS054), and it is determined whether or not the number of processes after updating has become "0" (step AKS055). When the number of processes is other than "0" corresponding to step AKS055 (step AKS055; No), the process returns to step AKS051 and controls to enable data clear using the next table data or the like. When the number of processes is "0" corresponding to step AKS055 (step AKS055; Yes), the data set processing ends.

FIG. 294-8 is a flow chart showing an example of a specific number of times command transmission process. For example, in step S13 of game control main processing shown in FIG. The specified number of times command transmission process shown in FIG. 294-8 is a process for transmitting the first specified number of times command regarding the remaining number of times until the number of times of execution of the variable display reaches the specified number of times corresponding to the time saving condition when the power is turned on. is. A specific number counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102 . The specific number counter can store 2-byte data indicating a count value, and counts the remaining number of times until the number of executions of variable display reaches the specific number. The count value of the specific number counter becomes numerical information that can be updated based on the execution of the variable display.

In the specific number of times command transmission process, the CPU 103 first sets the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command (step AKS061). For example, 91[H] is stored in the A register as the command type data that is the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command. Also, the lower byte of the specific number counter is read (step AKS062). At this time, by storing the upper 4 bits in the B register and the lower 4 bits in the C register among the lower bytes of the read specific number counter, the count value shown in hexadecimal is different for each digit. Store it in a register. Like the B register, the C register is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, and can configure the BC register as a pair register in combination with the B register. Thus, in step AKS062, the counter data read from the read address of the lower byte of the specific number counter is stored in the BC register. Subsequently, the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS063). After that, the first transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS064). The first transmission data may be data stored in the C register, for example.

After step AKS064, second transmission data setting is performed (step AKS065). Here, for example, in the data stored in the B register, the bit value at bit number "4" among bit numbers "0" to "7" is set to "1" as the specific number of times command identification bit position. Then, the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS066). After that, the second transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS067). Note that step AKS066 may be performed first, and step AKS065 may be performed later.

Further, the upper byte of the specific number counter is read (step AKS068). At this time, the counter data read from the read address of the upper byte of the specific number counter is stored in the C register. The upper byte of the specific number counter may be 1-byte counter data. Subsequently, the third transmission data setting is performed (step AKS069). Here, for example, in the data stored in the C register, the bit value at bit number "5" among bit numbers "0" to "7" is set to "1" as the specific number of times command identification bit position. Then, the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS070). After that, the third transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS071). Note that step AKS070 may be performed first, and step AKS069 may be performed later.

As described above, in the specific number of times command transmission process, the CPU 103 generates the first transmission data, the second transmission data, and the third transmission data together with the command type data that is the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command. stored in the serial communication data register each time. For example, in the specific number of times command transmission process, after storing the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command in the serial communication data register in step AKS063, the first transmission data is stored in step AKS064, and the process proceeds to step AKS066. After storing the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command in step AKS067, the second transmission data is stored in step AKS070. 3 Store the transmission data. The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register, and transmits and outputs the read data to the performance control board 12 by the serial communication method. Thus, in the specific number of times command transmission process, every time the data used for the transmission of the first specific number of times command is created, by being stored in the serial communication data register and transmitted to the effect control board 12, It is possible to stably transmit one specific number of times designation command. Therefore, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state can be enhanced.

Since the specific number command transmission process is executed in step S13 of the game control main process shown in FIG. Control to be able to send. As a result, the design of the pachinko game machine 1 is facilitated, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state can be enhanced.

FIG. 294-9 shows a configuration example of the first specific number of times designation command. The first specific number of times designation command is transmitted by the specific number of times command transmission process when the power is turned on, and is the first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times. The remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is indicated by the count value of the specific number counter at a predetermined address in the RAM 102 . The count value of the specific number counter indicates the remaining number of times up to the specific number with 02AD[H] as the upper limit by using 2-byte data. For example, the setting table at the time of initialization specified by step S9 of the game control main process shown in FIG. Contains table data.

In steps AKS063 and AKS064 of the specific number of times command transmission process, the first specific number of times designation command of the first set AKC01 shown in FIG. 294-9(A) is transmitted. The first specific number of times designation command of the first set AKC01 includes command type data and first transmission data. The command type data of the first specific number of times command is 1-byte first control data indicating that the command type is the first specific number of times command. indicate. The first transmission data indicates a value in the 1 [H] digit as the first digit in the count value of the specific number counter, and is 1-byte second control data related to the count value. In the first transmission data, among the bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned from the least significant bit to the most significant bit, the bit values at bit numbers "4" and "5" are both "0" ” makes it possible to identify that it is the first specific number of times designation command of the first set AKC01.

In steps AKS066 and AKS067 of the specific number of times command transmission process, the first specific number of times designation command of the second set AKC02 shown in FIG. 294-9(B) is transmitted. The first specific number of times designation command of the second set AKC02 includes command type data and second transmission data. The command type data indicates 91 [H] as in the case of the first set AKC01. The second transmission data indicates a value in the 10 [H] digit as the second digit of the count value of the specific number counter, and is 1-byte second control data related to the count value. In the second transmission data, among the bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned in the same manner as in the first transmission data, the bit value at bit number "4" is set to "1", and the bit value at bit number "5" is set to "1". By setting the bit value to "0", it is possible to identify that it is the first specific number of times designation command of the second set AKC02.

In steps AKS070 and AKS071 of the specific number of times command transmission process, the first specific number of times designation command of the third set AKC03 shown in FIG. 294-9(C) is transmitted. The first specific number of times designation command of the third set AKC03 includes command type data and third transmission data. The command type data indicates 91 [H] as in the first set AKC01 and the second set AKC02. The third transmission data indicates a value in the 100 [H] digit as the third digit of the count value of the specific number counter, and serves as 1-byte second control data related to the count value. In the third transmission data, among bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned in the same manner as in the first transmission data and the second transmission data, the bit value at bit number "4" is set to "0", and bit By setting the bit value at number "5" to "1", it is possible to identify that it is the first specific number of times designation command of the third set AKC03.

In this way, the first specific number of times designation command has a 2-byte configuration for each of the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03. It is transmitted to the control board 12 . The first specific number of times command includes command type data, which is first control data, and second control data, which is set corresponding to the count value of the specific number of times counter, from the first transmission data to the third transmission data. There are a predetermined number of command data, which is a combination of either and , such as a total of three sets from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03. Then, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, in step S13 of the game control main process shown in FIG. Create a specified command.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, after executing the RWM check process of step S3, by determining whether or not the recovery condition is established in step S4, the information stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM is normal. It is possible to execute determination processing for determining whether or not. Then, when the recovery condition is established in step S4 and the determination result of the determination process is normal, the RWM initial setting process of step S7 is not executed. As a result, since the information stored in the RAM 102 is not changed before the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the count value of the specific number counter is also stored in the RAM 102 before the power is turned on. In this case, the specific number of times command processing in step S13 is executed based on the count value of the specific number of times counter serving as numerical information stored in the RAM 102. FIG. On the other hand, if the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 and the determination result of the determination process is not normal, the RWM initial setting process is executed in step S7, and then the specified initial setting table is changed in step S9. With reference to this, the data set process of step S11 is executed. As a result, the information stored in the RAM 102 is initialized when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and the count value of the specific number counter is set to 02AD[H] as the counter initial value corresponding to the specific number initial value. In this way, when the determination result of the determination process is not normal, the specific number of times command process of step S13 is executed based on the counter initial value of the specific number of times counter which is numerical information corresponding to the set specific number of times initial value. When the recovery condition is satisfied in step S4 of the game control main processing, the pachinko game machine 1 is hot-started based on the backup information stored in the RAM102. When the recovery condition is not established in step S4 of the game control main processing, the pachinko game machine 1 is cold-started based on the information stored in the RAM 102 initialized by the RWM initial setting processing of step S7. In the game control main process, the specific number of times command process of step S13 can be executed both when the determination result of the determination process of step S4 is normal and when it is not normal. Also, a first specified number of times designation command can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 when the power is turned on so that the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times can be specified. Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 can be easily designed, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be enhanced.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, after setting the interrupt prohibition by step S1, the specific number of times command transmission process of step S13 is executed, and by enabling the interrupt by the subsequent step S17, timer interrupt etc. Other processing based on it becomes executable. Therefore, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute other processes while executing the command transmission process for the specific number of times in step S13. As a result, it is possible to prevent the count value of the specific number counter from being updated when the control for transmitting the first specific number of times designation command is performed. A command specifying a specific number of times can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 under stable conditions when the power is turned on, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time saving state is enhanced. be able to.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, after executing the wait process of step S12, the specific times command transmission process of step S13 is executed. Therefore, the specific number of times command process is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Also, before executing the wait process of step S12, the command set process of step S10 is executed. In the command setting process of step S10, the backup-time command transmission table specified in step S5 or the initial command transmission table specified in step S8 corresponds to whether the determination result of the determination process of step S4 is normal or not. By referring to the command transmission table at the time of activation, control is performed so that the effect control command corresponding to the determination result by the determination process can be transmitted. Thus, the command set process of step S10 controls so that the effect control command corresponding to the determination result of the determination process can be transmitted before the predetermined period of time has elapsed due to the wait process of step S12. In the specific number of times command transmission processing in step S13, the first specific number of times designation command is sent to the main board 11 when the power is turned on so that the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times can be specified in both hot start and cold start. , to the performance control board 12 so that it can be transmitted. At this time, if the performance control command as the backup command, the performance control command as the initialization command, and the first specific number of times designation command are transmitted without interruption, the performance control board 12 side will be normal. may not be able to receive the production control command. Therefore, before enabling the first specific number of times designation command to be transmitted by the specific number of times command transmission process of step S13, the wait process of step S12 is executed to enable reception preparation on the side of the effect control board 12. , each performance control command can be reliably transmitted and received, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state can be enhanced.

FIG. 294-10(A) is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the total reserved memory number is "0" (step AKS101). For example, it is determined whether or not the count value of the start-up winning buffer storage counter is "0". The start-point winning buffer storage counter is a counter for counting the number of start-point winning designation values stored in the start-point winning buffer, and the count value indicates the total pending storage number.

When the total number of reserved memories is other than "0" in response to step AKS101 (step AKS101; No), the total number of reserved memories is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS102). In addition, the memory contents of the start-up winning buffer are shifted (step AKS103). The starting winning prize buffer changes the starting winning designation value when the pending storage number is updated based on the occurrence of the starting winning prize by the starting winning judgment processing in step S101 of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 290(A). is stored in the storage area of the buffer number corresponding to the total pending storage number. The specified starting point winning value is a value that indicates whether the first starting winning prize or the second starting winning prize has occurred. is set to "2". In step AKS103, for example, the address of the starting entry winning buffer with buffer number "0" is set as the transfer destination address, the address of the starting entry winning buffer with buffer number "1" is set as the transfer source address, and the transfer Set the count to "8" and execute the block transfer instruction. As a result, the storage contents of each storage area to which the buffer numbers "0" to "8" of the starting entry winning buffer at consecutive addresses in the RAM 102 are assigned are shifted by one to the previous address. . After that, the start-up winning buffer of buffer number "8" is cleared to initialize the stored contents.

Following step AKS103, the second special symbol determination control table is specified (step AKS104). For example, a value corresponding to the top address of the second special symbol determination control table is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. Then, it is determined whether or not the specified value for starting winning prize is "1" (step AKS105). For example, it reads out the start-up win designation value stored in the start-up win-win buffer of buffer number "0", and determines whether or not the value is "1". When the start opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS105; Yes), the first special symbol determination control table is designated again (step AKS106). For example, the value of the pointer is overwritten by storing the value corresponding to the head address of the first special symbol determination control table in the HL register serving as a pointer. Thus, in the special symbol normal process, after designating the second special symbol determination control table in step AKS104, when the start opening winning designation value is "1" in step AKS105, the first special symbol in step AKS106 Reconfigure the judgment control table by overwrite setting. As a result, when the frequency of use of the second special symbol determination control table is higher than the frequency of use of the first special symbol determination control table, the program capacity of the storage instructions used for table setting can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1. can increase Also, when the frequency of use of the second special symbol determination control table is higher than the frequency of use of the first special symbol determination control table, processing by a branch instruction is simplified, confirmation at the design stage is facilitated, and the pachinko game is played. The marketability of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

In response to step AKS105, if the start opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS105; No), after step AKS106, special symbol determination processing (step AKS107) and variation pattern setting processing ( After executing step AKS108), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

When the total reserved storage number is "0" corresponding to step AKS101 (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (step AKS109). The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that the demonstration display is being executed. When the demonstration display flag is ON (step AKS109; Yes), the special symbol normal process ends.

When the demonstration display flag is off in response to step AKS109 (step AKS109; No), the demonstration display flag is set to the on state (step AKS110), and after designating the standby command transmission table (step AKS111), After executing the command set process (step AKS112), the special symbol normal process ends.

FIG. 294-10(B) shows a configuration example of the standby command transmission table AKT15. The standby command transmission table AKT15 includes data indicating the number of processes as the top data of the table. In the standby command transmission table AKT15, "3" may be specified as the number of processes. The standby command transmission table AKT15 includes table data for transmitting a second specified number of times designation command, a background color designation command, and a customer waiting demo command, in addition to table head data indicating the number of processes. . The effect control command that is controlled to be transmittable using the standby command transmission table AKT15 is also referred to as a standby command. In the standby command transmission table AKT15, the table data for transmitting the second specified number of times command includes command type data specifying 94 [H] of MODE data as the upper byte of the second specified number of times command, and command extension data address. and lower byte data for acquiring the reference data lower address corresponding to the specific number of times command buffer in the table AKT11. The low-order byte data here includes a work area reference bit whose bit value is "1" and a bit other than the work area reference bit that indicates a specific number of times command buffer offset value.

The specific number of times command buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102 . The value stored in the specified number of times command buffer is 7F[H] when the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is "127" or more, and indicates the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is less than "127". It becomes a hexadecimal number. For example, the setting table at the time of initialization specified by step S9 of the game control main process shown in FIG. contains data. Thus, the second specific number of times designation command includes the command type data that is the first control data and the specific number of times command data that is the second control data that is set corresponding to the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. It consists of a set of combined command data.

In the standby command transmission table AKT15, the table data for transmitting the background color designation command includes command type data designating MODE data 95 [H] as the upper byte of the background color designation command, and command extension data address table AKT11. and lower byte data for acquiring the reference data lower address corresponding to the special symbol state designation buffer. The low-order byte data here includes a work area reference bit whose bit value is "1" and a bit other than the work area reference bit that indicates a special symbol state designation buffer offset value. The special symbol state designation buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, and stores a value indicating the state display of the special symbol. For example, when the game state is the normal state, the value stored in the special symbol state designation buffer is set to either 00 [H] or 03 [H], and when the game state is the time saving state, the special symbol state designation buffer. is set to 02[H]. When the game state is the normal state and the time saving state based on the end of the jackpot game state ends, the value stored in the special symbol state designation buffer is 03 during the special period corresponding to the number of executions of the special symbol game. H]. When the other game state is the normal state, the value stored in the special symbol state designation buffer is set to 00 [H].

In the waiting time command transmission table AKT15, the table data for transmitting the customer waiting demo command includes command type data specifying 9F[H] of MODE data as the upper byte of the customer waiting demo command and and command lower byte data specifying 03[H] of EXT data. The command lower byte data here is data indicating 03[H], which is the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command, including the work area reference bit whose bit value is "0".

In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10 (A), by determining whether or not the total number of pending storage is "0" in step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the pending storage information is stored. A pending storage determination process for determining can be executed. The reserved storage information includes, for example, data indicating the value of the game random number including the random number MR1 for special symbol determination, and can be stored and stored in a special symbol buffer provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. . When it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored because the total pending storage number is "0" in step AKS101 of the special symbol normal processing, refer to the standby command transmission table specified in step AKS111. Then, by the command set processing of step AKS112, the effect control command that becomes the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted. At this time, in the command set processing of step AKS112, the value stored in the specified number of times command buffer is read, and the upper byte and lower byte of the second specified number of times command are sequentially stored in the serial communication data register. , to enable transmission of the second specific number of times designation command. The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register, and transmits and outputs a second specific number of times designation command toward the effect control board 12 . Thus, when it is determined in the pending storage determination process that the pending storage information is not stored, the second specified number of times command is controlled to be transmitted using the stored value of the specified number of times command buffer as the stored information. be. Thus, when it is determined that the reservation storage information is not stored based on step AKS101 as the reservation storage determination processing of the special symbol normal processing, the command set processing of step AKS112 is executed to designate the second specific number of times. Since the command is controlled to be able to be transmitted, when the special game is not started because the reservation storage information is not stored, the second specific number of times designation command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. can be sent to As a result, the pachinko game machine having a plurality of states including a time saving state by controlling the second specific number of times designation command to be transmitted in response to the execution of the variable display by the special game etc. so that it can be stably transmitted. 1 can be improved.

The effect control command transmitted using the standby command transmission table AKT15 shown in FIG. 294-10(B) includes a customer waiting demo command designating a demonstration display in a non-game state where the game is stopped. . When it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored because the total pending storage number is "0" in step AKS101 of the special symbol normal processing, refer to the standby command transmission table specified in step AKS111. Then, the command set processing of step AKS112 controls so that the customer waiting demo command can be transmitted together with the second specific number of times designation command. Thus, in the pending storage determination process, when it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored, together with the second specific number of times designation command using the storage value of the specific number of times command buffer as the storage information, the customer related to the non-gaming state Control so that the wait demo command can be sent. In this way, by collectively transmitting the second specific number of times designation command and the customer waiting demo command, the design of processing and control related to the performance control command on the side of the performance control board 12 becomes easy, including the time saving state. Thus, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be enhanced.

FIG. 294-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS107 of FIG. 294-10(A) as the special symbol determination process. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 designates a special symbol buffer shift control table (step AKS201). For example, a value corresponding to the head address of the special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. The special symbol buffer shift control table is a control table used when shifting the memory contents of the special symbol buffer assigned a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102 . In the special symbol buffer, the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is updated based on the occurrence of the start winning prize by the starting winning judgment process in step S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 290(A). Data indicating the values of the extracted random numbers are stored in the storage area of the buffer number corresponding to the updated first reserved storage number or second reserved storage number. A special symbol buffer is prepared corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In step AKS201, in the case of the second special symbol determination control table specified by step AKS104 shown in FIG. 294-10(A) and in the case of the first special symbol determination control table specified by step AKS106, A different special symbol buffer shift control table is specified. For example, the first special symbol buffer shift control table is specified when the first special symbol game is executed in response to the start opening winning designation value of "1". On the other hand, when the second special symbol game is executed corresponding to the start opening winning designation value "2", the second special symbol buffer shift control table is designated.

After step AKS201, a special symbol buffer shift process is executed (step AKS202). Then, the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination is read (step AKS203). Subsequently, special symbol big hit determination (step AKS204), special symbol small hit determination (step AKS205), and special symbol information setting (step AKS206) are performed. In this embodiment, the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined to be one of "big win", "minor win", and "losing", and is not determined to be "time saving".

The special symbol big hit determination in step AKS204 determines whether or not the special symbol display result is "big hit" by comparing the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS203 with the big hit determination value. . When it is determined that the special symbol display result is "big hit" in the special symbol big hit determination, 01 [H], which is the big hit designation value, is set to the hit flag. The special symbol small hit determination in step AKS205 compares the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS203 with the small hit determination value to determine whether or not the special symbol display result is "small hit". judge. When it is determined that the special symbol display result is "small hit" in the special symbol small hit determination, 02 [H], which is a small hit designated value, is set to the hit flag.

The special symbol information setting in step AKS206 includes the setting of the big hit symbol when the special symbol display result is "big hit" and the setting of the big hit symbol when the special symbol display result is "small hit" for the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. It includes the setting of the small winning pattern in the case of "hit" and the setting of the losing pattern in the case that the special figure display result is "losing". Data indicating the fixed special symbol is stored in a special symbol buffer. The special symbol buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, and the second special symbol determination control table or step AKS106 specified at step AKS104 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. By referring to the specified first special symbol determination control table, it is possible to specify the address of the special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Also, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "big hit", the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning symbol can be used to set the specified value of the special symbol. Further, in the special symbol information setting of step AKS206, when the specific display result is "small win", a small winning symbol designation value can be set by sorting using the value of the winning symbol selection random number MR2. In addition, the special symbol information setting of step AKS206 includes a command transmission setting before the start of variation for transmitting a background color designation command. Following step AKS206, after specifying the post-judgment work setting table (step AKS207), the data set process (step AKS208) is executed, and then the special symbol judgment process ends.

FIG. 294-12(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS202 of FIG. 294-11 as the special symbol buffer shift process. In the special symbol buffer shift process, the CPU 103 sets the transfer source, transfer destination, and number of transfers (step AKS301). For example, while setting the address of the special symbol buffer with the buffer number "1" as the transfer source address, the address of the special symbol buffer with the buffer number "0" is set as the transfer destination address, 2 Set the number of times of transfer to the multiplication value of "4" corresponding to the upper limit of the number of pending memories and the buffer size of each special symbol buffer. After that, the block transfer instruction is executed (step AKS302). As a result, the storage contents of each storage area assigned buffer numbers "0" to "4" of the special symbol buffer at consecutive addresses in the RAM 102 are transferred one by one to the storage area corresponding to the previous buffer number. You can shift with . Also, the count value of the start opening winning memory counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS303), and the final buffer to which the buffer number "4" is assigned in the special symbol buffer is cleared (step AKS304).

After step AKS304, after designating the specific number of times designation command transmission table (step AKS305), command set processing (step AKS306) is executed. Thereby, it controls so that the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted in response to the start of the first special game or the second special game. Subsequently, after designating the effect storage information designation command transmission table (step AKS307), the command set processing (step AKS308) is executed, and then the special symbol buffer shift processing ends. The special symbol buffer shift process includes steps AKS305 and AKS306 for controlling transmission of the second specific number of times designation command in response to execution of variable display of special symbols etc. in the special symbol game.

FIG. 294-12(B) shows a configuration example of the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21. The specified number of times command transmission table AKT21 does not include data indicating the number of processes as the top data of the table. When the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted using the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21, the number of transmission commands is "1", so the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table head data is "1". Correspondingly, the number of processes is set to "1" in the command set process of step AKS306. The table head data of the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21 is command type data that designates 94 [H] of the MODE data as the upper byte of the second specific number of times designation command. The table data corresponding to the next address of the table top data in the specified number of times command transmission table AKT21 is the lower byte data for acquiring the reference data lower address corresponding to the specified number of times command buffer in the command extension data address table AKT11. becomes. This low-order byte data includes a work area reference bit with a bit value of "1" and a bit other than the work area reference bit that indicates 12 [H], which is the specified number of times command buffer offset value. As a result, the lower byte data indicates 92 [H] obtained by adding 12 [H] of the offset value and 80 [H] corresponding to the bit value "1" of the work area reference bit. .

FIG. 294-12(C) shows a configuration example AKC11 of the second specific number of times designation command. The second specified number of times command includes command type data and specified number of times command data. The command type data of the second specific number of times command is 1-byte first control data indicating that the command type is the second specific number of times command, and MODE data of the second specific number of times command is 94 [H]. indicate. The specified number of times command data is 1-byte second control data that can be set corresponding to the stored value of the specified number of times command buffer. The specified number of times command data has a leading bit value of "0", and the remaining 7 bits can be used to specify a specified number of times command buffer storage value from 00[H] to 7F[H]. Thus, the specific number of times command data indicates 00 [H] as the minimum value and 7F [H] as the maximum value. Also, the second specific number of times designation command is a 2-byte effect control command.

In the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A), the specific number of times specified command transmission table specified in step AKS305 is referred to, and the second specific number of times specified command is issued by the command set process of step AKS306. sent. The special symbol buffer shift process becomes the suspended storage information by determining that the total suspended storage number is other than "0" by step AKS101 in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10(A). This is included in the special symbol determination process executed in step AKS107 when data indicating the value of the game random number is stored. In this case, the special symbol buffer stores data indicating values of various random numbers contained in the reserved storage information, such as data indicating the random number MR1 for special symbol determination. In the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 294-11, the memory contents of the special symbol buffer are shifted by executing the special symbol buffer shift process in step AKS202. In this special pattern buffer shift process, in the command set process of step AKS306, the stored value of the command buffer for the specified number of times is read, and the upper byte and lower byte of the second specified number of times command are sequentially transferred to the serial communication data register. By storing, it controls so that the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register, and transmits and outputs a second specific number of times designation command toward the effect control board 12 . In this way, in the special symbol buffer shift process, using the stored value of the specified number of times command buffer serving as the stored information, the second specified number of times specified command is controlled to be able to be transmitted. In this way, when the special symbol determination processing of the special symbol normal processing is executed, the command set processing is executed in the special symbol buffer shift processing to control so that the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted, so that the special symbol game At the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, a second specified number of times designation command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁Therefore, the correspondence relationship between the special game to be started and the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is clarified, designing and controlling the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times becomes easy, and the pachinko game has a plurality of states including a time saving state. The marketability of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

FIG. 294-13 shows an example of design designation value determination. Among them, FIG. 294-13(A) is a determination example AKD01 in the case where the special figure display result is "jackpot". FIG. 294-13(B) is a determination example AKD02 in the case of special figure display result "small hit". In the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 294-11, in the special symbol information setting of step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "big hit", the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning symbol is used to select the big hit symbol. settings. For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate the jackpot specified value, the data indicating the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning pattern is stored in the special symbol buffer, and the starting entry winning specified value is " A jackpot state setting table corresponding to the case of "1" and the case of "2" is designated. After that, by comparing the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning pattern with the distribution judgment value indicated by the table data of the specified table for setting the big winning state, the designated value of the big winning pattern is determined according to the determination ratio shown in the determination example AKD01. . The jackpot design designation value is stored in the jackpot design determination buffer. Also, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "small hit", the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning symbol is used to set the small winning symbol. For example, when the hit flag is set to 02 [H] and indicates a small hit designated value, data indicating a value obtained by adding 64 [H] to the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning design is stored in the special design buffer. Also, a small hit state setting table is designated corresponding to the case where the start opening winning designation value is "1" and the case where it is "2". Subsequently, by comparing the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning design with the distribution determination value indicated by the table data of the designated small winning state setting table, the small winning design designated value according to the determination ratio shown in the determination example AKD02 to decide. The small-hit design specification value is stored in the small-hit design determination buffer. In addition, in the special symbol information setting of step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "loss", F1 [H] which is the value of specifying the loss symbol pattern is stored in the special symbol buffer.

FIG. 294-14 shows an example of setting the number of openings of the big winning opening. Of these, FIG. 294-14 (A) is a setting example AKE01 in the case of the special figure display result is "jackpot". FIG. 294-14 (B) is a setting example AKE02 when the special figure display result is "small hit". In the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 294-11, in the special symbol information setting of step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "big win", the maximum number of times the big winning opening is opened using the specified value of the big win symbol. settings. For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate the jackpot designation value, the special figure display result designates the jackpot open number maximum value table corresponding to "big hit". The maximum number of big winning opening opening times table corresponding to the special figure display result "big win" includes table data that associates the specified value of the big winning symbol with the maximum number of opening big winning openings. By referring to such a table of the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening, the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening corresponding to the designated value of the jackpot symbol is determined. The data indicating the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening determined at this time is stored in the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening. In addition, when the special figure display result is "small hit", it is possible to set the maximum value of the number of times of opening the big winning opening by using the small hit symbol designated value. For example, the special figure display result refers to the maximum number of times of opening the big winning opening corresponding to the "small hit", and determines the maximum number of times of opening the big winning opening corresponding to the specified value of the small winning symbol. The data indicating the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening determined at this time is stored in the maximum number of opening times of the big winning opening. In addition, when the special figure display result is "small win", the maximum value of the number of opening times of the big winning opening is set when V winning occurs due to the game ball passing through the V winning area 51 in the small winning game state. may be determined.

FIG. 294-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS108 of FIG. 294-10(A) as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS221). For example, the value of the hit flag is read, and when the read value is 01 [H], which is the jackpot designation value, it is determined that the special figure display result is "jackpot". When the special figure display result is "big hit" (step AKS221; Yes), the big hit design specified value is read out (step AKS222). The jackpot design designation value is a jackpot design designation value set when the special diagram display result is "big hit", and is stored in the production design buffer. Also, the effect state selection designation value is read (step AKS223). The effect state selection designation value is a value stored in the effect state selection buffer, and is set to any one of 00[H] to 0E[H]. After step AKS223, a big hit fluctuation pattern type selection table is designated (step AKS224). The jackpot time variation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "jackpot", and includes the jackpot symbol designation value read at step AKS222 and the effect read at step AKS223. It is sufficient if a different table can be specified corresponding to the state selection specified value.

When the special figure display result is not "big hit" corresponding to step AKS221 (step AKS221; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS225). For example, the value of the hit flag is read, and when the read value is 02 [H], which is the small hit designation value, it may be determined that the special figure display result is "small hit". When the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS225; Yes), the small hit design designated value is read out (step AKS226). The small hit design specified value is the specified value of the small hit design set when the special figure display result is "small hit", and is stored in the production design buffer. Also, the effect state selection designation value is read (step AKS227). Thereafter, a small hit variation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS228). The small hit time variation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "small hit". It suffices if a different table can be specified corresponding to the read effect state selection specified value.

When the special figure display result is not "small win" corresponding to step AKS225 (step AKS225; No), for example, the starting opening winning designation value is read from the starting opening winning buffer of buffer number "0" (step AKS229). Also, the effect state selection designation value is read (step AKS230). After that, the change pattern type selection table at the time of failure is specified (step AKS231). Loss time fluctuation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern type when the special figure display result is "losing", and the start entrance winning designation value read by step AKS229 and read by step AKS230 It suffices if a different table can be specified corresponding to the effect state selection specified value. In addition, the change pattern type selection table at the time of losing is the first reserved memory number when the starting entry winning designation value is "1", or the second reservation memory number when the starting entry winning designation value is "2" , different tables may be designated.

After steps AKS224, AKS228, and AKS231, the value of random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is read (step AKS232). The data indicating the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type may be stored in the variation pattern type selection buffer included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special symbol buffer. Subsequently, the variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type (step AKS233). Next, a fluctuation pattern determination table is designated (step AKS234). At step AKS234, it is sufficient if a different variation pattern determination table can be specified corresponding to the variation pattern type selected at step AKS233. Then, the value of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is read (step AKS235). The data indicating the value of the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern may be stored in the variation pattern determination buffer included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special symbol buffer. Further, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the value of the fluctuation pattern determination random number MR5 (step AKS236).

Following step AKS236, a variable command transmission table is designated (step AKS237), and command set processing (step AKS238) is executed. The variation command transmission table includes table data for transmitting an effect control command at the start of variation corresponding to the start of variation of special symbols in a special symbol game. For example, the variation command transmission table specified corresponding to the first special game includes, in addition to the top data of the table indicating the number of processes, a performance symbol specification command, a first variation start specification command, and a variation pattern specification command. , contains table data for sending On the other hand, the variation command transmission table specified corresponding to the second special game includes, in addition to the top data of the table specifying the number of processes, an effect design specification command, a second variation start specification command, a variation pattern It contains table data for sending specified commands.

After step AKS238, a special symbol variation time table is designated (step AKS239), and a special symbol variation time is set (step AKS240). The special symbol variation time table includes table data for setting time data indicating variable display time such as special symbol variation time corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern. At step AKS240, the special symbol variation time table designated at step AKS239 is referred to, and time data development processing is executed, so that time data corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is stored in the HL register. The time data and the like thus acquired may be set as the variable time data as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer.

After setting the variation pattern, the work setting table is designated (step AKS241), the data setting process (step AKS242) is executed, and then the variation pattern setting process ends. The post-variation pattern setting work setting table includes table data for updating the special symbol process code to 01 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process. In addition, the post-variation pattern setting work setting table includes table data for updating the value stored in the special symbol variation display buffer to 01 [H]. The special symbol fluctuating display buffer stores a value designating the display pattern during the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the first special symbol fluctuating display buffer corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a second special symbol fluctuating display buffer corresponding to the special symbol. In the data setting process of step AKS242, with reference to the work setting table after setting the variation pattern designated by step AKS241, when starting the first special symbol game, the stored value of the display buffer during the first special symbol variation is set to 01 [ H], and when starting the second special symbol game, the stored value of the display buffer during the second special symbol variation may be updated to 01 [H]. Further, the post-variation pattern setting work setting table includes table data for clearing the random value buffer storing the random numbers used for determining the variation pattern and initializing the stored values.

FIG. 294-16 shows a variation pattern determination example AKD11 when the special figure display result is "jackpot". In the variation pattern determination example AKD11, the determinable pattern type and the determinable pattern are set differently corresponding to the combination of the effect state selection designated value and the jackpot symbol designated value. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "jackpot" at step AKS221, the jackpot design specified value read at step AKS222 and step AKS223 In step AKS233, a variation pattern type is selected and determined from the determinable pattern types corresponding to the effect state selection designation value read out, and in step AKS236, a variation pattern is determined from the determinable patterns. For example, the jackpot time variation pattern type selection table specified by step AKS224 corresponds to the combination of the jackpot symbol designation value and the production state selection designation value, and the variation pattern type selection indicating the distribution judgment value for each determinable pattern type. Any table may be selected from a plurality of tables prepared in advance. In addition, the variation pattern determination table specified by step AKS234 is a variation pattern determination table indicating the allocation judgment value for each determinable pattern corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern type by step AKS233. Any one selected from the above may be used.

FIG. 294-17 shows a variation pattern determination example AKD12 when the special figure display result is "small hit". In the variation pattern determination example AKD12, the determinable pattern type and the determinable pattern are set differently corresponding to the combination of the effect state selection designated value and the small winning symbol designated value. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" at step AKS225, the small hit design specified value read at step AKS226 and step In step AKS233, the variation pattern type is selected and determined from among the determinable pattern types corresponding to the effect state selection designation value read out at AKS227, and in step AKS236, the variation pattern is determined from among the determinable patterns. be. For example, the small hit time variation pattern type selection table specified by step AKS228 corresponds to the combination of the small hit symbol specified value and the production state selection specified value, and the variation pattern indicating the distribution judgment value for each determinable pattern type It is sufficient that the type selection table is selected from a plurality of tables prepared in advance. In addition, the variation pattern determination table specified by step AKS234 is a variation pattern determination table indicating the allocation judgment value for each determinable pattern corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern type by step AKS233. Any one selected from the above may be used.

FIG. 294-18 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the counted value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS121). In the special symbol process timer here, at step AKS240 of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15, the variation time data corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is set as the timer initial value. . When the counted value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS121; No), the counted value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS122), and the special symbol variation process ends.

When the timing value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), the special symbol process code is updated to 02 [H] which is the value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing. (step AKS123). Moreover, after executing the special symbol stop time setting process (step AKS124), the counter subtraction process (step AKS125) is executed, and then the special symbol variation process is terminated.

FIG. 294-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS124 of FIG. 294-18 as the special symbol stop time setting process. In the special symbol stop time setting process, the CPU 103 first performs symbol stop time setting SZA1 (step AKS251). For example, a value corresponding to the top address of the data selection table at symbol stop corresponding to the setting SZA at symbol stop is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS252). For example, when 01 [H] is set to the hit flag to indicate a big hit designated value, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit". When the special figure display result is not "big hit" (step AKS252; No), it is determined whether or not the designated value for effect after the end of the hit is 00 [H] (step AKS253). Data indicating the post-win effect designation value is stored in a post-win effect designation buffer provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, and is 00[H], 01[H], 03[H], 05[. H], 08[H], or 09[H]. When the power is turned on, if the recovery condition is not established in step S4 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. The game work area is cleared, and the specified effect value is set to 00 [H] after the winning is completed.

When the designated value for the effect after the winning is not 00 [H] corresponding to step AKS253 (step AKS253; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reach determination value (step AKS254). At step AKS254, data indicating the count value of the specific number counter is stored in the DE register. After that, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether or not the updated value becomes "0". In this way, the reach determination value of the specific number counter is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0". is stored in a storage area such as a DE register that is different from the specific number counter, and the stored value is updated by subtracting 1 to determine whether or not the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reach determination value. The count value itself of the specific number counter can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

When the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reach determination value corresponding to step AKS254 (step AKS254; Yes), the symbol stop time setting SZA3 is reset by overwrite setting (step AKS255). For example, the HL register serving as a pointer is overwritten with a value corresponding to the top address of the data selection table at symbol stop corresponding to the setting SZA3 at symbol stop and stored. The count value of the specific number counter is set to 02AD [H] as a counter initial value corresponding to the specific number initial value when the power is turned on or when the jackpot game state ends. Thereafter, when the special figure game is executed and the special figure display result is not "big hit", the count value of the specific number counter is updated by subtracting 1. Then, when the count value of the specific number counter reaches 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS254 that the reached determination value has been reached. Therefore, the rate of determination that the specific condition that the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reach determination value is satisfied is sufficiently lower than the rate of determination that such a specific condition is not satisfied. Therefore, in the special symbol stop time setting process, after performing symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251, when the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254, in step AKS255 symbol stop time setting SZA3 is set again by the overwrite setting. Thus, when the setting frequency of the setting SZA1 at the time of symbol stop is higher than the setting frequency of the setting SZA3 at the time of symbol stop, the program capacity of the storage instruction used for setting the table can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 is enhanced. can be done. In addition, when the setting frequency of the setting SZA1 at the time of symbol stop is higher than the setting frequency of the setting SZA3 at the time of symbol stop, the processing by the branch instruction is simplified, the confirmation at the design stage is facilitated, and the product of the pachinko game machine 1. can enhance sexuality.

When the count value of the specific number counter does not reach the reaching determination value corresponding to step AKS254 (step AKS254; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS256). For example, when 02 [H] is set to the hit flag to indicate a small hit designated value, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "small hit". When the special figure display result is not "small hit" (step AKS256; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end determination value (step AKS257). At step AKS257, the data indicating the count value of the first time saving counter is stored in the DE register. After that, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether or not the updated value becomes "0". Thus, the end determination value of the first time-saving counter is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0", but in step AKS257, instead of updating the count value itself of the first time-saving counter, the count value is By storing the indicated data in a storage area such as a DE register different from the first time saving counter and updating the stored value by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end determination value . The first time-saving counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, stores 2-byte data, and counts the total number of first special game and second special game that can be executed in the time-saving state as the remaining number of times. can be counted by counting down. The count value itself of the first time saving counter can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

When the count value of the first time-saving counter does not reach the end determination value corresponding to step AKS257 (step AKS257; No), it is determined whether or not the start opening winning prize designation value is "1" (step AKS258) . At this time, if the specified value for the start opening is "2" and is not "1" (step AKS258; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the second time reduction counter reaches the end determination value (step AKS259) . At step AKS259, the data indicating the count value of the second time saving counter is stored in the DE register. After that, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether or not the updated value becomes "0". Thus, the end determination value of the second time-saving counter is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0", but in step AKS259, instead of updating the count value itself of the second time-saving counter, the count value is By storing the indicated data in a storage area such as a DE register different from the second time saving counter and updating the stored value by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end determination value . The second time-saving counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, stores 2-byte data, and can count the number of times of the second special game that can be executed in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. . The count value itself of the second time saving counter can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

When the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end determination value corresponding to step AKS257 (step AKS257; Yes), when the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end determination value corresponding to step AKS259 ( Step AKS259; Yes), the setting SZA2 at symbol stop is set again by overwrite setting (step AKS260). For example, the HL register serving as a pointer is overwritten with a value corresponding to the head address of the data selection table at symbol stop corresponding to the setting SZA2 at symbol stop and stored. The count values of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter are set to counter initial values corresponding to the number of fluctuations during the time-saving at the end of the jackpot game state. After that, when the special game is executed in the time saving state, the count value of at least one of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter is decremented by 1 and updated. Then, when the count value of the first time saving counter becomes 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS257 that the end determination value is reached. Further, when the count value of the second time saving counter becomes 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS259 that the end determination value is reached. Therefore, the ratio of determining that the specific condition that the count value of the first time saving counter or the second time saving counter reaches the end determination value is satisfied is sufficiently higher than the ratio of determining that such a specific condition is not satisfied. a low percentage of Therefore, in the special symbol stop time setting process, after performing the symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251, or when the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end determination value in step AKS257, the second time saving counter in step AKS259 reaches the end judgment value, in step AKS260 the symbol stop time setting SZA2 is reset by overwrite setting. As a result, when the setting frequency of the setting SZA1 at the time of symbol stop is higher than the setting frequency of the setting SZA2 at the time of symbol stop, the program capacity of the storage instruction used for setting the table can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 is enhanced. can be done. In addition, when the setting frequency of the setting SZA1 at the time of symbol stop is higher than the setting frequency of the setting SZA2 at the time of symbol stop, the processing by the branch instruction is simplified, the confirmation at the design stage is facilitated, and the product of the pachinko game machine 1. can enhance sexuality.

If the special figure display result is "big hit" corresponding to step AKS252 (step AKS252; Yes), if the specified value of effect after the end of hitting is 00 [H] corresponding to step AKS253 (step AKS253; Yes) , If the special figure display result is "small hit" corresponding to step AKS256 (step AKS256; Yes), if the start entrance winning designation value is "1" corresponding to step AKS258 (step AKS258; Yes) Or, if the count value of the second time-saving counter does not reach the end determination value corresponding to step AKS259 (step AKS259; No), based on the symbol stop time setting SZA1 by step AKS251, command set processing (step AKS261) Then, the data setting process (step AKS262) is executed, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends. After step AKS255, command set processing (step AKS261) and data set processing (step AKS262) are executed based on the symbol stop time setting SZA3, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends. After step AKS260, command set processing (step AKS261) and data set processing (step AKS262) are executed based on the symbol stop time setting SZA2, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends.

FIG. 294-20 shows a setting example AKE11 when symbols are stopped. In the special symbol stop time setting process, by executing the command set process of step AKS261 based on one of the symbol stop time setting SZA1 to SZA3, it is possible to transmit the effect symbol determination command with different EXT data that is the lower byte. Control. Also, in the special symbol stop time setting process, by executing the data set process of step AKS262 based on one of the symbol stop setting SZA1 to SZA3, a different timer initial value can be set for the special symbol process timer. to control. For example, the special symbol process timer is set to 007D [H] as a timer initial value in the case of symbol stop setting SZA1, and is set to 05DC [H] as the timer initial value in the case of symbol stop setting SZA2, and the symbol is stopped. In the case of hour setting SZA3, 4F7E[H] is set as the timer initial value. The special symbol process timer in which these timer initial values are set is updated by subtracting 1 until the timer value becomes "0" in the special symbol stop process every time the timer interrupt of the game control microcomputer 100 occurs thereafter. be.

A timer interrupt of the game control microcomputer 100 occurs, for example, at a period of 4 milliseconds. As a result, in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA1, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbols after the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game is set to 007D[H]×4=500 milliseconds. be done. The symbol stop time of the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is the normal stop time. Further, in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA2, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbols after the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game is set to 05DC[H]×4=6000 milliseconds. be. In the case of symbol stop time setting SZA3, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbols after the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game is set to 4F7E[H]×4=81400 milliseconds. The symbol stop time of the symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a specific stop time different from the normal stop time. Symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a setting performed by step AKS255 when the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254 of the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. . When the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reach determination value, a time saving condition based on the number of executions of the special game is established, and the game state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state. At this time, corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3, as the stop time after the special figure fluctuation time has passed, it is set to a specific stop time different from the normal stop time.

The lower byte of the production pattern confirmation command is set to 00 [H] in the case of setting SZA1 at the time of design stop, 01 [H] is set in the case of setting SZA2 at the time of design stop, and 02 in the case of setting SZA3 at the time of design stop. [H] is set. When the special figure fluctuation time in which the variable display of the special figure is executed in the special figure game has passed, the command set processing of step AKS261 is controlled so that the production design determination command can be transmitted, and the production is performed in response to the lower byte. The symbol stop time can be specified on the control board 12 side. For example, it becomes possible to specify that the symbol stop time is a specific stop time different from the normal stop time, corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. In the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 executes production control corresponding to the reception of the production pattern confirmation command with the lower byte 02 [H], thereby controlling the time saving state based on the specific stop time. What is necessary is just to make the information production|presentation which reports that it will be performed executable.

FIG. 294-21 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step AKS125 of FIG. 294-18 as counter subtraction processing. In the counter subtraction process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS271). For example, when 01 [H] is set to the hit flag to indicate a big hit designated value, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit". When the special figure display result is not "big hit" (step AKS271; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the specific number counter has reached the reach determination value (step AKS272). In step AKS272, if the count value of the specific number counter is already "0", it is determined that the count value has not reached the reach determination value. On the other hand, if the count value of the specific number counter is other than "0", it is determined whether or not the count value becomes "0" after being updated by subtracting 1 from the count value. If the updated count value is other than "0", it is determined that the reach determination value has not been reached. If the updated count value is "0", it is determined that the reached determination value has been reached. At step AKS272, a value corresponding to the address of the specific number counter is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer, and the count value itself of the specific number counter can be updated by subtracting 1 from the stored value at that address. Thus, the count value of the specific number counter can be updated by the counter subtraction process based on the execution of the variable display. When the count value of the specific number counter reaches the arrival judgment value corresponding to step AKS272 (step AKS272; Yes), the work setting table at arrival is specified (step AKS273), and data set processing (step AKS274) is executed. do.

Determination by step AKS272 is not performed when the special figure display result is "jackpot". The determination by step AKS272 includes a process of updating the count value by subtracting 1 if the count value of the specific number counter is not yet "0". The count value of the specific number counter becomes numerical information that can be updated by step AKS272 based on the execution of the variable display. In step AKS271, based on the variable display of the special symbols in the executed special symbol game, an advantage determination is made as to whether or not to control to a big win game state as an advantageous state corresponding to the "big win" as the special symbol display result. . In response to the fact that the special figure display result is a "big hit", if the decision result of such an advantageous decision is a decision to control to an advantageous state, update the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information do not On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach determination value has been reached by updating the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, when the determination result of the advantageous determination is a determination that control is not to be performed in an advantageous state. is a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times. In this way, when the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, for example, the count value of the specific number counter is updated by subtracting 1 based on the execution of the special game and becomes "0", in steps AKS273 and AKS274 , data setting processing including control of the game state to the time saving state is performed.

In step AKS272, the count value of the specific number counter is updated by subtracting 1 to become "0", and when the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, the special symbol stop time setting shown in FIG. 294-19 In the processing, when it is determined in step AKS254 that the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching determination value, command set processing in step AKS261 is executed based on the symbol stop time setting SZA3 in step AKS255. At this time, by transmitting the production pattern confirmation command corresponding to the setting SZA3 at the time of design stop shown in FIG. , it is possible to specify that it is controlled to the time saving state. Further, when the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, it is possible to specify that the time saving state is controlled by transmitting the background color specification command or the second specific number of times specification command.

When the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state corresponding to the "jackpot", if the count value of the specific number counter as numerical information is updated, the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot game state. Although it is a game, there is a possibility that an effect corresponding to the start of the time saving state may be executed due to the update of the numerical information. On the other hand, in the counter subtraction process, when the special figure display result is "big hit" at step AKS271, the determination at step AKS272 is not performed. Thereby, when the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state corresponding to the "jackpot", the count value of the specific number of times counter which is the numerical information is not updated, so that it corresponds to the start of the time saving state. The performance can be appropriately executed to improve the amusement of the game, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state can be enhanced.

On the other hand, determination by step AKS272 can be performed when a special figure display result is "small hit." Then, when it is determined that the reaching determination value has been reached by updating the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times. At this time, in steps AKS273 and AKS274, data setting processing including control of the game state to the time saving state is performed. Therefore, in a special game in which the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, reaches the reach determination value, when the special figure display result is "small win", V winning must occur in the small win game state. For example, after the small winning game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time saving state. Alternatively, when V winning occurs in this small winning game state, after the setting for controlling the time saving state is performed based on the end of the special figure game, it will be controlled to the big winning game state, so the time saving state treated as a jackpot.

If the special figure display result is "big hit" corresponding to step AKS271 (step AKS271; Yes), if the count value of the specific number counter does not reach the reach determination value corresponding to step AKS272 (step AKS272; No) Alternatively, after executing the data setting process of step AKS274, the specific number of times command data is set to the specific number of times command upper limit value (step AKS275). The specified number of times command data is data for creating the second control data that will be the lower byte of the second specified number of times command in the counter subtraction process, and is stored in a data creation storage area such as the A register. The specific number of times command upper limit value is the maximum value of the specific number of times command data that can be designated by the lower byte of the second specific number of times designation command, and indicates, for example, 7F[H]. At step AKS275, for example, 2-byte data is read from the address of the specific counter stored in the HL register serving as a pointer, stored in the DE register, and then 7F[H] is stored in the A register.

After step AKS275, it is determined whether or not the count value of the specific number counter is greater than the upper limit determination value (step AKS276). For example, when the count value of the specific number counter is a value greater than 007F[H], it is determined that the value is greater than the upper limit determination value. When the count value of the specific number counter is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value and not larger than the upper limit judgment value (Step AKS276; No), the lower byte of the count value of the specific number counter is overwritten as the specific number command data. Reset (step AKS277). For example, by overwriting the A register with the lower byte value stored in the E register among the count values of the specific number of times counter stored in the DE register, the specific number of times command data is reset. . The count value of the specific number counter is set to 02AD [H] as a counter initial value corresponding to the specific number initial value when the power is turned on or when the jackpot game state ends. Thereafter, when the special figure game is executed and the special figure display result is not "big hit", the count value of the specific number counter is updated by subtracting 1. After the count value of the specific number counter reaches 007F[H], it is determined in step AKS276 that the value is not greater than the upper limit determination value. Therefore, the rate at which it is determined that the count value of the specific number counter is not greater than the upper limit determination value is sufficiently lower than the rate at which it is determined to be greater than the upper limit determination value. Therefore, in the counter subtraction process, after setting the specific number of times command data to the specific number of times command upper limit value in step AKS275, if the count value of the specific number of times counter is not larger than the upper limit determination value in step AKS276, step The AKS 277 resets the lower byte of the count value of the specific number counter as specific number command data by overwrite setting. As a result, when the setting frequency of the upper limit value of the specific number of times command is higher than the setting frequency of the lower byte in the count value of the specific number of times counter as the specific number of times command data, the program capacity of the storage instruction used for setting the specific number of times command data, etc. can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced. Also, as the specific number of command data, when the setting frequency of the upper limit value of the specific number of times command is higher than the setting frequency of the lower byte in the count value of the specific number of times counter, the processing by the branch instruction is simplified, and the confirmation at the design stage is possible. It becomes easy, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

If the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit judgment value corresponding to step AKS276 (step AKS276; Yes), or after step AKS277, the specific number of times command data is stored in the specific number of times command buffer (step AKS278). The specific number of times command upper limit value set in the specific number of times command data in step AKS275 is 7F[H] corresponding to the upper limit judgment value used in the judgment in step AKS276. The upper limit judgment value used for the judgment in step AKS276 serves as judgment information to be compared with the count value of the specific number counter. If the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit judgment value, 7F[H], which is the upper limit value of the specific number of times command set in step S275, is stored in the specific number of times command buffer in step AKS278. . If the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to the upper limit judgment value, 7F[H], which is the same as the specific number of times command upper limit value, is added to the specific number of times command data as the lower byte of the count value of the specific number of times counter in step AKS277. It is reset and then stored in the command buffer for a specified number of times in step AKS278. In this way, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value, the data indicating 7F[H] equal to the upper limit judgment value as judgment information is stored in the specific number of times command buffer. The stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is read when executing the command set process at step AKS308 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. Used as specific number of times command data. Therefore, in step AKS278, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times command data, which is the second control data of the second specific number of times designation command, corresponds to the upper limit judgment value, which is the judgment information. 7F[H] is stored in the command buffer for a specified number of times.

When the lower byte in the count value of the specific number counter is set as the specific number command data in step AKS277, the specific number command data is stored in the specific number command buffer in step AKS278, so that the lower byte in the count value of the specific number counter is stored in step AKS278. The same value as the byte is stored in the command buffer a certain number of times. The count value of the specific number counter becomes numerical information that can be updated by step AKS272 based on the execution of the variable display. The stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is read when executing the command set process at step AKS308 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. Used as specific number of times command data. Therefore, in step AKS278, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is less than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times command data which is the second control data of the second specific number of times specifying command is set as the specific number of times counter which is numerical information. Store the same value as the lower byte in the number in the command buffer a specified number of times. This prevents an increase in the data capacity of the second specified number of times designation command transmitted corresponding to the execution of the variable display, and enhances the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time-saving state. be able to.

Thus, the value stored in the specific number of times command buffer is 7F [H] when the count value of the specific number of times counter is 007F[H] or more and the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is "127" or more. The value stored in the specific number command buffer corresponds to the count value of the specific number counter being less than 007F[H], and when the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is less than "127", the value indicates the remaining number of times. Become. However, the specific number of times command buffer can store 1-byte data, and when the count value of the specific number of times counter is not larger than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times command data indicating the lower byte of the count value of the specific number of times counter is stored. The second specific number of times designation command is a set of command type data that is the first control data and specific number of times command data that is the second control data that is set corresponding to the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. command data, it becomes a 2-byte effect control command. Then, in the counter subtraction process for updating the count value of the specific number of times counter, the specific number of times command data, which is the second control data of the second specific number of times designation command, is created. In this way, the second specific number of times designation command transmitted corresponding to the execution of the variable display can have a 2-byte configuration, so that an increase in data capacity can be prevented and a plurality of states including a time saving state can be controlled. It is possible to enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1.

Steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10 (A) and steps AKS305 and AKS306 shown in FIG. It controls so that the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. In these cases, the value stored in the specific number of times command buffer can be read out and set as the specific number of times command data in the second specific number of times designation command. The value stored in the specified number of times command buffer is stored in a storage area separate from the count value of the specified number of times counter, and can be updated based on the counted value of the specified number of times counter. Can be used as command data. Therefore, when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command, it is not necessary to determine the count value of the specific number of times counter, so the processing load when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command is reduced, including the time saving state. Thus, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be enhanced. In particular, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value, the value stored in the specific number of times command buffer becomes 7F[H]. Therefore, when the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted, even if it is judged whether or not the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit judgment value as in step AKS276, it is judged to be a large value. period is likely to be longer than the period for which it is determined not to be a large value. The practical benefit of creating the specific number of times command data when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command is small, even if the processing load for such determination is increased. Therefore, by creating the specific number of times command data in the counter subtraction process and storing it in the specific number of times command buffer, the processing load when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command is reduced, and multiple operations including the time saving state are performed. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 provided with the state of (1) can be enhanced.

After step AKS278, the 1st time saving counter is designated (step AKS279), and time saving subtraction processing (step AKS280) is performed. In step AKS279, for example, the value corresponding to the address of the first time saving counter is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the specified value for starting winning prize is "1" (step AKS281). At this time, when the start opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS281; No), the second time saving counter is designated (step AKS282), and time saving subtraction processing (step AKS283) is executed. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS284). Then, when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS284; Yes), the third time saving counter is designated (step AKS285), and time saving subtraction processing (step AKS286) is executed.

If the start opening winning designation value is "1" corresponding to step AKS281 (step AKS281; Yes), if the special figure display result is not "small hit" corresponding to step AKS284 (step AKS284; No), or After executing the time-saving subtraction process of step AKS286, a variation counter is designated after the end of the first hit (step AKS287). The fluctuation counter after the end of the first hit is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102 . The fluctuation counter after the end of the first win is set with a counter initial value corresponding to a special figure game that can be executed in the time saving state when the big win game state ends. At step AKS287, for example, the value corresponding to the address of the fluctuation counter after the first win is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. Subsequently, the effect selection table after the end of the first win is designated (step AKS288). Then, it is determined whether or not the game state designation code is 00 [H] (step AKS289). The game state designation code is 1-byte data indicating whether or not the game state is the time saving state, and 00 [H] is set when it is not the time saving state, and 01 [H] is set when it is the time saving state. be. In step AKS289, for example, the time saving check process is executed to read the value of the time saving function flag, and when the value is 01 [H] which is the time saving operation specification value, the game state specification code is not 00 [H]. The same determination as in the case may be made.

When the game state designation code is 00[H] corresponding to step AKS289 (step AKS289; Yes), the fluctuation counter after the second win is designated (step AKS290). A variation counter after the end of the second hit is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102 . The variation counter after the end of the second win is set with a counter initial value corresponding to a special number of special game that can be executed after the end of the time saving state when the big win game state is ended. At step AKS290, for example, the value corresponding to the address of the fluctuation counter after the second win is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. Subsequently, the effect selection table after the end of the second win is designated (step AKS291). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the count value of the post-hit variation counter specified in step AKS287 or step AKS290 is 00 [H] corresponding to "0" (step AKS292). At this time, if the count value of the post-hit variation counter is 00 [H] (step AKS292; Yes), the counter subtraction process is terminated.

Corresponding to step AKS292, when the count value of the variation counter after hitting is other than 00 [H] (step AKS292; No), it is determined whether or not time saving control is in progress (step AKS293). In step AKS293, for example, the time saving check process is executed, and when the time saving function flag is set to 01 [H] and is the time saving operation specified value, it is determined that the time saving control is in progress. In step AKS293, for example, when the game state designation code is 01 [H] and not 00 [H], it may be determined that the time reduction control is being performed. Then, when the time saving control is in progress (step AKS293; Yes), it is determined whether or not the start opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS294). At this time, if the specified value for start-up winning is "1" (step AKS294; Yes), the counter subtraction process ends.

If it is not in time saving control corresponding to step AKS293 (step AKS293; No), or if the starting entrance winning specified value is not "1" corresponding to step AKS294 is "2" (step AKS294; No), hit After completion, the fluctuation counter subtraction process (step AKS295) is executed, and the counter subtraction process is terminated. The post-hit variation counter subtraction process of step AKS295 includes a process of subtracting 1 from the count value of the post-hit variation counter specified in step AKS287 or step AKS290. After that, the post-win effect designation value is read from the post-win effect designation buffer. Then, the post-hit effect selection table specified in step AKS288 or step AKS291 is referred to, and the effect setting table corresponding to the specified value of post-hit effect is selected. The effect setting table includes table data indicating counter determination values, special symbol state designation codes, and effect state selection designation values. In step AKS 295 post-hit variation counter subtraction processing, the count value of the post-hit variation counter and the counter determination value shown in the effect setting table are compared, and when both match, the counter determination value is associated with it. The specified special symbol state designation code and effect state selection designation value are set. The special symbol state designation code is a value indicating the state display of the special symbol, and is set to any one of 00 [H] to 03 [H]. The effect state selection designation value is stored in the effect state selection buffer and used to determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15.

In the counter subtraction process, when the determination of step AKS272 is made, the count value of the specific number of times counter can be updated, and the specific number of times command data is created in steps AKS275 to AKS277. The specific number of times command data created at this time is stored in the specific number of times command buffer by step AKS278, and steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. ), it becomes possible to send a second specified number of times command using the stored value of the specified number of times command buffer. Since the second specific number designation command is transmitted corresponding to the start of the special game, it is conceivable that the count value of the specific number counter is also updated corresponding to the start of the special game. However, at the start of the special pattern game, many judgments, settings, selections and decisions such as special symbol big hit determination, special symbol small hit determination, special symbol information setting, selection of variation pattern type and determination of variation pattern are required. , the processing load tends to increase. Therefore, when the display result of the special symbol game is stopped and displayed, the count value of the specific number counter is controlled so as to be able to be updated by the counter subtraction process included in the special symbol variation process. As a result, it is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load at the start of the special game, and improve the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.例文帳に追加In addition, along with other counters such as a time-saving counter and a variable counter after the end of winning, the count value of the specific number of times counter is controlled to be updatable by counter subtraction processing, thereby preventing an increase in the design burden and making the product of the pachinko game machine 1. can enhance sexuality.

In the counter subtraction process, when the determination of step AKS272 is performed, it is possible to update the count value of the specific number of times counter, steps AKS280, AKS283, when the time-saving subtraction process of AKS285 is executed, the count value of the time-saving counter Can be updated. On the other hand, in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, the count value itself of the specific number counter and the time saving counter is not updated. As a result, the process of setting the symbol stop time and the process of updating the count values of various counters are clearly separated, and the design of the pachinko game machine 1 is facilitated. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having states can be enhanced. In addition, in the process of setting the symbol stop time such as the special symbol stop time setting process, the count value itself of the specific number counter or the time saving counter may be updated, or the count value of various counters such as the counter subtraction process is updated. , the symbol stop time may be set.

FIG. 294-22 shows an arrival data setting example AKE21. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, after designating the arrival time work setting table in step AKS273, the data set process in step AKS274 is executed so that the count value of the specific number counter reaches the arrival judgment value. Set the data when This data setting includes various settings such as an arrival data setting example AKE21. In the arrival time data setting example AKE21, the game state designation code is set to 01 [H], the special symbol state designation code is set to 02 [H], the effect state selection designation value is set to 0C [H], and time saving Set the function flag to 01 [H], set 02AD [H] as the counter initial value of the first time saving counter, set 0000 [H] as the counter initial value of the second time saving counter, set the third time saving counter 0001 [H] is set as the counter initial value, 01 [H] is set as the specified number of times reachable value, the specific number of times command buffer is cleared, and the stored value is initialized to 00 [H]. Here, by setting the time saving function flag to 01 [H], the game state is controlled from the normal state to the time saving state. In addition, by setting 02AD [H] as the counter initial value of the first time-saving counter, the total number of times of the first special game and the second special game can reach "625" as the condition for ending the time-saving state. set. Since the counter initial value of the second time saving counter is set to 0000 [H], the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied only based on the number of times of the second special figure game. By setting 0001 [H] as the counter initial value of the third time-saving counter, the number of times of the special-figure game in which the special-figure display result is a "small hit" can be "1" as the termination condition of the time-saving state. set. By setting 01 [H] as the specific number of times specified value, it becomes possible to identify the time saving state based on the number of executions of the special game reaching the specific number of times. The specific number of times designation value is set in a specific number of times arrival flag provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102 .

FIG. 294-23 is a flow chart showing an example of time saving subtraction processing. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, a time saving subtraction process can be performed in steps AKS280, AKS283, AKS286. In the time-saving subtraction process, it is determined whether or not the count value of the time-saving counter designated by the counter subtraction process is "0" (step AKS321). For example, in the time saving subtraction process of step AKS280, it is determined whether or not the count value of the first time saving counter specified by step AKS279 is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0". In the time saving subtraction process of step AKS283, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second time saving counter designated by step AKS282 is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0". In the time saving subtraction process of step AKS286, it is determined whether or not the count value of the third time saving counter designated by step AKS285 is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0". Then, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" (step AKS321; Yes), the time saving subtraction process ends.

When the count value of the time saving counter is not "0" corresponding to step AKS321 (step AKS321; No), the count value of the specified time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS322), and then the count value of the time saving counter has become "0" (step AKS323). Here, when the count value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step AKS323; No), the time saving subtraction process ends. On the other hand, when the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0" corresponding to step AKS323 (step AKS323; Yes), the work setting table at the end of the first time saving is designated (step AKS324), data set processing (Step AKS325) is executed.

Following the data set processing of step AKS325, it is determined whether or not the specific count reaching flag is on (step AKS326). For example, when 01 [H] is set in the specific number of times designation flag to indicate a specific number of times reaching designated value, it is determined that the specific number of times reaching flag is on. When the specific number of times arrival flag is off (step AKS326; No), the time saving subtraction process ends. On the other hand, when the specific number of times arrival flag is on (step AKS326; Yes), specify the work setting table at the end of the second time reduction (step AKS327), execute the data set process (step AKS328), The time saving subtraction process ends.

FIG. 294-24 shows the setting clear target in the time saving subtraction process. Of these, FIG. 294-24 (A) is step AKS324 of the time saving subtraction process, the clear target AKE31 at the end of the first time saving by AKS325. FIG. 294-24 (B) is step AKS327 of the time saving subtraction process, the clear target AKE32 at the end of the second time saving by AKS328. In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, the data setting process of step AKS325 executed after specifying the work setting table at the end of the first time saving at step AKS324 is performed when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "0". It includes data clear processing when By this data clear processing, various data included in the clear target AKE31 at the end of the first time saving are cleared, and each is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". In addition, in the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, the data setting process of step AKS328 executed after specifying the second time saving end work setting table in step AKS327 is added to the data setting process of step AKS325. and includes data clear processing when the specified number of times reached flag is on. By this data clear processing, various data included in the clear target AKE32 at the end of the second time saving are cleared, and each is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

The AKE31 to be cleared at the end of the first time reduction includes a time reduction function flag, a first time reduction counter, a second time reduction counter, a third time reduction counter, a game state designation code, and a variation counter after the end of the first win. In the data setting process of step AKS325, these storage areas are cleared and their stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". The clear target AKE32 at the end of the second time saving includes a special symbol state designation code and an effect state selection designation value. In the data set processing of step AKS328, these storage areas are cleared and their stored values and the like are initialized to values corresponding to "0". The data set processing of step AKS328 is performed in addition to the data set processing of step AKS325 corresponding to the case where the specified number of times reaching flag is ON. Since the clear target AKE32 at the end of the second time saving includes the effect state selection designation value, for example, the effect state selection buffer is cleared, and the stored value is initialized to 00 [H] corresponding to "0". When the effect state selection designation value is 00 [H], it is the same value as when the RWM initial setting process of step S7 is executed when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the time-saving state based on the number of executions of the special game reaching a specific number of times ends, the specified value for the production state selection becomes the same setting as the initial setting after turning on the power, and the fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern setting process The pattern is also determined using selection data common to initial settings after power-on.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the first time saving counter is specified in step AKS279, and the time saving subtraction process is executed in step AKS280. In the time-saving subtraction process of step AKS280, if the count value of the first time-saving counter is not "0" at step AKS321, the count value of the first time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 at step AKS322, and after updating at step AKS323 is "0", the data set processing of step AKS325 based on the designation of step AKS324 is executed. As a result, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. included in the clear target AKE31 at the end of the first time saving are cleared, thereby ending the time saving state. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS279 and AKS280 can be executed both when the start winning prize determination value is "1" and "2". Therefore, the first time saving counter can count the total number of first special game and second special game that can be executed in the time saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. Also, in the time saving subtraction process of step AKS280, the determination by step AKS323 is whether or not the first condition that the total number of times of the first special game and the second special game in the time saving state is the first number is established. It becomes the 1st time saving end judgment processing which judges.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the second time saving counter is specified in step AKS282, and the time saving subtraction process of step AKS283 is executed. In the time-saving subtraction process of step AKS283, if the count value of the second time-saving counter is not "0" at step AKS321, the count value of the second time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 at step AKS322, and after updating at step AKS323 is "0", the data set processing of step AKS325 based on the designation of step AKS324 is executed. As a result, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. included in the clear target AKE31 at the end of the first time saving are cleared, thereby ending the time saving state. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS282 and AKS283 can be executed when the specified starting winning prize value is "2" in step AKS281, and the specified starting winning prize value is "1". is not executed if Therefore, the second time-saving counter can count the number of times the second special game can be played in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. Also, in the time saving subtraction process of step AKS283, the determination by step AKS323 is the second time saving end that determines whether the second condition that the number of times of the second special game in the time saving state is the second number is satisfied Judgment processing. In the counter subtraction process, the determination by step AKS281 is a variable display determination that determines whether or not the variable display of the second special figure in the second special figure game has been executed corresponding to the specified value of starting winning prize "2". be processed.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280. In the time saving subtraction process shown in Figure 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" at step AKS323, based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified by step AKS324 of step AKS325 By executing the data setting process, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. are cleared even when any of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the time saving subtraction process of step AKS280, after the first condition is established and the time saving state is set to end, in the time saving subtraction process of step AKS283, the second time saving counter is already cleared to "0" Since it is initialized to the corresponding value, the count value of the time saving counter is determined to be "0" at step AKS321, and the time saving subtraction process at step AKS283 ends without making the determination at step AKS323. In this way, the first time saving end determination process of whether or not the first condition is satisfied is executed, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, whether the second condition by the second time saving end determination process is satisfied No decision is made. On the other hand, since determination by step AKS281 is performed after the time saving subtraction process of step AKS280 is performed, even when the 2nd time saving end determination process is not performed, variable display determination process is performed. In addition, when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied by the first time saving end determination process, not only the determination of whether the second condition is satisfied by the second time saving end determination process, but also the second by the variable display determination process Determination of whether or not the variable display of the special figure is also performed may not be performed.

Since the first condition for ending the time saving state can be satisfied by the total number of times of the first special game and the second special game, the first time saving counter is updated and subtracted each time the special game is executed, and the first condition is satisfied. is determined. In addition, since there are many possible combinations of the number of executions of the first special game and the second special game, it is likely to be established regardless of the progress of the game. On the other hand, the second condition for ending the time saving state is accompanied by variable display determination processing for determining whether or not the second special figure game has been executed. Therefore, the first condition is determined by the first time saving end determination process first, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is not determined by the second time saving end determination process. Therefore, the processing load related to the control of the time saving state can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state can be enhanced.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280. In the time saving subtraction process shown in Figure 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" at step AKS323, based on the first time saving end work setting table specified by step AKS324 of step AKS325 By executing the data setting process, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. are cleared even when any of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the time saving subtraction process of step AKS280, perform the count value update process to update the count value of the first time saving counter, after the first condition is established and the time saving state is set to end, the time saving of step AKS283 In the subtraction process, since the second time-saving counter has already been cleared and initialized to a value corresponding to "0", the count value of the time-saving counter is determined to be "0" at step AKS321, The time saving subtraction process of step AKS283 ends without proceeding to step AKS322 for updating by subtracting 1. In this way, the count value update process for updating the count value of the first time saving counter is performed, and when the first condition is satisfied, the processing regarding the end of the time saving state is performed, and the count value of the second time saving counter is updated. Do not perform numeric update processing.

Since the first condition for ending the time saving state can be satisfied by the total number of times of the first special game and the second special game, the first time saving counter is updated and subtracted each time the special game is executed, and the first condition is satisfied. is determined. In addition, since there are many possible combinations of the number of executions of the first special game and the second special game, it is likely to be established regardless of the progress of the game. Therefore, the count value updating process for updating the count value of the first time saving counter is performed first, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the count value updating process for updating the count value of the second time saving counter is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the control of the time saving state and improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state.

In the time saving subtraction process shown in Figure 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" at step AKS323, based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified by step AKS324 of step AKS325 By executing the data setting process, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. are cleared even when any of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the time saving subtraction process of step AKS280 includes a count value subtracting process of updating the count value of the first time saving counter by subtracting one. By this count value subtraction process, when the count value after update is "0", corresponding to the establishment of the first condition, time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. The data set processing of step AKS325 based on the designation of step AKS324 in is executed. In addition, in the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the time saving subtraction process of step AKS283 includes a count value subtracting process of updating the count value of the second time saving counter by subtracting one. By this count value subtraction process, when the count value after the update is "0", corresponding to the establishment of the second condition, as a process related to the end of the time saving state, the time saving subtraction process shown in Figure 294-23 The data set processing of step AKS325 based on the designation of step AKS324 in is executed. Therefore, in both cases, when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied, the count values of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter are initialized in the process related to the end of the time saving state. be done. As a result, if one of the first condition or the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, the problem that may occur due to the remaining count value of the time saving counter corresponding to the other condition is eliminated. This can be prevented and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state can be enhanced.

FIG. 294-25 shows an example of effect setting AKE41 after the end of winning. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, in the variable counter subtraction process after the end of the hit of step AKS295, the effect selection table after the end of the hit specified by step AKS288 or step AKS291 is referred to, and the effect specified value after the end of the hit is Select the corresponding effect setting table. For example, when step AKS291 is not executed after step AKS288, the effect selection table after the end of the first hit specified by step AKS288 is referred to, and one of the effect setting tables AKT31 to AKT34 corresponding to the specified value after the end of the hit. to select. On the other hand, when step AKS291 is executed after step AKS288, the effect selection table after the end of the second hit designated by step AKS291 is referred to, and the effect setting tables AKT41 and AKT42 are set according to the specified value after the end of the hit. Choose one.

In such a post-win effect setting example AKE41, the post-first-hit effect selection table is referred to, and if the post-win effect designation value is 03 [H], the effect setting table AKT31 is selected. Further, the effect selection table after the end of the first win is referred to, and when the specified effect value after the end of the win is 05 [H], the effect setting table AKT32 is selected. The effect selection table after the end of the first winning is referred to, and when the designated value for the effect after the end of the winning is 08 [H], the effect setting table AKT33 is selected. The effect selection table after the end of the first winning is referred to, and when the designated value for the effect after the end of the winning is 09 [H], the effect setting table AKT34 is selected. Further, in the post-win effect setting example AKE41, the post-win effect selection table is referred to, and if the post-win effect designation value is 01 [H], the effect setting table AKT41 is selected. In the setting example AKE41 after the end of the hit shown in FIG. H], the effect setting table AKT42 is selected.

FIG. 294-26 shows a configuration example of an effect setting table. Of these, FIG. 294-26 (A1) shows the effect setting table AKT31, FIG. 294-26 (A2) shows the effect setting table AKT32, FIG. 294-26 (A3) shows the effect setting table AKT33, and FIG. -26 (A4) indicates the effect setting table AKT34. Also, FIG. 294-26 (B1) shows the effect setting table AKT41, and FIG. 294-26 (B2) shows the effect setting table AKT42. Each effect setting table includes table data for setting a special symbol state designating code and a effect state selection designating value in association with a counter determination value.

For example, the effect setting table AKT31 shown in FIG. Corresponding to table data for setting 05 [H] and the counter determination value 02 [H], the special symbol state designation code is set to 02 [H], and the effect state selection designation value is 06 [H]. , and the counter judgment value corresponds to 00 [H], the special symbol state designation code is set to 02 [H], and the effect state selection designation value is set to 07 [H] contains table data for and . In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the count value of the variation counter after the end of the first hit specified by step AKS287 is updated by subtracting 1 in the variation counter subtraction process after the end of the hit in step AKS295. When the count value matches, for example, 05 [H] among the counter determination values indicated by the selected effect setting table AKT31, the special symbol state designation code is changed to 02 [H] corresponding to the counter determination value. , and the effect state selection designation value is set to 05 [H]. When the variable counter after the end of the second hit is designated by step AKS290, when another effect setting table is set in the variable counter subtraction process after the end of the hit of step AKS295, and when it matches with another counter judgment value, the same applies. , corresponding to the matching counter determination value, the setting of the special symbol state designation code and the setting of the effect state selection designation value are performed. As a result, during the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game state, and during the period until the number of executions of the special game reaches the special number after the time-saving state ends, it corresponds to the setting of the production state selection specified value. , it becomes possible to select and determine different variation patterns.

FIG. 294-27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the counted value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS141). The special symbol process timer here is set to a timer initial value corresponding to one of the symbol stop setting SZA1 to SZA3 in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. When the clocked value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS141; No), the clocked value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS142), and the special symbol variation process ends. As a result, the CPU waits until the symbol stop time corresponding to one of the symbol stop setting SZA1 to SZA3 elapses.

When the clock value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS141 (step AKS141; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol display result is "big hit" (step AKS143). When the special figure display result is "big hit" (step AKS143; Yes), after executing the big hit start setting process (step AKS144), the special symbol stop process ends.

When the special figure display result is not "big hit" corresponding to step AKS143 (step AKS143; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS145). When the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS145; Yes), the small hit design specified value is read (step AKS146), the small hit start command transmission table is specified (step AKS147), and the small hit start After specifying the previous work setting table (step AKS148), command set processing (step AKS149) and data set processing (step AKS150) are executed, and then the special symbol stop processing ends.

If the special figure display result is not "small hit" corresponding to step AKS145 (step AKS145; No), specify the work setting table after stopping losing (step AKS151), and execute data set processing (step AKS152) From then on, the special symbol stop processing ends.

FIG. 294-28 shows a data setting example and setting clear targets in the special symbol stop process. Of these, FIG. 294-28 (A) is a small hit start data setting example AKE51 by steps AKS148 and AKS150 of the special symbol stop processing corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is "small hit". FIG. 294-28 (B) corresponds to the case where the special figure display result is "losing", and is a setting clear target AKE52 after stopping the losing by steps AKS151 and AKS152 of the special symbol stopping process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 294-27, the data set processing of step AKS150 executed after specifying the work setting table before the start of the small hit by step AKS148 is the special symbol display result of "small hit". Perform data setting in the case of stopping and displaying fixed special symbols as display results by executing a figure game. This data setting includes various settings such as the data setting example AKE51 before the start of the small hit. Also, in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 294-27, the data set processing of step AKS152 that is executed after specifying the work setting table after stopping the loss by step AKS151, the special symbol display result is "loss". It includes a data clear process when the fixed special symbol, which is the display result of executing the figure game, is stopped and displayed. By this data clear processing, various data included in the setting clear target AKE 52 after the failure stop are cleared, and each of them is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

In the data setting example AKE51 before the start of the small hit, the special symbol process code is set to 03 [H], the stored value of the big hit occurrence history buffer is set to 01 [H], and the accessory solenoid control code is set to 01 [H]. Then, the win flag is cleared to initialize the stored value to 00 [H], and the fraudulent award notification invalid timer is cleared to initialize the stored value to 0000 [H]. Here, by setting the special symbol process code to 03 [H], it becomes possible to select and execute the small hit opening pre-processing in the special symbol process processing corresponding to the next timer interrupt generation. Further, by setting the stored value of the big hit occurrence history buffer to 01 [H], it is memorized so that it can be specified that it is a big hit via a small hit. By setting the accessory solenoid control code to 01 [H], in the small hit game state, for example, the accessory solenoid such as the specific area solenoid 83 is controlled to be drivable according to a predetermined drive control pattern. In addition, the timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time before opening the small hit may be set to the special symbol process timer. The fraudulent prize notification invalid timer stores a timer value corresponding to the time to invalidate the detection of fraudulent prize winning in the small winning end process.

The setting clear target AKE52 after the stoppage of loss includes a special symbol process code, a demonstration display flag, and a start opening winning prize designation value. In the data setting process of step AKS152, these storage areas are cleared and their stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". Since the AKE52 set to be cleared after the loss stop includes a special symbol process code, this is cleared and initialized to 00 [H], so that the special symbol process processing can respond to the next timer interrupt occurrence. Normal processing can be selected and executed. Further, by clearing the demonstration display flag, when the total reserved storage number is "0", control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. Furthermore, in response to the end of the special game, the start opening winning designation value capable of specifying whether it is the first special game or the second special game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0". ] is initialized.

FIG. 294-29(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step AKS144 or the like in FIG. 294-27 as the jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, the timer initial value, which is the fanfare effect initial value, is set in the special symbol process timer (step AKS401). The fanfare effect initial value is a timer initial value corresponding to the fanfare effect waiting time for waiting in accordance with the execution of the fanfare effect in the big winning opening pre-opening process selected by the special symbol process. In the big winning opening pre-opening process, until the timer value of the special pattern process timer in which the fanfare effect initial value is set becomes "0", the fanfare effect standby time elapses by subtracting 1 each time a timer interrupt occurs and updating. wait until

Following step AKS401, the fanfare command transmission table is specified (step AKS402), the work setting table before the first opening of the big winning opening is specified (step AKS403), command set processing (step AKS404), and data set processing (step AKS 405) and, after executing, the jackpot start setting process ends.

FIG. 294-29(B) shows the setting clear target AKE53 before opening the big winning hole for the first time. In the jackpot start setting process, the data setting process of step AKS405 executed after designating the work setting table before opening the jackpot for the first time by step AKS403 includes the data clearing process when controlling to the jackpot game state. By this data clearing process, various data included in the setting clear target AKE53 before the first opening of the big winning opening are cleared, and each of them is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". The AKE53 set to be cleared before the first opening of the large winning opening is a hit flag, a time saving function flag, a first time saving counter, a second time saving counter, a third time saving counter, a fluctuation number counter after the first hit, and a fluctuation number after the second hit. It includes a counter, a specific area passing flag, an effect designating buffer after winning, a specific number of times counter, and a specific number of times reaching flag. Among these, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, and the third time saving counter are cleared, thereby ending the control for changing the game state to the time saving state. In addition, by clearing the specific number counter and the specific number reaching flag, the control for shifting to the time saving state based on the number of executions of the special game ends.

FIG. 294-30(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a small hit ending process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS161). The special symbol process timer here is set to a timer initial value corresponding to the small winning end time in the small winning ball standby process selected by the special symbol process. When the clocked value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS161; No), the clocked value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS162), and the process is terminated.

When the clock value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS161 (step AKS161; Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific area passage flag is on (step AKS163). A specific area passage flag is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102 . The specific area passage flag is in an off state when 00 [H], which is a specified value without passing the specific area, is set, and when a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected in the small hit game state, By setting 01 [H], which is the specified value for passing through the specific area, the ON state is set. When the specific area passage flag is ON (step AKS163; Yes), the big hit start setting process (step AKS164) is executed, and then the small hit end process ends. The jackpot start setting process executed in step AKS164 may be the same process as step AKS144 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 294-27. In this way, since the same jackpot start setting processing as when the special figure display result is "jackpot" can be executed even when a V winning occurs in the small jackpot game state, an increase in the program capacity is prevented. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

When the specific area passage flag is off corresponding to step AKS163 (step AKS163; No), after the small hit is completed, the work setting table is specified (step AKS165), and the data set process (step AKS166) is executed. , terminate the process. After the end of the small hit, the work setting table includes a special pattern process code, a demonstration display flag, a variable command designation buffer, a small hit pattern judgment buffer, a big winning opening winning number counter, a big winning opening opening count counter, a big winning history buffer, and a big winning pattern. It is only necessary to include table data for clearing the judgment buffer, the start-up winning buffer with the buffer number "0", and the counter for the number of winnings during the role game.

FIG. 294-30(B) shows the setting clear target AKE54 after the end of the small hit. In the small hit end processing, the data set processing of step AKS166 executed after designating the work setting table after the end of the small hit by step AKS165 is the data clear processing when the small win game state ends without the occurrence of V winning. contains. By this data clear processing, various data included in the setting clear object AKE54 after the end of the small hit are cleared, and each of them is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". AKE 54 to be cleared after the end of the small hit is a special pattern process code, a demonstration display flag, a variable command specification buffer, a small win pattern specified value, a large winning opening winning number counter, a large winning opening opening count counter, a big winning history buffer, and a big winning. It contains the design specified value and the starting entrance winning specified value. In the data setting process of step AKS166, these storage areas are cleared and their stored values and the like are initialized to values corresponding to "0". Since the set clear target AKE 54 after the end of the small hit includes a special symbol process code, this is cleared and initialized to 00 [H], so that in response to the next timer interrupt occurrence, special in the special symbol process processing It becomes possible to select and execute symbol normal processing. Further, by clearing the demonstration display flag, when the total reserved storage number is "0", control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. Furthermore, in response to the end of the special game, the start opening winning designation value capable of specifying whether it is the first special game or the second special game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0". ] is initialized.

FIG. 294-31 is a flow chart showing an example of a jackpot ending process. In the jackpot ending process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" (step AKS181). As for the special symbol process timer here, a timer initial value corresponding to the final big hit effect time is set in the special symbol process after opening the special symbol process. When the counted value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS181; No), the counted value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS182), and the process ends. This waits until the final big hit performance time elapses.

When the timing value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS181 (step AKS181; Yes), the state setting table at the end of the first big hit is specified (step AKS183), and the small winning symbol specified value is read (step AKS184). The small-hit design specified value is a value stored in the small-hit design determination buffer. Also, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit via a small hit (step AKS185). For example, the value stored in the big hit occurrence history buffer is read, and if the read value is 01 [H], it may be determined that the game is a big hit via a small hit. If it is not a big hit via a small hit (step AKS185; No), the state setting table at the end of the second big win is redesignated (step AKS186), and the designated value of the big hit symbol is read out (step AKS187). The big-hit design designation value is a value stored in the big-hit design determination buffer. In step AKS186, for example, the value of the pointer is overwritten by storing the value corresponding to the top address of the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot in the HL register serving as a pointer. Thus, in the jackpot end processing, after designating the state setting table at the end of the first jackpot at step AKS183, if it is not a jackpot via a jackpot at step AKS185, the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot is overwritten at step AKS186. Specify again by setting. Thus, when the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the first big win is higher than the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the second big win, the program capacity of the storage instruction used for setting the table can be reduced, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be operated. Merchandise can be enhanced. Also, when the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the first jackpot is higher than the frequency of use of the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot, the processing by the branch instruction is simplified to facilitate confirmation at the design stage, The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

When it is a big hit via a small hit corresponding to step AKS185 (step AKS185; Yes), or after step AKS187, the state setting at the end of big hit is performed (step AKS188). The state setting at the end of the big hit includes setting for controlling the game state after the end of the big win game state to a time saving state or the like based on the execution result of steps AKS183 to AKS187. After that, the work setting table at the end of the jackpot is specified (step AKS189), the data setting process (step AKS190) is executed, and then the process is terminated.

FIG. 294-32 shows an example of state setting at the end of the jackpot. Among them, FIG. 294-32(A) is the first big hit end state setting example AKE61 based on the steps AKS183 and AKS184 of the big win end processing. FIG. 294-32(B) is a state setting example AKE62 at the end of the second jackpot based on steps AKS186 and AKS187 of the jackpot end processing. In the jackpot end processing, in the jackpot end state setting of step AKS188, the jackpot end state setting table specified in step AKS183 or step AKS185 is referenced to set the jackpot end state setting type. For example, when step AKS185 is not executed after step AKS183, the state setting table at the end of the first jackpot specified by step AKS183 is referred to, and the state setting at the time of jackpot end corresponds to the small hit design specified value read by step AKS184. Select one of the types SX2, SX3, SX5 and SX8. On the other hand, when step AKS185 is executed after step AKS183, the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot designated by step AKS185 is referred to, and the game state designation code is specified together with the jackpot symbol designation value read by step AKS186. One of the jackpot end state setting types SX1 to XS4, SX6, and SX7 is selected corresponding to the presence or absence of time saving control to be performed.

In the first jackpot end time state setting example AKE61, when the small win end pattern designated value is 00 [H], the jackpot end state setting type SX8 is selected, and when the small win end design value is 01 [H], the jackpot ends. When the time state setting type SX3 is selected and the small hit design specified value is 02 [H], the state setting type SX5 at the end of the big hit is selected, and the small hit design specified value is any of 03 [H] to 06 [H] In the case of or, the state setting type SX2 at the end of the jackpot is selected. In addition, in the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62, when the jackpot pattern designation value is 00 [H] among the cases without time saving control, the jackpot end state setting type SX6 is selected, and the jackpot pattern designation value is 01. When it is either [H] or 02 [H], the state setting type SX1 at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the jackpot symbol designation values are 03 [H], 04 [H], 07 [H] to 09 [H]. In either case, the state setting type SX2 at the end of the big win is selected, in the case of 05 [H], the state setting type SX3 at the time of the end of the big win is selected, and in the case of the specified value of the jackpot symbol is 06 [H], the big win ends. The time state setting type SX4 is selected. In the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62, when the jackpot pattern specified value is 00 [H] among the cases with time saving control, the jackpot end state setting type SX6 is selected, and the jackpot pattern specified value is 01 [H]. ], 02 [H], the state setting type SX7 at the end of the jackpot is selected, and the jackpot symbol designation value is any of 03 [H], 04 [H], 07 [H] to 09 [H] In the case of , the state setting type SX2 at the end of the jackpot is selected, in the case of 05 [H], the state setting type SX3 at the end of the jackpot is selected, and in the case of the specified value of the jackpot symbol is 06 [H], the state at the end of the jackpot. Setting type SX4 is selected.

FIG. 294-33 shows the setting contents corresponding to the state setting type at the end of the jackpot. In step AKS188 of the jackpot end processing, the state setting at the end of the jackpot is based on the selection result of the state setting types SX1 to SX8 at the end of the jackpot, the game state designation code, the special symbol state designation code, the effect state selection designation value, and the first hit. Change counter initial value after the end, change counter initial value after the end of the second hit, production specified value after the end of the hit, time saving function flag, first time saving counter initial value, second time saving counter initial value, third time saving counter initial value, set. Here, by setting the game state designation code to 01 [H] except for the state setting type SX8 at the end of the big win, it is indicated that the game state after the end of the big win game state is the time saving state. In response to this, the time saving function flag is set to 01 [H], and the first time saving counter initial value, the second time saving counter initial value, and the third time saving counter initial value are set to values other than 0000 [H]. be done. In addition, by setting the effect state selection specified value to a value other than 00 [H], in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type and variation patterns can be determined. After the end of the hit effect designation value is set to a value other than 00 [H], based on the setting of the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the end of the first win and the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the end of the second win, as shown in Fig. 294-21 In the shown counter subtraction process, it becomes possible to execute the variation counter subtraction process after the hit of step AKS295, and in response to the number of executions of the special figure game and whether it is a time saving state, etc. State selection specification values can be updated.

In this way, in the state setting at the end of the big win, the specified value for selection of the effect state and the specified value for the effect after the end of the win are set to values other than 00 [H], and the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the end of the first win and the end of the second win are set. Based on the setting of the post-variation counter initial value, a variation pattern determination table different from the initial setting after power-on can be selected to determine the variation pattern. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table that can be selected in correspondence with the initial setting after power-on is also called normal pattern selection data. The table data constituting the variation pattern determination table different from the initial setting after power-on is also called special pattern selection data.

In the post-win effect setting example AKE41 shown in FIG. 294-25, one of the effect setting tables AKT41 and AKT42 can be set in correspondence with the post-second winning effect selection table. The effect selection table after the end of the second win can be set in a predetermined period until the number of times the special game is executed reaches the special number in the normal state after the controllable time saving state ends based on the end of the big win game state. is. The time-saving state that can be controlled based on the end of the jackpot game state is also referred to as the first time-saving state. In the normal state after such a first time saving state ends, when the effect setting table AKT41 is set, the effect state selection designated value can be set to 01 [H]. In addition, in the normal state after the first time saving state ends, when the effect setting table AKT42 is set, the effect state selection designated value can be set to 02 [H].

In the time-saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, it is determined that the count value of the time-saving counter is "0" at step AKS323, and at step AKS326 it is determined that the specific number of times reaching flag is on. In case, based on the work setting table at the end of the second time saving specified in step AKS327, the data set process of step AKS328 is executed. At this time, the clear target AKE32 at the end of the second time saving shown in FIG. become. Such setting is performed when the controllable time-saving state ends based on the fact that the count value of the specific number of times counter has reached the arrival determination value. The controllable time saving state based on the fact that the count value of the specific number of times counter serving as numerical information has reached the arrival determination value is also referred to as the second time saving state. In the normal state after such a second time saving state ends, the effect state selection designated value is set to 00 [H], which is common to the initial setting at power-on.

In the variation pattern determination example AKD11 at the time of the big hit shown in FIG. The patterns are different. For example, determinable patterns when the effect state selection designation value is 01 [H] include variation pattern PB57 and variation pattern PB67. On the other hand, the determinable pattern when the effect state selection designation value is 00 [H] includes the variation pattern PB67 but does not include the variation pattern PB57. Also, the determinable patterns when the effect state selection designation value is 02[H] include the variation pattern PB57 and the variation pattern PB68. On the other hand, the determinable pattern when the effect state selection designation value is 00[H] does not include any of the variation pattern PB57 and the variation pattern PB68. In the initial setting after the power is turned on, the effect state selection designation value is 00 [H], so the variation pattern that can be selected using the normal pattern selection data can be determined corresponding to the effect state selection designation value 00 [H]. becomes a pattern. In the normal state after the end of the first time-saving state, when the production state selection specified value is 01 [H] or 02 [H], a variation pattern is obtained using special pattern selection data different from the normal pattern selection data. to select. In the normal state after the end of the second time saving state, the effect state selection designation value becomes 00 [H], so the variation pattern is selected using the data for normal pattern selection. Then, the determinable pattern, which is a variation pattern selectable using the normal pattern selection data, does not include part or all of the determinable pattern, which is a variation pattern selectable using the special pattern selection data. set. Thus, in the normal state after the end of the first time-saving state based on the jackpot game state, while making it possible to execute a specific effect using the special pattern selection data, the second based on the number of times the special game is executed In the normal state after the end of the two-hour short state, normal pattern selection data common to the initial setting after turning on the power is used, thereby regulating so that the specific performance is not executed. As a result, when the second time-saving state based on the number of executions of the special game ends, the execution of excessive production is suppressed, and by preventing the decline in gaming interest, multiple states including the time-saving state can be achieved. The marketability of the provided pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

Variation patterns selectable using special pattern selection data may include only variation patterns not selectable using normal pattern selection data, or at least one variation not selectable using normal pattern selection data May contain patterns. In the variation pattern determination example AKD12 at the time of the small hit shown in FIG. Only pattern PB68 is different. That is, the variation pattern PB68 becomes a determinable pattern when the effect state selection designated value is 02 [H] and the small winning symbol designated value is within the range of 01 [H] to 06 [H]. On the other hand, the variation pattern PB68 is not included in the determinable patterns when the effect state selection designation value is 00 [H], even if the small winning symbol designation value is any of 00 to 06 [H]. The variation pattern PB67 and the variation pattern PB84 are included in the determinable patterns when the effect state selection designation value is 00 [H] and when it is 01 [H] or 02 [H]. In this way, the determinable pattern, which is a variation pattern selectable using the special pattern selection data, includes part or all of the determinable pattern, which is a variation pattern selectable using the normal pattern selection data. may be set to

FIG. 294-34 shows a data setting example AKE71 at the end of the jackpot. In the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 294-31, after specifying the work setting table at the time of jackpot end in step AKS189, by executing the data setting process in step AKS190, the final data setting when the jackpot game state ends I do. This data setting includes various settings such as the data setting example AKE71 at the end of the jackpot. In the data setting example AKE71 at the end of the jackpot, 02AD [H] is set as the initial value of the specific number counter, and the value stored in the specific number command buffer is set to 7F [H]. Also, in the data setting example AKE71 at the end of the jackpot, by clearing the special symbol process code, the demonstration display flag, the variable command designation buffer, the maximum number of times the jackpot is opened, the jackpot occurrence history buffer, and the starting gate winning value , each stored value is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". Here, by setting the initial value of the specific number counter to 02AD [H], after the jackpot game state is over, the first special game and the second special game are set as a time saving condition based on the number of times the special game is executed. It is set that the total number of times reaches "625", which is the specific number of times. By setting the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer to 7F[H], the specific number of times becomes the second control data of the second specific number of times designation command corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is "127" or more. Create command data. By clearing the special symbol process code and initializing it to 00 [H], it becomes possible to select and execute the special symbol normal process in the special symbol process process in response to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt. Further, by clearing the demonstration display flag, when the total reserved storage number is "0", control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. Furthermore, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state, the specified value for the start opening prize that can be specified as the first special game or the second special game is cleared and 00[H corresponding to "0". ] is initialized.

The maximum value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened in the big win game state and the number of special game games that can be executed in the time saving state after the big win game state ends are different depending on the small win symbol designation value and the big win design designation value. Can be set. For example, in the case of the special figure display result shown in FIG. If the value is one of [H], the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is set to 03 [H], and the specified jackpot symbol value is one of 00 [H], 03 [H] to 06 [H]. In this case, the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is set to 0A[H]. In addition, in the case of the special figure display result shown in FIG. 294-14 (B) is "small hit", the setting example AKE02 of the number of times of opening the big winning opening, the small winning design specified value is 00 [H], 06 [H] , the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is set to 03 [H], and the number of times of opening the big winning opening is set to 03 [H], and the specified value of the small winning pattern is any of 01 [H] to 03 [H]. The maximum value is set to 0A[H]. Among a plurality of types of jackpot game states with different maximum numbers of times of opening the big winning opening, for example, the maximum number of times of opening the big winning opening is set to 03 [H]. A jackpot game state set to a relatively small value is defined as a first advantageous state. On the other hand, among a plurality of types of jackpot game states with different maximum numbers of times of opening the big winning opening, for example, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times of opening the big winning opening is set to 0A [H] is selected. A jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times is set to a relatively large value is defined as a second advantageous state. The display result of the special symbols in the special symbol game in the case of being controlled to the first advantageous state is also called the first advantageous result. The display result of the special symbols in the special symbol game in the case of being controlled to the second advantageous state is also called the second advantageous result. That is, when the display result of the variable display is the first advantageous result, it is possible to control the big winning game state as the first advantageous state among the big winning game states as the advantageous state. When the display result of the variable display becomes the second advantageous result, it is possible to control to the big winning game state as the second advantageous state among the big winning game states as the advantageous state.

In the second jackpot end time state setting example AKE62 shown in FIG. When the jackpot pattern designated value is either 01 [H] or 02 [H], the jackpot end state setting type SX1 is selected, and when the jackpot pattern designated value is 05 [H], the jackpot ends. When the time state setting type SX3 is selected and the jackpot symbol designation value is 06 [H], the jackpot end time state setting type SX4 is set. The jackpot end state setting type SX1 has a first time saving counter initial value of 0006 [H] and a second time saving counter initial value of 0001 [H]. The state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6 at the end of the jackpot are all 02AD[H] in the initial value of the first time saving counter and the initial value of the second time saving counter. The time saving state that can be controlled based on the end of the jackpot game state is a time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type SX1 as a plurality of types of time saving states with different settings of the first time saving counter initial value and the second time saving counter initial value. A state and a time saving state corresponding to the state setting types SX3, SX4 and SX6 at the end of the jackpot are included. The time saving state corresponding to the state setting type SX1 at the end of the jackpot has a first time saving counter initial value of 0006 [H] and a second time saving counter initial value of 0001 [H]. The first special state in which the number of times of is relatively small. The time-saving state corresponding to the state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6 at the end of the jackpot is that the first time-saving counter initial value and the second time-saving counter initial value are 02AD [H], so that the number of executable special games is A relatively large number of second special states result. The special symbols whose jackpot symbol designation values are 01 [H] and 02 [H] are included in the first advantageous result, and can be controlled to the first advantageous state when the special symbol game is displayed. The special symbols whose jackpot symbol designating values are 00 [H], 05 [H] and 06 [H] are included in the second advantageous result, and when the display result of the special symbol game is obtained, the second advantageous state is controlled. It is possible. Then, when the first advantageous state ends, the time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type SX1 can be controlled as the time saving state which becomes the first special state of the time saving state. When the second advantageous state ends, the time saving state corresponding to the state setting types SX3, SX4 and SX6 at the end of the jackpot can be controlled as the time saving state which becomes the second special state of the time saving state.

In the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 294-31, for example, the second jackpot end state setting table is specified at step AKS186, and after reading the jackpot symbol designation value at step AKS187, at step AKS188 jackpot end time Depending on the state setting, it is possible to set the time saving state corresponding to the state setting types SX1 to SX8 at the end of the jackpot. For example, when the first advantageous state ends corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation values 01 [H] and 02 [H], the step AKS 188 jackpot end state setting sets the jackpot end state as the first special state. It is possible to set the time saving state corresponding to the type SX1. When the second advantageous state ends corresponding to the jackpot symbol designation values 00[H], 05[H], 06[H], the jackpot ends as a second special state according to step AKS188 state setting at the time of jackpot end. It is possible to set the time saving state corresponding to the time state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6. After that, in the data setting process of step AKS190, based on the work setting table at the end of the jackpot specified by step AKS189, the initial value of the specific counter is set to 02AD [ H]. Therefore, when the first advantageous state ends corresponding to the jackpot design designation values 01 [H] and 02 [H], and when the jackpot design designation values are 00 [H], 05 [H] and 06 [H] Correspondingly, when the second advantageous state ends, a common specific number counter initial value is set as the initial value of the numerical information updated using the specific number counter by the data setting process of step AKS190. . Thus, in the step AKS188 jackpot end state setting, for example, when the jackpot end state setting type SX1 and the jackpot end state setting type SX3, SX4, SX6, etc., settings related to the time-saving state corresponding to different types After that, in the data setting process of step AKS190, since settings regarding numerical information common to a plurality of types are performed, the program capacity can be reduced and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced.

FIG. 294-35 is a flow chart showing an example of effect side counter update processing. On the side of the production control board 12, the CPU 120 for production control executes the production side counter update process, so that the count values of various counters used for control of production can be updated. Effect side counter update processing, for example, whenever it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 of the effect control main processing shown in FIG. Any processing is acceptable. The counters used to control the effects include a suggestive effect counter and a number display counter, both of which may be provided at predetermined addresses in the effect work area of the RAM 122 . The suggestive effect counter is used to control a suggestive effect suggesting that the time-saving state is controlled based on the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times. In addition, the suggestive effect counter is also used to control a countdown effect that counts down and notifies the number of remaining times until the time-saving state is controlled. The counter for displaying the number of times is used for control to enable execution of a suggestive display indicating the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times on the screen of the image display device 5 .

In the effect side counter update process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the power is turned on (step AKS501). For example, when a power-on designation command or a power failure recovery designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the power is turned on. When the power is turned on (step AKS501; Yes), after setting the power-on corresponding flag to the ON state (step AKS502), it is determined whether or not the first specific number of times designation command has been received (step AKS503). . Since the first specific number of times designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, if there is no abnormality, if it is determined that the power is turned on in step AKS501, it is determined that the command has been received in step AKS503. be done.

Corresponding to step AKS503, when the first specific number of times designation command is received (step AKS503; Yes), specific number of times command data is acquired (step AKS504). For example, the first transmission data, the second transmission data, and the third transmission data, which are the lower bytes, are sequentially obtained for the first specific number of times designation commands from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, and stored in the RAM 122. It may be stored in a specific number of times command data buffer or the like provided at a predetermined address. At this time, the acquired data is set in the suggestion effect counter (step AKS505). For example, a 3-digit specified number of times designation value obtained by combining the lower 4 bits of the first transmission data to the third transmission data is stored in the suggestion performance counter, thereby setting the counter initial value of the suggestion performance counter. In this manner, the suggestive effect counter can set a counter initial value indicating the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times based on the first specific number of times designation command.

If the power is not turned on corresponding to step AKS501 (step AKS501; No), if the first specific number of times designation command is not received corresponding to step AKS503 (step AKS503; No), or after step AKS505, variable display It is determined whether or not it is a start (step AKS506). For example, when either the first variation start designation command or the second variation start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the variable display is started. If the variable display is started (step AKS506; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power-on corresponding flag is on (step AKS507). If the power-on corresponding flag is off (step AKS507; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the number display counter is "0" (step AKS508). When the count value of the number display counter is not "0" (step AKS508; No), the number display counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS509). The update of the number display counter in step AKS509 is not performed when the power-on correspondence flag is on. Therefore, during a predetermined period after the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is not updated. It becomes a special mode that is difficult to recognize.

If the power-on corresponding flag is ON corresponding to step AKS507 (step AKS507; Yes), if the count value of the number display counter is "0" corresponding to step AKS508 (step AKS508; Yes), or After step AKS509, it is determined whether or not the second specific number of times designation command has been received (step AKS510). In addition, since the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted when the variable display of the special pattern in the special game is started, various processes based on the determination of whether or not the second specific number of times designation command has been received are variable May be executed at the start of the display. When the second specific number of times designation command is received (step AKS510; Yes), the specific number of times command data is obtained (step AKS511). For example, in the configuration example AKC11 of the second specific number of times designation command, the specific number of times command data of the lower byte as the second control data may be acquired and stored in a specific number of times command data buffer or the like. At this time, it is determined whether or not the obtained data indicates 7F[H] (step AKS512). When the acquired data indicates other than 7F[H] (step AKS512; No), the suggestion effect counter is updated by the acquired data (step AKS513).

If the command for specifying the second specific number of times is not received in response to step AKS510 (step AKS510; No), or if the acquired data is 7F [H] in response to step AKS512 (step AKS512; Yes), suggest It is determined whether or not the count value of the effect counter is "0" (step AKS514). When the count value of the suggestive effect counter is other than "0" (step AKS514; No), after the count value of the suggestive effect counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS515), the count value after update is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step AKS516). Then, when the updated count value is "0" (step AKS516; Yes), an arrival time effect flag is set (step AKS517).

When the variable display is not started corresponding to step AKS506 (step AKS506; No), when the count value of the suggestion effect counter is "0" corresponding to step AKS514 (step AKS514; Yes), corresponding to step AKS516 If the updated count value is not "0" (step AKS516; No), or following either step AKS513 or AKS517, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has ended (step AKS518). For example, when a jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the jackpot is finished. If the jackpot is not finished (step AKS518; No), the production side counter update process is finished.

When the jackpot ends in response to step AKS518 (step AKS518; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power-on correspondence flag is on (step AKS519). At this time, if the power-on support flag is ON (step AKS519; Yes), the power-on support flag is cleared (step AKS520).

If the power-on corresponding flag is off in response to step AKS519 (step AKS519; No), or after step AKS520, set the number display counter to 02AD [H] (step AKS521), and set the suggestion effect counter to After setting 02AD[H] (step AKS522), the production side counter updating process is terminated.

In such effect side counter update processing, when it is determined that the first specific number of times designation command is received in step AKS503, the specific number of times command data acquired in step AKS504 is set in the suggestion effect counter in step AKS505. . The suggestion effect counter is provided at a predetermined address in the effect work area of the RAM 122, and stores the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times based on the first specific number of times designation command. In addition, in the production side counter update process, when it is determined that the second specific number of times designation command is received at step AKS510, the specific number of times command data is acquired at step AKS511, and the acquired data is 7F [H] at step AKS512. It is determined whether or not to indicate Then, when the acquired data indicates 7F[H], at step AKS515, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the acquired data. On the other hand, if the acquired data does not indicate 7F[H], in step AKS513, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated according to the acquired data. The specific number of times command data, which is the second control data in the second specific number of times specifying command, becomes determination information used for comparison with the count value of the specific number of times counter when 7F[H] is indicated. When indicated, it becomes numerical information indicating the count value of the specific number counter. Accordingly, when the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted, when the judgment information is transmitted as the specific number of times command data which is the second control data, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is set to the second specific number of times designation command. When numerical information is transmitted as specific number of times command data as the second control data without updating based on the reception result, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated based on the reception result of the second specific number of times designation command. . Therefore, the count value of the suggestive effect counter can be updated and managed based on the latest reliable information without preparing a separate storage area, so an appropriate effect can be executed while preventing an increase in the data volume. , the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time-saving state can be enhanced.

The second specific number of times designation command whose reception presence or absence is determined in step AKS510 of the production side counter update process is included in the standby command by steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10 (A) 294-12 (A), there is a case where it is transmitted corresponding to the start of the special symbol game by steps AKS305 and AKS306 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12 (A). Each time the second specific number of times designation command is received, the specific number of times command data may be stored in a predetermined storage area by overwriting. In response to the transmission of the command for specifying the second specific number of times included in the standby command, during the period in which the demonstration display is executed, etc., the waiting suggestive effect corresponding to the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times can be executed. may In addition, since the second specific number of times designation command is included in the standby command and transmitted in response to the start of the special game, the second specific number of times designation command is normally sent at either timing. If the second specific number of times designation command is normally received at the other timing when the second specific number of times designation command is not received at the other timing, performance can be executed based on the normally received second specific number of times designation command.

FIG. 294-36 is a flow chart showing an example of the number of times suggestion control process. 292 and FIG. 293(A), for example, in the production symbol process processing of step S76 shown in FIG. 292 and FIG. In addition, it is sufficient if the number of times suggestion control process can be executed. In the number-of-times suggestion control process, it is determined whether or not variable display is started (step AKS531), and if variable display is not started (step AKS531; No), the process ends. If the effect symbol variation start process includes the number of times suggestion control process, the process can be executed when the variable display is started, so the determination in step S531 is unnecessary.

When the variable display starts corresponding to step AKS531 (step AKS531; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving control is in progress (step AKS532), and if the time saving control is in progress (step AKS532; Yes), process exit. The production for controlling execution in this embodiment is a production for suggesting that it is controlled to a time-saving state. Therefore, if it is during time saving control, execution of production|presentation is unnecessary and it should just complete|finish a process as it is.

When it is not in time saving control corresponding to step AKS532 (step AKS532; No), it is determined whether the flag corresponding to power supply is ON (step AKS533). If the power-on corresponding flag is ON (step AKS533; Yes), the process table for displaying unknown number of times is selected (step AKS534). The unknown number display process table is an effect control process table for controlling the suggestive display on the screen of the image display device 5 in a special mode in which the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times is difficult to recognize. The power-on correspondence flag is set to an ON state when the power is turned on, and is cleared to an OFF state when the big win is completed. Therefore, the suggestive display on the screen of the image display device 5 is controlled in a special mode in which the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is difficult to recognize during the period until the jackpot game state ends after the power is turned on.

After step AKS534, it is determined whether or not the count value of the suggestive effect counter has reached a predetermined execution determination value corresponding to the suggestive effect (step AKS535). The execution determination value may be a set value relating to the number of executions of the special figure game, such as a value in which the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times is a multiple of "100". If the count value of the suggestion effect counter is not the execution determination value (step AKS535; No), the number-of-times suggestion control process ends. When the count value of the suggestion effect counter is the execution determination value (step AKS535; Yes), the process table for suggestion effect is selected (step AKS536), and the number-of-times suggestion control process ends. The suggestive effect process table is an effect control process table for executing a suggestive effect suggesting the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times during execution of the variable display of the effect symbols. When the process table for suggestive effect is selected by step AKS536, in the process during effect symbol fluctuation of the effect control process, the suggestive effect is controlled to be executable.

When the power-on corresponding flag is off in response to step AKS533 (step AKS533; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the number display counter is "0" (step AKS537). When the count value of the number display counter is not "0" (step AKS537; No), the number notification display process table is selected (step AKS538). The number-of-times notification display process table is an effect control process table for controlling the suggestive display on the screen of the image display device 5 in a notification mode in which the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times can be easily recognized. Therefore, when the power-on corresponding flag is off in step AKS533, if the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is other than "0" in step AKS537, the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times can be easily recognized. to control the possible display of suggestions. If the count value of the number display counter is "0" at step AKS537, the process does not proceed to step AKS538, so no suggestive display is executed.

If the count value of the number display counter is "0" corresponding to step AKS537 (step AKS537; Yes), or after step AKS538, it is determined whether or not the count value of the suggestion effect counter is within the countdown range. (step AKS539). The countdown range may be set in advance as a range of count values, such as a range from "0" to "10", that enables execution of the countdown effect. If the count value of the suggestion effect counter is not within the countdown range (step AKS539; No), the number-of-times suggestion control process ends. On the other hand, when the count value of the suggestion effect counter is within the countdown range (step AKS539; Yes), a process table for countdown effect is selected (step AKS540). The countdown effect process table is an effect control process table for executing a countdown effect as a predetermined effect for notifying the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times during execution of variable display of effect symbols. When the process table for countdown effect is selected by step AKS540, in the process during effect symbol fluctuation of the effect control process, the countdown effect is controlled to be executable.

After step AKS540, it is determined whether or not the effect flag at arrival is ON (step AKS541). The arrival time effect flag is set and turned on when the count value of the suggestive effect counter becomes "0" by step AKS517 of the effect side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. When the arrival time effect flag is off (step AKS541; No), the number-of-times suggestion control process ends. On the other hand, when the arrival time effect flag is on (step AKS541; Yes), the process table for time saving rush effect is selected (step AKS542), and after clearing the arrival time effect flag (step AKS543), the number of times The suggestion control process ends. The process table for time-saving rush performance notifies that the time-saving state is controlled as relief time-saving by reaching a specific number of times in a period in which fixed performance symbols, which are the display result of variable display of performance symbols, are stopped and displayed. It is an effect control process table for executing a time saving rush effect as a notification effect. When the process table for time saving rush effect is selected by step AKS543, in the effect symbol change process or effect symbol change stop process of the effect control process process, the time saving rush effect is controlled to be executable.

FIG. 294-37 shows a control example of the display of the number of times as a suggestive display. Among them, FIG. 294-37(A) is a control example AKF01 when the power-on support flag is off. FIG. 294-37(B) is a control example AKF02 when the power-on correspondence flag is ON. On the screen of the image display device 5, in addition to the small pattern display area 5K, a count display section 5Z is provided, and an effect image in the count display can be displayed as a suggestive display indicating the remaining count up to a specific count.

In the number-of-times suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, it is determined at step AKS533 that the power-on support flag is off, and at step AKS537 it is determined that the count value of the number-of-times display counter is not "0". If so, the number-of-times notification display process table is selected in step AKS538. 294-35, the number display counter is set to 02AD[H], which is the initial count value, at step AKS521 based on the end of the jackpot at step AKS518, for example, in step AKS506. , the count value is decremented by 1 and updated in step AKS509. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game state in which it is advantageous, in the period until the number of executions of the special game reaches the specific number, as in the control example AKF01, the notification mode in which the remaining number of times up to the specific number can be easily recognized. The number of times display as a suggestive display can be performed in the number of times display section 5Z.

In the number-of-times suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, if it is determined in step AKS533 that the power-on support flag is ON, a process table for displaying unknown number of times is selected in step AKS534. The power-on corresponding flag is set and turned on by step AKS502 when step AKS501 determines that the power is turned on in the production side counter updating process shown in FIG. 294-35. After that, based on the end of the jackpot at step AKS518, the flag corresponding to power-on is cleared at step AKS520 and turned off. As a result, after the power is turned on, as in control example AKF02, a suggestive display of a special mode that is different from the mode after the end of the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state, and that makes it difficult to recognize the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times. The number of times can be displayed in the number of times display section 5Z.

FIG. 294-38 shows an execution example of a suggestive effect, a countdown effect, and a rush effect. In the number-of-times suggestion control process shown in FIG. AKS 536 selects a process table for suggestive effects. The process table for displaying the unknown number of times corresponds to the display of the number of times, which is a suggestive display of a special mode in which it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times. The execution determination value in step AKS535 may be, for example, a multiple of "100". As a result, when the suggestive display is in the special mode, the suggestive effect suggesting the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times can be executed. In the effect side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, based on the reception of the first specific number of times designation command in step AKS503, the specific number of times command data acquired in step AKS504 is set in the suggestive effect counter in step AKS505. After that, the count value can be updated at the end of the variable display by step AKS515 or the like. Thereby, the suggestive effect is executed based on the first specific number of times designation command. FIG. 294-38(A) is an execution example AKG01 of suggestive effect corresponding to when the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is "200". Also, FIG. 294-38(B) is an execution example AKG02 of suggestive effect corresponding to the number of times remaining until the specified number of times is "100". In these cases, the number of times display unit 5Z displays the number of times that suggests a special mode in which the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is difficult to specify, similarly to the control example AKF02 shown in FIG. 294-37(B). will be In this way, along with the display of the number of times of the special mode, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 provided with the state of (1) can be enhanced.

In the number-of-times suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, when the count value of the suggestion effect counter is within the countdown range in step AKS539, the countdown effect process table is selected in step AKS540. As for the countdown effect process table, it is sufficient that a plurality of types of effect control tables are prepared so as to notify the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times corresponding to the count value of the suggestive effect counter. At step AKS540, a countdown effect process table corresponding to the count value of the suggestion effect counter may be selected. In the effect side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, based on the reception of the second specified number of times command in step AKS510, the specific number of times command data acquired in step AKS511 is changed to 7F [H] in step AKS512. It is determined whether or not to indicate The countdown range may be, for example, a range from "0" to "10" as long as the specified number of times command data acquired from the second specified number of times command is included in a range other than 7F[H]. In this case, the suggestion effect counter is updated by the specified number of times command data acquired from the second specified number of times command in step AKS513. Therefore, the countdown effect, which is the predetermined effect, is controlled to be executable based on the transmission of the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, as the second control data of the second specific number designation command. FIG. 294-38(C) is an execution example AKG03 of the countdown effect corresponding to when the count value of the suggestive effect counter is "10". FIG. 294-38(D) is an execution example AKG04 of the countdown effect corresponding to when the count value of the suggestive effect counter is "9". FIG. 294-38(E) is an execution example AKG05 of the countdown effect corresponding to when the count value of the suggestive effect counter is "1". FIG. 294-38(F) is an execution example AKG06 of the countdown effect corresponding to when the count value of the suggestive effect counter is "0". In this way, based on the transmission of the count value of the specific number of times counter as numerical information by the second specific number of times designation command, the countdown effect as the predetermined effect can be executed, so that the amusement of the game can be improved by an appropriate effect. As a result, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time saving state can be enhanced.

In the number of times display control process shown in FIG. 294-36, when the arrival time effect flag is ON in step AKS541, the process table for time saving rush effect is selected in step AKS542. The time-saving rush effect process table is used to control the execution of the time-saving rush effect during the period in which the finalized effect symbol, which is the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol, is stopped and displayed. The arrival time effect flag is set and turned on when the count value of the suggestive effect counter becomes "0" by step AKS517 of the effect side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. Since the suggestive presentation counter counts the number of times remaining until the specified number of times, when the count value becomes '0', it is controlled to a time saving state based on the execution of the special figure game of the specified number of times. In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, based on the fact that the count value of the specific number counter is the reached determination value in step AKS254, the specific stop corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3 in step AKS255 Time is set. A time-saving rush effect as a notification effect when reaching a specific number of times is controlled to be executable based on a specific stop time corresponding to the setting SZA3 when symbols are stopped. FIG. 294-38(G) is an execution example AKG07 at the start of the time saving rush performance. FIG. 294-38(H) is an execution example AKG08 after starting the time saving rush performance.

In addition to such a time-saving rush performance, or instead of the time-saving rush performance, during execution of a special game that has reached a specific number of times, a notification performance that notifies that it is controlled to a time-saving state based on a specific command may be controllable. The specific command is an effect control command that can be specified to control the time saving state when the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, reaches "0" as a specific value. 2 specific times command can be used. Based on the background color designation command or the second specific number of times designation command, when it is decided to execute the notification effect at the start of the special game, for example, by displaying the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, To control so as to be able to execute a notification performance for notifying that it is controlled to a time-saving state. As a specific example, the image display for displaying the number of times as a suggestive display in the number-of-times display section 5Z may be controlled to blink. Alternatively, a dedicated specific number counter display provided separately from the image display device 5 may be controlled so that the display indicating the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times blinks. By such notification performance, it is possible to easily recognize that control to the time-saving state is performed based on the number of executions of the special game, and to enhance the interest in the game and enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, it is possible to set a specific stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3 of step AKS255. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the recovery condition is not established in step S4 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. The game work area including the buffer is cleared, and the designated effect value is set to 00 [H] after the winning is completed. In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, it is determined that the count value of the specific number counter reaches at step AKS254 based on the fact that the effect specified value after the winning at step AKS253 is 00 [H]. It is possible to set the normal stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251 without performing numerical judgment as to whether or not it becomes a value. Therefore, after the initial setting at the time of power-on is performed, the normal stop time is set even in a special game in which the count value of the specific number counter should be the reaching determination value. Thus, the product of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time-saving state by preventing the fairness of the game from being impaired based on the history of the game after the initial setting at power-on is performed. can enhance sexuality.

While the normal stop time can be set by performing such an initial setting at the time of power-on, if the initial setting at the time of power-on is not performed, the specific stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3 Based on this, it may be controlled so as to be able to execute a time-saving rush effect as a notification effect for notifying that the time-saving state will be controlled when a specific number of times is reached. Symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a setting performed by step AKS255 when the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254 of the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. . When the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reach determination value, a time saving condition based on the number of executions of the special game is established, and the game state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state. At this time, corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3, as the stop time after the special figure fluctuation time has passed, it is set to a specific stop time different from the normal stop time. Based on the specific stop time, a notification effect, such as a time-saving rush effect, may be executed to notify that control is to be performed in a time-saving state.

Further, while the normal stop time can be set by performing the initial setting at the time of power-on, in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. After that, when the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254, the symbol stop setting SZA3 may be overwritten in step AKS255. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280 in the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21. By being executed, the first time-saving end determination process is executed to determine whether the first condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second time-saving end determination It may be possible not to determine whether or not the second condition is satisfied by the process.

The first specific number of times designation command and the second specific number of times designation command are not limited to those that can designate the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times in response to the time saving condition controlled in the time saving state, and the time saving state ends. It may be possible to specify the remaining number of times up to the number of times of time saving in correspondence with the termination condition. For example, the specific number of times command data in the first specific number of times designation command and the second specific number of times designation command may be set based on the count value of the first time saving counter.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps AKS273 and AKS274 of the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. The game state can be shifted to the normal state and the time saving state by steps AKS324 and AKS325 of the processing, step AKS188 of the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 294-31, and the like. In addition, the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, can be updated by step AKS272 of the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21. Then, by executing the data setting process of step AKS274 based on the fact that the count value of the specific number counter is the reach determination value in step AKS272, it is possible to shift the game state based on the numerical information. Then, when the power is turned on, by executing the specific number of times command transmission process shown in FIG. 294-8, the first specific number of times designation command, which is the first command for the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times, is transmitted. On the other hand, for example, by executing the data set process in step AKS306 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. is transmitted as a second command different from the first command. The first specific number of times designation command is a total of 6 bytes from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, as shown in FIG. 294-9. The second specified number of times command is a 2-byte effect control command, as shown in FIG. 294-12(C). Thus, the first specified number of times command has a larger number of bytes than the second specified number of times command. The first specific number of times designation command uses the first transmission data of the first set AKC01, the second transmission data of the second set AKC02, and the third transmission data of the third set AKC03. The remaining number of times can be specified for each of the first number of times less than [H] and the second number of times greater than the first number of times, for example, 7F[H] or more. On the other hand, the second specified number of times notification command can set 00 [H] to 7F [H] according to the specified number of times command data. While identifiable, the remaining number of times cannot be identified when the second number of times is greater than the first number of times. As a result, when the power is turned on, a first specified number of times designation command capable of accurately specifying the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times is transmitted, and a second specified number of times designation command with a small number of bytes corresponding to the execution of the variable display is transmitted. Therefore, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be enhanced by reducing the processing load corresponding to the execution of the variable display while allowing accurate information to be transmitted when the power is turned on.

(Problem Solving Means and Effect of Characteristic Portion 22AK)
A game machine which performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player, and which is a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and an effect capable of controlling an effect based on a command from the game control means. a control means, wherein the game control means includes state control means capable of shifting the game state between a normal state and a special state; update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display; a transmission means capable of transmitting a command, the state control means being capable of transitioning the game state based on the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, the transmission means comprising: When power is turned on, a first command is transmitted regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times, a second command different from the first command is transmitted regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times in response to the execution of the variable display, and the first command is transmitted. has a larger number of bytes than the second command, and the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times is the first number, and the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times is the second number of times greater than the first number of times. , the remaining number of times can be specified, and the second command can specify the remaining number of times when the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times is the first number of times, while the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times is the first number of times. If the number of times is two, the remaining number of times cannot be specified. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS325, and AKS188, for example. Numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific counter. The update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The transmitting means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the specific number of times command transmission process and the command set process. The specific value may be, for example, "0". Transmitting the first command when the power is turned on may be, for example, execution of a command transmission process for a specific number of times. Transmission of the second command corresponding to execution of variable display may be execution of command set processing in step AKS308, for example. The number of bytes larger than the second command is, for example, for the second specific number of times designation command 94XX[H] composed of two bytes, the first specific number of times designation command 91XX[H] from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03. A total of 6 bytes or the like may be sufficient. The first number of times may be, for example, less than 7F[H]. The second number of times may be, for example, 7F[H] or more.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load for sending commands and the program capacity, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[1] The first command is composed of a predetermined number of command data, which is a combination of 1-byte first control data indicating the command type and 1-byte second control data relating to numerical information updated by the updating means. The game control means may create the first command by executing the specific command process. Here, the first control data may be command type data, for example. The second control data may be, for example, the first transmission data to the third transmission data. The predetermined number may be, for example, a total of three sets from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03. The specific command process may be, for example, a command transmission process for a specific number of times.
With such a configuration, it is possible to transmit an accurate command relating to numerical information when the power is turned on, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[2] The transmission means transmits a command based on the command data stored in the data storage area, and the game control means creates the command data constituting the first command by executing the specific command process. It may be stored in the data storage area in the specific command process. Here, the data storage means may be, for example, a serial communication data register. Storing in the data storage area in the specific command processing may be, for example, steps AKS063, AKS064, AKS066, AKS067, AKS070, and AKS071.
With such a configuration, it is possible to stably transmit commands and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[3] Equipped with storage means capable of storing control information, the game control means can execute a determination process for determining whether or not the information stored in the storage means is normal, and the determination result by the determination process is normal. In some cases, specific command processing is executed based on the stored numerical information, and if the determination result of the determination processing is not normal, the initial setting processing of the storage means is performed to set the numerical information corresponding to the initial value. specific command processing may be executed based on numerical information corresponding to the initial value. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102 or the like. The determination process may be, for example, the RWM check process of step S3 and the part of step S4. Execution of the specific command process based on the stored numerical information may be performed by executing the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13 if Yes in step S4. Execution of the specific command process based on the numerical information corresponding to the initial value may be performed by executing the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13 in the case of No in step S4.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the marketability of the game machine by transmitting commands related to numerical information regardless of whether the stored information is normal or not.

[4] The game control means does not have to execute other processes while executing the specific command process. For example, it may be a portion that executes the command transmission process for a specific number of times in step S13 after step S1.
With such a configuration, it is possible to transmit an accurate command relating to numerical information, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[5] Equipped with storage means capable of storing control information, the game control means can execute determination processing for determining whether or not the information stored in the storage means is normal, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A specific command process may sometimes be executed, and control may be performed so that a command corresponding to the determination result of the determination process can be transmitted before the predetermined period elapses. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102 or the like. The determination process may be, for example, the RWM check process of step S3 and the part of step S4. When a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on, for example, when the wait process of step S12 is executed, it may be performed. The control to enable transmission of the command corresponding to the determination result may be performed, for example, by executing the command setting process in step S10 after steps S6 and S9.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably transmit the command and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[6] The second command is composed of a set of command data in which a 1-byte first control data indicating the command type and a 1-byte second control data related to the numerical information updated by the updating means are combined, The game control means may create the second control data in the updating process of updating the numerical information by the updating means. Here, the first control data may be command type data, for example. The second control data may be specified number of times command data, for example. The update process may be, for example, the counter subtraction process of step AKS125.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the capacity of the second command from increasing, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[7] The game control means can execute an update process when the variable display time has elapsed, and compares the numerical information updated by the update means by executing the update process with the determination information indicating the specific determination value, When the numerical information is equal to or greater than the specific judgment value, the judgment information is stored in the command information storage area as the second control data of the second command, and when the numerical information is less than the specific judgment value, the second control data of the second command is stored. Numerical information updated by the updating means may be stored in the command information storage area as the control data. Here, when the variable display time has passed, for example, it is sufficient if the counter subtraction process is executed in step AKS125 of the special symbol variation process. The specific determination value may be, for example, an upper limit determination value corresponding to the upper limit value of the command for a specific number of times. Storing the determination information in the command information storage area may be performed, for example, at step AKS275. Storing the numerical information in the command information storage area may be performed, for example, at step AKS277.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the second command and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[8] Provided with pending storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display that has not yet started as pending storage information, and the game control means performs storage information shift processing when pending storage information is stored in the pending storage means. may be executed, and in the storage information shift process, the information stored in the command information storage area may be used to control the transmission of the second command. Here, the reserved storage means may be, for example, a special symbol buffer. The stored information shift process may be, for example, the special symbol buffer shift process of step AKS202. For example, steps AKS305 and AKS306 may be controlled to enable transmission of the second command.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately transmit the second command and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[9] Provided with pending storage means capable of storing information relating to variable display that has not yet started as pending storage information, the game control means suspending storage for determining whether pending storage information is stored in the pending storage means The determination process can be executed, and when it is determined in the pending storage determination process that the pending storage information is not stored, the information stored in the command information storage area is used to control so that the second command can be transmitted. good too. Here, the reserved storage means may be, for example, a special symbol buffer. The pending storage determination process may be, for example, a special symbol normal process including step AKS101. For example, steps AKS111 and AKS112 may be performed to control so that the second command can be transmitted when it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored.
With such a configuration, it is possible to stably transmit the second command and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[10] The game control means, when it is determined in the pending storage determination process that the pending storage information is not stored, a second command using the information stored in the command information storage area and a command related to the non-game state. It may be controlled to be transmittable. For example, the standby command transmission table AKT15 may be specified in step AKS111, and the command set process in step AKS112 may be executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately transmit commands and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[11] Equipped with storage means capable of storing control information, the game control means can execute a determination process for determining whether or not the information stored in the storage means is normal when the power is turned on, and determination by the determination process When the result is normal, control is possible using the stored numerical information, and when the determination result by the determination process is not normal, the initial setting process of the storage means performs the numerical information corresponding to the initial value. is set, and can be controlled using numerical information corresponding to the initial value. is a different mode, suggestive display control means for controlling to enable suggestive display in a special mode in which the remaining number of times up to a specific number is difficult to recognize; Suggestive effect control means for controlling to be able to execute a suggestive effect suggesting , and the suggestive effect control means may execute the suggestive effect based on the first command. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102 or the like. The determination process may be, for example, the RWM check process of step S3 and the part of step S4. It is sufficient if the data setting using the backup time setting table designated in step S6 does not include the initial value setting of the specific counter. The fact that control is possible using numerical information corresponding to the initial value is that the data setting using the setting table at the time of initialization specified in step S9 includes the initial value setting of the specific counter. . The suggestive display may be, for example, the display in the number display section 5Z. The special mode may be, for example, an unknown number of times mode. The suggestive effect may be, for example, the remaining number suggestive effect. The suggestive effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS535 and AKS536.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by the suggestive display and the suggestive effect, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[12] The effect control means controls to be able to execute a predetermined effect of notifying the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times based on the numerical information updated by the update means being transmitted as the second control data of the second command. Predetermined effect control means may be included. Here, the predetermined effect may be, for example, a countdown effect. The predetermined effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS539 and AKS540.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by means of the predetermined effect, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[13] When the first command is transmitted, the effect control means stores the remaining number of times up to the specified number of times based on the first command in the number storage area, and when the second command is transmitted, the number of times remaining is stored in the number storage area. When the determination information is transmitted as the second control data of the second command, the contents stored in the count storage area are not changed based on the reception result of the second command, and are updated as the second control data of the second command by the updating means. When updated numerical information is transmitted, the contents stored in the number storage area may be changed based on the reception result of the second command. Here, the number storage area may be, for example, a suggestive effect counter or the like. Changing the contents stored in the count storage area may be performed, for example, in steps AKS512 and AKS513.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately store the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[14] A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, comprising game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means capable of controlling effects, The game control means includes state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the normal state, updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display, and stopping after the variable display time has elapsed. variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display to be stop-displayable over time; The variable display control means is controllable to a special state based on the termination of the advantageous state, and the variable display control means is capable of reducing the stop time when the numerical information updated by the updating means does not become a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times. When the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, the specific stop time is set as the stop time, and the effect control means, based on the specific stop time, A notification effect control means may be included for controlling so as to be able to execute a notification effect for notifying that the game is controlled to the special state. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. Numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific counter. The update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The specific value may be, for example, "0". The fact that the special state can be controlled based on the end of the advantageous state may be, for example, a portion of step AKS188. The normal stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D [H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA1. The specific stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E [H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving rush effect. The notification effect control means may be the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by the notification effect while preventing an increase in capacity, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[15] A gaming machine that performs variable display and is capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, wherein the game control means controls the display after the variable display time elapses. The game control means includes variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display so that it can be displayed stopped during the stop time, and the game control means performs normal setting for setting the normal stop time as the stop time in the setting process for setting the stop time. , After the normal setting, perform a specific judgment on a specific condition, and if the judgment result of the specific judgment is that the specific condition is satisfied, an overwrite setting that sets the specific stop time corresponding to the specific condition as the stop time and perform control based on the specific stop time set by the overwrite setting, and when it is determined that the specific condition is not met as a result of the specific decision, based on the normal stop time set by the normal setting may be controlled. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The normal stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D [H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA1. The normal setting may be, for example, the part of step AKS251. The specific condition may be, for example, that the effect specified value after the winning is 00 [H]. The specific determination may be, for example, the part of step AKS253. The specific stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E [H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. The overwrite setting may be, for example, the portion of step AKS255.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in program capacity and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[16] A gaming machine comprising first variable display means for performing a first variable display and second variable display means for performing a second variable display, and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state for a player, the game machine comprising: A game control means capable of controlling progress is provided, and the game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and a stop time after the variable display time has passed. and variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display so that the display result can be stopped, and the state control means controls at least the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display during the special state to be the first number. and the second condition that the number of times of the second variable display during the special state becomes the second number of times, the special state is terminated, and the game control means In the setting process for setting the stop time, a first condition determination is performed to determine whether or not the first condition is satisfied, and if the first condition is satisfied, the stop time is set corresponding to the satisfaction of the first condition. , a variable display determination is performed as to whether or not the second variable display is executed, and if the second variable display is performed, a second condition determination is performed as to whether or not the second condition is satisfied, and the second condition is If the second condition is satisfied, the stop time is set according to the satisfaction of the second condition, and if the first condition determination determines that the first condition is satisfied, the variable display determination and the second condition determination are not performed. good. Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". The setting of the stop time corresponding to the establishment of the first condition may be, for example, a portion of performing the design stop time setting SZA2 at step AKS260 in the case of Yes at step AKS257. The variable display determination may be, for example, step AKS258. The setting of the stop time corresponding to the establishment of the second condition may be performed, for example, in the case of Yes at step AKS259, at step AKS260 at symbol stop time setting SZA2.
With such a configuration, the processing load for controlling the special state can be reduced, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

[17] A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player, comprising game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and effect control means capable of controlling effects, The game control means includes state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the normal state, variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display to be stop-displayable during the stop time after the variable display time has elapsed, and Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and counting means capable of setting count information corresponding to the end of the advantageous state, wherein the effect control means is set by the counting means. The state control means controls to execute variable display effects in different effects depending on whether the count information is the first specified value or the second specified value, and the state control means specifies the numerical information updated by the updating means. It is possible to control to a special state based on a specific value corresponding to the number of times, and to control to a special state based on the end of the advantageous state. If it is different from the initial set value after input, numerical determination is performed as to whether or not the numerical information to be updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, and when it does not become a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, A normal stop time is set as the stop time, and when a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times is reached, a specific stop time is set as the stop time, and when the count information set by the counting means matches the initial set value, the numerical value A normal stop time is set as a stop time without judging, and the effect control means controls so as to be able to execute the notification effect of notifying that the special state is controlled based on the specific stop time. may contain. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. Numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific counter. The update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The count information may be, for example, an effect designation value after the end of winning. The counting means may be, for example, an effect designating buffer after the end of winning. The first designated value may be, for example, 00[H]. The second specified value may be, for example, a value other than 00[H]. The variable display effect of different effect modes may be, for example, different determinable patterns corresponding to the specified value for selecting the effect state. The specific value may be, for example, "0". The fact that the special state can be controlled based on the end of the advantageous state may be, for example, a portion of step AKS188. The initial set value may be, for example, 00 [H]. Numerical determination may be performed, for example, at step AKS254. The normal stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D [H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA1. The specific stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E [H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. If the count information matches the initial set value, for example, if Yes in step AKS253, it is acceptable. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving rush effect. The notification effect control means may be the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by the notification effect while maintaining the fairness of the game, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[18] A gaming machine comprising first variable display means for performing a first variable display and second variable display means for performing a second variable display, and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state for a player, the game machine comprising: A game control means capable of controlling progress is provided, the game control means includes state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and the state control means is at least during the special state. Either a first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display in the special state is the first number of times, or a second condition in which the number of times of the second variable display in the special state is the second number of times The special state is ended based on the establishment of the condition, the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the first condition and a second counting means corresponding to the second condition, and the first counting performing count value update processing for updating the count value by the means, performing processing regarding termination of the special state when the first condition is satisfied, performing count value update processing for updating the count value by the second counting means; When the two conditions are satisfied, a process for ending the special state is performed, a count value updating process is performed to update the count value by the first counting means, and when the first condition is satisfied, the count value by the second counting means. does not have to be updated. Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". The 1st counting means should just be a 1st time saving counter etc., for example. The second counting means may be, for example, a second time saving counter. The count value update process may be, for example, a time-saving subtraction process. If the first condition is satisfied, for example, the time saving subtraction process of step AKS280 may be Yes in step AKS323.
With such a configuration, the processing load for controlling the special state can be reduced, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

[19] A gaming machine that performs variable display and is controllable to an advantageous state for a player, wherein game control means is capable of controlling the progress of a game, and effects are controlled based on commands from the game control means. The game control means includes state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the normal state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. , transmission means capable of transmitting a command according to the progress of the game, and determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state based on the executed variable display in the numerical value updating process capable of updating the numerical information by the updating means. An advantageous decision is made, and when the decision result of the advantageous decision is a decision to control to an advantageous state, the numerical information is not updated by the updating means, and the decision result of the advantageous decision is a decision to not control to the advantageous state. In a certain case, the updating means updates the numerical information, and based on the fact that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, the transmission means performs processing related to the control of the special state. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, a specific command that can be specified to control to a special state is transmitted, and the effect control means is controlled to a special state based on the specific command. It may also include a notification effect control means for controlling the notification effect of notifying that the player will be able to execute the notification effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. Numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific counter. The update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The transmission means may be the CPU 103 or the like that executes command set processing. Numeric value update processing may be, for example, counter subtraction processing. Advantageous determination may be performed, for example, at step AKS271. If the determination is that the control is to be in an advantageous state, for example, the determination at step AKS271 may be Yes. If it is determined that control is not to be performed in an advantageous state, for example, the determination in step AKS271 may be No. For example, steps AKS273 and AKS274 may be performed for the special state control. The specific command may be, for example, a special symbol state designation command, a second specific number of times designation command, or the like. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving rush effect. The notification effect control means may be the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542, for example.
With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game through appropriate execution of the notification effect, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[20] A gaming machine comprising first variable display means for performing a first variable display and second variable display means for performing a second variable display, and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state for a player, the game machine comprising: A game control means capable of controlling progress is provided, the game control means includes state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and the state control means is at least during the special state. Either a first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display in the special state is the first number of times, or a second condition in which the number of times of the second variable display in the special state is the second number of times The special state is ended based on the establishment of the condition, the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the first condition and a second counting means corresponding to the second condition, and the first counting performing count value update processing for updating the count value by the means, performing processing regarding termination of the special state when the first condition is satisfied, performing count value update processing for updating the count value by the second counting means; When the second condition is satisfied, the processing for ending the special state is performed. In either case, whether the first condition is satisfied or the second condition is satisfied, the processing regarding the end of the special state includes: You may initialize the count value by a 1st counting means and a 2nd counting means. Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The game control means may be the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, for example. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". The 1st counting means should just be a 1st time saving counter etc., for example. The second counting means may be, for example, a second time saving counter. The count value update process may be, for example, a time-saving subtraction process. For example, steps AKS324, AKS327, etc. may be performed for the processing related to the termination of the special state.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control the special state and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

[21] A gaming machine that performs variable display and is capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, wherein the state control means is capable of being controlled to a special state different from the normal state, and the variable display is executed. and pattern selection means capable of selecting a variable display pattern using the pattern selection data. controllable to a first special state, controllable to a second special state among the special states based on the fact that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and the pattern selecting means is , in the normal state after the end of the first special state, the variable display pattern is selected using the special pattern selection data, and in the normal state after the end of the second special state, the initial setting after power-on The variable display patterns are selected using the normal pattern selection data, and the variable display patterns selectable using the normal pattern selection data must not include the variable display patterns selectable using the special pattern selection data. good too. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. Numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific counter. The update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The pattern selection data may be, for example, a big hit fluctuation pattern type selection table, a small hit fluctuation pattern type selection table, a losing fluctuation pattern type selection table, a fluctuation pattern determination table, or the like. The pattern selection means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the variation pattern setting process of step AKS108. The data for special pattern selection may be, for example, a variation pattern type selection table at the time of jackpot corresponding to 01 [H] and 02 [H], a variation pattern determination table, or the like. The data for normal pattern selection may be, for example, a variation pattern type selection table at the time of jackpot corresponding to 00 [H], a variation pattern determination table, or the like. The variable display patterns that can be selected using the special pattern selection data may be the variable patterns PB57 and PB68 that are determinable patterns when the effect state selection designation values are 01 [H] and 02 [H], for example. .
With such a configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate variable display pattern after the end of the special state, thereby enhancing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[22] A gaming machine that performs variable display and is capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, wherein the state control means is capable of being controlled to a special state different from the normal state, and the variable display is executed. and an advantageous control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state, wherein the advantageous control means, when the display result of the variable display is the first advantageous result, indicates one of the advantageous states. It is controllable to the first advantageous state, and when the display result of the variable display is the second advantageous result, the control is possible to the second advantageous state among the advantageous states, and the state control means is configured to control the first advantageous state to the second advantageous state. Controllable to a first special state of the special states when ending, and controllable to a second special state of the special states when the second advantageous state ends, updated by the updating means. Based on the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, control is possible to a third special state among the special states, and the first advantageous state ends and the second advantageous state ends. In either case, the first process and the second process are performed, and when the first advantageous state ends, the first process enables the setting of the first special state, and the second advantageous state ends. , the second special state can be set by the first processing, and the update means updates by the second processing when the first advantageous state ends and when the second advantageous state ends, respectively. An initial value of numerical information may be set. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188, for example. Numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific counter. The update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The advantageous control means may be the CPU 103 or the like that executes, for example, pre-opening of the big winning opening, processing during opening of the big winning opening, post-opening of the big winning opening, and big win ending process. The first advantageous result may be, for example, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 01 [H] and 02 [H]. The first advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is 03 [H]. The second advantageous result may be, for example, when the jackpot symbol designation values are 00 [H], 05 [H], 06 [H]. The second advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state in which the maximum number of openings of the big winning opening is 0A[H]. The first special state is, for example, the initial value of the first time saving counter is 0006 [H] corresponding to the state setting type SX1 at the end of the jackpot, and the initial value of the second time saving counter is 0001 [H]. Just do it. The second special state may be, for example, a time-saving state in which the initial value of the first time-saving counter is 02AD[H] corresponding to the state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6 at the time of the jackpot. The first process may be, for example, step AKS188. The second processing may be, for example, the data set processing of step AKS190.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in program capacity and enhance the marketability of the gaming machine.

1 pachinko game machine 2 game board 3 game machine frame 5 image display device 5C, 5L, 5R decoration pattern display area 6A winning ball device 6B variable winning ball device 8L, 8R speaker 9 game effect lamp , 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 effect control board, 13 voice control board, 15 relay board, 9020 special figure LED board, 21 gate switch, 22A first start opening switch, 22B second start opening switch, 23 count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 9050 fourth symbol unit, 81, 82, 83 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game;
and a production control means capable of controlling production,
The game control means is
a state control means capable of controlling a special state different from the normal state;
variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display to be stop-displayable during the stop time after the variable display time has elapsed;
updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display;
counting means capable of setting counting information corresponding to the termination of the advantageous state;
The effect control means controls so as to be able to execute a variable display effect in the effect mode corresponding to the count information,
The count information is initialized to an initial set value,
The state control means is
being controllable to the special state based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times;
controllable to the special state based on termination of the advantageous state;
The variable display control means is
When the count information is different from the initial set value, a numerical determination is made as to whether or not the numerical information is the specific value, and when it is determined that the numerical information is not the specific value, the stop time is Set normal stop time,
setting a specific stop time as a stop time when the count information is different from the initial setting value and determined to be the specific value by the numerical value determination;
setting the normal stop time as a stop time without performing the numerical determination when the count information is an initial set value;
The effect control means includes a notification effect control means that controls to be able to execute a notification effect that notifies that the special state is controlled in the specific stop time,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images